JP2019037271A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of keeping a player interested in a game.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 1 has a start pocket capable of receiving a game ball hit into a game area 5a. Upon the game ball entering the start pocket, determination processing is performed regarding winning. Thereafter, variable display depending on a result of the determination processing is started; and, if a winning pattern is displayed in the variable display, a winning game is executed. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 can generate a performance reception period for an operation button as an interval in which processing identification information is acquired in each unit time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 60

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a "slot machine").

  Conventionally, as seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game is performed in which a large amount of awards can be obtained when a winning is made.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening. Then, when there is a winning of the game ball to the starting opening, a determination process is performed in which a hit or the like is determined. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on a predetermined display for a predetermined fluctuation time. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode in which it is shown that the player wins the win, and the opening and closing member of the big winning opening is operated to increase the number of players. Provide a special game that can be won the award of. Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to execute the effect of operating the feature for presentation at a specific timing based on the result of the determination process. Through such effects, it is intended to improve the effect until the special game is performed.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-187791

  By the way, in such a conventional gaming machine, a problem may occur in the rendering use product during the course of the game, and it is conceivable that the operation of the target production combination is stopped when such a failure occurs. . However, simply stopping the effect for presentation effects deprives the player of interest, and there is a concern that the game interest will decline.

  This invention is made in view of such a situation, and it aims at providing a game machine which can control a fall of game interest.

The present invention
Symbol variation means for performing symbol variation based on the result of determination;
When a predetermined mode appears in the symbol variation, a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to the player,
Movable ornaments that can be staged,
Rendering pattern execution means for executing a rendering pattern according to the result of the determination within a period in which the symbol variation is performed;
And a restoration execution means capable of performing a restoration operation on a movable decoration not in the normal state when a restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation has arrived.
The restoration operation is common regardless of the setting value of the gaming machine manager regarding the provision probability of the benefit,
A plurality of the movable decorative bodies are provided, and each is combined to form a single decoration,
While the movable decorative body is performing the restoration operation, the game can be progressed,
When the movable decorative body performs rendering operation, the possibility of giving a privilege is increased compared to the case where the movable decorative body does not perform rendering operation,
The movable effect is not only performed according to the symbol variation, but also may be performed at a predetermined time not conforming to the symbol variation.

  In the above-described configuration, even if a defect occurs in the effect for use in the process of the game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment without depriving the player of interest. "Variation of symbols" means that symbols are displayed in a variable manner on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, a dot display device, a segment display device, or a symbol attached to the outer periphery of a drum of a drum type device is a symbol by rotation of a drum. For example, the variable display is applicable.

  According to the present invention, a decrease in game interest can be suppressed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side without the left frame member, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.34 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of a production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the rendering operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. A portion of the operation button is cut out and a portion that is about to be hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown by the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending . (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line in Fig.51 (a). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the NN line | wire in Fig.51 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line | wire in Fig.51 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 56 taken along the line PP. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit in an enlarged manner from the front with the gaming board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, as viewed from the front together with the front component, the substrate holder and the main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from the rear. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a delivery control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board which relays the electrical connection of the delivery control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram of a sound source built-in VDP periphery in a liquid crystal and sound control part. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control substrate and the peripheral control substrate. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payment control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 6 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a delivery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. FIG. 89 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 89. FIG. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the delivery control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of main control side power-on of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection fault judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection check signal to the INIT terminal of transmitter IC for upper dish side liquid crystal. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special motorized prize control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st starting opening passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 2nd starting opening passage processing (step S5234). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol process processing (Step S5238). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol normal processing (Step S5280). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about big hit judging processing (Step S5305). (A) is a figure which shows a big hit determination table, (B), (C) is a figure which shows a symbol determination table. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (Step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol change processing (Step S5283). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop processing (Step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and a common motorized prize control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about gate part passage processing (step S5402). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about usual symbol normal processing (Step S5403). It is a figure showing judgment table T1 of a production pattern (variation production) referred to by the above-mentioned production symbol fluctuation start processing when it is in a normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving the sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the game state, the reproduction sound and the reproduction channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure showing relation with a game state, reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area | region for AUTO group channel control provided in peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a search process of the free channel at the time of performing sound control at the time of defining only one AUTO group in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of sound control by each channel system or those combination. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction | regeneration channel in sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a free channel search process in, when performing control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching the output of the sound (stopping the reproduction of the sound) when the channel is not available at the time of the output of the new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing to which a sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel where each sound effect is outputted. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority of the sound effect in the presentation example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of volume change of a sound effect in the first half change of this embodiment, (A) shows an output timing of a rendering effect, (B) shows a volume change of each rendering effect. It is a figure showing an example of screen composition of an effect in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction | regeneration channel in sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of volume change of a sound effect in the second half of a change of a modification of this embodiment, (A) shows an output timing of a rendering effect, (B) shows a volume change of each rendering effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by channel group which shows the priority of the volume (sound volume) control for every group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control processing which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by sound effects which shows volume (sound volume) control for every total reproduction | regeneration time (output time) of the sound in this embodiment. It is the first half of a flow chart showing the procedure of volume control processing that performs sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect in the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a second half of the flowchart showing the procedure of volume control processing of performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect in the present embodiment. FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a notification content, a notification mode, and a notification time, and a condition (cancellation condition) under which the notification is ended, according to the type of the notification sound illustrated in FIG. 155. (A) shows an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced Is a figure. (B) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced FIG. (C) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the example about a process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alarm | sound belonging to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled, when the notification sound which belongs to 1st alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated It is. (B) is a diagram showing an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced It is. (C) is a figure showing an example of processing when output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced It is. (D) is a figure which shows the example about a process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alarm | sound belonging to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled, while the alarm | sound of 1 which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is reproduced. It is. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a figure which illustrates separately about the information state of the said pachinko machine 1 about the contents of the information progress under production processing. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process concerning the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction | limiting content defined separately of a channel restriction | limiting level. It is a figure which shows the other example about the restriction | limiting content defined separately of a channel restriction | limiting level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when channel special release processing is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when operation sound output processing under control is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when processing related to channel assignment cancellation operation is performed. Examples of the assignment status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the jackpot determination, and the state on the movable decorative body side It is a time chart which shows. The allocation situation of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in processing other than the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the big hit judgment, the movable state It is a time chart which shows those examples about the condition by the side of a decoration. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the assignment situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable ornaments at a specific timing in a period in which symbol variation is performed, and the condition on the movable ornaments side. . In the time chart showing an example of the assignment situation of each channel when the movable body abnormality occurs respectively in a plurality of movable ornaments at two different timings in the period in which the symbol variation is performed, and the condition on the movable ornaments side is there. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of control in order to realize automatic plural operation operation function (automatic consecutive hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example about the display content when operation is performed in multiple times. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of control in order to realize automatic plural operation operation function (automatic consecutive hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example of a presentation using the automatic several times operation function (automatic consecutive hit function). It is a time chart which shows the example of a presentation using the automatic several times operation function (automatic consecutive hit function). It is a front view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a right side view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a selection table of a production pattern in production mode which can perform a blowout production, (A) It shows an example of a selection table which chooses existence of a blowout preparation shift production according to classification of a fluctuation pattern. ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of scribble effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the extraction operation of the sword decoration body in case an aura member is provided in the sword part (sword part) itself, (A) a state of a sword, (B) a first state of a sword, (C) a second Indicates the cutting state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation | movement of an aura member. It is a state transition figure explaining the extraction operation of the sword decorative body in case an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) a knapsack state, (B) the 1st gutter state, and (C) the 2nd gutter state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation | movement of an aura member. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the state change timing of a sword ornament, and the operation effective period concerning operation means. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the state change timing of the sword decorative body of modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration body used for a false rendition effect. It is a figure which shows the example transition of production | presentation of the pseudo-series effect common to all the production | presentation patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of transition of production | presentation (fall production of specific decoration member SDY (a jade object)) after operation of the sword decoration body in the pseudo ream common to all production patterns (re-variation). FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a presentation transition used as the feature of a false revival sword LV1 presentation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of presentation pattern which can be selected based on a fluctuation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo-series effect, and shows a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo-series effect, showing a false sword LV1 weak effect pattern (false sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo-series effect, and shows a simulated resurrected sword LV1 production pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is effective during reach production by lottery with the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of the 1st suggestion pattern is performed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is effective during reach production by lottery with the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of the 1st suggestion pattern is performed. As in the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is effective during the reach effect, in the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Even though the second suggestion pattern has been performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the step decoration is temporarily activated without the sword decoration becoming effective, and the operation button becomes effective once, and then the sword decoration becomes effective. It is a figure showing about the indication production before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows a 1st presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 1st presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure explaining the example about the production when the "specific operation relation production" is set up as a production object of timer production. It is a time chart explaining an example of the contents of an effect for every type about production when a plurality of types (prompt effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a omen effect. It is a figure which shows those example of presentation about the contents of a production when a omen production which is not specific operation related production is performed, and the contents of a production when a omen effect as a specific operation related performance is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the contents of an effect when specific operation related rendition is performed as a omen effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which the button image BTG is displayed in the aspect (specific presentation aspect) to which the princess character was added. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode occurs on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode occurs on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation when displaying sword decoration image SYG in a special aspect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of presentation when the first precursor production is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the presentation by which the expectation degree is shown by the automatic presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the presentation by which the expectation degree is shown by the automatic presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the presentation by which the expectation degree is shown by the automatic presentation function. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic presentation process in the case of an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic presentation process in the case of an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic presentation process in the case of an automatic button presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it is in an automatic button production state. (A) is a time chart showing an example of rendering when operated in a single-shot operation mode when not being controlled to the automatic button rendering state, (b) is controlled to the automatic button rendering state It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect at the time of being operated in the mode of long press, when not being carried out. (A) is a time chart showing an example of effect when the automatic effect function functions in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state It is a time chart which shows the example of presentation when operation is started by the mode. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of reservations is in three effect states, symbol variation is started with "the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set", It is a time chart which shows the processing example when the operation (cancellation operation) for canceling the automatic button effect state or the operation (setting operation) for setting is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of reservations is in three effect states, the symbol in the second effect pattern (loss of variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears can not be set " It is a time chart which shows the processing example when operation (cancellation operation) and operation (setting operation) to cancel the automatic button effect state are performed within the execution period of the fluctuation when the fluctuation is started. is there. When not being controlled to the automatic button effect state, symbol variation is started with "the third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period (specific effective period) in which the instruction display to prompt the operation appears appears (specific effective period)" It is a time chart which shows an example of processing when operation for performing setting to an automatic button production state is performed inside. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | presentation when production is advanced by a 3rd production pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "specific processing in connection with presentation such as presentation setting". It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "specific processing in connection with presentation such as presentation setting". It is a time chart which shows an example about the production processing about a special production reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example concerning the effect development at the time of starting the production after operation, maintaining "the image which suggests the classification of operation object" as a display state. FIG. 285 is a view showing an example of an effect display that appears on the effect display device 1600 when an effect pattern whose effect is advanced in the aspect shown in FIG. 285 is executed. FIG. 285 is a view showing an example of an effect display that appears on the effect display device 1600 when an effect pattern whose effect is advanced in the aspect shown in FIG. 285 is executed. When specific receptionist production occurs, it is the figure which shows the example when displaying the bird's-eye view image as a moving image by a plurality of bird's-eye view images being displayed one by one. It is a figure showing an example about an effect which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which generation | occurrence | production of effect reception automatically arrives. It is a figure showing an example about an effect which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which generation | occurrence | production of effect reception automatically arrives. It is a figure showing an example about an effect which appears when operation by a player is not in time before the timing which generation | occurrence | production of effect reception automatically arrives. It is a figure which shows the example about the 1st receptionist production and the 2nd receptionist production from which the time from the period which the production | presentation acceptance is permitted generate | occur | produces until the production | presentation reception generate | occur | produces automatically differs. It is a figure which shows the example about the 1st receptionist production and the 2nd receptionist production from which the time from the period which the production | presentation acceptance is permitted generate | occur | produces until the production | presentation reception generate | occur | produces automatically differs. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in which it is suggested whether the reception presentation in which an "automatic presentation function" is activated generate | occur | produces by the aspect of a pro-end presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in which it is suggested whether the reception presentation in which an "automatic presentation function" is activated generate | occur | produces by the aspect of a pro-end presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in which it is suggested whether the reception presentation in which an "automatic presentation function" is activated generate | occur | produces by the aspect of a pro-end presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic presentation function" is activated only in reception presentation among pre-event production and reception presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic presentation function" is activated only in reception presentation among pre-event production and reception presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic presentation function" is activated only in reception presentation among pre-event production and reception presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the novel stage property which used the automatic stage function. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of a channel. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of a channel. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of a channel. It is a time chart which shows the processing content at the time of operating a movable ornament when specific conditions are satisfied. FIG. 304 is a time chart showing a modification to the example shown in FIG. 304. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when timing tm1 to which a new design variation is started in the situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state comes. It is a time chart which shows processing contents when timing tm11 when a special effect pattern is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart for explaining an aspect when a new restoration operation time (such as start timing and end timing of symbol variation) comes during execution of the restoration operation. It is a time chart for explaining an aspect when a new restoration operation time (such as start timing and end timing of symbol variation) comes during execution of the restoration operation. It is a time chart which shows the example about the processing until the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the original position. FIG. 33 is a time chart showing an example of restrictions on volume setting and luminance setting when a penalty is generated for an operation on the sword unit 5010. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the example about the light emission mode of the lamp for performance during the abnormal alerting | reporting period according to specific abnormality detection. It is a functional block diagram explaining the composition and the outline of the function for performing the effect control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module configuration in the periphery control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a basic concept of effect control in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining a structure until it acquires data required for presentation control of a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid-crystal drawing production | presentation of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of scheduler data of this embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a function of a sound module of this embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a function of a lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in presentation control of the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the lamp | ramp and sound in presentation control of the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of functions, such as a sound in the production control of the game machine of this embodiment, and a motor. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the advance presentation effect performed in a series of fluctuation displays from the fluctuation start of the special symbol in this embodiment to the stop, and shows an example of the scheduler used and scheduler data. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which performs lighting / blink control of the lamp | ramp in step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow and the left star character in star character thing preliminary announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls a right star character in star character preliminary announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls a middle star character in star character preliminary announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs motor control in the logo combination thing fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data performed at the time of the power activation of the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure for processing a command and scheduler data in the periphery control board of the game machine of this embodiment, and the relationship of these structures. It is a figure explaining the process of performing scheduler data at the time of the power activation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a notice production in a series of change displays from a change start of a special symbol in this embodiment to a stop, and (A) performs an effect performed by the time from a change start to an end, and the effect concerned FIG. 6 shows scheduler data for execution and a scheduler to be executed, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of a prison object in a prison notice of a drop of a prison object. It is a figure explaining the content of the button prisoner first-half falling notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which performs motor control in the button prisoner first-half falling notice which is the first half part of the prisoner falling warning of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the prisoner object second half falling notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the second half of the jail object falling notice of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the second half of the prisoner goods late fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the seminal goods fall second notice which is the latter half part of a prison object fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal presentation block data combination block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) according to the fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal presentation block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) according to fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation pattern classified sub production block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) which stores the combination of the sub production block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of production control of the first half change (normal change 12 seconds) of change pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub production block data control start process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub production block data control starting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub production block data control update process of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which performs advance notice production in the change display corresponding to change pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, and (A) is the timing which performs advance notice production, and the execution time of the notice effect concerned, (B) is It shows scheduler data driven by each scheduler in order to execute the advance presentation effect. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the fluctuation pattern classified liquid crystal rendering block data and the fluctuation pattern classified liquid crystal block data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image which produces the data file for drawing by the step-up production | presentation unit (step-up 1 production-4 production) by the imaging | video synthetic * motion preparation graphic tool of the liquid crystal display of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows the composition of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, (B) shows the composition of the step-up notice sub-effect block data Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the production switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the presentation SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation SW starting command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the step in which step-up notice production is performed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device in each step. . It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of a step-up notice using production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of step-up notice using production SW in this embodiment, (A) is liquid-crystal rendering scheduler data for executing step-up notice 1, (B) is step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect The drawing image which used scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining master SW defined on liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for every drawing division in this embodiment, and presentation SW corresponding to exchange data replaced with the master data concerned. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the production | presentation switch of this embodiment, and shows the evaluation procedure which sets production | presentation SW to ON especially. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined by the presentation SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the detail of composition of a production SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code which defines a production SW information table, (B) bit assignment of production SW control information, (C) These are figures which show an example of an effect SW group. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the presentation SW number corresponding to presentation SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the presentation SW flag of this embodiment, and a presentation SW information table, (A) shows a presentation SW flag, (B) shows a presentation SW information table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines presentation SW replacement table information and presentation SW replacement table included in the presentation SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is presentation SW replacement table information, (B) is presentation SW Indicates a replacement table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of a layer information table (for background) Indicates It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 1), (B) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice) Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid-crystal layer table and liquid-crystal production common block in this embodiment, (A) is a liquid-crystal layer table of step-up notice production, (B) shows the structure of a liquid-crystal production common block. . It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal presentation block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the button mini character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which define the liquid-crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character production in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines each common block of button mini character production in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which define the liquid crystal presentation block data for performing the button mini character presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division which can be judged within the callback function at the time of callback execution by production SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of the separate layer at the time of the advance production | presentation effect execution of this embodiment, and the drawing result of all the layers. It is a figure explaining an example of a common block which spans a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) is the display timing of a symbol display and a notice effect, (B) is a configuration of a liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block, (C) These show the structure of the liquid crystal advance presentation block by the common block over a several period. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image in a frame buffer by each writing the image written in each layer. It is a figure explaining the procedure which converts into a frame buffer after converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure of temporarily storing the display list command group in this embodiment in peripheral control RAM, and transferring to sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure which transfers display list command group in this embodiment to sound source built-in VDP, without memorize | storing in periphery control RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when carrying out state transition between a non-gaming state and a game execution state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when the expectation production in which a princess character is displayed large as a background image is performed during execution of a specific presentation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a help image is displayed in the state in which the expectation production | presentation shown in FIG. 378 is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when character image PG is displayed so that a display position may be changed by operation by a player. It is a time chart for explaining the example about processing at the time of generating a production restriction period in a non-gaming state. It is a time chart for explaining the example about processing at the time of an effect restriction period ending early. It is a time chart which shows the example about the processing concerning a special period (period for exclusive use of a store opening). It is a time chart which shows the example about processing when a game is started when it is set to the period for exclusive use for opening (special period). It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1st operation receptionist production. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2nd operation receptionist production. It is a time chart which shows the example about special operation receptionist production. It is a time chart which shows the aspect of the channel allocation of sound data in which a reception acceptance sound is included. It is a time chart which shows the aspect of the channel allocation of sound data in which a reception acceptance sound is included. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of an effect when low expectation control reception effects are performed by an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of an effect when high expectation control reception effects are performed by an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of an effect when high expectation control reception effects are performed by an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the modification when high expectation suppression receptionist effect is performed by the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example of presentation in which the 1st permission sound is outputted in a specific mode, at the time of generation | occurrence | production of "non-suppression operation reception production (here non-control / non-automatic reception presentation production)." It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect in a case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the effect according to the high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect in a case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the effect according to the high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect in a case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the effect according to the high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect (suppressing movement reception effect under suppression) which appears in "when the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as operation object" in suppression / automatic reception effect. It is a time chart which shows the contents of an effect which appear when fluctuation pattern 1 is chosen by fluctuation pattern judgment. It is a time chart which shows the contents of an effect which appear when fluctuation pattern 2 is chosen by fluctuation pattern judgment. It is a time chart which shows the contents of an effect which appear when fluctuation pattern 3 is chosen by fluctuation pattern judgment. "Inherent reception effect" is a time chart showing the contents of the effect that appears when the effect sound of "BGM playback" is generated in the "non-suppression mode". It is a time chart which shows as an example the process procedure when realizing various display effects using scenario data and a block as an example. It is a flowchart which shows the example about the process when there is no operation detection before and behind an effect reception period (effective period). FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m + 1” th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404; FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m−2” th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404; FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m−2” th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404; FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started from the “m-3” -th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404; Regarding the effect reception period (effective period) in the case where the timing at which the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state is performed in the frame is performed after the determination process for receiving the effect It is a flowchart which shows an example.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a door frame for a pachinko machine, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit.

  The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend laterally, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which connect the both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view The outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 on the left end side in front view of the curtain plate member 50 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a quadrangle in which the external shape of the front view extends vertically and which has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which penetrates back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 attached to the front lower right corner below the side 111 and operable by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is attached to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game unit being attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and the dish unit 320 which are attached to the lower front on the lower side and the dish unit 320 It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 and the presentation operation unit 400 capable of presenting participatory effects. A door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530 And a door frame top unit 570 attached to a front upper portion above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-like main frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 in a front view. 4, A lock unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped character attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player -Like payout unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 openably and closably And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  Dispensing unit 800 of body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of body frame base 600 and attached to the top of dispensing unit base 801 and extends upward and leftwardly. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; Gaming balls which are detachably mounted on the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950 and a gaming ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward An upper full-ball path unit 850 which causes the game balls to be released from either the normal outlet 850d or the full tank outlet 850e according to the storage state of the gaming balls in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320 and the payout unit A normal guiding path 861 and a full guiding path 861 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the gaming ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the penetrating ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receptacle 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The substrate unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 in a front view left side of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 and the lower portion for bass inside A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls are housed in the inside And a dispensing control board box 950, There.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from the ball launcher 680 are the top of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding the game, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the gaming ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the game ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launcher 680. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when the gaming balls driven into the gaming area 5a are received by the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 16 (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a disassembled (a) FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same surface. It is done.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10 and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60; An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is mounted on the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached at a position from the left to right center of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 And a flat right sliding member 82 mounted at a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 are engaged with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. , Equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. An upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached to the inside of the engagement notch 11. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is equipped with the mounting step part 12 which was depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a front view left end. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed in the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower lengths of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the lower frame member 20 are equal to those of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and rear width of the. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engagement notch 21 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 which is recessed rearward from the front surface of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded shape of a metal such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward between the position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and the vicinity of the rear end It has the convex recessed parts 31 and 41, and the protrusion parts 32 and 42 which bulged from the side surface on the opposite side of the recessed parts 31 and 41, and the inside is formed in the cavity. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the projecting portions 32 and 42, an upper left connecting member 85A, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. In addition, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end at the upper surface And a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left slide member 81 and the right slide member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although the illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. There is. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to insert the main frame 4 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
The lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is, as shown in FIG. 16, a band-plate shaped lock main body 66a having a predetermined width on the left and right and extending back and forth, and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, a resiliently deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending diagonally forward to the left after extending from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and an attachment hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member It extends forward so as to be in contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a main frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main frame upper upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view by rotating the lock main body 66a in the direction in which the front end moves to the left by the operation of the operation portion 66b. Can be completely through. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontally extending flat horizontal portion 71 and the horizontal portion 71. A flat plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 are vertically penetrated, and only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 of a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape whose left side is a base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached at a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 to the left. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the front side of the projecting portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is inserted into the main frame lower lower hinge member (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, whereby the outer frame lower upper hinge pin 70 is inserted. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 matches the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. Specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game frame 4 from rolling to the rear side, the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 from the front and rear both sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided separately in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are respectively fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the projecting portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. As a result, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. Ru.

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. Fig.17 (a) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts on the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 The lock main body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip end portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, A space in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the supporting mechanism of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a The right side face of the lock body 66 is in close proximity to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side face of the front end of the lock main body 66a and the right hanging In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are diagonally offset and opposed It is in the state.

  And, in this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin There is almost no load from 622 on the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. In addition, since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in a circular arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is turned to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 is smoothly turned. There is. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the slope of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and abuts on the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force A component force F1 (a normal direction of an arc of a front end face of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arc shaped front end face, a body frame upper hinge pin 622 and a bearing groove 63 The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment that the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 rotates in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right does not work, and the hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is one of the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal pivotally supported state or a state where the action force of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  Note that even if the shape of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the forward extension portion 62. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, and therefore the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper side of the main frame in the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63 Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 pivots around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is moved by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 is pivoted so that the front end of the arm moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can rotate at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upright wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. Thus, it is possible to prevent a fraud from being conducted through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the incorrect tool in contact with the upper wall portion 54 is bent upward, the end of the incorrect tool by the return portion 55 Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from invading the rear side of the main body frame 4, and cheating is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably blocked.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the gaming ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Because the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 Between the game ball and the game ball can be reduced.

  Therefore, by the game ball being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged or the main frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross section taken along the line C-C in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to the frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape with the outline of the front view extending vertically and the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 The handle unit 300, the dish unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the dish unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left of the 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side Door frame top attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  Although details will be described later, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back in a rectangular shape (square shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view are hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; A door frame 3 and a main body frame 4 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and a main body frame 4 and an outer frame 2 An open / close cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending gaming balls to the ball launcher 680, and a ball attached to the lower surface of the door frame base 110 And a fall cover unit 270 for receiving the game balls which have been fired by the launch device 680 and have not reached the game area 5a and discharged to the lower tray 322.

  The details of the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described later, but the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player turning the rotatable handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with an extra strength.

  The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for extracting the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a cash obtained by subtracting a game ball loaned from a ball lending machine or a return button 329 for returning a prepaid card, a cash inserted into the ball lending machine And a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the number of remaining prepaid cards and the like, a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332, which allow reception of the player's operation at the time of presentation, and a lower tray Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player It can be done. Although this effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, a door frame side effect capable of displaying the effect image, which is disposed so as to be visible from the player side in the operation button 410 and the large operation button 410 operable by the player And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the right outside of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes to the front more largely than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both right and left sides. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can emit and decorate the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the left and right sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the front center, and the top middle decoration member 576 A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in a front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 300 is attached to the front lower corner, and the plate unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 is, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 which has a rectangular shape whose front view outline extends vertically and which penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 are projected forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640, and a front face of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base 110 in front view and is attached to the cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 for closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 for covering a lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open / close cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to project forward through the door frame base 110. 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a rear cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending display portion 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) And a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the upper speakers 573 and the like and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the penetration opening 111 formed in the substantially rectangular shape which the inner peripheral shape in the plain view extended up and down. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the through hole 111 approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 110 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 110 vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front view, and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 112, and the through hole 111. The cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is attached is recessed toward the front from the rear surface in the vicinity of the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting portion 113 penetrates back and forth The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114, the cylinder insertion hole 114, and the handle mounting surface 112 in a front view on the left side, and penetrates the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 forward. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, The lower plate passage port 116 and the front side of the door frame base 110 are penetrated forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 in the vicinity of the left end, and the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270 is faced forward A recess for the plate 117, a recess from the rear to the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, a glass unit attachment portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and left and right on the door frame base 110 It has the speaker insertion port 119 which penetrates back and forth in the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1 b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110, thereby enhancing the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a laterally extending middle reinforcement attached below the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side in a front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in the front surface on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 It has a sheet metal 134 and a locking / locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame wedge 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

  The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending a metal sheet. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 which are bent in the front-rear direction, The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the portion, and the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire and a screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1 c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame upper hinge member 140 is a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141 a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrates the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 Between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 And a lock spring 144 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece connecting the rear ends of a pair of projecting pieces 141a although not shown, and the shape of the side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, mounting pieces connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper projecting piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the site | part which protrudes below rather than the lower side piece 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

  The wedge member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted. The upper end is in contact with the wedge member 143, and the lower end is in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141 a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the wedge member 143. .

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By coming into contact with the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and pulls the portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 to open the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved entirely downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it down. Can. Thereby, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, whereby the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is obtained. , And can be rotatably supported relative to the body frame 4.

  Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 described later. It is coaxially supported with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a good state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1 d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket And a cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the flat extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and the overall shape of the side view Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) of the lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The lower end of the lower door frame hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame lower hinge member 640. Support.

[3-1 e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side in a front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height at a position lower than the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through opening 111 A door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height at the lower position of the frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage 117 And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 are respectively provided with a plurality of LEDs 161 a and 162 a capable of emitting light forward on the front surface. The LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161 a and 162 a provided on the front surface By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be lighted and decorated.

[3-1 f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit attachment member 170 has a disk-like base 171 rotatably mounted about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a bar-like projection from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion outside the glass unit attachment portion 118 below the pair of speaker insertion holes 119 in the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  By setting the glass unit attachment member 170 to rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is more outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In the state of being positioned, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base portion 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 is glass The rear side of the mounting piece 191 a of the unit 190 abuts against the rear side of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit attachment member 170, the projection 172 projects from the disk-like base 171 rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located in the projection 172 . From this, in the state where the glass unit attachment member 170 can freely rotate, the protrusion 172 is stabilized in the state of protruding downward from the base 171. And, in the glass unit attachment member 170, since the projection 172 restricts the backward movement of the glass unit 190 at the rotational position where the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171, the glass unit attachment Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction on the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the projection 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the projection 172 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 from the rear end of the cylindrical cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181. A plurality of annular flanges 182 extending, and a plurality of protruding into the cylindrical portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 181 and disposed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, the three protruding ridges 183 are provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. The three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. The axis 181 is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1 h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 is for closing the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-like glass frame 191 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 118 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110, and the inside of the glass frame 191 closed. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 26 etc.).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be in contact with the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated to make the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 a mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110.

[3-1 i. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The crime prevention cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 200 is disposed with a flat main body portion 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection piece 202 which protrudes backwards short along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 201, and is separated left and right And a pair of locking pieces 203 that project forward relative to the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward more than the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer periphery of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear projection 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the gaming ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the gaming ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not abut the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200, and the inside of the gaming area 5a There is no impediment to hitting the game ball into.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the crime prevention cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191). The removed rear projection 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. In addition, the security cover 200 has a state in which the rear projection 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward more than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1 j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 extending in the front and rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and locking operation of a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmitting member 212 to be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of 700 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

  The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. And a pair of notched portions 212a. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (a key inserted into the key hole 211 a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 and the key cylinder 710 can be rotated.

  The cylinder mounting plate metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a rectangular plate-like front plate portion 213a that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend in a flat plate shape rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in the form of a flat plate in the direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right in front view is of the reinforcing unit 130 It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thereby, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  In the open / close cylinder unit 210 assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are accommodated in a box-like cylinder mounting portion 113 which is inserted into the housing 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 35 (a) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 34 (b). Fig.39 (a) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present a rendering image to the player It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is formed transparent at the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 which the player can press and operate, and the outer periphery of the operation button 410 surrounds the operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front, and attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the height in the vertical direction of the pan unit 320, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 is formed on the front side of the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 and the outer periphery of the button lens 411, which are formed in a curved surface (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to pass light.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface having no unevenness on the surface side. The button lens 411 is extended in a predetermined length to the center side (inner side) in a state of being recessed in a W shape in cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and The first button decorative portion 411a and an outer circumferential side of the first button decorative portion 411a are recessed in a circular arc shape in cross section and extend on an axis toward the central side and in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction And a plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b provided.

  The first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the assembled state to the operation button 410 as shown, and a group of both right and left sides is a group of upper and lower sides It extends longer than the center.

  The plurality of second button decorative portions 411 b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three by three on each of the left and right sides. The second button decorative portion 411 b is formed to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect that light is refracted by the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface at the portions of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration parts 411 b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic gloss on the surface.

  The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. Along the outer periphery of the main body 413a, and a plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape along the outer periphery of the body and arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction; A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d projecting in the shape of a band plate to the rear and arranged in the circumferential direction and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outer side than the main body portion 413a and having a predetermined length along the outer periphery And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and cylindrically extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer periphery of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension portion 413 f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413 b. The four guide bosses 413c are disposed at positions corresponding to the four corners in the upper, lower, left, and right directions with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. The four guide bosses 413 c are respectively slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be disposed two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These three detection pieces 413 d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided three each on the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decorative portion 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the region of the base opening 413 e in the button base 413, parts of the main body 413 a and the inner extension 413 f are recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extension portion 413 f which is narrowed inward substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side The display screen of can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 is an operation button spring 438 in which four guide bosses 413 c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 and are inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431. Is biased forward by the Since the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 is in contact with the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, the further movement to the front is restricted. The rear end is moved backward until it abuts on the front surface of the base unit 430 by pressing against it. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the assembled state of the rendering operation unit 400 The gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made less visible to the player by the portion 411a.

  Furthermore, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 by the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is operated by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion visible in the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button of the base unit 430.

  Further, in a state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in the state where it projected backward. Thus, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 42 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is a button The inside of the base 413 can be prevented from leaking inward, and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower area Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration substrate unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper decoration substrate 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being light emitting decorated other than the light emitting decoration target part, and the light emitting decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4 b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in an outer shape that matches the front end side of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a, and a frame main body 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a. There is.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and which penetrates back and forth, and which penetrates back and forth on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a plurality of (six) peripheral opening portions 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the frame, and notches 416c cut out with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening portion 416a And. The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be in contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416 b are provided three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416 a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch portion 416 c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  In addition, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylindrical portion 416d, when the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (rendering operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attaching portions 416e and the notch portion 416c are attached to the effect operating unit attaching portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 is substantially entirely metal on the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a interposed therebetween. A shiny plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes, from the rear side, outer peripheral openings 416 b formed three on each side of the frame main body 416. The frame side lens 417 is formed to have a smooth surface without irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 can not be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout 416 c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 is formed to be smooth on the front side. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 can not be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second outer LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the light emitting decoration is possible by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them. .

[3-4 c. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413. And, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 422 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 422 a And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 423 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 423 a And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has a weight 424a eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Moreover, in the state assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is formed between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 causes only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light and decorate by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. It is possible to emit and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by the light from each of the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, by rotating the weight 424 a of the vibration motor 424, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration to vibrate the entire rendering operation unit 400.

[3-4 f. Operation effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. A part of the operation button is cut away to hide it by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game ball being hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player is operated. The player can be made to participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 and the player can be entertained.

  The rendering operation unit 400 is formed to have a height substantially equal to the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the full width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the gaming area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. In the effect operation unit 400, the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 serving as the bottom surface in a state attached to the dish unit 320 is a gap between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. As attached. Thus, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the dish unit 320 (rendering operation unit 400) The central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player, because the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5. Therefore, when the player drops his eyes from the game area 5a to the rendering operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 or the like in the operation button 410 can be viewed in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts on a portion near the central opening 416 a in the rear surface of the frame main body 416.

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the central opening 416 a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 to the center side (central axis line CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 which is bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the outlined arrows in FIG. The part away from the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulging forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is dispersed to the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the effects of operation.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper portion is dished so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Because it is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the vibration is generated at the most distant part from the attached portion The whole of the rendering operation unit 400 can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the rendering operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the player is pressing the operation button 410. The strong vibration can be transmitted to surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the bottom surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck down, the frame is held between the abutment of the lower surface of the leg portion 442a with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by bending downward the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. In addition, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the mounting of the tray unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the part 326a and the like, and damage to the rendering operation unit 400 and the like can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force or when the player depresses the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is presented when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400 is presented to the player. Since 400 etc. will not be damaged, interruption of the game due to the breakage can be avoided, and a decrease in interest of the player can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side is increased by making the breakage difficult. It can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, it is flat. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even if it is strongly hit, making it difficult to break.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the in-operation button decorative member 432 are formed of transparent members, as shown in FIG. The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the first button inner decoration 432f, and the second button inner decoration 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side Can be viewed from In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the rendering operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the decoration of the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to view the rear at a portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion to be the inside of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner circumferential surface of the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation member inner decoration member 432 There is a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. As a result, even if the operation button in-operation decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided in the depressible operation button 410, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the operation button 410 is seen. While being able to prevent the player from having a sense of discomfort, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be disposed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, in the rendering operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the in-operation button decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411 a, the second button decoration portion 411 b and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. A unit base 431 and a decoration board unit 420, etc., which are on the rear side (rear side) outside the unit, are formed so as to be invisible to the player through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is made invisible from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden and concealed It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the entire rendering operation unit 400.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decorative portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decorative member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, the concavo-convex line of the first button decorative part 411a and the concavo-convex line of the second in-button decorative part 432g intersect with each other, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decorative portion 411a and The second button inner decoration portion 432 g can show the player a geometrical pattern with a deep three-dimensional feel, and can enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, the unevenness of the first button decorative portion 411a occurs when the player's eyes move. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g changes, it is possible to show the player a moving decoration, and the player can be entertained.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 400 allows the player to have a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is located in the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412) and behind the in-operation button decoration member 432, the operation button left inward decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inward decoration substrate 434, the operation button The upper inner decorative substrate 435 and the lower operating button inner decorative substrate 436 are disposed, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the upper and lower decorative substrates 435 emit light, thereby emitting the inner decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 It can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be lighted and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are as shown in FIG. 38, As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the light is transmitted from the light to the outside of the main portion 413a because it is disposed inside the cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The light emission decoration can be performed well only in the operation button 410.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, of the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LEDs 423a of the first LED 422a and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the six second button decorative portions 411b of the operation button 410 are lighted by emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a. Can. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 have a cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not leak to the inner side of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, it is located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d in the frame main body 416 of Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. A second LED 423 b of 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, a plurality of frame top lens decoration substrates 437 in the base unit 430 are disposed behind the frame top lenses 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrates 437 The frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the LED of From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, the flat light shielding wall portion 431 c protrudes forward to the rear lower end of the frame top lens 418 The light from the LED of the top lens decorative substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably decorated by light emission.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L-L in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame upper left side decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 (door frame left side decoration substrate 160) above the plate unit 320 It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 at 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front, and a translucent unit disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit mounted on the front upper portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and projecting like a cylindrical frame to the front and extending vertically It is attached to the lower part of the front of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the decorative base 534 and the left unit decorative lens member, and it is on the left unit. To cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the left unit lower decoration base 535 projecting forward in a frame shape shorter than the decoration base 534 A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 mounted on the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 mounted on the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear side is opened, and has a plurality of openings 531 a penetrating in the front and rear directions on the front surface. The plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically as shown. The left unit base 531 includes the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face the front. Each of the openings 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  In addition, the left unit base 531 has a left reflecting upright wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. The left reflection upright wall portion 538 has a flat surface shape, and an inner side surface facing the through hole 111 is provided as a reflection surface capable of reflecting light. In addition to providing the inner side surface of the left reflection upright wall portion 538 itself from a material for reflection such as metal or resin, the reflection surface may also be provided by attaching a reflection seal to the inner side surface. It is possible. And although mentioned later, this left reflective standing wall part 538 is formed of the left unit base 531, and serves as a part which bears a part (left part) of the reflective standing wall part 33 mentioned above.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided up and down into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a square lens 532a in a front view, which corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square in a front view, which corresponds to a square opening 531a. And a lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed at the rear can be emitted forward in a point-like manner by the circular lens portion 532a. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

  The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes: a central diffuse reflection portion 532c which is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface; and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c at the front surface , The input lens portion 532e bulging backward in the form of a curved surface at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusive reflection portion 532c), and as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e as a whole on the outside of the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface And a front reflector 532 f inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front surface diffusing lens portion 532d, the groove portion is concaved in a circular arc shape to the rear in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forwardly It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflection portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflection portion 532 f is formed in a sawtooth shape in which a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed into a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is pointed rearwardly. The front reflection portion 532 f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center is increased. Further, the front reflection portion 532 f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The circumferentially dividing radially extending lines coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532 d.

  In the square lens portion 532b, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens portion 532b, light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens portion 532e into the rectangular lens portion 532b. Since this input lens portion 532 e is bulging back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161 a and 162 a is refracted so as to advance in parallel in the forward direction. Substantially all can be directed to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to the central diffusive reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffusive reflector 532c. In the square lens portion 532b, and travels from the center side to the outer side along the front surface. The light reflected by the central diffusive reflector 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffusive reflector 532c) over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens 532b.

  When light reflected inside the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection portion 532f, the front reflection portion 532f faces the front Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflection portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface moves away from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b becomes thinner as it goes away from the center (See Figure 50). As a result, light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. It can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532 f is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 532 b through the front diffusion lens portion 532 d. At this time, since the front surface diffusion lens portion 532 d is formed to have a wave-like cross section, it can diffuse light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532 f in various directions, and the square lens portion 532 b Light can be emitted to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

  The square lens portion 532b is divided into a plurality of concentrically extending grooves by a plurality of radially extending grooves in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves bordering the dividing line. Of the circular arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has concentric stripes of light and shade. Light can be avoided, and more uniform light can be emitted forward. Thereby, the multi-faced decorative part in front of the square lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be lighted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the front of the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 And a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and which extends short in the front and back direction. In the multifaceted decorative part, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular solid extending in the vertical direction, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular solid. It is formed in the same shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-sided decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561 a and the multi-sided decorative portion 561 b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. In the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faced decorative portion is moved forward from the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. Each of the lights is decorated by light emitted.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and is formed in a square tube shape extending in the front and rear direction. In the left unit upper decoration base 534, a portion constituting the lower surface in the outer periphery is inclined so as to protrude downward as going from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape which is opened upward in a front view. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from the substantially vertical center at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves upward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534; A V-shaped portion whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 and a lower end of the upper V-shaped portion and an upper end of the lower V-shaped portion are connected And a linear portion.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at the upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 51 (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line N-N in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line O-O in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is a box-shaped right unit base 551 mounted on the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 in a front view and a front surface of the right unit base 551. Is mounted on the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 attached to the front of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and extends in the vertical and longitudinal directions A transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and being decorated, a right unit left decoration member A transparent flat right unit left cover mounted on the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is a front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a right side and a right unit left diffusion lens from a front view center on a front surface of the right unit base 551 in front view right side A transparent flat light unit right diffusion lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions and a right unit side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are decorated and decorated A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557; There is.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and extends vertically and longitudinally with the front and right opened. A box-shaped non-light transmitting right unit left light shielding member 559 and a light shielding attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 And a right unit right light shielding member 560 in the form of a flat plate.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 mounted on the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 mounted on the front side of 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to penetrate the right unit base 551 up and down, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay substrate 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a rectangular shape which is elongated in the vertical direction in a front view, extends in a short and short rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape closed near the center in the longitudinal direction. It is done. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting upright wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. The right side reflective upright wall portion 568 has a flat surface shape, and an inner side surface provided to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner side surface of the left reflection upright wall portion 538, in addition to providing the inner side surface of the right reflection upright wall portion 568 itself from a material for reflection such as metal or resin, the reflection surface reflects the inner side surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for the like. And although mentioned later, this right side reflective standing wall part 568 is formed of the right unit base 551, and serves as a part which bears a part (right side part) of the reflective standing wall part 33 mentioned above.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending band plate. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction at the front in the left-right direction with a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left from the center in the left-right direction at the front And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for emitting and decorating the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552 b is for emitting and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552 c is for emitting and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

  Both front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided up and down into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B is connected to the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A is a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes: a flat main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction; and a rear wall portion 553b short in a plan view right short in plan view from the rear side of the main body portion 553a; The right unit left decorative member is notched in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 553b to the left and formed in plural in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the left side of the main portion 553a in front view An accommodation recess 553d which is recessed so as to be able to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 553a in a front view And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the rectangular shape extending vertically is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward as it goes to the front It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the whole of the main body portion 553a moves with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move rightward in front view Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553 b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall 553b.

  The plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a portion thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emit the right unit decoration lens member 561 It can be decorated.

  The bottom of the accommodation recess 553 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553 e are projected rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 553 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion where the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. The input lens portions 553 e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  A plurality of (six) side surface reflecting portions 553 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric circular arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion It extends perpendicularly to the plane of the surface 553a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 553f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e, with the mountain portion between the grooves facing the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light emitted forward from the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553 e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and in the main portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole moves toward the right in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main portion 553a strikes the flat left surface in the main portion 553a. However, direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main portion 553a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in a front view by striking the saw-like side reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (right side in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left through the main body portion 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side are left at the left surface of the right unit left light blocking member 559 The light reflected to the left and transmitted through the main body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, so that the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a emits light and decorates with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided into a plurality of radially extending grooves, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated to the outside (left) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. It is possible to irradiate the left with more uniform light. Thus, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553 d on the left surface of the main body portion 553 a can emit and decorate substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side in the front view of the main body portion 553a (the side on which the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. The side portion can be decorated by the side reflection portion 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decoration member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a rear wall short in a plan view left from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. A portion 556b and a plurality of notches 556c which are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction A front view of the main body portion 556a, an accommodation concave portion 556d recessed so as to be able to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a A plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are disposed in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view, with the upper corner of the front end side of the rectangular shape extending up and down being beveled in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side going upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main body portion 553a. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the whole of the main body portion 556a moves with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the left in front view from the rear end side. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556 a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556 b is assembled with the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts on the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 556 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening which is penetrated back and forth by the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 The inner LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c can favorably emit and decorate the right unit decoration lens member 561.

  The bottom surface of the accommodation recess 556 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decoration member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556 e project rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 556 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. These input lens portions 556 e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552 b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

  A plurality of (six) side reflectors 556 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main portion 556a in each groove, and the surface remote from the input lens portion 556e is the main portion It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e such that a mountain portion between the groove and the groove is directed to the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. In addition, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e is formed in the main portion 556a. It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main portion 556a strikes the flat right surface in the main portion 556a. However, direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in front view by striking the saw-like side reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right through the main body portion 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the left side Since the light reflected toward and transmitted through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 mounted on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by the radially extending plural lines, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form concentric circular arc grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. Can be emitted to the right with more uniform light. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556 d on the right surface of the main body portion 556 a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in the front view of the main body portion 556a (the side on which the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decoration member 557 Parts can be decorated by the side reflectors 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations provided to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side unit of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front and right sides are open. The right unit left light shielding member 559 has a flat main body 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction, a rear wall 559b short in a plan view right from the rear side of the main body 559a, and a rear A plurality of notches 559c which are cut in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the wall 559b to the left and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction and extend from the right surface of the main body 559a to the right And a plurality of flat plate-like reinforcements 559 d extending from the wall 559 b to the front end of the main body 559 a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending rectangular is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upwardly directed toward the front It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and its outer shape is formed in substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The left end of the rear wall 559 b extends to the right more than the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 559 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c and 556 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emits the right unit decorative lens member 561. It can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in a pair at a height substantially the same as the width of the left and right, and three pairs of the reinforcing portions 559d are spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending square is notched like a C-chamfer and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines, and is formed in the substantially same shape as the main-body part 559a in the right unit left light-shielding member 559. As shown in FIG. The right unit right light shielding member 560, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. 55, and the main unit 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 The left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed in proximity to each other. Thus, the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated in the left-right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . The light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration The light is irradiated to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-light transmitting members, and are emitted forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 respectively. Left light 552a, right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561, respectively. The light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind the respective divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559 d. The light can be prevented from interfering between the spaces by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 which is located, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be , Each can be decorated independently luminous. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide into plural (four) areas in the vertical direction and emit and decorate each of them independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed along the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons formed thereon. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and extends short back and forth. In the multifaceted decorative part 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are vertically arrayed on the front face of a rectangular solid extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular solid part. It is formed in the shape as it was set.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561 a and multi-faced decorative portions 561 b respectively divided into four spaces by three reinforcing portions 559 d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the part located forward, in the three parts from the top, the multifaceted decorative part 561b is disposed one by one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative part 561a disposed at the center in the vertical direction. Only the portion 561 b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated to emit light by the inner LED 552 c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape following the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decoration member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects largely in the form of a plate to the front beyond the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly to the front from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the pan unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently separates the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on the left and right both sides which are protruded and the right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. Can be made to emit light.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right with the pachinko machine Can exert an effect like a partition. In this way, it is possible for the player playing a game with the pachinko machine 1 to feel as if playing in the private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without disturbing other players around. Can.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 largely protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, an island facility The pachinko machine 1 can be made visible in the game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Therefore, when the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are lighted and decorated, the present from a distance, even if not located in front of The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.

  Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens By making the members 561 and the like emit light and decorate in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify the staff in the game hall of the occurrence of the problem and make it possible to quickly respond to the problem. As a result, the interruption of the game by the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can feel frustrated and suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (c) is a door frame top unit as viewed from the back It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the central base 571 at the center of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, which is attached to the center of the through hole 111 above the through hole 111 A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached respectively to the fronts of the pair of side bases 572 A pair of openings 574a penetrating in the front and back at a front position of a pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape having an open rear, and from a position closer to the center in the lateral direction than the pair of openings 574a A plurality of (three on the left and three on the left and three on the left and right sides) which extend in the longitudinal direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction and are separated vertically. A unit main body 271 having 574b and attached to the front of the center base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and a front of the pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close the pair of openings 574a And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal mounted on the rear side of the unit body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) respectively have internal spaces opened only toward the side on which the opening window is provided. In the inner space of the opening window so as to emit light from the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window (the left outer periphery outer emitting unit 34a, the right outer periphery outer emitting unit 34b) and the inner periphery of the opening window An outer peripheral light detector 35 (a left outer peripheral light detector 35a and a right outer peripheral light detector 35b) for detecting light outside the outer periphery is provided.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the lateral direction of the unit main body 271 and attached to the top middle decoration member 576 having translucency and the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front of the unit main body 271 and both left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 extending in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 from the vicinity and near the left and right ends of the unit main body 271; Top left decorative lens member 579 attached to the left and right sides respectively and covering the front surface of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front side, and the opening 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 The top middle left decoration member 581 and the top middle right decoration member 582 extend to near the center side end portion of

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of both right and left side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and the LED is mounted on the plurality of (three) light guide members 578 at the portions facing the lateral outer end. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction A door with a pair of substrate bases 585 attached to each of the parts and a front face of the pair of substrate bases 585 with a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271 Frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587, and door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 attached to the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit body 271 and the door frame top unit relay substrate 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271 And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of asperities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572 respectively. When assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely such that the front sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward in the side near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front, such that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the square extending in the left and right direction bulges downward. In other words, the unit body 271 is formed in the shape of a front view in which a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction is cut away in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a square shape extending in the right and left directions, and a half of the entire width (length in the left-right direction) around the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the square It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid which protruded forward, and the quadrangle which protruded short for the front by making the front end side of the trapezoid into a long side. Therefore, in the unit body 271, a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit body 271 and the left and right ends of the front end of the portion protruding forward on both sides of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left and right direction on the front surface It is located more backward (is recessed).

  The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating in the front and rear directions at positions from the left and right direction both ends in the front surface to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit body 271 is a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a diagonally extending portion of the front side projecting in a trapezoidal shape in the front. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574 b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 obliquely forward to the vicinity of the opening 574 a. In addition, the plurality of slits 574 b are formed on the both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 so as to be separated vertically by three each.

  Further, the unit body 271 has an upper opening 574c which is notched toward the front from the rear end in the lateral center on the upper surface and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end in the horizontal direction on the lower surface. And. The upper opening 574 c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574 d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit body 271 further includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decoration 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decoration member 576 extends outward in the left and right direction from the upper end of the left and right sides of the metapentagon in which the shape of the front view is bent so that the left and right direction central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward. It is formed in the shape which combined the substantially right-angled triangle which connected the front-end | tip of the edge and the lower end of the right and left of a side pentagon. The top middle decoration member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

  In the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, after the top middle decoration member 576, the front surface is inclined to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decoration member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making the LEDs emit light, it is possible to make the top middle decoration member 576 emit light and decorate.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that protrudes forward. When the side near both lateral ends of the unit main body 271 is described as the end side, and the side near the center is described as the central side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight from the end side toward the central side A straight portion 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in the form of a large radius arc so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a to the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction of the arc portion 578b is formed to be smaller toward the center. In the light guide member 578 assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. There is.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c having saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and a diffusion input portion 578d having a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. Is equipped.

  In the light guide member 578 assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the end portions on both outer sides in the left-right direction face the LED frame 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the LEDs 586a and 587a of the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident from the end portions in the left and right direction on the light guide member 578, the light is a straight portion 578a The light travels from the end to the front side sequentially by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. The top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of these members is illuminated and decorated.

  In the light guide member 578, light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is incident from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thus, the portion located in front of the circular arc portion 578 b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 and the door frame top middle decoration substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to emit and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the center of the front of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a each accommodating the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 579a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574 e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the center of the front of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a each accommodating three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 580a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574 f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the LEDs 584 a and 587 a of the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top via the three light guiding members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a in the front of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the right opening 574a in the front of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is the top right It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583 a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 (see FIG. 59) ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located forward of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The door frame top right decoration substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decoration portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 mounted on the front on the right side from the center of the unit main body 271 in the lateral direction (see FIG. 59) ). The three LEDs 584a can emit light independently of one another. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located forward of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 in which the plurality of slits 574 b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed so as to be substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending up and down and back and forth, a rear wall of a front view rectangular shape extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall The upper wall of a substantially right triangle with the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse and the lower side of the side wall with the lower wall The lower wall of the right triangle is formed in the shape of a triangular prism box in which the upper and lower oblique sides are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open part is closed by the unit body 271. In the substrate base 585, the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached such that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so that a box-like open portion is closed from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center in the unit body 271 Be The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it goes to the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 with respect to the laterally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thereby, the front surface of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled in the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 586 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586. Thereby, in the state where the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 causes the plurality of LEDs 586 a to emit light, thereby allowing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578 b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached on the rear side on the right of the left and right center in the unit body 271 Be The right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 in the door frame top, so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the horizontally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thus, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b right of the center of the unit body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 on the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587. Thereby, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side from the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 causes the plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, and thereby causes a portion near the middle middle decoration member 576 of the top right decoration lens member 580 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 is attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle middle decoration member 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially in left-right symmetry with each other by an opaque member. A light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of a plurality of LEDs 586 a and 587 a of a left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top and a plurality of right decorative substrates 587 in the door frame top arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574 b in the unit main body 271. I am divided. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guiding member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guiding member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration Luminescent decoration can be performed in a state where the respective decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is attached to the front of the center base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, a door frame top left decoration substrate 583, a door frame top right decoration substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and a door The connection between the frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is connected to the door main body relay substrate via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is covered by a relay substrate cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 turn to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes largely forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 disposed at the center, It is formed to extend from the both sides to the top left decoration portion 574e and the top right decoration portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit body 271. Thereby, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, a front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the rear of each of both left and right direction both ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are disposed. The speaker cover 575 is provided so as to face forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be made to be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is a door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580 The light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580, and the top left decoration lens member The entire front surface of the lens 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Operation effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is made smaller. Thereby, the front of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be made as wide as possible visible to the player (forward) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the large game board 5 of the game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through hole 111 (second effect operation unit 400A) And the front half of the lower half (the lower part of the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (the front of the lower front decoration part 326c) is recessed to turn backward (dish unit The front surface of both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned backward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 ing. As a result, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the front in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to be largely protruded forward, so that the rendering operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized for the player. It can be made to pay attention to the rendering operation unit 400 strongly.

  In the door frame 3, the rendering operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 is inclined so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Because the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 because it is attached in the state, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player loses his sight and effects operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly viewed, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be enhanced. In addition, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image is sufficiently facilitated. Maseru can be.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 has the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the entire height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, the operation of the operation button 410 requires a short distance of hand movement. It is possible to touch any part of the operation button 410, and "early pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is attached in an inclined state, it can not only be pressed from the top like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also it can be operated left or right The operation can be performed well even from the front, and the operation using the operation button 410 can be more enjoyable by the operation button 410 having a good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. According to the state, when the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibration, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, and the player is surprised by the operation button The presentation using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) across the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the front center of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 below is not noticeable, it can be made easy to make the player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine clearly recognize that it is clearly different, and the player's attention is strongly attracted It can be a high power pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 forms the lower plate 322 so as to wrap around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening portion 326 d opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 in the front surface of the plate unit 320 Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower plate opening portion 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear of the lower plate 322 turns to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts the left hand in the lower plate 322 or places the left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game and to reduce the size of the lower plate opening 326d. It can also be recognized that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than the height by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the gaming balls of the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray 322 from the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322 into the lower portion of the tray unit 320 or the like. The countersink holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front and rear direction, and are arranged on the right outside (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) of the lower plate opening 326d in front view. That is, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball extraction hole 322a, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326, the front end of the lower plate cover 340 Since the player is disposed behind the side, etc., the player can not see the lower ball supply port 323c and the lower ball removal hole 322a, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, since the lower countersink hole 322a is disposed below (in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322, the lower frame ball opening 322a is opened. Then, the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like when they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball removal hole 322a can not be seen from the player side, the flow of gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box is also I can not see it. In this way, it is possible to give the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the payout device 830 in a state that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the upper plate 321 are full for the player are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the troublesomeness of passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation to hit the game ball and the effect image) and to suppress the decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, the door frame 3 has the lower flat ball opening hole 322a at the front left position of the lower flat ball supply opening 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands upright on the right side of the lower flat ball opening 322a. Since the upper wall portion is bent obliquely so as to face the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is directly moved to the lower ball ball. The light can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be reflected to the right side wall and indirectly guided to the lower circular ball hole 322a. Thus, in the state where the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is a region on the lower plate 322 on the left side of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a. (The lower plate first area A1) can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 without showing the gaming balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes the lower plate opening portion 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward, between the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be output forward well, and the sound by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player places his hand on the lower plate 322 or approaches it, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 which is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. The player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrudes forward largely from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an operation effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing a game with this pachinko machine 1 can play a game in a private room It is possible to give an illusion of a feeling of being present, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation to other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can emit light and decorate the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 lined up Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can be informed of the presence of the pachinko machine even from a distance from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to players. It can be machine 1.

  In the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 A shape recessed so as to be turned backwards (A top middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 The front surfaces of the left and right sides of the 576 are formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be positioned rearward. As a result, only the decorative member 576 at the top of the door frame top unit 570 appears to be projected forward largely, so that the decorative member 576 can be made to be highlighted and highlighted to the player, The inner decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right direction ends are provided with the speaker 573, The entire front face of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper portion of the door frame 3, and a decoration distinctly different from conventional pachinko machines is provided It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and to entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. Because each of the left and right direction is largely projected forward, it is possible to show the player a decoration having a sense of unity in the upper and lower sides where the virtual line passing through the left and right direction center is noticeable, and by the refined decoration. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 causes the top middle decorative member 576 and the rendering operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction to project forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the light emitting decoration of the effect operation unit 400 is performed, the light emission line extending vertically at the center in the left and right direction of the front face of the door frame 3 can be shown to the player, and the player's gaze is arranged at the center in the left and right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the entire configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a game board of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view disassembled and seen from back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit in an enlarged manner from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. Rows are attached by inserting a game ball into the game area 5a, which is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge array (not shown) at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front face of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. While the game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the back surface of the back unit 3000, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the back surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open to accept the game balls driven into the game area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 always openable to receive the ball, a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball, and the game ball pass the gate unit 2003 In accordance with the result of the regular lottery that is drawn by the second game, it is possible to receive the game ball according to the result of the second lottery, and the first special game lottery by receiving the game ball to the first game opening 2002 or the second game machine 2004 A large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a start port unit. Lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the left side of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center product 2500 attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a and having a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the vertical center on the left side in the front view and the back side below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A back lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in a front view in 3010, and a back top mounted from the center in the lateral direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of the base 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located outside the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005, In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1008 has a rear projection 202 protruding to the rear of the crime prevention cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  The front component 1000 also includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that project rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rails 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 to position between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is cut away from the lower end in the lower left corner in a front view. The notch portion 1011 corresponds to the notch portion 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1011 and 1127 are penetrated to lower full ball path The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 of the unit 860 are adapted to face forward.

5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, FIG. 64 and FIG. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is provided with an out-concave portion 1111 which is recessed upward from the lower end at a portion which becomes the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  Further, panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrating in the front-rear direction And. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are disposed outside the game area 5 a and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1115 having a front side depressed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement steps 1115 are not cut to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a, similarly to the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114, This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step portion 1121 in the front-rear direction And a through hole 1122 penetrating therethrough.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120 It becomes almost the same plane as the front. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1121 is formed in a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  The panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, from the front of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. A plurality of projecting pins 1123 which are extended and which can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned to each other.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 which engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed on the upper side of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends from the front of the holding step 1121 to the front. It projects toward the end and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so as not to protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface It extends a predetermined amount toward the center). The panel plate 1110 is detachably held to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claws 1124 and the engagement piece 1125.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position which is the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with the notch part 1127 which is notched upward from the lower end in a front view lower left corner. This notch portion 1127 is coincident with the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, these notch portions 1011 and 1127 are penetrated and the lower full ball passage unit 860 is The front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 face forward.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front and rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder is between the front component 1000 and the front 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down to the lower end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out guiding portion 1003 to the out port 1126 on the rear side, and are discharged to the back side of the gaming panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the above-described game panel 1100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, as viewed from the front together with the front component, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from the rear. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

  The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left and right direction in front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front and rear direction in the front view left side of the lower end and is opened downward and is vertically opened at the upper side of the cutout 1152 and the cutout 1152 of the same shape as the cutout 1011 of the front component 1000. And a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating the front and back in which the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting backward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component 1000 A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating at the front and back, at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel between itself and the front component 1000 1150 can be positioned.

  Furthermore, although the illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings which are penetrated back and forth for attaching the front unit 2000 like the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the above-mentioned game panel 1100. ing.

  When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down to the lower end of the gaming area 5 a are guided by the out guiding portion 1003 to the out port 1151 on the rear side, and are discharged to the back side of the gaming panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in the assembled state to the game board 5. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface It is possible to discharge downward from the discharged portion 1201.

5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520 and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as members having transparency so as to allow visual confirmation from the outside. There is. That is, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a surface inferior in fraud suppression performance particularly in the payout control substrate 951 in the payout control substrate box 950 and the main control substrate 1310 in the main control substrate box 1320 Since the mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to the below-mentioned fraud countermeasure.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the gaming status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the regular lottery that is drawn by passing the gaming ball against the gate unit 2003. , A normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and drawing by the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery results, and the first special reservation consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 A number indicator 1404 and eight LEDs for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004. A second special symbol display 1405, a second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004, the first special lottery result or the second The special lottery result mainly includes a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 when the result is "big hit" or the like.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 for controlling an effect to be presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially at the center. The gaming board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the gaming board 5. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side in a front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side in the front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view left side in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b of the back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen directed to the front. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the back box 3010 into the 3010 c, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and lock It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached from the front to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front face of the panel board 1110 and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving the game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open to accept game balls at different positions, the gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game balls, and the game balls as gates Lottery by receiving the game ball to the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that can receive the game ball according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by passing the part 2003 A large winning opening 2005 is provided, which allows the game ball to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed substantially immediately below the stop unit 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 as viewed from the front. The special winning opening 2005 is disposed between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a start port unit. Lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the left side of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view A top 2300 and a frame-shaped center product 2500 attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a and having a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004 are provided.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 near the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time, and the large winning opening 2005 has a plurality of game balls at one time ( For example, four to six) can be extended to the left and right in an acceptable size, and can be opened and closed in accordance with the game state.

  The lower side unit 2200 extends in a circular arc along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which can always receive a game ball.

  The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the lower side unit 2200 in the gaming area 5a. With the side unit upper 2300 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf approaches the inner rail 1002, and the gaming ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is Can be guided to the center of the

  The center role 2500 is located slightly above the center of the front view slightly above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5 a, and is located on the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is attached. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes from the front the effect units and the like provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. be able to. The center product 2500 has a gate unit 2003 and a second start port 2004.

  In the frame-shaped center character 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit into the game area 5a is in the frame It can not be invaded.

  The center character 2500 is capable of releasing the warp ball 2520 having the game ball in the game area 5a open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view and the game ball having entered the warp ball 2520 within the frame. It has a warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that rolls the gaming ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left and right direction and then discharges it into the gaming area 5a. The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately below the stage 2530. When the gaming ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, on the rear side of the back unit 3000, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

  The back unit 3000 is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and open at the front, and has a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010 a at the back surface of the back box 3010 And a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 rotatably mounted around an axis extending leftward and rightward along the axis and housing the effect drive board.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decoration unit 3050 mounted at the front end in the back box 3010 from the vertical center on the left side in the front view and the back side below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A back lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in a front view in 3010, and a back top mounted from the center in the lateral direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the rear view left side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b in the rear view.

  The opening 3010 a is formed in substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the game board side effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The back unit 3000 appropriately uses the back down movable presentation unit 3100, the back up left movable presentation unit 3200, the back left movable presentation unit 3300, the back up inside movable presentation unit 3400, and the back down movable presentation unit 3500, etc. A light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like can be performed, and the player can be entertained also by various effects, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, so that the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 , The space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 is driven into the upper part in the game area 5a, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the driving strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls in one minute continuously, that is, , The game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge array at an appropriate position, and the game balls are obstacle nails. By the contact, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the gaming ball, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at a suitable position.

  The gaming ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) when entering the left side in a front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, The region to the left of the center character 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and move back and forth and are discharged forward. When the gaming ball is released into the gaming area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, since it is positioned immediately above the first starting opening 2002, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from outside the center into the gaming area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005, etc.

  By the way, when the gaming ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 or the first There is a possibility that it can be accepted by the starting opening 2002 and the like. Then, when the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right strike), Downstream from that, the region where the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 are provided will flow down.

  Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result is “normal hit”, the second starting opening 2004 is for a predetermined time ( For example, during 0.3 to 10 seconds, the game machine is opened and the game ball can be received in the second start port 2004. Then, when a game ball is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result can not be started, so the normal lottery The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous regular lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", " A drawing of a special drawing result is generated which generates a middle hit, a small hit, a probability change, a time reduction, and the like. Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, in the special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, “lost”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “5 There are 15R big hit, "per probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction) per hit", "probability change time per shot", "probability change time for short loss", etc.

  In the case of the special lottery result that the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of gaming balls are taken from the payout device 830 by the main control substrate 1310 and the payout substrate. Is dispensed onto the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball, by causing the large winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball, many game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 becomes open state which can receive the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) The opening and closing pattern to be closed is repeated several times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open capable of accepting gaming balls, or to the big winning opening 2005. If any of the predetermined number of (for example, 10) game ball acceptance conditions is satisfied, the open / close pattern (one open / close pattern is referred to as one round) for closing the game ball in an unacceptable closed state is predetermined Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R big hit" is repeated for two rounds, "5R big hit" for 5 rounds, and "15R big hit" for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, change the probability that "special hit" such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perhaps") or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 are until the special drawing result drawn from the start of the special drawing is suggested by the reception of the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Since the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started when the game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Ru. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being put on hold. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that each symbol row is fluctuated and fluctuated in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbol rows in the symbol row are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbols of the three symbol rows displayed in a stopped state become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "loss", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the drawing result of the special drawing is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)), and the time which suggests the special lottery result in game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates, The time until the finalized image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by gaming board side effect display device 1600, effect operation unit 400 in door frame 3 according to the selected special lottery result. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decoration bodies of center character 2500, various decoration bodies of back unit 3000, back bottom back movable effect unit 3100, back top left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400, the back-down front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment covers the window portion of the present embodiment, and the bulging part of the present invention corresponds to the operation button 400 in the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

  In addition, the decoration member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decoration in the present invention. The second button inner decoration 432g of the operation button inner decoration 432, the peripheral decoration 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decoration 478 respectively correspond to the second decoration of the present invention .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, each LED mounted on the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 and the sub screen decoration substrate In the light emitting body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment corresponds to the rear side decoration means of the present invention, and the frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and A unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the rendering operation unit 400 (or the second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the front of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3 When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g of the operation button inner decoration 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A Such as the decoration in which the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc. overlapped, the decoration in which the first button decorative part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Because the player can be shown the decoration full of no sense of perspective with a sense of decoration, it is possible to attract the player's attention strongly It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  In addition, the decoration member 432 in the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). The player is operating (pressing) the button lens 411 to move because the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that the button lens 411 can be moved by the player's operation. Then, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) move closer to or further from each other. The first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub The first button decorative part 411a and the second in-button decorative part 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478) according to a change in the distance to the clean decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.). , Etc.) can be changed, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration) can be changed. The player can change the decoration (intersecting mode) with the member 478, etc.) by himself / herself, and can entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the opposite side of the operation member in the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), Since a space is to be formed between the second decorative body, the distance from the player to the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the operating member in the operating button 432 when viewed from the player The distance to the inner decoration 432 g (or the peripheral decoration 472 a of the screen unit 470, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration 478, etc.) is largely different, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even when the player's eyes are moved, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided The decorative member 432 in the operation button on the back side (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be favorably viewed through and the radial shape of the first button decoration portion 411a. The decoration of the player can direct the line of sight of the player to the center of the button lens 411, and passes through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The in-operation decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) The player's interest can be strongly directed to the side effect display device 460.

  In addition, since the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is provided in the operation button inner decoration member 432, when viewed from the outside, the button lens 411 Of the first button decoration 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration 432g of the operation button inner decoration 432 cross each other, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g And the second button inner decoration portion 432g can be used to make the pachinko machine 1 have high appeal for the player. it can.

  Further, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g The decoration can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 seen in the center of the decorative member 432 in the line of sight or interest of the player by decoration, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed it can.

  Further, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are mounted on each LED (or sub screen decoration substrate 477). When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the light can be decorated by the light in the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the sub screen decoration member 476), and furthermore, the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light decoration. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the sub screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light emission decoration. At this time, the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub screen decoration member 476) causes the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower portion. Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button inner decoration portion 432g, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button In the first button decoration 411a, the second button inner decoration is performed, while the light is decorated by direct light from the respective LEDs (or LEDs 477a) of the inner decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The light is adorned by indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub screen decoration member 476). Since the first button decoration 411a is weakly decorated while the second button inner decoration 432g (the sub screen decoration member 476) is strongly lighted and decorated, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, With each LED (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 lit, the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a Looking at the two-button inner decoration 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), it is possible to show the player a decoration with a more emphasized sense of appearance, and it is an appealing ability that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the decoration member 432 in the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is disposed in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the decoration member 432 in the button lens 411 or the operation button (or the door There is no need to secure a space for the movement of the button lens 411 in the region outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 or the in-operation decorative member 432 (or door frame) It is possible to expand the side second effect display device 460A) to the outside and make it as large as possible, and by increasing the size, the button lens 411 and the operation member in the operation button 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device) 460A) can be highlighted. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 outside, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 The decorativeness can be enhanced, the appearance can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, the player makes the button lens 411 flat when the player strikes the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed to the whole of the button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, damage to the button lens 411 during the game may interrupt the game, and it may be possible for some players to avoid frustration and decrease in interest and damage the button lens 411. By becoming difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the present pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 which allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 disposed in the main body frame 4 to be visible through the through hole 111 from the front, The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward at the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. The operating button 410 that can be viewed from the front through the operation button 410 that moves (advances and retracts) by the player operating in a circular shape of about 15 cm that is within the range of -30 cm and that is visible from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the operation button 410 are disposed in the frame Since the frame unit 415 to be framed is attached, in the conventional pachinko machine, the staging operation unit 400 (second Since the rendering operation unit 400A is visible, the player can recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal. Then, the frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the second button decoration having the translucent property to the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417 The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 provided with the portion 411b and attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417. Inside the frame main body 416 that divides between the decorative portion 411b Since the cylinder portion 416d, and the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 that divides the second button decorative portion 411b from the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the main body portion Light from the first LED 422a, 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 or the button lens 411 due to the 413a and the inner extension portion 413f, and light from the second LED 422b, 423b makes the second button decorative portion 411b. It can be prevented from being illuminated, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be made to emit light and be decorated independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b can be light-emittingly decorated, respectively, and a light-emitting effect with a good appearance can be performed. In addition, various patterns of light emission effects can be performed by appropriately combining light off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like with the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, the first LED 422a and 423a emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LED 422b and 423b emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are one operation button left outer decoration Since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided on the substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (the operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far as possible from the second button decoration part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is sufficiently It can be irradiated to the second button decoration part 411b in a diffused state . Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly emitted and decorated, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the interest of the player is strongly drawn. The player can be entertained, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 is moved along with the movement of the operation button 410. The wiring connected to the outer decoration substrate 423 on the operation button right side is not bent or extended, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, movement (operation) of the operation button 410, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b The light emission decoration can be enjoyed by the player without any problem, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided at the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the decoration member 432 in the operation button in the rear and the door frame side effect display device 460 through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is the second button decoration portion 411b Can be decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. And by making 1st LED422a, 423a and 2nd LED422b, 423b emit light suitably, the transparent member in which the in-operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind As described above, since the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be illuminated and decorated in various patterns as described above, the player's interest in the operation button 410 or The door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect or the operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second The effect image etc. by the effect display device 460A) can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) having the second button decoration portion 411b at the outer edge, the player can operate the operation button 410 while the player participation type effect is being executed. By causing the player to operate, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Then, at the time of execution of the player participation type effect, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 may be lighted and decorated to attract the player's interest to the operation button 410. Thus, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player participation type effect and enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the non-light transmitting main portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f that allow the first LED 422a, 423a to emit light and decorate, the second in the operation button 410 The portion on the central side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LED 422a, 423a, and the central portion of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is brightened and disposed at the rear It can prevent that the decorative member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) are hard to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be lighted and decorated in a good state, and the in-operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect through the transparent button lens 411) The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect and the like sufficiently to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416 d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second side of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is decorated on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The inner cylindrical portion 416d can completely separate the portion 411b from the portion 411b. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 in the inner cylindrical portion 416d, the light from the first LED 422a, 423a or the second LED 422b, 423b Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LED 422 a, 423 a illuminates the frame side lens 417, or the light from the second LED 422 b 423 illuminates the second button decoration 411 b There is nothing to do. Accordingly, the inner cylinder portion 416d can reliably block the light, and the pachinko machine 1 can be embodied which reliably exerts the above-described effects.

  Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), on the rear side of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely divided by the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not go behind the rear end of the main body portion 413a, it completely blocks the entry of light to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be lighted and decorated in a good state by the first LED 422a, 423a, and the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the rear through the transparent button lens 411 The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be viewed in a good state, and the player can enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like sufficiently to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration in front of the region outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411) Since the part 411b is positioned, the decorative member 432 (door frame side second) is arranged from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 in the operation button (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The second button decoration part 411b can make the member on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (the back side) less visible and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated. Further, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is lighted and decorated by the first LED 422a, 423a, the in-operation button decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect for the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A are relatively darkened, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made less visible. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation member in the operation button 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, a frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b and the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) The side lenses 417 extend in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, light emission effects such as light rounds the outer edge of the operation button 410, and light emission such that light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410 Since it is possible to show the player an effect or light emission effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored by various light emission effects. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 are driven into the game area 5a and the upper plate 321 used for the game is In addition to mounting, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is removably attached to the front and lower side of the upper tray 321, and a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) A remaining space of 326j is formed, and a portion corresponding to lower dish first region A1 in lower dish main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of mounting space 326j from that portion A portion corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray main body 325 is extended inside to attach the lower tray 322 capable of storing gaming balls. Therefore, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front, which makes the lower plate 322 inconspicuous and makes the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) relatively easy to be noticeable. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper tray and the lower tray were viewed side by side vertically in the conventional pachinko machine The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can attract the player's attention strongly it can.

  Further, at the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. The lower bowl cover 340, 340A for restricting the movement of the gaming ball prevents the gaming ball in the lower tray 322 from coming in contact with the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 contact or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the gaming ball does not abut on the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the gaming ball does not damage the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced by interrupting the game due to the breakage of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side.

  In addition, lower dish cover 340, 340A which restricts the movement of the gaming ball to the remaining space side of main body standing wall portion 325b and mounting space 326j in the lower dish second region A2 portion of lower dish main body 325 of lower dish 322. And the game ball can be prevented from invading (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or feeling unpleasant by intruding into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j by the game ball being inserted into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game Can be suppressed.

  Also, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 region of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the gaming balls are supplied in the lower plate 322 and bounced in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player is required to lower the lower plate first area A1 side (lower plate opening portion The lower plate cover 340, 340A can restrict entry of a fingertip or the like into the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j when the hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second region A2 from 326d), so that the finger tip And the like can be prevented from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), etc. Can.

  Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate cover 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. by the contact of the game ball to the lower plate cover 340, 340A Is not transmitted from the lower cover 340, 340A to the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the breakage of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is assured. It can be prevented.

  Further, since the lower disc ball opening hole 322a is provided in front of the lower ball ball supply port 323c at the lower dish second region A2 in the lower dish main body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is opened. In this state, the gaming ball discharged from the lower ball feeding hole 323c can be made to enter the lower ball dropping hole 322a as it is and discharged downward (dollar box), and the gaming ball can be discharged to the main body of the lower plate main body 325 It can be made difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower ball ball release hole 322a, as described above, the lower ball cover 340, 340A is provided, so that the game ball is of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, damage to the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be prevented, and interruption of the game is reduced to reduce the interest of the player in the game Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the gaming ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 is inclined The bottom surface is to be climbed, and the movement speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the gaming ball in contact with the lower plate cover 340, 340A can be reduced, movement of the gaming ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j is surely restricted by the lower plate cover 340, 340A. In addition to the above, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls abut on the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b and to suppress them from being broken.

  Also, since at least the lower cover 340, 340A is a separate member, when the lower cover 340, 340A is damaged, it can be easily repaired simply by replacing the lower cover 340, 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the gaming hall side where 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front side in the left-right direction bulges most forwardly below the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the game ball is received by the general winning opening 2001 etc. While being provided on the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 which has been taken out, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging part, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with a storage bowl capable of storing game balls, and is viewed outward of the rendering operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view A space at the rear of the mounting space 326j which is the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) in the lower tray first region A1 located and the front view Because the lower tray second region A2 is positioned at the front panel, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made more visible when viewed from the front, and the storage tray (upper tray 321) And the lower plate 322) can be made small and inconspicuous. Accordingly, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) is visible in a portion where the upper plate and the lower plate are visible, a gaming machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal that can make it possible to recognize at a glance that it is, and can attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, since the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it becomes smaller, the first of the lower tray main body 325 having the lower tray second region A2 located in the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j which is the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in front view Since the expansion unit 325B, the second expansion unit 325C, and the lower plate cover 340, 340A are provided, the gaming ball can be stored in the range (lower plate second region A2) which can not be seen from the front of the lower plate 322. it can. Therefore, the storage amount of the game balls can be secured sufficiently against the appearance from the front, so the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to make the game enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first region A1 have the lower tray cover 340 and 340A having the lower tray second region A2 and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension Since the lower tray 322 is configured by attaching (in combination) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower tray covers 340, 340A, a first extension portion 325B, a second extension portion 325C, etc. of different sizes are prepared in advance. The lower plate cover 340, 340A or the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C have a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the tray unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (changing) the lower cover 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to cope with the size of the rear portion of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the space at the rear depends on the amount of backward projection of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second one) having different amounts of backward projection The lower plate 322 can be made compatible with the rendering operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward, Can be stored reliably. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A has the cover upright wall 340a rising from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, 340A of various shapes is prepared in advance. In addition, it is made to correspond to various forms by combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to achieve the same function and effect as described above.

  Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Thus, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the gaming balls are placed is the lower plate main body 325, the portion of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A A boundary (seam, parting line PL) is never located. Therefore, since the weight of the stored gaming balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, the force is such that the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are pulled away from the lower tray main body 325 even if many gaming balls are stored. It does not act and can prevent the lower cover 340, 340A from being removed from the lower main body 325.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed to receive a game ball at the general winning opening 2001 etc. The lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball opening hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) provided with the lower plate 322 and the lower plate 322 and arranged at the center in the left-right direction. And the lower plate 322 is difficult to see from the front (player) (it is difficult to see), so the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, and the player's interest The pachinko machine 1 can have a high appeal that can be strongly attracted. In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball going from the lower ball supply opening 323c to the lower ball removal hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), It is possible to make it difficult to notice the flow of balls and prevent distraction, and it is possible to suppress a drop in interest for the game.

  Further, the bottom plate ball supply port 323c and the bottom plate in the bottom plate 322 for guiding the gaming ball from the bottom plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) It is assumed that the lower countersink hole 322a is kept open since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball being guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d and the part between the ball opening 322a and the like. The gaming ball supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower ball removal hole 322a, and the player can receive the game ball. An illusion can be made that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the inconvenience of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to allow the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since half or more of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, and the like are difficult to visually recognize from the front by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) The lower counter ball supply port 323c, the lower counter ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since half or more of the lower tray 322 is made to turn to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), the actual lower tray is smaller than the size of the lower tray 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls in the lower plate 322 as compared to the appearance.

  Further, in the state where the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball released from the lower disc ball supply port 323c into the lower board 322 can be Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower countersink hole 322a by the guide means such as the portion between the hole 322a and the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d and discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322. The game balls can be prevented from circulating around the lower plate 322, and the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 can be reliably made difficult to visually identify from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, when the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, the ball guide portion 322c etc. immediately sends the game ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 without causing the player to notice it. Since it is possible to discharge the lower balls from the lower ball ball removal holes 322a downward, it is possible for the player to illusion that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plates 322. Can. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the inconvenience of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to allow the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front half or more of the storage area (storage area) of the gaming ball in plan view of the lower tray 322. The actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size of the visible one with respect to the size of 322. Therefore, as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward in the front view below the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the game ball is received by the general winning opening 2001 etc. Stage operation unit attachment for mounting a large stage operation unit 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) having the same height as the entire height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 While having a portion 326a, it is concaved so as to turn to the rear lower the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the approximate center in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 Because it has a shape, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, since the large scale rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) appears to be emphasized at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate are vertically aligned in the conventional pachinko machine, the player can see At first glance, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the lower front decoration portion 326c recessed rearward on the left and right outside of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the game is moved to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), and a sufficient storage amount (volume of the lower plate 322) of gaming balls in the lower plate 322 can be secured. It is not necessary to play while paying attention to the lower plate 322 being full with the game balls, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game, to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 is wound to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall 322 (the front of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. In this way, it is possible to make it possible for the player to recognize that the storage amount of gaming balls is sufficiently secured even by touch, and in the state where gaming balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the inside of the lower tray 322 Since it is possible to recognize that many game balls are stored, it is possible to give a player a sense of satisfaction, and to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, since the finger of the hand put in the lower plate 322 is hard to touch the back wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., it gives the player the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine can be prevented from giving a sense of incongruity, and the player can be relieved and a decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed to be wider toward the back side (backward), the storage amount of the game balls can be sufficiently secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is less noticeable on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate front lower decoration portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is opened. Thus, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made relatively conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the gaming balls in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to enhance the appeal of the player and It can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, the player covers the lower plate 322 because the lower plate cover 340 covers the side and the upper part of the part of the lower plate 322 which is located behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). When putting a hand, it is possible to prevent a finger tip or the like from touching the inner surface of the dish unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) etc. It can be played in a safe state. In addition, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from intruding (spinning) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is disposed at the center of the front of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) The pachinko machine 1 can have a high appeal that can be made more noticeable and can strongly attract the player's attention, and the decoration by the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be easily viewed. Then, it is possible to enjoy the decoration and the effect of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball supply port 323c capable of communicating with the upper plate 321, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating up and down in an openable and closable manner, the conventional pachinko machine The player is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine because it has the same function as the lower tray at the time of playing with this pachinko machine 1 and is not confused about the function of the lower plate 322, as in the conventional It is possible to play the game with a feeling like this, and allow the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a are respectively disposed behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball supply port 323c are viewed from the front. The lower disc ball removal hole 322a can be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be clarified to improve the appearance, and a pachinko with high appeal that can strongly attract the player's interest It can be machine 1.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the tray unit 320 bulging forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 that the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting an effect to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of Is attached to the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) which is decorating the outside of the window, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is enclosed. The diameter is about 15 cm and the center is in the direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) A control button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 attached is attached, and a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, and the button lens Since the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration in the operation button are made by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, etc. Reduces the visibility of the outer edge and back side (rear side) of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) etc. from the gap between the member 432 (screen unit 470) And the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the decoration member 432 in the operation button provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the in-operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Since the outer edge and back side of the in-operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, the button lens 411 and the in-operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit can be enlarged by enlarging the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between them and 470) is relatively large, it can be well concealed by the first button decoration part 411a etc., so it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the appearance and at the same time, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest is strong. A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be drawn.

  Furthermore, since the button base 413 (body part 413a) cylindrically protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide anything outside the operation member inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 A plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged), that is, the advancing and retreating direction of the operation button 410 The light is likely to be refracted when viewed from the player side, since the light is inclined with respect to the plane orthogonal to Therefore, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the in-operation decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). Can make it difficult to see the outer edge and back side of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between them, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape which bulges outward, the volume in the operation button 410 is increased. It becomes possible to make the side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) larger and easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device in which the player can be enjoyed by the operation button 410 It is possible to facilitate the provision of the 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player.

  Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, designability (decorability) is given to the operation button 410. Therefore, the operation button 410 in the present pachinko machine 1 is made conspicuous to interest the player. This makes it easy to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play a game.

  Further, in the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque. It is possible to reliably hide that the back side of the operation button 410 or the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470) can be seen from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470). Deterioration in appearance of the button 410 or the like can be reduced to improve the appearance.

  In addition, the button lens 412 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 extending inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 and having a predetermined width, and in cooperation with the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Since it is possible to make the gap between the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 less visible from the side, the main portion 413a and the in-operation button decorative member 432 ( The space between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and the space for the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. Can be moved well.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 has a cylindrical shape, directionality is lost in the outer periphery as compared with the case where it has a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 can be surely enjoyed for the player, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, the player participation type effect for causing the player to operate the operation button 410 can be easily performed without confirming the position of the operation button 410 without performing the operation. Since it is easy to touch the operation button 410 and press the button, it is easy for the player to participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410, thereby making the player entertain and lowering interest. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, an effect image of the player is operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) The effect can be enjoyed and the player can be urged to operate the operation button 410 by the effect image or the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) A drop in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player participation type effect and have fun. In addition, by the effect being executed in the operation button 410, it can be made to think that there is something good depending on the player, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest Can.

  In addition, it is possible to visually recognize the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) through the transparent button lens 411 (a part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be made to immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and the player has a high appeal for the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 can be enhanced in the expectation for the effect It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine It may be applied, and even in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a is formed at a portion on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The button lens 411 may not have the first button decoration portion 411a.

  In the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the button frame 412 is not attached. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed over the entire circumference of a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (ie, the entire periphery of the outer periphery of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is surrounded from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411) Although the thing provided with the button base 413 (main-body part 413a) which protruded cylindrically to the 2 base unit 450 side was shown, it is not limited to this, but the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side second production It may be protruded toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround only a part of the entire circumference of the outer circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or may be a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a flat decoration by sticking or printing a seal, a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief, etc.) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as embossing, slit, or prism on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

  In the embodiment described above, the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outside portion of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the tray unit cover 326. The lower plate is such that it is recessed rearward from the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) and is mutually connected behind the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A). It is good also as 322, dents back only from the part of the right outside of production operation unit 400 (the 2nd production operation unit 400A), and one part turns to the back of production operation unit 400 (the 2nd production operation unit 400A) It may be

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is recessed backward (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. Although the example in which it dented in the shape was shown, it does not limit to this, It is good also as a polygon cylinder surface shape or the front surface dented in polyhedron shape.

  Moreover, although said example showed the example which attached the presentation operation unit 400 (2nd presentation operation unit 400A) in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, it does not limit to this, "an operation dial, a touch panel etc. "Having the operation device of", "having the rotating body having the decoration on the surface", "having the decoration having the decoration and the movable device for moving the decoration", "the game "With a decorative body that three-dimensionally looks up characters, items, logos, and scenes (diorama) etc. according to the concept of the machine", "characters, items, logos and prescribed tiles along the concept of the gaming machine A member such as a unit or a panel provided with a decoration such as "like" or the like by sealing, printing or the like may be attached. Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a) need not be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached such as a member attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

  In the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is provided with the presentation operation unit attachment portion 326a opened forward for attaching the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A). And a plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover) that does not have an opening (rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a) for attaching the rendering operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed in the rear of the pan unit cover. In addition, on the front of such a plate unit cover, a decoration such as a character, an item, a logo, a predetermined box shape, etc. in line with the concept of a gaming machine may be provided by sealing, printing, attaching a decorative member desirable.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an area slightly larger than a half of the storage area (storage area) of the gaming ball in plan view of the lower plate 322 is set by the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) as a covering portion. Although the example which covers visually hard from the front was shown, it is not limited to this, and it may be made to make visual hard to see from the front an area of half or less of the storage area of gaming balls in the lower plate 322 The whole of the plate 322 may be difficult to view from the front.

  In the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are arc-shaped parts partially provided in the circumferential direction. The second button decorative portion 411 b and the frame side lens 417 may be in the form of an annular ring extending over the entire circumference.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the rendering operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown, The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an oval) centered on the center.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410 and the second effect on the door frame side Although a rear member such as the display device 460A is always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member disposed in front and rear (or upper and lower) under predetermined conditions It is good also as composition provided with the variable light transmission means which a back side can recognize visually by fulfillment of. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a device such as a magic mirror that allows the rear side to be visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side", and "such as a liquid crystal film, transparent when the power is turned on / off. Become opaque or become opaque so that the rear side becomes visible. The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By providing the variable light transmitting means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in the normal state, only the front member or the front and rear members can be viewed. It is possible to show the player the decoration of the visible member. And, in the special state, by satisfying the predetermined condition, the rear side member (rear member or the member disposed on the rear side of the rear member) not visible in the normal state can be seen. The members and the back member, or the front and back members and the members on the back side of the back member can show the overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, which can make it difficult for the player to get bored, and can entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of

  Specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member is displayed by darkening the back side of the front member. It can be made visible to the player. Then, when the light between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is made bright by the light of the light emitting part such as LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied. The members become visible, and it is possible to show the player the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

  Alternatively, when the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state, so the decoration of the front member and the rear member It is possible to show the player the decoration by the surface of the player. When the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting unit such as an LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be viewed through the rear member. Through the members, it is possible to show the player a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character).

  Furthermore, when both the front and rear members are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be viewed through the front member. It is possible to show the player the decoration by the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED (or the space between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as LED And the requirements for the respective variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the members on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) are satisfied through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. Thus, by appropriately selecting the site to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the range that can be viewed can be changed in multiple steps, and a player can enjoy various decorations.

  In the above example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror in the state where the rear side is darkened. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, although the variable light transmitting means has been described as a magic mirror in the above-mentioned specific example, the same operation and effect can be obtained even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film or the like. In addition, when a liquid crystal film or the like is used as the variable light transmitting means, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has translucency). If the rear side of the member can be made bright (or decorated to emit light) by the light of the light emitting unit such as an LED, it is possible to show the player more various effects such as light emission effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. 73 is a schematic view of various detection signals input to and output from the game apparatus connection terminal board for gaming balls etc. relaying the electrical connection with the display board, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display control unit.

  The pachinko machine 1 has, as its control configuration, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG that performs control relating to a game including a payout of a winning ball in addition to a process of generating a control power source (for example, +5 V etc. And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect on a game advanced by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control board 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. A control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, as shown in FIG. 69, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game controls the process at the time of power on at the time of power on and a predetermined time has elapsed since the time of power on. The main control MPU 1310a is a microprocessor that incorporates various control programs such as a main control program that controls the game operation and is executed after execution, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from a detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids , And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors a predetermined voltage blackout or an indication of a momentary power failure; Te are provided.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”), the main control MPU 1310 a In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can extract an ID code from a non-volatile RAM and can refer to it.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in” that updates the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a jackpot gaming state among various random numbers related to gaming. Hard random number circuit 1310 an ′ ′) is incorporated. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a value 32767 as a minimum value is preset). The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value as an initial value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310 a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310 a, with one value in a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator described later, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without overlapping, and all values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted Then, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without overlapping. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310 a performs a big hit on the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an It is set as a judgment random number.

  The main control input circuit 1310 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310 c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcing reset of the stored information, and the reset function main control output circuit 1310 cb not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb has the information for outputting the various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  The first start opening sensor 4002 for detecting gaming balls entering the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 60, the second starting opening sensor 4004 for detecting gaming balls entering the second start opening 2004, and so on The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball entering the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b. Has been entered. Further, in the gate sensor 4003 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 60, the count sensor 4005 for detecting gaming balls having entered the large winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, which is attached and detects a fraudulent action using a magnet, is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the port's input terminal.

  The main control MPU 1310 a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca is output from the output terminal of the main control output circuit to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca, and the first special symbol display 1403 via the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. The drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special hold number indicator 1404, the second special hold number indicator 1406, the normal symbol indicator 1402, the state indicator 1401, and the round indicator 1407. .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the substrate 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310 ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005, A contact-type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 4020 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used as the first start opening sensor 4002, the second start opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so the detection of the game ball by the count sensor 4005 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch with a long life is used as the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2001 and 2201 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches whose lifetime is shorter than that of the proximity switch are used as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. The payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310 when normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 is completed as serial data. This signal (payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. Main control MPU 1310a, upon completion of normal reception of various commands from payout control board 951 as serial data, main control output with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) notifying that. The signal is output to the circuit 1310 ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. There is no reset function, and various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310 cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main cycle serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured of the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310ae etc., which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, It is connected via a circuit (see FIG. 79). The main rotation serial transmission port 1310 ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main rotation serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310 aea, a transmission buffer register 1310 aeb, and a serial management unit 1310 aec (see FIG. See 79). When the main control CPU core 1310 aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec, the serial management unit 1310 a ec sets the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310 aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In the present embodiment, 32 bytes are provided as the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. After setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb, the main control CPU core 1310 aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec.

  The power supply substrate 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. And BCO (see FIG. 75). The main control MPU 1310 can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period after power-on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the main control MPU 1310a causes the main control MPU 1310a to completely erase from the main control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

7-2. Disbursement control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball is, as shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout and an operation switch 954 having various functions. And an error LED indicator 860 b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310 a based on a detection signal outputted by being operated. Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in ..).

7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process executed at the time of power on and the payout of gaming media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor incorporating various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation and a ROM storing various commands and a ROM temporarily storing various commands, and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 CR unit input for exchanging various signals between 952 d and CR unit 6 It includes a power circuit 952E, a. In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”), the payout control MPU 952 a In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  The payout control program serializes a variety of game information from the main control board 1310 and various commands for payout from the main control board 1310 as a main payout serial data reception signal through the payout control input circuit 952b under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the payout operation of the gaming ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and these error generation command and error cancellation navigation command are transmitted to the serial serial data of the payer. The signal is output as serial data of the serial system to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of the warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  Further, the payout control program outputs (first door opening command) of a door frame opening command when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 in response to the opening operation. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, the payout control program also receives the door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when the detection signal (the door frame closing detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 according to the closing operation. While outputting, when the detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. For this reason, the payout control input circuit 952 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset information based on detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. And a reset function dispensing control output circuit 952 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit 952 cb not having a reset function and not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The payout control output circuit 952 ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a payout control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a dispensing control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the later-described payout control system reset, the payout function-free payout control output circuit 952cb does not reset the information. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  Out-of-balls detection sensor 827 for detecting out-of-balls of gaming balls in the supply passage of ball induction unit 820 of payout unit 800, and payout detection sensor 842 for detecting gaming balls discharged from payout outlets 831b and 832b of payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 for detecting the rotation of the delivery blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the delivery control MPU 952a via the delivery control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether or not the storage space of the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in the serial data mode, or operates the operation signal of the operation switch 952 (detection Signal) to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. Upon completion of normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect, and a payout control output with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952 ca, a signal (payout ACK signal) is outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952 ca to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminal of the serial output port, whereby the payout function-free payout control is performed. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.
When normal reception of various commands from the payout control substrate 951 as serial data is completed, the main control substrate 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control substrate 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca The drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d from the above, and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 834 from the payout motor drive circuit 952d, or the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed as an error LED display By outputting a drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the error LED indicator 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents that the error LED display 860b displays and notifies include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 951), and when the number “1” is displayed, it means “ball out” (specifically, the ball is out) Informing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically The payout rotary body and the game ball are engaged in the vicinity of the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotary body becomes difficult to rotate. To notify that When “3” is displayed, it notifies that “disbursement detection sensor error” (specifically, it indicates that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it notifies that "retry error" (specifically, it indicates that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and the number "6" When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it indicates that the storage space of the fal cover unit 270 is full using the stored storage space based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) And when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR not connected” (the electric connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6 Is notified, and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, the number of balls of gaming balls not yet paid out is predetermined Informing that it has reached the number of balls).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out, etc. to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca The ball number etc. of the game ball actually paid out are outputted to the external terminal board 784 through the resistance which is not shown.

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built in), and the game arcade (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of balls of the game ball, etc. and various information (game information, details of errors or errors relating to the payout operation of the game ball) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall The main control board 1310 which advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are firstly the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board It is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal in a serial manner to the payout control board 951 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is a CR unit The data is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the lent game balls, and at the same time, the game ball displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the ball rental return display unit 330. The signal is output to the ball lending return display unit 330 by outputting the signal to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball connection device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

  The power supply substrate 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 951 includes the capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control internal RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal thereof is given via the payout control input circuit 952b to a predetermined value of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased (cleared). The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb, and is also output from the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.

7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game device connection terminal board for game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6, and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described based on FIG. In addition to relaying the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. 71, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays the electrical connection between the boards (precisely, the game ball connection device board 869 is electrically connected with the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay board 880 , CR unit 6 and the game ball connection device board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball connection device board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal plate 880 and frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the substrate of CR unit 6 and the game device connection terminal board 869, between the game device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control substrate 951, the game device connection terminal board 869 and main door relay Wirings (harnesses) are used to electrically connect between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the game ball and the like, and the board of the lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365, respectively. Further, an AC 24 V described later from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 is generated from the supplied AC 24 V to a predetermined voltage VL (in the embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown). The game balls are supplied to the payout control board 951 through the loan device connection terminal plate 869, while the game balls are supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 .

  On the part surface of the frequency display plate 365, the ball lending button 328 which is a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 A return button 329, which is a segment display unit, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display portion 363 of the rental ball unit 360.

  The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected via the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game The input is made to the CR unit 6 through the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device It is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal plate 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 is a so-called dynamic lighting system in which three segment displays are arranged in a row, and one of the three-digit segment displays is sequentially driven one by one. The segment display of the digit is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the sphere rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. Ball loan return display unit 330 has digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for specifying one-digit segment display among three-digit segment displays, and the specified one-digit segment display Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of 7 signals) for designating the content to be displayed by lighting up the game unit connection terminal board 869 from the CR unit 6 and the main door relay terminal When input through the plate 880, the 1-digit segment indicators are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment displays It is possible to visually recognize the content due to the light emission of the device through the loan remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. In the CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a gaming apparatus such as a gaming ball and the like via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 by the built-in voltage generation circuit, and is in a ball lendable state where the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this luminescence can be viewed through the lending residual display unit 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistances mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. When it is input, it is configured to output BRDY, which is a rental ball request signal, to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. And CR unit 6 is a single payout operation start request signal to pay out a predetermined number of balls to be rented (in this embodiment, it is 25 balls and corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. , A signal indicating that it is possible or impossible to output to the CR unit 6 or that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible, such as a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the CR unit 6 or the like. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like in the hall sets in advance in the CR unit 6 that the gaming ball for 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, one payout operation Will be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, then 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device board 869. And, the prepaid card is discharged from the insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply substrate 931 in the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply substrate 931 is supplied with power from the pachinko island facility and can be electrically connected or disconnected from the AC 24 V (AC 24 V), and a power control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. A launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the striking launch device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and sphere feeding control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

[7-3-1. Power supply controller]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a and the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko facility by operating the power switch 934 A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing power whose power factor is improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates And a power supply generation circuit 935 d for generating a power supply.

7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a operates the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302 And a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not a finger is touched, and a one-shot button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not to forcibly stop launch of the gaming ball according to the intention of the player. And the detection signal from the signal is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game apparatus connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the release control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (playing) the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and performs control to output to the firing solenoid 682 While the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320 by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315; Control is performed to send the game balls received by the ball transport member to the ball striking device 650 side.

7-4. Peripheral control board]
In the peripheral control substrate 1510 of the second control unit SCG, effect control is performed based on various commands from the main control substrate 1310 with respect to the first control unit MCG, as shown in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door While performing drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 performing sound control of music, sound effects and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information for specifying the date, time A real time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information for specifying a second and a lower speaker 92 And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 which performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at the time of power on, and also after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub control programs that are executed and controls rendering operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from sound source built-in VDP 1512a of liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes such as various LEDs, etc. continued across peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a blank signal is input) Manage schedule data that prescribes Information, etc., and various information (eg, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state), information for managing a special effect flag, and the like. And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511 e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511 e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the backup power is supplied by the large capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By this, it is possible to hold the stored content for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply substrate 931, when the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511 e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is out of control. When the timer is up, the hardware is reset. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a predetermined period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. Since the peripheral control MPU 1511a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e when outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a fixed period, reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp from the lamp drive board serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) Game board motor drive data for transmitting drive signals to drive boards 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 serial for motor drive boards It is transmitted to the motor drive board 4180 from the I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric -Side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to specific drive sources from frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882 The door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 or transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 via It transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the rendering operation unit 400 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 This detection signal is serialized by the door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, and this serialized rendering operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The frame I / O port for detecting a rendering operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is input through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown) The serialized movable body detection data serialized by the serial transmission circuit is input from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and the system runs away using peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 1511e in combination. It is diagnosed whether it is

7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, peripheral control MPU 1511a has peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control DMA (abbreviated as Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, peripheral control various serial I, centering on peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It comprises an / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511 ak.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa reads and writes various data from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac via the internal bus 1511 ah while the peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae and the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, Various data are read from and written to peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak via internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b via the internal bus 1511 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the external bus 1511 h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. It reads and writes various data via the internal bus 1511 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the external bus 1511 h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I DMA0 is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 1511ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels of ~ DMA3.

  Specifically, peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a storage device of peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, and WDT 1511 af To perform data transfer independently between peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa The peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 1511 ah while peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a peripheral control various types of serial I / s built in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. Between devices with input / output devices such as O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak, without using peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad and external bus 1511 h are provided to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. And read / write, peripherals for input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511 ad and the peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  Peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad controls internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral bus 1511 ai, and external bus 1511 h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak etc It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae: serial I / O port for lamp drive board, serial I / O port for motor drive board, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED It has a serial I / O port for a frame, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor, a serial I / O port for a main control substrate, and a serial I / O port for obtaining presentation operation unit information.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and this timer is reset by hardware when it runs up. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af within a predetermined period (until the timer is up). It will take When the peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset does not occur.

  Peripheral control Various parallel I / O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal, door side motor drive light emission latch signal etc. In addition, it outputs clear signal to peripheral control external WDT 1511 e, The detection signals from the various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by the game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the integrated movable body detection data from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit by the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is determined. In this embodiment, the route between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly. The noise measures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED which has the meaning of weight on the game. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and other LEDs etc. except this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, and the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a is rotated to change the resistance value, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 stages are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is set, and music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the store clerks in the hall of occurrences of malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 and cheating against the pachinko machine 1 and contents concerning a game effect and the like are notified. (Eg, to render the screen developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as more powerful, to notify that the player is likely to shift to an advantageous gaming state, etc.) The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, from the mute to the maximum volume The volume of the image can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like in a hall operates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effects such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 Although the sound is small, when the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is in the wrongdoing, the notification sound set to the large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. There is a possibility to increase the volume to play the music and to add to music and sound effects to render the screen developed in the game board side effect display device 1600 as more powerful or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It can also be announced that it is expensive.

7-4-1 b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511 b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, liquid crystal display control unit 1512, RTC control unit 4165 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. Various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data and the like for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. It is done. The light emission aspect generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission aspect of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, track numbers for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects are defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in time series, and defines the operation of the electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and copied when the power is turned on in various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are also directly read from peripheral control ROM 1511b, when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c described later, etc. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511 b is used to correct the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. The correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b. The luminance setting information is, as described later, luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range over which the luminance of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the present The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 being set is included, for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time Therefore, when June has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b and the brightness is obtained. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. To adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance is set to 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and lighted.

7-4-1 c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Various control program copy areas 1511 cd, which exclusively store the copied various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc., stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b A variety of control data copy area 1511ce, which exclusively stores the copied data, and a backup non-management target, which exclusively stores, among the various types of information updated by execution of various control programs, ones that are not subject to backup A work area 1511 cf is provided.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged object work area 1511 cf and cleared to zero, while the backup is performed. With regard to the management target work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc, the power on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. And the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is input. ) Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and peripheral information (1 ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs It is comprised from Bank0 (1 ms) which memorize | stores exclusively as object. Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” provided in the area ranging from backup first area 1511 cb described later to backup second area 1511 cc are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when “(1fr)” outputs drawing data of one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 as described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a The V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a to indicate that it can receive screen data from the frame, so every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are additionally described (effect information (1 fr) and effects to be described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). “(1 ms)” is, as will be described later, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, etc., since peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4” respectively (The same applies to effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) to be described later).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, a reception command storage area 1511 cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511 cae Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, lighting signals, blink signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 are set. It is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the received various commands are received. It is a storage area to be set, and an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC information storage A storage area in which various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). It is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511 cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b to various control data copy areas 1511 ce may be read and set, and various schedule data may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable object information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It is a storage area in which the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired from the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 In ai, various information (for example, effect operation) in which the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are acquired based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 Storage area where rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 etc. created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400 are set. If the effect display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on the LOCKN signal to be output later to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of Bank 0 (1 fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf of Bank 0 (1 ms) The motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive substrate transmission data storage area 1511caa When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state is set. Every time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When the DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Ru. When peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf opens to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door decoration is applied to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed It is designed to proceed with the process based on it.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data storage area 1511 cag When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second region of motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing At the time, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It is supposed to be.

  Next, a backup first area 1511 cb and a backup second area 1511 cc will be described which exclusively stores the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 ca. In the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms) which is the content to be copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) Each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed to execute the peripheral control DMA controller 15 in the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511 cb, two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The page is copied at high speed to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Also, in the backup second area 1511 cc, a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The contents are copied at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511 cb has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) and one pair of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms). It is an area for managing as a page, and backup 2nd area 1511 cc makes Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair in total. It is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511 cb and the second backup area 1511 cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame) Contents that are copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511 cb and backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, every time steady-state processing is executed The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and whenever the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

7-4-1 d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a includes a backup management target work area 1511 da for storing exclusively information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs; A first backup area 1511 db and a second backup area 1511 dc for exclusively storing the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 da are provided. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d is a power on state command from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure) (see FIG. 89). Is an instruction to start the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, an instruction to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Even when it is not zero cleared. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511 ca, the backup first area 1511 cb, and the backup second area 1511 cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c described above are cleared to zero. In addition, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 It is supposed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d (for example, history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) Etc.) While the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c can be cleared, the contents (items) are not displayed at all and can not be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag It is comprised from Bank0 (SRAM) which memorize | stores information etc. for backup object exclusively. Here, to briefly describe the name of Bank 0 (SRAM), “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, as described above, and “Bank” The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4”, which are provided in an area ranging from backup first area 1511 db to backup second area 15 11 dc described later, have the same storage area as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. The “(SRAM)” is backed up by various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a, so “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3” , And “Bank 4” (also used for the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later have the same meaning).

  Next, a first backup area 1511 db and a second backup area 1511 dc for exclusively storing the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 da will be described. The backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc are managed as one page, in which two banks form one pair. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The data is copied at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac to the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511 db, one pair of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) is managed, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) match.

  Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, one pair is made up of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511 db is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and the backup second area An area 1511 dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) form one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc.

7-4-2. Liquid Crystal Display Controller]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control of music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. Thus, a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source") and drawn by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 In addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) 1512a which controls and the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, various kinds such as music and sound effects Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data The door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 with the audio data transmission IC 1512 c transmitted toward the decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 and the drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460 A transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect that is disposed near the lower side of the device 460 and transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320, and serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 A signal from the differential circuit 1512e, in addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal, and the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side rendering Signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is input, the circuit is connected to transmit this signal, while when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted And a forced switching circuit 1512 f connected to the circuit. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b displays, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display (ring display) as sprite data used for displaying a screen or image described later, and display of an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data to be used to display at least one selection display object to be described later, tonal adjustment background image data to be used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later In addition to the sound volume setting icon image data and the like used for display, the display of the main body frame rear surface image data and the service mode screen used for displaying the main body frame rear surface image where the position of each part on the rear surface of the main body frame 4 is visible Mode screen image data used for the break, break used to display the break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying a suggestion display for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the rendering operation unit 400 should be operated.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310 from peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c. The screen data at the top of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various types of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 After extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the top screen data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae Output to VDP1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the V blank signal every time the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output one by one from the top screen data.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 1511a receives from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c the sound command data at the top of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310. The sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and extracted in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the schedule data is recorded in response to the V blank signal being input. The next sound command data following the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511 cae is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511 ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511 c Output to the built-in VDP1512a. Thus, according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a receives the V blank signal as sound instruction data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the built-in VDP 1512a one by one.

7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
The sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, as shown in FIG. 74, based on the input screen data, from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b Extract side character data and upper dish character data to create sprite data and generate drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 The VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). Of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data from channel CH2 through peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in plate unit 320 of door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) the door frame side effect display device 460, synchronization between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is achieved.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay A terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a display on the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 mounted on the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the dish unit 320 It is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the periphery as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Whereas the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The wiring length from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to the channel CH1 and thus is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. Therefore, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, in the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, “V-by-One (Sine Electronics Co., Ltd.) By adopting the differential type communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to the influence of noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential)
The channel CH2 uses an interface according to the parallel method, while the serial interface according to the Signaling method is used. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (not shown). It is transmitted to the effect display drive substrate 4450. Then, the serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive substrate 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 The drawing data of the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and Image data for effect display 460 from channel CH2 Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” is a built-in VRAM for drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to generate above.

  In addition, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 is shown Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. After (transmission), a V-blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the V blank signal being input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a adopts a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) The drawing data of one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Further, when the sound command data described above is input from peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from main control board 1310, sound source built-in VDP 1512a stores the music stored in liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. And sound data such as sound effects are extracted and the built-in sound source is controlled to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set, the music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value to adjust the volume, adjust the sound data of the notification sound and its volume to notify the store clerk etc. of the occurrence of the trouble of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 Subvolume values are incorporated. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be shifted to a setting mode to be described later and adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is In practice, the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sound data of the effect incorporated into the used track among a plurality of tracks The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the adjusted substrate volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified effect sound is amplified and serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and for the notification sound, sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, Volume control set as a sub volume value to adjust the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track used It does not depend on the volume adjustment at all based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a, and synthesizes the maximum sound volume, and the sound volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 The amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, when an effect sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, control for sending an alarm sound so as to notify a store clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 First, the sub-volume value of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to the mute, and the notification The sound data of the track into which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value at which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually lower. The master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and this amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, in actuality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period elapses, sound generation forcibly set to mute is performed. The volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the schedule data for the board is again set as the sub-volume value by adjusting the substrate volume adjusted by turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of When the mode is shifted to the setting mode and is adjusted by operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 It is supposed to flow.

  Thus, when the notification sound flows to notify the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 when the effect sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, Although the volume of the effect sound is muffled and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muffled effect sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound has a predetermined period When no sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it went.

7-4-2 b. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b draws game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. While upper character character data is stored in advance, various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

7-4-2 c. Audio data transmission IC]
The audio data transmission IC 1512 c is a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay as a serial data of a difference system in which the right audio data is made a plus signal and a minus signal when serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data that transmits left audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal while transmitting to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , Frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194. Thus, music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference system between the left and right, respectively, between the substrates ranging from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, for example, When combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 into one left audio data, even if the negative signal is affected by noise, Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

7-4-2 d. Transmitter IC for door frame side effect]
As shown in FIG. 74, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal and a clock signal, and the red video signal The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are It is input to the transmitter IC 1512 d for side effect. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information which is difficult to distinguish for human eyes, the lower 2 bits including weak color information are invalidated although they are outputted from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

  Three synchronization signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization. Three synchronization signals, signals and clock signals, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only one differential pair cable These various signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 The drawing data output from channel CH2 of VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is from peripheral control board 1510 to frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and door although the length of wiring required for (first path) is short. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, a path from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 2) because the length of the wiring required for 2) is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the 1 The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the closing side which is the side, the effect display drive board 4450 etc. housed in the pan unit 320 provided on the door frame 3 It is necessary to pass through various wirings which electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the gaming balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and the upper tray 321 is a gaming ball. A full tank branching unit 770 is disposed which can branch and guide the game balls dispensed to the lower plate 322 when the tank is full.
Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized power source board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility, is disposed. As described above, the various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the noise due to electrostatic discharge by the game ball and the pachinko machine 1 are installed It is in the environment which receives the noise etc. which invaded.

  Therefore, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided in peripheral control board 1510 By adopting the differential communication of V-by-One (registered trademark), the system is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; As described above, the differential 1 pair cable is used as a wire for electrically connecting between the connection of the transmitter, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1 pair cable has two wires Is not a parallel line merely provided in parallel but a twisted pair cable. The twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one pair cable electrically connecting between the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. In contrast to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source in which the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source Even if a differential-type communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the corporation is adopted to make it hard to be affected by noise, the configuration by such hardware alone is due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball When serial data in a parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering a power supply line supplied from a pachinko machine with pachinko machine 1 installed, effect display stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 For the door frame side effect provided in the drive substrate 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by Shiba ICSDIC0, it will be received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 with the serial data affected, and output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source Image data is received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, an image like a so-called sandstorm is displayed to indicate what image There is a problem that it can not be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 with VDP 1512a with built-in sound source In addition to the configuration using such hardware, while adopting a differential system communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. in the transmitter IC 1512 d for effect, the system is less susceptible to noise. The transmitter and receiver are electrically connected to each other through a twisted pair cable capable of canceling (eliminating) the noise on the receiving side even if differential serial data is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame The noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of 3 and thus the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal display control unit 151 in door frame side effect display device 460. Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that can not be recognized at all what the image is like sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 intervene between the connection of, and between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but the separately assembled frame is mounted on the main body frame 4 so that the door frame 3 is attached. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to 4, electrically connect various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and the various wiring is removed, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 If it is impossible to solve the problem that occurs in the door frame 3, the door frame 3 may be replaced with the other door frame 3 and the door frame 3 may be attached to the door frame 3. By electrically connecting various wiring from various substrates provided on the side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3 'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the differential communication of “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the structure that is not easily affected by noise, in addition to the configuration using such hardware, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has invaded the wiring, that noise is canceled (removed ) Can be employed as a differential one pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the boards of peripheral control board 1510 and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral frame of relay terminal board 868 and the board of peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and with peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and effect display driving The substrate and the substrate 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other various signals are electrically connected to each other by a harness. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the video transmission wiring patterns described above are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 apart from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. A plurality of relay terminal boards such as a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are straddled along the route from the transmitter to the receiver. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal transmitting the serial data according to the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected to become noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the space between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the space between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral door relay While electrical connection is made between the terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive substrate 4450 by means of a twisted pair cable, wiring for transmitting power supply lines and other various signals is electrically conducted by means of a harness. In the twisted pair cable, one of the wires is red and the other is gray, and the wire for supplying power is red and the other wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

7-4-2 e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are output to the forced switching circuit 1512 f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 Are differentially input into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). The LOCKN signal output request data is a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or becomes a customer wait state for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 to be described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 , And is transmitted as a request for confirming the operation of the door-frame-side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differentiation circuit 1512 e, the forcible switching circuit 1512 f performs circuit connection so as to transmit these two signals, while the difference is generated. When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the inverter circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is made such that the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. It is done. Thus, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512 e, the two signals are connected in order to transmit the two signals, and thus the two signals are While transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, in the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d A signal output from the IC 1512 d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a demonstration with the game board side effect display device 1600 in a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or in waiting for customers. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (in fact, the differentiation circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and various serialized A liquid crystal module circuit 4450 V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs the signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the frame is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the LOCKN signal input, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying that effect and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600 The information is displayed and notified on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the above.

  When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not have a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. It can be determined that no problem has occurred in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the 320, but a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image for notifying that effect (for example, “a malfunction occurs in the upper-dish liquid crystal display device Please call the store clerk. "), The sound source built-in VDP1512a is controlled by the game board side While outputting to the display device 1600, an alarm sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper liquid crystal display device") to that effect is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. An announcement sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3 by this. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC 4165a. In this RTC 4165a, a RAM 4165aa in which calendar information and time information are held is built in (hereinafter, described as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is configured to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in the present embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply of the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without any supply of power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets it in the above-mentioned RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and acquires this acquired calendar information and time information Based effects can be developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As such an effect, for example, the screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 for December 25th, and if it is New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown A screen to be executed may be expanded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of LED type, the brightness setting information of the LED is stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is the backlight of the game board side, from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the currently set game The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as date and time information of the hour, minutes, and seconds. Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are attached with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a turns ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only. It is supposed to

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information is input in the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. It is set to the date of manufacture, which is the date of the month and the hour, minute, and second.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, the brightness information in the case where the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type is attached to the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, the input date and time information, etc. , It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability and high probability).

  In addition, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set as the manufacturing date depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Sometimes it is too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of the The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above, thereby providing a game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and specifies calendar information and date. Acquire the time information to specify minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, adjust the range over which the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps Luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information to be used and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b.

  For example, if June has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information being 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5% which is correction information acquired for the image. If it is already 12 months since the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 has been turned on. When acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) from 1b and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 85% is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S 1002 in the control unit power on processing. And current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510 a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by turning the knob. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by turning the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is a portion of the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (with built-in sound source VDP 1512 a) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is obtained, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or cheating against the pachinko machine 1, (For example, the screen developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed as more powerful, or it is notified that there is a high possibility of transition to an advantageous gaming state for the player. Etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, muffling The volume from the maximum volume to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like in a hall operates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effects such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 Although the sound is small, when the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is in the wrongdoing, the notification sound set to the large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It can also be notified that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the rendering operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400. There is. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 or the pressing operation unit 405. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control substrate 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the store clerk in the hall that can turn the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not be able to hear music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time, or a wait by customer becomes a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if it is difficult for the store clerk in the hall to feel the volume adjusted and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the effect operation unit 400. The volume operation unit can be increased to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405, or when the volume clerk adjusted by the hall feels loud and feels loud with music or sound effects, the rendering operation unit A desired sound volume can be reduced by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game is continued for a predetermined time, and when waiting for a customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and was playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is adjusted. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to feel the volume adjusted by the player who was playing the game, and to hear the music and sound effects, this time, he sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and play the game by sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time If the player who is playing feels loud and the music and sound effects are felt loudly, the player who is sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game plays the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply substrate 931 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control substrate etc. will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko facility. When the power supply switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko facility is supplied to the power supply substrate 931, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply substrate 931 includes a power control unit 935 and a emission control unit 953. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The part 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24 V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply substrate 931 and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 volts AC (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power, creates DC +37 V (DC +37 V, hereinafter, described as "+37 V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935 c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source, and the gaming area 5a is shown in FIG. Control the driving current for launching (projecting) to the shooting solenoid and output it to the shooting solenoid 682 while outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and performs control to send the gaming ball received by the ball sending member to the hit ball firing device 650 side.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to +37 V to +5 V DC (+5 V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+5 V"), +12 V DC (+12 V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+12 V"), and DC. +24 V (DC + 24 V, hereinafter, described as “+24 V”) is respectively created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The power supply system supplied with +5 V is a +5 V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with +12 V is a +12 V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with +24 V is a +24 V power supply line.

  The +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The +5 V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d is supplied to the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 through the payout control substrate 951. The +5 V production circuit 1310 g produces +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a from +12 V from the payout control board 951. The +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a via the main control filter circuit 1310 h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM of the payout control substrate 951 and The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control substrate 951 is also electrically connected. That is, +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952 a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode PD0 The current flows to the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected by the electrical connection method in which the +5 V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 returns from the payout control substrate 951 to the power supply substrate 931 again. Is supplied and can be charged. Thus, when +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d is not supplied to the payout control substrate 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control substrate 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the stored contents are held by supplying the payout VBB to the power terminal of the payout control internal RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power control terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951. And the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control substrate 1310. That is, +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a and causes the diode MD0 to forward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0, Current flows toward the As described above, the capacitor BC0 is charged by being supplied with +5 V by the electrical connection method in which +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. It can be done. As a result, +12 V created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951, and the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g can create +5 V When the main control substrate 1310 is depleted, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951 as the main VBB, so the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is a diode. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying the backup power to the main control built-in RAM is configured by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltages supplied to the control boards and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltages supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power generation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 are supplied to the payout control substrate 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and of these three types of voltages, +12 V and Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Also, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 935 d of the power source substrate 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and peripherals via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 It is respectively supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 are, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the drive source drive circuit of the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive substrate 4170 and the motor drive substrate 4180. It is supplied to 4180a respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the board 5.

  Peripheral control board 1510 is provided with +3.3 V creation circuit 1510 b for creating +5 V to 3.3 V DC (DC +3.3 V, hereinafter referred to as “+3.3 V”) supplied from frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3 V produced by the +3.3 V production circuit 1510 b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600 a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, +12 V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600 b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 includes a +9 V creation circuit 194 a that creates +12 V to +9 V DC (DC +9 V, hereinafter referred to as “+9 V”) supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. A total of four voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decoration substrates of the door frame 3 together with +9 V generated by the +9 V forming circuit 194 a.

  Further, +12 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper-disc-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates +12 V to +3.3 V. In addition to being supplied to the various electronic components making up the liquid crystal module circuit 4450 V shown in FIG. 74, +3.3 V produced by the upper dish side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450 x is also supplied with And the door frame side effect display device 460 is supplied. The voltage generated by the upper-plate-side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame-side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951 a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952 a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5 V from the power supply substrate 931, and removes noise from the +5 V. The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0 and, for example, to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. For example, +12 V from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control unit 952 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784 a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control substrate 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to the hall computer installed in the game hall. It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping, from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a, the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Note that +24 from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951 without being used in the payout control substrate 951.

8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 1310 a and the like, a +5 V creation circuit 1310 g, a main control filter circuit 1310 h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e and the like. The +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied with +12 V from the power supply substrate 931 via the payout control substrate 951 and creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a from this +12 V. In the main control board 1310, a power supply system to which +5 V generated by the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g is applied and supplied is a +5 V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5 V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 and the +5 V power supply line created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. The +5 V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control substrate 1310, and the +5 V of the main control substrate 1310 is configured. The +5 V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310 g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310 h is supplied with +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g and removes noise from this +5 V. The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0 and, for example, to the main control MPU 1310a. For example, +12 V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310 b and the like, and +24 V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control solenoid driving circuit 1310 d and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is supplied with +12 V and +24 V from the power supply substrate 931 via the payout control substrate 951, and monitors the signs of the +12 V and +24 V power failure or short interruption. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e detects a +12 V and +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure indication, it outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notification. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952 a via the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control substrate 951. In addition, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Also, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the blackout notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are respectively input to the decoration substrate of the door frame and the like through the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e applies the voltage to one of the +12 V power line or the +24 V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines of the +12 V power line and the +24 V power line. As compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the symptom of the power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 to FIG. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply created by the main control board 1310, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU Various input / output signals to and from, and an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIGS. Besides the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz ) Is mainly composed.

9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310 h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal applied with +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310g, its second terminal grounded to ground (GND), and its noise component removed from its third terminal +5 V is output. The +5 V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected at one end to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC0 so that the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) is first removed. Are smoothed out.

  The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 470 microfarads (μF)) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The ripple is further removed and smoothed by being connected to. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, and the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It should be noted that when the power supply from the pachinko facility is cut off due to a power failure or momentary interruption at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the electric charge in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 becomes a power failure or an instantaneous stop After generation, it is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC3 grounded, and the +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and a capacitor MC4 whose one end is grounded with the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and via the resistor MR0, the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. Is applied to the plus terminal of the As a result, as described above, +12 V created by the power creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951 and created +5 V When the circuit 1310 g can not generate +5 V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC 0 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 as the main VBB, and therefore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310 h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC 1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC5 connected to ground, and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5 It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (eg, 4.25 V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic corresponds to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function The logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, and this logic corresponds to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Respectively input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310 ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310 h is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying +5 V to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal respectively.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside It is in the state.

9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is detected from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. It is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control substrate 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input in addition to the signal. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, so here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control substrate 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and main control of the main control substrate 1310 It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error, A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on and an error release after power on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, ie after a predetermined period from the time of power on) And the ability to Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control The main control built-in RAM is cleared by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 from the payout control board 951, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic from the payout control board 951 is input. The operation signal whose H has become HI is input from the payout control board 951 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control substrate 951 within a predetermined period after power on is a pull-up whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR4 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and is a non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10 A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 The line is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When this is the case, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a Be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 1310a does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the transistor MTR0 is turned on to switch the switch The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the logic becomes LOW. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 inputted to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I will judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951. That is, between the substrates of the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951, the voltage is higher than the control reference voltage of +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the substrates. The voltage of +12 V is used to increase the signal reliability. Therefore, in the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are on the +5 V side by pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 which are input through the panel relay substrate 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of + 12V and + 24V, and detects a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, when it detects a blackout or a blackout indication. It outputs to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then monitoring of a +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure, monitoring of a +12 V power failure or a momentary power failure, and output of a power failure notice signal will be described.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal which is a reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 and the K terminal which is a cathode terminal are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line +5 V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set), which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC20 grounded at one end, and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20 AC component is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used. , And used to compare the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V with the reference voltage Vref. The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC21, which is grounded. The +5 V applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24 V blackout or momentary interruption]
As described above, the monitoring of the +24 V blackout or instantaneous blackout is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the +24 V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied, is the other end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24 V power supply line and one end Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) Are electrically connected. The +24 V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 A of the comparator MIC 21 is divided by +24 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 21 and MR 22, and the capacitor MC 23 removes the ripple and smoothes it. . The values of the resistances MR21 and MR22 become a power failure detection voltage V1 pf (in this embodiment, set to 21.40 V) which is set in advance when the +24 V fails or momentarily stops, and the voltage starts dropping from +24 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, One end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24, and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the voltage of +24 V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1 pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND) The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of +12 V blackout or instantaneous blackout]
As described above, the monitoring of the +12 V blackout or instantaneous blackout is performed by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the +12 V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitor voltage V 2 of +12 V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR 24 electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) Are electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is +12 V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 24 and MR 25 and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC 25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47 V) which is set in advance when the +12 V causes a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts dropping from the +12 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21, is an open-collector output, and is electrically connected to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 A described above. Of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 connected at one end and electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24 connected to ground. It is electrically connected to the terminal PR. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the +12 V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2 pf, the +12 V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21, is +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 is ground (GND) The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of blackout notice signal]
The D-type flip flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal 1D terminal by the change of the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 1CK terminal, and this stored value While outputting (logic) from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from a negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the same as the logic of the signal inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. When the signal whose logic has become HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. Also, when the D type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to input a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal to set the latch state, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal that is input is input, the state in which the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic 1) Maintain the output state from the Q terminal).

  In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is grounded at the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal is stored and not output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal from the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure, as described above Alternatively, a signal from the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC22, which is grounded, and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Ripple is removed by capacitor MC22 and +5 V is smoothed, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is the external It is in an unconnected state.

  In the D type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on process to be described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310 a is input to the CLR terminal as its logic becomes LOW via the main control output circuit 1310 ca with a reset function. The D type flip flop MIC22 is configured to release the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, and at this time, the logic input to the PR terminal as the preset terminal is inverted to output the output terminal. Output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic thereof becomes HI via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal to latch the input state.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a through main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22 A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure advance notification signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and the signal outputted from the 1 Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is reset The non-function main control output circuit 1310 c b outputs it as a payout blackout notice signal to the payout control board 951 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral black out notice signal.

  The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connecting the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR28 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line at one end and also non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 because the logic thereof is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a It is input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 as its logic becomes HI because it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip flop MIC22. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notification signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a It is input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function for outputting a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the payout control board 951 as the payout blackout notification signal is open. The output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR31 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR34 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC26 grounded. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via the (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control substrate 951 through a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the payout control substrate 951. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit formed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is a switch circuit of the former stage, and the circuit formed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the latter stage is a switch circuit of the latter stage. It is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor of the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage because its logic becomes LOW because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 951 via the wiring (harness), and the payout blackout notification signal whose logic is LOW is dispensed It is input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic thereof becomes HI to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned ON by being input. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is lowered to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control substrate 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout blackout notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function for outputting a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35 And are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR36 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of peripheral control unit 1511 in peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. And one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 because its logic is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the wiring (harness). The peripheral power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 as its logic becomes HI because it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip flop MIC22. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notification signal whose logic is LOW is the peripheral control substrate. It is input to 1510.

  Thus, the main control input circuit 1310 b which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1 Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 The main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal, and there is one transistor in each, and the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and peripheral While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is dispensed to the payout control board 951 Reset function to output as a power failure notice signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a former stage and a latter stage, and the logic of the payout blackout notice signal is the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral blackout notice signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 And the logic of the blackout notice signal and the logic of the peripheral blackout notice signal.

  The collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR29 having one end electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and main control MPU 1310a via non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the second embodiment via the wiring (harness). In discharge control input circuit 952b of discharge control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and there is no reset function main control output circuit 1310cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is connected Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a Since it is mounted on 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to give notice of a blackout by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the blackout notice signal using +5 V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. Between the board with 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards. Control of payout control MPU 952a and peripheral control MPU 1511a It is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The serial data input terminal of the serial control port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payment serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a do not have the reset function as the main payment serial data transmission signal and transmit the serial data transmitted to the payout control board 951 from the TXA terminal. The circuit 1310cb transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, and the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A main circuit serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function as a peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout that indicates the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input through the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are transmitted through the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is input etc.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described payee serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 951, and for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, the drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310 ca with reset function. To output various driving signals from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) regarding the game to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and the main function with reset function The control output circuit 1310 ca outputs various information (game information) relating to the game to the payout control board 951 or the like.

9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12 V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through the payout control board 951, and the +5 V creation circuit 1310 creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12 V. ing. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. It is done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 47 μF), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) are incorporated. Is mainly configured.).

The +12 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (.mu.F)). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and electrically connected to the anode terminal (No. 1 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, for example, when the power from power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to main control substrate 1310 via discharge control substrate 951 due to a power failure or a momentary stop, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC50 is generated. The voltage can be continuously applied from the main control substrate 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 as +12 V.

  As described above, when a power failure or an instantaneous stop occurs in the power supply terminal VDD of the main control MPU 1310a, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, the electrostatic capacity: 470 μF) shown in FIG. 77 is charged. The main charge serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a is at least at least a command for which the main control CPU core 1310 aa has been set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41 aea by the unit 1310 aec and transmission complete as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 1310 aea.

  As described above, the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is to the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary interruption occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control substrate 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Because the main control MPU 1310 a is built in, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae transmits the command set by the main control CPU core 1310 aa in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb by the serial management unit 1310 aec to the transmission shift register 41 aea for transmission When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310 aea as main cycle serial data, a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 50 at +12 V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the main transmission serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310 a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control substrate 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal outputting the main cycle serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and the resistor MR51 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the same. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR52 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The circuit formed of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no current flows in the forward direction to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON. . As a result, a forward current flows in the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

  The +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (the sixth terminal) which is a power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the AR 11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial control I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main cycle serial data transmission signal, and the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a Is input to the input terminal of.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 by a power failure or a momentary power failure, The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as the +5 V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 by applying +5 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to the main control MPU 1310a when power or momentary interruption occurs The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the built-in main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae can be completely transmitted, and the main cycle serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main cycle serial data is cut off. It is ensured that the peripheral control board 1510 is received without being damaged or being lost.

  When the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of main control MPU 1310a to peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR 50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. Logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned ON to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The main voltage serial data transmission signal whose voltage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It is the logic of

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the +5 V power supply line to which +5 V as the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a is applied, and the +12 V power supply line to which +12 V as the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop due to the occurrence of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. That is, for the main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a, a +5 V power supply line, and the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310 h as the first auxiliary power, Are electrically connected in parallel, and even if a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5 V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is configured from resistance MR50, resistance MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. Reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, +12 V applied to the +12 V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 which is the second auxiliary power supply Even if a voltage for communication applied from the +12 V power supply line via the diode MD 50 drops due to a power failure or a momentary interruption due to the parallel connection of the terminal and the circuit, the second auxiliary power supply By applying the communication voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the disconnection of the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and to prevent the dropout, so the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the dropout of the command immediately after the occurrence of the power failure or at the momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the main transmission serial transmission port 1310 a contained in the main control MPU 1310 a are all constituted of the resistance MR50, the resistances MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 as main transmission serial data. 470 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the reset function-free main control output circuit 1310cb that functions as a communication interface circuit. And 220 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb are reset to function as interface circuits as main cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the function-free main control output circuit 1310 cb, the peripheral control board 1510 may drop without dropping or disconnecting a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. Can be received reliably.

[10. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control substrate 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit etc. of the payout control unit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The first terminal of payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5 V from power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 75, and one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of capacitor PC0 grounded. The capacitor (PC0) first removes +5 V from the power supply substrate 931 from the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) and smoothes it. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which the noise component is removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to ground (GND), the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 180 microfarads (μF)) By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal as the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal as the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc. . When a power failure or an instantaneous interruption occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power from the pachinko facility is shut off, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 causes a power interruption or an instantaneous interruption. After generation, it is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded, and the +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  In addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (a discharge control built-in RAM) built in the discharge control MPU 952a, and a capacitor PC4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of the discharge control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and via the resistor PR0, the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. Is applied to the plus terminal of the Thus, as described above, when +5 V generated by power supply generation circuit 935 d of power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to payout control substrate 951, the charge stored in capacitor BC1 is paid off VBB. Because the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is supplied to the payout control substrate 951 as The stored contents are kept by applying a payment VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is configured by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

10-2. Circuit of payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 is reset as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. 80 in addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 MHz in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 is for resetting the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC5, and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (for example, 4.25 V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic corresponds to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function The logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, and this logic corresponds to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Respectively input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function are activated when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold. Reset is applied to the payout control output circuit 952ca. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC7, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC8 at one end, and +5 V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by removing ripples further. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the OE terminal which is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and a clock signal of 8 MHz is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded with the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input through the power supply substrate 931, and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, and subsequently, the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input, and the circuit to which the payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit is input A circuit to which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Note that various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279 and the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, so here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which detection signal from door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is other than the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR22 which is grounded. Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC20 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 20 A)) payout control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as the door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR25 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24, and is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR27 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to main control substrate 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of main control substrate 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. As the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, The contact constituting the door frame opening switch 618 is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to the fluttering phenomenon of repeating ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of resistors PR21 and PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24 and PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26 and PR27 and transistor PTR22 It is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a detection signal from 618.

In the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame open switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame open signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Ru. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. Thus, a door frame open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, since the door frame open switch 618 is off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. And the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5 V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. And the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is an input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952 a by turning on the door frame open switch 618. An outer end frame door open information output signal input to PA0 and having a logic HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal having a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310, In the state where the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, when the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which detection signal from main frame open switch is input]
The main frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is the other of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR30 which is grounded. The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC21 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and connected with the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. As the transistor PTR23 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  The No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR32 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of transistor PTR 24 is electrically connected to main control substrate 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310 b of main control substrate 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. As the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, or when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, The contact constituting the main body frame open switch 619 is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the main body frame open switch 619 due to the fluttering phenomenon of repeating ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR 29 and PR 30 and the transistor PTR 23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR 31 and PR 32 and the transistor PTR 24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619.

  When the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned off. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in a state where main body frame 4 is opened from outer frame 2, since main body frame open switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is the main control board It is input to 1310.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 The main frame door open signal whose logic has become HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF to The outer end frame door open information output signal with the LOW being input is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with the logic set to LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Even in this case, since the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it can not be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the above, the door frame 3 and / or It can be determined that a state where the player does not occur during normal game that the main frame 4 is open has occurred, and an external terminal frame 784 has an outer end frame door open information output signal. This outer end is designed to be input The door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, Or although it can not be determined whether the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, there is a state where the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open does not occur during normal gaming. It can be determined that it is occurring.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is shorted for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even in the state of conducting), the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 and the body frame open switch 619 is shorted for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, by adopting the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 as a normally closed switch, the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are replaced with a normally closed switch (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 'and body frame opening switch 619') The door frame opening switch 618 'is turned on (conductive) in a state where the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4 and turned off (disconnected) in a state where the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . When the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, the switch is turned on (conductive) and when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 'is broken for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body for some reason Even when the frame opening switch 619 'is disconnected and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Thus, even when the door frame opening switch 618 'and the body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of disconnection. The outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). Circuit to which the delivery blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the delivery blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e included in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 through the PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR42 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 40 A)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. As the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input as the payout failure notification signal to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  A circuit configured of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of two voltages of +12 V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 931, and detects no signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts, no reset function A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 1310 cb. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the + 24V voltage is larger than the blackout detection voltage V1pf, and the + 12V voltage is higher than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When both conditions of large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 951 through the wiring (harness), and the logic is LOW. While the paid out blackout notification signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When the condition is met, the transistor MTR22 of the rear stage Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the detection failure voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage + 12V is larger than the detection failure voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a blackout or a momentary loss of voltage of + 12V and + 24V. At the same time, since the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the payout control substrate 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when one of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, that is, +12 V and / or +24 V When there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the payout blackout notification signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e. Is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no indication of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and +24 V, a power failure notification signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout blackout notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a according to the blackout notice and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is a payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is a full detection sensor 3 through the resistor PR44b. The terminal filter PIC50 is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 through the resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC 50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND) in addition to the electrical connection to the resistor PR45, and one end is connected to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and also a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40 B).) Payout control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as the full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The circuit configured of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 270 is full with the stored gaming balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931, When a signal that is pulled up to +12 V by pull-up resistor 44a and becomes HI in logic on payout control board 951 is input to payout control board 951, while the storage space is full with stored gaming balls , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the storage space is not filled with gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931. The transistor PTR41 is turned on by inputting the signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, the full signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full with the gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is the payout control board via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931. The signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and having a logic LOW at 951 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 described above, whereby the transistor PTR 41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR47, and a full signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit configured of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 through the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration is employed, detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are T-type filter circuits such as a three-terminal filter PIC50 for full detection sensor. It has a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the fal cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the delivery detection sensor 842 and the like provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the body frame 4. The path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 270 is full with the gaming balls stored, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the storage space is full by storing the gaming space, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout rotating body is stopped. It is supposed to control. That is, when noise intrudes into the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is not full of the gaming balls with the storage space stored, but In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the gaming balls by the payout rotating body is stopped, and it is possible to drive the payout motor 834 despite the fact that the storage space is full with the reserved gaming balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotary body and continuing the payout of the gaming ball, the payout rotary body itself can not rotate and the payout motor 834 Load is applied abnormally, and the discharge motor 834 is overloaded to generate abnormal heat and malfunction, or the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 834 is transmitted to the rotational movement of the discharge rotor. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is first selected so that noise components are removed from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 in the three terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the previous stage through the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR50 whose ground is grounded. Further, the fourth terminal, which is an output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC41 which is grounded. ing. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR53 whose ground is grounded. The emitter terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40 C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is changed by turning on / off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front and rear stages, and the signal becomes an RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input to

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR56 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR 44 is electrically connected to main control substrate 1310 through a wiring (harness), one end of main control input circuit 1310 b of main control substrate 1310 shown in FIG. 77 has +12 V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR 44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA 0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact constituting the operation switch 954 repeats ON / OFF for a short time. The circuit is also configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit at the former stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit at the latter stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44 Is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 is connected to the RAM (payment control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power on and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time to time, and an error release after the power is turned on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period has passed from the time of power on) It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) In the function to perform the error cancellation in the above, it becomes an error cancellation signal.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR42 of the previous stage is turned ON while the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 of the previous stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 of the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR54 and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after power on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge not to indicate.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal of which the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR 44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, a RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is pulled down to the main control board 1310 when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness). It is input. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 receives the logic “LOW” shown in FIG. 77 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of power on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW becomes the transistor of the previous stage. The transistor PTR42 at the front stage is turned off and the switch circuit at the front stage is also turned off when input to the base terminal of the PTR42, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 at the rear stage. Is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR51, so that the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the RWMCLR signal whose voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is applied to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the command is to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge that it is something to indicate.

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation becomes logic LOW by the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 receives the logic HI shown in FIG. 77 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it instructs to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952 d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952 da and a drive IC PIC 60. The power supply input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952 da are electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and the +5 V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and +5 V are applied respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952 da is connected to ground (GND) It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be The power supply output terminal of voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals which are the cathode terminals of drive IC PIC 60 via Zener diode PZD 60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of payout motor 834. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12 V or +5 V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952 da. While supplying to the terminal and the 10th terminal respectively, it supplies to the payout motor 834.

  The drive IC PIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND) and are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60. A payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second, fourth, ninth, and eleventh terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, which are collector terminals, are the first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal and the 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 respectively via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is used. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca through the resistors PR60 to PR63 of the drive ICPIC60 It is outputted to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal and the twelfth terminal which are base terminals respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 834 to rotate the dispensing motor 834. In addition, when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is interrupted | blocked by this switching, counter electromotive force generate | occur | produces. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC 60, the drive IC PIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as protection, the zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the third stage and the tenth stage of the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60. Adopted the circuit configuration.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the game ball request signal BRDY from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout operation start request signal BRQ. , And supplied with a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 71, while the payout control substrate 951 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball Through terminal plate 869, an EXS signal indicating that a single dispensing operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that a dispensing operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible And output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 Sometimes, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and also via the resistor PR72 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR74 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and a non-inverting buffer FIG. 80 through ICPIC80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC80A)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. As the transistor PTR70 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and that signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR76 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line at one end, not shown. Electrically connected to the other end of the As the transistor PTR71 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit configured of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and switching circuit It will turn on. Thus, the CR connection signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the CR connection signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PTR75 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Ru.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and switching circuit It will turn on. Thus, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. Ru.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931 Be done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON, When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC80 B) without inverting). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRDY signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same logic as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photo coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned on, while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is connected to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC72 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR80 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that a single dispensing operation has been started or completed is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the resetting function. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is input from 952 cb via a resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal via the reset function-free output control circuit 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes as the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON / OFF, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic is HI The EXS is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb It is the same logic.

  The PRDY signal which indicates that the dispensing operation for dispensing the lent ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the signal output via the reset function-free output control circuit 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic is HI PRDY is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb It is the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Be done. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as a payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 cb without reset function from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a. There is no reset function. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 c b to the main control board 1310.

  The RWMCLR signal, the payout blackout notification signal, the door open signal, the full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) are connected to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition to the signal 1 etc.) being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 which indicates the completion of the normal reception of the above-described payee serial data reception signal is output via the payout control input circuit 952b. The detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are respectively input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are respectively output to the payout control output no payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminals of the predetermined output ports of the payout control MPU 952a, and the EXS signal from the reset function no payout control output circuit 952cb The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 through the payout motor drive circuit 952 d In addition to The main control of the payout ACK signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with the reset function is outputted to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, the payment ACK signal notifying the completion of the normal reception completion of the main payment serial data reception signal described above. The drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca as shown in FIG. Output to etc.

10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input and output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the payout control board 951 includes the above-described payee serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. Are output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310 b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 951 is a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above. And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output signal, game such as starting opening winning information output signal The game information signal and the payout blackout notice signal, etc., are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control substrate 951.

10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as a winning ball by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. Big prize information of the prize ball number information output signal outputted each time, the main prize sphere number information output signal, the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 Outputs game information signals such as output signals, probability fluctuation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time information output signals, start opening winning information output signals, etc. to external terminal board 784 Do. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784. In other words, two signals are outputted to the external terminal board 784, the outer end frame door open information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output information signal, and starting opening winning combination information Eight signals called output signals are outputted (passed) through the payout control board 951.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15 round big hit information output signal or the 2 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer as one big hit information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of times the round has become 2 rounds (2 round big hit) The number of times of occurrence of the jackpot), the number of times of big hit when the round has become 15 times (number of times of occurrence of big hit of 15 rounds), and the sum is the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, since the hole computer can not grasp the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit and the number of occurrences of the 15 land big hit from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large It can not be grasped whether it is a two round big hit or a 15 round big hit. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and among the players, it is selected whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, since the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit, even if the player starts the game, only the 2 round big hit occurs. There are times when the 15 round big hit does not occur easily. As described above, although the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, the player's irritability may be more than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hall computer generates two rounds of big hit occurrences by separately outputting 15 round big hit information output signals and two round big hit information output signals to the hole computer as big hit information output signals. It has become possible to accurately grasp the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is the 2 round big hit or the 15 round big hit, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of the big hit and the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit as the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period until the 2 round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is also 15 round big hits. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer in the period from the generation to the end. As in the present embodiment, in addition to the method of outputting the 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information output signal to the hall computer, for example, when 2 round big hit occurs, the 2 round big hit information output signal is only for a predetermined period. Such a two round big hit information output signal and 15 round big hit information such that the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period when it is output to the hole computer and 15 round big hit occurs There is also a method of outputting an output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals of External Terminal Board]
Next, an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the award ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side is covered by the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 shows an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes an outer end frame door open information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal and a 2 round big hit information output signal. When the big hit information output signal, the probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time in-short information output signal, and the starting opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  The outer end frame door open information output signal does not occur during the normal game when the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. A prize ball number information output signal is a signal indicating that a state has occurred, and the payout ball number information output signal shown in FIG. The main prize ball number information output signal shown in FIG. 8 is a variety of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening It is a signal that tells you that the number of gaming balls scheduled to be paid out as winning balls based on the gaming ball entered to 10 reaches 10, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is a 15 round big hit In the state 2 round big hit information output signal is a signal to tell that it is in the state where 2 round big hit is occurring, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is in the state where probability fluctuation occurs The special symbol display information output signal ends the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that it is in a stopped state, and the variation display of the normal symbol is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. There is a signal that indicates that there is a time, the medium-time information output signal is a signal that indicates that a short-time condition is occurring, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first starting opening 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  As shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in line in the external terminal plate 784. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white to output a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that indicates that the number of gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives the prize ball number information output signal as the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball. While being able to grasp that the game ball of the ball is paid out as a prize ball, it is possible to count the number of balls of the game ball paid out and grasp the total number of balls of the game ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green to output an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not occur during the normal game that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. And, in the present embodiment, the signal is outputted from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door open information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door open information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the body frame 4 is open.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that indicates that it is in the state, and in this embodiment, the end (the stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and counting the number of times, the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405.

  The output terminal PT4 is provided in yellow to output a starting opening winning combination information output signal. As described above, the starting opening winning combination information output signal is a signal that indicates the fact that the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8 and, in this embodiment, Each time the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 from the output terminal PT4, the output is made for 0.128 seconds. When the starting opening winning combination information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting opening winning combination information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting opening 2004 and counting the number of times the starting opening winning information output signal is input to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of balls of the game ball which has entered the ball.

  The output terminal PT5 is applied in black to output a 15 round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15 round big hit information output signal is a signal indicating that 15 round big hit is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the 15 round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is supposed to be output. When the 15 round big hit information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer generates 15 round big hits in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round big hit information output signal is being input. While being able to grasp that it is a state, it is possible to count the number of times that the 15 round big hit information output signal is input, and to grasp the total number of times the 15 rounds of big hit have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is pinked to output a two-round big hit information output signal. The two-round big hit information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round big hit has occurred, as described above, and in the present embodiment, while a two round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT6, It is supposed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. While being able to grasp that it is a state, it is possible to count the number of times the two-round big hit information output signal is input, and to grasp the total number of times the pachinko machine 1 has generated two round big hits.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue to output a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol, In this embodiment, output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished (stopped) in 1402 and count the number of times, and the total displayed the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 by fluctuation. You can know the number of times.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red to output an information output signal during time saving. The time-shortening information output signal is a signal that indicates that the time-shortening state is occurring, as described above, and in the present embodiment, is outputted from the output terminal PT8 while the time-shortening state is occurring. ing. When an information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the pachinko machine 1 is generating a time-spacing state when the information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input. As well as counting the number of times that the information output signal is input during the short time, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 has a short time.

  The output terminal PT9 is provided in orange to output an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal indicating that probability fluctuation is occurring, and in the present embodiment, is outputted while the probability fluctuation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer generates a probability fluctuation in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. While being able to grasp a certain thing, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 has a probability fluctuation.

  The output terminal PT10 is given in light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal that indicates that the number of gaming balls scheduled to be paid out as winning balls based on the balls that have reached the ball reaches 10, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives 10 balls of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. While being able to grasp that it is scheduled to pay out the game ball as a prize ball, count the number of balls of the game ball which is due to be paid out, grasp the total number of balls of the game ball which pachinko machine 1 is due to pay out can do. In addition, for example, the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls entered into various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the large winning hole 2005 etc. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds. As in the case of one continuous signal, the signals are output at intervals of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals outputted on the side of the payout control board 951, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are main control board Various signals outputted on the side of 1310 are arranged to be outputted (passed) through the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and by electrically connecting a wiring having a connector in the same color as the color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously made electric Connection can be prevented. The various signals output on the payout control substrate 951 are transmitted to the hall computer so that the various signals output on the payout control substrate 951 and the various signals output on the main control substrate 1310 are not mixed. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 of the external terminal plate 784 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 to the hall computer are By arranging them in a line from the center left side to the right side, also at this point, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hole computer, and various types output on the main control board 1310 side Incorrect wiring to transmit signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 are respectively halls from the external terminal board 784 It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the gaming ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the gaming ball from the pachinko island equipment side is not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. When the jackpot happens to hit 15 rounds on the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the number of gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the gaming balls as prize balls runs out, so payout is made (If, for example, a ball clogged or a ball clogged in the payout device 830, the game ball can not be paid out if it can not be eliminated). Then, as described above, the winning ball number information output signal outputted on the payout control board 951 side reaches 10 balls the number of gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. Since it is a signal that indicates that each time, the payout control board 951 can output the prize ball number information output signal and can transmit it to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784 by not being able to pay out the gaming balls. become unable. When the gaming ball is not paid out, the player calls a store clerk or the like in the hall. A clerk in the hall, for example, checks a hose-like supply nozzle or the like for supplying gaming balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720, and specifies the position of the ball jam (also, for example, occurs in the dispensing device 830). The game ball is returned to the state of being paid out by solving the above by specifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball blind.

  However, even if a store clerk or the like in the hall is working, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, the game ball is paid out by the work of the store clerk or the like after 15 rounds of big hit When the state returns to the normal state, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid gaming balls one after another, and even though it is a time when 15 rounds of big hits have ended and 15 rounds of big hits have not occurred, the payout control boards 951 Outputs an award ball number information output signal to notify that effect each time the number of game balls actually paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls by the payout motor 834 and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 It will be. Then, although it is a time when 15 rounds of jackpots are not generated, a very large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of pachinko machine 1 and the number of balls of game balls paid out There is a problem that the hole computer can not accurately grasp the relationship between

  Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control substrate 951 to actually pay out as a winning ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control substrate 951. The main control board 1310 enters the various game winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. The main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal indicating that the number of gaming balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 Adopted a mechanism to communicate to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-described trouble (ball clogging in the supply nozzle, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls scheduled to be released and the number of balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hole computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320, A liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 is mainly configured of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450 V is a serial signal (serial data) based on the differential system of “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect of the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. Are transmitted to the common mode choke coil SDL0 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively. The noise can be separated from the negative signal. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise is separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. Restore to three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) (that is, parallel signals before being serialized). The red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are, as described above, those in which the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the built-in VDP 1512a are each 8 bits. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, they are upper 6 bits in each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450 V is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Two signals in which certain LOCKN signal output request data are differentiated into plus signal and minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512 e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, forced switching circuit 1512 f of peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentiated into plus signal and minus signal in differentiation circuit 1512 e, when these two signals are input. When the two circuits differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect as shown in FIG. Thus, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512 e, the two signals are connected in order to transmit the two signals, and thus the two signals are The difference is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from transmitter IC 1512 d for frame side effect is transmitted from peripheral control board 1510 to a frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forced switching circuit 1512 f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512 e are not input, that is, the door frame A serial signal (serial data) based on a differential method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of “S-Electronics Inc.'s“ V-by-One (registered trademark) ”from the transmitter IC 1512 d for side effect as a plus signal and minus signal And 868, and are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and to the RXIN + and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e In When the two signals differentiated into the source signal and the negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and then input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is an output request for the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differentiating circuit 1512e, A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, produces the start screen on the game board side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on During a period displayed on the display device 1600 or a period in which a demonstration is performed by the gaming board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and effect display The door frame side effect display device 460 of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 4450 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiating circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Shine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of a company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, which is abnormal. Assuming that it is data, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output, LOCKN signal output request data having a data format different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are respectively supplied with +3.3 V created by the upper-plate-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDS GND request paper, PLL GND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE 0, and MODE 1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to ground.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal to the GND terminal which is a ground for the digital circuit, and a +3.3 V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and the capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and the capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal serving as the ground for the LVDS input, and supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and the capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal serving as the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The PDWN terminal indicates that the logic is HI and normal operation is given by +3.3 V being supplied (applied), while the +3.3 supply is stopped and the logic is low and power is reduced. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and over voltage of the +3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal is a rising edge of transmission of various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal described later. This terminal is used to designate either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and in the present embodiment, the terminal As such, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, the rising edge can be specified.

  The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit the output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC 0 to SYNC 2 terminals, D 0 to D 17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminals) described later, and in the present embodiment, the above-described embodiment As described above, the output is always enabled by connecting the OE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, it will be in a state where it can not output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In this mode, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is designed to be switched automatically.

  For example, three video signals (video signals of 18 bits) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, For the reason that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) such as horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, it is abnormal for some reason If it is difficult to draw on the door-frame-side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistance SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via The peripheral control MPU 1511a confirms a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to convey that effect to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver For the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the Send to receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored by receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door It may be electrically connected directly via the relay terminal plate 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between them. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive substrate 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the periphery The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is input via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal restored are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal which indicates that data output from the D0 to D17 terminals which are data output terminals are valid or invalid. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  Terminals D0 to D17 are three video signals (18 red, green and blue video signals restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN + and RXIN− terminals, respectively (18 It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals such as D0 to D5 terminals, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each of the door frame side effect display devices 460 is inputted through the ladder resistance SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and the signal lines of the red video signals R0 to R5 are damping resistors. The information is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to sending and receiving of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing one example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to the payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described. The various commands from the payout control board will be described.

13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When a signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for delivering a gaming ball of a predetermined number of balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. The prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage trays, are driven by driving the dispensing motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing device 830) by communicating with the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (pachinko machine 1). When an apparatus for paying out game balls as a rental ball is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the main control board Commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the payout control board 951 from 1310, and one prize ball is designated in the command 10H, and the command 11H Then, two prize balls are designated,..., And fifteen prize balls are designated in command 1 EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that pays out game balls directly as a storage ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, which is a storage plate) are installed adjacent to a game arcade (hole). When the ball lending machine is electrically connected to 1 (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the payout control board 951 is released from the main control board 1310. The commands 20H to 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, and one prize ball is designated in the command 20H, two prize balls are designated in the command 21H,... Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and a self check is designated in this command 30H. The transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input, when the ACK signal to be output as acknowledgment of reception of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command transmission. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. And a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, various commands are special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit relation, power on, spread figure tuning effect related, general electric circuit board production related, notification display, status It is classified into the display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 tune production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands such as special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and fluctuation state specification. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and the like The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the special figure 1 tuning effect end, and the fluctuation state specifying command is for specifying the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and short time states, a low probability time short state indicating a low probability state and a short time state, a high probability time short state indicating a high probability state and a short time state, and a low probability It consists of a low probability non-short state which indicates that it is a state and not a short state, and a high probability non-short state which indicates that it is a high probability state and not a short state (as normal gaming state, Low probability short time state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit is set higher than the low probability state (normal gaming state), and the time saving state is, for example, a normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. The time for fluctuating display of symbols is shortened compared to the non-short time state (normal gaming state), and stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, so that the normal lottery result by the regular lottery described later in a predetermined time The number of stop display times is increased compared to the non-short time state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is further extended compared to the non-short time state (normal gaming state). State that it is possible to obtain the lottery opportunity of the special symbol without reducing balls by raising the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2004 which is shown (in other words, non-short time state The second start is achieved by increasing the determination of whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces and extending the period of the open and close operation of the pair of movable pieces when opening and closing the pair of movable pieces. It is a state which raises the acceptance rate (ball entering rate) of the game ball to the mouth 2004).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, the special symbol 1 specification command is sent immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect start, special figure 1 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol falling information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

13-2-2. Special figure 2 tune production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of a command named special figure 2 tuning effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 tuning effect end. For these various commands, "B * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is for designating disapproval, specific big hit, non specific big hit The special figure 2 tuning effect end indicates the special figure 2 tuning effect end.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special symbol 2 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 2 tuning effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-3. Jackpot related]
In the category of big hit related, as shown in FIG. 89, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N-th display, big winning opening 1 closed indication, big winning opening 1 count indication, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command instructs the big hit opening to start, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is starting while the 1st to 16th round big winning opening 1 is open (shown in FIG. 8, the starting opening unit 2100 During the opening or opening of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the large winning opening 1 closing between rounds (large opening of starting opening unit 2100 It indicates that the closing of the winning opening 2005 between the rounds or the closing start), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of balls from 0 to 10 game balls has been counted (shown in FIG. 69). The big hit ending command detects the number of game balls entered into the big winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005, and the big hit ending command Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  Also, the small hit opening command instructs the small hit opening start, and the small hit open display command is started during the small hit open (while the small winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is open at the small hit or The small hit count display command is a small hit medium large winning opening winning combination effect (in the small hit, when the gaming ball entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005) The small hit ending command is an instruction to start small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is 1 to 16 round of big winning opening 1 open (starting opening unit 2100 Sent at the opening of the N round of the winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the closing time of the winning opening 1 (start closing of the winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), Large winning opening 1 count display command, when the large winning opening 1 opening and count change to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the game ball entered the large winning opening 2005 Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the big hit ending command is sent at the beginning of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  Also, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the small hit opening (at the opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the small hit), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entered the large winning hole 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005), the small hit ending command is , Sent at the beginning of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on division is composed of commands at the time of power-on and the names of the main control return destination at the time of power-on. These various commands are assigned status "D * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number.) ("*" Is a specific hexadecimal number. , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command includes the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 at power-on (including power-on and power-on recovery as well as power on and power failure). Information that indicates that the RAM is cleared when the operation switch 954 is operated, and also includes power recovery (in addition to power recovery, power recovery may occur due to power failure or momentary power outage) Information indicating which one of the low probability and short status, the high probability and short status, the low probability non-short status, and the high probability non-short status above (state and short status) to return. , And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. For example, when creating a so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type, the model code of this pachinko machine is for which copyright of the work, game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) And, in addition to the game specification that the condition is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is specified whether it is (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like. In other words, the information of the model code of the pachinko machine is a series code for identifying which type among max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. In addition to the game code of the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs, the probability fluctuation with the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited. And the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.)) to occur.

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information for instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. ing.

  As the transmission timing between the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board is turned on (in addition to power-on, power failure occurs due to power failure or momentary power outage Is also sent). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and returns from a power failure or momentary interruption, the main control side power on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. General drawing tuning production related]
The figure related to common rendering effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and in that category, as shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is comprised from the command of the name of common drawing tuning production start, common design designation, common drawing tuning production completion, and fluctuation state specification regarding vessel 1402. These various commands are assigned status "E * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The popular drawing tuning effect start command instructs the starting of the common pattern tuning effect in the rendering pattern specified in the mode, and the common symbol designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and The figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving states, as described above, a low probability time reducing state indicating a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability time shortening indicating a high probability state and a time shortening state It consists of a state, a low probability non-short state indicating a low probability state and not a short state, and a high probability non-short state indicating a high probability state and not a short state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-shorting state is set).

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a common figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, a common pattern designation command is transmitted immediately after the common figure synchronization effect start, and a common pattern synchronization effect end command is Usually, it is transmitted when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the symbol is decided normally), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Drama Director Related]
The regular electric rendition related to the pair relates to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. It consists of the commands named "Continuous Opening", "Pu-Peng Release Display", and "Pu-Mu per End". These various commands are assigned status "F * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per drawing is an instruction to start opening per drawing, and the release command for general release is started during the release of the power (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107 The state (or the time of expansion) is indicated, and the ending command per common drawing is the instruction to start ending per common drawing.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is used when the common power is open (a pair of movable pieces is driven by the start port solenoid 2107 Is sent when expanding in the direction), and the ending command per drawing is sent at the beginning of the ending per drawing. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display divisions are composed of commands such as a winning abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door open, and a door closed. These various commands are assigned status "6 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  In the prize failure display command, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 when the player wins a big winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device) (even if it is not even a big hit) When the count sensor 4005 detects that the count error is detected), the connection error display command is, for example, an electrical signal in a route between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection error, the start of connection error notification is instructed, and for example, the disconnection / short circuit error display command includes a main control board 1310, a first start port sensor 4002, a second start port sensor 4004, a count sensor This command instructs the start of the break / short circuit display when there is a break or short circuit in the electrical connection with the 4005 etc. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  Also, based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 which is input via the payout control substrate 951 shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is open, the door frame closing command instructs the door frame 3 to be closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. When the door is in the closed state, the door open notification end is instructed. On the other hand, based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. When the main frame opening notification is issued, the main frame closing command instructs the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the main body frame open notification end is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning in the special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device), and a connection abnormality display command is paid out from the main control board 1310 as a payout control board 951. Is sent when there is no ACK response (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start port sensor 4002, second start port sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when the door open is detected (when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), the door The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), the main body The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section comprises a frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to an error cancellation command), and a command named frame status 2 command There is. These various commands are assigned status "7 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error cancellation navi command and the frame status 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and the detailed description of these will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 90, “7 * H” While setting as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1310 adds “7 * H” which is additional information to these received commands. According to the above, it is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The frame status 1 command, which has been shaped, is sent at power recovery, when the frame status changes, and at error release navigation, the error release navigation command is sent at error release navigation, and the frame status 2 command is at power recovery , And when the frame status changes. The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command, and the frame state 2 command, which are shaped, are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test related category is composed of various commands named test. In this test command, “8 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive substrate 4170, the motor drive substrate 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. Inspection of various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194 etc.).

  As a transmission timing of a test command, it is transmitted at the time other than RAM clear and RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or momentary power interruption, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power on process described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-10. Other]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, starting opening winning, variation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, ordinary symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is comprised from the command of the name of special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned status "9 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening winning combination command is for instructing the start opening start winning effect start, and based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first start opening 2002 The instruction to start the effect when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004, respectively, and the variation shortening operation end designation command changes The high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is issued. The game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to convey the number of balls not yet used for display, and the special symbol 2 memory command has 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reservations (the game ball is in the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8) The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 enters the ball and transmits the number of balls (number of pending) not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol memory command is the ordinary symbol 1 Hold 0 to 4 (The game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shows the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of normal symbols (number of held)) The special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable symbol display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400. It is intended to instruct the start of pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the special symbol 1 suspension, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command of the special symbol 2 suspension is the function display unit 1400 Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the second special symbol display 1405, pre-read and instruct pre-reading effect start to notify the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 suspension It is

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, when the starting ball winning command is when the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor (when the starting ball is winning, or the second When the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting opening sensor 4004), mainly from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. Transmitted to notify the effect, and the fluctuation shortening operation termination designation command is transmitted at the termination of the stop period (after the lapse of the suspension termination period) after the fluctuation is determined after settling the fluctuation shortening of the specified number of times, and the high probability termination designation command is , It is sent at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stop stop period) after the fluctuation is determined that has digested the high probability frequency in the case of "high probability N times" (special symbol 1 memory command is special symbol 1 operation retention) When the ball number changes (In the state where the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and there is a reserved number not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, When the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases using the special symbol display on the first special symbol display 1403 from the number of reservations) The special symbol 2 memory command is sent to the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 When the number of game balls enters the second starting hole 2004 and the number of reservations increases further while there is a number of reservations not yet used in the variable display, the second special symbol indicator 1405 makes it special from the number of reservations Pattern The normal symbol memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls is reduced (used when the variable number display is reduced), and when the number of the symbol 1 operation ball is changed (the game ball passes through the gate 2003 and the function display unit 1400 is normal) In the state where there is a number of reservations not yet used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the symbol display 1402, when the number of holdings further passes the game ball through the gate part 2003, and from the number of reservations the normal symbol indicator Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls increase (game ball at the first starting opening 2002) Is sent when the number of ball entry increases and the number of reservations increases), the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is when the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls increase (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the number of holdings) But Sent) when it increases. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is the starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are mainly transmitted by voice to notify that effect, but The manner in which the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 uses the starting opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notification by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the pachinko machine 1 is also used to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 may simply receive the starting opening winning command but may not be notified by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 includes commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2; frame status 1, error release navigation, and so on. The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  In the frame status 1 command (corresponds to the error generation command), out of sphere, full, in 50 or more stocks, connection abnormality and CR non-connection are prepared, and in out of sphere bit 0 (B0, "B" Represents a bit)), the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) if full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 in more than 50 stocks, and A value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. In the bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 1 command, the value 1 is set to B5, the value 0 is set to B6, and the value 0 is set to B7.

  In the error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), the ball is detected, and the payout detection sensor error and the retry error are prepared, and the bit 2 (B2) is set to the value 1 in the ball, and the payout detection sensor In the case of an error, the value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4). Here, "disbursement detection sensor error" indicates whether or not the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The "retry error" indicates that the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is repeated. In the error cancellation navi command bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7), B0 is the value 0, B1 is the value, B5 is the value, B5 is the value, B6 is the value 1, And the value 0 is set to B7.

  In the frame state 2 command, the ball removal is prepared, and during the ball removal, the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). The bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command has the value 0 for B1, 0 for B2, 0 for B3, 0 for B4, 0 for B4, 1 for B5 and 1 for B6. The value 0 is set to B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power recovery, change of the frame state, and error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at error release navigation, frame state 2 command Is sent when power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power on process, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power on process of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process Is a flowchart showing First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control timer interrupt process will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in deciding whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not reach is generated when a big hit gaming state is not generated The random number for reach determination for use in the determination, and the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. 69 A random number for display pattern, a random number for a big hit symbol for use in determining a big hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating a big hit gaming state, and this big hit The jackpot symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number, the first special symbol indicator 1 when generating a small hit gaming state 03 and second special symbol display 1405 for a small hit symbol random number for use in the determination of the small hit symbol displayed in derived display, an initial value for the small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the small hit symbol random number A random number for decision etc. is prepared. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine the initial value of an ordinary symbol determination random number per pattern for use in determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol for the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random number for determining the jackpot is updated by hardware, and the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310 a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an first uses a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to be a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310 a Based on (the clock signal output from main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After the extraction, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310 a performs a big hit on the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an It is set as a judgment random number.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number per pattern normally is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one to count up. The counter counts up from the random value for determining the initial value per symbol normally to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value per symbol for normal. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery processing which randomly selects one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining normal per symbol normally. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at power on, or in the main control side power on process described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The value (sum value) of the checksum obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (during power-off) When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match the value of the checksum (sum value), the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Takes out an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this taken out ID code, it is always from the fixed numerical range of the counter which usually updates the random number for judgment per symbol. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is designed to always overwrite and update the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by execution of the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set for the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310 a The first security measure that the ID code can not be rewritten even if the external device is stored if the ID code is stored in the ID code, and the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM The second security measure that derives the same fixed value on the basis of and the two-step security measure by the second security measure is prevented from being analyzed by being taken.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is taken out from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this taken out ID code is used as a random number for determining the initial value per ordinary symbol. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball somehow acquires the game board 5 and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Even if it is acquired illegally and the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number per symbol normal determination and the judgment value per regular symbol coincide can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a ′ provided in the other game board 5 ′. That is, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number per normal symbol judgment and the normal symbol per-coincidence value match is completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 was completely disassembled and analyzed because it is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. A momentary stop is generated at every predetermined interval obtained, and even if the game ball is allowed to pass through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at every predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the starting opening 2004 can not be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power on process]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310 a is configured to set a stack pointer at a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the above-mentioned main control program performs processing at the time of main control power on as shown in FIGS. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the watchdog timer control register” built in the main control MPU 1310 a to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310 af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register) to start the main control built-in WDT 1310 af and start timing until the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310 af starts, clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is started, and the watch dog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310 a until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, when the timer clear set value is not set in “WDT clear register”, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and clocking is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before this clocked time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared, and the timing is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e shown in FIG. 78 starts outputting a power failure clear signal. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage of +24 V with the reference voltage or compares the voltage of +12 V with the reference voltage to output the comparison result. The comparison result is that when no power failure or momentary interruption occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22.

  In the power clearing process, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e starts to output the power failure clear signal, thereby starting the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22. This blackout clear signal is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca with its logic set to LOW from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310 a. Be done. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is set until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure advance signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). It is done. The determination as to whether or not the power failure notification signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the above-described D type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure notification signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notification signal after waiting for the voltage to become higher than the power failure notification voltage and stabilized after power on, the main control program outputs a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal changes its logic to HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Is input to As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip flop MIC22 in the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, when a state in which the logic becomes LOW to be input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is latched.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on) Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs, to the main control MPU 1310a, an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. It does depending on whether it is done or not. The main control program determines that the RAM clear is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI based on the logical value of the operation signal, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The state is set (game control side power on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above determines whether or not to delete game information related to games such as probability fluctuation and unpaid award balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag indicating that it is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information, and a value of 0 when not deleting gaming information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, a system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Wait until In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot.

  Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S24 is performed based on the power failure advance signal. If it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notification signal is input, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. Thus, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310 a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310 af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination of step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process of step S22 will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notification signal is not input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program causes the calculated checksum value (sum value) to be the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether there is a match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. In the inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection. Detailed explanation about, is mentioned below.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from a ROM (that is, main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in the predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to the state where the power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary interruption, illegal means (for example A high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device is irradiated to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310 a itself, and also includes a state where it is restored thereafter.

  Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value (sum value) of the checksum, etc. are changed by performing various processes after this, so the main control side power-off process described later is normally ended and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 0 (is the value 1) in step S26, that is, when deleting the game information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally, the main control program executes the entire main control internal RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal according to the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is performed by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs the RAM clear and clears the game information, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the sum values do not match or when the main control power is turned off. When not terminated normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on the taken out ID code, the fixed number range of the counter which updates the random number per normal symbol judgment The initial value derivation process which always derives the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set to the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol determination to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for the normal symbol determination described above. Do.

  Following step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading out the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the payout control board 951) and serial input / output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel) incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. In the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to (1), setting of the communication speed and setting of presence / absence of parity etc. are performed, and in the transmission serial port control register, setting of initialization of the transmission circuit and setting of transmission permission are made.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the testing organization of the gaming machine, the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) etc. when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310 a for updating by hardware the jackpot determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state among various random numbers related to the game The random number is latched and acquired, and the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is determined at high speed in advance based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting other values in the numerical range one after another without overlapping and extracting all the values in the predetermined numerical range, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values in a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when this latch signal is input The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310 a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Following step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to indicate that power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command which are classified into the power-on described in the above are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Also in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, when setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored. is there. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power on state command and the power on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. A detailed description of the point at which reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). As a result of this setting, a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, when the main control program passes a predetermined time from the time of power on, that is, when the main control side main process is started, the error cancel navi command of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) is It will regulate execution of game control side RAM clear processing which is triggered by receipt (normal time operation control expedient). As described above, according to the concept of time sharing, the main control program detects the detection signal input following the operation of the operation switch 954, as described above, for the error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined time from the time of power on. The RAM clear process is executed triggered by the input (game control side power on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means), is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error cancellation unit), which was originally used to cancel an error generated for the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization of the RAM, or after the lapse of the predetermined time It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in relation to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S54 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S54, the main control program performs non-attrition random number update processing (step S56). In this non-coincidence random number update process, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation display pattern, the random number for big hit symbol initial value determination, the random number for small hit symbol initial value determination, etc. are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the software updates random numbers that are not related to the collision judgment (big hit judgment). In addition, the random number for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern, and the like described above are also updated by the non-falling random number updating process.

  Following step S56, the main control program returns to step S54 again, determines whether or not there is an input of a power failure advance notification signal, and if there is no input of this power failure notification signal, non-falling random number update processing is performed in step S56. The steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main process".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt disable setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the game information is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program displays the start opening solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special hold number indicator 1404 shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the second special hold number indicator 1406, the normal symbol indicator 1402, the normal symbol memory indicator 1188, the state indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

  Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Following step S66, the main control program performs setting of RAM access prohibition (step S68). By the setting of the RAM access prohibition, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can not be accessed, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be prevented from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The process of step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when it is momentarily stopped, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is ended normally. Is examining. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information is stored by fraud or not.

  Here, the point which performs determination of the presence or absence of the power failure alerting signal of step S24 following the wait time waiting process of step S22 is demonstrated. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 Explain the problems in

  As described above, when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and the power supply from the pachinko facility is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is charged to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary interruption. That is, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the power supply from the pachinko island facility is applied by applying the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as + 5V. The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after it is shut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs and a pachinko island facility When the power is shut off, the main control side power-off process can be reliably completed.

  However, as a very rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power return, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The system waits for the system that performs drawing control of the device 460 to start (boot) (boot timer: 2.5 seconds in this embodiment is set). Then, if an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs, although the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, step S42 is performed within about 7 ms. Interrupt initialization is performed, and then, in step S52, interrupt permission setting is performed. Even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated after the main control side timer interrupt process described above is performed, the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process may not be able to be completed. . For this reason, based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM, the value at which the checksum is calculated is not stored, and the main control side power-on process is started again at power recovery.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time standby process at step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is processed at step S28. If the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occur in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by a store clerk or the like at the time of power recovery and there is no intention indication by the store clerk or the like in the hall of RAM clear, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (clear There is a problem that will be

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure advance signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure advance signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the input of the power failure notification signal continues. Thus, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310 a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310 af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared and the time measurement is started again As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although the value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is, as described above, mainly As stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all even if the setting of RAM access permission is made in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input, Since it is possible to forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and restart the main control board 1310 by repeatedly performing the determination of step S24, it is possible to proceed with the game It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and there is no change in the calculation result of the checksum. It has become so that it does not. Thereby, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being initialized immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power recovery.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure notice signal is not input (that is, step S22 When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game, if it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process Even if the power to 1 is shut off, backup processing for storing game information according to the progress of the game by supplying power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 A master consisting of the processing of step S58 to step S68, which is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the side power-off process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a restarts the calculation result of the checksum in step S28. Since it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) in the backup processing matches, the instantaneous interruption stored and held in the main control internal RAM There is no need to initialize game information immediately before a power failure occurs. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM It is possible to start the main control side power-off process again without updating the key at all, but immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is not input The main control side power-off process can be reliably completed within the "temporary power failure securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko facility is shut off, and the main control MPU 1310 a The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs. In the case where the main control side power-off process can not be completed within the "instant power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal is input. If a power failure notification signal is input, step S24 is performed. Returning to the determination again, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, and the timer clears to the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310 a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af by setting the set value, clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af and not being able to start the time counting again. . Since the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af by such software, a step after step S 24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S 42, and thereafter, in step S 52 It is possible to prevent the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control timer interrupt processing described later. Adopted the mechanism. In this way, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a power failure or momentary stoppage, the portion covered by software so that the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all The contents of the main control internal RAM by dividing it into two parts to ensure complete completion of interrupt processing and that the contents (game information) of the main control internal RAM are not changed at all The game information can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, the point will be described where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery) In order to convey the information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command is mainly configured of information instructing the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. There is. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2107 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. The problem in step S50, that is, the problem in the case where the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is on and the main control return destination command is not performed in the power on in step S50, will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit gaming state screen (for example, the big hit gaming effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When an emergency stop or a power failure occurs while the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107 and the main control board 1310 is then In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, it is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Starting driving of the solenoid 2108 to shift from the state where the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state where it is opened That.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a big hit gaming state as the gaming state, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main power control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it is possible to display the screen in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and return according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from. It can not be displayed at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. That is, for example, a game winning ball 1 enters a big winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the ball number of the gaming ball which is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives, the peripheral control board 1510 is the ball of the gaming ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it can not be displayed at all which round of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is).

  In such a situation, when the main control board 1310 ends, for example, the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (the fourth round), the driving of the attachment solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107 Control from the main control board 1310 a large winning a prize opening 1 closed display command instructing to shift from a closed state to a closed state (that is, start of closing between big winning opening 2005 rounds of starting opening unit 2100) When transmitted to the substrate 1510 and the main control substrate 1310 starts 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state (5th round), the driving of the attachment solenoid 2108 is started and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 Transition from the state to the open state (that is, 5 of the big winning opening 2005 To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above, and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

  In addition, for example, the game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 becomes a game state that indicates that the game state is advantageous to the player in the game state (for example, the movable piece has been expanded When the peripheral control board 1510 controls display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to display a screen to communicate to the player, the main control board 1310 drives the start opening solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 operates in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the gaming state and the gaming ball is in the gaming state in which the game ball can be received to the second start port 2004 and the gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. When power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the game state becomes possible to receive the game ball to the second start port 2004 and the game state becomes advantageous to the player The peripheral control board 1510 can not display the screen indicating that it is present on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and the gaming ball receives the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or a power failure occurs at the time of power recovery. In some cases, it may be forgotten that it is a possible gaming state, and in such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. In spite of that, the screen to instruct the game in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen to instruct the game of entering the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed. As a result, there is also a problem that the player can not understand what kind of game the player plays.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there has been a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can not be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs There was a problem that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to power on), the power on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thus, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, for example, in the above-described example, in the fourth round of the big hit gaming state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main solenoid valve 2108 starts driving the main control board 1310 as a return destination, and the big winning opening 2005 is released from being closed by the opening / closing member 2107 The peripheral control board 1510 can notify the peripheral control board 1510 that it will shift to the off state, and the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many round it is. ) Can not be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but it is a big hit game state and A screen (for example, “big hit. Big winning opening is open. Big winning opening is open. A game has been opened on the big winning opening. The screen shows that the large winning opening 2005 is open by the opening and closing member 2107. Play a game to make the ball enter the game. ”The message is displayed to the player on the game board side effect display device 1600) and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is restored the power. After that, it is possible to instruct a game to make the game ball enter the big winning opening 2005, and for example, in the above-mentioned example, the game becomes a game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs in the game state advantageous to the player, and then the power is restored, the starting port solenoid 2107 is used as the return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen to start driving to indicate that the pair of movable pieces has been expanded in the left-right direction (for example, "the movable piece is expanded. To enter the game ball into the lower starting opening The peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 a message telling the player the message “Please play the game.” To the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine after power recovery The game of entering the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 can be instructed. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, it is possible to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of a manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28. The calculation and the determination of step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, a main composed of the processing of step S58 to step S68 which is the backup processing described above and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off process at one time, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison determination, there is no possibility that the checksum values should match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. By storing in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information, only the two commands of the power on status command and the power on main control return destination command as transmission information transmit information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information Will be stored in the In these commands, a power on state command is first transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, and then a power on main control return destination command is transmitted. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power on state command from the main control board 1310 is taken as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is as shown in FIG. 70 at the time of power-on (in addition to the case of power-on, it also includes power-on recovery due to power failure or momentary power outage). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (other than when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary interruption occurs and the power is In the recovery from power recovery, this includes the low probability time short state, the high probability short time state, the low probability short time state, and the high probability short time state, as described above. It is composed of information indicating whether or not to do, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, the problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is for the copyright of any work In addition to the game specification that the game specification is continued until the next big hit game state occurs next when the game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs for example), the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like) in which probability fluctuations occur in a state of being performed 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker of the production line is the master of the copyright of any work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). The main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of a work of movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works can not be known whether the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310 Although the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for the work of cartoon F). There are also misconceptions and misconceptions that flow to the manufacturing line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line It is not possible to confirm to which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs, and which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, etc.) for the same work copyright It is also impossible to confirm whether it is a type, and what game specifications (a game specification or a ST machine in which, when probability fluctuations occur, the state is continued until a next big hit gaming state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control substrate 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control substrate 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexists, the main control substrate for the copyrights of multiple types of works It will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while 1310 is mixed. Therefore, a worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5 in some cases. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, it also includes the power recovery due to a power failure or a momentary power outage). To transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 the power-on state command shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89. And are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line, and the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine that is included in the power-on state command received from the device, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is configured. And the sweet digital type, the serial code for specifying which type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state is In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation is in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited The main control board 1310 is for the copyright of any work by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) It is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which type) the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine in which, when probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs. As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of multiple types of works coexists, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually distinguish the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work by being able to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by visually observing the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not compatible with the game board 5 for the copyright of the work It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power on process is selected from the first register bank Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 turn on in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process Payout control board 951 various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) in addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal motor combination control process. When it is determined whether or not the customer ACK signal that indicates the normal reception is received is determined, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is reduced by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately counted. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, a detection signal from general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. 69 which detects gaming balls entered into general winning openings 2001 and 2201 shown in FIG. Detecting the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 detects the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball which has passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 8 The magnetic detection sensor which detects the fraudulent action using the magnet shown in FIG. 69 The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 is transmitted which indicates that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the detection signal from 024 and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. , And stored in the input information storage area as input information. In addition, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 which detects the game ball which entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection from the second starting opening sensor 4004 which detects the game ball which entered the second starting opening 2004 When each of the signals is read, the start opening winning command classified into the other parts shown in FIG. 90 corresponding to this is stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004. The start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In this embodiment, detection signals from general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 for detecting gaming balls entering the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and count sensors 4005 for detecting gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2005. Detection signal from the first starting opening 2002, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 for detecting gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2002, second starting opening sensor 4004 for detecting the gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2004 The detection signal from the gate and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 for detecting gaming balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when the switch input processing is started, for a predetermined time (for example After the lapse, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. Among the comparison results, it is determined whether there is one that is the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. We treat the same result and the one that there is no game ball entering.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program detects the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 The effect of chattering, noise, etc. is achieved by performing two readings in total: two readings comparing the first to third times and two readings comparing the second to fourth times. Since false detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a false random number update process (step S106). In this success random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for big hit symbols and the random number for small hit symbols are updated. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbol initial value determination updated in the non-incident random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are further improved in the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing by being updated in randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers involved in the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only when the hit random number update processing is performed. In addition, the random number per normal symbol determination described above and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this success random number update processing.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number per pattern determination is an initial value updating type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value Is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The symbol is counted up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern to the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for big hit determination is updated by this success random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery processing which randomly selects one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining normal per symbol normally. .

  In this embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number and the small hit symbol initial value determination random number are not displayed in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93. Although updating is performed in the current random number update processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing that is the main routine in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the processing time of the present routine is uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions of the non-match random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol And, it may be a mechanism to update the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols only in the non-falling random number update process of step S56

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs a winning ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and a prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out gaming balls based on the input information is created and paid out as a prize ball. If the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection between the control substrate 1310 and the delivery control substrate 951 is created. Then, the prize ball command and the self-check command that have been created are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, the ball number of the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is created as well as creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so set the output of the main prize ball number information output signal to convey that effect, store it as output information in the output information storage area, and send the prize ball command to the payout control board 951. Or when the payout ACK signal notifying that the payout control substrate 951 has received the award ball command normally is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to be sent to the payout control board 951 or the like. In addition, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, when the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 balls, the number of balls exceeded is the next time this is exceeded In the prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and the number of balls of the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on the input information. When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program is various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) divided into the status display shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navi command, and frame status 2 command) Send On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navi command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as the payee serial data, the information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as the output information of the output information of the main control internal RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reshapes the command normally received as the sender serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Here, the frame status 1 command corresponds to a first error generation command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to a first error release command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraudulent operation detection process (step S112). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit gaming state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005) A prize failure display command divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric combination product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special motorized product control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an when the latch signal is input. The (random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a jackpot determination random number. Then, whether or not the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit decision value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether the jackpot gaming state is to be generated or not (referred to as "special lottery") or the value of the counter for updating the jackpot symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it agrees with the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability variation) or the like. Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of hitting a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range (big hit determination range) of the above-described big hit determination values with low probability and are read out from the normal determination table, while the value is 31768 with high probability. A value of 32767 is set and read out from the probability variation judgment table. Thus, in the special symbol and special motorized product control process in step S114, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the built-in main control When it is determined whether or not the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot judgment random number (that is, a random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) It is performed depending on whether or not it is included in the big hit judgment range.

  When these determination results are based on the first starting opening sensor 4002, various commands related to the special view 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second starting opening sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol display according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 so that the second special symbol display 1405 is turned on and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information Do. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big hit game state, various commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 shown in Figure 89 divided into big hit related A close display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. Set the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times the big winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state (round) is two, 2 to turn on the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10 The output of the lighting signal to the sound display lamp 1407a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round display 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set to light up, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence or absence of occurrence of probability fluctuation is lighted in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal motorized product control processing (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary motor combination control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per symbol for determination is extracted and gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM as gate information Remember to

  In this gate information storage area, the 0th to third partitions (four partitions) are provided, and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. It is supposed to be. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal Do.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is gated to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is gated to the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become vacant areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the gate information described above causes the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 to light up with the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random symbol determination per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as a "normal lottery"). Whether to open and close the movable piece or not is determined based on the determination result (lottery result from the normal lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces is expanded in the left and right direction, and the game ball can be received by the second start opening 2004, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes gaming state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into the common figure synchronization effect related shown in FIG. 89 are created and transmitted information The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output information is described above as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands relating to the common electric circuit production shown in FIG. Is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the above-described output information storage area as output information If the value of the random number for determining the selected standard symbol is not identical to the standard symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is made based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above The display pattern is determined, and various commands classified into the general drawing tuning effect related shown in FIG. 89 are created, and the transmission information described above as the transmission information The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 is set so that the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 is illuminated according to the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern while being stored in the memory area, and the output information storage area mentioned above as output information Remember.

  Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program is, for example, based on the output information, and when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951. When it is a big hit game state, it outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the start aperture solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information about the game such as time information output information, starting opening winning information output signal And it outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this transmission information, various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect related shown in FIG. 89 created in the main control timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronous effect related When the gaming ball entered the various commands (for example, large winning a prize opening 2005 (see Figure 8) which is classified to command, big hit relation is detected, the large winning based on the detection signal from count sensor 4005 (see Figure 69) Large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power on, various commands classified as general drawing tuning effect related, various commands classified as ordinary electric circuit related director related, FIG. 90 The various commands (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) classified into the notification display, and the state display Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is configured into 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configures various commands as main cycle serial data. As described above, when a power failure or an instantaneous stop occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae included in the main control MPU 1310 a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310 aa in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb by using the serial management unit 1310 aec The data can be transferred to the register 41aea, and transmission can be completed from the transmission shift register 1310aea as the main cycle serial data. At the time of power recovery when power failure is recovered by occurrence of power failure or momentary power outage, in order to indicate that power recovery has been made in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on at step S50 in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. Since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. The power-on state command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value as main cycle serial data, and then the power-on main control return destination command is formed, status, It transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the mode and then the sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power on state command and the power on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit And the frame state 1 command (second error generation command) is transmitted (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 via the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navi command (second error release command) is transmitted to the (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navi command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as an error release navi command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 951 via the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame open command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame open command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 via the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) Section) sends a door open command (second door frame open command) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) Section) sends a door closing command (second door closing command) (a door frame command sending means, a second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. In step S22, the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared by setting a timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af starts again, so that the main control MPU 1310 a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af.

  Note that, as described above, when the main control board 1310 is in the process of proceeding with the game, the above-described backup for storing the game information by the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 When the power is turned on in FIG. 89, the main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to output to. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on process in FIG. 93, main control board 1310 mainly sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process. Based on power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, a power on status command classified as power on in FIG. 89 and a power on status are transmitted to notify that power has been switched on (power recovery). A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power on state command as the main cycle serial data. To the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and so on. Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 returns the game progress by the main control board 1310 at the time of power return to the game board side effect display device 1600. The effect can be displayed in the display area of By this, when the player is playing a game, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power loss or power failure is restored promptly after power recovery. In addition, since it is possible to display and notify of the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the state of the system of the pachinko machine 1 is so-called freeze It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for being in a broken state as he sees. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by returning to the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, and returning promptly after power recovery.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the power of the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on, the power on state command shown in FIG. And a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, two commands of a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power on state command is configured as the main cycle serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and sum value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process constructs information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 The above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs when the probability change occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times of the special symbol change is limited Machine) and display detailed model information on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying It has become.

[16-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs processing when the peripheral control unit is powered on, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time taken for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and initializes the peripheral control MPU 1511a in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters the state in which the interrupt permission is set, for example, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, which is output from the main control board 1310 in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command about control of game production production, a command about a state of pachinko machine 1, etc.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, with regard to the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73, effect backup information (1 fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) in the backup first area 1511 cb. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and compare Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the effect backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) ms) are compared, and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank 1 (1 fr) with respect to Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73. Copy back the effect backup information (1fr) that is the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), and compare them as hot start, and compare When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of peripheral control RAM 1511 c. And a cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db also for the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d shown in FIG. 73. The (SRAM) is compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control SRAM 1511 d shown in FIG. 73. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value for Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control SRAM 1511 d Force 0 to write a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 1511 cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73 and cleared to zero. Then, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs this initialization setting process, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try to prevent it.

  Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in is set in the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information, and in the time information storage unit as current time information. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is adjusted to the LED brightness included in the obtained brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and lighting it is performed. The luminance setting information is, as described above, luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the present The luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 being set is included.

  Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 When lighting up, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is lit. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is based on the brightness adjustment information contained in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the use time of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above It is supposed not to be done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. It is to prevent being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once at power-on. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and has a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control unit steady processing The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a as a peripheral control described later. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 so that peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. There is.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed. Also, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511 e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. I try to prevent it.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is to be performed, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S1009). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting and the initialization of the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also performed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for a lamp drive substrate is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 are created by a lamp data creation process described later Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 designates transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the top address is sent to the serial I / O port for a lamp drive board via the external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of Thus, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Start sending data one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for a lamp drive substrate serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port). It is triggered by the fact that the written 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty due to the lack of 1 byte data.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board-side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte, via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring to the buffer register for writing, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, in synchronization with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED is started, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. A door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3 is created in a lamp data creation process to be described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is serialized to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED) One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , And frame decoration through the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED uses the data of the written transmission buffer register as the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting data of 1 byte of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, bit by bit, and perform continuous transmission by the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port There is.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this rendering operation unit monitoring process, in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410, etc. based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the rendering operation unit 400 Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73 where various information obtained is set, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the state of operation of the operation button 410 Determine whether to reflect on

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described later is generated from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are outputted. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) is generated on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect The output to the display device 460 is canceled. Although this can prevent the processing time from being delayed, so-called dropping of frames will occur, but various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output process of step S1012. Various effects are produced from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the effects of the LEDs and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 by the LEDs and sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with the music and sound effects according to the.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a in sound data creation processing described later. In addition to music and sound effects, the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs the audio data of the notification sound and the notification sound as serialized audio data. This audio data transmission IC 1512c, when serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input, is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of the difference system in which the right audio data is made a plus signal and a minus signal. While transmitting, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. Thus, in addition to stereo reproduction of music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, the screen data of the first screen data from the screen data at the top among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that make up the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae, what number light emission data from the top light emission data of the various light emission data The pointer is updated to indicate whether it is an aspect.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound are arranged in time series that configures the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae Among the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data from the sound command data at the top is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, from the drive data at the top of the drive data of the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series that configure the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the scheduler updating process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the driving data to be essentially designated.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program is transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed (command analysis means) for various commands received in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later. The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in schedule data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae Do. In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, start opening winning command for instructing the start of the start opening winning effect, the number of pending normal symbols A normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4 pieces), a symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, a symbol memory command which is output when the number of start pending changes, and the special winning opening 2005 A special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) which is output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, which indicates the contents of full shown in FIG. 90) It is analyzed (command analysis means) whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently. Also, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command or the door frame closed Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511 cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the reception command storage area 1511 cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 89 are classified into various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect, various commands classified into big hit relation, and power on. Various commands to be displayed, various commands to be classified to general drawing tuning effect related, various commands to be classified to regular electric terminal production related, various commands to be classified into notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame opening command described above , For displaying status such as door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various commands which are classified, various commands which are classified as test related, and various commands which are classified as others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the effect control program further includes various commands divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 in the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above, various kinds of commands are performed. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, of the peripheral control unit 1511 It extracts from various control data copy area 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets 1511cae in a schedule data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. It is supposed to By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above by the effect control program is divided into the state display shown in FIG. Various commands, for example, an error release navi command (second error release command), the game board side is controlled, for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal production mode accompanying the rendering operation. The visual display device 1600 (render device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (render device), and the lamp (render device) are used to warn the outside visually, or a speaker is used to warn the outside aurally ( Error notification means). By doing so, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent an unfair act on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

  Next, following the above-described step S1024, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S 1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, and day which are calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer of the effect control program is indicated among the light emission data arranged in time series, the pointer being updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data On the basis of the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting it from various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral control RAM 1511c, and it is set in lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various decorations provided on the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of the board, various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c , And set in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data Are extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the game board side effect display device Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the display 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Following step S1030, the effect control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511 ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives sound command data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and controls the built-in sound source While incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track numbers specified in the data, the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data generation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated each time the sound data generation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is generated. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 1510 a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, muffled at substrate volume 0, and set to maximum volume at substrate volume 6, and substrate volume 0 to substrate The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6 respectively. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume set in the substrate volumes 0 to 6 is transmitted, and audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and the sound source built-in of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is programmed by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. For example, even if a store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effects such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is making a fraudulent act, an alarm sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It can also be notified that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents of the effect control program stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 are stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are respectively copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached are copied and backed up respectively to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and As the effect backup information (1fr), the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), copy the backup first area 1511cb to Bank1 (1fr), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr), specify the end address of Bank0 (1fr) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified as request factors for A controller 1511ac, and copying of backup first area 1511cb to Bank 2 (1fr) is specified, and Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 The contents stored in the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates copying of the backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 3 (1 fr). From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of backup second area 1511cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and copy of backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 4 (1 fr) The Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  Further, in the backup processing, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, whenever the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed operation on Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as presentation information (SRAM) which is contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as presentation backup information (SRAM) And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511 dc.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), copy the backup first area 1511db to Bank1 (SRAM), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) All of the stored contents are successively copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) successively, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is specified as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the copy to Bank 2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db is specified, and the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are sequentially copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511 db successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates the copy of the backup second area 1511 dc to Bank 3 (SRAM). From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa stores the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac to Bank 4 (SRAM) of backup second area 1511 dc. To the contents stored at the start address of Bank 0 (SRAM) and the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (eg, 1 byte) in the second backup area 1511 dc. Copy all from the start address of Bank 4 (SRAM) in order.

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511 e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is not reset.

  Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady process (step S1038), and returns to step S1006 again to return the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value of 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value of 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The process of step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  The peripheral control unit steady processing is started by setting the value 1 to the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed at first in step S1009, and the effect control program sets 1 ms in step S1010. Interrupt timer activation processing is performed, and each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the execution of the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed and the value in the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 Setting will complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is triggered by the fact that a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later, the value 1 is set. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from sound source built-in VDP 1512a of liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed in response to the following will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether steady-state processing-in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady process processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), End this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed as the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. In order to prevent this by forcibly canceling on the way and starting execution of peripheral control unit steady processing from the beginning, the peripheral control unit in FIG. 95 is powered on. The peripheral control unit V blank signal which is this routine indicates that peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value SP to 1 in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in logic (peripheral control unit steady processing) In addition to notifying interrupt processing, peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine, the stationary processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 at the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine. It is determined whether there is any, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing can not be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  Thereby, in the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, when the processing can not be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1008 in the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit in FIG. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Usually, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 64 times It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It does not collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is dropped, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 97, peripheral control MPU 1511 a of peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times or not. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially It will occur.

  If it is determined in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33, that is, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the thirty-third 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid driving processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Of drive data of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, according to drive data indicated by a pointer, an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. While updating the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and updating the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 is performed. Here, serial I / O port serial transmission of frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a In order to output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the rendering operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series to configure The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral control RAM 1511c, and frame decoration drive of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511 caf is sent via the external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The transmission of one byte of data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request for the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor (in the present embodiment, the frame I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate-side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf for 1 byte, external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller Via 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai By transmitting and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial drive I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register Transfer to 1-byte data of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and start transmission one bit at a time, and continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor Is going.

  Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive substrate 4180 is performed. Also here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for motor drive boards is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission for a motor drive substrate is started, first, electrical drive source schedule data set in schedule data storage area 1511 cae of peripheral control MPU 1511 a and peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached is configured. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the motor or solenoid is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown at 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stores it at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag The first 1 byte of the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT thus processed is transmitted via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai, as a transmission buffer for the motor drive board serial I / O port. Transfer to register and write. Thereby, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). It is triggered by the fact that the written 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty due to the lack of 1 byte data.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and In synchronization, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information Movable position history information etc.) are created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, original positions, movable positions and the like of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, rendering operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this rendering operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the rendering operation unit 400 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) Operation history information of the button 410 etc.) is created and set in the rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. The presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, a drawing state information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the periphery shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the control MPU 1511 a. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Judging, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on peripheral control board 1510, and receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effect provided on effect display drive board 4450 , And a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is acquired from the history of LOCKN signals set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak, from the frequency of the trouble between the connection of the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 and the occurrence state of the trouble. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

  Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached as shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is this routine is executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in backup target work area 1511 ca shown in FIG. 73 for peripheral control RAM 1511 c. The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah which are included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up each time , And effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, as Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 of the backup first area 1511 cb as effect backup information (1 ms) Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), copy the backup first area 1511 cb to Bank 1 (1 ms), and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms), specify the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa performs peripheral control D The contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) are specified as request factors for A controller 1511 ac, and copying of backup first area 1511 cb to Bank 2 (1 ms) is specified, and Bank 0 (1 ms) from the contents stored at the top address of Bank 0 The contents stored in the end address of (1 ms) are all copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates copying of the backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 3 (1 ms), Bank 0 (1 ms) From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of backup second area 1511 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and copy of backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 4 (1 ms) The Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the content stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, various processes relating to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as progress of effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt Division 1 ms timer It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control substrate 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is triggered to transmit various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, and is triggered thereby to incorporate the main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this taking is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this taking, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1 byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within a period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I / O port incorporated in the control MPU 1511a is taken (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times of extraction from the reception buffer, and has a value of 1 when the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, and a mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 at power on or the like.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data and 3 of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value which is the byte number is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and their sum (sum value Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 Therefore, it should be consistent with the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from a pachinko facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other to be charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is under the file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 It is judged whether or not. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 1511 a determines whether or not the main cycle serial data has been changed to main cycle serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  If the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 in step S1214, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the 1st byte and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main cycle serial data are shown in FIG. 73. The peripheral control MPU 1511a and the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The receive command storage area 1511 cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are the receive command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer 1511 cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end of the buffer and the beginning are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it is returned to the beginning Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which are stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received of the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 is exceeded. Sometimes, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly performed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit blackout notification signal which is executed when the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification signal) from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input from the main control board 1310 The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 starts the 2 microsecond timer first (step S1320), and the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification) It is determined whether a signal is input (step S1302). If the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing which is the main routine is started in step S1304, and the blackout notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is turned off, excitation to a motor or a solenoid provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off.

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and reception command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected with peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73). The received command is stored in.

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are stored in Bank1 (1fr) of backup first area 1511cb and the contents stored in backup first area 1511cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 2 (1 fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in received command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. Peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. Specify the content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, and copy the backup first area 1511cb to the receive command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) Content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr), and the end address of the reception command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied sequentially from the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU core The content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the receive command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb From the content stored in the start address of receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac in Bank 3 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc. The copy to the received command storage area is specified, and the contents stored in the start address of received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are stored in the end address of received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) The specified contents (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control The content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac by the PU core 1511aa is included in the receive command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Designating copying to the contents from the content stored in the start address of reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc.

  Subsequently to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input (step S1312). If it is determined in this determination that a power failure advance signal is input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure notification signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notification signal is input. In other words, it continues to determine infinitely whether or not the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input. By continuing determination indefinitely in this manner, when no power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Can not be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, while when a power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination of step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314 The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure advance notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and peripheral control external WDT 1511 e Output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by resetting automatically.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
The LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described next. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is judged that it is abnormal data, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 It is a signal to output a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When LOCKN signal history creation processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is, as shown in FIG. 100, peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bits B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 having a capacity and provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST It is memorized.

  Following step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is not abnormal data (normal Data)) and It does not request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that

  When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is processed by the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 B B4, B4 B B3, B3 B B2, B2 B B1, B1 ビ ッ ト least significant bit B0, and so on, one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 at step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500. Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, etc. Shift one bit at a time toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value 0 (step S1510), and this routine is ended.

  Thus, every time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, the connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether a failure has occurred in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is, as shown in FIG. 101, of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. As described above, in the LOCKN signal, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that the signal is output to convey that effect, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 And a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Subsequently to step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. The connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value.

  If it is determined in step S1522 that the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver does not occur. And exit this routine as it is.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value in step S1522, peripheral control board 1510 Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d for preparing the frame and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 for the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the state where a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times that it is determined in step S1522 that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver each time this routine is executed. (Count the cumulative number). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication check counter CC-CNT is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and the power recovery is restored. The value is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure occurs.

  Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state is the cumulative number If it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the cumulative number determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1526 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, it is determined that a problem occurs in connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the accumulated number has reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be in a state of failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver Is a flag indicating whether or not there is a malfunction in the value, and value 1 when there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, a malfunction occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, it is set to the value 0, respectively. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the power recovery is restored. It is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure occurs at time.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, connection recovery processing executed as one of the warning processing in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. While outputting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal Report that fact.

  When connection recovery processing is started, as shown in FIG. 102, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs peripheral control steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95. Of the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated (step S1540). In this determination, in order to instruct, in the scheduler update process, what screen data from the top screen data among the screen data arranged in time series forming the screen generation schedule data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is active, while the screen generation schedule When the effect is completed according to the data and all the updating of the pointer is completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, a demonstration screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and waiting for customers. It is possible to judge based on the screen generation schedule data whether or not it is a period, and display the start screen at the time of powering on of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600 If it is in a waiting period or a waiting period for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, while the start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 is on the game board side During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or waiting for customers, the game board side effect display device 1600 That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the effect is completed and all the pointer updating is completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is provided for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the same process as the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. During the connection between transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver (Count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times of determining that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state is even one.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the number is not changed. While the routine is ended, even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state even if the number of times is one. If the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is present, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is determined to be in a failure state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. A flag that indicates whether the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed. Value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed: 1 between the transmitter and the receiver Is set to 0 when the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a failure occurs in the connection does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT If not, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d included in the peripheral control substrate 1510, thereby providing the door frame side effects included in the peripheral control substrate 1510. The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Then (step S1548), this routine ends. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 in order to reliably convey that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Do the drawing process. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message “A problem has occurred with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.” Is displayed. Also, in the communication error display process, the demonstration screen by the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 or in waiting for customers. Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period being performed, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In order to confirm whether a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display request of the door frame side effect display device 460, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is LOCKN As a response signal to the transmission of signal output request data, When the LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the LOCKN signal is not input, the door frame side effect display device 460 has a failure as a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is judged that the notification is being made, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred with the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition to the processing described above, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device") is repeatedly flowed from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, processing may be performed to turn on all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various kinds of LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, to briefly describe the decorative symbol variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the peripheral control of the process at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part steady process etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main processing or the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94 or the second shown in FIG. 8 When the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the starting opening 2004 becomes "big hit", the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening and closing operation of the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. A total of 15 rounds up to 15 rounds, and in each round, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) Then, the round is to be digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out each time one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005.

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the second special drawing result drawn by receiving the game ball to the second starting port 2004 can be obtained from the main control board 1310 The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the command, so that the left side display symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the center decorative pattern is on the center. The variable display of the right side decorative symbol is started on the right side, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result Can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image can be seen, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed From the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative pattern rotates from the upper center to the lower center side of the display area, and the right decorative pattern rotates the reel from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area When the left decoration pattern, the center decoration pattern, and the right decoration pattern are stopped and displayed in a fluctuating manner, the left decoration pattern, the center decoration pattern, and the right decoration pattern corresponding to the stop are displayed. The left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are in an opaque aspect so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. Thus, the first special symbol or the second special symbol to be variably displayed and stopped in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are variably displayed and stop-displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized with each other.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 selects the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second drawn by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 for conveying the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady processing at power-on processing shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, schedule data storage area 151 of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in time series that make up the screen generation schedule data set in cae, a pointer is used to indicate which screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Since updating is performed, that is, when the pointer is being updated in the scheduler update process, the effects are progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule While the data is being activated, that is, until the variation display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is started and stopped and displayed, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  Thus, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped before being displayed in the communication check counter CC-CNT. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 (that is, Even if it is determined that the connection with the receiver is in a state where a failure has occurred even once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver Process to recover the connection between the client and the For example, the message “The liquid crystal display device on the upper tray has a problem. Please call a clerk.” Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 without performing the communication error display process of step S1548. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to notify that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data, and the door frame side effect display device In 460, an image is displayed based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the rendering is completed along the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the schedule generation data for screen generation is not activated and the schedule data for screen generation is not activated in the scheduler update processing, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is powered on. The warning of step S1024 in peripheral control unit steady processing of clock processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process of the process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is the value 0, that is, When the number of times it is determined that there is no failure in connection with the receiver is one, the routine is ended as it is, while the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter If the number of times it is determined that there is a problem with the connection between the device and the receiver is also one, the process proceeds to the process of step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG has the value 0 When there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number determined to have not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the processing proceeds to step S1546 in the same processing, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output processing is performed, and the routine is ended. When the value of FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, and the above-mentioned communication error is displayed. Process and exit the routine. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver In the case where connection between ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken at one time, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken. When the cumulative number determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, by always performing the SYNC pattern output processing, between the connection of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, In other words, while processing to recover the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, When the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, "A problem has occurred with the upper side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to notify that the message “is displayed and to notify that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data. Is activated.

  The variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern again In the interval period until the start of the game, since the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to convey that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect A fault occurs in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. If the number of occurrences is at least one, and the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be defective has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, SYNC While the pattern output processing is always performed, processing for recovering the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is performed, while the transmitter and receiver When the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a fault occurs in the connection between has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, there is a fault in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) ) By always performing communication error display processing, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the variable display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, the screen generation schedule data is active, so the left side decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol , And until the right-hand decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 The number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1 Even if the number of times is the same, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is performed , The process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the message “There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper tray. Please call a clerk.” Is not displayed, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is an abnormal data. The door frame side effect display device 460 invalidates the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that tells that there is a drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Display an image based on.

  In this way, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern and the right side decoration are displayed again. During the interval period until the variable display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to convey that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data. Between the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display on the door frame side effect display between the start of variation display of the left side decoration symbol, the center decoration pattern, and the right side decoration symbol. Receiver ICSD for door frame side effect that conveys that the drawing data received from IC 1512 d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. This is a combination result of the stop display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 being information most of interest to the player, and a profit to the player Since the player can determine whether or not a big hit gaming state to be awarded is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol change display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed by the influence of noise and the like until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, it is not left to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect midway and performing processing to recover to the state where it can be drawn correctly. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this point, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays a start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a customer waiting state This is largely different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510 during the demonstration period by the game board side effect display device 1600. The LOCKN signal output request data is a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or becomes a customer wait state for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period being performed, the transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a, and the receiver ICSDIC 0 for door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a failure in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiating circuit 1512e provided in the periphery control board 1510, as described above, the differential is generated. The two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512 e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512 f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The forced switching circuit 1512 f connects the circuits so as to transmit the two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differentiating circuit 1512 e, so that One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V included in the effect display drive substrate 4450 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally: As described above, since the data format is different from that of the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, it is determined that the data is abnormal data, and the LOCKN signal is detected around the periphery control unit 1511 of the periphery control board 1510. It outputs to control MPU1511a. Accordingly, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a causes the effect display drive board 4450 not to have a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While it can be determined that no fault has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, a fault has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 as a fault has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the notification image to notify that (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk."), The sound source built-in VDP1512a to control the game board side effect display device An alarm sound to be output to 1600 and to that effect (for example, Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512 f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC 0 The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which can be connected in a circuit and receives LOCKN signal output request data, outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 does not have a failure, while Signal is input When not it can be determined that a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as the notification process when it is determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a failure. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a defect in the door-frame-side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can notify the store clerk or the like in the hall by executing notification processing to that effect. The store clerk or the like in the hall can very easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays a game, and the check does not take time and effort. ing. Therefore, it is possible to discover a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460 without taking much time.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is judged that there is, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 Since it is a signal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the ICSDIC 0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, for door frame side effect Receiver ICSDIC0 is a transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect When the image sent from the device can not be received normally, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the received drawing data becomes abnormal data. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 for transmission. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input is a door that transmits a connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting the data to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, it is possible to eliminate the communication failure between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication at an early stage, and can act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the defect. It is supposed to be. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which receives an image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460, transmits the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d When it can not be received normally, the LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that a communication failure occurs because it can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511. To convey that To generate a message “There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper plate. Please call a clerk.” And display the generated image on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for notification. It can be done. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can directly notify the store clerks in the hall or notify the store clerk in the hall that took the front of the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the store clerk in the hall suffers from the problem. It is possible to start work to solve the problem at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by detecting and solving the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 at an early stage.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. If the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken even once, the connection between the transmitter and receiver fails When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate communication failure between image communication From the transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect A connection confirmation signal that indicates that transmission starts to the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be repeatedly output to the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. It has become. Thus, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 Since it is possible to continue outputting the connection confirmation signal repeatedly only during a period in which the game is not progressed by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move in the direction in which the communication failure is resolved.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 in a period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. If the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken even once, the connection between the transmitter and receiver fails When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate the communication failure during image communication is provided. Door from the transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect The connection confirmation signal that indicates that transmission is to be started to the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and confirms that the game progress is started again When the output of the signal is stopped, and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d opens the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) into a door frame. Control of liquid crystal display by stopping transmission to receiver ICSDIC0 for side effect The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Thus, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a repeat failure resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not executed by displaying start and stop, it is possible to move in the direction of solving the communication failure. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and displays stop. Only when the progress of the game is not being executed, while the output of the connection confirmation signal is being repeatedly output, the main control board 1 Even if the 10 main control MPUs 1310a start fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and start the progress of the game again, the door frame The distortion (disturbance of the image) of the effect that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460 is every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to execute the progress of the game again and ends (a period from timing K1 to timing K2 (Every time it becomes an interval period), it can be made to go in the direction to eliminate.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 is a start area in which the game balls emitted by the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 toward the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5 are provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on entering the mouth 2004, is implemented. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor for controlling the payout of the gaming balls by the payout device 830 based on the winning ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The 70 dispensing control MPU 952a is implemented.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information on the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on the payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 of FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated during the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 92 is performed from the time of power on, the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased 77 is output from the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period in which the payout control unit performs processing at power on from when the power is turned on, to the payout control internal RAM. The RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing information regarding the payout being stored, and the main control side power supply of FIG. The period (or the power 82. The RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is used as an error cancellation signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830 when it is operated after the period when the payout control unit power on processing has been performed since the time of entry has elapsed. And an error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 92 is performed from the time of power on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period when the payout control unit power on processing is performed from the time of power on, Since the RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the information regarding the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. Period in which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process of (Or, when it is operated after a lapse of time from when the power is turned on, a period in which the process when the turn-on of the dispensing control unit is performed) elapses, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. The RAM clear function is also operated by one operation switch 954 as it is combined with an error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a that is the payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a that is the game control microprocessor. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, i.e., and an error release function. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors disposed on the game board, such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detecting sensor , And a circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, so here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input is described Do.

  In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball driven into a game area, etc. to manipulate the flow state of the game ball as desired and obtain an unfair profit There is no end to unfair gaming practices.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such illegal gaming activities and to control the illegal activity by the light emitting means or the alarm by sound or the like. There is.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control concerning the game progress and the effect will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process result. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a display mode (a symbol, various background images, characters, display images of characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, The display mode and operation mode of various members (such as the rendering operation unit 400 and the movable member) contributing to the rendering are controlled.

  In particular, in the main control board 1310, special symbol process processing is performed each time interrupt processing is performed. In this special control process, first, first and second starting opening winning process is performed. In this first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening, and when it is determined that a winning is made, the number of pending special symbol sides is increased by one. To be done.

  When the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, if the processing flag is 0, the variation starting process is executed. In this variation start process, on condition that the number of reservations is 1 or more, the big hit judgment in pending state is digested and executed, and after storing the result of this big hit judgment (such as a hit or its type) , Update the processing flag to "1".

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is completed, the variation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator based on the stored result of the big hit judgment and the current gaming state etc. The processing flag is updated to "2" after determining and setting the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to the stop display) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol etc).

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, processing during variation is executed. In this fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is monitored by a timer, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the time out. Stop. After that, when the result of the big hit judgment stored in the fluctuation start process is a big hit, the processing selection flag is updated to “3”, and the big hit judgment result stored in the fluctuation start process is not a big hit Then, the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, it is necessary to start over from the fluctuation start process again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the big hit game processing is executed. In this big hit game processing, the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game is operated, and the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the big hit game determined based on the type of the winning big hit, Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game is over, it is controlled that it is controlled to the advantageous state such as the time saving state or the probability variation state when the processing to stop the operation of the condition device is done or the type of the winning jack is a special type. After updating the gaming state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, it is necessary to start over from the fluctuation start process again.

  A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored as the fluctuation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of symbol variation of the special symbol, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, an effect appearing in the effect display device 1600 It is possible to determine the type of pattern. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern for outlying reach fluctuation, and a fluctuation pattern for outlying fluctuation. The big hit change is a change that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and in the effect display device 1600, the reach display is performed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is expanded so that the big hit symbol is finally determined and displayed. The effect to be played is executed. The out-of-reach reach fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when it is judged that the result of the big hit judgment is a loss and the reach judgment is based on reach random numbers, and in the effect display device 1600, after the reach effect, decoration An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally displayed so as to display the off symbol for a definite stop. Out of change fluctuation is a change that is performed when the result of the big hit judgment is a loss and it is not judged that the reach judgment will be performed by the reach judgment based on reach random numbers, and the effect display device 1600 does not go through reach effect An effect is carried out in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally released so as to display the off symbol for a final decision. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is defined so as to be able to identify which fluctuation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to this, it is possible to make such a variation pattern of the decorative symbol appear. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the variation display pattern of the decoration symbol is made to appear in the effect display device 1600, and the effect display (background and hold image) related to the degree of expectation is changed. Control is performed to change the mode (display or movement) in the operation unit 400, or to operate a movable member such as the back and back movable effect unit 3100.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special motorized prize control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Now, in the main control program, when it is shifted to the special symbol and special motorized item control processing (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is firstly, as shown in FIG. A random number for the first jackpot determination is acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter on condition that the detection signal by the one starting opening sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (YES in step S5231) The first starting opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol (YES in step S5233) on condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 4004 is in the on state (there is entering the second starting opening 2004) (YES in step S5233) A second start opening passing process such as acquiring the second jackpot determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit executing flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the big hit running flag is set, control of the big hit gaming state A big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the big hit control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・ When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol becomes the mode that suggests either “8R probability variation big hit A” or “8R normal big hit”, the big winning opening 2005 After opening the game for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or repeating the open / close pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine gaming balls have won in the big winning opening 2005 Control to 8R big hit gaming state,
・ When the result of the judgment processing about the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the second special symbol becomes the mode which suggests "16R probability variation big hit", big winning a prize port 2005 is opened for a long time (for example 28.5 seconds) Control to 16R big hit gaming state which repeats opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected by the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 that nine game balls are won in the big winning opening 2005 or after,
・ When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol becomes the mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds ) Or control the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, to an 8R big hit gaming state which repeats 8 times,
・ When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol becomes the mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) The opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed after being closed is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state which is repeated twice.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time reduction control is executed, the right hitting is more advantageous for the player than the left hitting, and in the situation where the time saving control is not executed As described above, the left strike is advantageous to the player. In this respect, in the left-handed state, even if the big hit is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol according to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002, a big hit game of up to 8 rounds of long time opening Only the state (about 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, when the big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004, the probability of approximately 50% (allocation ratio of winning types The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained when winning a big hit, such as that a big hit game state (generally 2,000 game balls can be obtained) of 16 rounds of long time opening is executed. In the case of being controlled to shift to the right, it is possible to expect to obtain a greater amount of prize balls than in the left.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the open control of such big winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting a fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

  Also, in the big hit control process, after performing such open control of the big winning opening 2005, as shown in Figure 110, according to the winning type of the big hit that was the opportunity to be played the big hit game concerned, high probability Executes each set process of flag and time saving flag.

  The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the big hit judgment processing shown in FIG. 109 described later, and a big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 16R) which performs probability change control after the end of the big hit gaming state. Certain variation big hit, 8R certain variation big hit B) is set when you end the big hit gaming state based on B), when the next big hit will be the first special symbol stop processing shown in Figure 114 described later or the second special symbol stop processing not shown It is reset by.

  The short time flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control is being performed (low probability time short state, high probability time short state), and as shown in FIG. 110, time reduction control after the big hit gaming state ends (high probability time short state) Set when ending the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (8 R probability variation big hit A, 16 R probability variation big hit, 8 R probability variation big hit B), and when it becomes the next big hit the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 described later Or it is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated. Alternatively, when the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is digested 100 times while the jackpot is not won after the occurrence of the low probability time short state occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Or it is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated.

  The fluctuation number counter is a counter that indicates the fluctuation number of the special symbol after the fluctuation number counter is reset, and is used in a first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 described later It is updated when variation of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed (for example, counting up) and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit B It is reset when starting the jackpot gaming state based on.

  In addition, if the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being controlled is set as the processing of step S5236. Determine if As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control processing, processing is performed to open the special winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such open control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a short time flag, a short time Each set process such as the number counter is never performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), there is no chance of winning a small hit in the big hit determination.

  In addition, if the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second jackpot determination random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is The first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing according to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed (step S5238) on condition that it is "0" (step S5237).

  On the other hand, if the value of the second special reserve number counter indicating the number of the second jackpot determination random number stored in the second special symbol reserve storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol of The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop is executed (step S5239). Thus, as long as the player does not lose the lottery for the second special symbol held on hold (unless the value of the second special hold number counter is “0”), about the first special symbol Regardless of the holding status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number will be continuously performed without interruption (preferential execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time saving state (high probability time short state), the player can maintain the hitting (right hitting) of the game ball to the right of the center character 2500, It becomes possible to continuously perform only the lottery (judgment process) on the random numbers for the two big hit judgments without interruption.

  In addition, it is limited to the special figure game (pattern change) using the second special figure (second special symbol) to be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (first special symbol). For example, execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and from the stored data, execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started. It is good if you can decide

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S5232).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5231 that the first starting opening sensor 4002 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 105. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs each random number on the first special symbol side (big hit determination random number, reach determination random number, big hit symbol random number, variation display pattern random number) as the process of step S5241. ) Is obtained from the above random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is judged whether it is "4" which is the (upper limit value) (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination processing for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve the state of (5), the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Then, as the process of step S5244, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, each random number acquired in the step S5241 Store in

  Then, next, the first special drawing pre-reading process for executing the first special drawing side pre-reading effect is executed, and the process is ended (step S5245). As described later, the first special view side pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result of the first special symbol (or the expectation thereof) before starting variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special view prefetching process, information necessary for determining whether or not the prefetching rendering is performed, rendering contents, etc. on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information related to the drop for prefetching determination, and the symbol type for prefetching determination) Information, information on variation pattern numbers for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information relating to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5242 that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S5243 to S5245.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S5234).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5233 that the second start port sensor 4004 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 106. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs, as the process of step S5251, each random number on the second special symbol side (second big hit determination random number, second reach determination random number, second big hit symbol The random number and the second variable display pattern random number) are acquired from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value It is determined whether or not it is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reservations for the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control for the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly reserved. In order to achieve the state of (5), the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

  That is, first, in the process of step S5253, the second special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 corresponds to the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. Store in

  Then, next, a second special drawing pre-reading process for executing pre-reading effect on the second special drawing side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the second special view side prefetching effect is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol before starting variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special view prefetching process, information (such as crash information, symbol type, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) required to determine the presence or absence of preview rendering effects and the contents of effects on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5252 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by ending the process without executing the process of step S5253 to step S5255.

  When the number of reservations for the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) instructs the number of reservations for the first special symbol (First pending number specification command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) instructs the number of reservations for the second special symbol. Command (second pending number specification command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and the special motor symbol control process and the second special symbol process processing executed in the step S5239 of the special symbol and special motor symbol control processing are the same. The program module is different from the above in that only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, so only the special symbol and the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special motorized symbol control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process processings will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. The big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read out big hit determination random number, the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol etc. First special symbol normal processing to be performed (step S5280)

  2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination processing of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the determination process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S5281 )

  3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for variation display pattern, or the special effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 is executed corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like for the variation mode of the effect display to be displayed is performed (step S5282)

  4. First special symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283)

  5. The first special symbol display mode 1403 is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 as the first special symbol display mode is determined based on the result of the determination process on the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5301. As processing of, it is judged whether there is a fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state, then it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the main control built-in RAM as processing of step S5302. The earliest storage of random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot judgment random number, the first reach judgment random number, the first jackpot random number, the first variation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the same main control built-in RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special holding number counter is counted down, and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM First-in first-out (First-In) random numbers (for example, random number for the first jackpot judgment, first reach judgment random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first fluctuation display pattern random number) related to display mode at the time of fluctuation display stop of symbol Shift operation is performed in the manner of First-Out).

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol hold storage area a to first special symbol hold storage area d), and the start winning combination to the first starting opening 2002 The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored sequentially from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). . Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and in response to the occurrence of the start winning to the second starting opening 2004 The random numbers extracted are stored sequentially from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  After that, as the process of step S5305, a big hit determination process which is a process for determining the big hit is performed based on the read first big hit determination random number. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S5281) (step S5306), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in the high probability state shown in FIG. 110A if the current gaming state is the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short state) (step S5311). The big hit determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the big hit determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 110A is selected (step S5313) and selected The determined jackpot determination table is compared with the jackpot determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the big hit determination table is stored in the above-mentioned main control built-in ROM, and the gaming state is low probability for each kind of special random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number) The jackpot determination table for low probability used in the (low probability short time state, low probability time short state), and the high used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability short time state, high probability time short state) And a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. Then, in the big-hit determination table at low probability, which is referred to compare with the first big-hit determination random number, it matches with the big-hit determination value indicating that the 204 types of first big-hit determination random numbers have won the big hit. The first jackpot judging random numbers (65,536 types) are respectively associated with each other so that the first jackpot judging random number of the type matches the deviation judgment value indicating that the above is a loss (big hit probability at low probability; roughly) "1/321"). On the other hand, to compare with the special symbol and the second special symbol process random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and the special motorized symbol control process. In the low probability big hit judgment table to be referred to, it corresponds to the big hit judgment value indicating that the 204 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers are won in the big hit, and the 65332 second big hit judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned loss The second jackpot judging random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-pocket judgment value (in the case of a low probability jackpot probability; roughly "1/321").

  Also, in the high probability big hit determination table to be compared to the first big hit determination random number, 2040 types of first big hit determination random numbers coincide with the big hit determination value, and 63,496 types of first big hit determination The first jackpot judging random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers coincide with the outlier judgment value (big hit probability at high probability; approximately "one-half"). On the other hand, in the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability, which is referred to compare with the second jackpot judging random number in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and the special motorized prize control process. To match the big hit judgment value indicating that 2040 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers have won the big hit, and to coincide with the out-of-order judgment value which indicates that 63496 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned loss The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other (a jackpot probability at high probability; approximately "one-half"). It should be noted that the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table to be compared with the first jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot judgment table referred to be compared with the second jackpot judgment random number (big hit judgment value The number may be the same and the big hit determination value may be different (the big hit probability is the same), or the number of big hit determination values may be different (the big hit probability may be different)) In this case, at least one of the jackpot judgment values of the jackpot judgment table for low probability and the jackpot judgment table for high probability may be made different (both may be made different). .

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the big hit determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, it determines that it is a big hit (step S5315) ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation has been won in big hit is set (step S5316), it ends big hit decision processing.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that a big hit has been lost, the read big hit determination random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won based on the selected big hit determination table. It is judged whether or not it is (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, the jackpot determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability 0.65536 (0), in this step S5317, it is judged that the small hit has not been won (judged as a loss).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that a loss has occurred, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is high probability non-short state, the reach determination table in high probability non-short state, and when the gaming state is high probability short state And a reach determination table in the low probability state used in the case where the gaming state is the low probability state (low probability non-short state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number indicates reach is reached, and the reach determination value indicates that the 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach The reach determination random numbers are associated with one another so as to coincide with the above. However, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, in order to maximize the progression speed of the game in the time reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that all 72 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach is matched In this case, it may not coincide with the reach determination value indicating reach.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state are reached The above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased as compared to that in the high probability time short state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state and the low probability state The random numbers for reach determination are associated with one another such that the random number for reach matches the reach determination value indicating that the 67 random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating that the reach will not be reached. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-short state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is the same as the low probability non-short state.

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 (step S5319), it determines that reach loss has occurred (YES in step S5120) Then, the reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set, and the process is ended (step S5121).

  FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first of all, as shown in FIG. 111. The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S5305) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether the big hit flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (B), and the random number for the first big hit symbol read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is determined by comparing with the selected symbol determination table (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, random numbers for the first big hit symbol (here, a total of 200 for the judgment result (8R positive variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) The first jackpot symbol random number is stored in a form associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the second special symbol random number for the second big hit symbol against the determination result (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side. Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in association with one another.

  The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained big hit symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the first jackpot symbol random number and the type of the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number are set to be different . More specifically, the distribution ratio (allocation) between the high probability probability transition probability odd hit and the normal probability hit that does not become the high probability status transition is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number is greater than the expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the random number ing.

It is as follows when the concrete game contents for every kind of big hit are summarized briefly.
1. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 8 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easily) to control the 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Next, the game is controlled to the high probability time reduction state until the big hit gaming state occurs, and a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state is performed. Is controlled to the rendering mode shown in the rendering display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 8 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easily) to control the 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the low probability time short state until the variation display of special symbol is digested 100 times (or won in the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state A battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in a low probability time reduction state, the effect display device is relatively in a disadvantageous state 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 16 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) and control it to 16R big hit gaming state, and after this 16R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the high probability time and short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, during the execution period of the 16R big hit gaming state effect (succeeding production) about whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (will become 16 rounds) ) Is performed, and it is relatively advantageous after a predetermined period of time has passed since being controlled to a high probability time-short state. 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 8 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easily) to control the 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the high probability time and short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, during the execution period of 8R big hit gaming state the effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (will 16 rounds) ) Is performed, and it is a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time after being controlled to a high probability time-short state. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or that nine gaming balls are winning in the big winning opening 2103, the count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected in 2 times, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state which is hard to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 2R big hit gaming state, it is special Control the low probability time short state until the variable display of the symbol is digested 100 times (or win a big hit within the period until it is digested 100 times), and a specific character during the execution period of the 2R big hit gaming state Perform the battle production (battle defeat production) which is defeated, and in the low probability time reduction state, the production display device 1600 that it is a relatively disadvantageous state 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the gaming ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and driving of a movable piece (not shown) for opening the second starting port 2004 is not performed. Therefore, in the left-handed state, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 will occur, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and a big hit (8R positive variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) associated with the first special symbol will be generated. Similarly, the gaming ball does not win in the first starting opening 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 will occur, and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1186 except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol Only the variable display is executed, and a big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) associated with the second special symbol will be generated.

  Also, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the large winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum is repeated eight times and only about 1000 gaming balls are paid out, In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 gaming balls by repeating the opening and closing pattern of opening the large winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) up to 16 hours.

  In addition, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing, when it is decided to 8R probability variation big hit A, it is decided to be 8R probability variation big hit A symbol as a big hit symbol, and when it is decided to 8R regular big hit it is a big hit symbol 8R usual big hit symbol decide. In addition, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is decided to be 16R probability variation big hit, it is decided to be 16R probability variation big hit symbol as big hit symbol and when it is decided to 8R probability variation big hit B, it is 8R probability variation big hit as big hit symbol When it is decided to B design and decided to 2R normal big hit, it decides to 2R normal big hit design as big hit design.

  Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. And as a result, if the small hitting flag is set in the processing corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process processing (step S5239), the small hitting symbol (the mode at the time of the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol) After determining to the specific pattern stop mode) (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

  Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the special symbol is in the lost pattern as the variation stop state (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337 Do.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 performs the above-mentioned lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, reach is out of place, out of place as processing in step S5337) The determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set such that an instruction (which may indicate the stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) as the process of step S5338, this process is ended.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and change pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration symbols are displayed in a variable manner and left decoration symbol → right decoration symbol → The stop display is made in the order of the middle decoration pattern (in addition, the left, middle and right decoration symbols may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and may be displayed simultaneously and stopped). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when winning as a big hit is a type other than 2R normal big hit. On the other hand, when 2R normal big hit is obtained, it is decided to a specific symbol combination (combination in which at least one of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols). In addition, when the reach out is specified, the out pattern with reach (the left and right decorative symbols are a combination of the same symbols from “0” to “9” and a combination of symbols different in the inside decorative symbol; reach loss) When the design is determined and the design is specified, the design with no reach is determined (combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns having at least the left and right decorative patterns different). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect is ended).

  In any case, when the hit is obtained as a result of progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) to appear at the time before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game After the is started, the effect display during the big hit game is made to appear.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S5341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit decided at step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), small hit flag Is set (step S5343), a small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S5344), and if a reach flag is set (step S5345), a reach variation pattern table ( (Not shown) (step S5346), and the big hit flag and the small hit flag If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), this processing is ended. Thereby, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed in the first special symbol display 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern table of this example is the random number for big hit judgment (the first big hit judgment random number, the second big hit judgment random number) and the big hit random number (the first big hit random number, the second big hit random number) A plurality of types are provided for each of the determination results based on the above. In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is The first change display pattern random numbers are stored in a form associated with each other. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a reads out in step S5302 of the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number The above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is obtained by comparing with the random number for variable display pattern and acquiring from the table the variable time information associated with the read random number for variable display pattern. Determine the change pattern of Thereby, the determination process about the change pattern of the said special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) comes to be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, since the small hit is not won in this example, the variation pattern table at the small hit is not used. In this example, a small hit is not won, but a small hit may be selected.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for fluctuation display pattern. It is done. For example, in the non-temporal state, 164 random display pattern random numbers out of 241 random display pattern random numbers are set as a judgment value (0 to 163) indicating execution of any of normal reach effects, 59 The variable display pattern random number is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with a large hit expectation is to be performed, and the 18 variable display pattern random numbers have a high hit probability. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects is to be performed.

  In addition, with super reach production (SP production), the big hit expectation degree is higher than normal reach production, vis-a-vis the player who desires the occurrence of big hit game state when super reach production is executed the player for the big hit game state Expectations are rising. That is, such a super reach effect is the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit, and the expectation of the player for the big hit gaming state even if the loss is finally displayed by this Will be able to raise However, actually, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state, a high expectation advance notice effect of being drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern appears while the super reach effect is being executed. It is required to do (composite).

  In addition, it is provided corresponding to the random number for the first jackpot determination and the random number for the first jackpot symbol, and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds is commonly set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds to The fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time-short state. Thus, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short time state and in the non short time state, and in the short time state, during the variation of the first special symbol, the game ball wins the second starting hole 2004. At the same time, the player has secured a time for the player to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2004.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected among fluctuation time at the time of losing of the second special symbol, each game ball which is struck at 0.6 seconds interval in game territory 5a in time saving state (high probability time short state etc) It will be suppressed that it is discharged | emitted without being provided to a lottery process.

  That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the area immediately above the gate unit 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area to the gate unit 2003 while in a time saving state (such as a high probability time reducing state), a hit as an ordinary symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in the opening and closing of the second start port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (in this example, 5.5 seconds). Thereby, in a situation where it can be successively received in the second start opening 2004 (a short time in which substantially all of the game balls hit to the right of the center character 2500 can be received in the second start opening 2004). Even if there is an acceptance of those gaming balls, there is a high jackpot probability (probability in the high probability state) around "about 1/22" control that the lottery of the second special symbol side can be digested one after another is executed It will be possible.

  And in this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so in the time saving state (high probability time reduction state etc.), the second The game ball can be received more frequently at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the starting opening 2004. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol disconnection based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is extremely as fluctuation time of time saving state (high probability time short state etc.) It can be set to a short 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when losing is obtained, the symbol variation is ended only in a time (0.1 second) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the gaming ball, so that it is 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls shot at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, it is suppressed that those game balls are discharged without being subjected to lottery processing .

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5371. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, as a result, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned drawn fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284) in the process of step S5373, this process is ended.

  In addition, even if the fluctuation timer has been decremented by 1 (step S5371), when the fluctuation time timer has not become 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped), Every time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5381. The display control for causing the first special symbol display 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing as the processing of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol in the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of is set as the command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  When the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is to be started (step S5387), The standby time until the start of the jackpot gaming state (the time for displaying the jackpot gaming state to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the above-mentioned time saving flag is set. The time short flag is reset (step S5389), and further, the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process can be shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined in the process of step S5235 that the big hit execution flag is set, and the big hit game in the above big hit control process (step S5240a) The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a big hit start command (8 R positive variation big hit A command, 8 R normal big hit command, 16 R positive variation depending on the type of big hit (8 R positive variation big hit A, 8 R normal big hit, 16 R positive variation big hit, 8 R positive variation big hit B, 2 R normal big hit) Set the jackpot command, 8R probability variation jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). As a result, the effect (battle effect or added challenge effect) of the big hit gaming state according to the type of big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker or the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the low probability time-short state is present (step S5390). Then, when in the low probability time short state, it is determined whether or not the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time short state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time short state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition to end the low probability time short state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-short playing state) (step S5392).

  Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), the small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is performed. The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying a small hit game state to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process of the first special symbol process flag is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. (Step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit executing flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240 b) is performed. The small hit gaming state will be executed. By the way, unlike when a big hit is won, there is no case where the gaming state is changed when executing such a small hitting gaming state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without processing for the big hit or the small hit, assuming that it is a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process can be shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S5394), this processing is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is executed according to the status of suspension. A process according to the progress of (lottery, symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric service combination control process (step S116).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the on state in the process of step S5401, and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes gate part passing processing such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol storage area of the RAM as the processing of step S5402. Do.

  Then, in the normal symbol process processing, one of the following five process operations is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The normal symbol normal processing in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out and the lottery processing for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403)
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in which lottery processing or the like for the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the common pattern fluctuation random number (step S5404)
3. Normal symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the above normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S5405)
4. The pattern at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1402 as the mode at the time of the variation control stop Normal symbol stop processing to stop the key (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process about the mode at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol becomes the mode which suggests "per common figure", the aforementioned movable piece becomes open state acceptance of the game ball to 2nd starting opening 2004 Motor combination release process (step S5407) that executes the process to control

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated such that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate part passing process (step S5402).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the on state in the process of the step S5401, and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310 a as the processing of step S 5411. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of a normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  If it is determined in the process of step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to newly put the variable symbol display control of the normal symbols on hold status. It will process. That is, first, as the process of the step S 5412, the normal number-of-holds counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S5413, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned common-use variation random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, next, in the process of step S5414, each random number acquired in this way is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter among the storage areas of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of step S5412 to step S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing in step S5421. Based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the holding state. As a result, if it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, then, as the processing of step S5422, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol storage area of the main control MPU 1310a is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read out from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of the steps S5423 and S5424, the ordinary holding number counter is counted down, and the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol stored in each storage area of the ordinary storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out mode for random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) related to the display mode in.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area Remember. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the random number extracted to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is When the variable display start condition stored based on the random number stored and stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the determination table (not shown) for the popular drawing at the time reduction (step S5426) if the current gaming state is the time reduction state (high probability time reduction state) (step S5426) Step S5426), if the current gaming state is the non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) (step S5425), select a non-time-shorted popular drawing determination table (not shown) In step S5427), the selected common drawing determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

  It should be noted that the per-common-figure determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the per-common-pattern determination table used when the game state is short (high probability time short state) and the game state is non-short It has a non-time-shorted spread diagram determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-short state, high probability non-short state). Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table, which is referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it corresponds to the common-mode-per-diagram determination value indicating that all the 255 types of normal random numbers have been selected per common diagram. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to be matched with the deviation judgment value which is a deviation. As described above, when the game ball passes to the gate unit 2003 in time saving time, the player always wins per flat map, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is It is possible to control the acceptance. It may be made to coincide with the determination value per common drawing indicating that not all of the 255 types, but more ordinary random numbers than in the non-short time state are elected per common drawing.

  In addition, in the non-short time common drawing determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all the 255 types of the normal random numbers coincide with the common drawing determination value indicating that the common drawing is won. Instead, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the deviation judgment value. As described above, in the short time, even if the game ball passes to the gate unit 2003, the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting opening, since the player can not win the winning game. There is no possibility to control the reception of gaming balls to 2004. However, as described above, the hit of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-short time condition, and in this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than the short time condition, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the hit. The movable piece of the second start opening 2004 is opened for a time shorter than the short time, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start opening 2004, and then advanced again. The reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 may be disabled.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the selected common drawing is the common drawing as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429) ), After setting the flag per common drawing showing that the fluctuation is won per common drawing (step S5430), per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of normal symbol) at the time of change control stop of normal symbol The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol when it is determined to be out of place A common figure as a mode (a stop symbol of a normal symbol) at the time of control stop determines a shift symbol (step S5432). After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S5404), this processing is ended (step S5433).

  Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to obtain the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing ( In step S1022)), the game situation in each case is grasped, and effects corresponding to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a start winning combination has occurred, and performs control relating to a pending display or a pre-reading effect according to the starting winning combination when in this state. And after this, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, following fluctuation pattern specified command reception waiting processing, production design fluctuation start processing, production design fluctuation inside processing, production design fluctuation stop processing, big hit indication processing Performs either a jackpot in-game process or a jackpot end effect process.

  Fluctuation pattern specification command reception waiting process: While the fluctuation pattern command regarding fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, it takes on effects (such as demonstration effects) when the symbol is not in the fluctuation state and control regarding the big hit is not performed While performing control, when the fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect pattern fluctuation start processing.

  Effect pattern variation start processing: While determining various effect contents (effect pattern, advance notice effect, etc.) in the symbol change period based on the change pattern command etc., the change of the decorative pattern is started based on the determined effect contents To control. Then, after that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process of rendering symbol variation. In addition, most of "the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) stopped by the big hit symbol" among the fluctuation patterns (rendering pattern) are prepared in a form to be paired with "the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) stopped by the missing symbol" By functioning as the same variation pattern (rendering pattern), it is possible to provide a rendering about whether the jackpot symbol appears or the lost symbol appears. Therefore, hereinafter, when describing a "predetermined variation pattern" or a "specific variation pattern" or the like when describing a variation pattern (rendering pattern), the "big hit symbol will be stopped unless otherwise noted. It means both "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern)" and "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern) to be stopped at the missing symbol" ", and as a result of the development content being developed in the same manner It will come to the turning point where either of the jackpot symbol and the missing symbol appear.

During production symbol fluctuation processing: While performing control to start the various effect contents decided in the production symbol fluctuation start processing at each timing during the symbol fluctuation period etc, when the fluctuation time is over the value of the process flag is produced Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop process.
Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design symbol determination command) instructing the stop of all symbols, stop the fluctuation of the decorative symbol and perform control to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, when stopping the decorative symbol with the big hit symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display processing, and when stopping the decorative symbol with the lost symbol, the value of the process flag is waited for variation pattern designation command reception Update to the value corresponding to

  Big hit display processing: It controls the effect in the period from the stop of the decorative symbol with the big hit symbol to the start of the big hit game (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit). After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

  During the big hit game processing: Control concerning various effects during the occurrence period of the big hit game state is performed. When the jackpot gaming state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

  Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, control effects (such as a display effect for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended) in a period from the end of the big hit gaming state to the change permission state. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the effect symbol fluctuation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (the fluctuation effect) associated with the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the effect pattern determined It will control so that the fluctuation of a decorative symbol is started based on (the fluctuation production).

  The effect pattern (the change effect) may not necessarily correspond one-to-one with the change number indicated by the change pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with one fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variation effects) is determined based on the effect lottery, the game situation, etc. You may do it. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is also configured to associate a plurality of effect patterns for some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  In addition, although this will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a notice lottery (determination process of advance effect) based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the change pattern after determining the effect pattern (change effect). By performing control (process during production symbol fluctuation) to cause the preliminary announcement effect won in the preliminary lottery to appear at a predetermined timing during the execution of the above determined effect pattern (variation effect). It is made to suggest the degree of expectation which a jackpot pattern appears by the appearance aspect etc. of those as possible combination.

  In the past, among such combined effects, there may be a plurality of occurrences while the same specified notice effect (for example, timer effect) is being performed while one effect pattern (variation effect) is being executed. By this, it is expected that maintenance of the game interest will be aimed at. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation of the big hit design is high, the frequency at which a plurality of timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variation effect) is being executed will naturally be low. It has been considered difficult to sufficiently improve the amusement of the game.

  Although described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect appearing during the execution of the effect pattern (variation effect), and the count display toward the timing when the predetermined effect is performed is a first predetermined value. What is executed as a count effect display performed from (for example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") or as a standby display (during preparation) before starting the count display It is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, the countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, a presentation (for example, a conversation announcement or a cut-in A) that causes the player to appear either in a relatively disadvantageous presentation mode (a presentation mode with a low degree of expectation) or in an advantageous presentation mode (a presentation mode with a high degree of expectation). , B, and so on) are targeted for the timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (in particular, the advance side timer effect performed as a result of the advance lottery), at least when the count display is started, it is concealed as to which effect is the effect target It is desirable to do so. In addition, “effect object of timer effect” is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, the countdown) from the first predetermined value as the timer effect becomes the second predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) In the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

  In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time since the start of counting is displayed up to the second decimal place to accurately display the number of seconds and the like. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed from when the counting is started ( It does not have to indicate the number of seconds) correctly.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice side timer effect) as effect contents appearing only when winning in the advance notice lottery, the above effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) It is possible to execute a timer effect (variable side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect). That is, in this case, if only the notice-side timer effect is executed, the count effect display is executed as "advantage effect of the advance effect which functions to increase the jackpot expectation degree with respect to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command". Instead, it is also executed as “the content of the effect of the effect pattern itself determined based on the change pattern command”, and the expectation from the big hit expectation degree indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the change pattern command It is possible to cause the count effect display (the timer effect) to appear without wasting the item in vain (the increase in the degree of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in the advance notice lottery"). For example, when the big hit expectation when the specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is "20%", when the advance side timer effect is further executed, the big hit expectation is increased by the function of the combined effect. For example, it becomes “40%” and the frequency of appearance must be lowered by that amount, but when the fluctuation side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, the big hit is expected It is possible to execute the timer effect while keeping the degree at “20%” (it is possible to appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and it is possible to preferably maintain the appearance frequency.

  In the determination table T1, the jackpot expectation when the rendering pattern (variation rendering) appears differs depending on the variation number (further, the rendering pattern), and basically, as the variation number increases, the jackpot expectation There is a tendency for the degree to be high. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10) and 17 (18), the fluctuation-side timer effect is executed in which "conversation announcement" is the effect target as the effect contents. While the appearance ratio is fluctuation number 5 (6)> fluctuation number 9 (10)> fluctuation number 17 (18), the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is fluctuation number 5 (6) <fluctuation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18) is set. Here, for convenience of description, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state is described in detail, but even in the determination table referred to in the low probability time short state or the high probability time short state, the contents of the effect pattern itself As an effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which the fluctuation-side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the determination table T1, all of the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but in the variation numbers 5 and 6, the variation timer effect can be executed for the presentation of conversation announcement. It differs from the change numbers 3 and 4 in the point. In addition, although variation numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that all the same character reach effects are performed, variation numbers 9 and 10 are subjected to variation-side timer effects for presentation of conversation announcements, and variation numbers 11 and 10, In 12, the fluctuation-side timer effect for the cut-in A is performed, and for the fluctuation numbers 13 and 14, the conversation announcement and the cut-in A are executed, and the fluctuation-side timer effect for the effects is performed. It differs in that it can be done. In addition, although the variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, the variation numbers 17 and 18 perform the variation-side timer effect for the presentation of the conversation announcement, and the variation numbers 19 and 18 In 20, the variable-side timer effect for the cut-in B is executed, and for the fluctuation numbers 21 and 22, the conversation announcement and the cut-in B are executed, and the variable-side timer effect for the effects is performed It differs in that it can be done. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation rate is higher in the case where the fluctuation-side timer effect directed to the cut-ins A and B is executed than when the fluctuation-side timer effect directed to the conversation announcement is executed. Is set so that the jackpot expectation degree tends to be higher in the case where the variable-side timer effect directed to the effects of both the conversation announcement and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

  In addition, with "conversation notice", it is possible to appear at a relatively early stage after the effect pattern (the change effect of the decorative symbol) is executed, and the effect that the relatively low expectation degree is often made On the other hand, cut-ins A and B are allowed to appear at a relatively late stage after the effect pattern (the change effect of the decorative symbol) is executed, and a relatively high expectation is added. Performance (or a performance that requires a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the “conversation notice” is set so that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than that of other effects (cut-in A, B, feature A action described later, B, etc.) having a higher degree of expectation than this. It is supposed to be In addition, "Cut in" that appears as the content of the fluctuation effect is executed to correspond to the cut in A that appears as the effect content of the notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the "cut in" appears. It is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in B, not the cut-in A appearing as the effect contents of the effect.

  Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect contents (reproduction pattern) for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) Is assigned as the variable-side timer effect. Then, on this, if the variation pattern is “a predetermined type (for example, variation number 1 to 6 etc.) such as shortening variation or low normal reach effect with low degree of expectation”, the count effect display as the advance notice timer effect is displayed. The fluctuation pattern is “the fluctuation pattern for executing the fluctuation-side timer effect while the expectation UP when the advance notice-time timer effect appears is suitably secured by preventing the effect winning (by increasing the premium degree). In the case of “count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22)”, the variation pattern is determined in the above-mentioned predetermined type (for example, variation The ratio corresponding to numbers 1 to 6 etc.) is reduced.

  In addition, although 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns on which the variation-side timer effect is executed, two of them (0 Since only variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) which may be set individually may correspond to the above predetermined type (variation numbers 1 to 6 etc.), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. On the other hand, eight fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as fluctuation patterns for which the fluctuation-side timer effect is not executed, and four fluctuation patterns (variations (of Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined type (such as the change numbers 1 to 6), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

  In such a configuration, when the effect content of the fluctuation pattern is one capable of performing count effect display (fluctuation timer effect) (count fluctuation pattern), a notice is given rather than the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation timer effect is not performed. The rate at which it is determined that the count effect display (notice timer effect) can not be executed as the effect content of the effect decreases. Therefore, it is possible to urge the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one rendering pattern (variation rendering) without unnecessarily accumulating the expectation and lowering the appearance frequency.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol fluctuation start process is a count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) Even in the case where the count variation pattern is the count variation pattern, the appearance ratio of the notification timer effect differs according to which count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect pattern corresponding to the change numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect is not displayed at all, and the effect pattern corresponding to the change numbers 9 to 14 is executed. When it happens, the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the above notice timer effect can appear with a high draw probability. ing.

  Even when the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect may appear with low probability. In addition, even when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22 in which the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability is executed, it is actually a big hit than in the case of a loss The above-mentioned notice effect timer effect can be made to appear with a higher lottery probability in the effect pattern which has been won, and the fluctuation number 22 can be made to appear with a higher lottery probability than the fluctuation number 16 ing.

  In such a configuration, the count effect display is also notified that the variation pattern is either the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The rate of execution as the effect content (preliminary timer effect) is different. Therefore, among the count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays is high in one effect pattern (variation effect), the type thereof In some cases, it is possible to further increase the rate of appearance of a plurality of count displays, so that it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In particular, although it will be described later, in peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if it is a rendering pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the rendering content of the same reach type appears, the fluctuation side timer rendering is included as the rendering content In the effect pattern to be displayed (for example, the variation numbers 17 to 22), the advance notice timer within the execution period of the effect pattern is compared with the effect pattern (for example, the variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation timer effect is not included as the effect content The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which it is determined in the advance notice lottery that the advance notice timer effect is to be executed) is increased. That is, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuating timer effect and advance timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring a big hit expectation for winning only one forward timer effect in the advance lottery. As a result, it is possible to realize a double timer presentation opportunity without a wasteful increase of the jackpot expectation.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (the change effect) determined in the effect pattern change start process is the count change pattern (the change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). Even in this case, the fluctuation-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) in which “conversation announcement” is the target of rendering and the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) in which the “cut-in” is the rendering target In the above, the aspect of the count display (the form and color of the count number, etc.) is made different. That is, in this case, even when the effect pattern (for example, the change numbers 9, 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the change side timer effect (change side count effect display) is confirmed In combination with "the rate at which the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect appears is made to differ depending on which count fluctuation pattern is made", it is recognized that the notice-side timer effect is likely to appear. You will be able to expect.

  In addition, about the aspect of the count display which appears by advance notice side timer production (notice side count production indication), fluctuation side timer production (fluctuation side regardless of whether the production object is the same (conversation notice, cut in) or not It may be different from (or at least different from) the aspect of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the count effect display), or may be the same as the same aspect (or at least the same as at least one). .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display to be executed as the notice-side timer effect (notice-side count effect display) is executed in a common mode regardless of the type of the effect to be the effect target This is useful for making it possible for the player to recognize that the notice-side timer effect set to a high degree is appearing and to improve the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more preferable that the advance notice side timer effect is different from any of the modes of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the change side timer effect (change side count effect display). About the above-mentioned common mode as a notice side timer production (notice side count production display), a plurality of modes (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) from which an expectation is different are prepared, and either of them is performed You may do so.

  In order to make it possible to more appropriately recognize that the advance notice timer effect is being executed, the count display when the advance notice timer effect is executed and the count display when the fluctuation timer effect is executed It is desirable to make the counting speed different (for example, the speed at which the number changes in counting up or down). In such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is focused on even during a period in which the count display is in progress, and the fluctuation-side timer effect and the relative degree are relatively low. Thus, it becomes possible to have an interest as to which of the highly anticipated advance notice timer effects is being executed, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game interest during the timer digestion period.

  Also, in this case, in the variable-side timer effect, according to the object (conversation notice, cut-in), the count display is performed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the advance-timer function. If the count display is made with a cut-in) and an aspect (conversation announcement) in which the count is displayed at a speed not relatively close to the count speed of the advance notice side timer effect, whether or not the advance notice timer effect is executed It is possible to make the judgment difficult and to impart an interest. Also, while the count display is performed by repeating the appearance and deletion of the count number in the fluctuation-side timer effect (or the notice-side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed in the notice-side timer effect (or the fluctuation-side timer effect). You may make it count display by displaying.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the advance timer function are simultaneously executed, it is easily grasped whether or not the advance timer function is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to improve the fun of the game.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is performed for the fluctuation pattern (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) corresponding to the fluctuation side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time taken for total count digestion) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation-side timer effect is acquired, the count display of the fluctuation-side timer effect and the notification-side timer are performed so that any one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on random numbers for effect. If the ease of performing the same with the count display of the effect (for example, the larger the total number is easier to overlap, etc.) is made different, it may be different in the ease of judging whether or not the advance side timer effect is being executed. I am trying to give it an interest

  In this embodiment, for one variation pattern, a plurality of effect patterns (a target of effect of timer effect and reach) different in count display start timing or end timing (count total number or time required for total count digestion) are different. Although it was decided to prepare the same content of the effect, a plurality of effect patterns (but with the effect of the timer effect being different) where the start timing or end timing of the count display (count total number or time required for total count digestion) are different It is also possible to prepare a plurality of different fluctuation patterns separately for each of the effect patterns) and the type of reach effect to be executed as the effect contents of the fluctuation pattern and to make them correspond one-on-one.

  In addition, even if the count display number (count total number) when appearing in the fluctuation side timer effect and the notice side timer effect is made different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the fluctuation side timer effect and the advance notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different depending on the side timer effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the advance side timer effect is being performed and to make the difficulty different to impart an interest. .

  In addition, while the advance side timer effect is executed by the countdown display, if the variable side timer effect is executed by the count up display, it is determined whether or not the advance side timer effect is executed. It is expected that they will be able to play a major Also, while the advance side timer effect is executed by the countdown display, the variable side timer effect for the specific effect (for example, conversation advance announcement) is executed by the count-up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the change-side timer effect for the cut-in) is executed by the countdown display, it is determined whether or not the advance timer-side effect is executed, and the difficulty is made different according to the effect object It becomes possible to grant.

  In addition, although it will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is targeted for the variation-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect, and cases where different effects are intended for the effect. Control. When the same effect (for example, conversation announcement) is targeted for the variable-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect, compared to the case where different effects are targeted for the variable-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect. It is set such that the rate at which the jackpot expectation level decreases is high, and the same effect (for example, conversational announcement) is set as the target for the variable-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect. The end timing is made different.

  That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation announcement) is set as the target of the variable timer effect and the advance timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the advance timer effect is set to a predetermined value first. Because the other count display will be continued while it is terminated and reached, at this point in time, it is as if different effects are targeted (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high expectation mode) It looks like it is). Then, after this, the other count display being continued also comes to a predetermined numerical value and ends in a mode in which it is clarified that the same effect (for example, conversational announcement) is targeted for the effect, so Even when it is revealed that a conversation announcement with a relatively low degree of expectation is targeted for the effect by the timer effect on the side that has ended, it is targeted for a different outcome that is allowed to appear later ( It is expected to improve the interest of the game by maintaining the sense of expectation that the timer effect is being executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation.

  In addition, when the same effect (for example, conversation announcement) is set as the target of the fluctuation-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect, the timing at which the change-side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the advance-side timer effect It is desirable to make each count end corresponding display (for example, "count success!", "Chance UP!", Etc.) appear at timing when the numerical value is reached.

  More specifically, the variable-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect, which are targeted for the “conversation announcement” executed as the effect on the fluctuation side or the announcement side, are made to appear in one of the effect patterns. In this case, the count display of the fluctuation timer effect and the count display of the advance timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but in the fluctuation timer effect, as the effect of fluctuation on the basis of "conversation announcement". While advancing the count display in accordance with the fluctuating side specific effects that occur (“count success!”, Effects according to the appearance of the speech notice, etc.), in the notice side timer effect, in relation to the “conversation notice” The count display is displayed in accordance with the notice-side specific effect (such as “chance UP!” And the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect) which appears as the effect on the notice side. By progressing, separate count end corresponding displays are made to appear at different timings.

  By the way, for each presentation of the conversation announcement and the cut-in, it is required to be executed whenever the presentation of the variation-side timer presentation is made (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation announcement and the cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, when the effect of the variable-side timer effect is targeted, the relative indication occurs when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It is required to make it appear in a mode that is highly expected. Therefore, about the production made into the production object of the fluctuation side timer production, it incorporates beforehand as the production contents of the above-mentioned production pattern (the fluctuation production), only with the execution of the production pattern and the fluctuation side timer production and its production object It is desirable that each of the effects (a relatively high expectation mode) can be made to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that the effect (the aspect with a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the effect target in the advance notice lottery is always selected when the variable side timer effect is executed. .

  In addition, when each presentation of the conversation announcement and the cut-in is not set as the presentation object of the fluctuation side timer presentation, from the fact that it is judged whether it is made to appear as the presentation contents of the announcement side in the announcement lottery described later Judgment is made as to what kind of aspect (relatively high expectation or low aspect) appears as the side effect content, and control according to the appearance is performed based on the result of the judgment .

The process of determining the effect pattern using FIG. 118 will be summarized below.
That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when acquiring the fluctuation pattern command, the symbol type command, etc. from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, etc. Refers to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, bias (expected degree) can be given to the probability variation expectation degree when the specific effect pattern appears and the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, etc. become.

  Then, next, a plurality of effect patterns (a plurality of effect patterns having different start timing or end timing of the count display appearing in the fluctuation side timer effect, etc.) are prepared as an effect pattern associated with the fluctuation number. In the case where one of the plurality of effect patterns having different start timing or end timing of the count display is selected based on the hit of the big hit determination. At this time, when the jackpot determination is won, the effect pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or the end timing of the count display is late becomes high, whereby the start timing or the end timing of the count display It is made to have a tendency that the possibility of the jackpot pattern appearing becomes higher as

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when a special effect condition is satisfied. Even in the case, among the plurality of effect patterns, the effect pattern set so as not to appear the fluctuation-side timer effect is selected.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the rendering pattern (rendering from the variation start to the variation stopping of the decorative symbol) appearing during the symbol variation is selected in this way, what notice rendering is performed in the execution period of the rendering pattern It will be determined whether to execute additionally (in combination) in the following manner (notice lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) already described, the explanation regarding the automatic channel sound control which is a part of the process is described later. Therefore, automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be described next. First, I will briefly explain the background.

  In general pachinko machines, it is intended to realize an effect that draws the player's interest by outputting various sounds from the speakers in each scene according to the progress of the game. For example, even if the reach is to improve the player's expectation, some reach various sounds depending on the type and others do not. In such a typical pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound corresponds to each corresponding default. Reproduction is performed using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a typical pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, there may be cases where a sound to be reproduced can not be assigned to the vacant channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be reproduced is reproduced There is a problem that it is impossible to realize various sound effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds, for the purpose of realizing various sound effects by effectively utilizing empty channels and enhancing the interest of the player. While each channel is dynamically allocated and managed for each sound to be output from the output means and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), the number of combinations of sounds to be output is If it exceeds the maximum number of channels (in this embodiment, 16 channels are exemplified), each channel is dynamically allocated to the combination of sounds to be output in the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via the channels dynamically allocated within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means) . The details will be described below.

12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 119 (A) and 119 (B) respectively show an example of sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison object to the present embodiment. FIG. 119A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control based on the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control based on the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. Note that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 119 (B) shows an example of assignment of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control based on the fixed channel method, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used as shown in the figure. Here, referring to the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels in the case of output in stereo, and one channel in the case of output in monaural.

  As for "informing sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the drawing, it is assumed that the sound whose reproduction has been started should not be muted halfway along the process until the end of the reproduction. As a channel allocation method, a reproduction channel and a sound are allocated as a pair, and sound overwrite is prevented. On the other hand, there is no problem in the illustrated “normal BGM” to “held award winning sound” that the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during reproduction and muffled. As a channel allocation method, as much as possible, the same channel is allocated so that the reproduction timing does not suffer.

  In the fixed channel sound control, when a new sound is outputted to the same channel being outputted, the sound being outputted is muted and a new sound is outputted. With regard to sounds that would be harmful if overwritten, separate channels are assigned, or sounds with non-overlapping play timings are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, manage the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound category and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description is omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed of a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speakers (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) are output, and for example, when set to “0x80”, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The volume difference individually output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

  Upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R) It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set values of the upper and lower pan during playback of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers . For example, setting "0x00" indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when "0x80" is set, the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers individually composed of these combinations is indicated. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” shown in the drawing) for repeatedly playing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the drawing) for playing the target sound once. It shows whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduction sound, and the reproduction channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and as the gaming state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (playback) priority, and represents that the (playback) priority is higher from the bottom to the top.

  FIG. 122 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 122 (C) shows that each sound can not be reproduced when trying to reproduce each sound. An example of the problem is shown. In these FIGS. 122A to 122C, the horizontal axes are mutually common time axes.

  In FIG. 122 (A), the game state is sequentially along the time axis which is the horizontal axis as "the first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "medium".

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in problem 1 of FIG. If there is a "winning", as shown in FIG. 119 (B), "Hold winning sound" is assigned in advance to the same reproduction channel 14 and 15 as "half notice A". The “previous first-notice A” sound output is stopped because the reproduction sound of “1” is overwritten with the hold winning sound (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In “the second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in problem 2 of FIG. If there is a "winning", as shown in FIG. 119 (B), "Hold winning sound" is assigned in advance to the same reproduction channel 14 or 15 as "full screen preview", so "full screen preview" "" Is reproduced by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "full screen advance notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 123 (A) and 123 (B) respectively show an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment.

  FIG. 123 (A) shows an example of the reproduction channel of sound, and in the above-mentioned sound control by fixed channel, the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” shown). The point is different. Here, the channel division being an automatic channel means that control is made so that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is automatically assigned in accordance with the rule described later (described above. Corresponded to “automatic channel sound control”).

  In the automatic channel system sound control according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the above-described fixed channel system sound control. Note that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 123 (B) shows an example of assignment of reproduction channels to each sound. In the automatic channel sound control, as shown in the figure, priorities are individually assigned to the respective sounds. Here, referring to the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one sound requires one channel in outputting in monaural. Become.

  In the “informing sound 1” to “button pressing sound” shown in the drawing, the sound that has started to be reproduced should not be muted halfway along the process until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, there is no problem in the illustrated “normal BGM” to “held award winning sound” that the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during reproduction and muffled.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel system, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter referred to as "AUTO group"). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to play a sound for the AUTO group. When sound is assigned to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for specifying a specific AUTO group can be designated in each AUTO group. When a new sound is reproduced, if it is a sound defined in the AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced if a vacant channel (unused channel) exists in the designated AUTO group.

  In the above case, if there is no empty channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. The effect control program terminates the use of the AUTO channel if there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound itself being reproduced, and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no vacant channel in the AUTO group whose priority is lower than or equal to the priority of the sound itself being reproduced.

  FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, reproduction channel numbers such as sound control by fixed channels as described above, left and right pan initial values, upper and lower pan initial values, volume initial values, for each sound category and sound name. Identifier and priority for specifying AUTO group instead of sound number, playback type setting and output type setting (also referred to as "playing priority"), initial left / right pan, upper / lower pan initial, initial volume, sound It manages the definition of number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting.

  First, an identifier for specifying each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds exist. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. The priority indicates that the larger the numerical value is the sound to be reproduced with priority, while the smaller the numerical value is a sound to be reproduced without priority. In the present embodiment, as an order of types of sound to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sound having a priority of “25” (“informing sound 1”, “informing sound 2” and “informing sound 3”) , Sound effects with a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmed sound" and "button press sound"), BGMs with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10" Sound effects (such as "full screen preview sound effects"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("half notice sound effects" to "second half notice sound effects"), and hold winning sounds with a priority of "01" And In this way, when there is no vacant channel, for example, when trying to reproduce the notification sound, there is no need to reproduce using the predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound with the lower priority (for example, the hold winning sound) The notification sound is to be preferentially reproduced using the channel currently being reproduced).

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, setting "0x00" indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) is output, and for example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L The volume difference individually output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

  Also, as described above, upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, upper and lower upper and lower speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). The sound localization initial position of the sound by the speaker of. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pan during playback of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers . The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, setting "0x00" indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when "0x80" is set, the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers individually composed of these combinations is indicated. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”, and additionally “1” (0x1FF in the third byte) By setting one or more volume control devices provided to the gaming machine, it is not affected by the volume change, and it is always reproduced with the volume set at the initial value. It represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, for example, “0” is set as “seek point” in the “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect” as this seek point, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect” Each sound is set to [1]. Such seek points allow registration of sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered when exceeding the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source.

  The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” shown in the drawing) for repeatedly playing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the drawing) for playing the target sound once. It shows whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduction sound, and the priority. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and as the gaming state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (playback) priority, and represents that the (playback) priority is higher from the bottom to the top.

  FIG. 126 (A) shows an example of a presentation time chart, and FIG. 126 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 126 (A) and 126 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126 (A), as the gaming state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, "the first half of fluctuation", "the second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "middle symbol stop" It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "big hit".

  In “the first half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), for example, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction” is reproduced from start to end in reproduction channels 00 to 01 Corresponding to range A). Here, when trying to reproduce the on-hold winning sound as a new sound because there is a starting opening winning (corresponding to the “on-hold winning” in the figure), reproduction channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since the reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any other sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to "held sound reproduction" in the figure), and so on. Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In “the second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), for example, the sound of “reach BGM reproduction” is reproduced from start to end in reproduction channels 00 to 01 Corresponding to range B). Here, for example, when trying to play a hold-up winning sound as a new sound because there is a start-up winning (corresponding to "held on-hold winning" in the figure), playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all the other types of sounds continues without any sound being reproduced being overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to “hold sound reproduction” shown).

  In the “the latter half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), a notification (corresponding to “information 2 generation” shown in the drawing) is generated after that, for example, the highest notification sound with the highest priority of “25” as a new sound ( When trying to reproduce “information 2” shown in the figure, as a result of the search for the empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 126 (B). Therefore, among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing, the sound with the lowest priority is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as channels reproducing the reserved winning sound with the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, although the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above, the priority (25) of the notification sound (corresponding to "information sound 2" shown in the figure) to be reproduced next is next. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 127 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. The work information for automatic channel control is, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a required sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic allocation group, an automatic allocation priority, an elapsed time from registration, volume control for each channel. It includes a workpiece for work and a workpiece for pan control, and has respective information corresponding thereto.

  The setting reservation flag has a value other than “0” to indicate that setting reservation is made. The required sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if “−1” is not stopped and other than “−1”. The sounding number during reproduction indicates the sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced if "-1" is not stopped and is other than "-1".

  In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly allocated when it is "0", while the channel is automatically allocated when it is "1" ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later) Equivalent to Here, for example, “1” indicates that the automatic allocation group is the AUTO group 1, and “2” indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic assignment indicates the priority in the case of performing the sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time, assuming that the registration time of the desired reproduction sound is “0”. Note that the elapsed time since the registration is one of the plurality of sounds being reproduced when trying to reproduce a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic assignment are being reproduced. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is identified, and this sound is overwritten and erased with the new sound.

  The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the upper and lower pans described above.

  FIG. 128 shows an example of empty channel search processing when sound control is performed when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. Also in FIG. 128, the channel is abbreviated as "ch".

  The presentation control program confirms the automatic assignment group related to the new sound (step S1102A) when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (step S1100A), and the fixed assignment is fixed when the automatic assignment group is “0”. It is determined that is, and reproduction of a new sound is started on the designated channel.

  On the other hand, the effect control program determines that the automatic assignment group is other than “0” as automatic assignment, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to a monaural channel (step S1106A). .

  The effect control program determines whether a vacant (monaural) channel (one channel) exists if the new sound is monaural (step S1108A), and if there is a vacant sound (monophonic), the vacant space (monaural) While the reproduction of the new sound is started on the channel) (step S1109A), the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority than the priority of the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced, if not present It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110A).

  The effect control program ends the processing when there is no reproduced sound channel that is the same as or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (monaural) channel being reproduced, while it exists when it exists. It is determined whether there is a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

  In the effect control program, when there are a plurality of corresponding channels, during the corresponding channel based on the elapsed time from the above-mentioned registration, the reproduction time of the sound with the longest reproduction time from the registration is being reproduced. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114A). On the other hand, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there are a plurality of corresponding channels but not one (step S1116A).

  On the other hand, when the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural in step S1106A described above, it is determined whether there is a vacant (stereo) channel (two channels) (step S1120A). If the effect control program determines that a free channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition and starts playing the new sound (step S1122A).

  On the other hand, if the effect control program determines that there is no empty channel, it determines whether or not the (stereo) channel of the sound being played back has the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound (step In step S1124A), since the process is ended if there is not, overwriting of the sound being reproduced by the new sound to be reproduced is not performed. On the other hand, when the effect control program exists, the effect control program determines whether a plurality of corresponding channels exist (step S1126A).

  The effect control program starts output of the new sound in the (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there is not a plurality of corresponding channels, while the above-mentioned is described when there are a plurality of corresponding channels. Based on the elapsed time from registration, reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel with the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

  As described above, the effect control program searches for an available channel in order to reproduce a new sound. The process of searching for such free channels will be explained more visually and intelligibly.

  FIGS. 129 (A) and 129 (B) to 132 (A) and 132 (B) respectively show an example of the specific contents of the free channel search process. The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playback of normal BGM having a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

  The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect in the first half notice A, which has a priority of 05, and reproduces the reproduced channel 02 to 03. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the sound effects of the first half advance advance_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the generation request for reproduction of a button pressing sound having a priority of 20, and causes the reproduction channel 04 to 05 to be searched. Since there is a space, reproduction of the button depression sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect in the first half notice B, which has a priority of 05, as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 07, the reproduction of the sound effects of the first half advance advance_B in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 06-07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playing a big hit determined to have a priority of 20, and searches the playback channel 08 to 09. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the big hit fixed sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08-09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect in the first half notice C having a priority of 05 as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy of ̃11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half advance notice C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a reserved winning sound having a priority of 01, and causes the playback channels 12 to 13 to be searched. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the on-hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to the reproduction channel. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14-15.

  FIG. 133 (A) and FIG. 133 (B) to FIG. 136 (A) and FIG. 136 (B) respectively show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 133 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a reach BGM playback request with a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (B), the effect control program performs a search for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playing the annunciation sound 1 having a priority of 25 and makes available an available channel in the playback channels 02 to 03. As it exists, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the above-described processing, the effect control program then, as shown in FIG. 134A, is triggered by the generation request for reproduction of the full-screen notice sound having a priority of 10, as an idle channel. Since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full screen preview sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 as shown in FIG. 134 (A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to "non-reproduction (vacant)" in the figure), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 as shown in FIG. 135 (A). Since there is a vacancy (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacant)” in the drawing), reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using the reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a trailer sound with a priority of 10 as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the feature preview sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request for reproduction of a held winning sound having a priority of 01, as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy in the “non-reproduction (vacant)” (shown), reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14-15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 but there is no available channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 which are reproducing the "preserved winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

  In this way, each sound scheduled to be output is not fixedly allocated in advance to a specific channel, and a playback channel with a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the above-mentioned output schedule with higher priority is searched Each sound of will be played on the playback channel found in the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only the free channel can be effectively utilized as described above, but each sound including the output schedule is as many as possible using each channel including the free channel. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, it is possible to realize various sound effects and to increase the interest of the player.

  FIGS. 137 (A) and 137 (B) to 138 (A) and 138 (B) each show an example of the specific content of the free channel search process. The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15, and the playback channel 00 to 01 becomes vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15, as shown in FIG. 137 (B). Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playing a symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 as shown in FIG. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (B), the effect control program searches for a vacant channel triggered by the generation of a jackpot BGM reproduction request having a priority of 15, and makes the reproduction channel 00 to 01 vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the jackpot BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  In addition, when the replacement control of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. It goes without saying that it is good to do so.

12-3. Variations of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control based on the automatic channel method has been described as an example using all reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Sound control may be performed as follows by a combination or the like.

  FIGS. 139 (A) to 139 (F) are diagrams each showing a variation example of channel assignment in sound control by the two types of channel schemes described above or a combination thereof.

  FIG. 139 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control according to the fixed channel scheme for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the embodiment described above, and FIG. 139 (B) The present invention corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel assignment in the case where sound control is performed by the automatic channel method by the maximum number of channels. The sound control based on these two channel allocations has already been described, so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 139 (C) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are allocated to reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN 2” in the figure) . FIG. 139 (D) shows an embodiment in which one automatic channel group is used to assign channels for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels and perform sound control according to the above-described fixed channel system for some reproduction channels. (Corresponds to "PTN3" shown).

  FIG. 139 (E) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are used to assign channels for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels and to perform sound control according to the above-described fixed channel system for some reproduction channels. (Corresponds to "PTN 4" in the figure). A specific example of the channel scheme shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings after FIG.

  FIG. 139 (F) shows that automatic channel control is performed by assigning channels for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound according to the above-mentioned fixed channel system is performed for some reproduction channels. Although control is performed, it is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is secured so that the number of reproduction channels is variable. A specific example of the channel scheme shown in FIG. 139 (F) will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings after FIG.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting the automatic channel system in which all the channels are in one group, it is possible to assign free channels or replace the channels in the output based on the previously specified criteria. Sound can be output only by determining the priority of Therefore, unlike the conventional control method in which a channel is designated to output a sound, the management of the channel is not required, so that the control relating to the sound output can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel system, it is possible to minimize the number of channels, for example, it becomes possible to adopt an inexpensive sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Subsequently, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the above-mentioned sound control method, by changing the assignment of sound to each channel dynamically as the automatic channel method, it was possible to effectively utilize the vacant channel and reproduce many sounds, but In recent diversified game machines, since hundreds and thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, the management of sound sources may be complicated.

  Also, by overlapping and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to execute preview effects in duplicate or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), sounds are divided into a plurality of groups, and a plurality of sounds and reproduction channels are dynamically assigned to each group, so that sounds are output in duplicate with certainty. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that the management becomes easy by dividing the sound into types.

  Further, the sound includes a sound such as a notification sound which should be output prior to the effect sound and a sound which is continuously output like a BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to assign the channel dynamically. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start winning or the fluctuation display is Output by automatic channel method.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively utilize an idle channel by the automatic channel method and to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary channel switching control by the fixed channel method. In addition, since it is possible to classify according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data becomes easy.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIG. 139 (C) and FIG. 139 (D), and has an advantage of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control that mixes fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 (ch), and a channel for reproducing a sound by a fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing a sound by an automatic channel method are included. . Also, channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. This will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Configuration of playback channel]
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in the sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes "automatic assignment" indicating whether or not automatic assignment is to be performed for channel numbers, "division" indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" for each channel. Note that “remarks” is added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 140 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29 are the channels of the present embodiment. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  Further, the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  A channel of channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0” and each channel is represented by “channel” + “channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound etc. which is displayed while displaying a maker's logo at the time of game machine activation. Also, channel 1 is a channel that makes a pair with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during game play or waiting for customers. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only stereo output but also a plurality of sounds are simultaneously output to improve the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be simultaneously output. Furthermore, as described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to simultaneously output four BGMs using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, the channel for reproducing BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than dynamically allocating the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a channel for reproducing BGM is a fixed channel system, and only BGM is output. As a result, control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method, while preventing the generation of a vacant channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output at the time of the execution of the advance presentation effect. In the advance notice effect, a sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. As described above, for the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel system.

  In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied are grouped. The group of channels for outputting the sound at the time of the preliminary effect production is the AUTO group 1.

  In the case of outputting a sound at the time of execution of the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for a vacant channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a vacant channel, it is set to output the designated sound from the vacant channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, the channel in use is opened and a new sound is output or the output of the designated sound is canceled based on a predetermined condition. A detailed procedure of channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. The channel 21 is a channel paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or stage sound. It is used to output BGM by overlapping 4 sounds or to output a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the advance notification effect output by the automatic channel method.

  Channels 22 and 23, like channels 20 and 21, are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. The channel 23 is a channel paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which a holding tone is output. The holding tones output in the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, sounds that are output regardless of the lottery result at the start winning, or may be sounds that are output with priority, such as when a big hit is determined. A sound or the like based on the lottery result at the start winning is output from the channels 24 to 29, as described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied. The channels 24 to 29 reproduce the sound output based on the expectation according to the lottery result at the start winning, and the sound output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 in the fixed channel system, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of the big hit determination even if there are no empty channels in the channels 24 to 29, and the player's attention is drawn. Can.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound at the time of volume change and a notification sound at the time of payout of game media. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound at the time of occurrence of abnormality are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a channel of the fixed channel system is allocated when the output is continuously continued as in BGM, or when it is necessary to reliably output as in the case of an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, the automatic channel system is applied to the sounds to be outputted adaptively according to the game state etc., thereby preventing the sound from being outputted while the empty channel is generated, and the limited number of channels It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search process]
Subsequently, a procedure for searching for a free channel of the sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of free channel search processing in the case of executing control of outputting a sound according to the present embodiment. Although FIG. 128 describes the case of one AUTO group, FIG. 141 is different in having a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing is omitted.

  In the vacant channel search process shown in FIG. 141, in the processes of step S1108B and step S1120B, when the new sound is of the automatic channel system, it is determined whether or not the vacant channel exists in the channel of the same group. That is, even if channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacant space in the same channel, the result of step S1108B and step S1120B becomes "No".

  Furthermore, in the idle channel search process shown in FIG. 141, when there is no idle channel, playback of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step S1118B, step S1132B). The channel selection conditions for stopping the reproduction of sound will be described below with reference to FIG. Note that the effect of stopping the output of sound is continuously performed without stopping the image display and the operation of the special effects.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching the output of sound (stopping playback of sound, opening it) when there is no channel available at the time of output of a new sound in the present embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and the sound of higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume size, the amount of change in sound during playback, etc., and the playback time of the sound at the channel selection time, It also includes the remaining time to play. Each condition will be specifically described below.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the reproduction time (elapsed time) from the start of reproduction. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 128, a channel with a long reproduction time is selected. In this manner, the output of the effect sound sufficiently executed is ended by selecting a channel having a long elapsed time after the start of reproduction, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been performed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, since an effect with a long reproduction time can be an effect with a high degree of expectation, an effect with a short reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, by stopping the effect with a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the total reproduction time set in advance regardless of the reproduction time from the start of reproduction.

  Although the condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time, for example, the sound output of the effect with a short (or long) effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the time of the entire effect, that is, the progress ratio of the effect. By setting the conditions in this manner, it is possible to stop the sound output at the initial stage or the final stage of the presentation.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, since an effect in which a large volume of sound is output may be an effect of higher importance, a channel with a small volume of output sound is selected with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large volume of sound being output may be preferentially selected, and the player may be made to recognize that an effect is newly executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on the change in volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output may be an effect of higher importance, and a channel with a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in sound image localization position (pan pot). For example, by changing the output of the left and right sounds of the stereo speakers, it is possible to produce a more important effect by the effect that produces a more three-dimensional sound effect, a channel with less dynamic sound image localization position Prioritize and select. On the other hand, the load of sound control may be reduced by preferentially selecting a channel having a large change in dynamic sound image localization position.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on the sound number (index). For example, the large (small) number of the tone number is selected. At this time, priority may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs monaural sound is selected on the assumption that the effect produced by stereo sound with high sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of vacant channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is released, select a channel for outputting stereo sound in order to increase vacant channels. You may

  Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so as not to perform volume adjustment may be set to have a higher degree of importance, or an effect set so as to perform volume adjustment may be set to have a higher degree of importance.

  In addition to the conditions described above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without replacing the channel. Further, by assigning unique priorities to all the sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priorities.

  Although the conditions of 1 to 8 are shown as an example in the table shown in FIG. 142, these conditions may be applied singly or in combination of a plurality of conditions. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition to select a channel satisfying more conditions, or a priority may be set for each condition to sequentially apply the conditions.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Subsequently, an example in which control is performed to assign a channel based on the priority assigned to a newly output sound will be described. Here, an example will be described in which three types of notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. FIG. 143 is a timing chart showing an example of effects for explaining the sound control of this embodiment, where (A) shows a timing at which the sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows a channel where each sound effect is outputted. ing. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of the priority of sound effects in the example of the effects of this embodiment.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 143, the first half advance notice A occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. At this time, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, a first half advance notice B is generated. Furthermore, the first half notice C occurs while the first half notice _A and the first half notice _B are being executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 144, the priority of the first-half notice A is 03, the priority of the first-half notice B is 05, and the priority of the first-half notice C is 20. Furthermore, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice _B and the first half notice _C, the volume is selected based on the suppression volume value when the low priority preliminary announcement effects in the same group are executed in duplicate. Reduced.

  The first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and a character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output from the channels 08 and 09 in stereo.

  The first half advance notice B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button depression sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice B is started, and the effects from the channels 10 and 11 are in stereo. Sound is output.

  In the first half notice C, the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), and the sound with lower priority than the first half notice C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporary. It is muffled to (black out production). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half advance notice C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effects of each advance notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a timing chart showing an example of volume change of sound effects in the first half fluctuation of the present embodiment, where (A) shows output timing of effect sound, and (B) shows volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents a time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents a volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half advance notice A is started at time t1. At this time, the preset volume V_A of the effect sound of the first half notice A is output.

  Thereafter, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half advance notice B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button depression sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T and the effect sound of the first half advance notice B is output with the volume V_B. Also, since the priority of the first-half notice _B is higher than the priority of the first-half notice _A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice _A is suppressed to 50%.

  It should be noted that the volume may not be lowered if the priority of the preview effect performed later is lower than or equal to the priority of the preview effect being executed, or even if there are few sound effects being output simultaneously You do not have to lower the volume. Also, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a specific combination of advance notice effects.

  Furthermore, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened until time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half advance notice C is output with the volume V_C.

  In addition, the effect sound of the first half notice A and the first half notice B, which are muffled from time t3, is resumed at time t5. The button pressing sound is originally output until time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

  After that, in the first half advance notice A and the first half notice B, the effect is continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Furthermore, the first half advance notice C ends at time t8, and the first half of fluctuation ends.

  In addition, during the period when the rendering effect sound is muffled, the output of the rendering effect sound may be continued while the volume is set to 0, or the output of the rendering effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume for controlling the volume of the entire rendering effect sound may be set to 0, and the sound output of the first half notice _C is output. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by control by the main volume. Further, even in the state where the output of another sound effect is suppressed by the first half advance notice C, the sound effect, the warning sound, and the notification sound having higher priority are output.

  As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being reproduced, the volume of the sound being reproduced on all the channels is selected instead of lowering the volume of the sound designated by the volume suppression flag or the like. The volume may be lowered, or the volume of sound being reproduced on the same channel may be lowered in the channel method (fixed channel method, automatic channel method). In addition, the volume of the sound being reproduced on the channel in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, in the present embodiment, sounds with high priority can be output with priority. The sound with high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for reliably transmitting to the player or the game arcade employee, or the expectation for the result of the variable display to be a big hit is high. The sound effects are for enhancing the sense of expectation of the game, and the sound effects can be highly effective and can improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by grouping each channel used in sound source control into a plurality of groups, it becomes possible to facilitate management of effect data relating to effect sound. As a result, it is possible to improve the development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of a bug due to the execution of systematic tests. Also, by making stable gaming possible, the interest of gaming can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, channels of the automatic channel scheme are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs the sound effects of the preview effect and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs the hold-related sound effects. The number of sound effects of the preliminary presentation effect is huge compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously at the same time. In particular, in the first half of the fluctuation, it may be required to output a rendering effect sound exceeding the number of allocated channels, for example, by performing a previewing of the fluctuation pending on the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, the fun of the game can be maximized by outputting the rendering effect sound with low priority while replacing the rendering effect sound with high priority in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1 .

  Furthermore, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound along with the change of the suspension display of the variable display and the effect display along with this can greatly enhance the player's sense of expectation, and it is desirable to be executed surely . In this embodiment, by outputting from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2 the effect sound relating to such a hold display (hold sound), it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice play relating to the fluctuation display. it can. Also, unlike in the case of the notice effect in the variable display, compared with the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, the number of effect sound effects outputted simultaneously does not greatly exceed, so the output of the effect sound stops There is less chance of being In addition, even in the case of being canceled, the output of the rendering effect sound with low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a high-effect effect that enhances the player's sense of expectation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel scheme is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel scheme is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, while effectively utilizing a limited number of channels by searching for free channels, priority output is given to output high-representation effects and sounds with high importance by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to the case where the sound is continuously output as in the case of BGM, or the sound is preferentially output in order to notify of the breakdown of the gaming machine, the fraud, and the like. As described above, by applying the channel system suitable for the characteristics of the sound and the application, it is possible to effectively use each channel and to perform appropriate control in accordance with the sound output situation. For example, in control to output BGM, a sound may be output to a channel assigned in advance regardless of the gaming state, and in control to output an alarm sound, a designated channel is searched without searching for an empty channel. You can output the sound directly to On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to make the best use of free channels and to preferentially output sounds with high rendering effects.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each of the rendering effect sounds (channels), it is possible to emphasize and execute the rendering with high priority. In addition, it is possible to continue while lowering the volume without interrupting the effect being executed. At this time, it is also possible to return the volume to the original volume, if the low priority effect previously executed is continuing even after the high priority effect is finished. In addition, as described in the embodiment, by stopping the other effect and executing the specific effect alone, it is possible to make the effect of the specific effect stand out. In this manner, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

[15-2. Modified example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are the preset numbers, but in this modification, the automatic channel method is A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels set in the fixed channel scheme are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Example of production]
When the number of channels is made variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to output more than the number of channels to which the same kind of sound can be temporarily assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing effects including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of parts (for example, 9 divisions), and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of a screen configuration of effects in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 146 is the advance notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after reach occurrence.

  In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine parts, and effects (multi-screen effects) for displaying different scenes on each screen are executed. Then, any one scene is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is performed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene are simultaneously output. The selection of the scene may be made by lottery or may be made by the player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control as in the embodiment described above. Also, assignment of default channels is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM simultaneously. So, in this modification, the channel for outputting BGM is reassigned, and arrangement | positioning of a channel is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in sound source control in a modification of the embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when multi-screen effect execution is performed. The default configuration of FIG. 147 (A) is similar to the configuration shown in FIG. 140 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 147 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 147 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels adopting the automatic channel system assigned to the AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if different preview effects are performed while the multi-screen effect is being performed.

  After the multi-screen effect start, while all the scenes are displayed, all the BGM corresponding to each scene is reproduced. At this time, if all the BGM is output with a normal volume, the volume is too high, so the volume is output with the volume being lower than normal. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (latter half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the reproduction of the other BGM is ended. . In addition, when the player selects a scene, for example, he selects the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine, and selects the BGM of the selected scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of a scene, or the volume of BGM of another scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 148 is a timing chart showing an example of volume change of sound effects in the latter half of fluctuation of the modification of the embodiment; (A) is output timing of effect sound, (B) is volume change of each effect sound Indicates

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement is from the default state (FIG. 147 (A)) to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. It is changed to)). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), a reach occurs and the second half fluctuation is started. After the start of the second half fluctuation, multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 146, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 147 (B)) is output. At this time, the volume V_2 smaller than the normal volume V_1 is output.

  Thereafter, when a scene for which rendering is to be continued is selected (time t13), the volume of BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 148, the scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and further, the second half notice _ 5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

  It should be noted that, after the multi-screen effect is finished, the channels for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from the channels 10 and 11 to the channels 2 and 3, and the arrangement of the channels may be returned to the default. When continuing the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

  Further, the change of the channel arrangement may be changed at the required timing. For example, in this modification, the arrangement of the channels may be changed immediately before the start of the execution of the multi-screen effect, or may be changed at the start of the second half fluctuation.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, the game state (for example, the effect mode such as a big hit state, a short time state, a background change, etc.) may be changed.

[15-2-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 139F) performing sound control in the fixed channel method and the automatic channel performing sound control in the automatic channel method The number of “variable AUTOch” 139 (F) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to make more informing sound, BGM, or sound effects reproducible according to the situation, and, for example, to output more types of informing sound in a non-playing situation In addition, it is possible to flexibly respond such as suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds and increasing the number of BGMs and sound effects to be reproduced on presentation.

[16. Control of sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which channels are grouped, and sounds to be output are managed by being associated with each group. Also, when the number of sounds that can be assigned simultaneously in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being generated is stopped based on a predetermined condition, and a new sound is output, or the output of a new sound is stopped. And, the control for the sound in the output belonging to the same group has been described. Here, in the case where sound is newly assigned to a channel and output is performed, control of changing the volume of the sound being output on another channel or the like will be described.

  After the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, in the state before reach occurs (during the first half fluctuation), the output of the sound by BGM during reproduction and other effects is regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time together with the output of a predetermined sound effect. As a typical effect that performs such control, there is a blackout effect that controls the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined time has passed after restricting the output of the sound effect, the darkening of the screen is released and the sound output newly is resumed by resuming the output of the sound due to BGM or other effects To draw the player's attention and to increase the player's expectation for the change.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a new sound is allocated to a vacant channel and output instead of canceling the allocation of a channel to which a sound effect is output and newly allocating a sound. In this case, in order to restore the output of BGM or the like to the state before regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassignment of sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when sound of different group is being output]
In this embodiment, channels are grouped and priorities are set for each group. The following describes the case where a sound is output from a channel belonging to a group with a higher priority, when the sound is output from a channel belonging to a group with a lower priority.

[16-1-1. Channel group volume control table]
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of a channel group-specific volume control table indicating the priority order of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, each channel is fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group) It is divided into five groups of three.

  For each group, a group volume priority and a suppression volume value are set. The group volume priority indicates the priority among groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In the present embodiment, one or more numerical values are set, and “1” has the highest priority.

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of another sound being reproduced when the sound is reproduced by the channel belonging to the group having the low priority. Specifically, when “−1” is set, the reproduction of the sound is continued without changing the other sound being reproduced. If "0" is set, control is made to mute the other sound being played. When a numerical value other than "0" is set, for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the other sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when the numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit being%. Note that control may be performed to set a numerical value of 100 or more to make the volume larger than normal.

  Further, each setting value will be described with reference to FIG. 149. In the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel scheme and the automatic channel scheme are mixed. In the fixed channel, a sound that is output with priority, such as a notification sound or BGM, or a sound that is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, effect sound effects grouped according to the type and importance of effects are assigned.

  In the fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to “1”, which is the highest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to “0”, when the sound is reproduced on the fixed channel 1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch 1 is a notification sound for notifying the player or an employee of the game arcade to the outside as shown as a reference reproduction sound, and specifically, detection of the magnetic abnormality or It may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or an alarm sound such as a ball jam. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed ch 1, the output of the rendering effect sound or the like is stopped and only the notification sound is output in order to make the occurrence of the cheating or the failure be a factor. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of the other sound having a relatively low priority is restricted.

  In the fixed ch2, in FIG. 149, the group volume priority is set to “4”, which is the lowest. In addition, since the suppression volume value is set to “−1”, even if the sound reproduction on the fixed ch 2 is started, the other sound being reproduced is not affected. The sound played on the fixed ch 2 is mainly BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the BGM is being output, and the effect sound etc. that draws the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol etc. Is output.

  In the AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to “0”, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the sounds in reproduction other than the notification sound output from the fixed channel 1 are muted. That is, the sound outputted by the AUTO group 1 is outputted with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and outputted alone.

  Specific sounds to be output in the AUTO group 1 include a big hit finalization sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound and the like as shown in the reference reproduction sound. The big hit decision sound is a sound notifying that the result of the variable display will be a big hit at a predetermined timing such as the start winning, and is a stage effect sound that maximizes the sense of expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound notifying that the game ball has won the V zone, for example, that it is decided to shift to the high probability state, and the player's sense of expectation is greatly improved similarly to the big hit determined sound. It can be done.

  The blackout effect sound is an effect sound which is output in a silent state by suppressing the output of other effect sound at the time of executing the blackout effect described above. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be performed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. For the jackpot decision sound and the V prize sound, the output of the sound suppressed for a short time after the sound output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, in the case of the blackout sound effect, the player is focused on the blackout effect by setting no sound effect by another effect for a predetermined time after outputting the blackout effect sound. In addition, after execution of the blackout effect, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed by the change, for example, the blackout effect is executed by the first half fluctuation, and the corresponding effect is executed by the second fluctuation You may

  In the AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to "3". In addition, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 2, all the sounds being reproduced in the group having the priority “4” or less are halved (50% Suppressed to the output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch2 is halved because the group volume priority is "4" as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. Thus, it is possible to execute an effect of drawing the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely turning off the BGM. Specific sounds outputted by the AUTO group 2 are, for example, a first half notice sound effect and a second half notice sound effect.

  In the AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, as in the case of the AUTO group 2, “50” is set as the suppression volume value, so when a sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the group whose priority is “3” or less is being reproduced. All sounds are halved. For example, when the notice sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice sound effect is reduced to half. At this time, when the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch 2 is already halved, it may be continued without changing the volume, and the volume is further halved (one-fourth of the original volume). May be

  The specific sound output in the AUTO group 3 is, for example, a hold winning sound at the start winning, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, a button press sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed, etc. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same, the sound is output as it is with a normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when the game ball enters the start winning opening, the hold winning sound is output even during the blackout effect.

[16-1-2. Group volume control process]
Subsequently, the procedure of volume control in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing a procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to a group to which the output sound belongs in this embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

  When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a reproduction request of a new sound (step S1401). If there is no reproduction request for a new sound (the result at step S1401 is "No"), the processing at step S1420 and subsequent steps is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (result of step S 1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a specifies the channel group from the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, and the volume control table by channel group From (FIG. 149), the suppression volume value and the group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), that is, if the control on the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1406 and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "No"), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the reproduction requested sound. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have already been registered (the result at step S1404 is "Yes"), the processing at step S1406 and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result in step S1404 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority. The order is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, parameters (sound number, suppression volume value and group volume priority) of the sound with the highest priority currently being reproduced are recorded.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result at step S1406 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested for new reproduction (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound being reproduced (the result at step S1406 is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1410 and subsequent steps.

  The control on the sound being reproduced will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the parameter of the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is registered in the work area (step S1410). If the parameter of the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is "No"), the output of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is set (step S1407).

  The sound control performed in step S1410 and subsequent steps will be described. If the sound to suppress the output of the sound being reproduced has already been registered (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a new reproduction request The group volume priority of the existing sound is compared with the group volume priority held in the work area (step S1411).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a requests the new reproduction request. The volume of sound that has been dropped is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

  Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is higher than the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S 1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a performs the new reproduction The work area is overwritten with the sound number of the requested sound, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority (step S1412), and the volume of the sound requested for new reproduction is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

  Furthermore, when the group volume priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the work area While maintaining the contents, the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). When the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S 1415 is “Yes”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

  When the processes of step S1415 and step S1416 have been executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417) or after the process of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are a work It is determined whether it is registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (the result at step S 1420 is “No”), this processing ends.

  If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (the result at step S 1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a plays back the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether the process has ended (step S1421). When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1421 is "No"), the present process is ended.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result at step S1421 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority to the work area. Are erased (step S1422). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the volume value is returned to a predetermined original volume value (steps S1423 and S1424), and the process ends.

  The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of the new sound in the present embodiment is requested. Subsequently, volume control of sound will be described in time series. FIG. 151 is a timing chart for explaining, in chronological order, the procedure of controlling the volume in the present embodiment, in which (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. In FIG. 151, an example of executing the advance notice effect and the blackout effect will be described.

  When the game machine is powered on, the game is started, and normally BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed ch 2). In the fixed ch 2, as shown in FIG. 149, the group volume priority is “4” and the suppression volume value is “−1”. In the normal BGM, since the suppression volume value is “−1”, the sound is reproduced without the sound number of the normal BGM, the group volume priority, and the suppression volume value being recorded in the work area.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of holding prize is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 2 and the group volume priority is "3" and the suppression volume value is "50" (steps S1402 and S1403 result is "No") . Since the parameter is not recorded in the work area at the start of the first half advance notice (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first half advance notice is recorded in the work area (step S1405).

  At the start of the first half notice A, normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is made in advance. A set volume value is set (step S1413).

  At this time, since the normal BGM is being reproduced and the group volume priority is lower than the first half variation effect sound (the result of step S 1415 is “Yes”), the sound based on the parameters of the first half announcement A effect sound is Output is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of normal BGM is reduced (suppressed) to 50% output.

  After that, the blackout effect is executed by the establishment of the predetermined condition (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the group volume priority is "2" and the suppression volume value is "0" (step S1402). At this time, the parameters of the first half notice A are recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of the step S 1411 is “>”), the contents of the work area are blackout effect The above parameters are updated (step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced (step S1413).

  Furthermore, since the normal BGM being reproduced and the effect sound effects of the first half notice A are lower in group priority than the blackout effect, the group priority of the sound effect of the blackout effect is lower than the blackout effect (result of step S1415 is “Yes”). The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, since the suppression volume value is 0, the sound is muted.

  Furthermore, the second half notice B is started during the blackout effect execution (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of the step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started in the muted state and the blackout effect Continue until the end of the

  Thereafter, when the gaming ball wins the start winning opening, a hold winning sound is output (time t24). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is "2" and the suppression volume value is "50". In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same (the result of step S 1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, and output with a predetermined volume. Therefore, even when the blackout effect is being executed, the on-hold winning sound is output as usual.

  Then, when the blackout effect ends (time t26), the parameter of the blackout effect recorded in the work area is erased (step S1422), and the restricted volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). . Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half advance notice A and the second half advance notice B are returned to predetermined volumes. Thereafter, the output of the sounds of the first half notice A and the second half notice B is ended (time t27, t28).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while sound effects with high group priority are being output, it is possible to highlight a specific effect by suppressing the output of sound effects with low group priority. Furthermore, with the volume control based on the suppression volume value, it is possible to make the player recognize that a plurality of effects are progressing at the same time, and a group effect effect sound that greatly enhances the player's sense of expectation like a big hit decision sound By setting the priority higher, it is possible to execute without impairing the rendering effect.

  In addition, when a sound with a high priority is newly output and the output of the rendering effect sound during reproduction is suppressed, in the embodiment described above, the volume of the rendering effect sound during reproduction is immediately output based on the suppression volume value The volume of other effect sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppressed volume value) and faded out from the timing when the high priority sound is output. It is also good. In this case, the start value (the volume currently being reproduced), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined, or based on the contents of effects such as the length of reproduction time of the effect sound. The amount of change may be set for the time to reach. For example, if the output of the new effect sound is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to highlight the effect sound, or if the output of the new effect sound is relatively long, the target A time reaching the value may be set long to reduce a sense of discomfort that may occur when the effect sound switches.

  For example, if the newly-output sound effect is a short-time output such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound during reproduction such as BGM can be faded out in a relatively short time, It is possible to make the newly-outputed effect sound more prominent without breaking the tempo of the game.

  Furthermore, when the output of a new effect sound ends and the output of another effect sound is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value) Instead, the start value (volume during regulation) and the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined and controlled to fade in. For example, the output of normal BGM is suppressed to 50% at the time of sound effect reproduction in the first half notice A, but when the output of normal BGM is resumed, the normal volume is set as the target value and the start value (volume currently being reproduced. Then, control is made to fade in based on the amount of change for a specified amount of time) as the volume suppressed to 50%. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of discomfort while enhancing the switching of the effect sound effects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the rendering effect sound as an example, the present invention can be applied to the case of an alarm sound or an alarm sound as well. As an example, when outputting a notification sound with high importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraudulent activity), not only the presentation effect sound but also a notification sound with relatively low importance (priority) ( For example, the output of an alarm sound of a ball jam may be regulated. On the other hand, when a fraudulent act is performed while a low notification sound of low importance (priority) is output, the output of the notification sound is interrupted, and a high notification sound (alarm (alarm) Sound) may be output with priority.

  Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set to the output time of the sound like the effect sound, and the output of the sound is continued until the cause of the alarm and the notification is eliminated. Therefore, when a plurality of types of alarm sounds and alarm sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, another alarm sound is output. . At this time, the next higher priority sound may be output to restrict the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output simultaneously.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long and short)]
In the above, the control of the sound output overlappingly by the priority between groups was demonstrated. Subsequently, a control example of controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long and short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume Control Table by Sound Effect]
FIG. 152 is a view showing an example of a sound effect-based volume control table showing volume (sound volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of sound in the present embodiment. The use reproduction channel (ch), the total reproduction time, and the suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

  Similar to the example shown in FIG. 149, in the use reproduction channels, each channel is divided into five groups of fixed ch 1, fixed ch 2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3.

  The total playback time is the time from the start to the end of the output of the sound effect. When -1 is set as the total reproduction time, the effect sound is output with a volume set in advance without being affected by the suppression control by the sound effects to be output. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect can not be suppressed.

  When 0 is set to the total playback time, loop playback is repeatedly output, and output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. If the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is a number other than this (a positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. The unit of the total reproduction time is millisecond (ms).

  Similar to the example shown in FIG. 149, the suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect of changing the volume of another sound effect that is simultaneously output. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the reproduction of the sound is continued without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of "0", the sound effect being reproduced (in the total reproduction time- Suppress (silence) the output of 1) except for sound effects that are set. In the case of a numerical value other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

  Subsequently, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 152. Also in the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed, and the allocated sound effects are also the same. It is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 152, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but may be set for each sound effect.

  Since the total reproduction time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch 1, when these sound effects are to be reproduced, the other being reproduced All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the player or the employee of the game arcade to the outside, and is an effect sound to be outputted since it is caused by the occurrence of an illegal act or a failure etc. And the output of sound effects during other playback is forcibly suppressed (cancelled, muted).

  Since the total reproduction time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" in the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effects are repeatedly output from the start of the output. These sound effects do not affect the other sounds being played. The sound effects assigned to the fixed ch 2 are mainly BGM in games.

  In the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 1, a value (reproduction time) set for the total reproduction time for each sound effect, and “0” for the suppression volume value, the notification sound output from fixed ch 1 All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound outputted by the AUTO group 1 is outputted with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and outputted alone. As specific sounds outputted in the AUTO group 1, as shown in FIG. 149, there are a big hit confirmed sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound and the like.

  For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, the value for which the total playback time is set for each sound effect (play time) and the suppression volume value of “50” are set. When the sound is reproduced, the outputs of the other sounds being reproduced are all halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thus, for example, as a specific sound to be output in the AUTO group 2 which can make the effect stand out while halving the output of BGM and continue the flow of the game, for example, the first half notice sound effect and the second half notice effect Sounds, etc., and specific sounds to be output in the AUTO group 3 include, for example, the hold winning sound at the start winning, the hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and the pressing of the effect button It is a button depression sound etc. to inform.

[16-2-2. Volume control process]
In the present embodiment, the output of sound effects reproduced in duplicate is controlled by the reproduction time of the sound effects. FIG. 153A and FIG. 153B are flowcharts showing the procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. The procedure of output control of sound effects in the present embodiment will be described below.

  When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a reproduction request for a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no reproduction request for a new sound (the result at step S1501A is "No"), the processing at step S1530A and subsequent steps is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (result of step S1501A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, and the volume by sound effect The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 152) (step S1502A).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1503A). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), that is, if the control on the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1506A and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "No"), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the reproduction of the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have already been registered in the work area (the result at step S1504A is "Yes"), the processing at step S1506A and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result at step S1504A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506A). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result at step S1506A is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested for new reproduction (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result at step S1506A is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1510A and subsequent steps.

  The sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested for new reproduction is “−1”. (Step S1510A). If the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "Yes"), as described above, an alarm sound is output at the time of occurrence of abnormality, etc. Forbids suppression of the volume of the playback sound, and forcibly suppresses the output of sound effects during other playback.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value to the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Furthermore, the work area is overwritten with the sound number requested for new reproduction, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1512A).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound requested for new reproduction (step S1513A). If the volume of all sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing of step S 1530 A and subsequent steps is executed (step S 1514 A).

  On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is not "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), peripheral control MPU 1511a does not receive the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area. It is determined whether a sound number is not set in “−1” or the work area (step S 1520 A). If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is “−1” or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S 1520 A is “Yes”), the processing of step S 1530 A and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S 1520 A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a It is determined whether the suppression volume value of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

  When the suppression volume value of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value already held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made. The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1522A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the total reproduction time of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is shorter than the total reproduction time already stored in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of sounds for which a new playback request has been made is shorter or the same as the total playback time already stored in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is longer than the total reproduction time already stored in the work area (the result at step S1521A is “No”), the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced The volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area, for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). Then, when the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing of step S1526A and step S1527A on all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processing of step S1530A and subsequent steps (step S1528A).

  When volume control for the sound requested for new reproduction and sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. It is determined whether or not is registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have not been registered in the work area (the result at step S1530A is "No"), this processing ends.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (the result at step S1530A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not (step S1531A). When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1531A is “No”), the present process is ended.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result at step S1531A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a uses the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. It erases (step S1532A). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the volume value is returned to a predetermined original volume value (steps S1533A, S1534A), and the process is ended.

  The above is the process of controlling the volume of sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effects in the present embodiment. Subsequently, sound volume control will be specifically described in time series. FIG. 154 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, in which (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. In FIG. 154, an example in which the first half notice effect and the blackout effect are performed will be described.

  When the game machine is powered on, the game is started and a normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output at the fixed ch2, and as shown in FIG. 152, the suppression volume value is set to "-1". Also, normal BGM is loop reproduction in which reproduction is repeated until BGM is switched, and 0 is set in the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), the parameters of the normal BGM are not registered in the work area. Then, a volume value set in advance is set, and a normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins the start winning opening and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly required to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half advance notice A is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, and the total reproduction time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (result of step S1503A is “No”).

  In addition, since no parameter is registered in the work area at this time (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the sound number of the sound effect of the first half notice A, the total reproduction time and the suppression volume value are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

  Furthermore, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"), and the total reproduction time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510A is "No"). The sound effect parameters for the first half notice A for which reproduction has been requested have been registered in the work area (the result at step S1520A is “No”, the result at step S1521A is “No”, the result at step S1523A is “Yes” ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, at this point, the normal BGM is being played back, and the volume is not suppressed yet, so the suppression volume value is "100" and is larger than the suppression volume value "50" of the previous notice A recorded in the work area. (The result at step S1526A is “No”), and the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

  Subsequently, since the sound effect parameters of the first half notice A have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is “No”) , This process ends.

  After that, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1 and the total reproduction time is "8000" and the suppression volume value is "0" (the result at step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the sound effect parameters of the first half notice A have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the normal BGM and the sound effects of the first half notice A are being output (step S1506A The result is "Yes").

  Furthermore, the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is that the total reproduction time is “8000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”). Is “15000” (result of step S 1520 A is “No”).

  Next, the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is “50”, and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound requested for the new reproduction is “0” (step The result of S1521A overwrites the work area with the sound number of the blackout effect sound for which the new reproduction request has been made, the suppression volume value "0" and the total reproduction time "8000" (step S1522A).

  In addition, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (black result of “Yes” in step S1523A) A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the preliminary presentation effect sound (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played back is normally BGM "50", the sound effect of the first half notice A is "100", and the suppression volume value of the blackout notice effect sound recorded in the work area "0" (“NO” at step S 1526 A), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half advance notice A is set to “0” (step S 1527 A).

  After that, when the game ball is won in the start winning opening during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request of the hold winning sound is received (time t33). The hold winning sound is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 3, and the total reproduction time is "2000" and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result at step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the blackout effect sound, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being outputted. Yes (result of step S1506A is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effects of the first half notice A is suppressed.

  Furthermore, the total hold time of the hold winning sound requested for new reproduction is "2000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is "8000". (Result of step S1520A is "No").

  Next, the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is “0”, and the suppression volume value of the hold winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is “50” (the result at step S1521A is "No"), the work area is not overwritten, but the total reproduction time (2000 ms; a2) of the on-hold winning sound is shorter than the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound (the result of step S1523A is "Yes"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the hold winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is "Yes"). Then, even when the output of the hold winning sound ends (time t34), since the parameter of the blackout effect sound is recorded in the work area, the output of the blackout effect sound is continued.

  After that, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the blackout stored in the work area The parameters of the effect sound are erased (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A whose sound reproduction has been suppressed (volume has been reduced) is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the BGM is normally suppressed at the time of reproducing the sound effects of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mute the volume of another sound effect being reproduced and to make it possible to highlight a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) while the effect sound of the effect sound is generated during the muffling period. Even when the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a presentation opportunity. Specifically, when the output of the sound effect is completed during the muffling period, the sound effect is output even while the specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of the other effects is suppressed. To notify the player while the output of sound effects is continued until after the end of the mute period, by suppressing the output of the sound effects of the corresponding effect during the mute period, the execution of a specific effect is made distinctive be able to.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a new sound is generated when there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated (the number of empty channels is 0). If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game-related interest will be reduced due to the appearance of an unintended sound output in the effect design.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when new sound data allocation conditions are satisfied when there is no space in the channel (the number of empty channels is 0), the setting is made in advance. Based on the priority order, by controlling to discard the sound output of lower importance more selectively, it is avoided that the aspect of the sound output unintended in the effect design appears, and the game interest is reduced. It was suggested to be suppressed. However, it is also important to apply a technical device in terms of how to make it difficult to appear in a situation where there is no space in the channel (a situation where the number of free channels is zero).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to enable allocation of more channel resources to effect sound (effect sound), various types of output are not made as long as proper gaming is performed. With regard to the notification sound of the above, it is possible to adopt a channel saving type control structure capable of appropriately notifying an abnormal content etc. by only a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel saving control structure is adopted for output of various notification sounds will be described.

  FIG. 155 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X and the like) of a limited number of prepared channels as sound control according to the fixed channel scheme, as various types of notification sound (dispense notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the effect sound. 7 shows an example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the above. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, manage the priority of playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and definition of output type setting doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions for the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the descriptions of other definitions such as the notification sound and the effect sound are omitted. With regard to the effect sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 120, the definition by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 124 for each other channel except the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter to be used for determining which one of the notification sounds is to be assigned to the channel X and output when the plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output condition, and the numerical value of the priority is The high notification sound is allocated to and output from the channel X regardless of the state of the notification sound to which the numerical value of the priority is low for the channel X. Although described later, when the priority order is the same, the notification sound previously assigned to the channel X is prioritized, and after the output of the notification sound ends, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output It will be done.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed of a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speakers (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) are output, and for example, when set to “0x80”, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The volume difference individually output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

  Upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R) It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set values of the upper and lower pan during playback of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers . For example, setting "0x00" indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when "0x80" is set, the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers individually composed of these combinations is indicated. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” shown in the drawing) for repeatedly playing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the drawing) for playing the target sound once. It shows whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 156 is a table showing the notification contents, the notification mode, the notification time, and the conditions (cancellation conditions) under which the notification is ended for each notification sound illustrated in FIG. 155 according to the type of the notification sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is determined for any notification sound, but in order to effectively use a single channel X, this is used as much as possible for the idle channel. It is a treatment for maintaining in the state and for suppressing the subsequent notification sound output.

  As shown in FIG. 156, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state where the magnetic detection is performed by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (in a state where the possibility of fraudulent action using a magnet is high). It is to notify that there is. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “magnetism has been detected” And lighting by means of various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. In addition, as the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is from 60 seconds (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions) after detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. As for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the execution is continued until the release condition “power on again” is satisfied. It has become.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility of fraudulent action by the dodging act being high is high) Alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormal) to notify that it is in the state), and the count sensor 4005 (the first large winning opening sensor or the second large despite being not in the big hit gaming state (the state that the big winning opening is opened) Notification sound to notify that detection by the winning opening sensor is being performed (high probability that cheating is forced to open the big winning opening in the closed state and the game ball is made to win) 3 (big winning prize abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when it is highly likely that some fraudulent activity has taken place, and the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “booboo vibration detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , “Vibration detected” and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and detection by the vibration sensor 2405 as notification time While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 60 seconds (corresponding to 6 times of notification sound repetition) from the time when there is a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps As for the lighting by the above, the execution is continued until the release condition “power on again” is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “boooo big prize abnormality detected”, and in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A display (for example, "a big winning prize has been detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as notification time, While loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 60 seconds (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions) after detection by the count sensor 4005, within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 The display and the lighting by the various lamps will continue to be performed until the release condition "power on again" is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group, but the door With regard to lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group) It does not have to be an aspect). In addition, with regard to the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing, the notification sound 1 such as “booboo” that plays a role of notifying that it belongs to the first notification group (a state in which the possibility of fraud is high). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and a message sound (unique sound) which plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the contents of notification is made is adopted. The alarm sound consists of monotonous sounds to give a warning meaning under the stressed injustice situation, and the message sound consists of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other alarm sounds. It is desirable to be done.

  That is, in the case of notifying those belonging to the first notification group (state in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is high), it is possible to respond to the fraudulent activity on the hole side rather than specifying which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial movement of In this respect, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of “booo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, but they belong to the first notification group Since it is possible to recognize that it is highly likely that it has been performed, it is expected to accelerate the initial action of the hall side response to the fraud. Furthermore, a message sound is output to notify which notification type it is to follow the notification sound of "booboo", and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement corresponding to the hole side can be smoothly performed.

  On the other hand, the alarm sound 4 (door open) is in a state where the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (a possibility of fraudulent action by the door open being performed However, it is reported that it is in a state where the door may be opened by the abnormal handling by the hall side. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “door is open” And the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. In addition, as notification time, about loop processing which outputs notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" repeatedly from the time when there is detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (equivalent to the notification sound repetition for 3 times In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the door closing detection (the door frame opening switch 618 is used to open the main frame 4 by the door frame opening switch 618). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the detection that the door frame 3 is closed) is satisfied.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame open switch 619 ( Although there is a possibility that cheating by opening the main body frame may be performed, the notification sound 5 (open frame) notifying that the main body frame may be opened by the error handling procedure by the hall side) There is an intermediate possibility that some fraudulent activity has taken place, and this is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when it is in a state where it can not be denied. With regard to notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, those notification The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to be common.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open" and lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as the notification time, the main body frame open switch The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, while the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 30 seconds (corresponding to 3 times of notification sound repetition) from the time when the detection by 619 is performed, And for lighting by various lamps, the frame closing detection (the main frame opening switch 619 is used to close the main frame 4 to the outer Until the detection of it) "is satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group, but the door With regard to lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group) It does not have to be an aspect). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when it belongs to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when it belongs to the first notification group. In addition, with regard to notification sound to be subjected to loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the contents of the notification is (a unique sound), and those belonging to the second notification group To adopt a sequential output combination with an alarm sound used in any of the alarm sounds 4 and 5 such as “ping pong ping pong” which plays a role of informing that the possibility that There is.

  That is, when notifying those belonging to the second informing group (a state in which there is an intermediate possibility that fraudulent acts have been made), it is possible to prevent the person who is playing the appropriate game from feeling disgust. It is important to be able to perform the hole side abnormal treatment promptly to some extent. In this respect, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to a third notification group described later, a message sound notifying which notification type is to be output is output. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing a proper game will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust, the alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" follows the message sound although it is an alarm sound different from that belonging to the first notification group. So that it makes it difficult for the person who is playing a proper game to feel disgusted, it is an output mode when it belongs to the third notification group although it is a lighting mode different from the case where it belongs to the first notification group By performing notification by lighting of various lamps that are not turned off, it is expected that the abnormality handling measures on the hole side can be speeded up to some extent.

  On the other hand, although the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the non-time-short state, the game ball is provided with the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center role 2500 in the game area 5a. It is in a state where the passing is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (a game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to a game in a proper manner (left strike)) To inform that. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “return to the left” And “) are to be executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, in a non-time-short state, both the loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound "Please return to the left" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 When the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed, the process is ended in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for two times).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state that the lower plate 322 is full of gaming balls is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in addition to the notification sound 6 (left hitting guide) (lower plate Informing sound 7 (ball removal guidance) notifying that it is in the state where it is necessary to perform the ball removal of the game ball in 322, perform the game guidance for appropriately advancing the game although the possibility of fraud is low It is regarded as belonging to the 3rd informing group when it is in the proper state, and regarding the informing sound belonging to the 3rd informing group, setting the informing mode, the informing time, and the cancellation condition to those in common. And

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output a notification sound such as "Please pull the ball of the lower plate", and in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Please pull out the ball on the lower plate" as notification time while display (for example, "Please pull the ball on the lower plate") is executed respectively, and the game board All of the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the detection by the full tank detection sensor 279 is performed. .

  However, with regard to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-dropping guidance), when the detection is performed by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279, they are terminated in 20 seconds. When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-dropping guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, 5 seconds of silence after the message sound of 5 seconds has been output. Data is assigned to channel X and a corresponding sound is output (silence output), and loop processing is performed to repeat a notification sound for 10 seconds including the message sound and the silence data as a set It has become. Then, in the notification sounds 6 and 7, since silence data is output for the same time in both cases, it functions as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the silent data portion instead of the hard-to-hear message sound portion in the noisy hall. Regarding silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including a message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning this to channel X.

  By the way, although there may be silent parts in the notification sound (between the alarm sound and the message sound, etc.) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, these may be very short for providing an “interval”. It is apparent that it is time-based and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned relatively long-time silent part (third broadcast group) having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, the alarm sound such as "boo-boo" or "ping pong" is not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent period interposed between the player and the player. In this way, it is possible to give a notice on game guidance without making the user feel disgusted.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, regarding the notification sound belonging to the same notification group, the priority order is set to be the same, but the priority order is made different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group You may do so. In addition, although loop reproduction in which the target sound is repeatedly reproduced is adopted as the reproduction type setting, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and 1 SHOT reproduction in which the target sound is reproduced once may be adopted. . In addition, with regard to “booboo” commonly used in the notification sound belonging to the first notification group and “ping pong ping pong” commonly used in the notification sound belonging to the second notification group, one having a connection with the message sound The alarm data may be prepared separately for each notification sound as the sound data, or may be prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and sound data in which the message sound and the alarm sound are combined at the time of output is created It may then be assigned to a channel.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows a process when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a), assuming that there is magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 at which no alarm sound is output now, The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the magnetic detection has been performed. Then, information indicating that there is magnetic detection is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that magnetism has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer, and In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is sent to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately thereafter) at which no alarm sound is output, magnetic detection information If it is found that the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). (In this case, the notification sound reproduction in the loop of “booboo magnetic detection detected”) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  In addition, when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is allocated to the channel X, sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or peripheral control RAM 1511 c and peripheral control is performed. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the RAM 1511 c. Then, on this, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed together. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously performed until the power re-on which is the cancellation condition of the magnetic abnormality is performed.

  Through such processing, an alarm sound such as "booboo magnetic detection detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetic detection is detected And the lighting by the various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the first notification group) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), step S112 (step S112) is performed at timing tα2 in which the alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is in the loop playback state, since 60 seconds have not elapsed from timing tα1. In the process of FIG. 94, it is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405. At this point, in the main control MPU 1310a, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetic detection was performed, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so as to indicate that the vibration detection was performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is externally output and managed in the hall computer, and In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is sent to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is determined that vibration detection information is included, alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to channel X in the warning process of step S 1024 (FIG. 95). I do not do it. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly allocated to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side of the allocated state is preferentially executed to be continued.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the setting of the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the vibration detection is not performed at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data according to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not progressed without being allocated to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) not set yet at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter). ) Is set, and when the timer (60 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) ends, the sound according to the vibration detection Schedule data for generation is set, alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is allocated to channel X for the remaining time, and alarm sound in the notification mode (here, a loop of “booboo vibration detected”) It is supposed to be played back.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection at timing tα2 (or immediately after that), the screen generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection The above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display or lamp is extracted by extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or peripheral control RAM 1511 c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. As for lighting, these are performed.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display according to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. In the lamp lighting, although the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the vibration detection is set, the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority is the same, The lighting modes of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection already in the set state are reflected by various lamp lights, and the lighting modes of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection are various. It is not reflected by lamp light respectively. As with the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data contents, any of them is selected. Even when the light is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

  After that, at timing tα3 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from timing tα1, the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having timed up. The loop processing to be executed is ended. In this case, since the time required to reproduce a single notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) has a time. At the up timing tα3, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, and is well cut off.

  At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest thereof By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for a time (a time obtained by subtracting the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds) to the channel X, the notification mode (here, “booboo vibration Will be performed in the "loop detected".

  That is, while the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but is set at the timing tα3. Therefore, at timing tα3, the alarm sound of “booboo vibration detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) times out, “booboo vibration is detected. It is possible to urge the loop processing to be finished and not to be reproduced at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as “boo-boo”) of the notification sound such as “done”.

  According to such a configuration, when one alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is being reproduced and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is satisfied (see FIG. 157 (a), the sixth alarm sound (here “booboo”) and the sixth message sound (here “magnetic detected”) have been reproduced, the seventh alarm sound (here Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "booboo" was reproduced. As a result, "a booboo magnet is detected" and "a booboo vibration is detected" is connected at a strange place and it becomes impossible to recognize an unauthorized notification in a tense situation (for example, If notification sound 1 ends with "booboo magnetic" and notification sound 2 starts with "motion detected", meaningless notification such as "booboo magnetic movement detected" Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the situation (which may confuse the site).

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer according to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up and finished at the alarm sound of “boooo”, and the message sound is Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is ended and is not reproduced at a halfway timing. In the case of a notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good turn off). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at a halfway timing, it is prompted to confirm the display in the liquid crystal, and “displayed magnetism” and “detected vibration” are displayed on the liquid crystal display respectively. By being displayed, it can be properly recognized that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection are performed.

  FIG. 157 (b) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. 157 (a). Processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when the above-described processing (one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) with reference to Is almost the same as

  For example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), frame open detection by the main body frame open switch 619 within the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tβ1 at which no alarm sound is output now. If there is an event, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame open detection has been detected. Then, information indicating that there is a frame open detection is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that frame open detection has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer, In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame open detection) is provided to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tβ1 (or immediately thereafter) where no alarm sound is output, If it is determined that the information is included, the alarm sound 5 (open frame) shown in FIG. 156 is allocated (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). Start notification sound reproduction in a mode (here, a loop of "frame is open ping-pong ping-pong") and set a timer (30 seconds) for measuring notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open) .

  When the alarm sound 5 (frame open) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the control RAM 1511 c. Then, on this, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop) It will be.

  At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, schedule data for screen generation according to the frame open detection and light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame open detection, from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed together. The execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the frame closing detection which is the cancellation condition of the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1 and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the frame is "Open" and lighting by the various lamps arranged in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are respectively executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), 30 seconds have not elapsed from timing tβ1, and at timing tβ2 when the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S110. Alternatively, it is assumed that door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a updates the state of the notification flag so that it is indicated that the door open detection has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 at which the frame open detection has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door is open is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that door open detection has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer, In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is provided to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is understood that door open detection information is included, the alarm sound 4 (door open) shown in FIG. It does not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame open) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door open) is not newly allocated to the channel X Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (the frame open) on the side of the already allocated state is preferentially executed to be continued.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door open detection is not set at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door open) is not progressed without being allocated to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) not set yet at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter). ) Was set, and when the timer (30 seconds) did not time out when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 5 (frame open) ended, the door open was detected. The schedule data for sound generation is set, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is allocated to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, the door is open “Ping-Pong Ping-Pong” loop) The notification sound is to be reproduced.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), the screen generation schedule data according to the door open detection, The above-mentioned liquid crystal is extracted by extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. These are executed for display and lamp lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display according to the door opening appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. In the lamp lighting, although the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the door open detection is set, the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the frame open detection is already set and the priority is the same. From the above, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection which has already been in the set state is reflected by various lamp lights, and the lighting of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door opening detection The aspect is not reflected in various lamp lights. As with the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection have the same data contents, There is no change in lamp lighting even when reflecting either.

  After that, at timing tβ3 at which 30 seconds have elapsed from timing tβ1, an alarm sound such as “the frame is open ping pong pong” is based on the timer (30 seconds) of the alarm sound 5 (frame open) having timed up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In addition, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “The frame is open ping pong ping pong” is set to 10 seconds here, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) At time t.beta.3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" has been reproduced three times, and the timing is good.

  At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection. By allocating the notification sound 4 (the door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door There will be an announcement sound playback in the (loop of ping-pong).

  That is, while the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) is set at the timing tβ2, the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection is not set but is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the alarm sound of “the door is open ping pong pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the alarm sound 4 (door open) times out, “the door is open” It is possible to urge the loop processing to be terminated and not to be reproduced at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "the door is open") of the notification sound such as ping-pong ping-pong.

  According to such a configuration, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 157 (b), the third message sound (here, “the frame is open”) and the third alarm sound (here, “ping pong pong”) have been reproduced, the fourth message sound ( Here, it is possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open"). As a result, "the frame is open and the door is open" and "the door is open and the door is open" will be connected in a strange place, and it will be impossible to recognize the notification content in a tense situation It becomes possible to preferably suppress the occurrence.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at time tβ3, the remaining time of the timer according to the door open detection becomes short, and even if the alarm sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. To ensure that the door is open can be grasped with certainty.

  FIG. 157 (c) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (c), at timing tγ1 at which no alarm sound is now output, the game is in spite of being in a non-short state in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed through the gate part 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center character 2500 in the area 5a (detection of right hit in non-shorting state), the main The control MPU 1310 a sets, as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, information that there is a right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the time saving state) is provided for processing regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It will be. Note that regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tγ1 (or immediately thereafter) where no alarm sound is output, If it is determined that the information on the right-handed detection of is included, the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) A timer (for setting notification sound) (in this case, "Please return to the left" loop) to start the notification sound reproduction and to measure the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance) ( Set 20 seconds).

  In this embodiment, with regard to right-handed detection in the short time state, information to that effect is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command in this embodiment, but instead, the main control MPU 1310a plays the gate portion 2003 It is determined whether the detection by the gate sensor 4003 has been performed in a non-time-short state on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side so that only the information that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the ball has passed is output as a command. And the processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-short time state.

  In addition, when the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X, the schedule data for sound generation according to the right-handed detection in the short time state is copied to various control data copies of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. Then, on this, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to the left" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop) It will be.

  At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the right-handed detection in the short time state is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c By setting in the storage area 1511 cae, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display is also executed. Execution of the in-liquid crystal display is the end of notification (the timer (20 seconds) for measuring notification time of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) being time-out) which is the cancellation condition of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) Will continue to run. In addition, regarding the processing of the third notification group with low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid the hindrance to the progress of the effect, and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the right strike detection in the non-time-short state is set. It will not be done.

  Through such processing, an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and display of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed until the alarm sound is ended. Display in the area (for example, "Please return to the left") will be performed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (c), step S110 or step S110 is performed at timing tγ2 at which 20 seconds have not elapsed from timing tγ1 and a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is in loop playback. In the processing of S112 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that the lower tray full tank detection is performed by the full tank detection sensor 279. At this point, the main control MPU 1310a sets information to the effect that lower-side full-tank detection has been made as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of timing tγ1 at which rightward detection in the short time state is detected. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (lower counter full detection) is supplied to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) is performed at the timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the information on the bottom plate full detection is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. It does not assign to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority order is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball extraction guidance) is not newly allocated to the channel X By doing this, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side of the already assigned state is preferentially executed to be continued.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the lower-ink-full detection at the timing tγ2 is not set. Therefore, there is no case where the sound generation schedule data according to the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is not processed in a state where it is not allocated to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (20 For the second), and when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is finished, the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out and the lower tray is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X only for the remaining time, and set the notification mode (here, "Please remove the lower plate ball. The notification sound reproduction in the “loop” is performed.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the bottom fullness detection at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), it is for screen generation according to the bottom fullness detection. The schedule data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or peripheral control RAM 1511 c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c so that the above-mentioned liquid crystal internal display is executed. There is.

  It should be noted that in the liquid crystal internal display, a display according to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the left hitting guide is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

  After that, at timing tγ3 at which 20 seconds have elapsed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is generated based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having timed up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the alarm sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” has been reproduced twice.

  At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball out guidance) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the bottom full detection. , And by allocating notification sound 7 (ball extraction guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 from 20 seconds) to the notification mode (here, Then, the notification sound reproduction in the loop of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" will be executed.

  That is, while the timer of notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is set at timing tγ2, it is not set for the sound generation schedule data according to the lower disc full detection, and it is set when the timing tγ3 comes. Since at the timing tγ3 the notification sound of “Please pull the ball of the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head at the timing tγ3, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (guide for removing the ball) times out Such that the loop processing is terminated and not played back at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "Drop the ball on the lower plate") of the notification sound such as "Please pull the ball on the lower plate" It will be possible to prompt.

  According to such a configuration, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 157 (c), the second message sound ("Please return to the left" here) has finished playing, the third message sound ("Please pull the ball of the lower plate" here) It becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if reproduced. As a result, "Please return to the left" and "Please pull the ball of the lower plate" are connected at strange places, and the occurrence of situations where the notification content can not be recognized can be suitably suppressed. Will be able to

  Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, silent data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silence output) It is supposed to be. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, silent data of 5 seconds is interposed. Because the message sound of another notification sound comes to be played back, the occurrence of a situation where two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound, and the notification content can not be recognized. It will be possible to avoid it.

  FIG. 158 (a) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a), if there is magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing t-1 at which no alarm sound is output, the magnet is detected. The processing (magnetic abnormality processing) corresponding to the magnetic detection is performed in the same manner as the case described with reference to FIG. 157 (a). Therefore, at timing t-1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetic detection detected” is started, and the timing (time of 60 seconds) of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) timer is up. At t-3, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "booboo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced six times, and it is cut off. Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp will be continuously executed until the time of the power re-on which is the cancellation condition of the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), a timing t-2 in which a notification sound such as "booboo magnetism has been detected" is in the loop playback state has not elapsed since the timing t-1 for 60 seconds. In the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that there is a door open detection by the door frame open switch 618. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door open detection (see FIG. 155). ), Even when door open detection occurs, processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

  Normally, with regard to the processing on the lower priority side, as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 157 (a) to (c) is overlapped, Processing is performed to set only the timer and not to set the sound generation schedule data itself.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly is different from the case where only the door is opened, and there is a high possibility that some fraudulent activity is being carried out. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group” in which the possibility of fraud is moderate. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), at timing t-2, neither the timer for the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection nor the sound generation schedule data is set. , Set only the flag according to the door open detection. Then, based on the fact that the flag is set at timing t-3, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection and the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection respectively. With setting, alarm sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X and alarm sound reproduction is started in the notification mode (here, the loop of “the door is open: ping pong ping pong”) . The execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting according to the door open detection is started from timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, "booboo magnetism is detected even though there is door open detection by the door frame opening switch 618 in a state where an alarm sound such as" booboo magnetism has been detected "is being played back in a loop. "From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound ends, the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection is played back for 30 seconds," the door is open ping pong ping pong " The loop processing is ended at a good timing of cutting when the alarm sound such as has been reproduced three times. In this way, notification sound 4 (door opening) according to door opening detection is reproduced in a more detailed notification mode different from processing based on normal priority, and notification belonging to the second notification group Although it is the content (here, the "door is open" loop of ping-pong ping-pong), it will be expected to promote the recognition that it is in a situation where the possibility of fraud is high.

  In addition, after the notification sound that “booboo magnetism has been detected”, the notification content is started from the message sound (the door is open), so the first notification group in the most tense situation is It is possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which it belongs is ended. On the other hand, the alarm sound of “ping pong ping pong” is reproduced after the message sound, so that it can be easily recognized that it is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

  FIG. 158 (b) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (b), it is assumed that door open detection is performed by the door frame open switch 618 within the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tδ1 at which no alarm sound is output. With regard to the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed. It will be. Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process of repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of alarm sound 4 (door open) is up Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times. Further, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the door closing which is the release condition of the door opening is detected.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), 30 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tδ1 and the step is performed at the timing tδ2 in which the notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state. In the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed strike in a short time. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left hitting guidance) according to the right hitting detection in the non-short time state Therefore (see FIG. 155), even when the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state occurs, the process of the notification sound 4 (door open) is continuously performed.

  That is, as described above, with regard to the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as when the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 157 (a) to (c) is overlapped. The process is performed to set only the timer and not to set the sound generation schedule data itself.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), while the timer (20 seconds) of the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set at timing tδ2, the sound generation according to the right-handed detection in the short time state Schedule data is not set. Then, at timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not up, sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set, and the remaining time The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is allocated to the channel X by a minute, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, a loop for “return to left”).

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "Please open to the left" has not been included at the good timing of the cut. Since it can be reproduced, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has become low while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, silent data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silence output) It is supposed to be. Therefore, even with such silent data, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound of the type which has been reproduced up to that point has ended and the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It will be.

  FIG. 158 (c) shows an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (c), it is assumed that door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tε1 at which no alarm sound is output. With regard to the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed. It will be. Therefore, at timing tε1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tε3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of alarm sound 4 (door open) is up Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times. Further, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the door closing which is the release condition of the door opening is detected.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), 30 seconds has not elapsed from timing tε1 and at timing tε2 in which a notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S112. It is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is performed in the process of FIG. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 155), prioritizing the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open), in either the sound or the lamp lighting The output content is not reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, about the display in the liquid crystal, since it is configured to be displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during execution of notification with low priority. Even when a notification with a high priority occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

  Here, with regard to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound and lamp lighting, it has been set up at that time at timing tε2. The sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection may be processed to be canceled from the set state.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data according to the door open detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection at the timing tε2 The sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data are set according to the magnetic detection whose priority is higher than the respective data while maintaining the set state. Put in a state. The sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation from the contents based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, the assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations By switching to the content based on the schedule data, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is output for any of the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed on the process on the side with low priority in the execution state (the process at the time of door opening). It is possible to realize change of notification content based on the priority between two different processes (door open process, magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), at timing tδ2, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is started, and a timer for alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "Booboo Magnetic Detection Detected" has been reproduced six times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp will be continuously executed until the time of the power re-on which is the cancellation condition of the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is immediately performed in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lighting of the lamp immediately after the occurrence of the magnetic detection having a high possibility of the fraudulent activity being performed. Also, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the alarm sound such as "booboo" is first reproduced as the alarm sound, the alarm belonging to the first alarm group is performed, and it is promptly transmitted to the hall side that it has switched to a tense situation It comes to be expected.

  FIG. 158 (d) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of an alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is satisfied while one alarm sound belonging to the third alarm group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (d), at timing tζ1 at which no alarm sound is output, rightward detection in the short time state by the gate sensor 4003 is performed within the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is determined that there is a process similar to the case described with reference to FIG. 157 (c), the process according to the right strike detection in the short time state (left strike guide process) is performed. Therefore, at timing tζ1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is started, and timing tζ3 at which the timer (20 seconds) of alarm sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” has been reproduced twice. Further, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously executed until the timer-up of the notification sound which is the cancellation condition of the left-handed guidance.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), step S110 or step S110 at timing tζ2 when the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is in progress during loop playback since 20 seconds have not elapsed from timing tζ1. It is assumed that door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right hitting detection in the non-short time state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection Therefore (refer to FIG. 155), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left turn guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. It will not be done. In addition, about the display in the liquid crystal, since it is configured to be displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during execution of notification with low priority. Even when a notification with a high priority occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

  Here, as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of the actuator in the process of the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance), right-turn detection in the non-time-short state which has been set up at time tζ2. A process may be performed to cancel the sound generation schedule data according to the set state.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data according to the right hitting detection in the non short time state but also the sound generation schedule data according to the right hitting detection in the non short time state at timing tζ2. The schedule data for sound generation according to the door open detection as well as the schedule data for the sound generation according to the door open detection whose priority is higher than this are kept as they are set in the set state, and the light emission mode The generation schedule data is set to each set. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right strike detection in the non-short time state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection. In the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (d), at timing tζ2, no operation is performed on the process on the side with low priority in the execution state (left-turn guidance process), It is possible to realize the change of the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-handed guide process, door open process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), at timing tζ2, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and in the alarm sound 4 (door open). The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times in accordance with the time-up of the timer (30 seconds). In addition, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the door closing detection which is the release condition of the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as soon as door open detection occurs in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is moderate occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp lighting In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound is played first from the message sound (the door is open), it is possible to make the person playing the appropriate game not feel disgusted, but then The notification sound belonging to the 2nd notification group is given by the alarm sound by “Ping Pong Ping Pong”, and it is expected to quickly notify the hall side that it has switched to the situation where the possibility of fraud has occurred .

  Even in the situation where such abnormal alarm sound is output, it is possible to change the volume setting value or the brightness setting value, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is preferable that the changed brightness is reflected by some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 155 are to be output, various processes described above are performed according to the priority order. Even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for notification sound, abnormal contents and game guidance can be appropriately notified (channel saving type control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group which has a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of a fraud may be higher than a medium condition depending on other detection conditions. It is difficult to say that control based on the priority order of the above is properly notified of the current state of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection that is highly likely to have been tampered with, but also when there is an abnormality detection that is less likely to be fraudulently performed. is there. In other words, if there is a high probability of an anomaly being detected, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues, but with an anomaly detection that is less likely to be conducted. If there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained for the convenience of the hole side (such as recovery from various errors), the alarm sound output is not necessarily required even if the detection state is continued. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIGS. 159 to 164, in addition to the control based on the priority described above, special conditions are taken into consideration, and the state of the gaming machine is further enhanced. It is decided to realize the notification in such a manner as to make it possible to express appropriately. Hereinafter, special notification processing will be described separately for each situation with reference to FIGS. 159 to 164.

  In the example shown in FIG. 159, at timing tα11 at which no alarm sound is output, door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 occurs. Then, the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection is set, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection are also included. It will be set. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for counting the notification time of the notification sound 4 (the door opening) is set, and the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played over a second.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal according to the door open detection is maintained until the timing tα 16 when the door open is not detected by the door frame open switch 618 comes.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 159, at timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection is finished and the channel X is in the idle state, the magnetic detection whose priority order regarding notification is relatively high Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, the lamp emission corresponding to the door open detection started from the timing tα11 is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 comes for the light emission mode generation schedule data, but the allocation for various lamp operations is At timing tα13, it is switched to the lamp emission mode according to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection They are put in the set state. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, and for the notification sound according to the magnetic detection, 60 seconds until the timing tα 14 arrives. Will be played over.

  On the other hand, as for the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp emission according to the magnetic detection, the display and the emission are respectively maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 159, when the notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection is ended and the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. In such a situation, a person who intends to do some unauthorized work opens the door frame 3 and puts it in an open state, and then waits for notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection to end, It is assumed that the magnet may enter the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 momentarily when trying to secretly place the wrong purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in the cold state, and it is extremely malicious. Since it is an act, it is feared that it is not enough as a countermeasure only to perform alarm sound processing according to magnetism detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is already off, magnetic detection can not be used as a trigger even if some measures are taken.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at timing tα14 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the fact that the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continuing is used, Based on this, "schedule data for sound generation according to door open detection" whose notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is displayed on channel X It is decided to carry out special processing to reassign to. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state is reproduced in a form linked to "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", so that a great sense of discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be generated and everyone's attention will be gathered. In addition, even as a person who does fraud, it is already relieved that "when notification of magnetism is over, all the notification sound reproduction is finished, and it is possible to finally make the situation where it is not obvious to be cheating". Since an alarm sound corresponding to the door open detection that should have ended is reproduced, and an unexpected alarm condition occurs, it is expected that recognition that there is an excess of risk is too large. It will be.

  Although described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is performed and in the period during the notification process belonging to the second notification group, other channels are used. A process (a process of reducing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed to suppress the volume of the effect sound during pattern fluctuation and the gaming sound other than that being assigned. The specific value may be volume 0. While the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of effect sound during symbol variation assigned to the other channels and the volume of other game sounds are not suppressed.

  Here, in a period during which the notification process is being performed (a period in which the volume is to be suppressed), whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality It is a period during which the condition of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) is satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 159, the symbol variation is based on the fact that the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed in the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16. A process (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) for suppressing the volume of the effect sound and the game sound other than that is performed, and the notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed in the period of timing tα13 to tα14. Based on the fact that the process is being performed, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the game sound other than that (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

  In this embodiment, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed during the period in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the running period, the volume of effect sound during symbol variation and other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. In the period, processing may be performed to reduce the value to a lower value than during the period in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of informing states only by confirming the effect sound other than the informing, and it is expected to further accelerate the initial movement on the hole side.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 159, at the timing tα 16 at which the door open detection is ended, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during symbol fluctuation and the game sound other than that is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that was already in the end state is reproduced in a form that leads to "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", there is a possibility that extremely malicious action has been performed In view of the above, even when the timing tα 16 at which the door open detection is ended is reached, the volume of the effect sound in the symbol change or the game sound other than that may be suppressed without being suppressed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 159, as apparent from the processing according to the door open detection, the period during which the notification sound according to the door open detection is reproduced, the in-liquid crystal display according to the door open detection The period to be performed and the period to light the lamps in the manner according to the door open detection are made to have the same start time but different end times. As described above, by operating the notification sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp emission to have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. Even if there is, it will be possible to appropriately notify of abnormal contents and game guidance.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 160, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) according to the door open detection ends, right-turning detection in a non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at timing tα23. The case is assumed. However, in this example, unlike in the example shown in FIG. 159, since the possibility that a very malicious action is performed is low, the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right hitting detection in the non-time-short state is ended. At timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the end state is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the effect sound during symbol fluctuation and the other game sound is not changed. By the way, it is extremely vicious even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right hitting detection in the non-short time state by the gate sensor 4003 after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) according to the door opening detection ends. Since there is a low possibility that a false action is being performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection which is already in the end state is not reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is ended.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 161, magnetic detection by magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) according to the door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 161, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is ended at timing tα 34 in the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. There is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 161, at timing tα 35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state is “report sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. There is nothing to be reproduced in a connected form. That is, also in the example shown in FIG. 161, as in the case shown in FIG. 159, after a person who intends to do some unauthorized work opens the door frame 3 and makes it open, Wait for the notification sound reproduction according to the end, and when it is attempted to secretly arrange an illegal target magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the temperature is low, the magnet is instantaneously detected in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor It is assumed that there is a situation in which However, after timing tα34, the door frame 3 is closed, and in view of the non-incorrect state where the magnetic detection is not generated either, according to the magnetic detection although it is in such a non-incorrect state It is considered that the notification sound is played continuously until the timing t.alpha. 35 arrives, and that it plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and channel X is idled when more notification sound processing is needed. It can be said that it is more useful to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 161, even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, abnormal contents and game guidance can be appropriately notified.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 162, magnetic detection by magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα 43 after the notification sound (timing t α 41 to t α 42) according to the door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at timing tα 44 in the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 162, after the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is finished, an attempt is made to secretly arrange an illegal purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the temperature is cold. Even when the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced according to this, the situation is within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 without such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is going to be re-placed, and there may be more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα 44, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the magnetic detection is maintained in the set state, the notification sound 1 is kept A process of resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time until the lapse of 60 seconds starting from the timing t α 44 at which the second magnetic detection occurred from when the first magnetic detection occurred Can be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism has been detected” is continuously reproduced without interruption over the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. Finally, the loop processing is not finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Booboo magnetism is detected" ends, for example, the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing such as "Booboo magnet detection". As a result, it will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing great discomfort in the hall.

  Furthermore, at timing tα44 at which 60 seconds have elapsed based on timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection occurred, notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). The sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection is set again, and the special process of re-assigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been ended is reproduced in a form linked to the "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", and in addition, the "booboo magnetic detection" It is reproduced in a form linked to "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetism detection" in which the loop processing is finished at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door open detection which has already been ended becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if it was reproduced in the form of stopping the notification sound of the magnetic detection halfway. It will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 163, magnetic detection by magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) according to the door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 163, it is assumed that vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at timing tα 54 in a period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 163, when an attempt is made to secretly arrange an illegal purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a cold state while waiting for notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection to end. In spite of the fact that the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is largely shaken without such a situation. It is assumed that there may be more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, at timing tα 55 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form linked to “the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection” At timing tα 56 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state is reproduced in a form further connected to “the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection”. ing.

  Moreover, at the timing tα 54 at which the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is generated, a timer (60 for not counting the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and counting the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) Is set, and the schedule data for sound generation according to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X at timing tα 55 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended. .

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as “booboo vibration detected” does not end its loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop at half-time timing such as “booboo vibration detection”. Since the processing is to be finished, it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be generated in the hall and everyone's attention will be gathered.

  Furthermore, at timing tα 56 when the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) “for sound generation according to door open detection Schedule data is set again, and the special process of reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the end state is further connected to "the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection" connected to "the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection". As well as being played back at the beginning of the loop, the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing such as “booboo vibration detection”, and it is reproduced in a form linked to “the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door open detection which has already been ended becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if it were reproduced in the form of stopping the notification sound of the vibration detection halfway It will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 164, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) according to the frame open detection ends instead of door open detection It is assumed.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 164, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame open detection is in a state in which there is a high possibility that some fraudulent activity is being performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraudulent action, the door frame 3 should be opened, and even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet. Since it does not exist, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be erroneously detected when the hole side uses a magnet for the purpose of eliminating the ball clogging in the ball tank, the dispensing passage or the like.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 164 as well, at the timing tα 64 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection which has already been in the end state By reproducing in a form linked to “reproduction” (timing t α 64 to t α 65), a great sense of discomfort is generated in the hole, and it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered. However, thereafter, at timing tα 66 when the main frame 4 is closed and frame open detection is ended, not only each notification processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to frame open detection, but also according to magnetic detection A special process is also performed to end each notification process (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp).

  According to such a configuration, the notification processing corresponding to the frame open detection and the magnetic detection can be performed only by closing the main body frame 4 when the false detection on the hole side is performed while suitably performing the function against the fraud As it becomes possible to end all notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp), it is expected that the response on the hole side to the false detection can be speeded up and the atmosphere in the hole suitably maintained. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 164, the frame open detection is also performed when the main frame 4 is closed and the frame open detection is ended when the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. At the end timing, not only each notification processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to frame open detection, but also each informing processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to magnetic detection It is also possible to perform a special process to end the process.

  By the way, as described above, the player's side volume adjustment function is installed in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 128), and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. If it is determined that the player's setting value (player's setting value) is reduced with respect to the speaker volume, it is determined by the player with regard to the speaker volume when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated. A process is performed to increase the value (player set value). Also, when the player's set value is lowered and the actually lowered volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") Is output with the volume value after the decrease. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the volume actually raised is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pipi!") Is output at the volume value after the increase. The volume adjustment is completed, and it is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output in the case of decreasing the volume value and in the case of increasing the volume value. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, "20" which is the same as the button pressing sound) referred to when the empty channel is exhausted (for example, the output sound volume of the effect sound ( It is possible to more reliably transmit that the volume of the audible sound has changed.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is not performed during the time when the symbol variation according to the big hit determination is not yet performed (demonstration display etc. Not only the period that can be played, but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the big hit judgment is being executed, the acceptance by the player is allowed, and the more important effect appeared By making it possible to change the setting of the volume value at any time, etc., it is intended to maintain the amusement of the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 in the situation where the channels of various performance sounds are assigned according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of symbol variation. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as magnetic abnormality or door opening, processing is performed to assign and output a specific notification sound corresponding to the detection content among a plurality of types of notification sounds to a channel. At this time, channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not stopped, and the process of notifying the progress of the effect of reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound of a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not discontinued. From the above, it is possible to enjoy the effect again by appropriately restoring the output sound volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display, as long as the channel assignment of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is ended.

  However, in the above-mentioned effect development lower notification processing, since the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of display effects is not to be canceled, the specific notification sound is allocated to the channel at a normal time More channels will be used than in the unannounced state), and there will be no empty channels to which no sound data has been assigned before the end of the channel assignment (informing state) of the specific annunciation sound. Risk tends to be high. Then, if there is no vacant channel to which sound data has not been assigned at a stage prior to the end of channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound, either of the sound data at that time Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, even if the channel assignment (informing status) of a specific notification sound is ended thereafter, the sound data that can not be assigned to a channel can be reproduced. There is a concern that the entertainment interest may decline.

  With regard to concerns about free channels related to the presentation sound, there is no direct problem if the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Whether to adopt the automatic channel system or should be determined from the design viewpoint of the game and the effect, even if any channel system is adopted as the above-mentioned effect development lower notification process It is important to prepare a processing structure that can adopt a common processing program, in order to ensure cost reduction and reliability improvement for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for any of the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect development lower notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the effect sound that is being produced is not variable but is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound ("Pip!" Or "Pipi!") Even if the player has performed an operation while the effect progressing lower notification processing is being executed. It is hoped that this will give more room to the channel and help reduce the risk of losing free channels.

  However, although the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the setting of the volume value when, for example, more important effects appear, the setting of the output volume is performed while the notification processing under the progress of the effect is performed. If the change is judged to be disallowed, and the notification processing under presentation progress based on the notification by false detection or convenience on the hall side (door opening etc.) is executed, the volume appropriate value according to the contents of the presentation progress is appropriately set. It is inevitable that the game's interest will decline due to the fact that it can not be changed. In addition, as a result of the progress of the presentation during the process of notification of the progress of the presentation, as a result of the occurrence of a large deviation between the sound volume appropriate value and the actual setting value according to the content of the presentation, After the setting change of the sound volume of the listening sound is allowed, it is necessary to receive a plurality of operations to change the sound volume to the proper value. As a result, there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the fact that the effect sound can not be properly output due to the lack of available channels despite the fact that the informing progress lower notification process has finally ended.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect development lower notification process is being performed, the value decreases to a specific value. While the output sound volume of the effect sound being played (sound volume of the audible sound) is not made variable but is maintained, the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the sound volume is allowed to be accepted by itself. When the informing progress lower notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is ended, the output volume (sound volume of the audible sound) is simultaneously changed so that all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  According to such a configuration, a new operation can be performed if the change acceptance of the set value (player's set value) by the player is received in accordance with the progress of presentation while the process of notification of progress of production is being executed. It is possible to collectively change the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations up to that point are reflected when the informing progress lower notification processing is ended without performing. As described above, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player's set value) even during the period during which the effect progressing notification process is being executed, the effect progressing notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game. In addition, the volume value (volume of the audible sound) is set and changed over a plurality of steps immediately after the effect development lower notification processing ends, and a situation occurs in which a shortage occurs in the vacant channel due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also suitably avoided.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, when a batch change of the output sound volume to the player setting value is executed when the effect development informing process is ended, the game during the period in which the effect informing process is under execution. Although the volume adjustment completion sound is reproduced only once at the volume after the batch change, regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, this volume adjustment completion sound is normally It may be made to output with the sound (for example, "bee!") Of a special aspect different from.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably eliminate the shortage of empty channels when the informing progress lower notification process is ended, the number of times the player setting value has been changed during the period in which the informing progress lower notification process is being executed It is desirable not to play back the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) at the same time the presentation progress under notification processing is ended regardless of the number of operations etc. . According to such a configuration, in particular, despite the fact that the in-progress under-reporting process based on the false detection and the notification by the hall side convenience (such as opening the door) is finally finished, the appropriate rendering is performed due to the shortage of empty channels. Can be suitably suppressed.

  In the example described above, when the alarm sound according to the door open detection ends while maintaining the door open state, when the magnetic abnormality occurs after that and the alarm sound according to this occurs, the door open detection Notification sound was output again (see FIG. 159). However, when the alarm sound according to the door open detection is in the output state and a magnetic abnormality occurs and the alarm sound according to this is ended, even if the door open state is maintained, It is desirable not to output a corresponding notification sound (or to output only the time remaining as the output time of the “notification sound according to door open detection” interrupted).

  When the door is in the open state, lamp light emission is performed according to the door open detection, but this lamp light emission is continued when the door open state is continued even after the notification sound according to the door open detection is finished. It is desirable to Furthermore, it is desirable to continue for a predetermined time even after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state is finished.

  If there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound according to the door open detection is ended while maintaining the door open state, the specific error It is desirable that the alarm sound according to the door open detection be output again based on the occurrence of the. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an abnormality has occurred by re-output of a notification sound according to the door open detection.

  Alternatively, there is a specific error that does not output an alarm sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the error occurs according to the door open detection while the door open state is maintained, when the specific error occurs, The notification sound according to the door open detection may not be output again based on the occurrence of the specific error, and the state where the re-notification can be performed may be maintained.

  Even in the situation where such abnormal alarm sound is output, it is possible to change the volume setting value or the brightness setting value, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is preferable that the changed brightness is reflected by some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

  Hereinafter, an example will be described for the processing from the execution of such notification processing under effect development to the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) being collectively changed.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram for describing the contents of the in-progress development informing process separately for the informing state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to describing the processing from the execution of the notification of progress of production to the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) being collectively changed, the contents of the notification of processing of progress of progress, with reference to FIG. A brief explanation of Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 155 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 165, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression aspects (a first volume suppression aspect and a second volume suppression aspect) are prepared as volume suppression aspects of the effect sound, For example, in the first volume suppression mode, in the setting value (player setting value) change by the player regarding the sound volume, the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) change of the effect sound in the range of “20” to “50” is Among the possible effects, the output sound volume of the presentation sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a greater degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode, and in this particular example, the process according to the output itself is performed without the effect sound being performed. It is illustrated as something to be

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud. When the notification process regarding any is performed, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second sound volume suppression mode which is the side of high suppression degree. Moreover, even when abnormality detection is turned off, when notification processing regarding any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, In the second volume suppression mode on the high suppression side until the predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses after the abnormality detection, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) This process is continued without stopping the process of suppressing.

  In this explanation example, when notification processing relating to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound (audible sound) The period during which the process of suppressing the volume of the sound is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, abnormal vibration, It is set to.

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group with medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed, the degree of suppression In the first volume suppression mode, which is the lower side of the above, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is performed. However, when notification processing regarding any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is performed, when abnormality detection is turned off immediately after abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process for suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is ended in the first sound volume suppression mode on the side where the suppression degree is low.

  On the other hand, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance, ball pulling guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance is performed, The process of suppressing the output sound volume of the presentation sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is not executed at all.

  In this explanation example, the suppression mode is made to differ depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. Are not necessarily different from each other, and the output sound volume of the rendering sound in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed A process of suppressing (the volume of the audible sound) may be performed. However, with regard to the termination condition of the process to be suppressed, it is different if the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to make

  FIG. 166 shows the contents of the processing relating to the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the processing regarding the notification sound is not executed. It is a figure explaining.

  In this example, the player setting value is made variable by “1” in the range of “1” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. As the value is smaller, the volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller. In addition, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the player setting in the state where the above-mentioned suppression mode (the first sound volume suppression mode and the second sound volume suppression mode) is not set for the effect sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanation example, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), with regard to the volume of the effect sound, the player set value is "3" among "1" to "5", and no notification flag is set. It is assumed that the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to “60” that is 20 times that. Further, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, and the big hit determination is not made and is in the start prize waiting state, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect selection left button 331 is selected. The displayed image 331a and the displayed image 332a over the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and a volume adjustment guidance display OAH indicating that volume adjustment can be performed through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 is also executed, which makes it possible to recognize which one of "1" to "5" the current player set value is Ru. The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be always displayed, or during a specific period such as super reach effect which is a reach effect to be executed in a state where the background image is changed. When the operation is performed by the player, at least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2 described later may be displayed when the player performs an operation. Further, both of the volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, and one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 166 (A), when the operation by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the player setting value is “1” each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed by “20” at the same time. In addition, whenever the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) changes, the sound volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is reproduced at the sound volume after the change.

  At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge display indicates by the gauge display which one of the current set values is among “1” to “5” which is the range of the player set values. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 166C) is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is reduced. The person setting value is kept at “1” (the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is kept at “20”). Therefore, even when the player setting value is “1”, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel “ It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to "0". The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player set value is "5".

  On the other hand, when the starting winning combination occurs and the big hit determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the decorative symbol SZ changes in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of change pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and at the same time, an effect sound matched with the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this point, in the sound volume adjustment processing according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 166 (A) (period in which a demonstration display etc. can be performed) but also the variation in symbols according to the big hit determination when the game is started. Even during the execution period, acceptance by the player is permitted. For example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, it is configured to enable setting change.

  That is, FIG. 166 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice with the reach effect being performed in the state shown in FIG. 166 (B). In the first operation of them, the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is “60” which is 20 times of those While the setting is changed to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at "80" which is the volume after the change, and in the second operation, player setting is made. The value is changed from “4” to “5”, and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed to “80” to “100” which is 20 times of those. Volume adjustment completed at "100" which is the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, among the “1” to “5” which is the range of the player set value. A second volume value display OH2 indicating which one of the current setting values is displayed by the gauge display is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This makes it possible to clarify which setting value is currently set with respect to “1” to “5”, which is a range of player setting values, even in a stressed situation in which more important effects appear. An object of the present invention is to prevent an operation error such as repeated execution of the operation on the effect selection right button 332 although the player set value is “5” which is the maximum value. In the gauge display, numerical value ranges of “1” to “5” are displayed steadily in blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased or decreased according to the change in the player set value. Is displayed to indicate the current player setting value.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 166 (D), the second volume value display OH2 is operated from when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 166 (C). After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the screen is hidden, and thereafter, the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if it is an operation in a mode in which no change occurs in the player setting value (an operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is “5” of the maximum value), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which no change occurs in the player setting value (an operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is “5” of the maximum value) When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. As a result, it is more suitably prompted that an operation mistake such as an operation to the right for effect selection right button 332 is repeatedly performed does not occur even though the player set value is “5” of the maximum value. become.

  On the other hand, FIG. 167 shows that door open detection is generated during the symbol variation execution period and processing regarding the notification sound corresponding to this is executed, the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment accompanying a thing.

  The situation shown in FIG. 167 (A) is the situation before symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 166 (A). In such a situation, when the starting winning combination occurs and a big hit determination is made, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), the result or variation of the big hit determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 166 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and at the same time, an effect sound matched with the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), the door open detection belonging to the second notification group is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing regarding the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to this is executed More specifically, loop processing (30 seconds) to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ The door is open ”and the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is executed.

  Further, as described above, during the fluctuation period of the symbol, when the door open detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the process related to the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to this is executed, in the first volume suppression mode Informing processing under notification progressing processing is performed to suppress the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), although the player set value is maintained as “3” as in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (A), the effect is produced The output volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to a first predetermined specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original value (20 times the player set value), The contents of the presentation are developed under the volume value.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first specification is performed when an operation is performed on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while such effect development lower notification processing is performed. The output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound that has been lowered to a value (here "10") is not variable but is maintained, while the player's set value for the volume (player's set value) Accept the change acceptance of itself, when the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is finished, to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations so far are reflected It is as mentioned above that it is made to make a batch change.

  That is, FIG. 167 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice with the reach effect being performed in the state shown in FIG. 167 (B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the original numerical value (game It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, "10") lower than the set value (20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is generated until the above-mentioned effect progressing notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is ended. Is not changed, and the presentation content is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the first specification Since the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output since the value (here, “10”) is maintained, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the sound of the volume adjustment completion is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changing from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” among “1” to “5” which is a range of player set values, While being executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, the numerical value is also changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has been changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" which is the player set value range, and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

  After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guide display OAH is being executed again, and processing regarding notification sound 4 (door opening) and presentation progress down notification processing (output volume up to a specific value Upon completion of the process of decreasing), as shown in FIG. 167 (D), to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations up to that point are reflected in response to the completion of the process. Make a batch change. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation, and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect development lower notification process. Because it is changing, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is originally "80" according to the first operation from the first specific value (here "10"), the second operation The first specific value (here, “10”) is to be collectively changed to “100” in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  As described above, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player's set value) even during the period during which the effect progressing notification process is being executed, the effect progressing notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game. In addition, the volume value (sound volume of the audible sound) is set and changed over multiple steps immediately after the effect development lower notification processing is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound at that time causes a shortage or a lack of available channels. The occurrence of such an event is also suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this explanation example, when the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed at once (“10” → “100”) along with completion of the notification processing of the progress of effects, a change occurs in the output sound volume. Even though the volume adjustment completion sound channel assignment does not do itself. According to such a configuration, in particular, despite the fact that the in-progress under-reporting process based on the false detection and the notification by the hall side convenience (such as opening the door) is finally finished, the appropriate rendering is performed due to the shortage of empty channels. Can be suitably suppressed.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the magnetic abnormality and the door opening are exemplified as the specific state, but the process of notification of the progress of the development progress and the door opening occur in the state where the magnetic abnormality occurs. The termination condition of the process may be different for the in-progress notification process under the state of effect.

  For example, first, with regard to the notification process of effect development under the state where the door is open, when the door is closed or when a predetermined time has passed since the door was open (the door was continued to open ) As well as to be terminated. However, in any case, when the output volume (volume of the audible sound) is changed collectively (for example, “10” → “100”), the channel of the volume adjustment complete sound although the output volume changes. It is desirable not to assign itself.

  On the other hand, the notification processing of the effect development under the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred should not be ended only by the end of the magnetic abnormality state, but be continued until the RAM clear or the power off occurs. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (sound volume of the audible sound) is collectively changed (for example, “10” → “100”) when the clear from the RAM or the return from the power-off occurs. Even if there is a change in the output volume, it is desirable not to perform the channel assignment of the volume adjustment complete sound itself.

  In addition, in the process of notification of the progress of effect development in the state where the door is open, in the process of notification of the process of progress in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred, the display is shown when the player setting value is changed. When the player setting value is changed, the display may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that the end conditions are different between the notification processing under development progress in the state in which the door is open and the notification processing under presentation progress in the state in which the magnetic abnormality is generated. become.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume adjustment can be performed also by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob is mainly performed by the hole side, it is impossible to output the volume adjustment completion sound (channel assignment) triggered by the volume adjustment by the knob. It is more desirable in order to allow extra free channels.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, in addition to the buttons for volume adjustment (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332), various effects provided in the pachinko machine 1 Lamps (lamps and the like that are subject to control by the peripheral control board 1510 and provided for rendering, etc., and game lamps such as special drawing LEDs to be controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from brightness setting Of the brightness adjustment buttons (brightness increase button, brightness decrease button, etc.), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button is operated, the player determines the brightness applied to the various effect lamps. It is possible to execute a process of changing the setting value (player setting value). In addition, when the player setting value related to brightness is lowered or raised, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value according to the setting value applied to the volume at that time. I have to. In addition, the luminance of such a rendering lamp can be set and changed by the operation of the player in any of the state in which the symbol is not changed and the state in which the symbol is changed.

  In addition, it is desirable to assign a channel on the same conditions as the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound for the brightness adjustment completion sound, and in this case, even if the setting value for the luminance is changed, the brightness adjustment confirmation There will be a situation where the channel assignment of sound itself is not performed, and a situation where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and outputted. According to such a configuration, it is necessary to grasp the current situation (for example, whether the above-described presentation progressing downward notification process is being executed or the like) when changing the set value relating to the luminance instead of the volume. Will be made possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a sound different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

  The player setting value related to the volume is set to a specific value (for example, "3") without operation by the player when a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since being controlled by the demonstration screen) is satisfied. It may be changed. However, when the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, “3”) without an operation by the player, a display (a first sound volume value display OH1 or a second sound volume) indicating which the current setting value is. If there is a situation in which the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is falling, it is a situation that the value display OH2) and the output (channel assignment) applied to the volume adjustment completion sound are not performed either. It is more desirable to make it hard to recognize.

  In addition, when a new volume adjustment is performed when the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment being performed is in the output state, the volume adjustment sound that is in the output state even if there is a vacant channel is Assigning and outputting (overwriting and outputting) a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel in the form of halfway termination is more preferable in order to allow room for the number of empty channels. desirable.

  Also, when the operation to the side where the volume is increased is performed even though the player set value is at the maximum value, or to the side where the volume is reduced although the player set value is at the minimum value. When the operation of is performed further, even if there is a vacant channel, the volume adjustment completion sound is not allocated to the channel and this is not output, so that the number of vacant channels has a margin. More desirable above. At this time, although the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, a display indicating the current setting value (the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2) is displayed. It is also good.

  Although the volume adjustment by the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is permitted, it may be possible to generate a period in which the volume adjustment performed by the player's operation is not allowed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 168, when the state detection occurred in FIG. 167 is not door opening but magnetic abnormality, the process for the notification sound according to this is executed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment accompanying right button 332 being operated.

  The situation shown in FIG. 168 (A) is the situation before the start of symbol variation, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (A). In such a situation, when the starting winning combination occurs and a big hit determination is made, as shown in FIG. 168 (B), the result or variation of the big hit determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and at the same time, an effect sound matched with the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), during the execution period of the symbol variation, the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed according to this. Specifically, loop processing (60 seconds) to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetic detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  In addition, as described above, during the fluctuation period of the symbol, when the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the occurrence of the magnetic detection that occurs in the first notification group is performed, the second volume control mode is performed Informing processing under production progress is performed to suppress the output sound volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), although the player set value is maintained as “3” as in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (A), the effect is produced The output volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to a second predetermined specific value (here, “0”) which is lower than the original value (20 times the player set value). The contents of the presentation are developed under the volume value (in this case, mute).

  In this respect, even when the process for notifying the progress of the effect on the lower side according to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, the second specific value (here, “0” is selected when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed. The output volume of the effect sound reduced to “)” (volume of the audible sound (silence here)) is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) itself The change acceptance of is permitted, and when the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is ended, to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations so far are reflected As described above, the batch change is made.

  That is, FIG. 168 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice with the reach effect being performed in the state shown in FIG. 168 (B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the original numerical value (game It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) lower than the user's set value (20 times the predetermined value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is generated until the above-mentioned effect progressing notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is ended. Is not changed, and the presentation content is developed with the volume of the second specific value.

  At this time, among the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is the second specification Since the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output since the value (here, “0”) is maintained, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the sound of the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changing from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” among “1” to “5” which is a range of player set values, While being executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, the numerical value is also changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has been changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" which is the player set value range, and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

  Incidentally, in this example of the explanation, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in the non-detected state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output sound volume of the presentation sound (sound volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until the predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection Informing process lower notification processing for suppressing the is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection is performed while the volume adjustment guide display OAH is being executed again, and the process for notifying the progress of presentation progress (specify the output volume When the process of reducing the value to the end is completed, as shown in FIG. 168 (D), in response to the end of the process, the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations up to that point are reflected. Make a batch change. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation, and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect development lower notification process. Since it is changing, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is originally “80” according to the first operation from the second specific value (here “0”), the second operation The second specific value (here, "0") is to be collectively changed to "100" in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  In addition, when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the door opening is executed, the game board side effect display device is also in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (D). The display (in this case, “magnetic detection”) in the display area of 1600 and the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are still executed. There is. That is, in the notification processing according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is ended, the effect sound deviates from the suppression target while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, according to the player setting value. In the notification process according to the door opening, while the notification sound is ended, the effect sound remains the suppression target while the notification by the in-liquid crystal display and the notification by the lamp are continued while the notification processing according to the door opening is reflected. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, even when the magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player's set value) by the player is permitted even during the period when the effect development lower notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game until the informing processing lower notification processing ends. In addition, the volume value (sound volume of the audible sound) is set and changed over multiple steps immediately after the effect development lower notification processing is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound at that time causes a shortage or a lack of available channels. The occurrence of such an event is also suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this explanatory example, the output volume is also output when the output volume (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed at once ("0" → "100") with the completion of the notification processing under the effect development due to the magnetic abnormality. Even though there is a change in the volume, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed itself. According to such a configuration, it is not possible to enjoy the appropriate presentation due to the lack of the vacant channel, even though the presentation progressing downward notification process caused by the false detection is finally finished. Can be suitably suppressed.

  As shown in Fig. 155, for the alarm sound according to the door opening such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" and the alarm sound according to the magnetic anomaly such as "the booboo magnetism was detected" as shown in FIG. Since “1” (0x1FF) is set to the third byte of the value, playback is always performed at the volume set with the initial value regardless of the player set value.

  In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is executed, the notification processing is not executed, so during the execution of such notification, the player is set Both the value and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) can be varied as appropriate. However, since “1” (0x1FF) is set to the third byte of the volume initial value as shown in FIG. 155 for these notification sounds 6 and 7 as well, regardless of the player setting value, It always plays back at the volume set with the initial value.

  Among the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, "1" is not set to the third byte of the volume initial value. It may be included in the target of volume adjustment by the player.

  Moreover, about each processing demonstrated in FIG. 167 and FIG. 168, the state detection not only during the execution period of symbol variation, but before the symbol variation is started, and in the form across the timing of the start and end of symbol variation Even when the notification process according to is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

  Also, in each process described in FIG. 167 and FIG. 168, after the in-progress under-notification process is ended, as in the case in which the in-progress under-informing process is started, effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, whenever the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) changes, the sound volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “P!”) Is reproduced at the sound volume after the change.

  Moreover, although the suppression mode of the effect sound in the period in which the in-progress development processing is performed is different between the process described in FIG. 167 and the process described in FIG. 168, the suppression mode is not necessarily limited. It does not need to be different, and the output sound volume of the presentation sound (the audible sound in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed As described above, the process of suppressing the volume of

  In addition, in the announcement progress under notification processing, although it will suppress the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of various game sounds, the game ball is in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 among these game sounds. Some game sounds such as a sound reproduced in response to winning (prize sound) may be reproduced with the volume set as the initial value without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hole side to easily grasp whether or not the game is continued despite the occurrence of the abnormal state as the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, a part of the sound such as a sound (winning sound) to be reproduced in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 when the effect progressing lower notification processing is being executed. It is desirable that the game sound be reproduced as a special sound that can not be output when the in-progress under-notification processing is not executed.

  As described above, in FIG. 155 to FIG. 168, there is no space in the channel by adopting a channel saving control structure that enables notification of abnormal content etc. appropriately with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (The situation where the number of free channels is 0) It was proposed to apply a technical device in terms of how to make it difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, a situation (a situation in which the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs in a situation where there is no vacancy in a channel to which a presentation effect sound (a production sound) is assigned. There is still concern over the appearance of the above unintended sound output aspect.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the technical sound channel assignment also has various technical features before the occurrence of a situation where there are no channels available (a situation where the number of available channels is 0). I am trying to devise a device. Hereinafter, various technical devices applied to the output of the effect sound will be sequentially described. In addition, when adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1 concerned, it is not necessarily adopted about the control structure of the above-mentioned channel saving type which enables an alarm content etc. to be appropriately notified only by a single channel regarding various alarm sounds. You do not have to. Further, in each of the examples described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for any of the notification sound and the effect sound. In addition, when the automatic channel system is adopted, the control based on the above-mentioned priority may not necessarily be adopted, and a process of discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. In addition, the examples described below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Channel reservation process]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as "the act of praying by holding the hand over the pachinko machine 1" or "button operation" has been performed. Detection is made possible by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined sound does not show any degree of expectation such as a sound corresponding to silent data consisting only of silent sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By assigning a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is maintained so as not to be used by other sounds. On the other hand, while channel reservation processing is being performed in this way, even if special rendering conditions such as a big hit finalization rendering effect or a pre-reading rendering effect are established as a result of the game ball being received in the specific winning combination, for example At this time, the special sound corresponding to the effect is not assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation processing to end, it is possible to execute an effect of assigning a special sound to a channel and reproducing the channel (post notification effect).

  That is, in this case, at least one of the channels to which special sound can be assigned is pre-secured (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any degree of expectation due to a specific action by the player. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where it is not possible to output a special sound due to a lack of channels despite the fact that a special result is obtained in the judgment according to the winning.

  As for the special sound, for example, in addition to the jackpot decision sound that is executed only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination according to the winning, a highly expected presentation mode (for example, a jackpot determination based on the jackpot determination according to the prize) , A high expectation notification sound to be executed when a high expectation notification effect to be performed during reach effect execution, etc. is selected, or when a predetermined determination result is obtained by a predetermination determination according to a winning combination Although it is possible to illustrate the pre-read notification sound etc. which are executed as an effect, the point is that when a special judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the predetermined judgment means according to the winning, it is assigned to the channel and output What is necessary is

  FIG. 169 shows that when a game ball is won in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, prior to outputting a special sound (for example, quein) matched with a so-called pre-reading effect as a "special sound" The channel to which the special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound is not output (more accurately, a determination to output the special sound (determination to perform a pre-reading effect) has not been made yet) It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation processing secured beforehand from time to time.

First, prior to describing an example of the channel reservation process, first, general pre-reading effects which are known techniques will be briefly described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 has a winning, the predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning. First and second starting hole winning processing (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. In this first and second starting hole winning process (FIG. 104: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won in the starting port (first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004). As described above, when it is determined that the player has won a prize, the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side is increased by one.

  In addition, as described above, in the first and second starting opening winning process (FIG. 104: steps S5231 to S5234), a prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the starting opening side that has won is also executed (FIG. 105: Step S5245, FIG. 106: Step S5255).

  Here, as described above, the first special view side previewing effect is an effect that indicates in advance the determination result of the first special symbol (or the degree of expectation thereof) before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. is there. In this first special view prefetching process, information necessary for determining whether or not the prefetching rendering is performed, rendering contents, etc. on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information related to the drop for prefetching determination, and the symbol type for prefetching determination) Information, information on variation pattern numbers for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information relating to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, the second special view side previewing effect, as described above, suggests in advance the determination result (or the expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. It is an effect that In this second special view prefetching process, information (such as crash information, symbol type, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) required to determine the presence or absence of preview rendering effects and the contents of effects on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  That is, in peripheral control board 1510, determination processing as to whether or not a jackpot has been won, and variation in the design thereof are not digested, and information is obtained from the above-described read-ahead command when they are put on hold ( Based on the information related to the prefetching effect on the first special view side and the information related to the prefetching effect on the second special view side, an expectation as to whether or not the jackpot determination that is put on hold will obtain a special result It is possible to carry out pre-reading effects that suggest the degree in advance.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a start winning combination has occurred, and performs control relating to a pending display or a pre-reading effect according to the starting winning combination when in this state. And after this, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped gaming situation, the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, fluctuation processing, big hit game processing, small hit establishment shown in FIG. Perform one of the processing. Among them, in the control relating to the pre-reading effect, for example, a new hold display corresponding to the start winning combination in any of a plurality of modes (for example, a relatively low expectation blue and a relatively high expectation red) It is determined whether to perform a specific pre-reading effect that suggests the pre-reading expectation level depending on whether it is displayed, and an aspect according to the result of the determination (for example, when it is determined that the blue, red, or pre-reading effect is not performed In the normal display mode of (1), the process of performing the suspension display is performed. As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the pending display is digested, a pre-reading effect in which the jackpot expectation is previously suggested by the display mode is executed.

  By the way, in such pre-reading effect, when making a pending display (including a big hit confirmation pending display) appear in a mode with a high degree of expectation, an output of a special sound (for example, quein) may be performed according to the pre-reading execution. There are many. However, since such special sound (prefetch effect) is reproduced at the winning timing of the gaming ball which occurs irregularly, winning of the gaming ball occurs at timing when there is no space in the channel, and it is determined in the prefetching determination. If there is a win, the player can recognize that the special indication is not reproduced even though the pre-reading judgment is won, and the hold display appears in a mode (blue or red) with high expectation. It is feared that the game interest will decline without it.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 169, as described above, prior to making the game ball win a prize in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and outputting a special sound (pre-reading effect), the special sound is Since the channel to which it can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound is not output (more accurately, a determination to output the special sound (determination to perform a pre-reading effect) has not been made yet) It is possible to execute the channel reservation process secured in the.

  For example, at timing tY10 shown in FIG. 169, the number of big hit determinations (pending number) that are currently placed on hold status is 0, and a normal background display appears in the display area of game board side effect display device 1600. If the player is in a situation where the change display of the decorative symbol is being performed under the game, the player usually wins the game ball in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. Play the game (handle operation) to be played. As a result, when the game balls are won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, up to four big hit judgments are put on hold according to those winnings, and those big hit judgments are Every time the game is put on hold, a process relating to a hold display or pre-reading effect according to the winning is performed.

  Here, as a pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, the first winning combination (first hold), the second winning combination (in the order of winning to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004) Assuming that a second hold), a third prize (third hold) and a fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, processing relating to pre-reading effect is performed at each timing at which the hold occurs. Then, when a pre-reading effect is performed by winning the pre-reading determination, the special sound (for example, quein) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the pre-reading determination is made by winning). Will cause a pending display to appear.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being executed is also the first prize (first hold), the second prize (for example, in the winning order to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004). Assuming that a second hold), a third prize (third hold) and a fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, processing relating to pre-reading effect is performed at each timing at which the hold occurs. However, when a pre-reading effect is performed by winning pre-reading determination, the special sound (for example, quein) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the timing of winning), but this is maintained in the execution waiting state After waiting for the channel targeted for the channel reservation process to become empty, the special sound (for example, quein) is output. The hold display having a specific mode may be made to appear at the timing of outputting the special sound (for example, quein), or may be made to appear at the timing when the hold made in the pre-reading determination occurs. Good. However, in the case where the hold display having a specific mode is made to appear at the timing when the hold that has won the pre-reading determination occurs, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being performed and the channel reservation process are not being performed. In any of the pre-reading effects, it is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red) can be made to appear as a specific aspect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held in front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (not shown) (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor). Detects this as an object, and is triggered to start channel reservation processing.

  For example, at timing tY11 shown in FIG. 169, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, a prayer effect mode is generated based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, a prayer mode background display is performed in which "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and "countdown of A process of assigning "voice" to a predetermined channel and reproducing it is performed. The voice of the countdown is, for example, started from "30" and is ended when it is counted down every second and becomes "0". Further, even during the period when the prayer mode background display is displayed in this manner, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

  However, the player holds his hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for “Shrine torii (prayer mode background display)” in such a display area and “voice of countdown” in a predetermined channel. It can be generated as a trigger (detection by a sensor) as a trigger only by itself, and it is not related to the contents of the rendering (representation that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the symbol variation under execution, It does not depend on the result of the big hit judgment at all. Therefore, the display or sound generated when the player holds the hand may be changed to another content as appropriate, but by performing such processing, the predetermined time (30 seconds) can be obtained. The channel can be maintained in the use state (in this case, the use state by the "countdown sound" not showing any expectation) until the predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses. It becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which another sound is assigned to a predetermined channel that does not know when it will end (channel reservation processing).

  Then, in this way, the player plays the game ball so that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation processing is being executed elapses. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 169, the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (third hold), and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occurred. Then, processing relating to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the suspension occurs. However, as described above, while the "countdown voice" is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the determination result (prefetch winning) indicating that the prefetch effect is performed as a result of the determination according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, the special sound (for example, quein) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and is stored as a waiting state. In this way, the special sound (for example, quein) which has been made to wait for execution is output as a post-notification sound that is output later than at the time of winning at timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from timing tY11. Become.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated during the period (timing tY11 to tY12) from when the player holds his hand up and starts reproduction (channel reservation processing) of "countdown voice" by his / her intention and is ended. If there is no, or if a special prize has not been obtained but a special judgment result has not been obtained (if it was not won in the pre-reading effect), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "countdown sound" ends is reached The sound is not played back.

  According to such a configuration, during the period from when the player holds up his hand and starts the reproduction (channel reservation process) of "countdown voice" by his / her intention until it is ended (timing tY11 to tY12) If a special winning result (pre-read winning) may be obtained by making a winning combination and the determination according to the winning combination, the special sound (cuein) is not output at that time, and the "countdown voice" It is ended and it will be executed as a notice effect after aiming at timing when a channel becomes vacant. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation where a special sound can not be output due to the absence of an idle channel despite the fact that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained. In addition, even if a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (cuein) according to this is a timing at which an empty space occurs in at least one channel. Since it is intended to reproduce by aiming at tY12, if it is confirmed whether or not the special sound (cuein) is generated at timing tY12, a special judgment result (look-ahead in a relatively long time of timing tY11 to tY12) It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the winning) has been obtained.

  In the case of outputting a special sound (cuein) as such a post-notification sound, reproduction may be performed by allocating to any channel among the channels in the idle state at the timing tY12. However, if the special sound (cuin) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the “countdown voice” has been assigned, channel reservation processing and an announcement effect according to that are performed for only one channel. It can be said to be beneficial in that it can be realized and the range of effects can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, for prayer mode background display in which “Torii of the shrine” is displayed as a background image, timing tY12 when reproduction of “voice of countdown” is ended, and reproduction of special sound (cuein) are performed. The display is continued even after the end timing has arrived. This is based on the fact that those who request such a channel reservation process tend to hold their hands to cause the channel reservation process to occur again each time the number of reservations decreases. From the point of view that it seems that there is a benefit when the hand of the “Shrine torii” is displayed as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be reproduced at a later notification timing is higher). The prayer mode background display is continuously performed until a specific condition not related to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, a release operation by a button). However, in fact, even if "the shrine's torii" is displayed as a background image, the player holds his hand even if "the shrine's torii" is not displayed as a background image. When this is detected, the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the allocated state for the predetermined time is only performed by the predetermined sound (voice of countdown), so the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "voice of countdown" is ended. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuine) as the post notification sound is ended.

  In addition, when the player holds his hand again and is detected during the period from timing tY11 to tY12, the "countdown voice" playback time from the second detection until the predetermined time (here 30 seconds) elapses. May be extended, and a special sound corresponding to the prefetch win may be output when the timing comes.

  In addition, such a prayer effect mode is executed based on the detection of the specific action by the player even when the symbol variation is not in the changing state, as well as when the symbol variation is in the changing state. You may do it. In addition to the action to be detected by the non-contact type sensor, the specific action may be an action to be detected by the contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation.

  However, when the special sound (cuine) is output as such a post-notification sound, the first winning (first hold), the second winning ((quened) as compared to the case where the special sound (cuing) is output at the time of winning. 2nd hold), 3rd win (3rd hold), 4th win (4th hold) It is difficult to grasp whether a special judgment result (prefetch win) has been obtained by hold, so it is win-ahead There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline due to being put on hold without recognizing that the hold is pending. On the other hand, the content to be reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, “Quin”), but the first winning (first hold), the second winning (second holding), the third winning (second It is also conceivable to make the setting differ depending on which hold of 3) hold) and 4th prize (fourth hold) has been selected in advance. However, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the prefetched winning itself by changing the content from the sound (here, “Quin”) reproduced by the prefetching effect when the channel reservation process is not executed. There is concern that it will be lost.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the special judgment result is obtained for the winning at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). In accordance with whether (prefetch winning) is obtained, processing is performed to vary the reproduction time of the special sound (here, “cuein”) started from timing tY12.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 169, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the first winning (preserving first) winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, however, the special sound (here, “Quin”) is reproduced for 3 seconds from timing tY12.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 170, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the second winning (second suspension) winning at a relatively early timing in the period from timing tY11 to tY12. Although assumed, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, the time required to play "Quin" once is 3 seconds, and if the special sound (here, "Quin") is played for 6 seconds, "Quin" is played twice Sound is output in a manner such as "quenching".

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 171, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the third winning (third suspension) winning at a relatively late timing in the period from timing tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play “Quin” once, if “Quin” is played for 9 seconds, “Quin” is 3 It is played back in batches and sounds in the form of "cu-cu-ins" are output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 172, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the fourth winning (fourth hold) winning at an extremely late timing between timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play "Quin" once, if you play special sound (in this case, "Quin") for 12 seconds, "Quin" is 4 It is played back in batches and sounds in the form of “cu-cu-in-cuin” are output.

  According to such a configuration, when the special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that the special determination result (prefetching winning) is obtained between the timings tY11 to tY12. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (prefetched winning) is obtained by a winning that has occurred. In this example, it is suggested that the shorter the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special judgment result (prefetch winning) is obtained by the winning that occurred earlier in the timing tY11 to tY12. In addition, it is suggested that the special judgment result (prefetch winning) is obtained by the winning at the later timing of the timing tY11 to tY12 as the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is longer. .

  In this example, it may be assumed that only the first winning is generated between the timings tY11 and tY12 and a special determination result can be obtained according to the winning, but also in this case, according to the timing at which the winning occurred. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, instead of this, in view of the fact that the number of reservations is limited to four at the maximum, when a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, the special sound is "Quein" 1 regardless of the winning timing. Set the play time of the batch, if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, set the special sound to the play time of "Quin" 2 times regardless of the prize timing, and the special judgment in the third prize If the result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of "Quin" regardless of the winning timing, and if the special judgment result is obtained in the fourth winning, the special sound is regardless of the winning timing May be set to the playback time of "Quin" for 4 times.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading winning is obtained, “cuine” is reproduced as the special sound, but the first determination result (for example, a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when winning. The reproduction content as the special sound may be changed according to which of the low read-ahead winning) and the second determination result (for example, a read-ahead winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained. For example, when a first determination result (for example, a read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation is obtained) is obtained in a pre-read determination when winning a prize, "Quin" is reproduced as a special sound, but a pre-read when a prize is won When the second determination result (predicted winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the determination, if "dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction as to whether or not the pre-reading prize is obtained by winning, the first judgment result (pre-reading prize with a relatively low degree of expectation) and the second judgment result (pre-reading prize with a relatively high degree of expectation) It will also be possible to make a prediction as to which was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound according to the determination result even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173, the first determination result (the read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is made by the look-ahead determination in the first winning (the first hold) winning in the very early timing On the assumption that the second judgment result (predicted winning with a relatively high expectation) is obtained by the prefetching judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) winning at a very late timing. However, in this case, after the special sound is reproduced in the form of "cuin" for 3 seconds from timing tY12, the special sound is reproduced in the form of "docan" for further 9 seconds.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “Quin” mode is 3 seconds, the first prize winning at a very early timing between timings tY11 to tY12 ( It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (the read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained by the prefetch determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself has been performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it is that the prefetching winning was won in the prefetching judgment in the fourth winning (the fourth hold) winning at extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp. Furthermore, in response to the first determination result (the prefetching winning with a relatively low expectation) being obtained by the prefetching determination in the first winning (the first hold) winning at an extremely early timing during the timing tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played back in the manner of "docan" after the completion of one "cuin" played back, second look-ahead judgment in the fourth prize (the fourth hold) It becomes possible to predict that the judgment result (the look-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained.

  Alternatively, when the first determination result (prediction winning on the first special view side) is obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the first start port 2002, "cuein" is reproduced as a special sound and If the second determination result (prediction winning on the second special view side) is obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the second start port 2004, "docan" may be reproduced as a special sound . In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the second starting opening 2004 Depending on the situation, it is desirable to play "Quin" or "Docan" as a special sound.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 173 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “Quin” mode is 3 seconds, the timings tY11 to tY12 are obtained. The first winning (winning with the first hold) winning at an extremely early timing is a winning on the first starting port 2002 side, and the first judgment result (first special view It becomes possible to predict that the look-ahead winning) has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself has been performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it is also pre-read winning even in the look-ahead judgment in the fourth prize winning (the fourth hold) winning at extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp that. Furthermore, in response to the first determination result (prefetch win for the first special view side) being obtained in the prefetch determination in the first winning (the first hold) winning at an extremely early timing during the timing tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played back in the form of "dokan" after one "cuin" played back has been played, the 4th prize (the 4th hold) is the second starting port 2004 side It is possible to predict that the second determination result (prefetch winning on the second special view side) has been obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning combination while the channel reservation process is being performed. In the pre-reading effect, it was decided to illustrate the case where the pre-reading winning is obtained. However, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173, the main point is in the gaming machine where the determination processing is performed when the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening, and the determination processing is special. Channel control (such as channel reservation processing) that can avoid that a channel shortage occurs and can not be output when a special sound is output when a determination result is obtained, which has technical features in itself Therefore, it is obvious that the application example is not necessarily limited to the prefetching in the prefetching effect.

Channel Usage Limit
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of vacant channels is monitored during the progress of the game, and when this number is less than a predetermined number, at least a part of the various game sounds The rate of limiting the execution of processing related to output is made to be high (channel usage restriction). That is, in this case, for at least part of the game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is limited from the stage before the number of empty channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of empty channels approaches 0. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it is possible to make the number of free channels hard to be zero.

  More specifically, in the periphery control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, each time the symbol variation according to the big hit determination in the hold state is digested (every time the starting condition is satisfied), the symbol variation to be digested is Determine the availability of the channel during the execution period. As a result, when there is a vacancy in the channel, the rate at which the channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) is lowered until at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended, and the vacancy of the channel is reduced. When there is no margin in the situation, the rate at which channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) is increased until at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended, and the channel limitation with such symbol variation as one unit is By performing this operation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the number of free channels becomes zero during the execution period of the symbol variation to be determined. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as channel restriction levels, and as the level values become higher, the rate of restricting the execution of processing related to the output of game sound becomes higher.

  FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for the processing relating to the setting of such a channel restriction level.

  Now, in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95), it is determined that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 174, the value of the channel restriction level set previously is reset as the process of step S3101. In addition, about this reset process (step S3101), you may make it carry out, when symbol fluctuation is complete | finished.

  Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the classification of the first half of the variation pattern corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period of the first half of variation (for example, the period from the start of symbol variation to the start of reach effect, Specify "X" which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) with reference to the timing when the channel becomes most vacant in the period from when the fluctuation start to reach the symbol stop and so on) Do. In addition, as the processing of step S3103, based on the type of the presentation pattern of the second half of the fluctuation corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel in the second half of the fluctuation (for example, the period from the start of reach production to the symbol fluctuation stop) Specify "Y" which is the number of free channels (minimum free channel number) based on the timing when the free space is at its lowest.

  However, when the effect pattern in which the symbol is stopped is selected without the reach effect being started from the start of the symbol variation, the symbol variation corresponding to “the second half of the variation” is not performed. In this case, the process of step S3103 is not performed, and the next step process is performed, or the maximum numerical value that can be set as the number “Y” of empty channels in the process of step S3103 (numerical value not subject to channel restriction) Will be set.

  Then, next, as the process of step S3104, "X" specified by the process of step S3102 is compared with "Y" specified by the process of step S3103, and among these "X" and "Y" The channel restriction level is set based on the value of the side where the minimum number of vacant channels is small (the side where there is no margin in the number of vacant channels), at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended. Thus, between the start and the end of the symbol variation to be determined, the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level. It is expected that the number of empty channels will not easily become 0, and it will be expected to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment due to the appearance of an unintended effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in setting the channel restriction level, the “minimum number of free channels” provided for the determination is separately specified in the first half of the fluctuation (step S3102) and the second half of the fluctuation (step S3103). It is supposed to be. This is because the contents of the first half of the change (such as the period from the start of the symbol change to the start of the reach effect) are shared by multiple effect patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.) In many cases, if the minimum number of free channels is specified in units of the first half of fluctuation, it is considered that the amount of data required to specify the minimum number of free channels can be reduced. .

  However, the minimum number of vacant channels to be used for the determination of setting of the channel restriction level may not necessarily be separately identified in the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation, and effects from the start of symbol fluctuation to the stop The number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel is least occupied in the period in which the effect pattern is executed, with the pattern as one unit.

  In addition, the “minimum number of free channels” here is a sound that is automatically generated when the effect pattern (effect content) to be determined advances (a symbol stop related to BGM related or a big hit determination, a big hit determination It indicates how many channels are left as idle when they are assigned to each channel for the corresponding sound effects, etc.). Therefore, a button press sound (a sound accompanying an effect generated based on a button operation, etc.), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (sound associated with winning at a general winning opening), a hold winning sound (first The effect pattern (representation content) to be judged is developed, such as the sound associated with the winning of the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), the common electric effect sound (sound accompanying the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol) These sounds are not included in the judgment of various sounds that are not necessarily executed only by

  FIG. 175 is a view showing values of channel restriction levels set separately for the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3104 and showing an example of restriction contents determined for the channel restriction levels separately .

  As shown in FIG. 175, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a block winning sound (a winning for a general winning opening) among various types of game sounds is first made as a sound to be subjected to channel usage restriction. Sound accompanying a), hold winning sound (sound accompanying a prize to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), general power effect sound (sound accompanying the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol variation in which there is no spare channel available, at least those game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general sound effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) of various types of game sounds. Channel usage limitations may occur.

  More specifically, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "0". That is, in this case, it is in a situation where there is a margin in the vacant channel and it is in the situation where the symbol variation is executed, the channel use restriction target sound (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general sound effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound). None of the above is restricted, and if there is a winning on the general winning opening during execution of the symbol change, a block winning sound is allocated to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and the first starting opening 2002 or the execution of the symbol change If there is a winning on the second starting port 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when the effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the spread according to the effect The effect sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when the volume adjustment is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment completion sound according to this is set to the predetermined vacant channel Ri applied to the be played.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, channel restriction is performed based on the association shown in FIG. Set the level to "1". That is, in this case, there are four sounds (block winning sound, on-hold winning sound, general charge effect sound, volume adjustment completion, etc.) that are subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation with a slight margin in the vacant channel is executed. Among the sounds), the channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when there is a winning on the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation, if this is detected, the winning balls are paid out by the number corresponding to the winning, but the block winning sound is It will process so that it does not allocate to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to play the block winning sound itself without setting the sound generation schedule data according to the winning on the general winning opening.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "2". That is, in this case, four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general sound effect, volume adjustment, etc.) are considered to be subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation is executed with relatively little spare time in the empty channel. Channel completion (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds of block winning sound and hold winning sound among completion sounds). That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the block winning sound described above, when there is a winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 during the execution of the symbol variation, the quantity according to the winning is detected Although the prize balls are paid out for a minute, and the above-mentioned first and second starting opening winning processes are carried out, the processing for holding on hold sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined vacant channel. At this time, it is preferable not to set the sound generation schedule data according to the winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and not to play the reserved winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "3". That is, in this case, there are four sounds (block winning sound, on-hold winning sound, general charge effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation with no margin in the vacant channel is executed. Generate a channel usage limit (100% limit) for all of the sounds). That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on block winning sound described above and the restriction on holding winning sound, even if the effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, this is the case for the general effect sound Will be processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined free channel. In addition, when there is a volume adjustment operation by the player during the execution of the symbol variation, although the volume adjustment according to this is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be allocated to a predetermined vacant channel. It will be. At this time, also for the general effects sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, do not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to them, and do not perform the reproduction for the general effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when a symbol change is made such that the number of vacant channels in the state to which sound is not allocated is less than the predetermined number while the game is progressed, the number of vacant channels is predetermined As compared with the case where symbol variation that is not less than a number is executed, the rate of restricting the execution of processing related to the output of at least a part of various types of game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, with respect to some game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general sound effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound), the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0 Since the execution of related processing is limited, and the rate of execution restriction is increased as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It will be expected that the occurrence of such a situation should be suitably suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, the sound that is the target of channel usage restriction among various types of game sounds is not the most important "effect sound related to the big hit determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but the other "sounds associated with winnings". , “A performance sound related to normal determination”, and “a sound related to volume adjustment”. That is, even if a restriction on the use of the channel is generated during the execution of the symbol variation, the effect on whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation can be suitably executed without being limited. The decrease in the game entertainment when the channel use restriction is applied is suppressed.

  In the above configuration, among the various types of game sounds, a plurality of types of sounds that are considered to be candidates for channel usage restriction are prepared (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general effects sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level increases (as the minimum number of vacant channels decreases as the symbol changes), the number of types of sounds subject to channel usage restriction is increased. However, there is a method to limit the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0 and to increase the rate of execution limitation as the number of free channels decreases. For example, the method described below with reference to FIG. 176 may be adopted.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing another example of separately defined restriction content of the channel restriction level.

  As shown in FIG. 176, in this example, the channel use is determined according to the “minimum free channel number” identified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level identified in the process of step S3104. Make a limited lottery about whether or not to limit. However, here, when a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel usage restriction are not prepared, and a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, volume adjustment completion sound Etc.) is limited to channel use.

  For example, in this example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability that the judgment result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained is 0/100. A restriction process for channel use is not performed on a specific game sound to be restricted (for example, volume adjustment completion sound).

  However, when the channel restriction level is 1 or more, the probability that the judgment result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained is increased as the value becomes larger, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum vacant channel The probability is 25/100 when the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 50/100 when the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), and the channel restriction level is 50/100. The same probability in the case where is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0 and 1) is 100/100. Then, in this alternative example, when a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained, the restriction process concerning the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

  Even with such a configuration, when a symbol change is made such that the number of vacant channels in the state to which sound is not allocated is less than a predetermined number while the game proceeds, the number of vacant channels is equal to The ratio of limiting the execution of the process related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds of the various game sounds is increased compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the predetermined number is executed. That is, in this case, with regard to some game sounds (volume adjustment completion sounds) of the game sounds, there is a restriction to the execution of the process related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. As the number of vacant channels is increased and the execution restriction rate is increased as the number of vacant channels decreases, it is preferable to generate a situation where the number of vacant channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It will be expected to suppress.

  Further, according to the above configuration, by checking whether or not the specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the execution period of the symbol variation, the minimum vacant channel in the execution period of the symbol variation It becomes possible to infer the possibility that the number will run out, and it becomes possible to promote game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) commensurate with the inference.

  In the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 175 and 176, after the determination processing for various advance effects is executed based on the effect pattern, the minimum number of available channels is specified from the occurrence status of those advance effects, and the specified minimum available space Although the channel restriction level is set based on the number of channels, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is possible to assume in advance for each effect pattern what amount of sound will be simultaneously channel-assigned at the same time during the symbol variation period, so the channel shortage occurrence probability is classified in advance separately for the effect pattern Keep it. Then, when the rendering pattern is determined, the channel restriction ratio may be higher as the probability of occurrence of the channel shortage in which the rendering pattern is classified in advance is higher. That is, in this case, when a special type of effect pattern that tends to use many channels simultaneously is executed, there is actually no button operation or various winnings are not generated, and many channels are not used and empty channels. Even if there is a margin in the number of events, there will be situations where the execution of processing related to the output of game sound may be restricted while the symbol variation is being executed, but the empty channel can be achieved by simply performing the processing. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to avoid that the number of objects becomes 0, and even when such processing is performed, "the number of free channels in the pattern change is relatively When the number is low, the rate at which the process related to the output of the game sound is limited is high, and when the number of free channels in the symbol change is relatively large, it is related to the output of the game sound It is only a phenomenon that the rate at which the execution of the processing is limited is reduced, and there is no particular sense of discomfort from the player's side. become. Also, in this case, by checking whether the sound is limited, it becomes possible to estimate the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to be short of channels.

  In addition, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and their alternative examples, channel restriction with symbol variation as one unit is executed, but the channel is performed with the contents of presentation being developed within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied to perform channel restriction in accordance with the channel restriction level in each case. Alternatively, when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, a channel restriction level is made unchanged at a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations when a predetermined limitation condition is satisfied, and the channel limitation level is set. Channel restriction may be performed accordingly.

  By the way, in the configuration exemplified in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and their other examples, the sound that is the target of channel usage restriction is not the most important “promotional sound related to the big hit determination” in the pachinko machine 1, but other than that. We decided to adopt only "sound associated with winning", "arrangement sound related to normal judgment" and "sound related to volume adjustment". However, since these sounds include those whose frequency of occurrence is lower than that of the effect sound, it is important to consider the jackpot determination in order to realize the restriction processing that can secure the empty channel more effectively. It is desirable that “rendering sound” be adopted as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-mentioned restriction processing is performed on "the effect sound relating to the big hit determination", there is a concern that the effect sound may not be reproduced, and the effect may be reduced to a lack of excitement. If the jackpot symbol is stopped in some situations, the interest in playing the game may be reduced.

  In this point, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, among the “arrangement sounds related to the big hit determination”, only the “arrangement related to symbol variation in the pending state and to be digested in the future” If the channel use of sound is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 176 or another example), for the effect related to the result of the symbol variation being executed Therefore, it is possible to adopt an effect sound with a high frequency of occurrence as a target of restriction without any restriction.

  For example, when a winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 occurs during a period in which symbol variation is being executed and the corresponding big hit determination is put on hold, the hold is normally made A determination process is performed as to whether or not pre-reading effect is to be performed in relation to the state of the big hit determination. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a pre-reading effect (effect display, effect sound) is suggested to suggest in advance the degree of anticipation as to whether the held jackpot determination is to be a big hit. Become.

  However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxieties (such as a state where the minimum number of vacant channels is 0 or 1 and symbol variation is in progress), the channel usage is restricted. If the effect sound according to the effect on the symbol variation to be digested in the future is targeted, winnings on the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 occur and the big hit judgment according to this is suspended Even if it is put in the state, the judgment processing for the pre-reading effect itself regarding the big hit judgment being put on hold is not executed, so that both the pre-reading effect and the sound according to this are not performed. In this case, the pre-reading effect is not only the hold change in the game board side effect display device 1600 but also a predetermined effect change (action sound or the like according to the pre-reading determination) in the effect means (sub liquid crystal, lamp, etc.) different from this. Not only the hold change in the game board side effect display device 1600 but also effect means (such as a sub-liquid crystal or a lamp) different from the hold change in the game board side effect display device 1600 when it is executed as causing It is more desirable from the viewpoint of suppressing a sense of incongruity (rendering deviation) when a specific effect sound is not allocated as a measure against channel shortage, so that this is not performed even for a predetermined effect change.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of channels used increases and anxiety occurs in the vacancy, the channel portion to be used for rendition relating to the symbol variation in the future which is not the symbol variation in progress is being executed Because it becomes possible to supply to the production sound regarding the fluctuation of the character, the production sound with high frequency of occurrence can be restricted without any adverse effect on the production related to the result of the symbol fluctuation under execution You will be able to In addition, the effect to be restricted is only the "representation concerning the symbol change in the future in the unexecuted state", and even if the symbol change is subjected to restriction, it will be restricted if it is reserve digested in the future Since the effect during symbol fluctuation not being turned on (content of the effect according to the effect pattern) is always executed, the decrease in the amusement of the game due to the restriction of the effect is suitably suppressed.

  Further, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 or another example thereof, a process of limiting a specific sound not to be output when “predetermined effect condition” causing concern in the number of empty channels is satisfied is performed. did. However, even under the condition that "predetermined effect conditions" are not established and there is no concern about the number of free channels, processing that restricts specific sounds not to be output under predetermined conditions May be performed. For example, when a specific condition different from the "predetermined effect condition" is satisfied, an effect state (rendering period) in which a specific sound can not be output over a plurality of symbol changes is generated. According to such a configuration, a special rendering state (rendering period) in which a margin occurs in the number of vacant channels appears over a plurality of symbol variations, and in the special rendering state (rendering period), only that amount It will be possible to perform other productions more positively.

  In addition, when "rendering sound related to the big hit judgment" is the target of restriction, if only the sound of the effect (display of the effect, sound of the effect) is the target of restriction (no sound output), it will fall into the effect lacking in excitement In the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and there is anxieties about the vacancy, the player wins and the jackpot determination is put on hold Judgment processing for pre-reading effect When this itself is not executed, it is made not to perform both the effect display and the effect sound regarding pre-reading effect, therefore special result (pre-reading winning) is not obtained in pre-reading judgment The situation is the same as when playing (pre-displayed when pre-read effects are not executed), and it is preferable to suitably avoid a decrease in game interest due to the execution of effects lacking in excitement It becomes possible way.

  It should be noted that when the effect sound related to the big hit determination is targeted for restriction, the judgment process for the pre-read effect when the winning and the big hit determination is put on hold does not execute itself, but the effect display and effect regarding the pre-read effect Although I did not do both with the sound, it is not limited to this. For example, when "play sound related to the big hit determination" is a target of restriction, the judgment process about the pre-read effect is performed when winning a prize, but even if a special result is obtained until the specific timing in the symbol change comes Restricts both the effect display and the effect sound regarding the pre-read effect without executing them, and when the specific timing during symbol variation comes, only the restriction to the effect display among the effect display and the effect sound To do this. That is, in this case, the effect display relating to the pre-read effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing) different from when "the effect sound relating to the big hit determination" is not the restriction target (at the time of normal) Since the pre-reading effect is executed after showing as if the result (pre-reading winning) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is performed while suppressing the decrease in the game interest due to not outputting the effect sound according to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to carry out suitably.

In addition, as a process regarding future effects in a situation where channel use is restricted, · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Until it is done, both the effect display and effect sound concerning the pre-read effect are not executed but these are limited, and when the specific timing in the symbol fluctuation comes, for the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound A configuration in which only the restriction is released and this is performed is taken as the first restricted processing.
・ When the prize is won, the judgment processing for the pre-read effect is not executed, and the game is progressed when the second limited process is to execute neither the effect display for the pre-read effect nor the effect sound. Among them, when the symbol variation is performed such that the number of empty channels in a state where sound is not allocated is less than a predetermined number, compared to the case where the symbol variation is not performed that the number of empty channels is less than a predetermined number. To increase the rate at which either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing is executed, and the symbol variation in the execution state when the first restricted processing is performed Let the expected value of the number of channels used in “A” be the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in execution when the second limited processing was performed “B” When it As the relationship is relation of "A <B", it is more desirable that the one of those first restriction under treatment and the second restriction under processing is executed. That is, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and a greater anxiety arises due to the vacancy, both the effect display and the effect sound are subject to restriction instead of the first limited processing under which only the effect sound is the object of restriction. Since the ratio under which the channel restriction is applied is increased by the second limited processing described above, it is expected to more suitably suppress anxiety when the number of channels used increases.

  In addition, as described above, the sounds assigned to the limited channels are the first group sound in which the effect volume can be adjusted by the operation acceptance by the player, and the effect volume can not be adjusted by the operation acceptance by the player. And at least distinguishable from the second group sound (error sound, etc.). In this respect, when the "predetermined effect condition" causing concern in the number of empty channels is satisfied, it is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 that only the sound distinguished in the first group sound is limited. It is desirable to perform processing when it occurs appropriately.

  Further, the limited channels are divided into a plurality of groups including at least a first channel group to which a presentation sound can be assigned and a second channel group to which a notification sound (error sound) different from the presentation sound can be assigned. If the number of vacant channels in the state where no sound is assigned in the first channel group is reduced to less than the predetermined number, the execution period of the symbol effect display is vacant in the first channel group. Compared with the execution period of the symbol effect display where the number of channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number, the ratio that the specific sound is not newly allocated to the channels of the first channel group is high Thus, when an error occurs, it is possible to execute the processing only for the first channel group. And performing the definitive processing more reliably desirable in terms of both possible to reduce the processing load.

  Further, as described above, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 or another example thereof, “the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of vacant channels in a state in which no sound is assigned is reduced to less than a predetermined number Compared with the execution period of the symbol effect display where the number of channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number, the ratio of the specific effect sound not being newly assigned to the channel to the effect state being high is " There is a feature. In this respect, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as “a effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel”, As soon as the execution period of the symbol effect display is ended, the "state of effect in which a specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel" can also be canceled (ended). On the other hand, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as “a state of effect that the specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel”, Make sure that the rendering state (a rendering state in which a specific rendering sound is not newly assigned to a channel) is always continued over a plurality of symbol variations including the symbol rendering display even after the symbol rendering display is finished. It is desirable to According to such a configuration, the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number is treated as "effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel". Although the ratio is low, once this is processed, the effect state is not completed and is prolonged, and in the meantime, no specific effect sound can be output. That is, in this case, a special effect (when the symbol effect display indicates that the number of vacant channels is reduced to less than a predetermined number), when "a effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel" appears. Can be added, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, in an effect state where a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel, a specific image that can be displayed only when in the effect state may be made displayable. According to such a configuration, by displaying the specific image, it can be recognized that “the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly allocated to the channel” is present.

  In addition, regarding a specific image, if it is possible to appear each at a plurality of timings in one symbol variation and display as an image of different contents (appearance, form, etc.) at each timing, any of a plurality of timings Even if there is an image of content (appearance, form, etc.) that the player has not grasped, or if there is an image of other contents (appearance, form, etc.), the image is displayed As a result, it becomes possible to more reliably recognize that "the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel" is present.

[Channel special open processing]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced. A process may be performed to end the assignment of the specific gaming sound to the channel in a state where the volume is reduced (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is finished, it is possible to execute a process of increasing the volume of another game sound whose assignment to the channel is continued (channel special open process).

  According to such a configuration, the use state is aimed at timing at which it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the aspect of the channel allocation of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppressed state)). To reduce the number of channels (increasing the number of free channels). Therefore, for example, the number of channels in use is reduced even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds. It becomes difficult to notice what has been done, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the fact that a specific game sound is not output.

  FIG. 177 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when such a channel special release process is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 177, a predetermined effect pattern is being developed in the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing tk11 during a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed The sound of “normal BGM reproduction” according to is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction) and according to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of “reproduction A” is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and is being reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this respect, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), among the sounds in these reproduction states (normal BGM reproduction and effect A reproduction), the sound of “effect A reproduction” is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect At timing tk13 (during the execution of the symbol variation), the playback channels 08 and 09 are disconnected and the playback is ended. As described above, even if the predetermined effect pattern is in the stage of effecting, the effect content of the predetermined effect pattern is obtained by performing the process of terminating the assignment of the effect sound from the channel and changing it to an empty channel promptly. When progressing, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it is not possible to assign a new sound and play it out due to a shortage in an empty channel.

  However, as described above, when there is a predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the stage of the effect (during the execution of the symbol variation) when the assignment of the effect sound is removed from the channel and this is changed to an empty channel The number of effect sounds in the reproduction state is reduced, and there is a concern that the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears in the corresponding effect pattern may be reduced by the decrease.

  Therefore, in this explanation example, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), first, the sound of “reproduction A” is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and timing tk13 before the end of the reproduction comes. From “timing tk12” to “timing tk14” after timing tk13, the sound of “effect B reproduction” according to effect B displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 It is assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 to be in a state of playback (here, stereo playback). Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), timing tk13 in which “reproduction of A effect” is ended during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of “effect B reproduction” is put into the state of reproduction. In accordance with the arrival of the "effect B reproduction", a process of reducing the volume (volume reduction process) is performed while the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the "effect B reproduction" are allocated to the channels.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” in this explanatory example is output as a rendition sound corresponding to a step effect that can be developed up to four times in the content of the effect. After the effect content has been developed over three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), the effect as to whether the effect content is further developed according to step 4 is executed. In the state where a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B reproduction” corresponding to the step effect are allocated to the channel, processing (volume suppression processing) to decrease the volume is performed. In addition, when the high expectation performance aspect which develops further to the production contents according to Step 4 appears when this volume reduction processing is ended and returned to the normal volume (a performance with relatively high expectation), While the specific effect sound according to the effect content of the step 4 is outputted as the sound of “reproduction B reproduction”, it does not develop into the effect content according to the step 4 and the step concerned with the effect content according to the step 3 When the low expectation effect mode in which the effect is ended appears (effect with a relatively low degree of expectation), an effect sound different from the specific effect sound is output as the sound of “effect B reproduction”.

  According to such a configuration, the effect design is made to arrive at the timing tk13 aiming at the time when the volume control process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and in the process of the volume control process, “process A” Since the sound of “play” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is ended, the number of channels in use is reduced (the sound of “play A” is not played back. Can be made harder to notice.

  Particularly, in the example shown in FIGS. 177 (a) to 177 (c), the content of the rendering with a relatively high degree of expectation (the content of the rendering developing to step 4) and the content of the rendering with a relatively low degree of expectation (step The above-mentioned period (period in which it is unclear whether development will be made or not) in which presentation contents (representation of whether or not development to step 4) appears that leads to any of the presentation contents that do not develop to 4) The volume suppression processing is executed, and the sound of "effect A reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09, and the reproduction is ended. According to such a configuration, not only in the situation where the volume of the effect sound is reduced, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the effect B (sound of “reproduction B reproduction”). Then, since the effect A (sound of “reproduction A reproduction”) comes to an end, the volume of the effect sound that has been targeted for volume suppression including the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” is then returned. Sometimes, even if the sound of "reproduction A" is not reproduced, the effect content with a relatively high degree of expectation (the effect content developed to step 4) and the effect with a relatively low degree of expectation ( It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is no longer reproduced by drawing interest in which of the presentation contents not developed to step 4 appears.

  Moreover, in the volume suppression processing according to this explanatory example, although the volume is reduced while the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B reproduction” are allocated to the channels, all the effect sounds are The volume is not reduced, and the specific effect sound (here, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction”) is continuously reproduced with the normal volume. That is, in this case, with regard to a part of the rendering sound (the sound of “normal BGM playback”), the volume of the plurality of rendering sounds is lowered in the normal playback without the volume being suppressed, and thus the listening of the sound Since the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" comes to an end while it becomes even more difficult, the sound of "effect A reproduction" can be made harder to notice by not being reproduced. It will be.

  Furthermore, in this explanatory example, the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is not terminated immediately, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the volume suppression process is started. After waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive, the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is ended. That is, immediately after the volume suppression processing is started, the player may be attracted to the effect sounds A and B in which the change of "volume decrease" has occurred, but the volume is lowered to a specific value. Since it is assumed that such interest is diminished when the state which does not change at the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, the sound of "play A" is aimed at such a timing. By terminating the reproduction of the above, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is not reproduced.

  In particular, in this example, the effect sound to be subjected to the volume reduction process is gradually reduced in volume, and the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is ended after the volume becomes 0 (silenced). As a result, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice the fact that the sound of "reproduction A" is not reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound of “effect B reproduction” is started to be reproduced while the sound of “effect A reproduction” is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the sound of "production B reproduction" is being reproduced, the sound of "production A reproduction" is started to be reproduced, and the sound of "production B reproduction" is being reproduced in the suppression state. The reproduction of the sound of "" may be ended.

  The effects A and B are not necessarily effects accompanied by the effect display on the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as effects of only sound, for example.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of “effect B reproduction” is assumed to be reached by the development of the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the big hit judgment. It is not limited. For example, based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410), the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is started to be started, and the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is reproduced. May be ended in the manner described above.

  Further, the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume reduction process may not necessarily be reduced stepwise. Also, conversely, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned stepwise. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be 0 (silence), and if it is suppressed to a volume lower than normal, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" has ended. Is possible.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, a specific effect sound according to the effect pattern (here, the sound of “normal BGM playback”) is excluded from the target of the volume suppression processing, and the volume at the normal time remains Although the reproduction is continuously performed, the volume of all the effect sounds may be reduced when the volume reduction processing is performed. Also, conversely, the sound of "effect A reproduction" may be maintained without reducing the volume when the volume reduction processing is performed, and even in such a case, the volume is reduced. In the situation where the player is interested in the sound of "reproduction B reproduction", the reproduction of the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is ended and then the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is also included. Content with a relatively high degree of expectation even if the sound of “play A” is not played back when the volume of a plurality of effect sounds that were targeted for volume suppression is returned (step 4 We are interested in which one of the rendering content (which develops into 2) and the rendering content with relatively low degree of expectation (the rendering content that does not develop to step 4) appears, and the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is reproduced Can be made harder to notice Uninaru.

  In addition, at least while the volume reduction processing is performed during a period in which the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of “effect A reproduction” and “effect B reproduction” is performed (after the volume of “effect B reproduction” is reduced from the normal value Until the value is returned to the normal value), even if the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 has been won, in order to maintain the interest in the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” more suitably. It is desirable not to play the corresponding hold winning sound. In addition, even if a special result (preread winning) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 is hit, the effect sound according to the pre-reading effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound reproduction of “effect A reproduction” is ended within a period in which the effect sound is reduced in volume, and allocated to the channel in the state of reduced volume until that period is over. In addition to this, the special effect sound that has not been assigned to the channel until the end of the period is added to the channel. It may be newly assigned and played back (play back at the normal volume). According to such a configuration, an interest is gathered whether or not a special effect sound is reproduced when the sound volume is returned, and it is further noticed that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is not reproduced. You will be able to make it harder. Moreover, if the number of channels being used after volume return is reduced compared to before the volume drop, there is a concern that it may seem as if the expectation for the big hit symbol to appear due to the symbol variation has decreased, but special effect sound Is newly assigned to the channel and played back (reproduced with the normal volume), so that it is the same as before volume reduction and after volume return, or more (two or more effect sounds for the channel (When newly allocated), it becomes possible to keep the channel in use, and it is also preferable that the player remembers the feeling as if the degree of expectation decreased. It will be avoided. In this case, when the volume is returned, the special effect sound may or may not be reproduced, and it is suggested that the expectation degree is relatively high when the special effect sound is reproduced. It is desirable to do.

  When a special effect sound that has not been assigned to a channel is newly assigned to a channel and played back when the volume is returned, the channel that has become idle due to the sound assignment of "play A" being removed. It is desirable to assign a special effect sound to. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a wide range of effects with less channel resources.

  In addition, the channel special opening process may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed, and, for example, the restriction target in the process described with reference to FIG. 175 and FIG. 176. As “effect A” is adopted, the smaller the number of vacant channels is, the less symbol variation (when the number of vacant channels in the symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than a predetermined number) The rate at which the processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where there is ample free channel number so as not to feel anxious feeling of lack of channels, it is possible to continuously output "production A" without ending on the way become.

  In the above explanation example, “volume suppression effect” that outputs at least a part of the game sound of the game sound in the suppression mode or silence is performed based on the result of the big hit determination and the effect pattern of the specific type is executed (selected And when the effect content is at a specific timing, it is executed over a partial period in the effect pattern. In this respect, the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “effect patterns of a specific type” that can generate such volume suppression effects are prepared as “other effect patterns” that do not generate volume suppression effects ( It is desirable to set so as to be smaller than the number of effect patterns stored) in order to improve the game interest when a volume suppression effect occurs.

  Also, when preparing a plurality of effect patterns as "effect patterns" that can generate volume suppression effects, those effect patterns are longer than the effect patterns that cause volume suppression effects to be executed over the first set time and the first set time It is desirable to include effect patterns for executing the volume suppression effect over the second set time, and in these effect patterns, the expectation for the jackpot symbol to appear is different. According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game sound of the game sound is output in the suppression mode or silent state, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested depending on how long the state is continued. Will be able to

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player changes the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511 a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state (such as a demonstration state) where symbol variation is not executed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (The process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where symbol variation is being executed. However, in the state where symbol variation is being executed, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even if the volume setting value is changed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the "effect pattern capable of generating a volume suppression effect", the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during pattern variation regardless of the effect pattern, the volume adjustment confirmation Since the player who sees the situation that the sound is not output comes to be aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being performed, it is expected to preferably maintain the game interest. In this case, although the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the effect display device 1600 does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound so as to display a message indicating that the volume setting value has been changed. It is desirable in order to make the person aware (be aware of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being performed). The phrase “does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound” means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but in addition to outputting this at the volume 0, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel .

  During the period in which "volume suppression effect" to make at least a part of game sound of the game sound be output in the suppression mode or silent state, the expectation (including 100%) that the jackpot symbol appears is suggested It is desirable to perform expected display (such as an expected effect that causes one of a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation to appear). According to such a configuration, since the player's interest is shifted to the expected display (expected effect), the sound of “effect A reproduction” is generated while the “volume suppression effect” is being executed. It is possible to make it even harder to notice termination.

  When the "volume suppression effect" is executed and at least a part of the game sound is output in the suppression mode or silent state, the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is returned to the state of being output in the non-suppression mode At a predetermined timing before the timing comes, new effect sound data different from any of the effect sounds ("normal BGM" and "effect A reproduction") that are already in the output state are allocated to a channel and the new effect sound A sound corresponding to the data may be output in a non-suppressing manner. That is, in this case, the sound corresponding to the new effect sound data is output in the non-suppressed mode while the “reproduction B playback” is output in the suppression mode or silence, and the “effect B reproduction” is Since the sound of "reproduction B playback" is returned to the state of being output in the non-repression mode while being output in the non-repression mode, the sound of "reproduction A replay" is ended Can be made more difficult to notice.

  In a period in which the "volume suppression effect" is executed, it is desirable that the display image in the effect display device 1600 be not displayed or be displayed in the suppression mode. However, in this case, it is desirable that the display images displayed on the effect display device 1600 include those not to be processed.

  Within one effect pattern, a period in which "volume suppression effect" is executed may appear multiple times, and in those periods, the length of "time during which at least a part of game sound is output in a suppression mode or silence" It is desirable to make the According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to turn off a specific effect sound in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to notice in any of the effect scenes, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest .

[Control sound output processing under suppression]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the symbol variation is started until it is ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs processing for advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns the sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel to reproduce Do the process of Then, when the display effect in the game board side effect display device 1600 advances to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is allocated to the predetermined channel and the state is output in the suppression mode or silence ( The volume of "BGM playback" is reduced to a specific value and output. When an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as operation button 410) is detected in this state, the symbol fluctuation causes a big hit symbol A special effect sound that suggests an expectation that a special display mode appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressing mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special rendition may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, at the time of outputting the special effect sound according to the operation detection, the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the predetermined channel, and is output in the suppression mode or silent state of the thing. In this way, it is possible to provide an atmosphere that seems to be easy to use in the channel. Therefore, providing an operation opportunity to cause the player to output the special effect sound in a state where the feeling of uneasiness such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" is removed. This makes it possible to curb the decline in game entertainment.

  By the way, when it is intended to output a sound in a suppression mode or silent while keeping a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (a sound of “BGM playback”) allocated to the channel, it is generally allocated to the channel It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of a certain sound (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (the process of reducing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of effect reception), a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (“ It is possible to give the player an operation opportunity (generate an effective period of effect reception) after setting the sound of “reproduction of BGM” to be output in a suppression mode or silent state.

  However, as well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the effective period of effect reception will be generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. Whether it is random (depending on the player) can not be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to end the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the effective period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so as to start the reproduction of the sound matched with this at an undefined timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when the player performs an operation, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "special BGM reproduction at the time of special effect sound reproduction" and is displayed. It is also conceivable to perform processing to reproduce. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the contents of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped and the pattern is ended, the timing of the pattern stop, etc., it is within the effective period. If the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing or it is determined to be indeterminate (up to the player), the sound of “BGM reproduction” is newly reproduced at the timing of the operation (effect reception). There is a concern that so-called sound shifts may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of symbol stop and the game interest may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as sounds of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of super reach production, the sound data at the second half of super reach production, etc.) are specified according to the time series defined by each sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. Perform processing of sequentially assigning to channels. And among a plurality of sound data stored as the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, a specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation When a predetermined channel is assigned according to the time series being played, the predetermined channel is assigned and started from timing before the effective period of effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. It is made to be reproduced while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the

  In this respect, in a partial section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, processing concerning the sound output with a suppression mode or silence as compared to the other sections The data content that defines that the specific sound data is to be performed is set in advance, and when the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section It is made to become a time-series relation in which the effective period of the effect receptionist occurs within the period). In addition to this, even if the player performs an operation at any timing within the effective period of the effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial period), the special period from the special period (partial period) The sound of "BGM playback" is a special effect sound according to the reception of presentation across the two sections in the specific sound data in the period (other section) after the (partial section) ends. It is made to reproduce | regenerate in the non-suppression mode in the channel different from the predetermined channel allocated.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of super reach effect, super The volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed only by performing processing of sequentially assigning sound data in the latter half of reach production to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the respective sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. In any case, it becomes possible to create a "suppression mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by the player is accepted in the "suppressed mode or a state (special period) output in silent mode" created in this way, the special process with high immediacy triggered by this is not performed in the special mode. While the effect sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of "BGM reproduction" in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is output in the "suppression mode or silent state" (special period) regardless of the effect reception. Is maintained for a predetermined time. And after this, in the form that special effect sound is being played in, in a form to which it is included, a part section (suppression mode or sound output of silence) of specific sound data (one sound material) is finished. Since the data contents of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) are reproduced, it is possible to secretly restore the sound of "BGM playback" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when an operation by the player is accepted in a state in which the sound of "BGM playback" is output in a suppression mode or silence, an aspect of non-suppression of special effect sound by a process of high immediacy triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of the sound shift between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that while making the reproduction start.

  FIG. 178 is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment condition of each channel when such a process sound output process under suppression is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 178, a specific example when executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (a), there is a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, and at timing ts11, the specific effect being developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the effect pattern of is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a situation where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one of the sound data over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start of the symbol variation to the end when the specific effect pattern is determined to be executed. The sound material may be reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and each of the different sound data prepared for each of the periods may be divided. It may be reproduced sequentially based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 178, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to channels 02 and 03, and are in a state of reproduction.

  In this respect, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (b), one sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) assigned to channels 02 and 03 and being in a reproduction state is special The data content of silence is set at timing ts12 before timing ts13 at which the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) occurs is given, which gives an operation opportunity that is a trigger for producing a production sound. It is made to be in the reproduction state in a part section. As a result, even if the volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed with respect to the sound of “BGM reproduction”, it is possible to output the sound in silence while assigning it to the predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of "BGM playback" is in a playback state in a partial section set as silent data content, and there is a possibility that there is a margin in the channel usage status While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output a special effect sound in a state where anxious feeling such as "there is no space in the channel and may not be able to output a special effect sound" is removed. Will be able to control the decline in game entertainment.

  Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example is a timing ts16 at which a partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" is ended even if the player does not perform the operation. Before the timing ts15 comes before the arrival of the key, the period is ended so that the effect by the player is not accepted. Therefore, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the operation effective period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the reproduction state in the partial section set as the silent data content. While the atmosphere of the use condition of the yoke channel is likely to be provided, it is possible to generate the special effect sound according to the operation by the player. Note that the operation valid period is ended not only when the timing ts 15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when an effect by the player is accepted. When the timing ts 15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation is performed by the player at that timing.

  And, in this explanation example, it is assumed that the player's operation is accepted for presentation at the timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is allocated based on the fact that the presentation is accepted. , 03 are assigned to special effect sounds for channels 08 and 09 to be reproduced.

  In this respect, in this example, the maximum time from the start to the end of the operation effective period (the time from the timing ts13 to the timing ts15) is “SY”, and the operation effective period is ended at this maximum time. Within the operation valid period, when “BF” is the time until the end of a partial section where silent data content is set as “BGM playback” sound (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) Even when the operation by the player is accepted at any timing, the special effect sound is allocated to the channels 08 and 09 for reproduction for a fixed time of “SY + α (> BF)”.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It becomes possible to output the sound of "BGM playback" as a non-suppressing mode in the form of being incorporated into the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time from when the reproduction of the special effect sound is started according to the timing when the operation by the player is accepted until the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output as the non-suppression mode is variable. The buffer period for returning the output period of the special effect sound in the non-suppressing mode of the sound of "BGM playback" (The sound of "BGM playback" is restored in the non-suppressing mode by being mixed into the special effect sound By making it difficult for the player to notice that it is not possible to restore the sound of “BGM playback” as a mode of non-suppression when the operation by the player is accepted, and the sense of incongruity by returning after the predetermined time It will be difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound in this way, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the non-suppression mode when timing ts17 comes. In the state, the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended.

  In the above example, the “timing to start reproduction of special effect sound” and the “timing to end reproduction of special effect sound” are controlled by the player, as shown in FIG. 178 (b). Depending on the timing to be accepted, they will be variable within the range shown by the dotted arrow, however, even if they correspond to any timing, timing ts16 comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state It is apparent that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the "BGM reproduction" sound is to be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, when the operation by the player is accepted, the user feels even more aware of the sense of incongruity by returning the sound of "BGM playback" as a non-suppressing mode without returning it. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the sound of BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section while attention is paid to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, when an operation by the player is accepted, the special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern or the result of the big hit determination The special effect sound may be generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted only when the condition is satisfied. In addition, even when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the operation effective period is generated at the timing ts14, and the effect is accepted when the effect by the player is accepted within the operation effective period. The predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is reproduced based on the information. And, even if it is operated at any timing within the operation effective period, the sound of BGM reproduction is densely reproduced to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is being reproduced. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the example shown in FIG.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (a failure effect The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). Will be set to arrive after the According to such a configuration, a silent period (according to the operation timing) after a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) ends and the sound of BGM reproduction is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. Can be generated as a buffer period). In addition, if it is set in such a silent period that a resurrection effect in which the expectation (or 100% may be high) can be generated, it will be expected to maintain the game interest.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in the lost mode without the BGM reproduction sound being restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. It is also good. In this case, at timing ts12, the assignment of the sound for BGM reproduction to the channels 02 and 03 may be ended, and this may be made an empty channel.

  In addition, in the case of generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction by simultaneously performing a movable effect for moving a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception. It is desirable to make the sound of reproduction secretly transition to the reproduction state in the normal section.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the sound of “BGM playback” is silently output in a partial section, but the embodiment is not limited to this, and the aspect is suppressed more than the sound of “BGM playback” in other sections. What is output by is good. Here, the mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered can be exemplified as a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is lowered.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, by setting a time-series period in which the suppression mode or silence is set to the sound data of “BGM reproduction” allocated to a predetermined channel itself, “BGM reproduction” can be performed. Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a suppression mode or a silent output state (special period) only by reproducing the sound. However, the sound data of "BGM playback" allocated to a predetermined channel may not necessarily have to set a time-sequential period set as a suppression mode or silence to itself, for example, at timing ts12 of "sound of BGM playback" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (which may be mute). That is, in this case, even if the operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, the process of raising the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" from the specific value (process of returning to the initial value of volume) is performed. I will not. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing ts 16 comes, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is raised from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the volume initial value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is being reproduced as in the other example described above. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial value of the volume) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is specified with a specific value in a state where the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is finished. You may make it perform processing (processing to return to volume initial value) to make it rise from, or even if the said symbol variation is ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 178, restriction processing is performed to make it more difficult for new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel, at least from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 comes to timing ts16. It is desirable to In addition, as such restriction processing, for example, it has nothing to do with the result of whether or not the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation under execution such as block winning a prize sound, holding winning a prize sound, general sound effect sound, adjustment sound etc. It is desirable to set a specific game sound as a target of restriction and prevent the reproduction of the specific game sound not to be newly assigned to the channel.

  In addition, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment, a specific effect sound (BGM in a channel different from the channel 02, 03 before the timing ts12 comes To play the background music, not the music, but it is desirable to be an effect sound or an effect sound such as a speech), and while the specific effect sound is being reproduced, the timing ts12 comes and the BGM is reproduced. It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppression mode or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it can be made difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state. In addition, for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is to be ended before timing ts14 at which a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output (at timing ts14 or before timing ts14). Is desirable in order to alleviate the anxiety that the special directing sound is not output.

  Here, with regard to the specific effect sound reproduced on a channel different from channels 02 and 03, the reproduction may not necessarily be started at a timing before timing ts12 comes, and at timing ts12 or later And may be started before timing ts13. Even in such a configuration, when a specific effect sound is output in the non-suppressed mode (normal mode) when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppressed mode or silent state, “once Since the BGM playback sound in the "suppressed mode or silent state" can be made to appear to be returned to the normal mode playback state, the BGM playback sound is in the suppressed mode or silent state It is possible to make it hard to notice that

  In addition, with regard to “a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is ended before timing ts14 at which a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output (at timing ts14 or before timing ts14)” , “The output of the specific effect sound is ended based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted within the operation valid period, or it is automatically ended at the specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation valid period)” It means that. That is, the specific effect sound is automatically terminated unless the effect by the player is accepted until the specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation effective period) arrives.

  In addition, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment, the sound of BGM reproduction is from the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that a plurality of channels be output of the effect sound until a timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the state of silence is ended. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including special effect sounds are output, the sound of BGM reproduction can be easily incorporated into those effect sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction is normally It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the aspect.

  In addition, such suppression operation sound output processing may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed, and, for example, in the processing described with reference to FIG. 175 and FIG. Adopting "sound of BGM playback" as the restriction target, the smaller the number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the number of minimum free channels in symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than a predetermined number) The ratio at which the operation sound output process under suppression is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, the BGM reproduction sound is output without making the suppression mode or silence in a situation where there is ample free channel number so as not to feel the anxiety that the special effect sound is not output due to the channel shortage. Will be able to

  For the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, even if there is no operation, the effect reception always occurs (automatic reception) within the valid period, and the post operation effect (special effect sound reproduction) is executed. You may do so.

  Also, when the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178 occurs, the effect reception is permitted while the sound of “BGM playback” is output in the suppression mode or silence. You may make it output the "reception acceptance sound" which suggests that (or it will be in the state in which an effect reception is accept | permitted) in the non-suppression aspect. The “acceptable sound” is configured as a partial section in “specific sound data” for outputting the “specific effect sound”, and the “specific sound data” is assigned to the channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, the “specific sound data” is assigned to the channel before the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and the specific effect sound corresponding to this is output in the non-suppressed mode When timing ts13 comes, “acceptable sound” is output as a sound according to “specific sound data” assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the "acceptable sound" is output from before to after the timing ts13 so as to span the timing ts13. In addition, it is possible to output a specific effect sound as, for example, a prognostic sound corresponding to a prognostic effect performed before the operation valid period occurs (a performance indicating that the valid period is about to occur). In this case, the "prediction effect sound reproduction section" and the "acceptable sound reproduction section" are provided in one sound data assigned to the channel so as to span the timing ts13. The “acceptable sound” may be in the non-output state in the middle of the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) or may be in the non-output state at timing ts15. It is good, but when an effect is accepted when it is in the output state, it is desirable to make it a non-output state triggered by this.

  That is, "the acceptance acceptable sound is output" means that "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at timing ts13, and the channel is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept that also includes “the reproduction section of the acceptance acceptable sound” in the sound data being made arriving at the timing ts13. In addition to canceling the assignment of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel in "no output" here, the assignment of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The term "playback section of acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is a concept also including transition to a period in which the subsequent sounds (including silent data) are reproduced.

  In addition, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, even when the effect is accepted at any timing within the effective period, the elapsed time from the time when the effect is accepted is performed. Until the predetermined time value is reached, the special effect sound is reproduced in a non-suppressed mode on a channel different from the predetermined channel to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned.

  In this respect, when the effect is received in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception is made to appear also as a display image on the effect display device 1600. However, for the special effect display according to the effect reception, “the execution state (viewable state) is continued until the elapsed time from when the effect reception is made reaches the above-mentioned predetermined time value” Instead, it is desirable that “even when the effect reception is made at any timing within the effective period, it is made non-displayed when the predetermined timing within the effect pattern arrives”. As the “predetermined timing in the effect pattern”, for example, it is possible to adopt a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period that is after timing ts15 and before timing ts17. Although there is an operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), even if the effect is accepted immediately after the occurrence of the operation effective period, it is a timing that arrives before the timing when the output state of the special effect sound is ended. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, with regard to the processing concerning the special effect sound, the output state must be continued until the timing when the "BGM playback" sound comes back after the timing ts16 at which it is restored in the non-suppression mode. As for special effect display, it will be possible to finish before special effect sound, so that it is possible to progress the effects after performing operation after operation with good tempo become. In order to obtain such effects, the specific timing at which the special effect display is not displayed is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of “BGM playback” is restored or the timing that comes before the timing ts16. It is important to

  According to such a configuration, when the effect is accepted in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), “the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted is predetermined, based on the fact that the effect is accepted. A process of processing the special effect sound that continues the output state until the time value is reached and a process of processing the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives Each will be started with.

  For example, assuming that the effect reception is made at a relatively early timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “process relating to the special effect display” of the effect after operation is executed over a relatively long period, Of the post-operation effects, the “process for applying special effect sound” ends at a timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed since the time when the effect was received. On the other hand, assuming that the effect is accepted at a relatively late timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "process relating to the special effect display" of the effect after operation is executed only for a relatively short time. However, of the post-operation effects, the “process for applying special effect sound” is executed from the time when the effect reception is made until the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

  That is, in this case, with the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern becomes a specific timing When the effect is received within the special operation reception effect (effective period), the output state is set until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. A function of processing the special effect sound to be continued and a process of processing the special effect display in which the display is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives are respectively executed.

  According to such an operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), if the effective period occurs and it operates immediately, it is possible to maintain a long execution state of the "process according to the special effect display" in the post-operation effect As a price to be paid, the end timing of the “process for special effect sound” in the post-operation presentation comes relatively early. Yes, if you operate at a late time without operating for a while after the effective period has occurred, the end timing of "processing for special effect sound" in the post-operation production is relatively late Although it can be made to come by, there is a demerit that it will not be possible to maintain long the execution state of the "process according to the special effect display" in the post-operation effect.

That is, in the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15), there is no one that is the most desirable operation timing for enhancing the effect.
・ In exchange for accelerating the timing when the processing for the special effect sound ends, do you want to enjoy the execution state of the processing for the special effect display longer (operation at an early stage within the effective period? Or do)
・ In exchange for shortening the execution state of “process for special effect display”, extend the time until “process for special effect sound” is ended and enjoy this (at a late stage within the effective period Do you operate?) Or
・ A sacrifice is made little by little between the time for which the processing for the special effect display is maintained as the execution state and the time until the processing for the special effect sound is ended, so that the balance as a whole is taken. (Do you operate at the early or late timing within the validity period)
It is possible to have strategic operation rendition like this in the effective period itself, thereby providing an operation reception rendition that is hard to occur that can make it possible to select the operation timing according to the player's mood. Will be able to

  Here, in the above-described example, as the post-operation effect when the effect is accepted in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “process according to special effect sound” and the “process according to special effect display” are lines Although the described example has been described, "processing for operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be further executed, or "processing for operating the predetermined effect movable body" instead of "processing for special effect display" "" May be performed. However, as for the "process for operating the predetermined effect movable body", as in the case of the "process for special effect display" described above, even when the effect is accepted at any timing within the effective period. Preferably, the operation state is ended when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Here, "to end the operation state" is an effect to operate the predetermined effect movable body to the specific position, the predetermined effect movable body in the operation state at the specific position to the original position It means to start processing to operate to return.

  In the above described example, when the effect is accepted in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. A process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) and a process of applying a special effect sound which is continued until an elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value. And However, even when the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when the predetermined rendering condition is not satisfied (for example, when the big hit determination is missed or when the predetermined presentation determination is dropped) If, for example, the effect reception is made within the operation reception effect, the “process according to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body)” is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition As compared with the case where the above condition is satisfied (FIG. 178), the “processing applied to a special effect sound” in which the “predetermined time value” is set relatively short may be performed as a different effect sound More desirable.

  However, even though the operation is performed in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected well (detection error) and the effect may not be accepted, and as a result, the effect is not effective. If the period is over, the player's interest in playing the game is that the player does not perform the processing for the special effect display (or the processing for operating the predetermined effect movable body) even though the operation is performed. There is concern that it will decline. Therefore, the operation acceptance is automatically generated (automatic acceptance) in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. (Or a process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) and “a process of applying a special effect sound” which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value It is desirable to be done. As a method for automatically generating an operation acceptance (automatic acceptance) or a rendering aspect associated therewith, it is possible to use any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300 or an appropriate combination.

  As described above, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) generated while the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed, the effect acceptance is made when the acceptance allowable sound is in the output state in the non-suppression mode. Then, based on the effect reception, the effect after operation is executed, and the output state of the acceptance allowable sound is canceled at this point. In this respect, even when a normal effective period occurs in which the sound of "BGM playback" is not suppressed, the acceptance acceptable sound is output in a non-suppressing mode along with the occurrence. However, with regard to the acceptance allowable sound, it is desirable that, even when the effect is accepted when being in the output state, the output state is continued without being canceled. Also, with regard to the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the effect sound may be continued for a longer time than the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the normal valid period occurs. It is desirable for maintaining the fun of the game suitably while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, as it is used as

  In addition, in the effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state, N pieces of acceptance allowable sounds suggesting that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period occurs). There are types (aspects), and any one of the types is always output (output in a non-suppressed manner). On the other hand, it indicates that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred) in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppressed mode. If only M types (modes) less than N are prepared as the acceptance acceptable sound, “when outputting in any of those types (output in a non-suppressing mode)” and “output in any of those types It is desirable that the sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound itself is not assigned a channel and generates a valid period. In addition, it is desirable that it is suggested that "the expectation degree which a big hit design appears differs" by the kind of acceptance acceptance sound.

  Alternatively, either the effective period generated when the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppression mode or the silent state, or the effective period generated when the BGM reproduction sound is normally output in the non-suppression mode. Also in the case of a plurality of types (aspects) are prepared as the acceptance acceptable sound, the ratio of occurrence of the acceptance acceptable sound with a high hit expectancy occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or silent state. It is desirable to make it relatively high in the effective period, and to be relatively low in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output normally in the non-suppression mode. . And also in this case, in the effective period which occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state, the acceptance permission sound which suggests that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred) is While the output is always output (output in the non-suppressed aspect), the effective period occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the normal output state in the non-suppressed aspect, the effective period occurs ( Or the acceptance permission sound indicating that the effective period has been output is "if the sound data including the acceptance permission sound itself is not allocated and not output" because it is output in the non-suppression mode " It is desirable to be there.

  According to these configurations, when the BGM playback sound is in a normal output state in the non-suppressed mode, the expectation level suggested by the acceptance sound is detailed (M types less than N types) It can not be recognized, or it can not be expected much (it is relatively low). However, in this case, since the BGM playback sound is output in the normal mode in the non-suppressed mode, there is a possibility that the acceptance permission sound may be missed by the BGM playback sound, Even if it leaks, it can be made to be aware of the possibility that the acceptance permission sound itself was not output. On the other hand, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the state of being output in the suppression mode or the silent state, the reception acceptable sound is set in a situation where it is possible to stand out the sound output in the non-suppression mode. Since the output is always made in the non-suppressed mode, it is possible to look forward to the degree of expectation suggested by this. In addition, when any (or both) of these modes are adopted, among the types of acceptance acceptable sounds that can be output upon occurrence of "the effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state". At least one of the types of acceptance acceptable sounds that can be output upon occurrence of “the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppression mode” (for example, Among them, the type with the lowest hit probability may be included. However, the acceptance permission sound that can be output at the time of occurrence of “the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppression mode” may be the “suppression mode or silence of the sound of BGM reproduction”. Make sure to include the type that can not be output (for example, the type with the highest jackpot expectation among the acceptance sound) that can not be output as the acceptance sound that can be output upon occurrence of the “effective period that occurs when in the state of Is desirable. In addition, the number of effect types that can appear as effects after operation according to the effect reception in the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppression mode” is “BGM reproduction It is desirable that the number of effect types that can be generated as an effect after operation according to the effect reception is greater than the number of effect types that can be generated in the suppression period or the effective period generated when the sound is in the suppression mode or silence state. Among the effect types that can appear as effects according to the effect reception in the “effective period that occurs when the sound for BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppression mode”, “BGM reproduction sound is At least one of the effect types that can appear as effects after the operation according to the effect reception may be included in the “effective period that occurs when in the suppression mode or the silent state”.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state in which neither the time saving function nor the probability variation function is activated, the effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in the suppression mode or the silent state and the BGM playback sound is in the non-suppression mode When preparing a plurality of types (aspects) with different levels of big hit expectation as acceptance acceptable sound in any of the effective periods that occur when in the state of being output as usual, the output in any of those effective periods If it is done, a special acceptance permission sound may be output so that "the percentage stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". In addition, a plurality of types (aspects) may be prepared as the special acceptance permission sound.

  That is, in this case, when the “specially acceptable acceptance sound is output (non-suppression mode) at the occurrence of“ the effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state ”, the effect is produced within the effective period. Even as a post-operation effect performed based on the reception being made, it will be executed in a special mode when it appears, "the proportion stopped at the jackpot symbol will be 100%". If the special reception acceptance sound is output, the output of the special reception acceptance sound is interrupted when the effect reception is made, and if it is output, "the proportion of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" special It is desirable to output a rendering sound.

  However, when the special acceptance permission sound is output (non-suppression mode) at the time of occurrence of “the effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppression mode”, the effective period As a post-operation effect performed based on that the effect reception has been made within, if it is executed in the special mode when it appears, "the percentage stopped at the jackpot symbol will be 100%", it will be performed in the special mode It is desirable that there be cases where it is not possible. Note that the special acceptance sound that is output when "the effective period occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or the silent state" and "the sound of BGM playback is normally output in the non-suppression mode. The special acceptance tone that is output in the case of the “effective period that occurs when the terminal is in the state of the subject” may be an acceptance tone of different types. In addition, there are multiple types of special acceptance acceptable sound that are output when "the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is normally output in the non-suppression mode", and among these types, , The same as the type of the specially accepted sound that is output upon occurrence of “the effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state”, and the type may be different . When the effect is accepted in a state where the acceptance acceptable sound (including the special acceptance acceptable sound) is output, the output of the acceptance acceptable sound is interrupted, and the effect sound according to the effect after the operation (the effect after the operation is special When it is performed in a mode, it is desirable that, when being output, a special effect sound that "the proportion of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" is output.

  According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or silent state (when it is difficult to make a mistake in the listening), if the specially accepted sound is output, the valid period is within the effective period. Also as a post-operation effect performed based on the fact that the effect reception has been made, if it appears, it will be always executed in a manner that "the percentage stopped at the jackpot symbol is 100%". On the other hand, when the BGM playback sound is output as normal in the non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation in which a mistake is likely to occur due to a competition with the BGM playback sound), it is assumed that the special acceptance permission sound is output. Also, as a post-operation effect performed based on the effect acceptance being made within the effective period, the effect is not necessarily performed in a mode that "the percentage stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100%" From this, it becomes possible to have doubts (suspiciousness of mishearing) as to whether the acceptance acceptable sound has been output as a "special acceptance acceptable sound", so that the sense of tension can be suitably sustained. Become. As a result, while the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-restraint mode, the emphasis is placed on "how to not miss the acceptance acceptable sound", and a sense of tension until the acceptance acceptable sound is output. This also can be suitably maintained. In order to enhance such a sense of tension, in the operation reception effect, the special reception permission sound is output and the operation is not performed in a mode that the proportion of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100% when appearing. Compared with the case of the operation reception effect, "The special reception acceptance sound is output and the post-operation effect is executed in the form that" the percentage of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100% when it appears "", the precursor It is desirable to execute a presentation (pre-permission operation related display or pre-permission operation related sound) in a relatively short time so that the effective period is suddenly generated.

  It should be noted that, in a state where the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation where a listening error is likely to occur due to competition with the sound of BGM reproduction) Post-production is "does not be executed in a mode that the proportion stopped at the jackpot symbol is 100% when it appears" operation reception effect (valid period) and "special acceptance acceptable sound is output and post-operation effect is" When it appears, the percentage of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100%, and it is executed in the form of "operation reception effect (effective period)", the special acceptance sound is output as acceptance sound of different types It may be made to output, and it may be made to be output as a reception permission sound of the same type. In addition, in a state where the sound of BGM playback is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation where the reception allowance sound is likely to cause an error due to the competition with the sound of BGM playback) The operation reception effect (effective period) performed after the operation and performed after the operation is performed in a manner such that "the proportion of being stopped by the jackpot symbol will be 100% when it appears" may not necessarily occur. In addition, in the operation acceptance effect (effective period), acceptance acceptance is not performed in a mode in which the special acceptance acceptance sound is output and the effect after the operation is “the proportion of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100% when appearing”. Even if any type is output as a sound, the post-operation effect is not executed in a mode that "when it appears, the percentage stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%", this mode is originally prepared It may not be the same.

  In addition, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed or in the normal effective period, the image display over the operation means used as the operation target A gauge display indicating how much time remains is displayed respectively, and an operation promoting effect is performed to urge the player to perform an operation. In this respect, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs at least while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, when the effect is accepted, the gauge display is left (displayed), “effect Processing concerning a special effect display in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern comes (or a process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) and “the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted It is desirable to start each of the processing for the special effect sound that is continued until the time value reaches a predetermined time value. According to such a configuration, it can be recognized after receipt of the effect based on the remaining amount of gauge remaining as display whether the timing at which the effect reception was made is within the effective period. As a result, it becomes possible to predict, for example, whether or not the processing (or processing for operating a predetermined effect movable body) relating to the special effect display will end soon. In addition, as a method for starting the effect after operation while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. It is possible to use the content of the written description.

  In the above example, for the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as a "specific type of effect pattern" that causes the sound of "BGM reproduction" to be output in a suppression mode or silent mode, an embodiment that suppresses the sound of "BGM reproduction" Alternatively, it may be desirable to set the number to be smaller than the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “other effect patterns” that are not output silently, in order to improve the game interest when the effects occur. .

  In addition, when preparing a plurality of effect patterns as "effect patterns" for outputting the "BGM reproduction" sound in the suppression mode or silent mode, the sound pattern of the "BGM reproduction" sound suppression mode over the first set time in these effect patterns Alternatively, the effect pattern to be output silently and the effect pattern to output the sound of "BGM playback" in a suppression mode or silent over a second set time longer than the first set time may be included, and in these effect patterns the big hit symbol is It is desirable to make the appearing expectations different. According to such a configuration, when the "BGM playback" sound is output in the suppression mode or silent state, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation depending on how long the state is continued. .

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player changes the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511 a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state (such as a demonstration state) where symbol variation is not executed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (The process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where symbol variation is being executed. However, in the state where symbol variation is being executed, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even if the volume setting value is changed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the "effect pattern for outputting the sound of BGM reproduction in the suppression mode or silence", the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the symbol variation regardless of the effect pattern In such a case, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained since the player who sees the situation that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output will be aware of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being performed become. In this case, although the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the effect display device 1600 does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound so as to display a message indicating that the volume setting value has been changed. It is desirable in order to make the person aware (be aware of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being performed). The phrase “does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound” means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but in addition to outputting this at the volume 0, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel .

  The special effect sound that is output based on the effect reception being made when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or silence state is that over a time twice or more of the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) It is desirable to be configured to maintain the output state. According to such a configuration, even if the effect is received immediately after the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the output time (special effect sound) after the timing ts15 has elapsed is It can be made longer than the output time (special effect sound) until the timing ts15.

[Channel assignment cancellation operation]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is allocated to an empty channel to which sound data is not allocated is triggered by the detection by the detection means. It is possible to execute (channel assignment cancellation operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel is created in response to an operation by the player, the player performs an operation by the player at a timing immediately before the player's favorite effect sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it is possible to reliably output the player's favorite rendering sound and special sound through the vacant channel secured in advance in this way.

  Note that the operation (channel assignment cancellation operation) in this explanation example is not limited to the “button operation”, and the action of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 and praying with reference to FIGS. The point is that the contact or non-contact predetermined sensor can detect any state change that occurs when the specific action to be detected (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed. It is sufficient that the processing in which the sound in the state assigned to the channel is removed from the channel and the reproduction end is performed in response to the detection.

  FIG. 179 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when the processing related to such a channel assignment cancellation operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 179, there is a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, and at timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern developed by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of “BGM1 playback” according to (for example, the presentation effect sound to be played during execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to the playback channels 00 and 01 and played (here, stereo playback) and The sound of "BGM2 playback" according to the effect mode (for example, one music continuously played across a plurality of fluctuations in a short game state etc.) is assigned to the playback channel 02, 03 and played (here, stereo playback ) Is in the situation.

  In this respect, as shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), among the sounds in these reproduction states (BGM 1 reproduction, BGM 2 reproduction), the sound of “BGM 2 reproduction” is a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) It is considered to be subject to forcible termination of channel assignment at the time when a symbol is detected, and during the period when the symbol variation is being executed, at timing tw12, the effect acceptance of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is An acceptable reception period can be generated up to timing tw13. In the reception period of timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action to be detected such as “Operate a button and secure a vacant channel” in the display area of gaming board side effect display device 1600 (channel allocation cancellation operation) An operation instruction image prompting to perform is displayed.

  Here, FIG. 179 (a) shows the assignment status of each channel when the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period of the timing tw12 to the timing tw13 and the detection by the predetermined detection unit is not performed. It shows.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (a), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed until the timing tw13 comes, the sound of “BGM 2 reproduction” is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. This is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. In addition, at timing tw13 when the reception period is ended, the operation instruction image (operate a button and secure a vacant channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not displayed.

  Further, at timing tw13, processing is performed to assign a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproduce it. In this example, the vacant channel is previously secured in another channel (reproduction channel 10, 11) even if the reproduction channel 02, 03 is not changed to the vacant channel by the detection by the predetermined detection means. It is possible to assign a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) to a channel and reproduce it. However, when the vacancy is not secured in advance in another channel, there is no vacant channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmed sound) can be assigned, and it becomes impossible to reproduce and output this. There will be concerns.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period of timing tw12 to tw13 and detection by a predetermined detection unit is performed. It shows.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channel 02, 03 is detected at the timing tw12a when the detection is performed. "BGM2 playback" sound will be removed from. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure in advance a vacant channel (reproduction channel 02, 03) which can function as an allocation target of a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) until timing tw 13 arrives. The concern that it will not be possible to reproduce and output a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) will be eliminated. In addition, when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly ended, and in this case, the music or the speech as the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is completed (or Because it will be considered that the reproduction ends at a halfway point without being reproduced, until a good point), the player remembers the feeling that the vacant channel was secured in advance by the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) This makes it possible to easily make it possible to safely wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmed sound) is reproduced.

  In addition, at timing tw12 a detected by the predetermined detection means, the reproduction state of the sound of “BGM 2 reproduction” is forcibly ended and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (The button is operated to secure the vacant channel) is not displayed, and the reception period in which the reception of the effect of the specific action (the channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is ended.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), at timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance as empty channels, but other channels (reproduction channel 10, A predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) is assigned to 11) and reproduced. However, when there is no space in another channel at timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit determined sound) is allocated to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and reproduced.

  Alternatively, when the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the fact that the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, there is a vacancy in another channel Also, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) may be allocated to the specific channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, a effect sound (here, here) different from the predetermined effect sound for the specific channel , BGM 2), it will cancel the assignment state at that point in response to specific action detection (channel assignment cancellation operation) such as button operation, so that one channel (specific channel) Only by using it, it becomes possible to reproduce the sound of "BGM 2 reproduction" and the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit finalized sound) respectively, and it becomes possible to effectively use the reproduction resource which is a limited resource .

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), although the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit determined sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period is ended, the timing after the timing tw13 The predetermined effect sound (in this case, the jackpot determined sound) may be reproduced.

  Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the big hit finalized sound, a good effect sound indicating the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears, a good effect sound indicating that the big hit is missed, etc. may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds be selectively output based on the type of effect pattern that appears in the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that a big hit has been missed, even if the timing tw13 comes, no effect sound may be output, and the idle channel may not necessarily be used.

  On the other hand, as a sound whose channel assignment is ended when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is detected, it is not a sound output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is missed when the reproduction state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to easily predict the content and there is no hindrance. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the state is forcibly terminated.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), it is decided to generate a reception period in which the reception of the effect of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted when the predetermined timing within the symbol variation comes. It is not limited to. For example, at least while the specific sound as a target to be removed from the channel assignment is in the reproduction state, the reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted, and the channel assignment of the specific sound is performed based on the acceptance. May be eliminated. In this case, for example, a predetermined timing after the specific sound is put into a reproduction state, such as a predetermined timing after the predetermined time has passed, maintain the state of the vacant channel secured in advance for a predetermined time, and then another sound is transmitted to the vacant channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played back.

  In addition, as a method of canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound to be forced to be terminated, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. 0) may be used in addition to the method of making the channel to which the specific sound is assigned empty channel at that time. The channel assignment of the specific sound may be canceled by assigning it in the form of overwriting the same channel with a very short assignment cancellation reception tone (such as one second). Even in such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound earlier when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated than when the forced termination is not performed.

  In addition, a new sound is generated at least in a period from the acceptance of the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) to the end of the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the effect reception. Specific game sound (for example, winning sound, hold change sound, volume adjustment sound, etc.) that is not related to the effect of whether a big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation so that the channel is not used uselessly. It is desirable not to output the pre-read effect sound etc.).

  In addition, the specific sound targeted for forced termination (the sound of "BGM2 playback") is to be reproduced as a non-loop effect sound such as music or speech that is reproduced for a predetermined time without looping. It is desirable to make it easy to remember the fact that the vacant channel was secured in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player so that the reproduction is ended at a halfway point without being reproduced to the end. .

[Anomaly notification in the middle of the stage corresponding to the stage pattern]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, the specific alarm sound according to this is not necessarily allocated to the channel and output, and the specific abnormal state A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on condition that the event occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the abnormal state is not necessarily output, so that the channel has a margin and promotes reduction of the risk of empty channels disappearing. Will be expected.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although it is the timing when the predetermined movable decorative body should be at the specific position (origin position), it is not at the specific position (origin position) Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. Then, when such a movable body abnormality occurs, as notification processing by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, "the movable body abnormality has occurred", etc.), and the game Abnormality display (for example, “occurrence of abnormality in back-to-back movable effect unit 3200 or the like”) in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 can be executed. In addition, although it is desirable to perform as abnormality indication in a display area so that it can be specified in which of a plurality of movable decorative bodies an abnormality has occurred, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped, It may be a mode of specifying which of the groups the movable decorative body to which the abnormality has occurred. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 (for example, back front decoration unit 3100 or If the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200, back-to-left movable effect unit 3300, back-to-right movable effect unit 3400, back-to-back movable effect unit 3500, back-to-back movable effect unit 3700 etc.) are provided respectively The display at the time of abnormality in the display area is performed in such a manner that it can be specified on which side of the decorative body and the movable decorative body on the panel side the abnormality has occurred. The plurality of movable decorative bodies refer to movable decorative bodies having different driving sources and provided separately.

  However, such a movable body abnormality is basically caused by the failure of the movable decorative body, and it is highly probable that the player side is likely not to make any mistakes, but it should be dealt with when notified. Because there is no, during the period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit judgment are being executed and the notification process is sometimes executed and displayed, it is in the effect being executed An adverse effect is exerted on the player, which is a start for the player. In addition, the alarm sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not enough in the number of empty channels, so that the player may be anxious not to be able to output a new sound. , There is a concern about the decline in gaming entertainment.

  On the other hand, however, failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs frequently when the movable decorative body operates, and in some cases it is difficult to assume a situation where it suddenly fails when it is not operating at all. Then, when the movable decorative body is not operating at all, the case where the movable body abnormality occurs is that the movable decorative body is removed from the specific position (origin position) by a fraudulent act such as a dodging act or a wire entry. If there is a possibility of being in a detected situation, and it is possible not to output an alarm sound corresponding to a movable body abnormality even under such a situation, it may encourage cheating, From the point of view of players who are interested in the

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed and detected. Even in such a case, notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound, display at abnormal time in display area of game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. However, processing (fluctuating pattern (rendering pattern) to operate the movable decorative body by effect control by at least the peripheral control board 1510 during a period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit judgment are being executed And when the movable body abnormality is detected while the movable body drive processing for operating the movable decorative body based on the effect pattern in the big hit game or the like is performed, the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound The display at the abnormal time in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the abnormal lighting by various lamps, and the like are not performed. The external output (information on the hall side) of the information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is not displayed explicitly and does not adversely affect the presentation, and may be performed regardless of the situation.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to cause a failure in the movable decorative body (due to the peripheral control board 1510 even within a period during which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed. Movable body abnormality in the process of operating the movable decorative body by effect control (the movable body driving process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern (rendering pattern) or the effect pattern in the big hit game, etc.) When it occurs, notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as abnormal notification sound can be performed, but at least in the situation where failure is likely to occur in the movable decoration (during the rendering operation of the movable object) Since notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as abnormal notification sound is not performed when it occurs, it is suppressed for the person who performs the cheating to perform the cheating. While manner also, so for a legitimate player is expected to avoid that adverse effects are exerted on the effect of running.

  For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, assignment control of effect sound to a channel, abnormality occurrence The light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected. It becomes to be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing to operate the corresponding movable decorative body again after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated while the movable decorative body is not yet recovered from the abnormal state. The production is not performed.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as abnormality notification sound according to the movable body abnormality is to be performed or not Regardless, it is possible to execute restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (operation of moving the movable decoration to a specific position (origin position)) in order to restore the corresponding movable decoration from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, the specific movable effect is started even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state during the period of execution of the symbol variation in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative body is performed When the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state in the previous stage, it becomes possible to execute the specific movable effect to operate the specific movable decorative body.

  In addition, although the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (operation to move to a specific position (origin position)) to the corresponding movable decoration is executed, the movable decoration is specified within a predetermined time. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is determined that the recovery has failed, and the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  FIG. 180 shows the allocation status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the big hit judgment during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed And it is a time chart which shows those examples about the condition by the side of a movable ornament.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) provided to the player can occur at the maximum over the period up to the timing ti14. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (a period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is ended triggered by this. The effect control to operate the specific movable decorative body is performed. In addition, when operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is not detected within operation effective period (effective period of effect reception), effect control which operates a specific movable decorative body after timing ti14 is performed You may make it not, and you may make it not perform presentation control itself which operates a specific movable decoration body.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 180, it is assumed that the effect by the player is accepted at timing ti13. Therefore, at timing ti13, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, and the movable effect for effecting the specific movable decorative body is performed (FIG. 180 (b)). Refer to FIG. 180 (a)), and effect sound according to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and reproduced.

  Here, as the movable body drive processing, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not an abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the movable body drive processing is ended without performing any driving since the restoration processing has failed and no restoration can be expected. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, when the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a mode determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when driving of the specific movable decorative body is finished, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, The movable body driving process is terminated when it is determined based on the information that the state has been returned to the specific position (original position). However, when it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not at the specific position (original position) in the movable body drive processing, the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is performed. After that, the movable body drive processing is ended. At this time, if the restoration processing fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

  With this movable body drive processing, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation from the timing ti13. However, in this example, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation at the timing ti15 within the period in which the rendering operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs and this can not operate. In FIG. 180 (b), the dotted range indicates the period in which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing ti17 after the drive (drive for rendering operation) to the specific movable decorative body is finished, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the state returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body In addition to the determination of abnormality, the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the determination.

  However, as described above, with the specific movable decorative body operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, the situation where abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body is the movable Since it can be said that there is a high possibility of having occurred due to the failure of the decorative body, in this example of the explanation, it is not performed to assign and reproduce the abnormal alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality to the channel. That is, in this case, for the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which has occurred abnormally As it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the rendering in progress. That is, based on the fact that the movable body can not be returned to the normal state (moved to the original position) while the movable process is being performed based on the effect pattern during the symbol variation, the situation is displayed. The execution opportunity of “the restoration process for the movable body (the movable body not in the original position) during the rendering operation that is not normally restored” is established, but when the restoration process is performed (or When the restoration process fails to restore the movable body to a normal state, the alarm sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not assigned to the channel and reproduced.

  Note that at timing ti18, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation is ended, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) In the case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), the memory of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, it becomes possible to execute the usual movable effect. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 180 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), and recovery is failed. In this case, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued thereafter, the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing the predetermined restoring operation. That is, in this case, within the same symbol variation, or within the symbol variation next time, even if the timing when the movable effect using the specific movable ornament is performed based on the effect pattern comes, it is The rendering operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is allocated to the channel and reproduced. The various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the abnormally generated movable decorative body remain to emit light in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, when the movable decorative body itself is not operated, the actuator (lamp) mounted thereon is operated (lighted) in the operation mode, and the movable effect is not performed. It will be expected to suppress the game interest.

  As described above, when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern (representation pattern) according to the big hit determination at least during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed, the movable body By not allocating the abnormal alarm sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

  On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) in the same fluctuation pattern (specific effect pattern) as the example shown in FIG. 180, this movable body abnormality is When it occurs at a timing different from when moving a specific movable decorative body by effect control (rendering pattern), an abnormal alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality is assigned to a channel and reproduced.

  Fig. 181 is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the big hit judgment during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed, but the movable body abnormality is in the process different from this. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the assignment condition of each channel at the time of being detected, and the condition by the side of a movable ornament.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing ti11, as described above, the game board side rendering The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern being developed by the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  Then, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) at which the operation opportunity is given to the player is maximum at the timing ti14. Can occur over a period of Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (a period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is ended triggered by this. The effect control to operate the specific movable decorative body is performed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the specific movable decorative body is moved by some external force at a timing ti11a before the timing ti12 when such a specific movable decorative body can perform a rendering operation (operation based on the rendering pattern) It is assumed that the movable movable body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11 b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 181 (b), the dotted range indicates the period in which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing ti11b, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is performed.

  At timing ti13a, the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is ended, and at this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to a specific position (origin position) (movable body If it is determined that the abnormality has been eliminated, the memory of the abnormality history will be deleted, and thereafter, it will be possible to execute the usual movable effect without any abnormality notification being performed. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) is generated so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from timing ti12 to timing ti13a in the operation valid period, the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state, so the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is Not being performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is allocated to the channel and reproduced, and an abnormality occurs. The various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body will only be emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is received within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14 in the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is made by the above-mentioned restoration processing. If canceled, the usual effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) will be executed including the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body. In this example, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and the restoration processing according to this is performed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including a specific movable decorative body are in a situation where the restoration process is being performed, even if the operation by the player is accepted within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14, the specific Although the rendering operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, it is assumed that recovery is unsuccessful because it is not detected (the determination that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated) that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) at timing ti13a. doing. Therefore, after timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the predetermined recovery operation is not performed and the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  In addition, as described above, a situation where an abnormality (a movable body abnormality) has occurred in a specific movable decorative body even though it is not the timing when the specific movable decorative body is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality is detected due to the specific movable decorative body being removed from the specific position (origin position) due to a cheating action such as a dog-sticking action or a wire entry. Furthermore, timing ti13a means that even a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is in a situation where the movable body abnormality has not been resolved by some external force, and there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has taken place. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

  So, at this timing ti13a, although it is in the midst of execution of design fluctuation (specific rendering pattern), it is decided to execute notification processing according to movable body abnormality. That is, in this case, in addition to the various presentation sounds corresponding to the specific presentation pattern being assigned and reproduced according to the development of the presentation contents, in the channel, the abnormal alarm sound is reproduced over a predetermined time, the reproduction channel 00, 01 Will be assigned to Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern progressing and being executed as it is, an abnormal time display corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ "Abnormal occurrence in the movable effect unit 3200 in the back" and the like will be executed. In addition, in various light emitting parts, as a mode corresponding to movable body abnormality, while making some light emitting parts emit light in the abnormal time aspect, the other light emitting parts are in the normal mode according to the development of the effect contents It will be made to emit light.

  According to the example of FIG. 180 and FIG. 181, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one pattern change, a period during which the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on at least the change pattern is executed If the movable body abnormality occurs during that, there is a low possibility that cheating has taken place, and there is also the possibility of a failure at the time of rendering operation, so the rendering will be output with priority over the anomaly notification. . On the other hand, when the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern is not executed, there is a high possibility that cheating is being performed, and the abnormality is more abnormal than the rendering It is a characteristic configuration assuming that it is more important to output a notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed at timing ti11b, and the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed at timing ti13a after the restoration process is performed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. Decided to However, at timing ti11b, the movable body abnormality is detected despite the fact that the specific movable decorative body can not operate based on the rendering pattern, and even if this is done alone, fraudulent acts such as dodging or entering a wire Since it can be said that there is a high possibility of being out, the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality may be started to be output at this timing ti11 b. At this time, notification by display or notification by a lamp may be performed. That is, even when the movable processing based on the effect pattern during the symbol change is not performed, when the movable body moves from the original position due to the dog action or the wire entry, the change start time or the change of the symbol Without waiting for the restoration processing timing at the end time to arrive, at that point (in the middle of the symbol variation) the execution opportunity of the "restoration processing for a movable object (a movable object not at the original position) not restored normally" When the restoration processing is performed (or when the restoration of the movable body normally fails in the restoration processing), the alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality is assigned to the channel and reproduced. It is supposed to be done. Alternatively, when the movable body is moved from the original position by a drag action or a wire entry, a process (a movable process not based on the effect pattern) for moving the movable body by a driving force from a driving source (such as a motor) can be performed. It may be made to move to the original position within this process. In this case, when it is not possible to move the movable body to the original position in such movable processing, even if it is in the middle of the fluctuation of the symbol, "the movable body not at the original position was targeted at that time It is assumed that an execution trigger of “restoration processing” is established. Then, when the restoration process is performed (or when the movable body fails to return to the normal position (return to the original position) in the restoration process), the alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality is assigned to the channel Will be played back.

  The point is that in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, within the period when the symbol variation is performed, "the specific movable decorative body does not perform the rendering operation based on the rendering pattern, and the specific movable decorative body is Is made to be executed as a necessary condition, and that "the abnormality is generated in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation based on the effect pattern" It is important not to be executed under the condition that the player is sufficiently executed, thereby making it possible for a person who has made a fraudulent activity to be executed for a legitimate player while suppressing the conduct of the fraudulent activity. It will be expected to avoid the adverse effect on the rendition of. In addition, as a condition for performing the notification process according to the movable body abnormality within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, “the specific movable decorative body does not perform the rendering operation based on the rendering pattern, but the specific movable decorative body After adopting at least the occurrence of an abnormality in the body, for example, “a failure in restoration processing performed in response to the occurrence of an abnormality” or “an occurrence of an abnormality that occurred under a specific situation” Etc. can be adopted as a further condition.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 180 and FIG. 181, in the process of operating the specific movable decorative body according to the rendering pattern, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body. However, when an abnormality occurs when operating a specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern, the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality is not performed with this as a trigger, and thus the specific movable In the process of operating the decorative body according to the rendering pattern, it may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be performed periodically at predetermined timings or at predetermined time intervals.

  Further, the method of detecting the movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 180, the actuator such as the motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at timing ti17, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 181, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body at timing ti11b, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 180 and FIG. 181, although the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the rendering operation at the timing when the player performs an operation, the specific movable decorative body is specified at the specific timing defined by the rendering pattern. May be operated.

  In addition, in the notification according to the movable body abnormality, the abnormal alarm sound is allocated to the channel for a predetermined time and reproduced, but during this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific value (0) A process of decreasing may be performed.

  In the case where the abnormal notification is not executed on the condition that "a specific movable decorative body is abnormal based on the effect pattern and the abnormality is generated in the specific movable decorative body", the condition is that Also, it is desirable that abnormality notification is not performed as long as power supply is continued without clearing at least the RAM even if the abnormal state is not eliminated and is left. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the effect be developed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoring operation.

  After the abnormal alarm sound is assigned to the reproduction channels 00 and 01 for a predetermined time by the notification process according to the movable object abnormality and reproduced, even if the movable object abnormality remains, the reproduction channels 00 and 01 are empty When the game is started in this state, it is desirable that the effect sound be output in a non-suppressed mode even if the movable body abnormality remains.

  In the above-described example, even in the situation where the movable effect based on the effect pattern is not executed, the restoring operation is performed on the effect movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this respect, even if the restoration operation is successful in the restoration operation, the movement processing is performed to test whether or not the production movable body different from the presentation movable body in which the movement abnormality occurs is also properly operable. Good. That is, as a result of performing the restoration operation on the effect movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that cheating is being performed if this fails. However, as a result of performing the restoration operation on the production movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred, when it succeeds, it is difficult to understand whether there is a high possibility that cheating is being performed. It will be. Therefore, if the restoration is successful in the restoration operation, the fraudulent action is performed through the movement processing to test whether the production movable body different from the presentation movable body in which the movement abnormality is occurring can be properly operated. It is desirable to continue to determine whether the possibility is high. Such movement processing may be further performed even when restoration fails in the restoration operation.

  In the restoration operation performed in the situation where the movable presentation based on the presentation pattern is not executed, and the restoration operation performed when an abnormality occurs in the situation where the movable presentation based on the presentation pattern is performed, the processing content according to the restoration operation It is desirable that (for example, the number of retries) be different from one another.

[Recovery processing of multiple movable decorations]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this. Therefore, conventionally, even if the movable body abnormality occurs in any of the plurality of movable decorative bodies (the movable decorative bodies having different relationships with the drive sources being different from each other), the common abnormal sound data (one abnormality By assigning sound data) to channels for reproduction, the number of used channels is prevented from being unnecessarily increased even under conditions in which movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously with respect to a plurality of movable decorative bodies. The Note that the movable body abnormality means that the movable body can not operate properly and can not operate properly, and it is the same as that exemplified in “Abnormal notification in the middle of the effect according to the effect pattern”. is there.

  However, in recent years, the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on game machines has increased, and it is only necessary to associate common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable decorative bodies. It is becoming difficult to appropriately report the status of the aircraft. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and different abnormal notification sounds are used as channels depending on which of the groups the movable decorative bodies belong to. By allocating and making it possible to reproduce, even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing, it is possible to appropriately notify the state as the pachinko machine 1 concerned.

  Also in this example, when the movable body abnormality occurs, it is as described in the above-described example of “the abnormality notification in the middle of the effect according to the effect pattern being performed” (see FIG. 180 and FIG. 181). Processing is performed. Therefore, also in this example, even if it is generated during the period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) are being executed and this is detected, notification processing by pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, and the like are executable. Also, similarly, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being performed, processing (fluctuating pattern for operating the movable decorative body by effect control by at least the peripheral control board 1510 In the case where a movable body abnormality is detected while (movable effect drive processing for operating the movable decorative body) based on the (effect pattern) or the effect pattern in the big hit game, etc., notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 ( It is configured not to output an alarm sound, display an abnormal time in a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, turn on an abnormal time by various lamps, and the like.

  However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, the abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and made to be in the reproduction state is only one of the groups corresponding to the specific group. On the other hand, it is assumed that the processing for performing the restoration operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred is performed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that, even in the case where a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected that the channel has a margin and a reduction in the risk of empty channels disappearing. As well as being able to become a part, it becomes possible to make a rapid abnormal recovery for each movable decorative body, and it is expected to reduce the channel usage time through the efficiency improvement of the processing when an abnormality occurs. . In addition, about the contents of restoration processing, and each processing at the time of success or failure, the example of the above-mentioned "abnormal notification in the stage according to the presentation pattern" is performed (see FIG. 180 and FIG. 181) It is the same as in the case of).

  Here, as a mode in which a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, it is required to be a mode suitable for informing the state as the pachinko machine 1 concerned, for example, provided on the door frame 3 side A plurality of frame-side movable decorations not shown and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back inside movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back In the case of grouping into two groups of the right movable effect unit 3400, the upper back movable effect unit 3500, the lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body which can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal Can be transmitted to the hole side depending on the type of the alarm sound, whether abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative body which is considered to be difficult to contact if the door frame 3 is not opened. So is the ability. That is, when an abnormality occurs in the movable side decoration on the panel side, it is more likely that the injustice is being performed by the portion where the contact is difficult than in the case where an abnormality occurs on the frame side movable decoration. From the above, by making the notification sound output based on such grouping, although it is a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the player side is not noticed by the type (not feeling unpleasant It is possible to secretly transmit to the hole side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the possibility of fraud is high.

  And also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movable body abnormality occurs, as the notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the game board side effect display As described above, it is possible to execute the display at the abnormal time in the display area of the device 1600. In this respect, in this explanation example, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups even as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, and any of those groups It is desirable to perform different notification display depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to the above. However, while the above “notification by display” is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of an abnormality than the above “notification by sound”, it is excellent in the information transmission function for notifying the details of the abnormality in more detail. It has the following characteristics. Therefore, in the above "notification by display", the above grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exhibited in a mode different from the case of performing the above "notification by sound" by utilizing the difference in the nature thereof. In this case, it is desirable that different displays be provided depending on in which of the individually divided groups the movable ornaments belonging to the group are abnormal.

  That is, in this case, for example, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped in any of the case where the movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and the case where the movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B Depending on whether there is an "Any movable body abnormality occurs, the notification sound displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same as the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 160, even though the abnormality notification sound is assumed to be the same. Is the first notification mode in which different displays are performed, and "the second notification mode in which the error notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are also the same as each other even if any movable body abnormality occurs" And “a third notification mode in which the notification content in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are also different from each other occurs even if any movable body abnormality occurs” It becomes this It is possible to provide a more granular notification manner by notification by the two different contents of the sound and display.

  FIG. 182 shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel and the situation on the movable ornament side when a movable object abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable ornaments at a specific timing in a period in which symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) provided to the player can occur at the maximum over the period up to the timing tj15. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (period of timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) is ended triggered by this. The effect control to operate the specific movable decorative body is performed. If the player's operation (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception), effect control is performed to operate a specific movable decorative body after timing tj15. You may make it not, and you may make it not perform presentation control itself which operates a specific movable decoration body.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that the effect by the player is accepted at timing tj14. Therefore, at timing tj14, originally, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, and the movable effect for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the demonstration operation is performed, and the channel An effect sound according to the movable effect is assigned to 08, 09 and reproduced.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, at timing tj11, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved by some external force (operation based on the rendering pattern), and the specific movable decorative body can perform rendering operation more than timing tj13. It is assumed that the movable body abnormality is detected at the previous timing tj12. Note that in FIG. 182 (b) and FIG. 183 (b) described later, the dotted range indicates the period in which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred is executed. In the relation to the restoration processing, even if the player's operation is accepted at time tj 14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 182, a board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, a board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and a board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 The movable body abnormality is generated for the frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side Each situation is assumed to occur.

  More specifically, in the restoration processing according to the example shown in FIG. 182, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side The processing modes are different between D, E and F. For example, with respect to the movable ornaments A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable ornaments are disposed in a relatively narrow space, and simultaneous operation may cause interference due to contact with each other. Thus, after the timing tj12, the restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on a predetermined order. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative members D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other's operation, including the relationship with the above, restoration processing is simultaneously performed at timing tj12 so that rapid abnormal restoration of each movable decorative body is enabled.

  In such a configuration, restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative members A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed over a long time from timing tj12 to timing tj18, while the door frame 3 side is In the frame-side movable decorative members D, E, F provided in the above, their restoration processing can be completed in a relatively short time from the timing tj12 to the timing tj16.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the operation effective period (the effective period of effect reception) for giving the operation opportunity to the player is ended. It is assumed that neither restoration processing of A, B, C, nor restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side is ended. Therefore, when the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, it corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, and the above operation is effective Even when the effect is received at any timing within the period (the effective period of the effect reception), processing is performed so as not to perform the effect operation triggered by the effect when the effect is received.

  That is, in this case, if the effect reception is generated within the period when the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being performed, it is obvious that the specific movable decorative body can not be made to produce operation with this as a trigger. Even if the effect reception is generated after the restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is finished, the movement between the other movable ornaments on the other side is still in the process of executing the restoration processing. There is a fear of interference. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, in the case where the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, any of the operation valid periods (timing tj13 to timing tj15) Even if the operation by the player is accepted at the timing, the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed on the channel. On the other hand, the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body that has generated an abnormality perform the movable effect It will only be emitted in the light emission mode when being used. The point is that, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, the restoration processing of all of them is completed (all the restoration processing is successfully completed), The execution of the rendering operation is permitted only when the timing at which the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is performed has come.

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and Depending on at which timing within the operation effective period (effective period of effect acceptance) the effect is accepted, it is processed to change whether or not the effect operation triggered by the effect is performed when the effect is accepted. It becomes.

  That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform rendering operation after the restoration process ends (success in the restoration process). However, there is no concern that other movable decorative bodies A to C, D and F may interfere with them even if they are in the process of restoration. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted in any of the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even in the case of being displayed, a rendering operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, and a display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is performed in the game board side rendering display device 1600, and the movable rendering is performed for the channel. In the light emission mode when the various effects are performed, various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which is reproduced by being assigned the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the is performed are performed and the abnormality is generated It will be emitted.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, an operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated to straddle the timing at which the restoration processing is ended. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period before the end of the restoration process within the operation effective period, the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state, and thus the specific movable decoration is The effect operation of the body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. In addition, various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which has generated an abnormality will only be emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period after the end of the restoration process (success in the restoration process) of the operation valid period, the other movable decorative bodies A to C and F are subjected to the restoration process Because there is no concern that interferes with them even if it is under execution, the usual production control (moveable body, display production, performance sound, light emission) including the rendering operation of a specific movable decorative body Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not come after the restoration processing is ended (success in the restoration processing). . Therefore, therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is received within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is selected, the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is performed in the game board side rendering display device 1600, and the movable rendering is performed on the channel. The effect sound of the time (operation effect sound) is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decoration which has generated an abnormality are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed It will stay in

  Here, the notification process according to the example shown in FIG. 182 will be described. In this example, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side in notification of the notification sound according to the movable body abnormality. , C, and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side, and the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there are any.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that movable body abnormalities simultaneously occur in the panel-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation can not normally occur while proper gaming is progressing, and can not occur as a result of cheating, so the hall side is for operation check and repair of the feature It is likely to be in a special situation such as hand-tapping all movable ornaments, etc. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification processing itself may be troublesome, and it is required to terminate the notification state early.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is detected that movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B and C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E and F, respectively. At timing tj12, as described above, the restoration processing on the board side movable decoration side and the restoration processing on the frame side movable decoration side are started simultaneously with those restoration processing, while the notification sound output is the frame side movable Assign the abnormal alarm sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decoration D, E, F side to the channel, and assign the abnormal alarm sound common to the panel side corresponding to the panel side movable decorative A, B, C to the channel It is made to keep in mind to output.

  That is, the time during which the abnormal alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative object to be notified is eliminated or the predetermined predetermined after the abnormal alarm sound is output It is set as a time until time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, of the panel-side movable decorative members A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative members D, E and F, the panel-side movable decorative member A, which has a longer time to complete the restoration process By assigning only the common panel-side abnormal alarm sound corresponding to the B and C sides to the channel, the “common panel-side abnormal alarm sound corresponding to the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C side” It becomes possible to end restoration processing of the frame side movable decorative objects D, E, F while being reproduced, “common notification on the panel side corresponding to the panel side movable decorative objects A, B, C side After the output of the sound is finished, it is avoided that the request for the output of the “common error notification sound on the frame side corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F side” is obtained. The notification process can be ended in a simpler manner.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, while the restoration processing is being performed on the panel-side movable decorative members A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative members D, E and F, the panel-side movable decorative member A, During the period up to the timing tj 18 when all the restoration processes of B and C are finished, “common abnormal alarm sound on the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorative objects A, B and C side” is assigned to the channel and reproduced As a result, the "common abnormal alarm sound on the frame side corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F side" is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

  On the other hand, in the notification mode based on the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the above-mentioned "information notification by sound" is performed utilizing the difference in property from the notification sound described above. In the aspect different from the above, the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exhibited, and different display is performed depending on which of the individually divided groups belongs to the movable decorative body. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, The "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Further, similarly to this, for example, assuming that the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed. The “informing by display” is maintained as it is, and the “informing by display” is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is finished. Therefore, even if the restoration process of a specific movable decoration ends first, depending on the execution situation concerning the restoration process of the movable decoration that is grouped with the specific movable decoration, it may be more effective than the specific movable decoration. It may happen that "notification by display" is ended first according to the movable decorative body for which the restoration processing is ended later.

  According to the example of FIG. 182, a plurality of alarm sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared as the alarm sounds corresponding to the movable body abnormality. Then, when a movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable decorative objects corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced, but for the restoration process, the reproduction state Not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in, the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Furthermore, as the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when the plurality of movable decorative bodies are in the abnormal state, the movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to the predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body which does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration processing applied to these movable decorative bodies is simultaneously executed. This makes it possible to shorten the total time required for the restoration process for the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state as compared with the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state. It becomes possible to return all the movable ornaments from the abnormal state to the normal state while one specific notification sound of the notification sound is being reproduced, and the second notification sound is output. It will be possible to avoid it.

  That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped into a panel-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing according to each group is simultaneously performed. It is not limited to. The point is that a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated by two or more groups (in the above example, the board side and the like) which can operate without being affected by the operating conditions of the movable decorative bodies belonging to other groups. For a plurality of movable decorative bodies (D to F) that are classified into the frame side and that restoration processing can be performed independently for each of the groups, and at least one of them (the frame side in the above example) If it is possible to restore all of them simultaneously by selecting them as movable ornaments that can be operated without being influenced by the operation conditions among them, refer to FIGS. 182 and 183. It is possible to configure so as to obtain the effects described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be performed periodically at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time. Further, the method of detecting the movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the rendering operation at the timing when the player performs an operation, but the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation at the specific timing determined by the rendering pattern. It may be made to

  In addition, in the notification according to the movable body abnormality, the abnormal alarm sound is allocated to the channel for a predetermined time and reproduced, but during this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific value (0) A process of decreasing may be performed.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 182, movable body abnormalities occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. Although the situation has been described as being assumed, the symbol variation may not necessarily be performed. That is, during the execution period of the big hit game, or when the special symbol game is waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen, etc.) Even when the movable body abnormality occurs in E and F, respectively, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on the predetermined order in which all of the board-side movable decorative objects A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side And However, in the case where a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even when operating simultaneously are included in the panel-side movable decorative body, the panel-side movable decorative body is based on a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be simultaneously performed only on some movable decorative objects that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the timing at which it is determined whether or not the movable body abnormality has occurred on the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C, and the movable-body abnormality is present Although it is assumed that the timing at which the determination as to occurrence has occurred is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 183, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F Even when the determination is made, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is ended at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative members A, B, C ends. As long as the relationship is satisfied, after the output of "the panel side common alarm sound corresponding to the panel side movable decorative members A, B, C side" is finished, "frame side movable decorative members D, E, F side It can be avoided that the output request for the corresponding frame side common alarm sound is required.

  Also, conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 182, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, the movable body abnormality occurs in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C The processing structure may be determined to determine that the processing has been completed. However, in this case, when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F And wait until it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C, and then corresponds to the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C side It is desirable to perform restoration processing of the panel-side movable decorative objects A, B, C and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F while the notification processing is performed. In addition, as a result of waiting for determination processing whether movable body abnormality has occurred on the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, movable body abnormality does not occur on the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B and C In this case, the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is performed while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is performed.

  When a specific movable body of the board-side movable body is treated as "an abnormal state not provided for rendering operation", the board-side movable body itself is normal but is in an abnormal state " It becomes possible to include a movable body which is not subjected to the rendering operation in relation to the specific movable body. On the other hand, in the frame-side movable body, even if any of the panel-side movable bodies is treated as an "abnormal state not subjected to rendering operation", the "specific movable body" becomes an abnormal state and There is nothing that can not be used for the rendering operation due to the relationship of (1), and if it is normal itself, all of them are provided for the rendering operation. Moreover, even if it becomes the condition where any movable body of the frame side movable bodies is treated as "an abnormal state not subjected to rendering operation", the other frame side movable bodies are rendered if they are normal. It is intended to be served. Further, even if any movable body of the frame-side movable bodies is treated as "an abnormal state which is not subjected to rendering operation", in the case of the panel-side movable body, all of them are normal if they are normal. Are to be provided for the rendering operation. That is, by adopting a configuration in which the movable effect is realized in a wider space as the pachinko machine 1, the number of movable objects to be provided for the effect operation can be increased regardless of the abnormal condition of the other movable objects. It is supposed to be.

  With regard to each movable body illustrated in FIG. 182 and FIG. 183, in the case where a movable abnormality occurs in the rendering operation according to the rendering request such as the rendering pattern or the big hit rendering, the restoration operation performed along therewith has failed Even if this is the case, no abnormal alarm sound is output. However, even if the symbol is fluctuating, the recovery operation is performed on the movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred when a predetermined condition such as a detected fraud is satisfied, but the recovery operation is performed. It is desirable to output an abnormal alarm sound on the basis of the failure of the restoration even though the restoration operation has been performed.

[Automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic double-stroke function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, an operation effect may be performed a plurality of times according to each operation by prompting a plurality of operations (such as continuously hitting the operation button 410) on predetermined operation means. However, in recent years, in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of such a plurality of operations (such as a continuous hit) is given, the predetermined operation unit is not required to operate the predetermined operation unit (operation button 410) a plurality of times. The automatic multiple operation function (Auto) allows the effect mode to appear when the operation is performed multiple times simply by performing the operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) to maintain the operation state for a relatively long time It is becoming more and more equipped with a continuous hitting function.

  And, in such an automatic multiple operation function (automatic continuous hitting function), when an operation is performed in a long mode such as a so-called long press, a single-shot operation (one operation in a short time) within a relatively short time The player who is not good at multiple operations to make the player remember the feeling (such as feeling that a fast double shot is being performed) as if the player is repeatedly playing) It can be said that it is important in suppressing the decline in the game interest of the player etc.) and promoting the use of the function by various players. However, as in the case of the player, if the effect change (for example, the operation sound etc.) is made to occur simply when the effect acceptance is made each time a relatively short time elapses while in the operation state, the same as a player Even if it is intended to perform an operation by a single-shot push, the effect reception is made multiple times because the short operation time (the time when the operation state is slightly maintained by a single-shot push) is slightly lengthened or shortened. It may occur (a plurality of operation sounds are generated), or the effect reception may occur only once (one operation sound may be generated), and the number of effect receptions for one single operation may be stable. There is a concern that the game interest will be reduced by the sense of incongruity caused by not doing so.

  In this respect, in the case of the conventional automatic continuous hitting function, when an operation by a so-called long press is performed, first, as in the case where an operation by a single press is performed, a change in presentation accompanying reception of an effect (for example, operation sound Etc.) only once. Then, after the first effect change (for example, operation sound etc.) is generated, a new effect reception (operation sound) is not generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses After waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, the effect change (operation sound) is repeatedly generated when the effect reception is made each time a predetermined short time elapses. That is, in this case, since a temporal margin can be provided between the generation of the first effect reception (operation sound) and the generation of the second effect reception (operation sound), single-shot Whether the operation is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time only by performing the operation by a so-called long press while avoiding the occurrence of discomfort due to the number of effects being received being unstable when the operation by is performed. It will be possible to realize the effect that makes it look like.

  However, from the player's side, there is a time margin between the first production reception (operation sound) and the second production reception (operation sound). The number of generations of effect reception (operation sound) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such useless time, as it is useless for operation effects (a pseudo-continuous hit when a so-called long press operation is performed There is a concern that the game's interest in entertainment may decline due to the slowness of the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in the single-shot operation mode, the operation on the operation means is long. As in the case of being performed in the mode of operation (long press etc.), it is possible to intermittently output the specific sound accompanying the operation to the operation means. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, a feeling as if a single-shot operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed in a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. It is possible to make the player remember (such as feeling as if a fast hit is being performed). In this way, all the operation modes are adopted while stabilizing the reactivity of the effect when the single-shot operation is performed (whether it is one effect change or multiple effect changes). Even if there is, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the number of occurrences of presentation change (for example, operation sound etc.) per unit time.

  FIG. 184 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple-operation function (automatic consecutive hitting function). Here, it is assumed that the operation button 410 is adopted as the operation means. Also, in the other drawings including FIG. 184, the white specific sound output in the drawing indicates the specific sound generated based on the effect reception according to the operation on the button 410, The black specified sound output indicates a specific sound generated following the white specific sound output in the drawing while no effect reception is generated when the operation button 410 is not operated. It is. It is desirable that the volume and timbre of these specific sounds be different from each other and be the same.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), an aspect in which the operation state is maintained only for a short time at the timing tx11 within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of multiple operations (continuous hit etc.) is given (single-shot operation) Assumes that one operation has been performed. Therefore, at timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the same sound output as the operation to the operation button 410 is performed, Processing for starting output of a display (operation display pattern) accompanying the operation is performed.

  And, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the specific sound (for example, “Picon”) accompanying the operation to the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx 11, the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 Even if a situation where no operation is performed (period of timing tx12 to tx13 in the figure), in this situation, the specific sound (for example, "picone") accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is interrupted Can be output as

  For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Then, even if the operation by the player is not detected at all until the grace time TY1 elapses, every time the automation time TY2 shorter than the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, “picone By outputting “), it is possible to intermittently output a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), five times (N times) from the start of the grace time TY1 to the lapse thereof. It is set to have a length of time that can output a specific sound (for example, "picone") for a minute. As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as a continuous hit) is given, a specific sound (sound according to effect reception) accompanying the operation At least five (N) times (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection, and thereafter four times each time the automation time TY2 elapses even when there is no operation (N- It will be outputted intermittently over the total number of times with a specific sound).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace time TY1 is ended during the output of the specific sound (for example, "picone") (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the middle of the fifth specific sound is output) A process (output interruption process, etc.) for turning off a specific sound being output (for example, "pico") at timing tx13 even when timing tx13) when time TY1 is ended comes And the specific sound that has been output so far (even in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the first to fourth specific sounds) after the timing tx13 arrives. The output (sound wave form) in the same manner is made to appear. That is, when the specific sound accompanying the operation is interrupted in the middle, it becomes vague whether the operation has been accepted or not accepted several times, and eventually the operation feeling as if it were operated several times There is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to remember (in the non-operation state, it may be considered to be only a specific sound generated in a pseudo manner), but according to such a configuration, such concern It will be expected to be resolved suitably.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the predetermined effective period ends between the start of the grace period TY1 and the elapse of the grace period, the situation where the new operation can not be accepted, Until the grace time TY1 is ended, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output each time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined effective period ends, it is avoided that the number of effect receptions is not stabilized when the operation by the single-shot push is performed. Besides, the player can be made to remember the feeling as if the operation was performed within the period beyond the predetermined effective period, and it is expected to improve the fun of the game. In this sense, a display (for example, display of the remaining time in which the valid period is continued) is made to allow the player to recognize whether the predetermined valid period is in the continued state or in the ended state. It is more desirable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (for 1 to 4 times) under the condition that it is possible to recognize that it is in the terminated state.

  As for “specific sound output accompanying operation” in the figure, rather than a signal waveform accompanying the specific sound output, the volume waveform of the specific sound that is output each time the automation time TY 2 elapses It is a conceptual view of the waveforms removed. As apparent from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the output of the specific sound of the previous output to end to the end, and the specific sound of the previous output is generated. On the other hand, sound data of a new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on a specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and intermittently, as if a rapid continuous hitting operation is being performed. It is expected that the player can learn the sense of

  Incidentally, as a specific sound reproduction type, in addition to a mode in which 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY 2 elapses, It may be loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) which is repeatedly reproduced each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, a plurality of specific sounds that are continuously and intermittently output may be reproduced as one sound data. In the mode of reproducing a plurality of specific sounds as one sound data, all the specific sounds do not necessarily have to be output as the same single sound, but are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. It may be.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), after the display pattern at the time of operation with the operation button 410 is displayed at timing tx11 also with regard to the display output in the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 Even if the player's hand has left the player and no operation has been performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the display content of the operation display pattern is advanced multiple times in that situation It is something that can be done.

  For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state), as described above. It is. In this respect, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order over the time from the timing tx11 to the time-up of the set grace time TY1. Can be made to advance the display contents of the operation display pattern.

  The contents of each of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set, for example, as an aspect shown in FIG. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 185, “display scene 1” is a moving image depicting how an ally character holds a sword and is about to remove it, and “display scene 2” is an ally. "The display scene 3" is a moving image depicting how the ally character is fighting with the enemy character in the first mode with the sword in a first mode. , “Display scene 4” is a moving image depicting a state in which the ally character is colliding with the enemy character in the second mode with a sword, and “display scene 5” is a ally character including the enemy character and the third It is a moving picture depicting a situation in which a sword is used to meet each other.

  After displaying the operation display pattern according to the operation on the operation button 410 at timing tx11, the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed while the specific sound is output intermittently, and the friend character is an enemy. It is possible to make the player remember the feeling as if the effect contents to fight the character are being advanced according to a plurality of operations. The display scenes 1 to 5 may not necessarily be moving images, and may be still images. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display pattern at the time of operation, various effect displays (hold display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. As one of those effect displays, an image may be included that changes the effect (such as a color change) each time an effect reception is generated by an operation by the player, but it is recognized whether or not the effect reception is generated. In order to make it difficult to do so, it is important to be displayed as an image smaller than the operation display pattern.

  Here, in the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), it is between the time when the grace time TY1 is started and the time when this grace time elapses. It is set to have a time length that can sequentially display at least five (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents). As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given, at least 5 (M pieces of display content of the operation display pattern ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and thereafter four (M-1 times) display scenes 2 to 5 sequentially displayed (progressed) even in a state without operation The display content will be developed over the total number of

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing when the grace time TY1 is ended during output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 184A, the timing t14 when the grace time TY1 is ended during output of the display scene 5) When it comes, unlike the case of the specific sound, the operation display pattern is ended by interrupting in the form of being crushed at that point without displaying the display scene 5 to the end. That is, the operation display pattern having progressiveity in the presentation content is different from the case of the specific sound having no progressionality, and the display content is displayed if the operation is continued by interrupting halfway in the display scene. It gives the player the impression that it might have been able to make progress, which is expected to encourage further operations by the player. In this sense, with regard to the relationship between the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all the display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed until the grace time TY1 is started and then ended. It is more desirable to set it to 促 す to encourage further operations by the player. In order to prompt a further operation by the player, only a part of the display scenes of all the display scenes 1 to 5 is displayed from the start of the grace period TY1 to the end thereof. Is more desirable.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effective period ends between the start of the grace period TY1 and the elapse of the grace period TY1, and the situation where the new operation can not be accepted, the predetermined effective At the end of the period (in the state where the remaining time of the grace time TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted to display the result as the operation display pattern. This will be described later.

  The display scenes 2 to 5 are sequentially displayed and developed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation after the display scene 1 is displayed, but the schedule to be displayed sequentially May be preset according to the time from the output of the specific sound to the re-output (automation time TY2), or may be set independently of the time (automation time TY2) It may be one. In this sense, display changes such as switching to another display or generation of a new display in the contents of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. There is a display change due to the moving picture depiction to the state where the sword is removed, and in the display scene 3 there is a display change due to “effect generation when the ally character fights against the enemy character”. It is more desirable. If a display scene having such a display change is used, it can be thought as if the display change in each display scene was caused by the effect reception, so the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be eliminated even if the Further, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of display scenes as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be displayed repeatedly.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), the operation state of the operation button 410 is relatively long at the timing tx21 within the predetermined effective period in which the operation opportunity of the plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. It is assumed that the operation in the long mode to be maintained by is performed. Therefore, at timing tx 21 as well as at timing tx 11, detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), operation on the operation button 410 is performed. The process of starting the output of the accompanying specific sound and the output of the display (the operation display pattern) accompanying the same operation is performed.

  Also, in the operation maintenance period in which the operation state from timing tx21 to timing tx22 is maintained, as in the case of the above non-operation period (period of timing tx12 to tx13), it is specified each time the automation time TY2 elapses. A sound (for example, "picone") may be output and may be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) may be sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order. The display contents of the hour display pattern can be developed in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 184 (a).

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the operation maintaining period (period from timing tx21 to tx22), first, whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) or not It periodically determines (whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) is ended (for example, falling edge detection in the detection signal)). Then, as long as the operation state is continued, the grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and while periodical monitoring is being performed, "every time the automation time TY2 elapses A process of outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) and “a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order” are performed. In other words, in the operation maintenance period (period to timing tx21 to tx22), “it is determined whether or not the state of the operation detection is every time the automation time TY2 elapses, and it is determined that the state is the operation detection state. Processing such as outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”), or “determining whether or not the operation detection state is in effect each time the automation time TY2 elapses, and in the state of the operation detection state The processing such as advancing the display contents based on the determination is not performed, and "periodically monitor (determine) whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)" , “A process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) every time the automation time TY 2 elapses”, and “a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order Process "and that the next output is to be carried out respectively. It should be noted that “periodically monitor (determine whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state))” is executed as processing that is executed multiple times while the automation time TY2 elapses. It is

  Then, after that, as a result of “periodically monitoring (determining whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state))”, the operation on the operation button 410 is continued ( When timing tx22 at which it is determined that the operation state has been terminated comes, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment first determines a predetermined time length based on the result of the determination. Set the grace time TY1 you have. However, in this case, “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) every time the automation time TY 2 elapses”, and “a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order. The process of sequentially outputting “is performed continuously from the time tx22 when the operation state is ended to the time tx23 until the grace period TY1 is ended. That is, in this case, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx 21 to x 22), the player's hand is removed from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx 22 to x 23). It is possible to intermittently output a specific sound in one processing mode that is re-output every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) across the transition timing. In addition, it is possible to continuously output the operation display pattern in one processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  According to such a configuration, the output mode of the specific sound in the single-shot operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the output mode of the specific sound in the long press operation shown in FIG. 184 (b) are respectively generated. The processing aspect (program) concerning the output of a specific sound can be made common among them. Also, similarly to this, the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of single-shot operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of long press operation shown in FIG. In creating them, it becomes possible to share the processing aspect (program) related to the output of the operation display pattern among them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 184A, at timing tx12, as a result of “periodically monitoring (determining whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state))”. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has been ended. In addition, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx 11 to x 12), the player's hand is removed from the operation button 410 and no action is performed (tx 12 to x 13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) across the timing, a specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is re-output every time the automation time TY2 elapses, and a plurality of display scenes The operation display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  Thereby, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as in the case where the operation is performed in a so-called long press mode. The specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently output. That is, in this case, when the operation button 410 is operated, the single push (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single push, long press). It is possible to make the player remember a feeling as if it is being performed (a feeling as if a quick double hit is being performed, etc.). In this way, while achieving stabilization of the responsiveness of the effect when the operation by the single-shot push is performed (whether it is one change in the production or the change in multiple effects), any operation mode (single-shot push, Even if the long press is adopted, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the number of occurrences of the effect change (specific sound) accompanying the operation per unit time.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 184, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode (FIG. 184 (a)) and in the so-called long press mode (FIG. 184). Although the same effect change is caused by (b), in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), one time of effect reception is made at timing tx11, and the whiteout specification in accordance with it is made. While only one sound output is made, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), four times of effects are accepted at every passage of automation time TY2 from timing tx11, and white in the figure according to them. The specific sound output of the omission is made four times. Therefore, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, the effect drawing is performed each time the effect reception is required more than a specific number of times, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is obtained according to the result. When a type of effect for causing the effect result to appear is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), only a single effect reception is generated, so the specific effect result is made to appear Things can not be expected much. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the reception of effects is not generated, the reception of specific effects in black in the figure is performed intentionally, so that the reception of effects is generated so much in practice. Even if it is a situation that can not be expected so much that a specific rendering result does not appear, it is possible to operate multiple times by creating a rendering situation as if many rendering receptions are occurring. Even in the case where the player who is not good at (such as the slow hitting speed is slow) operates a single shot, it is possible to preferably suppress that the interest in playing the game decreases.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much effect reception has occurred by checking only one specific sound output once, but it is from the start of the operation to the end of the operation. By checking how many specific sound outputs have been made, it is possible to attach as much of a star as to how much production reception has occurred.

  In the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, the display scene 3 is output again, and thereafter, the grace time TY1 is timed up, or By repeatedly displaying the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined effective period ends or the effect condition is satisfied and the specific effect results appear within the predetermined effective period, the ally character is an enemy character and a sword. It is made for the depiction to do the confrontation with the one by one alone appears. Therefore, as a specific effect result, it is desirable to describe how an ally character wins against an enemy character as a result of performing a battle with such a sword, and the specific effect result within a predetermined effective period. It is desirable to display a rendering result at the time of failure in which a state in which an ally character has lost to an enemy character as a result of performing a battle with such a sword is displayed.

  Thus, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode (FIG. 184 (a)) and when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the long-press mode (FIG. In any of the cases with 184 (b), the specific sound accompanying the operation is output intermittently for a plurality of times, and the operation display pattern accompanying the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule to progress By doing this, even a player who is not good at multiple operations can be urged to perform operations at ease. However, in practice, in many cases, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in a single-shot mode during the predetermined effective period, and when such continuous hitting operations are performed, 1 It is important to improve the interest of the game by making the player remember the operation feeling that the effect reception has been respectively generated by one operation. However, if the operation feeling for which the effect reception is generated is made to be completely reflected as the effect by one operation once, the player who is good at the multiple operations is more advantageous than the player who is not good at multiple operations. Since there will be a rendering effect as if it exists, it is required to achieve both of the rendering elements (operation feeling, rendering fairness) in such a trade-off relationship.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at first, in order to secure the operation feeling in which the effect reception has been generated by one operation once, as the effect having immediacy for the operation, “the operation was performed Focusing on the fact that “does the sound occur (or change) when operated” is a more important parameter than “does the display occur (or change)?” Every time the operation on 410 is performed in a single-shot mode, a specific sound corresponding to the effect reception is output according to the operation timing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in the single-push mode in the period of the timing tx31 to tx32 of the predetermined effective period. I suppose. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, every time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the detection is used as a trigger to output a specific sound (specific sound in the output state) newly output to the previous output specific sound. A new specific sound is output in a form in which sound data is overwritten on a specific channel. As described above, even if the specific sound is intermittently output for a plurality of times even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode, such an output is performed. When an operation on the operation button 410 is performed again, the player is made to output a new specific sound in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is interrupted (stopped) halfway through the operation. It is possible to explicitly indicate that the specific sound is newly output and the effect has been accepted at the timing when the event was performed.

  In this embodiment, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode or in the case of the long-press operation, the specific sound of the previous output is completely output until the end The automation time TY2 is digested before the time it takes to pass, and the sound data of the new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on the specific channel with respect to the specific sound of the previous output. That is as described above. However, in this case, while the specific sound is output with an accurate rhythm every fixed time (automation time TY2), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in the single-push mode. If it is detected, the specific sound in the output state is broken off every time the operation timing by the irregular player arrives, and a new specific sound is output. It is possible to preferably make the player remember the operation feeling in which the effect reception is occurring.

  Incidentally, also in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), in a predetermined effective period, each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, it is periodically determined whether the operation is being continued (operation state). A process of monitoring (determining whether the operation state (operation detection state) has ended) is performed. In this respect, in the period from time tx 31 to time t 32 when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in the single-shot mode, the operation is continued each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. As a result of periodical monitoring as to whether or not it is in the (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has ended, and according to this, it has a predetermined time length. The grace time TY1 is set (not shown).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when operation on the operation button 410 is newly performed until the grace time TY1 is ended (time up), the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. Then, it is configured to return to a state where processing for periodically monitoring whether the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, in the period from timing tx31 to tx32, whenever operation button 410 is in the operating state or in the non-operating state, processing is periodically performed to monitor whether the operating state is in the operating state or not. A state transition is rapidly performed between the state in which the grace period TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), after six consecutive hitting operations are performed between the timings tx31 and tx32, the user is tired of multiple consecutive hitting operations, and from then on to the repeated operations. It is assumed that the required time has become significantly longer. If the player is not good at such multiple operations, the player will not be able to perform multiple consecutive strike operations from timing tx 32 onwards, so the number of times for effect reception is greater than for players who are good at multiple operations. There is a concern that the game interest will be reduced by being reduced. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses even if the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 after the operation state is ended. As described above, the output processing is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the delay time TY1 from the end of at least the previous operation state is obtained even when the time required for the repetition operation becomes significantly long after the timing tx32. As long as it is possible to repeat the operation within a shorter period of time, the player can be made to remember the feeling as if a rapid continuous hitting operation is being performed, enabling the specific sound accompanying the operation to be output intermittently and continuously. It will be.

  For example, if it is determined at timing tx33 that the continuation of the operation state has ended as a result of periodical monitoring as to whether or not the operation state from the timing tx32 is continued, based on the determination A grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. After that, although it will be a situation where the time required for the repeat operation will be significantly longer, a specific sound will be output each time the automation time TY2 elapses while the player is not performing the operation. As a result of the processing to be performed, the specific sound accompanying the operation is output intermittently and continuously. However, these specific sounds are output as specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) shown in black in the figure under the situation where the effect reception is not generated.

  In this respect, the specific sound with black outlines (7th to 9th specific sounds) can be generated only until the grace period TY1 from the end of the previous operation state has elapsed. However, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), for the grace period TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again at the timing tx34 before the grace period TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (do not time up) based on the operation. Along with that, at timing tx34, a white specific sound (10th specific sound) is output in the figure accompanied by the generation reception being made in a form that breaks the specific sound that was in the output state. At the same time, it is returned to the state where processing for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

  However, such an operation state is also terminated when the timing tx 35 comes, and it is determined as a result of the monitoring as described above, and based on the determination, the grace period TY 1 having a predetermined time length is It will be set again. Then, when the automation time TY2 elapses while the operation by the player is not being performed, the specific sound in the drawing (the 11th to the 14th specific sounds) is again output each time the automation time TY2 elapses, When the player's operation is finally performed at timing tx36 before time TY1 is timed up, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the output state is broken (suspended) In the form, a white specific sound (15th specific sound) will be output.

  Thus, even after time tx32, even if the time required for the repeat operation is significantly increased, the repeat operation is performed within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 at least after the end of the previous operation state. As long as it can be performed, the specific sound shown in white in the figure at the timing when the operation is performed by the player and the specific sound shown in black regularly in the situation where the operation by the player is not performed Is output, so that the player can be made to remember the feeling as if a fast continuous hitting operation is being performed as the specific sound accompanying the operation can be outputted intermittently and continuously. Therefore, according to the aspect concerning the output of such a specific sound, it is possible to secure the operation feeling in which the effect reception is generated by one operation once and, of course, by the player who is not good at multiple operations. Even if there is a specific sound output with black in the figure in the non-operation state, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output intermittently and continuously, so there is a trade-off relationship between the presentation elements (operation And fairness in the presentation) is expected to be achieved.

  However, even in the case where the specific sound is output in such a mode, a plurality of times are displayed in the operation display pattern which plays the role of notifying the rendering result based on the operation within the predetermined effective period. If the aspect depending on the progress of the display content is largely different between the player who is good at the operation and the player who is not good at multiple operations, it will eventually become more than the player who is not good at multiple operations. It may be a stage effect as if a player who is good at multiple operations is advantageous, and there is a concern that the amusement interest may decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the operation display pattern, the delay time TY1 is up, instead of gradually advancing the display contents in accordance with the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, display contents can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for the repetition operation is significantly long after the timing tx32 of the predetermined effective period. Although there is one, while the set grace time TY1 is up, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again, and the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ended within a predetermined validity period does not come.

  When the operation is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 186 (a), the display of the operation display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at timing tx31. From then on, display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 185 as the operation display pattern are determined in advance as the operation display pattern regardless of the operating conditions while the speed of the continuous hitting operation is largely changed as described above. It appears only as it is sequentially displayed and progressed according to the schedule, and this makes it appear that the presentation fairness between a player who is not good at multiple operations and a player who is good at multiple operations is maintained. Will be able to

  However, even if the manner in which the display content as the operation display pattern is advanced is the same, the number of times that the effect reception according to the operation is actually occurring is a multiple operation with the player who is not good at multiple operations It is inevitable that they will differ from the players who are good at. Therefore, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, the effect drawing is performed each time the effect reception is required more than a specific number of times, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is obtained according to the result. When a type of effect for causing the effect result to appear is performed, the player who is good at multiple operations is more likely to cause the specific effect result to appear, which makes it possible to perform the operation multiple times. Meaning will be maintained. That is, while maintaining such meaning of effect, in terms of effects such as sound and display, the fairness of effect between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations is maintained. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest of a player who is not good in multiple operations by lowering the appearance of being played.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect is accepted when performing the operation by the long press, the aspect depending on the progress of the operation display pattern From the same, it is expected that the occurrence of a situation in which the button deterioration is prematurely accelerated by performing the repeated strike operation too early can be avoided.

  Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is not in time until the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, a timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends and ends is reached within a predetermined effective period, and from the timing tx31 at the timing tx37 (specific end timing) Dynamic display output (processing of sequentially displaying and advancing display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that time.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, with regard to the output of the specific sound (for example, "picone"), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is ended in the output state comes. However, processing (such as processing for interrupting output or processing to be interrupted by overwriting with another sound) that turns off a specific sound that is in the output state at the timing tx37 (for example, “Pico”) As described above, the output (sound waveform) in the same manner as the specific sound that has been output until then does not occur, even after the timing tx 37 arrives. Therefore, with regard to the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx 37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends is reached, the last specific sound (10th specific sound in the figure) is If the operation to the operation button 410 is performed before the sound is muted, the player can remember the feeling as if the rapid continuous hitting operation is being performed as the specific sound accompanying the operation can be outputted intermittently and continuously. It is possible to make it happen.

  In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), the darkened specific sound (tenth specific sound) output across the timing tx 37 (specific end timing) is muted before it is silenced. After the white specific sound is generated twice in the figure in the form of interrupting the tenth specific sound output, the specific sound accompanying the black is intermittently output again in the figure, so that the specific sound associated with the operation is generated. It can be seen that the output is continuously and intermittently. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), while the specific sound is thus output intermittently and continuously, in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily ended at timing tx 37. . After that, it is clear that the progress of the display content is re-started from the first display scene (display scene 1) in accordance with the timing tx 38 at which the white specific sound in the drawing is output again.

  In FIG. 187, in the pachinko machine 1 on which the automatic multiple operation function (automatic double hit function) described in FIGS. 184 to 186 is installed, a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of multiple operations (such as continuous hit) is given It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect which appears when operation is performed within the predetermined effective period (timing tx41-tx48), when a specific effect pattern which generates H is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 187, now, at timing tx41, a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given occurs, and at timing tx42 within the predetermined effective period, the player Assuming that the operation is started, also in this example of presentation, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 and the output of the display (operation display pattern) accompanying the same operation It will do processing to make it start.

  However, in this production example, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, the specific sound output shown in white in the drawing is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability. It is possible to execute the process to output.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound output of the black outline in the figure is generated even under the condition that the operation to the operation button 410 is not performed and the effect reception is not generated. In this embodiment, it is difficult to distinguish between the specific sound output in black in the figure and the specific sound output in white in the figure generated at the timing when the effect reception occurs (in this example, the same mode It is supposed to be output in). Further, as described above, the operation display pattern displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that the display contents are advanced according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation. Therefore, from the player's side, even if an operation in a long press mode or a plurality of operations is performed within a predetermined effective period, it is recognized how much effect reception is generated by these operations. It can be said that it is in a difficult situation. Therefore, in this effect example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, the specific sound output of white in the figure is generated, and the special sound different from the specific sound has a predetermined probability ( For example, by performing processing of outputting at 50%, etc., it is possible to predict to some extent how much effect reception has occurred through the output situation of such special sounds.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 187, when it is in a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) after the predetermined effective period is started, two consecutive hit operations at timings tx42 and tx43 and timing tx44 As a result of the long press operation being performed, a total of nine production receptions are generated, and the white specified sound output corresponding to these is generated continuously for nine times, etc. (in the drawing, 1 to 9) (Whiteout specific sound), the number of occurrences of effect reception per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx 45 to tx 48) after the start of the predetermined effective period, it takes a long time that the operation in the mode of single-shot operation can not be regarded as a continuous hit. , Twice by tx 47, and the effect sound output for two times corresponding to these is generated twice for the specific sound output of the white space (time in the figure etc. , The eleventh specific sound), the number of occurrences of effect reception per unit time is relatively small.

  However, when the output condition of the specific sound and the output condition of the operation display pattern are checked, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined effective period is started by performing the above-described specific sound output of the blackout. It is continuously output in any of the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is also compared after the predetermined effective period is started. Since the display scene is merely switched in accordance with a predetermined schedule in any of the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), Is it a situation where the number of times that the production receptionist occurs a lot per unit time only by checking the output situation? Whether there is in the stomach situation it can be seen that is hard to determine.

  In this respect, when the output status of the special sound output with a predetermined probability is checked when the white specific sound output occurs in the figure, a relatively early period (timing) after the start of the predetermined valid period Such special sounds are generated in tx41 to tx45) because the number of occurrences per unit time is greater than that in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined effective period is started. It becomes possible to predict to some extent how much the production reception has occurred through the output situation of. Also, according to such an output mode of the special sound, it can be concealed to a certain extent which of the white specific sound output in the drawing and the black specific sound output is generated. As a result, it is expected that this will be suitably maintained also for the game interest of a player who is not good at multiple operations. In this sense, although the special sound may occur when the specific sound output occurs, it is output based on that the output condition other than the generation of the specific sound output is satisfied. For example, even if the specific sound output is generated, it is required to output the special sound so as not to be generated.

  Further, the predetermined probability as to whether or not the special sound is generated when the effect reception is generated may be changed according to the number of effect receptions generated within the predetermined effective period, or the like. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the white specific sound output in the drawing and the black specific sound output in the drawing is occurring.

  Also, with regard to special sounds, in view of the fact that the output frequency is lower than that of the specific sound, it has a time from the output of the specific sound until it is muted, and a time value longer than the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as one. In this example, the time value is set to be twice the "automation time TY2". Further, when outputting a new special sound when the previous special sound is being output, it is desirable that the previous special sound be interrupted (interrupted) to output a new special sound.

  However, in such a pachinko machine 1, since the same effects as in the case where the operation is performed multiple times can be enjoyed only by performing the operation by the long press, the number of players who perform the operation multiple times decreases. There is a concern that the significance as an effect requiring multiple operations may be lost. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 187, the operation by the player is long-pressed in a period after the operation by the player is started at least at timing tx42 within the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48). In a state which is performed as a mode of single operation between a state which is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and a state which is performed as a mode of single operation (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48) The display of a specific image (specific display) is permitted only when the specific display condition is satisfied.

  That is, in this case, in order to confirm the specific image, it is required to perform the operation as a single-shot operation mode, not at least a long press operation. Therefore, a plurality of automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple operation) functions are not used It becomes possible to give meaning in presentation to performing a round operation (such as a continuous hit), and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, in this presentation example, in order to confirm the specific image, it is not only the condition that the operation is performed as the one-shot operation mode, but the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since the appearance difficulty of the specific image itself is increased, the operation (the continuous hitting etc.) is performed multiple times without using the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple operation) function whenever the predetermined effective period occurs. Even if you try to do), it will seem as if you are challenged to display a specific image with high difficulty of appearance, and you can operate multiple times without using automatic multiple strike (automatic multiple operation) function It will be expected to promote understanding of the surrounding people.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 187, a specific non-operation time (here, twice the time of the “automation time TY2”) elapses without generation of a new effect reception from the timing at which the previous effect reception occurred. The display of a specific image within a predetermined effective period as the above “specific display condition” that the effect hit is obtained in the predetermined effect drawing performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed (Specific indication) is supposed to appear. In this respect, in the predetermined effect lottery, when the jackpot has won the jackpot (or, depending on the operation mode within the predetermined effective period can be a successful display can appear (high hit probability expected When it is in the production situation), the production hit is obtained with a probability of 70%, but when the big hit judgment is a big hit in the big hit (or the operation within a predetermined effective period No matter how much the game is performed, it is possible to obtain a production hit only with a probability of 30% in the case of a production situation where a success display can not be made to appear (a production situation where the big hit expectation is low). Therefore, when the display (specific display) of the specific image appears within the predetermined effective period, it is suggested that the expectation for the jackpot symbol to appear is high, and the game interest can be suitably maintained. In addition, as said "specific display conditions", it is not restricted to this, The specific non-operation time (here, "automation time TY2", without generation | occurrence | production of a new production reception occurring from the timing which the previous production reception produced | generated) Only twice that of “a time that is twice as long as it has been reached” and “a performance hit has been obtained in a predetermined effect drawing” is adopted as the “specific display condition”, and when this is satisfied A display of a specific image (specific display) may be made to appear, or another condition may be adopted as the “specific display condition”.

  In addition to the type described above as the mode of the predetermined effect lottery, for example, depending on the operation mode within the predetermined effective period is in the effect situation (effect situation where the big hit expectation is low) that can be made to appear a success display Sometimes, a chance of getting a hit per 0% probability (or do not perform the drawing lottery itself), but the situation where the success display can not be made to appear regardless of how much the operation is performed within the predetermined effective period. When it is in (representation situation where the jackpot expectation is low), it may be an aspect in which a performance hit can be obtained with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, since it is definitely shown that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, there is no need to perform a barren operation for causing the specific display to appear. Is made recognizable within a predetermined effective period. In this case, it is desirable to use, as the specific display, the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined validity period ends without the success display appearing.

  Further, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 187, when a new effect reception occurs while the display (specific display) of a specific image is being performed (timing tx 46), the specification is made at that time The display is made to be non-display, and the output is continued on condition that the state where the operation by the player is not performed (the state where a new effect reception is not generated) is maintained. There is.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 187, in order to make a specific effect result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period (timing tx 41 to tx 48), it is at least found that the effect reception more than a specific number of times occurs. The display condition 3 is satisfied at timing tx 47 at which the 11th production reception (the 11th specific sound output) is generated, and the display scene 3 that was in the display state at that time is cut off (( The process of causing the success display to appear as the operation display pattern in the form of interruption) is performed. The contents of this success display are, for example, the one for destroying the enemy character which has been in a battle with the sword in the display scenes 3 to 5 and the effect contents of the parts (display scenes 3 to 5) repeated in the operation display pattern It is desirable to be related. In addition, when the success indication appears, it is desirable that it is suggested that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit in the big hit judgment is high.

  In addition, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx 47 at which the 11th production reception (the 11th specific sound output in white) occurs, the predetermined effective period is ended at that time, and the new production reception is It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at timings later than timing tx 47, no white specific sound or special sound is generated newly in the drawing, or no specific display appears.

  Although FIG. 188 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 187, although the operation in the mode of the one-shot operation by the player is at an interval shorter than the grace time TY1, It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears when it takes a long time which can not be said and is repeated.

  As shown in FIG. 188, even if the operation in the single-shot operation mode by the player is repeated over a long time, as long as the operations are repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1, After the timing tx 52 when the operation is started within a predetermined effective period (timing tx 51 to tx 56), the specific sound is output intermittently and continuously, and the operation display pattern is displayed according to a predetermined schedule. Progress. According to such a presentation mode, even when the operation is performed only four times within the predetermined effective period, it is possible to create a presentation situation as if about 20 continuous hitting operations are being performed. become able to. However, from this point of view, there is a concern that the meaning of performing the continuous hitting operation can not be understood from the person performing the continuous hitting operation seriously, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined effective period is “Tx1”, the length of the grace period TY1 is “Tx2”, and a specific effect result (successful display) within the predetermined effective period is displayed. When it is assumed that the number of effect receptions required at least for appearance is “EU”, these numerical values are set so that the relationship “[Tx1 / Tx2] <EU” is established. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is repeatedly performed at the last moment when the grace time TY 1 elapses and the specific sound and the display pattern at the time of operation are continuously output, the operation situation is generated by these operations. The number of effect receptions that occur is less than the number (EU) of the effect receptions required at the minimum for the appearance of a specific effect result (success display) within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to prevent the appearance of a specific effect result (success display) when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, the continuous hitting operation is performed seriously It will be expected to maintain the game interest of someone who is suitable. In order to obtain such effects more reliably, the number (EU) of the number of effect receptions required at least for causing a specific effect result (successful display) to appear within a predetermined effective period is: It is strictly required to set the numerical value calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2” as a numerical value larger than the integer value obtained by rounding it up to an integer.

  In this respect, in this effect example, “Tx1 / Tx2” is calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2”, which is the minimum number of effect acceptance (EU) required to cause a specific effect result (successful display) to appear within a predetermined effective period. Since “11 times” which is twice or more times the integer value when the numerical value is rounded to an integer is set, a failure display is displayed at timing tx 56 when the predetermined valid period ends. Become. That is, in this case, since the failure display appears due to the lack of the number of times of operation, it is determined that the effect can not be recognized whether the jackpot expectation is low or high.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, the display of the specific image is allowed to appear only when it is in the state of being performed as a one-shot operation mode and the specific display condition is satisfied. It is. In this point, in this presentation example, when the above “specific non-operation time” required to display the specific image is “Tx3”, the relationship “[Tx1 / Tx3] <EU” is established. In order to set each of these numbers. In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to cause the specific display to appear each time the user operates within a predetermined effective period, the number of effect receptions that occur within the predetermined effective period is within the predetermined effective period. The number of times (EU) required to receive the minimum effect required to make a specific effect result (successful indication) appear. That is, in this case, an effect selection function of whether to attempt to cause the specific display to appear until the specific display result (success display) ceases to appear is played, and the specific display is displayed. It will be expected to improve the fun of the game, since it will not be possible to make an attempt to make it appear casually over and over again, so that it will be possible to enhance the stage effect when the attempt is made. It will be.

  Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 188, when the timing tx 55a when the predetermined effective period is ended with the success display not appearing, the display scene 4 which was in the display state at that time is cut off (( A process of causing a failure display to appear as an operation display pattern in the form of interruption) is performed. The content of this failure display is, for example, a defeat to an enemy character who has had a battle with a sword in display scenes 3 to 5 and so on, and the effect contents of portions (display scenes 3 to 5) repeated in the operation display pattern It is desirable to be related. In addition, when a failure indication appears, it is desirable that it is suggested that the degree of expectation of winning a big hit is low in the big hit judgment.

  On the other hand, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 187 and FIG. 188, the specific sound in the output state when the predetermined effective period ends even if either the success indication or the failure indication appears. Although there is no possibility of being interrupted (interrupted), this is as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently thereafter, those specific sounds will be muted while the success or failure display is being performed, and then the success or failure display will be displayed. It is set to be a relationship to be hidden.

  In this embodiment, the suspension time TY1 is set after the player's operation state ends, and until the suspension time TY1 elapses, the specific sound output of the black outline in the non-operation state is displayed. Although the process is performed at least four times or more, the number of "specific sound output with blackout" generated in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set to be at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the specific sound output of the black outline in the non-operation state is at least twice or more in the non-operation state. As it is generated, it is possible to have a feeling as if the continuous hitting operation (a plurality of operations) is continued even in the non-operation state.

  In this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 to 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. Thus, a depiction in which the ally character makes a fight with the enemy character with a sword appears. Therefore, a specific display may be performed in which at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2 indicates the jackpot expectation. According to such a configuration, if the user is likely to miss the specific display, the user can not reconfirm the non-operation state until the grace time TY1 elapses. Thus, it is possible to provide the effect of selecting which of the disadvantage of being wasted by that amount and the disadvantage of not being able to confirm the specific display.

  Also, in this embodiment, the continuous hitting operation is allowed in such a manner that the effect reception occurs at an interval shorter than the interval (the automation time TY2) at which the effect reception occurs when the operation by the long press is performed. Thus, it is possible to realize a high degree of freedom in operation by the player (see FIG. 186). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous hitting operation is performed, the progressing mode of the display scene in the operation display pattern is made to be the same as when the long pressing operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the attraction not much felt by performing the high speed continuous hitting operation, and it is expected that the excessive operation on the operation button 410 is suppressed and the risk of breakage etc. is reduced. Will be

  In addition, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, when performing effects of a type that requires at least an effect reception required more than a specific number of times, an operation by long press is performed only within the predetermined effective period It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception more than the specific number of times occurs. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception more than the specific number of times is generated only when the operation by the long press is performed over a half of the predetermined effective period.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 and FIG. 188, the time (specific non-operation time) that is twice as large as the “automation time TY2” has elapsed since no new effect reception occurred from the timing when the previous effect reception occurred. Although the display (specific display) of the specific image is made to appear at the time when it is performed, the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as a specific non-operation time, any time value within a range which is twice or more of "automation time TY2" and which makes grace time TY1 the upper limit value (race time TY1 or less) is used. While in the non-operation state, in the state where the specific sound of the blackout is output in two or more times (as if the continuous hitting operation is being performed in the non-operation state), It is possible to produce an effect as if the display (specific display) of a specific image appeared based on the number of times of simulated operation in the non-operation state (the number of times of output of the specific sound with black outline in the figure) reaches a predetermined value. It is possible.

[A game machine equipped with a plurality of effect operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the game machine has been described in which the dish unit 320 is provided with the effect operation unit 400 that allows the player to perform the pressing operation and presents the effect image to the player. With reference to 189 to 240, a gaming machine which can further enhance the player's operation will be described. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 189 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operating unit 5000. FIG. 190 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operating unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed in the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above will be described, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those described above, and the description will be appropriately omitted.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side in a front view. The sword effect operation unit 5000 includes a sword 5010 having a blade 5011, a handle 5012, and a collar 5013 sandwiched between the blade 5011 and the handle 5012, and the blade 5011 of the sword 5010. A sword decorative body 5001 comprising a sheath 5020 that can be

  The sword decorative body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath portion 5020 can be moved in the left-right direction in a front view. In addition, the sword portion 5010 is provided movably in the removal direction and the insertion direction. The sword portion 5010 is normally in the state of an inserted sword in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and in the effect of the removal sword, the sword portion 5011 becomes a removal sword state in which the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player. Then, the sword unit 5010 in the scrapped state can function as an operation unit that receives the setting operation by the player and returns to the sword state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 191, an execution opportunity of the scout effect accompanied by the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (the sword decorative body 5001) will be described. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of effect patterns in the effect mode in which the scout effect can be executed, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the scout preparation transition effect according to the type of fluctuation pattern. It shows and shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of (B) stroke main effects.

  In the effect pattern described here, a pattern in which a scout main effect is performed after execution of a scout preparation transition effect execution, a pattern in which a scout sword main effect is performed without performing a scout preparation transition effect in advance, a scout preparation transition effect is performed in advance Despite this, there is a pattern in which the scribble main effect is not performed, and a pattern in which the scribble preparation transition effect is not performed or the scribble main effect is not performed. Further, the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the scribble main effect is Two patterns, an aura-member-attached form and an aura-member-free form, are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 191 (A), according to the type of fluctuation pattern determined in the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the presence or absence of the execution of the transfer preparation transition effect is drawn at random. Here, the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for big hit at the time of big hit, a fluctuation pattern for small hit at the time of small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for outlying fluctuation at the time of outfall, which results in advantageous results for the player. It is set so that the probability that scout preparation transition production will be performed will become high, so that it is a pattern. Specifically, the scout preparation transition effect is performed with a probability of 50% in the case of the variation pattern for big hit variation, and is performed with a probability of 30% in the case of a variation pattern for small variation, and in the case of a variation pattern for outlying variation It is executed with a probability of 20%. Note that the out-of-out fluctuation time change pattern may change the probability according to the presence or absence of reach production so that the probability that scout preparation transition effect is performed is higher than when the reach production is not performed. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), according to the type of fluctuation pattern and the presence or absence of the scout preparation transition effect, the presence or absence of the scout main effect is drawn. If the scout preparation transition effect is executed even if the type of the variation pattern is the same, the probability that the scout main effect is performed is set higher than the case where the scout preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set such that the probability that the scribble main effect will be executed is higher as the variation pattern is an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the variation pattern has a low degree of preference, it is set that the probability that the scribble main effect will be executed is higher if the scout preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when scout preparation transition effect is executed with the out-of-variation fluctuation pattern, the probability of scribbling main effect being executed is higher than when scout preparation transition effect is not executed with the small hitting fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, the sweepout main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sweepout preparation transition effect.

  In addition, when the scout main effect is executed, the scout preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability that the scout main effect with the aura member is performed is higher as the fluctuation pattern is advantageous for the player. Is set to be Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hitting variation, the sweep main effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member by the sword movement of the sword decoration body)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 192 to FIG. 195, the extraction operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the extraction effect (extraction preparation transition effect and extraction effect) will be described. Further, the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself capable of accepting the player's operation of the sword, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 192) 193) and the aura member 5035 are provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 for housing the sword 5010 (the sword 5011), and the sword 5010 is united with the member on the door frame 3 (aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of the integrated decoration (FIGS. 194 and 195).

  FIG. 192 is a state transition diagram for explaining the extraction operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself, wherein The state of removal of the sword, (C) shows the state of removal of the second blade. FIG. 193 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. 193 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is extracted from the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

  As shown in FIG. 192 (A), the sword decorative body 5001 in the normal state is a state in which the sword portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. As shown in FIG. 192 (B), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the scout operation in the scout preparation transition effect, only the portion of the Habaraki 5011a fitted to the hand of the blade 5011 is pulled out of the sheath 5020 and visible to the player It becomes the first best sword state to become. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), the sword decorative body 5001 after the scout operation in the scout main effect is a second scout in which the sword portion 5011 is further pulled out of the sheath portion 5020 and most of the sword is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second scraped state can function as an operation means capable of accepting the setting operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided in the blade 5011 is configured to be independently operable independently of the removal operation of the blade 5011. In the case where the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is a sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from a knapsack state (FIG. 192A) to a first scout state (FIG. 192B). In the inside of the part 5020, the movable range is operated as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 193A) to the open state (FIG. 193B), and the blade 5011 is deformed. For this reason, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 also in the change process in which the blade 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first extraction state to the second extraction state (FIG. 192C). Although described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided to be positioned below the blade 5011a of the blade 5011 even with the maximum operation, the player can not visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first extraction state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade 5011 as shown in FIG. 193 (A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade 5011, and engages with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, and the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031 and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, the rotational force is converted into rightward linear motion of the rack 5031a and leftward linear motion of the rack 5032a by rotating the pinion 5033 counterclockwise in a front view by driving means (not shown), as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop at positions (opened state) where they project outward from the outer shape of the blade 5011 respectively.

  Further, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on a blade shaft 5011b is included below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to make the sword 5001 (the aura member 5030) emit light and decorate.

  Here, with respect to the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decorative body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the state of the knapsack to the state of the first extraction sword, the state changes from the closed state to the open state. In the above example, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first extraction state to the second extraction state, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The aura member 5030 may start its operation (deformation) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extraction state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set by the time the sword decoration body 5001 in the second scraped state is set to function as the operation means (not limited to the mode of performing the maximum operation, including the mode of stopping the operation halfway It should just be.

  FIG. 194 is a state transition diagram for explaining the removal operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the case where the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020, (A) a cutting state, (B) a first cutting state, (C) The second state of the sword is shown. FIG. 195 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 195 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is extracted from the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 193 and 194 described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description will not be repeated.

  As shown in FIGS. 194 (A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 for housing the sword 5010 (blade 5011) is the above-mentioned sword 5010 (blade 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided on itself is movable in the lateral direction, it is movable in the vertical direction. The aura member 5035 is provided to surround the outer periphery of the blade 5011. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the sword portion 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the knives state Operates in accordance with (1) First sword state (2) Second sword state. This enables the sword 5010 (the sword 5011) to be united with the frame-side member (the aura member 5035) and to be regarded as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. 195 (A). The aura member 5035 is a hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so that the upper end thereof is below the hook 5011 a of the blade 5011 in the completely housed state, and surrounding the aura member 5036; Right and left racks 5036a and 5036b, and right and left pinions 5037a and 5037b meshing with the right and left racks 5036a and 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by driving means (not shown), and the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in a front view, and both pinions are also engaged. The rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b are converted into an upward linear motion, and as shown in FIG. 195 (B), the surrounding aura member 5036 unites with the blade 5011 and stops at a position where it forms a second extraction state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although illustration is omitted, the blade 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and it is possible to make the blade 5011 and the aura member 5035 emit light.

  Here, with respect to the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the change in state of the sword decorative body 5001 (sword portion 5010) (set state-first cut state-second cut state). Although the example which unites with 5011 was shown, it does not restrict to this. The aura member 5035 may start operation (combination) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extraction state. The final aspect based on the effect pattern set by the time the sword decoration body 5001 in the second scraped state is set to function as the operation means (not limited to the complete appearance state formed by the maximum operation, the intermediate appearance formed by stopping the operation on the way It should just be able to become an aura member attachment form of a state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the first sword state from the inserted sword state.

(Example of scribbling effect using a sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 196 to FIG. 201, the scribbling effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. In the following, when the scout preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the scribble main effect is not executed (at (X6) and (X7)) The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decorative body 5001 will be described for the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the scribble main effect is executed. 196 to 200 are transition diagrams of scribble effect effects. FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the operation effective period according to the operation means.

  In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. It starts forming a reach state (FIG. 196 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the display area, and in the central display area, an effect image that suggests execution of a scout effect (moving of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed. Specifically, after the image of two warriors facing each other and starting to go to an image (Fig. 196 (X2)) is displayed, an image (Fig. 196) in which one samurai holds the handle and holds the sword in the sheath (Fig. 196 (X3) is displayed. Here, the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provides an effect that suggests that the sword decorative body 5001 is movable. During this time, the sword decorative body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the state of the inserted sword (FIG. 192 (A)).

  Next, when the scout preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of fluctuation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIGS. 197 (X4) and (X5), the scout preparation transition effect is When it is started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face with the eyes of the warrior holding the sword closed with the above-mentioned image is displayed, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed over time. At this time, by changing the state of the sword decoration 5001 from the state of the sword to the state of the first sword, a preparation preparation transition effect is performed. In addition, if the scout preparation transition effect is performed, the scribbling main effect is easier to be executed thereafter than when it is not performed. Therefore, the scout preparation transition effect can be said to be an expectation degree effect that indicates the expected degree at which the scout main effect is performed by the movement of the sword decorative body 5001. In the scout preparation transition effect, by swinging the sword decorative body 5001 in the first scraped state up and down, the player is expected to further change the sword decorative body 5001 to the second scraped state. Good. Note that the vertical movement of the sword decorative body 5001 in the first extraction state is performed to such an extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player in the case of the aura member-attached configuration. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed, the sword decorative body 5001 may be kept in the state of the sword, and the image shown in FIG. 196 (X3) may be continuously displayed.

  Here, in the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent scout main effect is a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of this scout preparation transition effect (FIG. 193 (A ) Is moved as much as possible from the movable range to the open state (FIG. 193 (B)), and the blade 5011 is deformed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5011 in the first scraped state can be viewed by the player from the hand of the blade 5011 to the portion of the Haberaki 5011a, but as described above, the aura member 5030 is the Haberaki 5011a of the blade 5011a. Since it is provided at the lower side, there is no fear that the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even if the aura member 5030 is maximally operated. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first extraction state to the second extraction state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state functions as an operation means capable of accepting the player's operation of the sword, and at the same time, the expectation is increased by the form of the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

  Then, after the scout preparation transition effect is finished, if the scribbling main effect is not executed by the lottery based on the type of the variation pattern and the scout preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Sweats spread on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 197 (X6)), and the central decorative pattern is left at the center of the screen, along with the image that the warrior gives up on the timing when the central decorative pattern displayed fluctuating is stopped and displayed. And it is stopped and displayed in the stop mode different from the right side decorative design, that is, the release mode (here, “6”) (FIG. 197 (X7)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the first extraction state to the insertion state at the time of FIG. 197 (X6), and maintains the insertion state. That is, the reach effect is ended without the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operation means.

  On the other hand, when the scout main effect is executed, after the scout preparation transition effect is finished, an image in which the Ii is cut is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decorative body 5001 is the second scout. It becomes a state. Here, the form with the aura member with which the aura member 5030 can be visually recognized in the form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 can not be visually recognized. A form without an aura member capable of visually recognizing the non-deformed blade portion 5011 is provided.

  First, with reference to FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is the aura member-free configuration will be described. When the scout main effect starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the eye is displayed from the eye-magnified image of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. At 198 (A1), an image for cutting out the sword held and cutting the other warrior is displayed (FIG. 198 (A2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 198 (A1), and the sword portion 5011 becomes visible from the player.

  Next, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second state of removal and the predetermined period elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by the player to perform the sword operation, that is, the handle 5012 of the sword 5010 where the player jumps out of the sheath 5020 In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting an operation of pushing the blade portion 5011 downward so that the blade portion 5011 fits in the sheath portion 5020, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the scout operation of the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect that urges an operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword having the same form as that of the second sword state of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message "Put the sword!" A3). In addition, in order to indicate that the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operation effective period, the LED of the internal LED substrate 5011 c is blinked and emitted. In addition, it is preferable that the image in the operation promotion effect is an image related to a series of occurrences, so that the operation effect image is displayed on the front so as to be superimposed on the immediately preceding Ii break scene image (FIG. 198 (A2)). (See FIG. 204 (G2) described later).

  Then, when the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 during the operation effective period and performs the katana operation to put the sword 5011 in the sheath 5020 and the sword decorative body 5001 is put in the state of the katana, An effect is performed after the operation according to the degree of expectation which results in an advantageous result, and the effect is ended together with a notice of a hit of the symbol type (FIG. 199). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, a cut effect image is displayed in a flashy manner in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 199 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. Stop the other warrior at the same timing and stop with the same stop mode as the left side decoration pattern and the right side decoration pattern at the center of the screen, that is, the big hit mode (here "7") It is displayed (FIG. 199 (C2)). On the other hand, in the case where the symbol type is disjoint, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly than in the case of the big hit (FIG. 199 (D1)). A stop mode different from the left decoration pattern and the right decoration pattern in the center of the screen with an image that can not be settled on the other party's samurai at the stop display timing, and the stop mode, that is, the disappointing mode (here "6") The display is stopped at (Fig. 199 (D2)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is in a form with an aura member will be described. When the scout main effect starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the eye is displayed from the eye-magnified image of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. 200 (B1)), an image for cutting out the sword held and cutting the other warrior is displayed (FIG. 200 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first extraction state to the second extraction state at the time of FIG. 200 (B1), and the blade 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 (right aura member 5031 and left aura member 5032). Is visible to the player. Here, the blade 5011 is already deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time of the state change from the first state to the second state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, the aura member 5030 changes from the closed state to the open state after only the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player in the second scraping state so that the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form a form with an aura member. It is sufficient that the sword decorative body 5001 be in a configuration with an aura member in the second extraction state before the operation effective period starts. However, since the sword decorative body 5001 is already in the second cutting state in which the player can operate the sword, the appearance of the aura member 5030 can surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that the player may cause an erroneous operation. Therefore, the player can recognize the aura member 5030 while the series of movements from the first extraction state to the second extraction state is performed as in the present example, and the sword decoration 5001 becomes the second extraction state. It is preferable that the operation effective period be started promptly.

  Further, the images in FIGS. 200B1 and 200B are the same as the images in FIGS. 198A1 and A2 described above, and the player can see that the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member only by viewing the image. It makes it impossible to judge whether it is not. By actually looking at the sword decoration 5001, the player can grasp whether it is the aura member-attached form or the aura member-free form. Thus, the sword decorative body 5001 can be made to pay attention to the sword decorative body 5001 before it functions as the operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means, and enjoy the operation effect without confusion Can. At this time, the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 do not have to be the same as described above, and may be images similar to the extent to which the player can be instructed to look at the sword decoration 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in the warrior image (differences in eye color and effect effects).

  Then, when the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player becomes an effective operation effective period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same form with the aura member as the sword decorative body 5001. It will be displayed (FIG. 200 (B3)). The subsequent effects are the same as in FIG. In the case of the aura member-attached mode, the effect images in FIGS. 199 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed more prominently than in the aura member-free mode.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 201, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the operation effective period in the scout effect in which the scout preparation transition effect and the scout main effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 201, when the reach effect is started (time t0), an Ii effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and first, the sword decorative body 5001 is put into the first state from the sword state as a sword preparation transition effect. The state changes to the scraped state (time t1). At this time, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state when the effect pattern in the form with the aura member is set, but the aura member 5030 plays a game in the first extraction state even when the aura member 5030 is in the open state. It is provided so that it can not be seen by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first removal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration 5001 is further changed to the second removal state, and in the case of changing it, whether or not the sword decoration 5001 is a form with an aura member. I can not do it. However, when the scout preparation shift effect is executed, the scribble main effect is executed, and the possibility of becoming a form with an aura member is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced. In addition, even if the scribble main effect is not executed, since the sword movable suggestion effect (FIG. 196 (X3)) is executed by the effect display device 1600 before the start of the scribble preparation transition effect, the player can move the sword. As the movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, it is possible to capture a state change (movable) from the sword state of the sword decorative body 5001 to the first extraction state.

  Then, when the scout preparation transition effect is finished, the scout main effect is subsequently started, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first scraped state to the second scraped state (time t2). Thereafter, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the operation effective period is started, and the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operation means (time t3). When the operation effective period comes, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of the presence effects is performed. Then, when the player's operation is detected during the operation effective period (time tx), an effect is performed after the operation. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 returns from the second state to the sword state by the player's operation of the sword. Then, when the operation valid period set in advance is ended and the reach state is ended (time t4), the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whereby a series of presence effects are ended ((4) Time t5). The operation valid period may end upon detection of an operation by the player, as indicated by a dashed dotted line in the drawing. In addition, when the operation is not detected during the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 is automatically returned from the second extraction state to the knife state at the end of the operation valid period.

  Here, a mode in which the player is in the second scraped state of the sword decorative body 5001 (aura member) during a predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second scraped state to when the operation effective period starts A period longer than the operation valid period (time t4 to t3) is secured as a mode confirmation period in which it can be confirmed whether the mode is the additional mode or the light emission mode or the like. That is, even when the operation portion (sword portion 5010) operable by the player becomes the operation position (second cutting state) functioning as the operation means, the operation acceptance is immediately started (the operation valid period is generated). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. By this, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword decorative body 5001, and expands the sense of expectation for the subsequent development (for example, the sense of expectation increases in the case of the form with the aura member), or prepares the mind. Since the operation effective period starts as soon as the second cutting state is reached, and it shifts to the operation effect without being able to confirm the mode of the operation means, there is a concern that the interest of the game is lowered. It can be wiped out.

  In addition, the scribbling effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed in a series of presence effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the movable effect (time t0 to t3) as the movable body of the sword decorative body 5001. The effect associated with the operation effect (time t3 to t4) as the operation means is used. This makes it possible to impress the player with a variety of surprises and effects in switching the function of the sword decorative body 5001. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun caused by the uniform effect by the conventional operation means. Can.

  In addition, although the example of the above-mentioned effect demonstrated the case where the aura member 5030 was provided in the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself, and the blade part 5011 deform | transformed by the aura member 5030, the aura member 5035 is a sheath part of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword unit 5010 is provided on the unit 5020 and united with the frame-side member (the aura member 5035) to form an integrated decorative body.

  As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes operation means capable of changing (deforming or combining) the modes of the members (the sword portion 5010 and the aura member 5030) of the same kind as the decorative movable body having a general appearance. doing. And the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 (Kate state, first scraped state, second scraped state, form without aura member and form with aura member) is the game ball to the one starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 It is determined based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 191). Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display produces an advantageous result for the player by the change of the aspect of the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the operation means (the sword decorative body 5001). Since it is possible, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  In addition, before the sword decorative body 5001 becomes the second scraped state (operation position) operable by the player, the degree of expectation is suggested by changing the state of the sword decorative body 5001 from the inserted sword state to the first scraped state. doing. Further, the appearance of the aura members 5030 and 5035 in the state change from the first extraction state to the second extraction state suggests the degree of expectation. Thus, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the appearance of the first extraction state and the aura member) in the process of changing from the insertion state to the second extraction state (operation position). The player has a strong interest in the operating means until the operating means becomes operable. Also, when the state change of the operating means and the indication of the expectation are performed separately, specifically, when the action to the operation position is performed after the suggestion of the expectation is performed in advance, the expectation is high. If it becomes an aspect, there is a concern that the player operates erroneously even though the operating means is not yet at the operable position when the player grasps it, but the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is operated Since the state change to the position and the expectation indication are simultaneously advanced, it is possible to prevent the erroneous operation as described above.

  In the first state of the first sword described above, only the handle 5011a of the blade 5011 is extracted from the sheath 5012 so that the player can not visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A portion of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be visible in a single-stroke state. At this time, the removal amount in the first removal state is set to be less than the maximum removal amount in the second removal state (operation position). Here, when the aura member 5030 (5035) is in the second extraction state, it is in the complete appearance state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first removal state, the player can have a higher sense of expectation at the time of the first removal state. It can raise interest in the changes that follow.

  In addition, when the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first scraping state, the configuration with the aura member at the stage of the scrapping preparation transition effect (high expectation) Since the player can grasp and have high expectations, discouragement when the sculpting main effect is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the scout preparation transition effect is performed, the emotion of the player is greatly shaken by the presence or absence of the scout main effect, and a highly entertaining effect can be provided.

(Modified example 1-scribbling effect using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 202 to 205, scribbling effect is performed in reach production, and the sculpting operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the scout effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. The case will be described. FIG. 202 to FIG. 204 are examples of transition diagrams of scribbling effect according to the first modification. FIG. 205 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 of the modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. In addition, the description similar to the above-mentioned blowout effect (FIG. 196-FIG. 201) is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  Here, the effect pattern (S1 (Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2)) in which the scribble preparation transition effect is not performed or the scribble main effect is not performed, and after the scout preparation transition effect is executed The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 for the effect patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4)) in which the main effects are performed. The transition of the transition and the sword decorative body 5001 will be described.

  When reach effect is started, presence effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 202 (Y1)), and effect that suggests operation of the operation button 410 by display of the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 202 (Y2)). Then, when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, the image display of the operation button to be the operation target and the gauge display of the operation valid period are performed to perform the operation promotion effect for prompting the player to operate (FIG. At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same light emission mode, so that the player can easily operate the operation button 410. It should be noted that the light emission of the operation button 410 is ended when the operation by the player is detected.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach effect is finished when the player does not perform the staging transition effect and the sword main effect, and if the player has detected a pressing operation on the operation button 410, in the case where the result is an out result. An image notifying the outlier result ("767") is displayed (Fig. 203 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is ended. At this time, there is no change in the sword decorative body 5001 and the operation button 410.

  In addition, when the scout main effect is performed after the scout preparation transition effect execution, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the first scout when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected. A removal preparation preparation effect is performed (Fig. 203 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the white character of "tengu" is displayed on the blackout screen (Fig. 203 (F1)), and an image is displayed where the warrior of the ally tries to put a hand on the sword. (FIG. 203 (F2)). Next, a blowout effect is started in which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first removal state to the second removal state (form with an aura member) (FIG. 203 (F3), FIG. 204 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first scraped state to the second scraped state (form with an aura member) by the scribble main effect, FIG. Unlike the image of the samurai in Figure 204 (G1), an image in which lightning is running is interruptedly displayed on the blackout screen as shown in Figure 203 (F3), and the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (the form with the aura member or not And the strength of the lightning show the degree of anticipation to win the battle.

  The subsequent effects are the same as those of FIG. 198 (A2), (A3) and FIG. 199 described above, and when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extraction state and the predetermined period elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is In order to function as the operation means that can effectively receive the operation of (1), an operation effective period for effectively detecting the setting operation of the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. Then, the player is prompted to operate the sword in the operation effective period (FIG. 204 (G2)), and notification of the symbol type (hit or miss) is performed by the player's sword operation (FIG. 204 (G3) or G4).

  Subsequently, with reference to a timing chart shown in FIG. 205, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player causes the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 to start. When reach effect is started (time t0), an operation effective period of the operation button 410 occurs at an early stage, and operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates (time ty) within the operation valid period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 starts state change, and first, the state of the sword is changed to the first state of extraction. Here, in the first state, the player can not determine whether the aura member 5030 appears (whether the blade 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first state to the second state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated to cause the sword decorative body 5001 to function as operation means. An effective period occurs, and an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is performed (time t3), and the player operates within the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 (time t3 to t4) ((t3) At time tx), the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). When the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) of the operation button 410 set in advance, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the final form (first It may be made to be deformed and changed in state at once in the form with the aura member in the second extraction state. Also, the state change timing from the first extraction state to the second extraction state is changed to the second extraction state after a predetermined time elapses in response to the player's operation of the operation button 410, that is, the first extraction state. You may When the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001 set in advance (time t3 to t4), the sword decorative body 5001 It is returned from the state of the sword to the state of the sword.

  In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 by the player. The extraction operation start timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the insertion operation start timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 (time tx). As described above, according to which operation means of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated, the movement of the sword decoration 5001 is reversed (the extraction operation and the insertion operation). The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation effective period of one operation means, it becomes invalid.

  Thus, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the form (final form) when the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operation means is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player (for example, the form with the aura member with the sword decorative body 5001 deformed and changed in state) The second state of the sword can be shown. As a result, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further enhanced, and the player's desire to operate can be enhanced.

  Further, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, effect images corresponding to the deformation and state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIG. 203 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. Since (G1) and (G2) are displayed, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(Modified example 2-stage aura sweeper effect using operation buttons)
In the following, referring to FIGS. 206 to 210, based on the first modification, the appearance degree of the aura member 5035 in the aura member-attached form of the sword decorative body 5001, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade 5011 A case where the degree (aura level) is changed in accordance with the number of times the player operates the operation button 410 will be described. FIG. 206 to FIG. 210 show examples of effect transition diagrams of the scribbling effect of the second modification. The description of the same effects as those described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  There are 0 to 3 stages in the aura level provided here. The aura level 0 indicates the completely accommodated state (FIG. 195A) in which the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player. The aura level 3 is a complete appearance in which the aura member 5035 is fully visible from the player by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 in the second extraction state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the insertion state (FIG. 195 (B) is shown. The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visible to the player by a third of the full appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visible to the player for two thirds of the full appearance state.

  Here, with the effect patterns (in the figure (Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2)) in which the scribble preparation transition effect is not performed or the scribble main effect is not performed, there is no scribble preparation transition effect Is a case where the scribble main effect is performed, and the effect pattern (form with aura member complete appearance state (aller level 3)) of the sword decorative body 5001 by one operation of the operation button 410 (Z1) to (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) to (G4)) and a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 changes stepwise Screen transition of the effect display device 1600, state transition of the operation button 410, and a sword decorative body for the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4)) Explain 5001 operation transition That.

  In the first modification described above, the final form (the form at the time of operation) of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 once, but in the second modification, the step form is performed stepwise by the operation of the operation button 410 a plurality of times. It is characterized in that a step operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade 5011 is performed.

  First, in the effect pattern in which the scout preparation transition effect is not performed or the scout main effect is not performed, that is, the sword decorative body 5001 does not change state even when the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. The same effect transition as in (Y1) to (Y3) to FIG. 203 (E1) (E2) is followed (FIG. 206 (Z1) to (Z3) to FIG. 207 (H1) and (H2)).

  In addition, there is no sculpting preparation transition effect, but it is a case where scribble main effect is performed, and the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001 in the final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3)) by one operation of the operation button 410 In the effect pattern to be), after the same effect as in FIGS. 202 (Y1) to (Y3) of the above-mentioned modification 1 (FIG. 206 (Z1 to (Z3)), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected Then, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decorative body 5001 is united with the blade 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the blade 5011 in the inserted sword state, and completely appears when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second state. The state (aura level 3) is established (FIG. 207 (I1)). The aura member-attached form of the sword decorative body 5001 of the above-mentioned modification 1 is configured by the aura member 5030, and the modification 2 is configured by the aura member 5035, but other effects are the same as those of the modification 1 described above. The same effect transition as in FIG. 203 (F1) (F2) → FIG. 204 is followed (FIG. 207 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

  In addition, there is no scout preparation transition effect, but in the case where scout main effect is performed, the operation of the operation button 410 is required a plurality of times, and in the effect pattern in which the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 changes stepwise, 1 Until the operation of the second operation button 410, the same effect transition as before is followed (Fig. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)), but after the first operation, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second state In this state, the aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) in which the player does not visually recognize. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as the above-mentioned FIG. 207 (I1) (FIG. 208 (J1)).

  Next, the operation effect of the second operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 of the operation target is illuminated and decorated Is performed (FIG. 208 (J2)). Then, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the following effect is performed according to the aura levels 0 to 3 set in advance.

  First, when the aura level to be set is “0” (ie, in the case of the aura member absent form), the aura member 5035 maintains the fully accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. In the display area of the display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (after that, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and it is informed that it will return to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state. An image (in this case, a white letter "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed (Fig. 208 (J3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. 204 of the first modification in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 0 in a form without an aura member. (FIG. 208 (J4) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

  On the other hand, when the aura level to be set is any of “1” to “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is in the 1/31 state from the fully accommodated state Become. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed (Fig. 208 (J5)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is decorated to emit green light indicating the aura level 1.

  Subsequently, the operation effect of the third operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 of the operation target is illuminated and decorated Is done. At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 209 (K1)). The luminescent color of the operation button 410 at this time may be green, which indicates the aura level 1. Then, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the aura level set in advance.

  When the aura level is “1”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( Thereafter, there is no request for operation of the operation button 410, and an image (in this case, “I'm sorry” in the blackout screen) notifying that it will return to the scraped effect (presented effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second scraped state. White text is displayed, and an image showing aura level 1 is displayed (Fig. 209 (K2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is a form with an aura member in the 1/3 appearance state, and in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 209 (K 3) → FIG. 204 (G 1) to (G 4)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 1 is always displayed.

  When the aura level is “2” or “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from 1/3 appearance state to 2/3 appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is decorated to emit light in red indicating the aura level 2.

  Next, the fourth operation presentation of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with the image showing the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 of the operation target A light emission decoration operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 209 (K5)). The luminescent color of the operation button 410 at this time may be red indicating the aura level 2. Then, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the aura level set in advance.

  When the aura level is "2", the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (From this point on, there is no request for operation of the operation button 410) An image to notify returning to the sword removal effect (ideal effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state (here, "Black" screen "Iza" And the image showing the aura level is displayed (Fig. 210 (M1)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is a form with an aura member in the 2/3 appearance state, and in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 210 (M1) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 2 is always displayed.

  When the aura level is “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is in the full appearance state from the 2/3 appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 210 (L1)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is decorated to emit light in rainbow color indicating aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (after this, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and a stroke effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second stroke state. An image notifying of the return (here, a white letter "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image showing the aura level 3 is displayed (Fig. 210 (L2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is similar to FIG. 203 (F 2) → FIG. 204 of the first modification in the presentation mode (color, sound, etc.) according to aura level 3. The effect transition is followed (FIG. 210 (L3) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 3 is always displayed.

  In the above description, the aura member's unit 5035 changes the uniting degree with the blade 5011 at each operation timing when the aura level is raised to widen the range viewed by the player (increases the appearance degree). Not limited to. Even if the aura level goes up, the aura is decided when the aura level is decided without raising the appearance of the aura member 5035. A stock type combination may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is united with the blade 5011 at once so as to have the appearance degree corresponding to the level. Further, the target for increasing the appearance degree in stages is not limited to the aura member 5035, and may be a sword 5010 (sword 5011). For example, the state of the sword unit 5010 (blade unit 5011) may be changed stepwise from the first extraction state to the second extraction state.

  As described above, in the second modification, the player is requested to operate the other non-moving operation button 410 while the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operating means is in the movable state, so that a surprising novelty Operation effects can be provided, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced than in the first modification. In addition, since the player is given a plurality of operation opportunities to develop the effect in stages, the player can be made to impress a great deal of involvement in the effect and it is possible to prevent the interest in the effect from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is notified so as to be recognizable in subsequent effects, the player can feel an afterglow of the operation effects.

(Other effect pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 211 to 213, other reach effects using the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 211 to 213 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decorative body 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the inserted sword state functions as the operation means, and detects the extraction operation by the player. Second, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in a front view, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is a part of the effect display device 1600. It is operable to the front center.

  When the changing symbol forms the reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols changes to the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 211 (A1)), and the princess reach start image is displayed (FIG. 211 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decoration member SDY (a potter's wheel) which can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In the normal state, the specific decoration member SDY is stopped in a state (initial state) in which a part of the bag is visible from the player above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view. There is. In addition, at this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the state of cutting.

  In the princess reach effect, an image directed to the princess is displayed behind the eyebrow (FIG. 211 (A3)), and then an operation effect suggested image suggesting the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 211 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is started and the operation effective period to receive the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to operate the sword decorative body 5001. A gauge indicating the operation promotion image and the operation effective period is displayed (FIG. 212 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are made to move up and down little by little from the display of the operation effect suggestion image until the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period. It is also good. Then, when the player's operation of removing the sword is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The player's operation of removing the sword means an operation of pulling out the blade 5011 from the sheath 5020 so that the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decoration 5001 in the state of the sword and lifts the sword 5010 upward. When the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword, the operation of the sword by the player is detected, and a detection and notification operation of notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection and informing operation may be an operation such as movement or vibration as the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) moves up and down, or any other action that can be felt by the player via the handle 5012 grasped by the player. Just do it. Further, the detection and informing operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases the handle 5012. Therefore, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, unnecessary contact with the sword decorative body 5001 (gripping again for detection confirmation, etc.) is reduced, and the movable body is prevented from being broken or broken. Can.

  Here, the player does not appear the aura member 5030 (5035) in the removal operation by the player, but the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visible from the player when the player performs the removal operation according to the degree of expectation. You may do so.

  In the case where the end pattern is performed, when the player removes the sword operation, the specific decoration member SDY is stopped above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (initial state The state is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed (FIG. 212 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the removal mode "767" (FIG. 212 (C2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the sword state at the timing when the stop result in FIG. 212 (C2) is notified, but not limited to this, it is returned to the sword state at the timing when the detection and notification operation ends. You may do so.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when the player removes the sword operation, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is positioned at the front center (below the display area) overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is dropped and moved to a state in which only the reserved display area is visible (full fall state) (FIG. 212 (D1)) Then, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decorative body A second extraction state 5001 is maintained (FIG. 212 (D2)) In this case, a plurality of patterns of princess shadows displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided, for example, The color of the shadow or the size of the shadow, and the comment to be displayed thereafter may be made different to indicate the expectation of the lottery result by the princess reach (the degree of expectation of the winning result, the game profit when being hit, etc.)

  Then, after the sword decorative body 5001 is put into the second scraped state by the player's scraping operation, that is, when a predetermined period elapses after the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second scraped state is The sword decorative body 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 212 (D 3)). Then, when the sword decorative body 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decoration member SDY returns from the full fall state to the initial state, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility. The picture of the astonished princess is displayed after removing the bag (Fig. 213 (D4)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the position where the original sculpting operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600 notifies the hit with the princess of the smile when the result of the current variable display is the hit. An image is displayed (Fig. 213 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying of the outing is displayed together with the princess who is sad in the case of becoming out (Fig. 213 (F1) (F2)).

  It should be noted that although the detection and notification operation is performed as described above when the player removes the sword operation, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the front horizontal direction When the player can not move due to the player holding the key, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is performed. Although the effect itself proceeds even if the player does not stop gripping the sword decorative body 5001, the sword decorative body 5001 performs an operation by the player at the movable effect timing (FIG. 212 (D3) in the left and right direction of the sword decorative body 5001). When held at the position where it is performed, it causes a delay of the movable effect in the left and right direction. However, regardless of whether the left-right direction movable effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed or not, the effect to be performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the falling movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY Because the game is configured to play, there is no stagnation in game progress. The sword decorative body 5001 may be configured to immediately perform movable presentation in the left-right direction when holding of the sword decorative body 5001 is released by the player, or is configured not to perform movable presentation. May be

  As described above, in the princess reach effect, the specific decorative member SDY which suggested the operation effect (operation effective) of the sword decorative body 5001 is dropped and moved by the player's operation of removing the sword decorative body 5001 (vertical movement) by the player. At the same time, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is moved in the forward direction of the effect display device 1600 (in the operation position (at the operation position) the sword decorative body 5001 itself in which the operation is performed outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can move to the left). That is, it becomes possible to move the sword decorative body 5001 itself to an operation position different from the operation position at which the sword removal operation was performed based on the sword removal operation by the player, enhancing the player's operation value, and the player's operation motivation You can control the decline of In addition, since one operation means is configured to be able to operate in different modes (vertical direction at the time of operation, horizontal direction after operation) stepwise by the operation by the player, a presentation using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be enhanced as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  In addition, the movable display of the sword decorative body 5001 in the left and right direction is a display of effects for the purpose of performing an integrated rendering with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decoration member SDY Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position ahead of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword removal operation is performed with the sword decorative body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved and positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. In the left and right direction (the left end of the frame), the movable effect in the left and right direction may be performed. In addition, since the operation by the player of the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is an operation in the up and down direction (strap operation to pull the sword portion 5011 upward from the bottom), the sword decorative body 5001 performed after the operation is performed based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decorative body 5001 operate in a direction (horizontal direction or the like as in this example) different from the operation direction (here, the vertical direction) when the player operates.

  In addition, when a player's operation to remove the sword is detected, a detection and informing operation of notifying the player of the detection is performed via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player accurately determines the operation end timing. It can be judged. Further, since the detection and informing operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm for a certain period, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection and confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, and delaying the movable effect of the sword decorative body 5001 thereafter or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, when the movable effect can not be executed due to the contact to the sword decorative body 5001 even after the detection and notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to release the hand, and the operation is requested during the operation valid period. Since even the touch is prohibited after the end of the detection and informing operation of the operation means, the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another pattern 2 using the sword decoration 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 214 to 216, other reach effects using the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 214 to 216 are diagrams for explaining screen transition of the effect display device 1600 in reach effect including operation effects of the operation buttons 410 used in multiple planes, state transition of the operation buttons 410, and operation transition of the sword decorative member 5001. is there. Here, a pattern ((A), (B) → N) in which an expectation degree suggestion effect is performed that suggests an expectation that the variation being executed as the operation effect of the operation button 410 is a big hit A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the suggestion and development of the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 are performed as the effect will be described.

  Here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols reaches the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 214 (A)), the operation effective period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is first An operation promotion effect is started that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 214 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (the operation button 410) to be operated and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 for the operation object is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the state of the sword. Then, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the effect is performed according to the effect pattern set in advance.

  First, in the pattern in which the expectation degree suggestion effect is performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the pressing operation to the operation button 410 by the player is detected. After that (FIG. 214 (N1)), an image indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed (FIG. 215 (N2)). Thereafter, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, off) is notified (FIG. 215 (N3) or (N4)). In addition, pre-reading effect may be performed instead of the expectation degree suggestion production for the fluctuation display under execution, for example, it displays in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image (FIG. 215 (N2)) showing the degree of expectation. You may make it appear the character which changes the pending | holding display currently carried out.

  Further, in the pattern in which the suggestion and expansion of the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 are performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation to the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Is an effect image indicating that an operation effect requiring an operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed is displayed (FIG. 214 (M1)). Next, the start image of the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, a message of the title “Sweet sword chance” and the operation explanation “Please put your sword”) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the inserted sword state to the second extracted sword state. The sword decorative body 5001 at this time has an aura member-attached configuration in which the blade 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 216 (M2)). Subsequently, when the second extraction state is reached and a predetermined period of time elapses, and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the specific decoration member SDY (a pottery object) is moved up and down little by little in the initial state, In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promoting image for prompting the player to operate the sword with the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 216 (M3)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variable display is performed.

  When the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the player's operation of the sword is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (carriage object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state ( Figure 216 (M4). Then, when the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 戻 戻) is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 物 解除An image (the stop pattern "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "wonderful") is displayed (Fig. 216 (M5)). On the other hand, when the result of the variation display this time is disapproval, when the player's operation of the sword is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a prison object) is merely stopped by the small movement in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (the stop pattern "767" of the decorative symbol) notifying the removal is displayed (Fig. 216 (M6)).

  As described above, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation or expanding the operation effect of the other operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) become possible, and the player can operate the operation button 410. It is not possible to identify the subsequent deployment at the time of operating the. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and to suppress the decline in the operation desire and the decrease in the amusement of the game, which are concerned because the effect after the operation is monotonous.

  In addition, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (a pressing operation and a setting operation) at the first operation (a pressing operation of the operation button 410) and a second operation (a holding operation of the sword decorative body 5001) The player is requested on the basis of the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, the player's interest in the operation participation can be enhanced, and instead, the decrease in the game interest that is concerned can be suppressed by becoming a monotonous operation without being reflected.

  In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As a first operation opportunity, the setting operation of the sword decorative body 5001 may be an effective operation. The operation means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword decorative body 5001 rather than targeting the operation button 410 whose expectation is relatively lower than that of the first sword decorative body 5001. Is desirable.

(Another pattern 3 using the sword decoration 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 221, other reach effects using the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 217 to 221 are diagrams for explaining screen transition of the effect display device 1600 in reach effect, state transition of the operation button 410, and operation transition of the sword decorative body 5001. Here, a pattern (in the figure (A), (B1), (B2)-> O) which becomes a big hit when the specific decoration member SDY (簾) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 In the case where the specific decoration member SDY (簾 簾 物 物 ず ず 物 物 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い は はPattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) → Q if there is a chance to operate the sword decoration 5001 and R if a chance to operate the operation button 410 is given) Will be explained.

  The reach effect here is the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, if the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 217 (A)) , “Please move the movable body with one button strike” is displayed (FIG. 217 (B)), and then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is A prompting operation promoting effect is performed (FIG. 217 (C)). The display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the image of the operation means (the operation button 410) to be operated, the number of times of operation, and the operation valid period, and the operation button 410 for the operation object is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the state of the sword. Then, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the effect is performed according to the effect pattern set in advance. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (one), but may be a continuous hit (a plurality of times). In addition, in order to make it easy for the player to grasp the target (the movable body) to be moved by the operation, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is movably moved up and down in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410. You may do so. When the sword decorative body 5001 is to be operated later, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second state of the sword at this point.

  In the pattern in which the specific decoration member SDY (簾 簾 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大It is dropped and moved to become (Fig. 218 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (a decorative symbol of the type) for reporting a big hit in the display area of the effect display device 1600 from which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (簾) has been cancelled. The stop mode "777" and the message "good" are displayed (FIG. 218 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In the pattern in which the specific decoration member SDY does not move, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small movement of the specific decoration member SDY (the middle object) is stopped only by stopping the movement. I will not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol of the shifted aspect ("767") is displayed in a rocking manner at the center of the screen (FIG. 219 (P1). Thereafter, according to the effect pattern to be set A pattern (see FIG. 219 (P2)) in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the disengaging manner (“767”) is developed into a resurrection pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the resurrection pattern, a resurrection start image ("Yeah" is shown in the display area of the effect display device 1600 showing that the fluctuating display is not finished yet from the rocking display of the decorative symbol in the disappointing mode of Fig. 219 (P1). Samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 219 (P3)), and the decoration symbol is again in the reach state and reduced and displayed on the upper right of the screen, and at the center of the screen the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 An operation effective suggestion image (a face in which the eyes of the ally warrior have closed) is displayed (FIG. 219 (P4)). Then, as time passes, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is moved slightly up and down in the initial state (FIG. 219 (P5)). As a result, the player has an increased sense of anticipation that the effect using the specific decoration member SDY (a prisoner's berthing) is performed. At this time, the operation button 410 may be lighted and decorated in a high-speed flashing manner, or the sword decorative body 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the state of the sword to the state of the first sword. Then, according to the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an operation effective operation means, and a specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. A presentation of (Jailor) is performed. The pattern for which the operation button 410 is to be operated is set so that the degree of expectation is lower than the pattern for which the sword decorative body 5001 is to be operated.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button finalized image) in which sweat blurs on the forehead of the warrior of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button The light emitting decoration 410 is decorated (FIG. 220 (R1)). Then, while the small-sized movement of the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 中 continues) and the operation button 410 is lighted and decorated, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 220 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (the operation button 410) to be operated, the number of times of operation, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, the light emitting decoration is not performed.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the all fall state (FIG. 220 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed at the upper right of the screen of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible from the player. As in the case described above (FIG. 216 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decorative symbol at this time. Then, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is returned to the initial state from the full fall state, and the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 再 び 再 び 再 び 再 び 再 び 解除 解除 解除 解除 解除 解除). An image notifying the big hit at the center (the stop pattern "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "good") is displayed (FIG. 220 (R4)).

  On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is disengaging, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the incremental movement of the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 In the display area, the decorative pattern of the shift aspect ("767") is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen (Fig. 220 (R5)).

  When the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image in which the samurai who closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens the eye light (the sword decorative body The finalized image is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the knapsack to the second state of the sword with the aura member (FIG. 221 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be lighted and decorated. The player can grasp that the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 is effective by the image of the display area, but at this time, the form such as whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is the aura member attached form Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001. Next, while the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 可 動 小) is moved in small increments, when the second scraped state is reached and a predetermined period elapses, and the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, In the area, an operation promoting image for prompting the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 221 (Q 2)).

  Then, if the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the player's operation of the sword is detected, the same effect transition as in the above-mentioned FIG. 220 (R3) and (R4) is followed (FIG. Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out, when the player's operation is detected, the same effect transition as that of FIG. 220 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 221 (Q5)).

  As described above, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation that is more powerful than the suggestion by the image Suggestions can be provided, and a drop in gaming interest can be suppressed. In addition, even when the specific decoration member SDY (cushion character) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given again the operation opportunity of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Be done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest that might be of concern by becoming a monotonous operation effect instead of being reflected.

  In addition, although the three production patterns of the reach production which used the sword decorative body 5001 were mentioned in the above-mentioned FIG. 211-FIG. 221, you may combine various production | presentation aspects. As a result, a wide variety of effects can be provided to further enhance the fun of the game.

(Simulated rendition using a sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 222 to FIG. 236, pseudo-rendering effects using the sword decorative body 5001 in which the form is changed in stages according to the number of continuation of the pseudo-rike fluctuation (re-variation) will be described. The pseudo rendition is a temporary reoccurring rendition that temporarily stops the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and is a bonus that is performed corresponding to the pseudo reciprocation together with the pseudo reciprocation in which the temporary stop and revariation are repeated one or more times Show the effect of etc. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop shows a state where it seems as if the variable display has stopped, but in fact it slightly oscillates to continue the fluctuation. In this example, when a variation pattern for performing pseudo-series variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, the pseudo series of effect patterns that can be selected by lottery of the presentation content by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. Explain to.

(Form of sword decoration body)
First, with reference to FIG. 222, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 of this example will be described. The above-mentioned form of the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with two types of the aura member attached form and the aura member without form, but here, the form in which the sword part 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle 5012 There are two types of

  FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining the form of the sword decorative body 5001 used for the pseudo-series effect. The sword decorative body 5001 is provided so as to allow two-step form change by the deformation of the handle 5012 and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3, and from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020 And an aura member 5040 that appears visibly. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction as the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 222 (A) to 222 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the knato state, and show stage 0 to stage 3 in order. The sword decorative body 5001 takes one of the stages 0 to 3 depending on the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the stage 0 form is the form in the normal state similar to FIGS. 192 (A) and 194 (A) described above, and no initial operation is required for any component. Indicates the form. As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the stage 1 form shows the form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 222 (C), in the stage 2 form, the handle 5012 spreads and moves so as to be divided into two from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the form in which the first decorative part 5012 a appears from inside Show. As shown in FIG. 222 (D), in the stage 3 form, the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle 5012 in the stage 2 form to form a decoration integral with the first decorative part 5012a. Indicates the form. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form in this case enable the form change without bringing the sword decorative body 5001 into the second scraped state. Furthermore, the sword portion 5010 capable of receiving an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body, thereby providing a more powerful operation means. Can.

(Example of simulated rendition)
Next, with reference to FIG. 223 to FIG. 236, an example of effect transition regarding an effect pattern for performing pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the change pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 231A, the main control substrate 1310 causes the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and sword LV3 strong fluctuation. When one of the six variation patterns of the pattern is selected, the pseudo-series effect is performed. Basic effect patterns (Sword LV1 weak effect pattern, Sword LV1 strong effect pattern, Sword LV2 weak effect pattern, Sword LV2 strong effect pattern, Sword LV3 weak effect pattern corresponding to the six variation patterns, respectively, in the effect pattern performing the pseudo-series effect Besides the effect pattern and sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, a pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern and a simulated resurrected sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (Sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the sword LV1 weak rendering pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 weak rendering pattern (the sword LV1 strong rendering pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong rendering pattern) is selected, When the variation pattern is the sword LV2 weak variation pattern (Sword LV2 strong variation pattern), the sword LV2 weak representation pattern (Sword LV2 strong representation pattern) is selected, and the variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (Sword LV3 strong variation pattern In the case where either the sword LV3 weak effect pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, or the simulated resurrected LV1 effect pattern (sword LV3 strong rendered pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 strong rendered pattern or the simulated resurrected LV1 produced pattern) It is selected.

  In the effect pattern, the number of continuations (one to three times) of the pseudo continuous change (re-variation), the presence or absence of the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 according to the number of continuations, and the operation opportunity The aspect of the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) is set (see FIG. 231 (B)). The effect pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to the number of continuation times of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) 1 to 3 times. Also, "weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop position (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances). In addition, “pseudo-sword LV1” gives the selection operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 at the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) and continues the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) by selecting not to operate by the player. Show that it is an effect that can be acquired. In addition, “pseudo revival sword LV1” follows the same rendering transition as the sword LV1 weak rendering pattern of the basic effect pattern that provides the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 at the first pseudo run variation (re-variation), It shows that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed again after the end of the falling effect of the special decorative member SDY (chairman) based on the first change operation opportunity. The details of the effect contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

  Here, the basic effect pattern is set such that the degree of expectation becomes higher as the number of continuation of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) increases, that is, as the form change of the sword decorative body 5001 progresses, and the specific decoration member SDY The lower the drop position of the object, the higher the degree of expectation. However, when the drop position of the specified decorative member SDY (circumferential object) is half-drop, the number of continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 1 It is set so as to have the same degree of expectation in the case where the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) becomes full with the effect pattern which is less in number of times. Specifically, the expected number of continuations of pseudo run variation (re-change) 1 times and half-drop sword LV1 weak effect pattern is 29%, the number of continuations of pseudo run variation (re-change) 1 and a sword of full fall Expected level of LV1 strong effect pattern is 40%, number of continuations of pseudo continuous change (re-change) 2 times and sword of LV2 weak effect pattern with half-drop is 40%, continuous number of continuous set change (re-change) 2 The expectation of the LV2 strong directing pattern of the times and full fall is 50%, the number of continuations of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) 3 times and the expectation of the LV3 weak directing pattern of the half falling is 50%, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re The expectation degree of the continuation number of three times of fluctuation) and the sword LV3 strong rendering pattern of the full fall is set to be 65%. Further, the specific effect pattern is set so that the expectation is different according to the selected fluctuation pattern even if it is the same effect pattern, and the expectation is set to be higher as the fluctuation pattern is higher in expectation. The expectation of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern for giving the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% for the selected fluctuation pattern being the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern and the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, respectively. It becomes. Further, the expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 strong rendering pattern is 47% and 74% respectively for the case where the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern and the case where the selected sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected. Further, after tracing the same rendering transition as the sword LV1 weak rendering pattern, the expectation of the simulated resurrected sword LV1 rendering pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern.

  Below, the pseudo continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 231 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition example shown in FIG. 223 to FIG. 230 and the effect execution timing chart shown in FIG. 232 to FIG. FIG. 223 is a diagram showing an example of an effect transition of pseudo continuous effect common to all effect patterns. FIGS. 224 to 226 are diagrams showing transition examples of effects of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given while the pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) is being performed. Further, FIG. 227 is a view showing a transition example of the rendering after the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 (the falling rendering of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances)) during the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the rendering patterns. is there. FIGS. 228 and 229 are diagrams showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the false sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the false sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern. Further, FIGS. 232 to 236 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) in the pseudo-series effect, and FIG. 232 is a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) Figure 233: Sword LV2 weak effect pattern (Sword LV2 strong effect pattern), Figure 234: Sword LV3 weak effect pattern (Sword LV3 strong effect pattern), Figure 235: pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (false sword LV1 strong effect pattern) 236 shows a simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern. Below, it demonstrates along the example of a production | presentation transition in case a pseudo | simulation consecutive production is performed in the production before a fluctuation display is started and it will be in a reach state.

(All production patterns common)
As shown in FIG. 223 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, a state in which a part of the bag is visible from the player above the display area (the initial state) without overlapping with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view ) Is stationary. Also, at this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the state of the stage 0 form (initial form).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 223 (B) and (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image showing the start of the pseudo continuous effect (effect content notification “100 chances if it can be destroyed” message, samurai Is displayed to indicate to the player that the pseudo-series effect is to be started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (D), the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped in the pseudo link mode, and the player performs the re-variation of the decorative symbols. Report that. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, and specifically shows the form and effect level (the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation) of the sword decorative body 5001. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) by displaying the pseudo continuous sword symbol of the aspect. At this time, although there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (簾 簾 及 び 及 び 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 目 のThe sword image which shows the form (stage 1 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in advance is displayed. In this manner, since the form and effect level (number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re fluctuation) is notified at the time of temporary stop display immediately before the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change) starts, Can be grasped and encountered at what stage of pseudo-stationary fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation) is started, as shown in FIG. 223 (E), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the time of FIG. 223 (D) described above. The pseudo linear figure pattern is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. At this time, the form change of the sword decorative body 5001 is a timing at which the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decorative body 5001 from the effect display which is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 after the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started. , I.e., after the start of the recurrent fluctuation. The shape change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation). For example, it is performed together with the display of the pseudo continuous sword symbol at the time of FIG. The pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 223 (F), the state of the sword image of the pseudo-rectangular symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the state of the sword to the second state of the second sword while being enlarged. The state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is it possible to make the sword decorative body 5001 in the second state in which the player can operate the sword as the operation means? An operation opportunity suggestion image (a warrior image with eyes closed) indicating whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the player is displayed. The subsequent effects are a pattern in which the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective according to the effect pattern set in advance (effect pattern with the name “LV1” appended to the name) and a pattern in which the sword decorative body 5001 is not effective as the operation Branch to a presentation pattern in which “LV2” or “LV3” is attached. Below, an example of effect transition is demonstrated in order about nine types of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak effect pattern / sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 224 and FIG. 227, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set that enables the sword decorative body 5001 as an operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation). An example of effect transition in the case will be described. When the effect pattern is set and the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given by the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the above-mentioned FIG. 223 (G An operation confirmation image (image with the eyes of a warrior open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in) (FIG. 224 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“a good chance!” Message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation is displayed (FIG. 224 (T2)) . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the second sword state (step 1 form) same as that of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message "set sword!" (FIG. 224 (T3)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, an expectation degree notification effect by the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern.

  Here, when the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern, when the player's operation of the sword is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 (U1), the specific decoration member SDY (ceiling object) ) Is movable from the initial state to the full fall state. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second extraction state to the insertion state and returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) by the player's operation of the insertion sword. After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (chairman) is returned from the full fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is as shown in FIG. An expectation degree notification image ("100 body destruction!") Which notifies the expectation degree of the fluctuation display result in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous effect shown is displayed. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the full drop state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the half drop state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001. Here, by displaying the expectation degree notification image, the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  In addition, when the set effect pattern is “weak” effect pattern, when the player's operation is detected, as shown in FIG. Is dropped and moved from the initial state to a half drop state. The half drop state is a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (brasil product) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full drop state, and overlaps with the upper half area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view . Then, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second extraction state to the insertion state and returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) by the player's operation of the insertion sword. After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U4), the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is returned from the half fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is as shown in FIG. An expectation degree notification image ("50 body destruction!") For notifying the expectation degree of the variation display result in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo sequential effect shown is displayed. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001. Then, similarly to the “strong” effect pattern, the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) by displaying the expectation degree notification image at this time.

  In the case where the player's operation is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the "strong" effect pattern or the "weak" effect pattern. An escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Showing that the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) has ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) being performed Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends, as shown in FIG. 227 (U5), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the normal mode, and reach effect is started. Ru. As for the reach effect at this time, reach effects of the same effect contents are executed for the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. As described above, by operating when the sword decoration operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is required, the player grasps the degree of expectation by the falling position of the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object), and then achieves reach effect. I can meet you. Therefore, even if the later reach effects are the same, different senses of expectation can be obtained each time, so the decline of the operation desire by the player is suppressed, and further, the decrease of the game interest for the uniform effect is suppressed. can do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 232, operations of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 of the stage 1 form is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives the player an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when the sword LV1 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) completely falls by the operation of the player. In addition, when there is no operation of the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of which effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 232, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) ((1) See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 223F) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (second removal state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → (T2) ) And the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) changes from the initial state to the half fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and anticipation of anticipation degree of expectation corresponding to the full fall The point at which the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)) is different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak effect pattern / sword LV2 strong effect pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 224 and FIG. 225, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set which enables the sword decorative body 5001 as an operation means in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change). An example of effect transition in the case where there is an event is described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern is appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is not given at the first operation opportunity giving timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-variation). After following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) described above, no operation opportunity is given to the display region of the effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggested image shown in FIG. 223 (G) described above. The continuous image (image with samurai eyes closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 in the second state is returned to the state with the form maintained in the stage 1 form (figure 224 (S1)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped in the pseudo link mode, and the player is informed that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is to be performed (FIG. 224 (S2)) ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, and specifically shows the form and effect level (the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation) of the sword decorative body 5001. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) by displaying the pseudo continuous sword symbol of the aspect. Then, on the pseudo linear sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed Be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. Thus, at the time of temporary stop display immediately before the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword decoration 5001 in the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and attend at what stage of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the second simulated reciprocation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo reconnaissance symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 224 (S2) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to a stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is split to the left and right so that the first decorative part 5012a can be visually recognized (FIG. 224 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-straight symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the knapsack state to the second scout state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually the second scout state from the batting state State change to (Fig. 224 (S4)). The form change timing from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the state change timing from the set state to the second state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes at a stroke at a timing when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decorative body 5001. Impressive motions can be impressed to attract the player's attention.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 in the second scraped state (stage 2 form) in which the player can operate the sword can be made effective as operation means, ie, the game An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the determination result as to whether or not to give the user an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 225 (V1)).

  Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, since the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given by the second simulated continuous change (re-variation), In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image with the eyes of a warrior open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1) described above is displayed Figure 225 (V2). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image ("Appreciable!" Message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation is displayed (FIG. 225 (V3)) . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the second sword state (stage 2 form) same as that of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image showing an operation direction and an operation valid period is displayed together with a message of "Please put a sword!" (FIG. 225 (V4)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, the expectation degree notification effect by the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern. , And allow the player to grasp that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. In addition, when the player's operation is not detected during the operation effective period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an escape image ("Enemy, escape!") Is displayed, which indicates that the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen). 229 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 233, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is performed. During period T2 in which the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second stage is made effective as operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. Then, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV2 strong rendition pattern is set, a fall rendition (expected degree notification rendition) in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) completely falls is performed by the operation of the player. When the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of which effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 233, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the form of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) ((1) See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 223F) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 The sword decorative body 5001 in the operable state (second scraped state) without increasing the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 223 (G)) but without generating an operation effective period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the inserted state (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, while maintaining the stage 1 form, the sword decorative body experiences a second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

  Then, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo continuous change (re-variation) (see FIG. 224 (S3)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 224 (S4)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (the second removal state) (see FIG. 225 (V1) → (V2) → (V3) And an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 225 (V4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) changes from the initial state to the half fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and anticipation of anticipation degree of expectation corresponding to the full fall The point at which the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)) is different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the end of the second pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2 (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak effect pattern / sword LV3 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 225 and FIG. 226, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set which makes the sword decorative body 5001 effective as the operation means in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change). An example of effect transition in the case where there is an event is described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern is appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body is provided at the operation opportunity giving timing of the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) shown in FIG. 225 (V1) described above. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in FIG. 223 (A) to (G) → FIG. 224 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 225 (V1), In the display area, a continuous image (an image with the eyes of a warrior closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1) described above is displayed, and the second sword state is The sword decoration 5001 is returned to the state of the sword while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 225 (V5)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped in the pseudo link mode, and the player is informed that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is to be performed (FIG. 225 (V6) ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, and specifically shows the form and effect level (the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation) of the sword decorative body 5001. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) by displaying the pseudo continuous sword symbol of the aspect. Then, on the pseudo linear sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the third pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed Be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001. Moreover, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. Thus, when the temporary stop display is displayed immediately before the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword decoration 5001 in the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and attend at what stage of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the third simulated reciprocation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo rectilinear symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 225 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative part 5012 b protrudes above the first decorative part 5012 a so that both decorative parts can be viewed as an integrated decorative body ( Figure 225 (V7). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-straight symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the knapsack state to the second scout state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually the second scout state from the batting state The state changes to (Fig. 225 (V8)). The form change timing from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the state change timing from the set state to the second state may be set to be simultaneous. In addition, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 may not be changed each time according to the number of times of pseudo-series fluctuation, and when reaching the final stage, the form may be changed collectively for a plurality of steps. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes at a stroke at a timing when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decorative body 5001. Impressive motions can be impressed to attract the player's attention.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 in the second state (step 3 form) in which the player can operate the sword can be made effective as operation means, ie An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the determination result as to whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 226 (X1)).

  Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, since the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given by the third pseudo continuous change (re-variation), In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image with the eyes of a warrior open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1) described above is displayed Figure 226 (X2). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“a good chance!” Message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation is displayed (FIG. 226 (X3)) . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second scout state (step 3 form) as that of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message "set sword!" (FIG. 226 (X4)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, the expectation degree notification effect by the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern. , And allow the player to grasp that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. Further, when the player's operation is not detected during the operation effective period, the effect display device 1600 does not matter whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern. In the display area of, an escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Is displayed that indicates that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (the prison object) being performed ( See FIG. 229 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 234, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo linked fluctuation (re-shift) is performed and the second pseudo linked fluctuation (re-change) are performed. During the period T2 in which the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is not given in the period T2 to be performed, and in the period T3 in which the third simulated continuous change (re-variation) is performed Give them the opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when the sword LV3 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) completely falls by the operation of the player. When the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of which effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 234, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) ( See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 223F) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 The sword decorative body 5001 in the operable state (second scraped state) without increasing the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 223 (G)) but without generating an operation effective period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the inserted state (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, while maintaining the stage 1 form, the sword decorative body experiences a second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

  Then, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo continuous change (re-variation) (see FIG. 224 (S3)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 224 (S4)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 The sword decorative body 5001 in the operable state (second scraped state) without increasing the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 225 (V1)) but without generating an operation effective period in which the player's operation is effectively received. Is returned to the state of the knife (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, while maintaining the stage 2 form, the sword decorative body experiences the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 225 (V8)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (the second removal state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) And an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) changes from the initial state to the half fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and anticipation of anticipation degree of expectation corresponding to the full fall The point at which the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)) is different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the end of the third pseudo random change (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3 (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern / simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 228 and FIG. 229, although the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective as the operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation), the player does not operate the pseudo continuous change. An example of effect transition when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern capable of acquiring continuation (level up effect) of (re-variation) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern is appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given at the operation opportunity giving timing of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation). . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an operation positively as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) → 224 (T1) described above, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided with the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 224 (T1). An operation selection image ("Are you interested in this question?" Message) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity asking for selection of whether or not to operate the player from the operation confirmation image indicating that it is displayed is displayed (FIG. )). Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promoting effect for promoting selection of the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (step 1 form) same as that of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and indicates the operation direction and the operation effective period together with the message "Please choose whether to put the sword or not". An image is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z2)).

  Here, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) which is set, which of the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern and the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern and sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern) The subsequent rendering transition greatly differs depending on whether the rendering pattern is set based on the pattern.

  In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak change pattern (sword LV1 strong change pattern), the player performs the operation of the sword during the operation effective period. When it is detected, the same effect transition (FIG. 227) as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern is traced.

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect the operation of the sword during the operation effective period, the operation selection promoting effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) described above is performed regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation effective period in which the game is performed is ended, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the second extraction state of the stage 1 form to the initial insertion state of the initial form, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present selection operation opportunity is An image indicating that it was an opportunity to operate ("was it a good opportunity ...") is displayed (Fig. 229 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a prison object). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image ("Enemy, escape!") Indicating that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is ended without the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (ceiling object) being performed. Is displayed (FIG. 229 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is finished, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the normal mode in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 229 (W3)).

  In the case of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the player performs the operation of the sword during the operation effective period. When detected, the operation is detected at the operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, as in FIG. 227 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 227 (U1) → After following the effect transition of (U2), the remaining effect period (the total of the periods T2 and T3) is subjected to variation display by the decorative symbol of the normal mode (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern of the normal mode at the same timing as the timing previously determined by the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 227 (U5) reference).

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect the operation of the sword during the operation effective period, the operation selection promoting effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) described above is performed regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation effective period in which is performed is completed, the operation pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continued by obtaining the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time indicates that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation application timing from the above-mentioned FIG. 228 (Z2), that is, it shifts to the continuous image (FIG. 224 (S1)) And then, in the same manner as the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, the above-mentioned FIG. 224 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 225 (V1) → FIG. 225 (V5) to (V8) 226 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → follow the effect transition of FIG. 227 (U5).

  As described above, in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern), the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the fluctuation pattern selected on the main control board 1310 is largely different. When the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and when operating at the selection operation opportunity, the basic effect pattern and Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and to reach reach production. On the other hand, if it chooses not to operate it, it will not only be able to acquire the level up production described later, but it will reach reach production without being able to grasp the expected degree that could be known if the user was originally operating . If the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If the selection operation opportunity is not operated, it is possible to enjoy the effect by the continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) as in the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if the user operates the game, he / she misses the effect (continuity change of the sword decorative body 5001 due to the level-up effect) due to the continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) which can be acquired without operating the initial shape of the sword decorative body 5001 It will return to the form. In the operation at the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 which is unknown to the player is reversed, and the operation during the operation valid period during which the operation is effectively accepted is a game Provide a fresh rendition that brings the operation result to the disadvantaged person. In addition, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent development of the rendering than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player comes to the operation at the selection operation opportunity with tension and a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's control of the operation and to suppress the decrease of the game interest caused by the uniform operation effect.

  In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) When the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the three stages are reduced from the stage 1 configuration to the stage 0 configuration (initial configuration) from the selection operation opportunity. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decorative body 5001, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, and the level is raised to the stage 3 form and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, the operation of the number of times set in advance in the effect pattern is required, but in this example, the operation opportunity of 2 times (LV1 and L3) can be provided in advance, but the player performs one operation by operating. It becomes the end of the grant on the occasion, it is possible to provide a new presentation that reflects the player's intention more. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's control of operation with respect to the operation effect which does not appear instead, and to suppress the decrease of the game interest.

  In other words, even if an effect pattern that allows the sword decorative body 5001 to change from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, the initial form to the stage 1 form depending on the player's operation. It will reach reach production only to see the change up to. Since the player can be made to perform the operation selection without being caught by the selected fluctuation pattern (the set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his own operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's control of the operation and the decline of the game entertainment.

  Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY . If the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated, it ends without being able to grasp the expectation, and the form further changes in level (levels up), and it operates in the operation opportunity given after becoming the stage 3 form. There is a case where the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a pottery). Thus, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the non-operation selection produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or an effect higher than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 231 (A), the expectation in the same rendering pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak rendering pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong rendering pattern) is changed according to the variation pattern, but it is not limited thereto. For example, the expectation of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the change pattern. Further, in order to provide an appropriate effect that is more suited to the player's own sense of choice, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern in accordance with the fluctuation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's control of the operation and the decline of the game entertainment.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 235, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing of will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the false sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the false sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 1 form in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-fluctuation) is performed. As the operation means, and gives the player an operation opportunity. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) completely falls by the operation of the player. In addition, when the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, originally, three pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is provided so that the specific decoration can be performed. After the fall effect of the member SDY, the symbol variation in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

  When the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of which effect pattern. Then, if the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo continuous fluctuations (re-variation) are continued, and the second pseudo continuous fluctuations In the period T2 in which the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is not given in the period T2 in which (re-variation) is performed, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is performed As a player, and give the player an operation opportunity. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) completely falls by the operation of the player. When the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of which effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 235, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in shape from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation). (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 223F) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (second removal state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → FIG. 228 (Refer to Z1), an operation effective period for effectively receiving the operation of the player is started (refer to FIG. 228 (Z2)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) changes from the initial state to the half fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, although not shown, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (brade product) changes from the initial state to the full drop state (see FIG. 227 (U1)) and corresponds to the full drop The difference is that the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the player does not perform the operation of the sword in the operation effective period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues (set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), The decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the insertion state with the end of the operation effective period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S1)).

  Then, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo continuous change (re-variation) (see FIG. 224 (S3)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 224 (S4)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 The sword decorative body 5001 in the operable state (second scraped state) without increasing the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 225 (V1)) but without generating an operation effective period in which the player's operation is effectively received. Is returned to the state of the knife (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, while maintaining the stage 2 form, the sword decorative body experiences the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 225 (V8)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (the second removal state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) And an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) changes from the initial state to the half fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (brade product) changes from the initial state to the full drop state (see FIG. 227 (U1)) and corresponds to the full drop The difference is that the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the end of the third pseudo random change (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3 (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  In addition, if the player does not perform the operation of the sword during the operation effective period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is not continued (when set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), The decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the insertion state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes in form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Simulated revival sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 230, following the same effect transition as that of the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above and showing it as if to rush into reach effect as it is, the pseudo resurrection where the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is recovered An example of effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern is appropriately omitted.

  The simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control substrate 1510 when the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control substrate 1310.

  When the set effect pattern is the simulated resurrected sword LV1 effect pattern, as in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above, the above FIGS. 223 (A)-(G) → FIGS. 224 (T1)-(T3) Follow the staging transition. Then, when the operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, the same effect as FIG. 227 (U3), (U4) and (U5) described above is obtained regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern. After following the effect transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo run variation by the pseudo run symbol design is resumed again. If the operation by the player is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword as the operation effective period ends, as in the other effect patterns. In place of the above-mentioned FIG. 230 (UA1) → (UA2), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the fall rendition of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is not performed and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends An escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Indicating that it has been done is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)).

  The resumption and resumption of the pseudo-series variation (re-variation) is the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“777”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 230 (UA3) described above. A pseudo-rifled symbol which is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, a temporary stop symbol with a pseudo-rifle symbol in a form showing the form and effect level (number of times of pseudo reciprocation) of the sword decorative body 5001 The information is notified to the player (FIG. 230 (UA4)). A sword image and effect level 3 of the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed on the pseudo rafter symbol at this time. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001 and the initial form (sword state) is maintained. As described above, in the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the simulated reciprocation (re-variation) is recovered, the pseudo re-variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. The pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the third stage is performed. Then, at the time of temporary stop display (FIG. 230 (UA4)) immediately before the start of the pseudo run change (re-run) in the stage 3 form, the form and effect level of the sword ornament 5001 in the pseudo run change (re-run) are notified As a result, the player can grasp and see what stage of pseudo-stationary fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-skater pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 230 (UA4) described above is enlarged and the sword decoration is made so that the effect display acts on the sword decoration 5001. It is displayed moving toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form into a stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decorative portion 5012a, and the second decorative portion 5012b operate from the initial form and both decorative portions can be viewed as an integrated decorative body. (FIG. 230 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-straight symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the knapsack state to the second scout state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually the second scout state from the batting state State change to (Fig. 230 (UA 6)). Here, since the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form at once from the initial form to the stage 3 form at once, it can impress a powerful operation and attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state (step 3 form) which enables the player to operate the sword is made effective as operation means, and the above-mentioned FIG. 226 (X1) to (X5) When the player's operation is detected after tracing the effect transition, the specific decoration member SDY (not shown) is detected according to the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern. The type of drop effect for the prison object is determined. When the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, since the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is once in a half drop state, the level is raised and the above-mentioned FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) An expectation degree notification effect is produced by the full fall effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (chairman) as in (U5), and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends. On the other hand, in the case where the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation by the half-drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (clad object) same as FIG. 227 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above. The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends.

  If the operation by the player is not detected at the operation opportunity to activate the sword decorative body 5001 in the second ejection state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the end of the operation effective period as in the other effect patterns. At the same time, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the state of the sword, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not have the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances), and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) An escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Indicating that the F. has ended is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)), and the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) is ended.

  As described above, in the simulated revival sword LV1 rendering pattern, the rendering transition similar to that of the sword LV1 weak rendering pattern described above is followed, and when the simulated contingent fluctuation (re-variation) is recovered again, the level of stage 2 is skipped and the stage 3 is formed. Since the same development as that of the stage of the stage (the stage of the third pseudo random change (re-variation) in the basic stage pattern) is performed, the player has a sense of expectation stronger than the other stage patterns and is a reach stage stage with surprise. You can come to In addition, the player is given an operation opportunity at the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), and the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) after that is half-drop, without distracting attention It is possible to enjoy the game in expectation of the resurgence of the pseudo random fluctuation (re-variation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 236, the operation execution timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the simulated resurrected sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 of the stage 1 form is made effective as operation means in the period T1 in which the first simulated continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed, Give the player an operation opportunity. At this time, regardless of the selected fluctuation pattern (Sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or Sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), a drop effect (expected degree notification) in which the specified decoration member SDY (circumstances) is half-dropped by the operation of the player Production is performed. When the player does not perform an operation, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed.

  Then, after the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) ends, and once it returns to the variation display of the decorative pattern in the normal mode, a period during which the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) in other effect patterns is performed The pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) is performed using the sword decorative body 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the form change to the stage 3 form. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 in the third stage form is made effective as operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, when the falling effect of the specified decorative member SDY (circumstances) is performed in the period T1, the falling effect (expected degree notification) in which the specified decorative member SDY (circumstances) is completely dropped by the operation of the player Production is performed. In addition, in the period T1, when the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is not performed in the period T1, the falling of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is partially dropped by the operation of the player. An effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed. When the player does not perform an operation, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 236, in the case where the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in shape from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 223F) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (second removal state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → (T2) ) And the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (brade product) changes from the initial state to the half drop state (see FIG. 230 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 230 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is temporarily formed by the decoration pattern of the normal mode (see FIG. 230 (UA3)), but the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) is restored (FIG. 230 (UA4) )reference).

  Then, at the same time as the resumption of the pseudo link variation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 230 (UA5)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 230 (UA 6)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (the second removal state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) And an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, when the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is performed in the first pseudo reciprocation (reciprocal fluctuation), the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) changes from the initial state to the full falling state. A falling effect that changes is performed (see FIG. 227 (U1)). Then, at the end of the reappearance pseudo reciprocation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Although not illustrated, when the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is not performed in the first pseudo reciprocation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (cousin objects) is from the initial state The state is changed to the half fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)), and the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree corresponding to the half fall is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the end of the reappearing pseudo link change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3 (FIG. ), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  As described above, in the simulated rendition using the sword decorative body 5001, the simulated reciprocation number of times is 2 and 3 respectively in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the simulated reciprocation (re-variation) is performed multiple times In the case of less than the above, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword every one pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) to make it possible for the player to operate. It is characterized by being returned to the state of the sword (without giving the player an operation opportunity). For this reason, since the player is expected to have a sense of expectation whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable, the player is interested in the sword decoration 5001 as the operation means. It is possible to suppress the decline in the operating desire and the decline in the game entertainment.

  Further, in the pseudo continuous change (re-variation), the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial form by the player's operation of the sword decorative body 5001 whose form is changed from the initial form. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides the player with useful effects by the operation of the player. Make the player's operation selection carefully. Therefore, it is possible to give an interest to the operation in the sword decorative body 5001, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation desire and a decrease in the game interest.

  In addition, since the sword decorative body 5001 can change its form stepwise until the operation opportunity is given (until the operation valid period is generated), the player's expectation and interest are raised gradually, and the game is played It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. It should be noted that during the operation mode and the second scraped state (operation position) of the sword decorative body 5001 to the generation of the operation valid period, the operation time mode (form, light emission, movement of the player at the operation position) It is desirable to be provided for a period that allows sufficient confirmation. As a result, the player can confirm the operation mode before operating the sword decorative body 5001, so the operation valid period is generated as soon as the second sword state is reached, and the mode of the operation means can not be confirmed. It is possible to wipe out the fear that the game interest will be reduced by shifting to the operation effect as it is.

  In addition, although the step change of the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001 was shown by the form, it is not restricted to this. It may be possible to change in stages each rendering mode corresponding to the number of continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation), such as a change in the light emission mode or the operation mode of the sword decorative body 5001.

(Application to pre-reading effect)
In addition, although the scribbling effect in the pseudo-series reach effect has been described above, it can also be executed as a pre-reading effect. The case where it applies to pre-reading effect is described below. In the following, a case will be described by way of example in which the third hold is the pre-reading effect target and the sword LV3 high-effect pattern is set as the pre-reading effect pattern.

  When the hold to be the object of pre-reading effect occurs as the third hold 3, the same effect as the above-described FIGS. 223 (B) to (F) is performed in the variable display performed at the time of occurrence. The sword decorative body 5001 is different from the second decorative state in that it is limited when an operation opportunity is given (an operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next change display (that is, the change display of hold 1 when hold 3 occurs), the same effect as the above-described FIG. 223 (G) → FIGS. 224 (S1) to (S4) is performed. Furthermore, in the next variable display (that is, the fluctuation display of hold 2 when hold 3 occurs), the same effect as that of FIG. 225 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. 226 (X1) to (X3) described above It will be. As described above, the change of the sword decorative body 5001 from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword in the pre-reading effect is limited to the generation timing of the operation valid period. Here, the operation effective period is generated at the timing when the fluctuation display of the hold 3 to be the object of pre-reading effect is started, and the state of the operation promoting effect and the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. From the second to the second). Thereafter, the effect transition similar to FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the pre-reading effect is ended.

  Although the state change from the state of the sword decoration of the sword decorative body 5001 to the state of the second scout is limited to the occurrence timing of the operation effective period, the next change display is made even if the stepwise form change is performed at the end of the change display. It may be performed at the start. Also in the pre-reading effect, the same effect as the pseudo-series reach effect is exhibited.

(Recommendation effect before operation using specified decoration member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 240, a pre-operation suggestion effect performed before an operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective in reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is enabled or the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled among the plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object). . Specifically, an operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (crimson) is positioned at the initial position as a suggested pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern for generating an operation effective period in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (injury object) is moved from the initial position to the indication position. The sword decoration 5001 (from the operation button 410 The second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern when the operation expectation is high and the hit expectation is set to be effective. Specifically, the pre-operation indication effect of the first suggested pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) which generates the operation effective period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (chairman object) is positioned at the initial position also in the operation effective period. In the case where is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation indication effect of the second indication pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)) is generated in which the operation effective period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (common object) is moved to the indication position. In this case, the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes effective with a probability of 30%. Hereinafter, an example of effect transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (a prison object) in the first indication pattern and the second indication pattern of the indication effects before operation will be described.

(First suggestion pattern)
FIGS. 237 and 238 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during reach effect by lottery with the peripheral control substrate 1510 based on the fluctuation effect (reach effect) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control substrate 1310. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion rendering of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed, when it is determined that the operation is effective. In this reach effect, when three decoration symbols reach the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 237 (A)), an operation button previously determined to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 Before the operation effective period for any operation means of the 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 237 (B)), and at this time, the specified decoration member SDY (crimson object) maintains the initial position. In addition, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (crimson object) is maintained at the initial position, an operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) determined to be operation effective is generated. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is validated, the first suggested pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggested pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggested effect. That is, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (簾 簾 簾 に に 初期 位置 初期 有効 初期 操作 有効 初期 初期 初期It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation button 410 is activated, as shown in FIG. 237 (C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated with the specific decoration member SDY (canned object) maintaining the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating an operation effective period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated to emit light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. In addition, even when the sword decorative body 5001 is effective, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first indication pattern although the rate is lower than that of the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 237 (D), an operation effective period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed. Further, at this time, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword state (form with an aura member), and the player can perform the operation of the sword.

  If an operation on the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) effective in FIG. 237 (C) or (D) described above is detected, the result of the current variable display is a big hit, The specified decorative member SDY (braille object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to a full drop state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Then, when the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 戻 戻) is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 物 解除An image (the stop pattern "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "wonderful") is displayed (Fig. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variable display is a release, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) reports the release to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (the stop pattern "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (Fig. 238 (CC3)).

(Second Suggested Pattern)
FIG. 239 shows a pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is effective during the reach effect similarly to the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production performed. In FIG. 240, although the second decorative pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggested effect, the operation of the operation button 410 is temporarily enabled after the sword decorative body 5001 is not activated, and the sword is subsequently decorated. It is a figure shown about the operation pre-operation indication production of the step-up pattern in which the body 5001 becomes effective.

  As shown in FIG. 239 (AA1), either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 previously determined to be effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 is the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern. It is performed before the operation effective period with respect to the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of aura) that suggests that the operation means is effective is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect indication image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first indication pattern, but in the second indication pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is together with the display of the operation indication indication image. It operates in a small drop state (indicated position) overlapping with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the initial position in a front view, and the specific decoration member SDY (brade character) moves up and down between the initial position and the indicated position. It is moved in small steps in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (injury object) is moved to the suggested position, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) determined to be operation effective in advance is generate. In this example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective, the second suggested pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggested pattern as the pre-operation suggested effect. That is, when the operation effective period occurs in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (crissman) is in the suggested position, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is higher than the operation button 410 at a valid rate. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA3), the operation effective period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (crissman) is operating at the suggested position. Generate At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (the form with the aura), and the player can perform the operation of the sword. In addition, even when the operation button 410 is activated, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, although at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA2), an operation effective period with respect to the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is operating at the suggestion position. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed. In the second suggested pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promoting effect, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is moved from the state of operating at the suggested position to the initial state. In addition, movement to the full fall state or the initial state of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) may be performed from the state of operating at the suggested position without being returned to the initial state.

  Then, when an operation to the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) effective in the above described FIG. 239 (AA2) or (AA3) is detected, the above described FIG. 237 (C) or (D) and Similarly, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (cirrus object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to a full drop state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Then, when the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 戻 戻) is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 物 解除An image (the stop pattern "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "wonderful") is displayed (Fig. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variable display is a release, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) reports the release to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (the stop pattern "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (Fig. 238 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is similar to the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggested pattern.

  In addition, the operation pattern of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) in the second suggested pattern may be provided not only with the pattern operated at the suggested position but also with a plurality of operated patterns. For example, in the case where a plurality of types of operation patterns are provided such that the rate at which the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective is different, the player's interest in the operation can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation indication effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
In the case where the pre-operation indication effect of the second indication pattern is generated in which the operation effective period is generated while the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) is moved to the indication position, and the sword decorative body 5001 becomes operation effective, In addition to the basic pattern following the effect transition of FIG. 239 (AA1) → (AA3) described above until the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective, the operation button 410 is temporarily activated, and then the sword decorative body 5001 A step-up pattern is provided that enables operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 240 (BB1) to (BB4), the indication-before-operation step-up pattern before operation has an operation effective period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001, which is determined in advance to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control substrate Is performed, that is, before the operation promoting effect of the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) described above is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, the display of the operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) similar to that of FIG. ). Next, in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (crimson object) is moved to the suggested position, the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 240 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 238 described above is not performed, and switching indicating the switching of the operation valid operation means Suggested images (most blackout images) are displayed (FIG. 240 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the end of the operation valid period of the operation button 410. After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the second state of the sword (the form with the aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the operating means which becomes operation valid is the sword decorative body 5001 from the operation button 410. A switching notification image (a message of “scratching chance” and “I want to put a sword”) is displayed to notify that the switching is to be performed (FIG. 240 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (crimson object) is in the state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the operation promoting effect of the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) described above is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 238) in the second suggested pattern described above.

  In the case of FIG. 240 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without activating the button operation 410 (without operation promotion effect). Once the player's interest has been directed to the button operation 410, the sword decorative body 5001 may be operated. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of the present embodiment, the specific decoration member SDY (Coffee item before the operation effective period of the operation means by which one of the plurality of operation means is made effective is generated. The position of) can be changed, suggesting operation means to be operated effective by the position. Specifically, in the first suggested pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) in which the operation valid period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) is at the initial position, the operation button 410 is effective In the second suggested pattern (Fig. 239 (AA1)), the sword decorative body 5001 has a high degree of expectation and the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a common object) is located at the suggested position. There is a high degree of expectation that the operation is effective, and the player pays attention to the state of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) to grasp which operation means is effective. It can enhance the interest of the production.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, vertical small-step movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) is performed in the indication effect before operation. And since the operation effect (fall effect) of the specific decoration member SDY (jail object) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 238) after the operation of the operation means, a series of fall effects from the up and down movement of the suggestion effect before operation is made It is possible to show the stage effect and to suppress the decrease in the game interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen), ie, the degree of expectation that the operation means enabled by the movable body becomes effective is indicated, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be displayed to indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, when the operation means to become operation effective is decided, not only the lighting of the operation button 410 or the change to the second extraction state of the sword decorative body 5001 but the operation means to become operation effective is moved by vibration etc. You may

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is located at the suggestion position, after the operation button 410 is once activated (or after it is made appear that the operation is validated) ) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective. Thus, the player is interested in both operation means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to have the expectation that the sword decorative body 5001 may become effective after that. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the first suggestion pattern of the indication effect before operation, the operation effect indication image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is effective is displayed. 237 (FIG. 237 (B)), as in the second suggested pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view from the initial position of the specific decorative member SDY It is possible to operate in a small drop state (indicated position) overlapping with the upper part, and to make small vertical movement in the vertical direction between the initial position and the indicated position. After that, when the operation effective period is generated, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is returned to the initial position (rest). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (chairman) in the first suggested pattern is partially the same as the operation in the second suggested pattern of the same timing, so the player can be instructed to perform the operation rendition by the first suggested pattern Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation indication effect of the second indication pattern is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the sword decorative body 5001 to become effective in operation even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is executed. Then, since the player strongly desires that the operation effective period will occur in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated to the indication position, the suggestion before operation is suggested. I can improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the specific effect in the game board side effect display device 1600 Perform effects in a pattern. In an effect period in which a specific effect pattern is executed, it is possible to generate a specific effect reception period (effective period) for establishing a specific effect execution condition by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific effect reception period In addition, based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation effect (such as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for awarding a benefit). The degree of expectation concerning the privilege grant suggested as a result of the specific operation presentation may be 100% or 0%.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation is performed as an operation means provided for such an operation effect (such as an effect that indicates an expectation degree for giving a benefit when operated). In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) other than this. In this respect, in the specific effect pattern, when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when the operation effect is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), this is the case. There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001) from (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001), even if the operation opportunity is not performed at the operation opportunity, only the pre-operation effect to which the operation opportunity is given occurs. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for awarding a privilege is higher than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for the provision of a benefit suggested when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001) may be 100% or 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as sword decorative body 5001), at the time of operation according to the operation on the other operation means (such as sword decorative body 5001) It will be possible to improve the amusement of the game when it is in the pre-stage where the rendition is not yet performed and is in the situation where the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, a desired rendering result (such as a rendering result that suggests that the degree of expectation for giving a privilege is high) does not appear in the rendering at the time of operation according to the operation on another operating means (such as the sword decorative body 5001) Even if it is not possible to operate the operation means within the specific effect reception period (effective period), it is possible to improve the game entertainment through such operation related effects. Become.

  And, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) having such a dramatic property. In the case of providing such an operation opportunity, it is possible to execute common operation-related effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (effect reception enabled).
The operation on the operation button 410 is activated after the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is activated (the effect can be accepted), and the operation for the operation button 410 is activated (effect can be accepted ) The first effect mode for generating the effective period (effect reception period) to be performed, and · The operation on the operation button 410 is activated (the effect reception is possible) without the “specific operation related effect” being started. A plurality of effect modes such as a second effect mode for generating the effective period (effect reception period) to be played are prepared, and the operation on the operation button 410 is activated by executing any of the effect modes. An effective period (effect reception period) to be accepted is generated.

  According to such a configuration, a period occurs in which an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001, etc.) can be accepted. In any case where there is a period during which an effect accepting operation other than the particular operating means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) becomes available, it is common prior to the occurrence of those periods (specific Since it becomes possible to execute the operation-related effect of), it becomes possible to have an interest as to which of the specific operation means and the other operation means is acceptable for effect, By performing the operation under the condition where the game is performed, the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Such common (specific) operation-related effects correspond to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect was started. The effect reception period is to be generated, but at least when the effect is started, which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period is generated It is desirable to keep it secret. In addition, for each operation-related effect exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) before the effect reception period occurs. It may be displayed (to make the effect result display appear), and a plurality of operations may be performed within the period after the effect reception period has occurred, including at the same time as the effect reception period occurs. It may be made to show which of the means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) the operation opportunity is given (to make the presentation result display appear), and the operation related presentation is performed until any timing It is possible to change as appropriate.

  Hereinafter, several effect modes that can be adopted when performing such common (specific) operation-related effects will be sequentially described. In the following description examples and their modifications, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively used as a plurality of operation means to be subjected to common (specific) operation related effects. The type of operation means is not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means targeted for common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, in the following production examples and their other examples, mainly, the content of the rendering is shown when one of the rendering reception periods occurs after the common (specific) operation-related rendering is performed, and the common (specific) In the case where any effect reception period occurs without the operation related effect of) being executed, the effect contents may be omitted. However, as an effect content in the case where one of the effect reception periods occurs while the common (specific) operation-related effects are not executed, “an operation for the operation button 410 is performed while the specific operation-related effects are not performed. For example, a general effect such as an operation instruction image prompting the user or an operation instruction image prompting the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 appears. Furthermore, in each of the following effect examples and their other examples, it is assumed that common (specific) operation related effects are performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach effect is achieved A common (specific) operation related effect may be generated as another image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the game is being executed, or may be common during the big hit game execution period. (Specific) operation related effects may be generated.

  In addition, while being able to perform combining suitably each effect between each effect demonstrated below and the effect of each other example mentioned later, it is possible to combine suitably and execute among each effect mentioned above It is possible. Each effect described below can be combined by replacing a part of the effect in each of the other examples described later, and each effect described below is performed when the first effect pattern is executed. When the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform effects of other examples described later. The same can be said for the effects of the other examples described later.

[First presentation manner]
In FIGS. 241 and 242, after a specific operation-related effect is started, at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed. It is a figure which shows the presentation example (1st presentation aspect) done.

  In (a) of FIG. 241, in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state of the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 241 (b) shows the effect status in which a specific operation-related effect is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 241 (a) is being performed.

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 241 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Display is made to move in the inside. As described above, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of operation related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different kinds of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It is suggested that an operation for any of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) will be made available for reception soon, as it is unclear which one of the decoration 5001 and the decoration 5001 is available for reception. You will be able to

  In FIG. 241 (c), the specific operation related effect shown in FIG. 241 (b) is developed, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (here, character display such as “operate”) prompting operation of any one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) in a state of being stopped and displayed in the area, and reception of effects It indicates an effect situation where a bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period has appeared.

  According to such an effect mode, although the operation with respect to at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted, the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001) It becomes impossible to determine which of the three is available for presentation. This is the same effect mode (FIG. 241 (c)) in any of the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is available for effect and the situation where the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is available for effect. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means are operated before an operation for at least one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted. Over the period until the operation for at least one of (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) is made available for rendering, common (specific) operation related as shown in FIG. 241 (b), (c) I am trying to carry out the production.

  Therefore, the effect contents of the specific operation-related effects are limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 241 (b) and (c), not only in this effect example but also in each effect example described below and other examples thereof. Absent. The point is that when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect If it occurs in the middle). With such a configuration, it is not clear which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive effects, and at least one of the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001) It is possible to suggest that an operation on one is acceptable for presentation. For example, the plurality of operation related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different kinds of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration A presentation image different from any one of the images SYG may be made to appear as a specific operation-related presentation, without appearing any of the images SYG.

  However, in order to more securely conceal which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive effects, the effect reception period for the operation buttons 410 occurs and the effect of the sword decorative body 5001. It is more desirable to set the time required from when a specific operation-related effect is performed (start of effect) to when the effect receiving period occurs when the reception period occurs.

  In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting operation for any operation means (“Operation Or the like), and always operate a specific operating means among the plurality of operating means regardless of how the plurality of operating means are allowed to receive effects. May be displayed to prompt the user. The point is that the same effect mode is made to appear in any of the situation where the operation to the operation button 410 can be accepted as an operation instruction and the situation where the operation to the sword decorative body 5001 is also accepted as an operation instruction. By doing this, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is available for effect presentation.

  Further, in the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIG. 241 (c), in which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation for the effect can be accepted can be concealed. Even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is allowed to receive effects, or the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not allowed to receive effects (in any of the first to third situations described later) Even, the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the light emitting state, and the operation on the operation button 410 is urged. However, instead of this, both of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, and light emitting means may be provided on the sword decorative body 5001 side to make the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 You may make it light both.

  Here, in this rendering example (first rendering mode), the rendering status in which the image shown in FIG. 241 (c) appears is only the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Whether in the first situation in which the effect can be accepted, in the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 Both are set to be in any of the third situations where the effects can be accepted. When the second situation (a situation where an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001) occurs among the plurality of situations, the first situation (an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) The degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than when a situation occurs. Therefore, the rate at which the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001) in the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410) It is desirable to make it lower than the rate of occurrence of

  And in this example of presentation (the 1st presentation mode), when it is in the situation of either the 1st situation (operation button 410) and the 3rd situation (operation button 410, sword ornaments 5001), operation to operation button 410 When the second situation (the sword decoration 5001) or the third situation (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001). When the operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 (when the progress of "GG" is made in the figure), the effect is accepted and the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation (FIG. 242 (d), FIG. 242 (f)) Is supposed to be done.

  In the effect at the time of operation, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242 (d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area and a predetermined display effect is performed in the effect display device 1600. ("Chance !!") is supposed to be executed. In addition, as a predetermined display effect, for example, "chance !!" suggested to be a relatively low expectation, and "superheat !!" suggested to be a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of effect modes such as the above, and displaying any of these effect modes according to the effect reception, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for awarding a benefit. Similarly to this, with regard to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing a presentation mode in which the operation of moving the display area to the front is not performed, one of those presentation modes is made to appear according to the reception of presentation , You may make it indicate the degree of expectation concerning grant of benefits. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation-time effect according to this effect example (the first effect mode), in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242 (d) and (f), the effect is accepted by the operation by the player. Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute control to bring the operating means into an operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242 (d), although the operation by the player is performed on the operation button 410, the operation is performed according to the effect reception. It is possible to execute control for reciprocating the sword decoration 5001 on the side not being performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although the effect reception is generated as a result of the player performing the operation on the operation button 410 and the effect at the time of the operation on the operation button 410 side is performed, although the operation is performed, Even when the button 410 is not operated and the sword decorative body 5001 having a higher degree of expectation is operated, it may be that the effect reception is performed and the effect is performed at the time of the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242 (f), as a result of the player performing the removal operation by the player on the sword decorative body 5001, the sword decorative body 5001 is positioned at It is possible to execute control to maintain the extraction position (extraction state) instead of returning to the (insertion state). As a result, the sword decorative body 5001 moves from the sword position (the state of the sword) to the position of the sword (the state of the sword) based on the operation by the player, and is maintained in such a state. When the operation will be performed. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is performed by the effect when the operation button 410 is operated and the effect when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, the sword decoration at that time By confirming the operation state of 5001, it becomes possible to make it feel that the effect at the time of operation resulting from the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is being performed.

  Then, after the effect at the time of operation (FIGS. 242 (d), (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 242 (e), a reach state can be formed and reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decorative body 5001 may be executed during the reach effect execution period, either of the effect when the operation button 410 is operated or the effect when the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Even if it is executed, when the predetermined time has passed (at a stage before the reach effect is started) the state of the sword decoration 5001 not operating (sword position (sword state)) It will control to return. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side and returns to the initial position (non-driven position) for the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable for the operating state (reciprocation or maintenance in the cutting state) to be continued for a period of time. In addition, with regard to the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state so that the driving force is not applied is earlier than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position). More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 241 and 242, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body) of a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) Common (specific) operation related rendering is started and the rendering started (common) (specification), regardless of whether the effect reception is enabled 5001) or the effect reception is not enabled While operation related effects are being executed, a specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) can be made to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) can not be made an effect acceptable. Since the operation button 410 is enabled to receive an effect, the specific operation means (eg, sword decoration 5001) and another operation means (eg, operation button 410) It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, whether or not a specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) can be accepted, or the specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) is Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 is rendered acceptable without being accepted, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are provided when an operation opportunity is given while such common (specific) operation related rendering is performed. Combined with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration 5001 is enabled to receive effects, the sword decoration 5001 is allowed to receive effects. You will be able to mislead as if it were not. That is, in this case, it is possible to prompt operation to the operation button 410 on the low side, not the sword decorative body 5001 on the high side of the ratio at which the proportion with high expectation is relatively performed when the effect is received. It is expected to provide an interest as to which operation means should be operated when common (specific) operation-related effects are performed.

  In addition, when the operation means of the side (the side in which the effect reception period is not generated) which is not made available for effect reception is operated while such common (specific) operation-related effects are being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the disadvantage that the effect reception period is digested and the remaining time is reduced by the amount of such an erroneous operation.

  However, at the time of the above operation, when the operation means of the side (the side where the effect reception period is not generated) is not operated while the common (specific) operation related effect is being performed, the operation means is operated Although the acceptance of the effect required for the execution of the effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the detection itself of the operation is performed, and the operation on the side where the effect can be accepted based on the detection Control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. According to such a configuration, there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost, and it is therefore urged to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is permitted to be rendered and carefully operated. become able to.

  Further, in the example of the effect (the first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side is Although it was made to be performed, you may make the effect content at the time of these operation mutually different. For example, in the effect at the time of operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed by the effect at the time of operation on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) If a unique effect sound is generated or the like) further appears, it is possible to more appropriately improve the fun of the game when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is received for effect.

  In addition, when preparing another effect mode that can be performed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is operated, the generation of the other effect mode is involved. When the effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001), the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set. The effect reception period for the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001 if the first operation means is the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001) is set Even in any of the cases, it may be possible to perform an effect at the time of operation when there is an operation on the first operation means in the situation shown in FIG. 241 (c). That is, in this case, when there is an operation for the first operation means when the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is set while common (specific) operation-related effects are being performed, When another effect mode is executed as an effect at the time of operation, while a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set (No. When there is an operation for the first operation means while the effect reception period for the operation means for 2 is set), another effect mode is not executed as an operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated The same operation effect will be performed. The point is that when the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the operation effect on the second operation means side is the second The setting is made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, in addition to the effect mode performed by the effect at the time of operation of the 2nd operation means side, when making another effect mode appear as the effect at the time of operation, the second operation is not performed, but the second operation The effect at the time of operation may be performed as effect contents different from the effect at the time of operation on the means side.

  In the above example of rendering (the first rendering mode), a situation where an instruction display for prompting an operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related rendering is being performed includes the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. The first situation in which only the operation for the operation button 410 is acceptable, the second situation in which only the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is acceptable, the operation for the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 Are set to correspond to any of the third situations in which effects can be received. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is produced when the effect reception is made, whereas in the third situation, the operation is different from either the first condition or the second condition. It is desirable that a rendition or the other rendition mode described above (different from the first rendition and the second rendition at the time of operation) is displayed. However, in the above-mentioned effect example, the above-mentioned third situation may not be necessarily required.

  Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-described example of presentation is not provided as an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. Above, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242 (f) among the effect examples (first effect mode), the operation by the player is not performed as in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242 (d). The control for operating the other operation button 410 may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side on which the player has not operated, and in this case, the operation means on the side on which the player has operated is also operated. It may be designed appropriately as to whether or not it is. However, the control to operate the operation means on the side where the operation has not been performed by the player is earlier than the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operation state be ended so that the gaze by the player is naturally returned to the gaming board 5 side.

  When the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying a driving force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying a driving force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operation means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decoration member SDY (crissman). Also, as the "operation" in the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source, an aspect such as "movement", "rotation", "rocking", "vibration" is exemplified. This is possible not only in the example of the effect but also in other example of effects.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 243 to 246 are to be executed as effects that indicate the progress of the effect until one of the first effect result and the second effect result appears, and the specific operation-related effect is the effect If the first effect result appears as a result of the effect, it is suggested that the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and if the second effect result appears as the result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the example of presentation (2nd presentation mode) in which it is suggested that the presentation acceptance period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 generate | occur | produces.

  FIG. 243 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination with the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 243 (b) shows the effect status in which a specific operation-related effect is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 243 (a) is being performed.

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is simultaneously displayed in the inside, and it is depicted that the lightning image IZ is acting on those images BTG and SYG. As described above, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of operation related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different kinds of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It is suggested that an operation for any of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) will be made available for reception soon, as it is unclear which one of the decoration 5001 and the decoration 5001 is available for reception. You will be able to

  In FIG. 243 (c), the specific operation related effect shown in FIG. 243 (b) is developed, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed In the display area of the device 1600, an effect of pushing the other party out of the display area is performed.

  That is, in the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (the second effect mode), "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG It is executed as an effect such as which one of BTG and SYG is left in the display area, and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect acceptance for the operation button 410 When a period occurs and a rendering result (second rendering result) in which the sword decorative image SYG is left appears, a rendering reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effects shown in FIGS. 243 (b) and (c) are “any of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001. Even when it occurs, it corresponds to a specific operation related effect that is allowed to appear prior to the occurrence of those periods.

  The figure on the left side of FIG. 243 (c) depicts a state in which the button image BTG is in a dominant condition to remain in the display area, and the figure on the right side displays the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts the situation that is prevailing to remain in the territory. In a specific operation-related presentation, such inferiority / predominance situations are constantly changing as time passes.

  FIG. 244 (d) shows that the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c). The effect that portrays is performed (the first effect result). When progressing to the contents of this effect, the effect accepting period for the sword decorative body 5001 does not occur, and only the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is performed, which indicates that the operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is permitted to receive the effect. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 244 (d)). By being executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted (the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, a plurality of instruction displays for prompting the operation (a character display such as “press” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Among the operation means of the above, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 is capable of accepting effects (being in the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this effect example, the operation to the operation button 410 is also prompted by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to be in the light emitting state.

  Note that the effects shown in FIG. 244 (d) are not progressed through specific operation-related effects (such as FIG. 243 (b), (c)), or without passing through the specific operation-related effects. In some cases, the presentation progress (for example, the presentation progress from the presentation state shown in FIG. 243 (a)) may be made. However, even when the same effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for giving a benefit be higher than that.

  Further, with regard to the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 244 (d)) is given in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 through a specific operation-related effect, a specific operation-related effect The ratio in which the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than when the effect (FIG. 244 (d)) is given to the operation button 410 without passing through Should be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the effect during the specific operation-related effects, which will be described later.

  In FIG. 244 (e), as the result of the operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means being performed while the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is being performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed according to the operation It is a depiction of how an effect at the time of operation is being performed.

  The effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 244 (e) is the same as FIG. 242 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed in the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, although the operation by the player is performed on the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to the first position and the second according to the reception of the effect. The same applies to the point that control to reciprocate between the positions and control (control to put in an operating state) is enabled. In addition, as a predetermined display effect, for example, "chance !!" suggested to be a relatively low expectation, and "superheat !!" suggested to be a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of effect modes such as the above, and displaying any of these effect modes according to the effect reception, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for awarding a benefit. Similarly to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, it is possible to have an effect mode that does not perform an operation to displace the display area to the front side, and cause any of the effect modes to appear according to the effect reception Then, it may be made to suggest the degree of expectation concerning privilege grant. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 244 (e)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 244 (f), a reach state can be formed and reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decorative body 5001 may be performed during the execution period of the reach effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation effect is performed (the reach effect is started Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the non-operation state (sword state)). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side and returns to the initial position (non-driven position) for the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable for the operating state (reciprocation or maintenance in the cutting state) to be continued for a period of time. In addition, with regard to the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state so that the driving force is not applied is earlier than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position). More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 245 (g), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decorative image SYG is in the display area. A presentation depicting the situation left is being performed (second presentation result). When progressing to this effect content, no effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs, and only an effect accepting period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is performed, which indicates that the operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is permitted to receive the effect. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 245 (g)) By being executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted among a plurality of operation means (a generation accepting period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as "Keep out sword" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Then, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (that is, during the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit (the sword decoration 5001 itself may be made to emit light) having the sword decoration 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is made to emit light. Also by doing this, the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is urged.

  Note that the effects shown in FIG. 245 (g) may be progressed through specific operation-related effects (such as FIG. 243 (b), (c)), or without passing through the specific operation-related effects. In some cases, the presentation progress (for example, the presentation progress from the presentation state shown in FIG. 243 (a)) may be made. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed after the specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for giving a benefit be higher than that. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is possible that the expectation degree concerning the privilege provision is made lower than the case where the expectation degree concerning the privilege provision is higher than the case and the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed after the specific operation related effect. desirable.

  In FIG. 245 (h), as a result of the operation performed on the sword decorative body 5001 among a plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed according to the operation It is a depiction of how the production at the time of operation is being performed.

  Similarly to the operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the operation effect shown in FIG. 245 (h) is basically similar to the operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), while displacing the specific decoration member SDY to the front side of the display area At 1600, a predetermined display effect is performed. In addition, here, although it is made to display the production | presentation aspect such as "superheat !!" which is suggested that it is a relatively high expectation degree according to presentation reception, it is suggested that it is a relatively low expectation degree “Chance !!” may be displayed. Similarly to this, with regard to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode in which the operation for displacing the display area to the front side is not performed is provided, and any of these effect modes is made to appear according to the effect reception In this case, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for awarding a benefit. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 245 (h), the effect mode of the sword decorative body 5001 itself is changed to any of the above-described plurality of modes based on the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 From stage 0 form shown in FIG. 222, it is possible to change from stage 1 form to any of stage 1 form to stage 3 form), and depending on which of these forms appears, the degree of expectation for awarding a bonus such as a big hit Height is to be suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 245 (i), even when the effect during operation (FIG. 245 (h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driven position), The sword decorative body 5001 is not returned to the state of the sword, but is kept in the state of the sword. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the scrapped state, and thereafter (during the period when reach production is performed, etc.), the sword decorative body 5001 is put into the katto state An operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and at that time, it is possible to further execute an operation effect according to the operation to the knife state.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) in two steps, and the first step operation (operation to the scraping state) and the second step operation Since the effect at the time of operation comes to be performed according to each operation (operation to the state of sword), not only when the operation to the operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) is performed, but also the first step In the non-operation period until the second-step operation (operation to the sword state) is performed after the operation (operation to the sword state) is performed, it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment for the operation Become so. Note that it is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation are operation modes different from each other (here, operations in directions opposite to each other). Moreover, it is desirable that the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the first step and the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the second step have different effect contents.

  In addition, when the effect at the time of operation according to the operation of the first step (FIG. 245 (h)) is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the extraction state, and is not maintained in the extraction state In such a case, it is desirable not to give the second operation opportunity. In the operation effect according to the first step operation, is it possible to maintain the sword decorative body 5001 at a position (surgery state) at which the second stage operation opportunity (operational opportunity from the sword state to the sword state) can be given? It may be performed as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation of no. That is, when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the scraped state but is returned to the scout state, it is substantially impossible to provide the second stage operation opportunity (operational opportunity from the scout state to the scout state) It is clear that it will be taken. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, as a result of performing the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the first step (FIG. 245 (h)), when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the scrapped state, when the predetermined time has passed (reach effect Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword state)). In this case, however, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated (reciprocated for at least half of a period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position)). It is desirable to keep the operation or the maintenance in the cutting state). In addition, with regard to the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state so that the driving force is not applied is earlier than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position). More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 246 (j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 244 (d). Thus, an effect is depicted in which the button image BTG is left in the display area. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time has passed since the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) or FIG. 245 (g) Either the rendition shown in or the rendition shown in FIG. 246 (j) appears. Note that which of the rendering contents appears is determined in advance in the determination processing of the rendering pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) (Here, the lightning image IZ) is continued, and it is made to indicate that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), the instruction display for prompting the operation (a character display such as “press” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed either, as shown in FIG. It is different from the case of the effect shown in). As a result, although the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize something.

  246 (k) shows that the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG so that the button image BTG is encased in 靄 MY as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) being developed, and even the outline drawing thereof is lost There is a production that will be broken.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), all of the effect elements (button image BTG) that suggested that the operation with respect to the operation button 410 can be effect accepted are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) that the operation to the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in such FIG. 246 (k) appears This makes it possible to question whether the effect reception period for the operation button 410 will occur and occur.

  Also in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is changing (is about to disappear), and the remaining time until it is clearly indicated to which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs is reduced. Suggest that

  As the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k) advances in FIG. 246 (i), the outline of 靄 MY approaches not the operation button 410 (button image BTG) but the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) A presentation depicting the situation has been made.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decorative image SYG is not displayed yet, it may be suggested that the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 may occur instead of the operation button 410 due to the outer shape of the eyelid MY. You will be able to

  Also in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (i), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation related effects (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately disappearing) than in FIG. 246 (k), and it is clearly determined to which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs. It is suggested that the remaining time of

  Then, in the example of the effect (the second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (i) is further developed and the eyelid MY is not displayed, the sword decorative image SYG is displayed, and the image of FIG. 245 is displayed. The effect shown in (g) is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) being performed, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even in the case (FIG. 244 (d), FIG. 246 (j)), since the possibility of receiving the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 will be left, it is intended to maintain the game interest. Will be able to

  In particular, in this rendering example (second rendering mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed in the rendering display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (FIG. 244 (d), FIG. 246 (j)) The effect on the sword decorative body 5001 by confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ that has appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is still continued. It is possible to grasp whether the possibility that the reception period will occur is left, and this also makes it possible to maintain the game interest.

  In this presentation example (second presentation mode), when the presentation shown in FIG. 246 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by the eyelid MY (FIG. 246 (k)), When the effect is developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) is not to display the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and to display the button image BTG. It can also be said that the effect suggests that the effect reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k) progresses, the outline of the eyelid MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) The effect pattern approaching the outer shape of) may be set to appear, and when the effect pattern appears, then the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 246 (j) and (k) conceals which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. It will be performed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Further, after providing the operation button 410 as the operable operation means, also in the effect situation shown in FIG. 245 (h) among the effect examples (second effect aspect), FIG. 244 (e). Similar to the effect situation shown in, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side on which the player has not performed the operation may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side on which the player has not operated, and in this case, the operation means on the side on which the player has operated is also operated. It may be designed appropriately as to whether or not it is.

  When the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying a driving force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying a driving force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operation means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decoration member SDY (crissman). Also, as the "operation" in the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source, an aspect such as "movement", "rotation", "rocking", "vibration" is exemplified. This is possible not only in the example of the effect but also in other example of effects.

[Third presentation mode]
FIGS. 247 to FIG. 250 are basically the same as the second effect mode with regard to a specific operation-related effect, but are diagrams showing another effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  FIG. 247 (a) shows that the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 247 (b) shows the effect status in which a specific operation-related effect has been started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 247 (a) is being performed. However, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), in the specific operation related rendering according to this rendering example (third rendering mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the rendering display device 1600 is operated Thus, it is suggested that either of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 be made available for presentation soon.

  In particular, in this presentation example (third presentation mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated respectively. This makes it easy for any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to be able to receive an effect immediately when the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is made to be recognizable. In this case, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 from the initial position to the operation position, but in comparison with the operation position to be operated when giving the operation opportunity Each one at a slower speed.

  According to such a configuration, the operation means still having time until the effect reception period occurs, or the operation means in which the effect reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol variation ends Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) will each operate. Therefore, since there is still time remaining until the effect reception period occurs, or from the time when the effect reception period does not occur in the first place until the end of the symbol variation, game interest for those operations is It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  And, in this effect example (the third effect mode), not the effect display in the effect display device 1600 but the specific operation related effect is thus performed by the respective operations (FIG. 247 (b)) by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. After the start, basically, the same rendering progress as the second rendering mode is performed.

  For example, among the effects shown in FIG. 247 (c), the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is displayed except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 243 (b).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243 (b), the state where the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated from the initial position (position when not driving) It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), it is suggested that any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for effects even by such a movable effect.

  Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), with regard to the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, after the specific operation related effect is started, a position different from the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) And it is made to position as an operation state (state to which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is extended compared to the case where the operation opportunity is immediately given without the operation-related effect being performed. When the operation means is employed, even if such an operation related effect is finally finished, it is necessary for the operation means on the side where the effect can be accepted to be operated at least to the operation position. Therefore, an operation-related effect will be further extended by the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such an interval will reduce the fun of the game.

  Therefore, in this presentation example (third presentation mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are both in the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position during the period when the specific operation related presentation is performed. It is made to position as an operation state (a state where a driving force is applied) at a different position (for example, an intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is ended and the effect receiving period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect receiving period has occurred is operated to the operation position only in a shorter time, or the effect receiving period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operation means on the other side to the initial position only in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the extension during the operation related effects. In addition, until the effect reception period occurs, the operation accepting side of the operation target is positioned as the operating state at a position different from the operating position, so that the effect receiving period of the operating state is It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not occurred yet.

  Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c) is developed and the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is performed using the button image BTG Except for the display corresponding to "410", the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 243 (c). However, even in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively in the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position It is made to position as an operation state (state to which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the above.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 247 (b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the state when they are at the initial position (non-driven position). On the other hand, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are placed in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). As described above, by intentionally changing the modes of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the modes of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, their alignment can be made in the near It can be suggested that the effect to be made (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 operate) is generated.

  Further, when the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is that the button image BTG Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 "at one time, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 244 (d).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the operation button 410 is in the state of being operated at the operation position, and the sword decorative body 5001 is at the initial position. It is in the state operated at a position different from (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), extension during the operation related effects is suitably suppressed. Become so.

  In addition, as an effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode moved to the operation position) and the sword decorative image SYG is not displayed” is firstly After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display for generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 and prompting the operation (character display such as “press”, effect You may make it display the bar display which shows the remaining time of a reception period. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed as "a mode moved to the operation position", but the operation button at the time of the display 410 is a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. In this manner, by causing the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect to be displayed as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the deviation of these modes will be filled soon In this case, it can be suggested in advance that the operation button 410 moves to the operation position.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 248 (f) is to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 244 (e). The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state where it is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). The sword decorative body 5001 is operated at a position different from the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 248 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 248 (g), a reach state is formed and reach effect can be performed. Is also as described with reference to FIG. 244 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 operates the sword decorative body 5001. Is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 245 (g), except that the instruction content regarding is "pushed in" and that the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode moved to the operation position". It is the contents.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. It is in the operating state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword decorative body 5001 is moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), extension during the operation related effects is suitably suppressed Will be

  Incidentally, even as the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode moved to the operation position)”. First, after performing the display effect, move the sword decorative body 5001 to the operation position, and generate an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 to prompt the operation (a character such as “push in” A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, while the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decoration image SYG is in a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. In this manner, by causing the sword decorative image SYG appearing as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect to be displayed as a mode different from the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes is achieved. It can be suggested in advance that it will be buried soon (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i) is to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 245 (h). The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. The sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driven position).

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 249 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 249 (j), a reach state is formed and reach effect may be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG. 244 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), the effect display in the effect display device 1600 shows that the button image BTG Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 246 (j).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) or the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are at initial positions ( It is in the state operated at a position different from the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. It is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred and that the possibility of the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 still remains by making such an operation condition as well. Will be able to

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) comes to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 246 (k). The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively at the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. Both are operating at different positions.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 246 (l). The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively at the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. Both are operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m), it is more desirable to make the outline of the eyelid MY approach the sword ornament 5001 in the operation position, not the sword ornament 5001 in the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is further developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) is not to display the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and to display the button image BTG. It can also be said that the effect suggests that the effect reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) progresses, the outline of the eyelid MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) The effect pattern approaching the outer shape of) may be set to appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 250 (k) and 250 (l) are also concealed as to which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. It will be performed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is operated to receive an effect during an effective period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect is executed, the effect is accepted. Accordingly, the sword decorative body 5001 on which the operation is not performed is reciprocated between the first position and the second position (Fig. 242 (d), Fig. 244 (e), etc.). However, as long as the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is put in an operating state, the operating state may be, for example, an aspect of moving and staying to another place, an aspect of vibrating, etc. It is possible to adopt. In addition, even when the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the effective period that occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the effect reception is performed according to the effect reception It is desirable that the operation button 410 on the side where the operation is not performed be in an operating state (such as vibration).

  Moreover, about the production which makes such "the operation part by which the operation is not performed" the operation state, the production after the operation according to the operation is "expected degree (the ratio that the big hit symbol appears," 0 ", Appears when executed in the high aspect of "100"), and the effect after operation according to the operation is "expected degree (the ratio of big hit symbol appearing, including" 0 "and" 100 ") It may not appear when executed in the "lower mode".

  In addition, among the two operation units (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001), when an effect is performed after an operation by one of the operation, "the operation unit on the other side where the operation is not performed" is also activated. When the effect after the operation is performed by the operation on the other, “the operation unit on one side where the operation is not performed” may not be activated.

  In this rendering example (third rendering mode), the driving source for applying the driving force to the operation button 410 is different from the driving source for applying the driving force to the sword decorative body 5001. It may be the same drive source.

  In each of the above-described presentation modes and their other examples, the basic operation is performed when “a button image BTG (first display mode) with the operation button 410 turned over” appears as a presentation result in which a specific operation-related presentation is performed. The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 among the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, the effect at the time of operation on the button side is performed. Become. In addition, basically, when the “sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) in which the sword decoration 5001 is turned over” appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration Of the body 5001, an operation opportunity is given only to the sword decorative body 5001, and when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted for rendering, an effect at the time of operation on the sword character side is performed. In this respect, in the operation effect on the button side, based on the result of the effect drawing according to the big hit judgment, the effect on success (operating the specific decorative member SDY) and the effect on failure (the specific decorative member SDY not operating) While it is supposed that one is made to appear, the effect at the time of operation on the sword character side is also the effect at the time of success (operating the specific decorative member SDY) and the effect at the time of failure based on the result of the effect drawing It is supposed that either (with the specific decoration member SDY not operated) is made to appear, and the contents of those effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001.

  In addition to effect on whether or not the specific decoration member SDY operates, operation effect on the button side and effect on the sword character side are the same as each other for the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600. The contents may be used.

  Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to specific operation-related effects, effects are given to which of the plurality of operation means is provided with the operation opportunity, and the operation means according to the result is An opportunity for operation was given. However, there may be a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed by the effect contents to which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, even if any effect results appear, such as a specific operation means being pressed by each other It may be made to be.

  For example, in any mode (for example, operation in a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the cutting state is put into the scraping state with respect to one operation means, and in a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the cutting state is put into the sword state The effect of whether or not the operation opportunity is given may be performed by the operation of, and the operation opportunity may be given to the operation means in a mode according to the result. In this case, while the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated in a state different from either the sword state or the sword state, and the operation in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to operate the sword decorative body 5001 in the inserted state or the extracted state when the rendering result of the setting is indicated.

  Also, when the symbol variation in the holding state is digested, it is determined that a specific operation related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation when the symbol change is in the holding state (digested before this) The effect suggested from within the execution period of the symbol variation may be performed. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given only to any of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given It will be possible to maintain the game-related fun of operation for a longer period of time for both. In addition, as such an effect, when the design variation in which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in the hold state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is desirable to operate a plurality of provided operating means.

  In the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, as specific operation-related effects, a plurality of images (button images BTG, etc.) corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) Although the sword decorative image SYG is displayed, these images may not necessarily be displayed. The point is that when a specific operation-related effect is executed, one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the effect reception period occurs for any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, those operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to conceal with respect to which of the means the presentation acceptance period occurs. Therefore, it is not necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different kinds of operation means, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration A presentation image different from any one of the images SYG may be made to appear as a specific operation-related presentation, without appearing any of the images SYG.

  However, even when adopting the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not simultaneously displayed while the specific operation related effect is being performed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation related effect is ended. One of BTG (image corresponding to operation button 410) and sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate to which of these operation means the effect reception period occurs. It will be. Then, in this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation related effect. In order to execute the specific operation-related effect, the specific operation related effect may be performed for which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs in which the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ or the like) has been It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping a lightning toward one of two rocks, and when a lightning falls on one of the rocks, a button image BTG is made to appear from the rock, and the other By making the sword decoration image SYG appear from the inside of the rock when lightning falls on the rock on the side, it is possible to make the stage progress to the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) or FIG. 245 (g) . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping the lightning toward one rock, and when the lightning falls on the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. It is also possible to cause the effect to progress to the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) or FIG. 245 (g). The point is that it is desirable to make the rendering progress as rendering content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the rendering result of the specific operation related rendering.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, a specific case is available in the case where the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and in the case where the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (execution of effects) to the occurrence of those effect reception periods to be the same. In addition, it is desirable to set so that the effect reception period occurs only for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and the effect reception period enabling generation of a specific effect (operation effect at the time of operation) depending on in which of the effect modes the effect is performed The ratio set for the specific operation means among the plurality of operation means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and their other examples, the operation was not performed based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect When operating the operation means on the side (such as FIG. 244 (e)), control is performed to return the operation means on the side not operated to the initial position after the elapse of a predetermined time based on the time of the operation. You may However, from when the operation means is not used as a reference, depending on at which timing of the effect reception period the user operates the operation means on the side not operated, until the operation is ended. It is desirable to make the time lengths of

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the less the remaining time of the effect reception period is, the more the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated. It can be said that the player is likely to have a conflict as to whether to operate the operation means on the side not indicated in the specific operation-related presentation. Therefore, according to which timing of the effect reception period is operated (according to the level of possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side not operated is operated and then the operation is ended. The length of time up to (a possibility that "when the operation means on the side indicated by a specific operation-related effect is operated, the effect reception has been generated and the effect at the time of operation has been performed") By making the length of time of appealing to the player different), it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, when any of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is not operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. All may be operated.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is started and before the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect A predetermined effect may be provided to indicate the proportion of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) to be displayed. Although a movable object effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, in this case, a specific movable object (here, a movable object that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed , Moving the movable body different from the specific decoration member SDY) operates the specific movable body more reliably based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed It is desirable to make it possible.

  In addition, it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the rendering result (the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, etc.) after the specific operation-related rendering starts. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is used to generate the effect reception period regarding the specific effect (effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY) While related effects are being performed, the effect reception period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means. This makes it possible to create a special effect aspect as if the effect is shown and the effect is ended despite the fact that it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, and the effect is performed. It is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment while playing a game. In addition, when the operation with respect to one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means is received while the specific operation related rendition is being performed, a predetermined effect is to be performed based on the effect reception. Then, it is desirable to indicate a rate at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the high expectation side is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the above-mentioned specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given in the middle of execution of a specific operation-related effect, there is a relatively high degree of expectation among a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) It is preferable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game entertainment when the player is aware that it was in the middle stage of a specific operation-related effect .

  In addition, in the middle of a stage where the specific operation-related effects related to a plurality of operation means are being performed, when the effect reception period is generated only for the operation buttons 410 of those operation means, within the effect reception period When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in step S, a special operation effect is performed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is performed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Even if any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) appears as a rendering result, the degree of expectation for giving a benefit may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the effect as the specific operation-related effect during the time from when the specific operation-related effect is started until the effect result is indicated, As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a relatively low degree of expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and it is possible to grant the privilege more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means having the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable that the degree of expectation be high.

  In addition, in each effect reception period described above, usually, when there is an operation by the player, the effect is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the effect reception period elapses Alternatively, an automatic button effect state described later in which control to start the same effect as when the operation was performed before may be performed may be settable. According to such an automatic button effect state, since the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the forgetting the operation. Become. And, when the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect is performed while being set to such an automatic button effect state, the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect Even if there is an effect, the same effect during operation as when the operation means is operated is performed without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

  However, even when the automatic button effect state described later is set, only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 of the operation means is in the middle stage where the specific operation related effect is being performed. It is desirable that the special operation presentation is not performed (the automatic button function does not function) unless the operation button 410 is operated within the presentation acceptance period. After this, even if the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the specific operation-related effects being performed, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect reception period. It is desirable that the same effect at the time of operation as that at the time of operating the operation means be performed without the operation (the automatic button function is made to function). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the specific operation related rendition is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function works, and it becomes possible to enjoy the game entertainment It will be expected to suppress the decline of

  In addition, about the setting change concerning ON / OFF of an automatic button production state, it is possible not only in the period when symbol variation is not executed by the operation of operation button 410 but also during the period when symbol variation is being executed. It is desirable to For example, when the automatic button effect state is off and the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is not generated, if the operation button 410 is operated, the automatic button effect state can be set and changed from the off state to the on state. When an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs while the effect state is on, and the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is performed in addition to the operation effect according to the operation being performed. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be cases where it is desirable to generate an effect at the time of operation by the player while maintaining the on state of the automatic button effect state, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on Within the effect reception period for the time operation button 410, when the operation for the operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled as well as the operation button 410 and the operation for the other operation means is performed, Unlike when the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable to cause a change in the effect being executed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the on state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same effect during operation as when the operation button 410 is operated.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect state is switched from the off state to the on state and when it is switched from the on state to the off state.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, the button image BTG with the operation button 410 over or the sword decorative body 5001 as the effect result of performing the specific operation-related effect In the state where the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the operation opportunity corresponding to them is given, but it is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among the display modes, an operation opportunity (effect reception for operation button 410 is received If the operation opportunity (rendering acceptance period) is given to the sword decorative body 5001 when the second display mode is given and the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode Any display content may be adopted as

  For example, in the above-described second and third effect modes, the effect image CG (first one) shown in FIG. 251 (a) instead of the effect image shown in FIG. 244 (d) and FIG. 248 (e). (Display mode) is displayed, and the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (b) is displayed instead of the effect image shown in FIGS. 245 (g) and 249 (h). It is also good. According to such a configuration, when a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect portion and the other background image (a portion that has been displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect or the effect image TG (second display mode) (substantially the entire effect in the display area is Partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) shown in FIG. 244 (d), FIG. 245 (g), FIG. 248 (e) and FIG. Unlike in the case where the decoration image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the giving of the operation opportunity is performed using the substantially entire area of the display area (until displaying other effect images such as the background portion which may be expected) By being done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (a), the shield (the button image BTG over the operation button 410) holding the operation button 410 in the design is stored. The character is to be displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (b), the sword (the sword decoration image SYG) which holds the sword decoration 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it is suggested that the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) should be operated. As described above, there is no need to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as an effect image in which the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 itself is overlooked. It is desirable to display as an effect image incorporating an aspect such as at least a partial shape or a partial design of the operation means.

  Further, with regard to the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this manner, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG Depending on which of the (second display mode) is displayed, it may be performed with an effect that suggests different degrees of expectation. For example, when the effect image TG (the second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for giving the privilege is higher than when the effect image CG (the first display mode) appears. In addition, a plurality of effect modes (such as different colors) are prepared as effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG (second display mode), and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. It may also indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, even when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, the expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears when displayed in a specific display mode. You may

  In addition, with regard to the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (it is desirable that the effect status is relatively high), There is a case where it is desirable that the operation-related effect is not executed (for example, after a prophecy effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed) (it is preferable that the effect has a relatively low expectation) It may be made to be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and a button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as a result of the effect, an effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being performed (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect being performed). When displayed, in addition to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, the effect reception period also for another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001 etc.) not corresponding to the button image BTG May be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not performed and the effect is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is performed. It becomes possible to impart an interest different from that of the case where the button image BTG appears with respect to the operation while the effects are relatively high in expectation, and it is possible to improve the game interest. Another operation means may be an operation means different from that of the sword decoration 5001.

  In addition, when the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not performed and the effect is relatively low, an operation on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG in the effect reception period is performed. When the effect is accepted, the special operation effect is executed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, “a specific operation-related effect is executed and the relative It is desirable that it is suggested that the presentation status has a higher expectation than in the production status in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production status with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the button image BTG appears in the effect status with a relatively low degree of expectation, the operation means (operation button corresponding to the button image BTG in the effect reception period) When 410) is operated, the special effect presentation period is not executed by ending the effect reception period for another operation means occurring at the same time, and according to the operation on the operation means (operation button 410) It is desirable that an effect at the time of operation be performed.

  On the other hand, when the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not performed and the effect is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG in the effect reception period is When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended, and the special operation effect is to be executed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not performed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated, and the operation is not performed. Even when the operation means different from the means is operated, the effect at the time of operation when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed when the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect being performed Even when the effect reception period occurs with respect to the operation means, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period. It is desirable to make the automatic button function work. However, when the button image BTG appears without a specific operation-related effect being executed when the above-described automatic button effect state is set, operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG Even when the effect reception period is generated for both of the operation means and the operation means other than the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is used even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same effect at the time of operation as that at the time of operation is performed, and the special operation effect that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated is not performed.

  However, within the effect reception period, another operation is performed prior to the specific timing at which the effect at the time of operation (the effect when the operating means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the above-mentioned automatic button function. In the case where the operation is performed on the operation means and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the special operation effect is performed according to the effect reception, and the specific timing has arrived. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation (the effect when the operating means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) does not appear. In this case, although the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function in the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is continued in the on state even after the effect reception period ends. Is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, after the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are reversed, each effect described above (operation effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, in the case where the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without performing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not the specific operation-related effect being performed). When a sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being performed (for example, after a prophecy effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect being performed). In addition to the operation means (the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, the effect reception period is generated also for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410 etc.) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It becomes.

  Further, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes described above and other examples thereof, “a button image BTG (first display mode) in which the operation button 410 is overlooked”, or an effect result of performing a specific operation-related effect, or In the case where any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) looking over the sword decoration 5001" is displayed and the effect is accepted by the displayed operation means, relative The first operation effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content suggested to have a relatively low degree of expectation. It is possible to cause any of the second operation effects (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) to be made to appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation time effect, which is the effect content that suggests the, is to be executed. However, when the first operation effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period which occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the first operation effect is the button image BTG (first operation effect). When the display mode is displayed is executed based on the effect reception on the operation button 410 and when the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the effect reception on the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable to indicate the same expectations as when implemented on the basis of. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, the effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) having a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. Even if the first operation effect is executed based on that the effect is accepted, the effect image (sword decoration) having a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of effecting that a specific operation related effect is performed As compared with the case where the image SYG (the second display mode) is displayed, any disadvantage is not generated on the rendering result, so that the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described timer effect (FIG. 118), it is possible to set “providing an operation opportunity to the operation means” as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes to be the timer object). That is, in the timer effect directed to "providing an operation opportunity to the operation means", when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), an operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means This makes it possible to enjoy the effects at the time of operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect target of the timer effect, when the operation with respect to the operation means is performed, the effect result advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery Make it possible for any of the adverse effects to appear. However, when the “operation opportunity to the operation means” is given as the target of the timer effect, the proportion of the effect result that is advantageous for the player is high, as compared with the case where the timer effect is not the target. It is more desirable to The percentage may be 100%.

  In this respect, when the effect pattern for which the timer effect is executed for which the effect is directed to the operation means (for example, giving the operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001)) appears, the operation effect for the operation means In addition, a specific operation-related effect using “grant” may be performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears to give an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect on which one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is performed.

  According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation related effect are performed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). It is possible to improve the fun of the game when played.

  However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed until just before that one effect target (the operation of the sword decoration 5001). There is a concern that it is not possible to understand which of the effects should be closely watched, the attention is distracted, and the entertainment interest drops in reverse.

  Therefore, in the case where a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (the assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001), as will be described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value becomes a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), "specific operation related effect" is not executed and the count value It is desirable that the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced after it becomes a predetermined value (here, the count “0”).

  FIG. 252 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively performed on one effect target (the assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001). Note that the following timer effect corresponds to the above-described notice-side timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processing according to the timer effect.

  252 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination with the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  252 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 252 (a), the timer effect is the effect start (here, the countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here "3") Indicates the situation. In addition, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 252 (b), "specific operation related rendering" is not yet executed, and it is unclear whether the timer rendering is intended for any of the renderings. There is.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (while it is unclear which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates prepared for the effect is being executed). Here, the count "0" is reached and this is displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” as the count value is displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced. In addition, when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not "0", and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) A specific operation-related effect on which one of the two is displayed is performed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (the assignment of the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001), those effects are still Since overlapping in sequence is avoided, it is possible to enjoy each of the different effects.

  However, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) when a specific operation-related effect is in an unexecuted state, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that it will not be recognized that the game is played as a game, and the amusement of the game will be reduced. Therefore, in this rendering example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), between the count display reaching a predetermined value (here, the count "0") and the start of a specific operation-related rendering, An effect is suggested that indicates the type of effect (the assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001) that the timer effect is directed to.

  In the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the display of "Katsuna" is performed first on the effect display device 1600. Thus, it is suggested that the timer effect is directed to the effect of "the giving of the operation opportunity (the operation opportunity by the" Kado ") to the sword decorative body 5001."

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), a rendering image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed ("Katou" Because "specific operation related effects" are started to be produced while the player side recognizes that the operation opportunity is given by "", it is possible to improve the game interest. become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when “納” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 It may also be displayed continuously.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the sword decorative body 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, Reciprocating motion in the up and down direction) is performed, and this also indicates that "the opportunity to operate the sword decorative body 5001 (operational opportunity by I try to suggest it.

  In addition, about the predetermined operation | movement by such a sword decorative body 5001, not only when timer production is making "a grant of the operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001" a production target, count display also when making other production targets It may be performed when 0 becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is targeted for, but functions as an effect that indicates that the count display has become 0. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined action by the sword decorative body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0 and before the start of the effect to be the effect target, and the timer effect is the effect target It is performed at the same time as the timing when the effect that suggests the effect type is started is started or before this, and during the execution state, the effect that indicates the effect type that the timer effect is targeted for is also being executed It can be said that it is important to

FIG. 252 (d) shows an effect situation in which the "specific operation related effect" is started.
In this effect situation, as described above, in addition to the fact that the count value has already been hidden, the effect that suggests the type of effect for which the timer effect is the effect is also hidden. Further, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is also completed. However, with regard to effects that indicate the type of effect that the timer effect is targeted for, or a predetermined action by the sword decorative body 5001, it is important to execute before a specific operation-related effect is started, so The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect of is started.

  Then, after the “specific operation-related effect” is started in this way, the effects will be developed in the order of FIG. 252 (e) to (h), but FIG. 243 (c Because the contents are substantially the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 245 (g) to (i) or FIGS. 247 (d) and 249 (h) to (j), the details will be omitted.

  In addition, as a timer effect performed in connection with a specific operation-related effect, one of the timer effect shown in FIG. 252 and another timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect drawing. It may be made feasible. That is, another timer effect is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 252 in that a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started, but the specific operation-related effect is an effect. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, “0”) according to the timing to be started (strictly, slightly before this), and continues even after the specific operation-related effects are started It has become. In this case, even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, a privilege is awarded ( Expectations for the jackpot) are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect will be simultaneously developed, but at the same time when the effect situation where the effect is simultaneously developed appears, the specific operation-related effect is Regardless of which of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are shown as the rendering result, their rendering value is the same as the expectation for the same bonus award (big hit) Will be the same. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to substantially lose the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, any of the effects It is not possible to understand what should be focused on, and it will be avoided that the situation where the attention is distracted occurs. However, in order to improve the game interest, when the effect pattern in which the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed appears, it is more advantageous than in the case where the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252 appears. It is desirable that the degree of expectation be high.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), first, a display that suggests the type of the effect target in the effect display device 1600 ( Although "Kado" is performed, the display indicating such an object of effect may be performed also when another effect mode is selected as the effect of timer effect. However, among a plurality of effects that may be targeted by the timer, when a specific effect is targeted by the timer, it may not be displayed that suggests which effect the timer effect targets.

  In addition, in each of the effect modes described above and their other examples, prior to giving an operation opportunity to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, the operation opportunity is given to any of these operation means. We decided to perform a specific operation-related presentation about whether it will be granted. However, prior to giving the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the generation of the effect reception period), the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 It does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 (prior to the generation of the effect reception period). An effect pattern for performing the second precursor effect may appear. In the case of performing these omen effects (first omen effect, second omen effect), the time required for the effect (precursor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for awarding benefits when a rendition appears, in order to enhance the fun of the game when a specific operation-related rendition is performed.

  Here, as the prognostic effect, for example, the fog is generated before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) appearing over the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given Display a specific image, such as expressing the appearance of entering. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (position on the layer behind the specific image) which is difficult to be recognized by overlapping with the specific image. After that, the button image BTG is gradually made to gradually change the specific image to non-display (by increasing the transmittance, decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.). It is possible to carry out as an effect etc. which are made to be exposed. In addition, an example of a specific depiction mode according to such a precursor effect will be described later.

  At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) having different degrees of expectation for awarding a bonus (big hit), It is possible to have an interest as to which display mode the button image BTG appears in while the precursor image gradually developing the button image BTG is developed.

  It should be noted that the first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decorative body 5001, and the operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 It is important to make it executed as different presentation contents. Moreover, it is desirable to make not only the contents of the effect but also the time required for the effect different.

  In such a prophetic effect, in the meaning of "when giving an operation opportunity to a specific operation means, what is performed as an effect associated with the application of the operation opportunity", the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" It can be said that it is a high-level concept that includes. Then, including the “specific operation-related effects”, as for the admonition effects, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as described below with reference to FIG. By suggesting how long the effect reception period generated in response to the anticipation effect is based on the duration of the anticipation effect, it is possible to improve the amusement when the anticipation effect is performed. It is more desirable to make it happen.

  FIG. 253 is a time chart for explaining an example of the effect contents for each type with regard to effects when a plurality of types (prompt effects A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as a omen effect.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (precursor effect A), when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the pro-effect effect A is started. The precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given, and the precursor effect When A is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (precursor effect A), when precursor effect A is performed, the same time length is given regardless of which operation means is to be provided with the operation opportunity. The effect reception period (effective period) T1 that is held will occur.

  In the effect reception period (effective period) T1, an instruction display for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the admonition effect A (character display such as "press", and bar display showing remaining time of the effect reception period Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is made by the operation to the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, based on the effect reception, the above-mentioned operation effect (for example, FIG. 242 (d), (f) or 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. 249 (i), etc. are executed, and at the same time, the processing for ending the period T1 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (b) (precursor effect B1), when the second predetermined time has elapsed, not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The omen effect B1 is to be started. The precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation related effect” but is executed prior to an operation opportunity being given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation The operation is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) Is supposed to occur.

  In the effect reception period (effective period) T2, an instruction display (a character display such as "press" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the aura effect B1 is displayed Be done. Then, when the effect reception is made by the operation to the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T2, based on the effect reception, a predetermined operation effect different from the operation effect described above is executed At the same time, processing for ending the period T2 is performed.

  In this respect, in this example of the effect, the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the accompaniment effect B1 is an effect reception period corresponding to the adjective effect A as shown in FIGS. (Effective period) It is generated as a period having a time length different from T1 (here, a short time length). Thus, depending on which aspect (prediction effect A, prediction effect B1) is performed, it indicates how long the effect receiving period generated in response to the prognostic effect has a length. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the precursor effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (c) (precursor effect B2), when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the prognostic effect B2 is started. Like the omen effect B1, this omen effect B2 is also executed prior to the operation when given an operation opportunity to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), not the “specific operation related effect”. (Not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the omen effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from that of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the omen effect B1. Effect reception period) T3 is to occur.

  In addition, also in this effect reception period (effective period) T3, an instruction display for prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the aura effect B2 (a character display such as “press”, a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period Is displayed. In addition, when the effect reception is made by the operation to the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T3, based on the effect reception, the effect at the time of operation that is different from the case where the adjective effects A and B1 are performed Is performed, and processing for ending the period T3 at that point is performed.

  In this respect, in this example of the effect, the effect reception period (effective period) T3 corresponding to the accompaniment effect B2 is an effect reception period corresponding to the accompaniment effect A, as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and (c). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation related presentation with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed although the precursor effect B2 having a relatively low degree of expectation for awarding a bonus (big hit) is performed. Since it is suggested that the effect reception period (effective period) T3 with a length will be generated, the effect situation as if a specific operation related effect was performed will be produced, and the prognostic effect B2 is It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation regarding awarding of benefits differs between when the effect reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

  In addition, for the prognostic effects B1 and B2, the same effect mode is made to appear from the start of the effect to the timing on the way, and a different effect mode is made to appear after the timing has passed, thereby specifying For the operation means of the above, it may be possible to have an effect on which of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 and the effect reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not necessary to have such effect, and it is also possible to start the effect when different time has passed since the start of the symbol variation even as the timing when the effect B1 and B2 are started. The precursor effects B1 and B2 may have mutually different time lengths.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (d) (precursor effect C), when the third predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the precursor effect C is started. The precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given, and the precursor effect C When C is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (d) (prediction effect C), when the prediction effect C is performed, the same time length is given regardless of which operation means is to be given the operation opportunity. The effect reception period (valid period) T4 that is held will occur.

  Even in the effect reception period (effective period) T4, an instruction display for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the admonition effect C (character display such as “press” Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is made by the operation to the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T4, the above-mentioned operation effect (for example, FIG. 242 (d), (f) or 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. 249 (i), etc. are executed, and at the same time, the processing for ending the period T4 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

  In this respect, in this example of the effect, the effect reception period (effective period) T4 corresponding to the accompaniment effect C is an effect reception period corresponding to the accompaniment effect A as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and (d). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than that of the precursor effect A, if the precursor effect is executed as the “specific operation-related effect described above” Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as in the case of the accompaniment effect A occur, the game entertaining when the admonition effect C is performed is suitably maintained You will be able to

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 253, the duration of the effect reception period (the effective period) is associated with the types of the accompaniment effects A, B1, B2 and C in a one-to-one relationship, thereby the effect reception period Indicated the length of (effective period). However, the effect reception period (the effective period (the effective period) can be set by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific effect reception period (for example, effect reception period T2 or the like) having a predetermined length to be different for each type of precursor effect The length of) may be suggested.

  Moreover, in each of the above-described presentation modes and their different examples, after a specific operation-related presentation is performed, for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the presentation When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) in which the specific operation means is turned is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to indicate the same state as that of the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 248 (e), the operation button 410 is in the operating state at the operating position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as operating at the operating position. In the example shown in (h), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state at the operating position (strap state), but the sword decorative image SYG is also displayed as the state (strap state) operating at the operating position. It is done.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) which looks over as it is If a certain operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed, the width as the effect will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the effect, and the game interest will be lowered. I am concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, an effect image (for example, a button image) over the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) as described below with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255. With regard to BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operating means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, but is displayed as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram showing an example of effect of the content of the effect when the accompaniment effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect content of when the accompaniment effect as the specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, FIGS. 254 (a) to 254 (c) show the contents of an effect when a omen effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, now, in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination with the number of reservations being 0 Suppose that you are in a situation. Then, in the rendering situation, as shown in FIG. 254 (a), it does not correspond to the “specific operation related rendering” but corresponds to only the sword decorative body 5001 side among the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Assuming that the admonition effect is performed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decorative body 5001 soon. In addition, in the omen effect (as in the omen effect in the other example as well), if the predetermined display corresponding to the operation means of the side to which the operation opportunity will be given soon will be made, the effect image over the operation means Does not have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decorative body 5001 soon when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the effect reception period is not yet displayed. Will be.

  In the aura effect shown in FIG. 254 (a), a sword decoration image SYGa covering a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation and a sword decoration image SYGb covering a red ala with a relatively high degree of expectation Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect contents about which one of them is finally left in the display area appear. Therefore, in this rendering situation, although it can be recognized that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decorative body 5001 soon, the sword decorative image SYGa having a low degree of expectation as the sword decorative image SYG or an expectation of It is concealed as to which of the high sword decoration image SYGb is displayed.

  FIG. 254 (b) shows the rendering result in which the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left, and thus the sword decoration 5001 in a relatively high expectation situation. It will be suggested that the presentation acceptance period for In the display shown in FIG. 254 (b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that the sword decoration image SYGb covering the red aura is not changed to another effect image (such as the sword decoration image SYGa). .

  FIG. 254 (c) shows an example of effect when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 The character display such as "" and the bar display which shows the remaining time of an effect reception period are displayed. In addition, when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the sword, but the sword decorative image SYGb is also extracted from the state of the sword according to this. It is made to change the state to the state. In addition, when the effect reception is made within the effect reception period, a predetermined operation effect is performed based on the effect reception, and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the state of the sword Maintained. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when the accompaniment effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, if the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, An effect image (here, sword decoration image SYGb) in which the sword decoration 5001) is viewed is displayed in the same state (in a scraped state) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, sword decoration 5001) at that time. Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, sword decoration image SYGb) in which the operation means on the operation object side is overlooked, and an operation means on the operation object side (here, sword decoration 5001) Are all stopped at predetermined positions.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 254 (d) to (g) show the contents of effects when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a prognostic effect. For example, now, in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination with the number of reservations being 0 Suppose that you are in a situation. Then, in the rendering situation, as shown in FIG. 254 (d), assuming that the prognostic effect as the “specific operation-related effect” is started, either of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 It will be possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to か soon.

  FIG. 254 (e) shows a rendering situation in which the prognostic rendition as the "specific operation-related rendition" has progressed and the rendition result has appeared. In this rendering situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 as a result of the “specific operation related rendering”. It is done. In the display shown in FIG. 254 (e), a final effect is displayed that suggests that the sword decorative image SYG is not changed to another effect image (such as a button image BTG).

  FIG. 254 (f) shows an example of effect when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 The character display such as "" and the bar display which shows the remaining time of an effect reception period are displayed. In addition, when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the sword, and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the state of the sword.

  In this example, in the example shown in FIGS. 254 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration 5001 is in the state of being removed in the effect reception period. While the sword decorative body 5001 continues to be displaced upward gradually over the period until the end of the effect reception period, and different from each other. I am trying to

  In the effect reception period, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is at any position, the effect reception will be performed when the operation target role object 141 is operated to the sword state, and the effect is received. While a predetermined operation effect is performed based on the reception, the sword decorative image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the state of the sword. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is provided for the effect. While the other side does not operate, it will be able to play a role in accurately transmitting the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 254 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is kept in the stop state during the effect reception period, and the sword decoration 5001 is operated continuously, but the invention is not limited thereto. The decorative image SYG may be operated continuously, and the sword decorative body 5001 may be stopped.

  As described above, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 254, in the effect reception period (FIG. 254 (c)) that occurs without passing through a specific operation-related effect, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG are While in the stopped state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 254 (f)) generated after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is put in the stopped state. On the other side, it is made to continue as a dynamic state so that it is possible to provide for presentation. Therefore, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the width of the effect can be expanded, and the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation reception period for the operation button 410 is generated after a specific operation-related effect. While the button 410 itself is put into a stopped state, if the button image BTG with the operation button 410 turned over is made to be a dynamic state and the depiction thereof is continued, a specific operation-related presentation is performed. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs is greatly improved.

  Note that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red ala with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a prognostic effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a prognostic effect is performed. That is, in this case, in a specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect of which one of the button image BTG with the operation button 410 turned up and the sword decoration image SYG with the sword decoration 5001 turned up appears When the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (the button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation Can be provided further. About this method, you may make it employ | adopt suitably also in each presentation aspect mentioned above other than the production example of FIG. 254, and those other examples.

  Then, in the case of giving such two renditions to a specific operation-related rendition, first, which of the button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG is the rendition result of the particular operation-related rendition It is unclear whether the display mode of the effect image that appears or can be recognized and the appearance of the effect image on the side that appears is high (for example, the outline of the effect image over the operation means is whitened out Make a recognizable display state etc.) appear by presentation progress. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is a high expectation (for example, the outline of the effect image over the operation means It is desirable to release the state so that the color can be confirmed, etc.) to appear sequentially by further rendering progress. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed after such effect development, under a predetermined condition, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is a high expectation (for example, the operation means After canceling the outline state of the overturned effect image etc.), the button image BTG is further hidden and it is possible to recognize that the sword decorative image SYG appears as an effect result of the specific operation related effect To an unknown state (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined and only the outline can be recognized) whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is high. In addition, an effect pattern may be generated to cause the effect to further advance. Note that after this, it is possible to recognize whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is a high expectation (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG To make it possible to check the color, etc.). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the high expectation side (for example, red), the display mode on the side where the expectation is low (for example, blue) is more Also, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further developments occur.

  FIGS. 255 (a) to 255 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 254 (d) to 254 (g) as effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a prognostic effect. That is, in FIG. 255 (a), a pro-end effect as “specific operation-related effect” is started, but the pro-end effect holds a shield (button image BTG) in which the operation button 410 is turned over. The second character (the effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) that holds the first character (the effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and the sword (the sword decoration image SYG) that looks over the sword decoration 5001 Of the character is displayed, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. It is like that.

  FIG. 255 (b) is in a rendering situation in which a rendering result of a prognostic rendering as “specific operation-related rendering” appears. In this rendering situation, the first character (the rendering image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001, but the second character (sword decoration) An effect image corresponding to the body 5001 is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 255 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 251 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is in a non-display state). While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect portion (a confrontation between the characters) and the other background image (the portion that has been displayed before the start of the specific operation-related effect) The effect image (display image shown in FIG. 255 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  FIGS. 255 (c) to (e) show examples of effects when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 255 (c). In addition, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (a character display such as “press down” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 255 (c), the sword decorative body 5001 starts to move from the knapsack state to the gullet state when the production reception period occurs. As shown in FIG. 255 (d), only when a relatively short time has passed since the start of the effect reception period, the sword decorative body 5001 completes the movement (movement) from the knapsack state to the knapsack state It is supposed to After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (e), the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the scraped state until at least the effect reception period is ended, unless the player performs an operation, and the player It will wait for the operation (operation from the cutting state to the cutting state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 255 (c) to (e), the movement (the movement in the rotational direction) is completely different from the movement (the movement in the linear direction) of such a sword decoration 5001. In the draw-down operation, the second character swings down on the sword decoration image SYG, and the sword decoration image SYG continues continuously even after the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in the sword cutting state. It is supposed to work. The sword decorative image SYG according to this example of production loops a series of displays from the start of the swing down operation (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)) within the effect reception period. It is designed to be repeated by the process.

  However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected, and the display change is progressed by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time. In addition, with regard to the sword decorative body 5001, the state is extracted while the series of display from the start of the swing down operation (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)) is performed. However, even if loop processing is performed, it will be maintained as it is without being affected. In addition, when operation to the sword state is performed to the operation subject role item 141 within the effect reception period, the effect reception will be made, and while the predetermined operation effect is performed based on the effect reception, The loop processing is ended, the sword decorative image SYG is hidden, and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the state of the sword. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when the aura effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG operate within the effect reception period, but The operation modes (operations for accurately transmitting the current situation (operations for moving to the operating position) and loop operations provided for rendering) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is ended. Even after that, the sword decorative image SYG is allowed to continue without ending its operation. Thereby, when the effect reception period (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) occurring after the specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect continues until after the effect reception period occurs ((255)) It is possible to expand the range of the effects such as making the background continuous and possible to execute, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  Also, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255, the effect content (the display in which the characters face each other) that appeared when the omen effect (FIG. 255 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect is being performed. The effect (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs is performed in a form in which both the background image and the background image are changed. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, while the dedicated background (full moon) is displayed, the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) over the operation means and the character (sword decoration image SYG) different from the specified Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both of the image and the image), it is possible to improve the presentation during the effect reception period. In this sense, it is possible to perform the rendering using at least one of the rendering image (sword decoration image SYG) surpassing the operation means and the character also in the omen rendering, with the rendering in the rendering and the rendering reception period. It can be said that it is more desirable in order to have a connection between stage effects and to further improve the stage effect. The dedicated background (full moon) may have a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for awarding a benefit, and may be displayed by any of these display modes.

  In the aura of production as a specific operation-related production, and in the production within the production reception period, a plurality of production modes are prepared as the production, and depending on which one of the production modes appears, the production reception A suggestion may be made as to whether an aspect with a high degree of expectation appears as an effect at the time of operation when the effect reception is made in a period. The background image appearing when the aura effect is performed may be used to indicate the degree of expectation for giving a benefit.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255, when a pro-end effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect is received in a form that changes both the contents of the effect and the background image that were appearing in the pre-effect effect. It is decided to execute the effect within the period, but it is not a specific operation-related effect described above (the specific operation means of the plurality of operation means (or the specific operation mode of the plurality of operation modes) ) When a dedicated antecedent effect when an operation opportunity is given) is being performed, when the effect reception period occurs in the form of changing both the effect content and the background image that appeared in the adjective effect An effect may be performed. The point is that "an operation-related effect (precursor effect) can be generated for the operation with respect to the operation means, and as the operation-related effect (precursor effect), an operation for the first effect is accepted by the player's operation. At least generation of an operation-related effect and a second operation-related effect in which an effect on a second effect different from the first effect is accepted by an operation by a player can be generated, and displayed in the first operation-related effect The first operation prompting image is displayed while the background image being displayed from when the first operation prompting image is not displayed is being displayed continuously, and the second operation related image is displayed. The second operation promotion image displayed in the effect is displayed in accordance with changing the background image when the second operation promotion image is not displayed yet to another background image. " As long as it was Tsu. Here, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image may not be identical to each other, for example, a button image BTG, a sword decoration image SYG, a gauge display, or "press!" It is possible to adopt suitably, such as comment display of "." Furthermore, the “first effect” and the “second effect” may be effects after different operations, for example, as “the first operation related effect for which the effect for the first effect is accepted”, the effect is accepted It is possible to illustrate as an effect about which mode appears as a speech advance notice when the game is played, and as the "second operation related effect for which the effect for the second effect is received", the effect is received. It can be illustrated as an effect as to whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates at the same time. Under the present circumstances, even if it is a case when any mode appears as a conversation notice, the effect design is designed such that the ratio (including 100%) in which the big hit symbol appears is higher when the specific decoration member SDY is operated. It is desirable to do. In addition, with regard to “the second operation related effect in which the effect reception for the second effect is performed”, an operation reception effect described later with reference to FIG. 178, FIG. 390 to FIG. 393, FIG. 395 to 398, FIG. It may be executed as (an operation reception effect under BGM suppression). On the other hand, "the first operation related effect for which the effect reception for the first effect is received" will be described later with reference to FIG. 394, FIG. 400, FIG. 402, etc. It may be executed as any of the reception effects). In addition, each of the other examples of the operation reception effects described later may be appropriately adopted. In addition, the background image does not necessarily have to be a still image, and may be displayed as a moving image showing how a river flows or characters are fighting each other. Such display of a still image or a range in which a moving image is projected is displayed in a sliding manner (displayed in a manner in which coordinates move) is also included. That is, it can be said that the background image is "continuously displayed" if it is displayed in chronological order or in a coordinate connection with the depiction content being projected. On the other hand, "to change the background image to another background image" does not necessarily have to be displayed by another image data or another layer, and, for example, the background image itself is a time series or coordinates. There are also images that are suddenly changed or replaced (switched) to "an image having a different form (dedicated background image corresponding to the effect reception period)" that is not connected in a practical manner. In addition, it includes those which are changed to "black image" and those which are replaced (switched). That is, if there is no connection in terms of depiction contents before and after time change and also in time coordinate, it can be said that "the background image is changed to another background image". In order to make it easier to recognize that a change has occurred in the background image in this manner, an effect image (blackout, whiteout, etc.) for hiding the background image that has been displayed up to that point is displayed on the effect display device 1600. More preferably, the display area is displayed over an area (more preferably, substantially the entire area) at least half the area of the display area so that the second operation promotion image is displayed together with the new background image after the display. The first operation related effect and the second operation related effect may be sequentially displayed in one variation pattern. The timing at which the background image is changed to another background image may be earlier than the occurrence of the effect reception period, as described above, or the occurrence of the effect reception period, including the timing at which the effect reception period occurs. The timing may be set after the timing (for example, FIG. 255 (b) may be omitted, and effects may be advanced from FIG. 255 (a) to FIG. 255 (c)).

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255, although the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is started after the effect reception period occurs, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is started before the effect reception period occurs. The operation of the sword decorative body 5001 started before the effect reception period occurs may be completed before the effect reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation). The operation carried out may be completed before the effect reception period occurs), and thereafter the stopped state may be maintained.

  Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001), a display for changing the background image when the effect reception period occurs, and a change of the background image In some cases, there may be a case in which no display is made. Then, in this case, if display is performed to change the background image when the effect reception period occurs, the degree of expectation regarding benefit provision is higher than when display is not performed to change the background image when the effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to

  Moreover, in each of the above-described presentation modes and their different examples, after a specific operation-related presentation is performed, the operation is performed on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the presentation When the effect reception is made, the specific decoration member SDY (a movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an effect at the time of operation based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 242 (d), FIG. 244 (e), and FIG. 245 (h), the sword decorative body 5001 (or the operation button as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side) By also operating 410), it is intended to improve the effect of the operation-related effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. As described above, in order to improve the effect of the operation-related effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed is performed according to the result of the effect. The effect state at the time of success when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) appear, or the movement provided on the game board 5 side While the rendering situation at the time of failure in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, an operation-time rendering (for example, a specific one In the operation effect effect after the precursor effect effect which is not the operation related effect effect), either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable object provided on the door frame 3 side according to the result of the effect Only when it works, the stage production status at the time of success appears, or the game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  In addition, in the specific operation-related effects according to each of the above-described effect modes and their other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, a button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The degree of expectation for granting benefits is set to be higher than that. In this respect, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 256 (a), the button in the mode (specific effect mode) to which the princess character is added. The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for giving a privilege than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed as a result of the specific operation-related effect When the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the specific operation-related effect, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game.

  In addition, the mode (specific rendering mode) in which the princess character is displayed may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG, as shown in FIG. 256 (b). In this case, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the expectation for awarding a privilege is higher than when it is displayed in the normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (see FIG. 1) in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed). 256 (a) and a second effect pattern (FIG. 256 (b) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of the specific operation related effect being performed. And) may be prepared respectively. And in this case, the case where the first effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, and the case where the second effect pattern appears, it is set so that the degree of expectation for awarding of benefits becomes the same It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interest as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG appears as a result of the specific operation-related effects being performed. It becomes possible to provide a completely different interest, such as whether or not a specific rendering mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears, regardless of which one of the decorative image SYG appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 256 (c), when the effect result of a specific operation-related effect (which one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared in the specific effect mode This may be displayed in advance (for example, during the production of a specific operation-related effect). According to such a configuration, the specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed even though the specific operation related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed. The button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG are made to have the same effect value (the same degree of expectation) by the appearance of That is, in this case, since the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, it may be said that "precursor effect by the princess character" even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be possible to provide an effect with a completely different meaning.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples is configured such that the sword portion (the handle 5012 and the blade 5011) of the sword decorative body 5001 can be operated vertically In addition to the operation mode 1 (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 212, a second operation in which the sheath part (sheath 5020) of the sword decorative body 5001 is operable in the lateral direction It is provided to have an aspect (second operation aspect) as well. Therefore, in each of the effect modes described above, and in other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode gives an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 provided as one operation unit? The above-mentioned specific operation related presentation may be performed as a presentation about. The sword part (the handle 5012, the blade 5011) and the sheath part (the sheath 5020) are both supported by the main body supporting part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 so as to be operable (operable), and Even if one side of the sword part (the handle 5012, the blade 5011) and the sheath part (the sheath 5020) is in the operation (operation) state, the other side can be operated (operation) It is formed.

  However, when a specific operation related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different even if any effect result appears, and the operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001. Since there is no change, there is a concern that the possibility of an operation error occurring on the player side increases. In particular, even in the case of giving an operation opportunity to any of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, for example, a rendering image (and its In the case where the instruction display for prompting the operation is displayed, there is a further concern that the player side may have an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode Become. That is to say, in this case, while the remaining time of the effect reception period gradually decreases, let the player first perform the operation of correcting the operation error, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. If it is difficult to do so and the effect reception period ends before the effect reception is made even though the specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed. , There is a concern that the game interest will decline.

  Further, in the sword decorative body 5001, there are an aspect such as “movement in the vertical direction” by the sword part and an aspect such as “movement in the lateral direction” by the sheath part, and a plurality of complicated operations not in such reverse relationship In the operation unit capable of providing an aspect, if an operation on the wrong side is performed when an operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform an operation on the appropriate side, and the effect reception period ends. Risk of loss of operation opportunities.

  Therefore, when performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect as an effect on whether the operation opportunity is given by the first operation mode or the second operation mode to the sword decorative body 5001 provided as one operation unit As described below with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed from the state as it is, it is desirable that the effect reception be properly performed and that the operation effect according to the effect reception be performed.

  FIGS. 257 and 258 show an example of effect when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  In FIG. 257 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state of the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 257 (b) shows the effect status in which a specific operation-related effect has been started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 257 (a) is being performed.

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b), a first effect that surpasses the first operation mode for operating the sword part of the sword decorative body 5001 from the scout state to the scout state An image OX and a second effect image TX in which the second operation mode for operating to move the sheath portion of the sword decorative body 5001 in the lateral direction is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is simultaneously displayed to indicate that an operation opportunity by any of the operation modes will be made available for presentation soon. In this respect, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion of the sword decoration 5001 that looks over the sword region is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX In both effect images TX, the sword site is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  In FIG. 257 (c), the specific operation related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b) is developed, and the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and the second corresponding to the second operation mode The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to perform an effect of pushing the other party out of the display area. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, the effect reception period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result in which the second effect image TX is left (second effect When the result is displayed, an effect reception period for the second operation mode is generated.

  In the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 257 (c), when the first effect image OX is left to be dominant, a display such as “press-in” is visible When it comes to a state where the second effect image TX is left to be dominant, a display such as “slide” is made visible. The details of the operation content can be easily recognized in accordance with the state of the effect. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that they may be mistakenly recognized as prompting the operation at the timing at which the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 257 (d), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 257 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. A presentation depicting the situation left behind is being performed (the first presentation result). When progressing to this effect content, even when the operation in the second operation mode is performed, a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY) does not occur, and in the first operation mode When the operation is performed, the effect reception is made, and a specific operation effect (a movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY, etc.) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

  That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 257 (d), an effect reception period regarding a specific operation effect occurs only on the first operation mode side among the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as “depress”, or the remaining time of the effect reception period is shown. Bar display will be displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 operates from the state of the sword to the state of the sword so that the operation in the first operation mode can be performed.

  In FIG. 258 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (incorrect operation) by the second operation mode is not the first operation mode. It shows the rendering situation when performed by the player.

  That is, in this effect example, even in the case where the effect reception period regarding the specific operation effect occurs only on the first operation mode side among the first operation mode and the second operation mode, Operation mode 2 The operation detection itself is enabled. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected in the effect reception period, it is determined that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification can not appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received. (Here, "As it is good") is done.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 258 (f), such specific notification is changed in the content of the notification according to the passage of time so that the player can recover calmness (here, "settled down"). It is supposed to be. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, since it becomes possible to sequentially notify in short words, it is preferable even if the player side is in a panic state. It will be expected to suppress. As a result, even if an operation by the first operation mode is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player can appropriately receive the effect. You will be able to make them aware.

  In FIG. 258 (g), the operation on the appropriate side (first operation mode) is performed while the rendering status in FIG. 258 (e) or FIG. 258 (f) (rendering acceptance period in erroneous operation state) As a result, it is depicted that the effect has been accepted, and the above-described operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is being performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decorative body 5001 (when the operation is ended), the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated from the state of the second operation mode (normal state Will be returned to).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is not corrected and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even when the game is performed from the state (the operation error state), the effect reception is properly made, so that the decrease in the game entertainment when the operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above presentation example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, the notification to the effect that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error is performed. However, the content (the operation is performed without correcting the operation error as it is The detailed notification for the purpose) should not necessarily be performed. That is, as described above, since there is a possibility that the player has panicked in a situation in which an erroneous operation has been performed, it may be counterproductive to perform notification of complicated contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player in the effect reception period, as an indication that can not appear when an operation in a proper mode is accepted, not an indication by a message but an indication by an effect or a sound alone It is desirable to make a simple notification such as In this case, although there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that an operation error has been made, a special situation is confirmed that a specific notification is performed and no effect at the time of operation is performed based on the operation being performed. It can be said that it is possible to expect to switch the operation to the appropriate operation.

  On the other hand, depending on the player (in particular, an elderly player or the like), it may be assumed that a situation may occur in which an operation is mistakenly performed before the generation reception period of the specific operation related effects occurs. For example, when an operation (for example, lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed on the second operation portion although the operation instruction for the second operation portion (for example, the sheath portion) is not made. It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which an effect reception period regarding a specific operation effect occurs only on the side of the operation unit (for example, sword part) of the case, and also in this case, There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize what is good.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is given to which of the first operation unit (sword portion) and the second operation portion (sheath portion) the operation opportunity is given, The second operation unit is in the situation (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and (c)) in which the operation instruction (bar display of remaining time) to the operation unit 2 side is not made Even when the operation is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that can not appear when an operation in a proper manner is accepted. The specific notification may be “display of a message indicating that it is acceptable to operate the operation unit on the appropriate side to which the operation opportunity will be given soon while maintaining the operation state” or in the display by the message. Instead, it may be an effect or a simple notification such as a notification only by sound. In any case, even after the operation is performed, by confirming the special situation that the specific notification is performed based on the operation and the presentation at the time of the operation is not performed, the operation is subsequently performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to expect that it will be kicking off.

  In this case, for example, while the operation on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being performed (the sword decorative body 5001 is moved in the left direction), for example, the first operation unit (for example, A state (sword decoration body) in which an operation on a second operation unit (for example, a sheath portion) is performed even when the effect reception period regarding a specific operation effect occurs only on the side of the sword portion) When the first operation unit (for example, sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state where 5001 has moved leftward, the effect reception is made and the above-mentioned operation effect according to the operation is performed It becomes.

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the state as it is, since the effect reception will be properly performed, the operation error before the effect reception period occurs Even when a game occurs, the decline in gaming interest is suppressed.

  However, among the periods in which a specific operation-related effect is given to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit the operation opportunity is given, the effect result is shown and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is made in the period immediately before the occurrence of an event, information will be mixed up with the content to be notified (instruction display etc.) within the effect reception period, and the player will be further confused. There is a concern Therefore, in the specific operation related rendition in which the rendition result which suggests that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, the period until the rendition result is displayed And the specific notification described above is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed despite the fact that the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the specific notification described above is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period are sequentially passed, the second period It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described effect example, when performing the specific notification, the degree of expectation for giving the benefit may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, the effect mode of the sword decorative body 5001 itself is changed to any of the plurality of modes described above (for example, FIG. 222) Step 0 form shown in FIG. 2) is possible to change from Step 1 form to any of Step 3 form. In this respect, after the specific operation related rendition is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed to any of the plurality of modes described above, and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it Alternatively, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed to any of the plurality of modes described above when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 in the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (character display such as “press down”, bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) And the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode (step 0 form to step 3 form shown in FIG. 222) as the sword decoration 5001 at that time. It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration 5001, it is possible to have any interest in checking the sword decoration image SYG. In addition, the rendering performance when in the rendering reception period becomes poor. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a mode different from that of the sword decoration 5001 at that time. It is desirable to secure the stage effect when it is in the stage for accepting stage effects.

  At this time, making the aspect represented by the sword decoration image SYG have a higher expectation than the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 makes the stage performance during the stage for accepting rendering more It is desirable for ensuring it suitably. For example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not in the stage 1 form but in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. Make it visible. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, by confirming the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher. As a result, the amusement of the game when being in the effect reception period is suitably maintained.

  In order to obtain such effects, the number of effect modes on the sword decoration image SYG side may be larger than the number of effect modes on the sword decoration 5001 side. The number of effect modes on the sword decorative body 5001 side may be one. Further, when preparing a plurality of effect modes as the sword decorative body 5001, the form may not necessarily be changed as the effect modes.

  However, if the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG are simply made to differ in this manner, some players may have an unpleasant feeling that false display is made. There is concern that this may reduce the interest in gaming. Therefore, more preferably, as a mode of sword decoration image SYG, a special mode different from any of the modes prepared as a mode of sword decoration 5001 (here, stage 0 to stage 3 shown in FIG. 222). Are prepared, and when the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword are displayed by displaying the sword decorative image SYG in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the aspect of the decorative image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the external appearance is changed by further deforming and uniting the sword decorative image SYG, or the sword decorative body 5001 operates in a mode not appearing or the sword decorative body 5001 It may emit light in a mode that does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering of the sword decorative body 5001 which is structurally difficult is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, thereby suppressing the concern of being offensive due to the false display. Not only can it be done, but it will be expected to improve the fun of the game by providing an effect beyond the imagination of the player when looking at the structure of the sword decorative body 5001.

  Incidentally, even in the case where the sword decoration image SYG has a special mode as described above, each of the modes provided as the sword decoration 5001 for the sword decoration image SYG (here, shown in FIG. 222). It is desirable to be able to perform the display in step 0 form to step 3 form). That is, in this case, while the sword decoration image SYG is basically displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. In addition, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable that it is suggested that the degree of expectation for giving a privilege is higher than that when displayed in another mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Further, as to the method of enabling the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, another effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. It may be applied.

  For example, if it is now in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 226 (X1), as the next rendering progress destination, in addition to the rendering situation shown in FIG. 226 (X2), to the rendering situation shown in FIG. A presentation pattern will be prepared to be produced. Then, when the effect is advanced to the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1) described above. A continuous image (image with samurai's eyes closed) showing that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 that was in the second state of extraction is in the state of insertion while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Will be returned.

  Subsequently, the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped in the pseudo link mode, and the player is informed that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is performed (FIG. 259 (b) ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, and specifically shows the form and effect level (the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation) of the sword decorative body 5001. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) by displaying the pseudo continuous sword symbol of the aspect.

  However, here, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the fourth pseudo run variation (re-variation) in the pseudo run figure displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although a sword image showing (special mode) is displayed, this special mode is such that it can appear only in a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) in which a sword decoration 5001 has been crawled in the display area. The body 5001 itself has become immutable. The special mode according to this presentation example is an aspect in which the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) obtained by looking over the sword decoration 5001 in the display area is changed to the special mode, the sword decoration 5001 is in the stage 3 form. The state is changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword.

  After that, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second state in which the sword is in the second state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decorative image SYG) in which the sword decorative body 5001 in a special mode is crawled is displayed. An image (displayed with a bar) indicating the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with a message of "Please put a sword!" (FIG. 259 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 259 (e), when the player's operation is detected in the operation effective period, the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is made according to the set effect pattern. While the expectation degree notification effect is performed, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended.

  Further, in each of the effect modes described above and their other examples, for example, when symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is executed within the symbol variation. The first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation decoration is not given to the sword decorative body 5001 can be performed. In addition, when the design variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, no operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 within the design variation and the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 The second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given is made executable. In addition, when design variation is performed with the third effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 The effect (specific operation-related effect) can be performed.

In this respect, these precursor effects are executed as different effect contents, but as such effect contents, for example,
A specific image is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the area where the effect image appears before the effect image appearing over the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area,
Thereafter, an effect image is displayed in which the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is overlooked, at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize the specific image.
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to the non-display (by increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area in which the specific image is displayed) You may make it For example, in the first precursor effect, a display effect by “cloud effect” (display effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the effect image over the operation means) is performed as the specific image, and in the second precursor effect, “flame Display effect by “effect” (display effect to make it easy to visually recognize the effect image over the operation means gradually, and in the third precursor effect, display effect by “water effect” as the specific image (effect image from the operation means If the types of specific images are made different, such as providing display effects that make it easier to view them gradually, it is possible to make their precursor effects different from one another. When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the first precursor effect is being performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the "flame effect" is performed, it is possible to recognize that the second precursor effect is being performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decorative body 5001, and by the "water effect" When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third precursor effect (specific operation related effect) is performed on which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given Will be

  Then, when performing omen effects (at least one of the first omen effects, the second omen effects, and the third omen effects) with such effects, the effect image which surpasses the operation means by the specific image is It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to visually recognize. When such a configuration is applied to any of the first antecedent effect and the second antecedent effect, the effect image over the operation means has a low expectation and a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where it can not be sure with which display mode (for example, blue) it is displayed, the effect when it is in the effect reception period It will be possible to improve the In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain that which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given to Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where it can not be held, it is possible to improve the rendering when it is in the effect reception period.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the first antecedent effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 261 shows an example of an effect when the first anticipation effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart which shows. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 260 and FIG. 261, an example of effect when the first anticipation effect is performed will be described, but for this effect example, not the first anticipation effect but a second anticipation effect or a third It is also possible to apply to omen effects.

  In FIG. 260 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state of holding number 0 Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 260 (b) shows the effect status in which the first precursor effect is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 260 (a) is being performed.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260 (b), the display effect by “cloud effect” is performed in a large range in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such “cloud effect” is changed from the display area to the non-display gradually (the specific image itself is made higher in transmittance after the effect is started at timing t1 shown in FIG. 261). Or to reduce the area in which a specific image is displayed.

  Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 261, at timing t2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” gradually changes to non-display, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is While being generated, a button image BTG in which the operation button 410 is pressed and an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed respectively ( FIG. 260 (c).

  In this presentation example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, the second display mode) , And blue), the ratio at which the effect at the time of operation is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this respect, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 260 (c), the “cloud effect” can not be confident that the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. Even though the operation button 410 is operated, the effect is accepted when the operation is performed on the operation button 410, and the effect at the time of operation according to the effect acceptance is performed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, since the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a manner that the effect content is switched from such a omen effect, the button image BTG has a first display mode and It becomes possible to advance the rendition without being sure of which of the two display modes.

  Further, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 260 (c), it is not possible to be sure that the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". However, the instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to indicate that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the rendering situation shown in FIG. 260 (c), the “cloud effect” continues while the rendering reception period occurring at timing t2 is continued. Is completely hidden (FIG. 260 (d)). In such a situation, it is possible to operate the operation button 410 while the user can easily recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the effect at the time of operation comes to be executed in a form in which the content of the effect is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 260 (d).

  According to such a configuration, during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), a period until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden from being displayed (timing t2 to t3) after the button image BTG is displayed. ), It is possible to provide an effect by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  It should be noted that in order to enhance the effect during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4) in the entire period, the period during which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4) It is desirable to perform effect display which is not performed in the period of the above-mentioned timing t2-t3 when it is in the above. In this effect example, when it is in a period (timing t3 to t4) in which "cloud effect" is completely hidden, a message such as "press" is displayed. For example, timings t2 to t3 are displayed. If an effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period in the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, it is possible to more suitably enhance the rendering in the period (the timing t3 to t4). Will be able to

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 260, the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 and the button image BTG with the operation button 410 turned over are simultaneously displayed (when the effect reception period occurs), The button image BTG in which the operation button 410 is turned over may be displayed before the effect reception period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, the effect situation in which the button image BTG is hard to be recognized first appears, and it is determined that the effect is hard to recognize after a predetermined time. Until the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in a rendering situation where the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize before the rendering reception period occurs, a rendering pattern in which the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation (third precursor In the case of the effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG may be made to appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an enjoyment in which the value to which the button image BTG is closely watched is increased as the button image BTG is less likely to be visually recognized. It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 260, the button image BTG is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “cloud effect”, but the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 is affected by the “cloud effect”. We decided to display it so that its visibility would be maintained. This makes it possible to enjoy with confidence the visibility of the button image BTG changing while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 may also be made difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3 under the influence of the "cloud effect". That is, in this case, it is possible for the player to have a conflict as to whether or not the operation button 410 should be operated without certainty of the display mode while the remaining time of the effect reception period can not be grasped well. It will be able to provide unprecedented new stage effects.

  Also in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 260, the above-described or the “acceptable sound” described later may be output. In this case, the “acceptable sound” is output from the time when the operation button 410 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the “cloud effect”.

  In addition, in the case of outputting such “acceptable sound” in any of a plurality of modes different from the expectation (the ratio that the big hit symbol appears and includes “0” and “100”), the button image BTG It becomes possible to properly recognize the degree of expectation before the whole appears, and it is expected to improve the game interest.

  When the effect acceptance (operation) is performed in the state where the "acceptable sound" is output, it is desirable to not output the "acceptable sound" in the output state at that time. In addition, as for the "acceptable sound", each configuration described above or described later may be adopted appropriately.

  The "cloud effect" may be transparent, in which case the button image will be faintly visible behind it, but even with this configuration the visibility remains .

  The “cloud effect” itself may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes different from the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears and includes “0” and “100”). In this case, although the function is made to make it difficult to visually recognize the operation button 410, when the high expectation is suggested, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

  Before the "cloud effect" is displayed and completely hidden, the following rendering method to make a specific effect sound (BGM) be in the output state in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state is It may be adopted. The specific effect sound (BGM) that has been put into the output mode in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state in this way is also triggered by the output by the player in the non-inhibited state even when it is operated. It will not be returned.

  In addition, in the case of applying such an effect to any of the first antecedent effect, the second antecedent effect, and the third antecedent effect, the effect image that surpasses the operation means after the antecedent effect is started is clear Even if the length of time until the visual recognition is made visible (time until the specific image is made non-displayed) is different from each other, the effect image becomes clear after the effect image is displayed over the operation means It is desirable to set the time until it is made visible to the time (time until the specific image is made non-display) to be the same time as each other. In addition, when applying such an effect to any one of the first omen effects, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect, such an effect that surpasses the operation means after the antecedent effect is started. With regard to the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is not displayed), a plurality of these are prepared to give a plurality of renditions with different degrees of expectation However, the time from the display of the effect image over the operation means to the clear display of the effect image (the time until the specific image is not displayed) is the same. It is desirable to set it to time.

  Moreover, it is not necessary to necessarily use another image (specific image) as a method of making it hard to visually recognize the effect image that looks over the operation means. For example, relative effect after the effect image overtaking the operation means is made to appear in a display mode (timing t2) which is relatively difficult to visually recognize due to the setting change of the transmittance of the effect image itself which is over the operation means It may be made to change gradually towards the display mode (timing t3) which is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image over the operation means appears in the display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be timing before the timing t2, and in this case, appearing in such a display mode is itself May be performed as a precursor effect, and in a display mode different from this as a precursor effect, an effect image overcoming the operation means may be made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize It is also good.

  Moreover, when the specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, the specific operation state effect described later with reference to FIG. 241 to FIG. May be executed only when the occurrence of. That is, when a specific operation-related effect is started, any of the plurality of operation means is concealed as to which effect can be accepted, and as a result of the effect being developed, a plurality of operations can be performed. Since the effect reception period corresponding to only one of the operation means will occur, it may be delayed to determine which of the plurality of operation means should be operated, rather than being operated by the player It may be possible that the presentation reception period will end before all the remaining time is consumed. In this respect, if a specific operation-related effect can be performed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is generated, an effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed. In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as a rendering result of a specific operation-related effect, the operation by the player on the operation means on the side of the operation target and the automatic effect function Because the effect is accepted by any of the above and the effect is always executed after the operation, it is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the specific operation related effect is performed.

[Auto button production state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state) is executable, and is controlled to the automatic button presentation state If there is an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more accurately, a predetermined effect pattern for which an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs during the effect reception period, Even if the operation by the player is not accepted in the case, it is possible to execute the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as the effect when the operation by the player is accepted in the effect reception period. There is. According to such an automatic button effect state, since the effect is generated after the operation when the operation is performed, even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, the decrease in the game entertainment due to the forgetting the operation is suppressed You will be able to In addition, the processing according to the effect reception may be performed by generating the same effect reception as that when the operation was actually performed when the automatic effect function functions, and the effect reception is generated. The same processing may be performed as when there is an effect reception without making it be.

  In the embodiment relating to the “automatic effect function” described below, each technique, effect, setting, and the like of the operation relationship described above may be appropriately combined and used, or may be used in place of being replaced.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times while the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. It is made to be able to set to the production state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation unit different from the operation button 410). "Various settings" is selected and the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation unit different from the operation button 410). When "setting of automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, setting to the automatic button effect state is performed. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or an operation on the operation button 410 and an operation on an operation means different from this may be operated a plurality of times.

  On the other hand, while the symbol variation is in the execution state, setting to the automatic button effect state can be made by only one operation of the operation button 410, and such operation is simplified. The setting to the automatic button rendering state is made possible while maintaining the gaze to the rendering progress during the symbol variation. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred, and if such a person does, the operation button 410 If the setting to the automatic button effect state may be made only by operating the game, the entertainment interest may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation state of the operation button 410 is set to a predetermined time (in order to set the automatic button effect state while the symbol variation is in the execution state). Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode (so-called "long press mode") that is maintained for 2 seconds. As a result, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is positively performed regardless of whether or not the effective period has occurred, the automatic button effect state is entered. Can be made less likely to occur. It should be noted that it is desirable not to be set to the automatic button effect state even if the operation is performed in the long press mode when at least the effect reception period has occurred during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state .

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is also used as a method for canceling the setting in the state where the automatic button effect state is set. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state.

  That is, while the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not yet executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation unit different from the operation button 410). "Various settings" is selected and the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation unit different from the operation button 410). When "cancel button status of automatic button effect" displayed in the inside is selected, setting of the button status effect of automatic button is canceled.

  On the other hand, while the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 only once. By such operation simplification, It is made possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state while maintaining the gaze on the effect development during the symbol change. However, unlike when setting to the automatic button effect state, even if the operation state with respect to the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long press), the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state. The automatic button effect state is set to be released only by detecting the event (only when operated in a single operation mode). That is, since the fact that some operation has been performed on the operation button 410 can be said to be in a situation where a desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410 appears, the automatic button effect is produced when the operation is performed. By releasing the setting and quickly returning to the normal rendering state, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment differs from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 or the like is set) Even if the player's operation (operation on the sword decorative body 5001) is not received during the effect reception period, the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is received during the effect reception period. It is possible to execute processing (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the presentation is received. According to such a configuration, a period occurs in which an operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), or another operation means (for example, When the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) on whether a period in which the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is allowed to be effectable occurs is performed, the effect result As there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate even if any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is made available as such, it becomes possible to safely enjoy such a specific operation-related effect .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When no operation on the first operation means is performed within the first side effect reception period, an automatic process can be performed which causes the same change as that when the operation on the first operation means is performed. Yes (first automatic presentation means),
-The second side effect reception period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001 or the like) of the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target when being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When it occurs, when an operation on the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process is performed that causes the same change as that when the operation on the second operation means is performed. Possible (second automatic presentation means)
Even if any of the first-side effect reception period and the second-side effect reception period occurs, the first specific effect reception period and the second side effect reception period occur, and the same specific time elapses after the period occurs. Automatic processing by one automatic presentation means or automatic processing by a second automatic presentation means is made executable.

  According to such a configuration, when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled, the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation object, and the second operation means are operated Even if any of the second side effect reception period set as has occurred within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the same specified time has passed from the occurrence of those periods so that the automatic rendering function can function Because you become, you will be able to enjoy the production with confidence.

  However, when the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, the specific time has elapsed since the first side effect reception period has occurred. The automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed when the automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed and when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the generation of the first side effect acceptance period. As is the case, the effect may be developed within the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, although it is assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic rendering means is executed when the specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side effect reception period, a timing different from this is assumed Since the effect is accepted and the effect is automatically generated after the operation, it can be functioned as a surprise effect.

  In addition, when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means within the symbol fluctuation period than when it is not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) The rate of occurrence of the effect reception period may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of forgetting operation within the effect reception period may be also high due to the increase of the frequency of occurrence of the effect reception period, but the automatic effect is produced even if the operation forgets Since the post-operation effect is executed by the function functioning, it is possible to generate the effect reception period with a higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in the game interest due to frequent occurrence of forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the generation ratio of both the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means. However, it is more preferable that the degree of occurrence of the occurrence ratio is different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment,
・ If the effect receiving condition is satisfied within the effect receiving period, it is possible to execute the effect after the operation (the effect executing means after the operation),
-It is possible to execute processing for establishing the effect receiving condition based on the player's operation being performed within the effect receiving period (player operation receiving means),
・ When the player does not perform the operation within the effect reception period, it is possible to execute the processing for establishing the effect reception condition without receiving the operation by the player at a specific timing within the effect reception period (automatic effect reception means )
The specific timing within the effect reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect reception period has passed since the start of the effect reception period. It is supposed to be done. As a result, the player is given enough time to operate before the automatic rendering function functions, and the option of causing the reception of the rendering by the operation of the player is also left. , It will be possible to preferably maintain the game interest.

  In this case, when a specific time has passed since the occurrence of the first-side effect reception period, an automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed, and a specific time after the occurrence of the first-side effect reception period When it is assumed that the effect development within the symbol variation is performed such that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a time different from that has passed, the above “specific time” or the above “specific time Any time different from the above may be set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side effect reception period.

  Here, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, and the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period, A process of generating an effect after the operation according to the effect reception is to be executed. However, in this case, in addition to the process of generating the effect after the operation according to the effect reception, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

  Also, similarly, during the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the effect reception period for the operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001) different from the operation button 410 occurs, Even when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted within the period, a process of generating an effect after the operation according to the effect reception and a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are respectively executed. Is desirable. Also in this case, as for “post production after operation according to production reception”, a production reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs during a period when the automatic button production state is not controlled, and the sword decoration It will be performed as an effect of the same content as the effect after the operation performed when the operation on the body 5001 is accepted for the effect.

  That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire (specific effect) to be returned to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation. A desire to end the condition may occur. Such aspiration often occurs when an effect reception period for giving an operation opportunity to the player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the period It is difficult to perform both an operation for terminating a specific rendering state and an operation for accepting an operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the game interest may decline. In this respect, in the above configuration, when the effect reception period regarding the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button to which the operation opportunity is given within the effect reception period A process that can cause a change in processing for terminating the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) and rendering only by performing the operation on the 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 only once (operating only in a single operation mode) Since (the processing to execute the effect after operation) is performed respectively, the desire to make the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) end and progress the effect depending on the player's own operation is accepted Even when it occurs within a period, it is possible to smoothly switch the rendering state.

  However, regarding the setting change (setting change to the automatic button effect state or cancellation of the automatic button effect state setting) for the automatic button effect state during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed (the state where the symbol variation is not executed) The setting can be changed without the need to operate the sword decoration 5001. That is, the sword decorative body 5001 has a frequency of giving the operation opportunity lower than that of the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that much, the big hit is expected than the operation button 410 The degree is high. Therefore, the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted for the purpose of only setting change in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), whereby an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to enhance the sense of premium at the time of play and maintain the game interest. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means (operation buttons other than the sword decorative body 5001) among the plurality of operation means is displayed while the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. Setting or canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state can be performed by operating the operation unit 410 or the like or another operation means different from this a plurality of times.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the operation to the sword decorative body 5001 is not necessary, and the automatic button effect state is obtained. The setting can be changed. That is, as described above, when the operation button 410 is operated once in the “long press mode”, the automatic button effect state is controlled, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. For the purpose, the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not permitted.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the setting for the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decorative body 5001, the symbol when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state It is limited to the case where the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the change, and the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is received the effect within the effect reception period, and the post-operation effect appears accordingly . According to such a configuration, the setting change to the automatic button effect state can be performed by the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation decoration is given to the sword decorative body 5001. It will be.

  In addition, as a plurality of operation means included in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an automatic button effect state is generated when an automatic button effect is generated. In addition to the operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001) that can be targeted by the rendering function, special operation means that are not targeted by the automatic rendering function that generates an effect at the time of operation without operating May be further included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in an execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and an operation for the special operation means is received in the effect reception period, After the operation according to the effect receptionist, the expectation for the big hit will be suggested by the effect. However, even if it is in the situation where it is controlled to the automatic button production state, if the operation for the special operation means is not accepted within the presentation acceptance period, the same post-operation presentation as when the above presentation is accepted appears There is no. However, in this case, although the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, it may be made to appear if the effect is different from when the effect is received.

  Moreover, about the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long press), the effect reception period with respect to the operation button 410 has occurred in the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state Not only when, but the effect reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410 (when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, the effect reception period during which the expectation degree is suggested, or when the special operation means is operated, the expectation degree is suggested It is desirable not to allow this even when there is an effect reception period, etc.). That is, when the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode) when within the effect reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410 In the middle stage of the effect reception period, "the automatic effect function to generate the effect at the time of operation even without operation in the effect reception period" is activated by activating the original effect reception (operating the operation means different from the operation button 410 If the player who is not familiar with such an automatic button effect state occurs, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 may have occurred, or the operation button 410 may have occurred. It may be confusing that there has been an effect reception period for the operation means different from the one described above, and this may reduce the game interest This is because that is just in case.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, although the prognostic effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period, the control is performed to a specific effect state The pro-end effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when not being performed, and the pro-end effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) May be implemented as a different display mode. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize in advance whether the automatic rendering function is in a rendering state in which the automatic rendering function can function within the specific rendering reception period, and it is possible to enjoy the rendering with confidence.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment displays a specific image (for example, "bar display" indicating the remaining time) suggesting the remaining time in the effect reception period. However, when the effect reception period occurs, at least the specific image (for example, “bar display indicating the remaining time”) is displayed so as to go to the specific area where the specific image is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which lightning falls toward the specific region) may be displayed (predictive effect) outside the area. That is, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by confirming the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, the user gazes at a position where the “specific image suggesting the remaining time” in the non-display state appears from now As a result, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where the specific effect reception period ends without the operation by the player being in time, and further, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, after the operation effect is executed by the automatic effect function functioning, it is expected to preferably maintain the game interest.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state setting and the setting cancellation concerning the automatic button effect state can be executed by the operation by the player, but the result of the big hit judgment including the following respective description examples. Based on the progress of the game or the effect, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example where state setting and setting cancellation can be performed according to progress of a game or an effect, for example, while being controlled to the normal game state, it is controlled as an automatic button effect state, but a big hit game state Or control mode such as automatic button effect state is canceled when it is shifted to high probability time short state, "automatic button effect state is generated within execution period of symbol change, and symbol change in the execution state is finished" A control mode such as generating an effect pattern to be released when a predetermined time has passed since generation, or “Generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which a plurality of symbol variations are executed” It is possible to adopt an aspect such as a control aspect or the like. In addition, it may be the pachinko machine 1 which is always controlled to the automatic button production state, in this case the setting of the automatic button production state is not canceled, and the setting and cancellation concerning the "automatic button production state" Such processing itself will disappear.

  Further, as the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions, the remaining time of the rendering reception period may be digested, or a predetermined timing after that may be taken, or the remaining time of the rendering reception period is left It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the predetermined timing after the remaining time of the effect reception period is digested, or after that, the post-operation effect is as if the effect reception was made after the effect reception period is over. It will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the timing (specific timing) during which the remaining time of the effect reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions similarly to the case where the operation is actually performed. At the time (specific timing), the effect reception period is ended, and the post-operation effect is executed.

  However, in order to ensure a sense of security against the occurrence of the effect after the operation without the operation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period until the effect reception period is ended (effect reception It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic rendering function function at a specific timing in a period) and to start the post-operation rendering according to this. That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function even though the specific timing within the effect reception period has arrived, the player performs an operation after the specific timing has arrived by the player's own operation. It is also possible to have anxious feeling when it is controlled to the automatic button production state (for example, "in spite of not being controlled to the automatic button production state, it is erroneously controlled to the automatic button production state We recognize, and may not be able to confirm production after operation "," automatic presentation function does not function by some trouble and may not be able to confirm production after operation " You will be able to

  And in the pachinko machine 1 concerning this embodiment, it has a characteristic technique relevant to such an automatic button production state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be sequentially described, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-described presentation examples, or the following characteristic techniques may be applied. It may be used in combination as appropriate.

  In the following description of each characteristic technique, it is assumed that, in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is not usually controlled. Even when an effect reception period that can occur also occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination) that can be performed only when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, If a specific effective period related to this occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific effective period. You may According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) (i.e., to improve the effect by permitting the generation of a specific display effect). From the beginning, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs, there may be cases where the automatic effect function can not function in another effect reception period set when a specific display effect is not being performed. However, in the specific effective period when a specific display effect is being performed, it becomes possible to taste the VIP feeling by the fact that the time and effort to operate can be saved by the automatic effect function functioning. Therefore, it is expected to suitably enhance the game interest. In addition, it is not necessary that the automatic rendering function can not always function in all of the other rendering reception periods set when the specific display rendering is not performed, and the automatic rendering is performed in at least a part of the rendering reception period. If the function can not function, the above-mentioned operation and effect when the specific effective period occurs while the specific display effect is being performed (when the effect acceptance period where the automatic effect function always functions) occur It is possible to expect. Also, even when such a specific effective period occurs, if the player does not perform an operation before the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is made to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start rendering after operation according to this.

In addition, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the big hit determination,
-If the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect will occur at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed after the first specific effective period has occurred. While the function functions to end the first specified validity period and to generate a post-operation effect according to this,
-If the second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being performed, a second predetermined time that is longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific effective period occurs The above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the timing when E has passed, and the second specified effective period is ended and, at the same time, the post-operation rendering according to this is generated, and
-If the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period despite being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) If there is no operation until the operation is ended, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed may not be performed, and each process may be performed when the specific effect state is present. According to such a configuration, even when the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs while being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first effect is generated from the time when the effect reception period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions when the predetermined time has passed, or the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function unless the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses, Even if the effect acceptance period is over, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is not able to function at all. Therefore, even when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs. When the above-described automatic rendering function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, for example, the second predetermined time has elapsed. The presentation can be developed with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic rendering function of the above functions or the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function in the first place. The first specified valid period, the second specified valid period, and the third specified valid period are all when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in the operating state (so-called The effect is accepted after the single-shot operation is performed and the effect is generated after the operation.

  In addition, about the 1st specific display production, the 2nd specific display production, and the 3rd specific display production, when it is controlled to the specific production state (automatic button production state) with being something which can be done It may be. Thus, when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that can not appear when not being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, the first specific display effect (the first specific effective period) and the second specific display effect (the second specific effective period) are prepared, and the third specific display effect (the third specific effective period) May not necessarily be prepared. In addition, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are accepted in the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may be different from each other.

  In addition, in the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning, at which timing within the effect reception period the automatic effect function has functioned (as the effect reception period when the effect is received As for the bar display showing the remaining time of the effect acceptable period (the display changes with time (here, the area changes)), the automatic effect function has functioned so that it is possible to recognize whether only the time was left It is also possible to generate an effect after operation in a state in which this is displayed without being hidden at the time. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the “bar display” which is continuously displayed when the automatic rendering function is functioned, the effect reception period is the first specified effective period ( The period during which the automatic rendering function functions when the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage, has passed since the generation reception period occurred, and the second specific validity period (relatively after the generation reception period occurs) When the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has elapsed, it is possible to recognize which of the periods in which the automatic rendering function functions).

  In this sense, when the first specified effective period (the period in which the automatic rendering function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed after the effect reception period has occurred) and the second specified effective period ( The big hit expectation differs when the second predetermined time elapses after the effect acceptance period occurs and the period when the automatic effect function functions) (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous) It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be performed. However, when the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is performed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It will function as different degrees (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). In addition, when the effect after operation is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, “bar display” may be hidden in the state that the effect after operation is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function As in the case where the function is performed, the effect may be generated after the operation in a state where the "bar display" is not displayed but is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600. For example, it is executed as light emission by a lamp provided in the game board 5 or operation by a movable decorative body It is also good.

  In addition, when the effect after the operation is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning, the player does not participate in any operation means (for example, the operation button 410) which is the operation object after the operation Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is not possible for the player side to know which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated after-operation effect. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is made to function and generation after the operation is generated, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, the operation to be the operation target) suggesting the operation means to be the operation target within the effect reception period. While displaying the image display etc. insulting means, even if the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions, the post-operation rendering is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being displayed. It is desirable to In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image may not necessarily be the same before and after the generation of the effect after operation. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize which one of the two has been generated even after the operation has occurred. On the other hand, when a post-operation effect is generated by an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be made non-displayed in the state where the post-operation effect is generated. As in the case where the rendering function functions, the post-operation rendering may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but is displayed. Whenever the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions, such as when the automatic rendering function functions within the above-mentioned first specific effective period, or when the automatic rendering function functions within the above-mentioned second specific effective period, etc. An effect after operation may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being displayed.

  At this time, if the effect after operation is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different levels of big hit expectation, both the aspect of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of effect after operation Can be checked at the same time, and it is possible to improve the game interest. In addition, the effect after operation does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600. For example, it is executed as light emission by a lamp provided in the game board 5 or operation by a movable decorative body It may be.

  Also, when an effect for generating an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is referred to as "operation-based effect", the operation-system effect is related to this. In some cases, it may be performed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, movable object effect, count effect, etc.). However, in this case, when there is an effect situation where “operation-based effect” is executed but “another specific effect not associated with this” is performed, “operation-based effect” and “others not associated with this” It is desirable that the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions is higher than when the specific rendering of “is in parallel to the rendering situation. That is, when the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect not related to this" are in parallel, it is assumed that the "operation system effect" is not accepted and the post operation operation is not performed. Since "other specific effects not related to this" is in the execution state, the decrease in the game interest can be suppressed, while "operation-based effects" is performed, but "the other is not related to this When there is a production situation where the "specific production" is not being executed, if there is a case where the production reception is not made in the "operation system production" and the production after the operation is not performed, it will be in a situation where no production is performed. Therefore, the decline of the game interest is inevitable. Therefore, when there is an effect situation in which "operation-based effect" is executed but "another specific effect not associated with it" is not executed, "operation-based effect" and "other specified not associated with this" By setting the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions to be higher than when the rendering is in parallel, it is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the operation-based rendering occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, with regard to the prognostic effect that is performed from before that as the effect reception period occurs, and the effect that the operation means to be operated operate, etc., it is executed as “operation-based effect” or the effect related thereto It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the adversary effect) as “another specific effect”, it is suggested in advance that the above-mentioned automatic effect function is likely to be operated at a high rate. You will be able to In this case, it is desirable to be executed as the effect to be ended after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the effect after operation). On the other hand, if it is assumed that it is performed as "another specific effect", for example, generated after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the admiral effect) and ended before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether or not the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is in a situation where the ratio of functioning is high, and it is possible to provide the rendering in a tense sense. In this respect, in the case where the “other specific effect” is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the aura effect), the “other specific effect” is repeated multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is made to be performed, it will be executed even when the effect reception period does not occur. Therefore, when the “another specific effect” is performed, the rate at which the automatic effect function functions is increased. At this point, it is possible to have a tense feeling as to whether the effect reception period occurs.

  In addition, when it is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the lost fluctuation according to the result of the big hit judgment is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is executed a specific value (for example, 999 times continuous lost fluctuation, Until the 1000th loss fluctuation) is reached, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) may be generated with a predetermined probability based on the result of the big hit determination In addition to the above, when the player does not perform an operation even when the effect reception period occurs, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function and the above-mentioned automatic effect function is not made to function. On the other hand, when it is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the lost fluctuation according to the result of the big hit judgment is successively digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, the lost fluctuation is executed continuously 999 times) And when it reaches the 1000th lost fluctuation), the symbol fluctuation (rendering pattern) that reaches the specified value is an operation opportunity for the operating means (any of the plurality of operating means) regardless of the result of the big hit judgment There is always an operation by the player during the effect reception period by causing the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period while the effect reception period in which the is given is always generated A process may be executed to always generate the same post-operation effect as at the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the lost fluctuation reaches a specific value, “the player should be operated every time the effect reception period occurs while the lost fluctuation is continuously executed. Even if they have not been given any results despite the fact that they have been urged to do so, the pachinko machine 1 itself must have an automatic rendering function even if it has not been operated by the player, as if it had felt its responsibilities so far Since it is realized as an effect to be made to play, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game interest. In this case, during the effect reception period that occurs when the lost fluctuation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th lost fluctuation), the lost fluctuation is sequentially digested and the execution is performed A special display image (for example, different from the display image (for example, “Operation”, etc.) that appeared during the effect reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, up to 999 times) It is desirable to make it appear that "if it is troublesome, I will act on behalf of you". In addition, even after symbol fluctuation (rendering pattern) reaching a specific value is digested, the symbol fluctuation may be changed each time it is digested until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit gaming state) is satisfied. In the (render pattern), regardless of the result of the big hit judgment, the effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plural operation means) is always generated and a special display image (for example, “ If it is bothersome, I will act on behalf of the user, etc.)), and even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioned to respond to the effect reception It is desirable to execute a process that always generates an effect after an operation.

  In addition, when it is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the lost fluctuation according to the result of the big hit judgment is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is executed a specific value (for example, 999 times continuous lost fluctuation, It is also possible to display the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the 1000th loss fluctuation).

  In addition, when the lost change according to the result of the big hit judgment is sequentially digested when it is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and until the number of times of execution reaches a specific value, during the symbol change, the first operation Although both the effect reception period for the means and the effect reception period for the second operation means can be generated, in the case of the symbol change when the lost change is sequentially digested and the number of times of execution reaches a specific value Alternatively, only one of the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means may be generated at all times, and the other side may not be generated. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is suitably suppressed that the occurrence of the effect reception period has an expectation for itself. It will be possible. However, in this example of the effect, "Even though the player has been urged to operate the game every time the effect reception period occurs while the lost change is being executed continuously, there are no results. "If there was no operation by the player as if I felt the responsibility so far, the pachinko machine 1 itself would be realized as an effect to make sure that the automatic effect function is always realized. The second operation means (e.g., the second operation means) is generated by generating an effect reception period for the first operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) having a relatively low degree of expectation at the time of occurrence. It is desirable not to generate the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001).

  Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) The second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) of the plurality of operation means can be generated either when not being operated or when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). The second effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the object can not occur when the control is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) It may be generated when it is being According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) It is possible to preferably maintain the fun of

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when generating the effect reception period based on the result of the big hit determination,
・ Displaying a bird's-eye view image (an operation target suggestion image suggesting the operation means to be an operation target) over the operation means (overlapping image display means);
After the effect reception period has occurred, if an operation is performed by the player while the overhead image is displayed, it is possible to execute an effect after the operation based on the operation (player operation reception means),
-After the occurrence of the effect acceptance period, if a specific timing arrives without the player's operation being performed while the bird's-eye image is being displayed, the effect can be executed after the operation without receiving the operation from the player ( Automatic production acceptance means)
However, with regard to the overhead image, when the effect reception is made, it is displayed in any of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expected degree) in which the effect is performed after the operation in the “advantage to the player” is different. It is desirable to be able to According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized regardless of whether the effect is generated by the player operation accepting means or the effect is generated by the automatic effect accepting means. It is possible to generate an effect after the operation while being considered.

  In addition, when the effect after the operation is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning, the player does not participate in any operation means (for example, the operation button 410) which is the operation object after the operation Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is not possible for the player side to know which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated after-operation effect. Therefore, when making the above-mentioned automatic rendering function function and generating a post-operation effect, first, while displaying a bird's-eye view image (an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation means to be an operation target) within the effect reception period, Even when the above-described automatic rendering function is functional, it is desirable to generate a post-operation rendering in a state in which the overhead image is not displayed but is displayed. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image may not necessarily be the same before and after the generation of the effect after operation. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize which one of the two has been generated even after the operation has occurred. On the other hand, when a post-operation effect is generated by an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be made non-displayed in the state where the post-operation effect is generated. As in the case where the rendering function functions, the post-operation rendering may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but is displayed. The effect after operation may be performed using an area different from at least the area where the overhead image is displayed in the effect display device 1600, or the light emitted by the lamp provided in the game board 5 or the movable decorative body May be executed as an operation according to

  In this case, when the overhead view image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, the degree of expectation suggested within the performance reception period (overview image even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation) Can be checked.

  The overhead view image thus continued to be displayed is not displayed after the effect is generated after the operation. However, when a specific time has passed since the occurrence of the first-side effect reception period, automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed, and a specific time after the occurrence of the first-side effect reception period In the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic rendering means is executed when different times have elapsed, the times from when the rendering after operation is performed until the overhead image is hidden may be different from each other. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic process when the specific time has elapsed or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic process when the time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if not, it becomes possible to recognize at which time the post-operation effect has occurred by confirming the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the overhead image is not displayed. .

  In addition, when the effect after operation occurs by the automatic processing when the specified time has passed, and when the effect after the operation occurs by the automatic processing when the time different from the specified time has elapsed, the big hit in the big hit judgment May be different.

  In addition, when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the player is generated while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. A high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) such that any one of modes (for example, a low expectation display mode with relatively low big hit expectation, a high expectation display mode with relatively high big hit expectation) can appear Even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period when the) appears, the effect is always received (the automatic effect function is always functioned) and the effect is executed after the operation according to the effect reception, but the low expectation display When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when an operation is not performed within the effect reception period, an effect is received (the automatic effect function is functioned) and an effect is performed after the operation according to the effect reception And when Biasing may be made to effect development so that there is a case where (automatic directing feature function) after Sarezu operation effect is not executed. That is, if a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, if a forcible operation occurs, a decline in game interest due to failure to confirm the effect after the operation can not be avoided, but the low expectation It is assumed that when the display mode (for example, the blue operation image) appears, the game interest does not decrease so much even if the operation is forgotten, the high expectation display mode (for example, the red operation image) has appeared If you forget to operate when there is a low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation, while trying to avoid a decline in the game interest due to forgetting to operate by always operating the automatic effect function within the effect reception period If you forgot the operation when the image appeared, play the game so that you do not cause the operation by making the automatic rendering function not always function within the effect reception period. And to have a sense of tension is possible to enhance the player's sense of participation it will be expected against. In addition, when not being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) is It may not be possible to appear. In addition, during the effect reception period, any of three or more display modes may appear.

  And in each characteristic technique explained below, it may be made to apply suitably also about the example concerning these automatic button rendition states, and to carry out.

[Suggested degree of expectation by automatic rendering function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform the operation within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-described other example) A process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed can be made executable. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the same change as when the effect is accepted when the player's operation is not accepted within the effect acceptance period in the automatic button effect state. It is also possible to create an effect pattern in which the process (automatic effect function) for causing an effect to be produced is not executed. At this time, if the automatic rendering function does not function when an operation by the player is not received within the effect receiving period in the automatic button effect state, the symbol changes more than when the automatic effecting function functions. It is possible to execute a process in which the effect in the symbol variation is developed such that the expectation (percentage) in which the big hit symbol appears is low. At this time, the expectation (percentage) at which the jackpot symbol appears may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is performed when the operation for the operation button 410 is not performed intentionally within the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it works, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "if the effect reception (operation to the operation button 410) is performed within the effect reception period, the effect after the operation which could have been confirmed can not be confirmed either" While there is a risk that a demerit may occur, it is possible to cause the player to exercise a play selection such as “does not intentionally operate the operation button 410 within the effect reception period”. It is expected that the game interest will be maintained properly.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to receive an effect on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) The above-described effect (a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 241 to 261) as to whether a period occurs or a period in which an operation on another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) can be accepted is generated. )) Is made executable. In this point, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period generated corresponding to such a specific operation related effect, those operation effects are not performed but compared to the effect reception period generated without being executed, those effects It is possible to execute a process in which the effect in the symbol variation is advanced so that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions is increased when there is no operation (effect reception) within the reception period. At this time, the ratio at which the automatic rendering function functions may be 100%.

  According to such a configuration, the fact that the specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect reception period occurs is also a function that indicates that the above-mentioned automatic effect function is likely to function at a high rate. Since it becomes possible, it becomes possible to more suitably improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

  Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, the operation opportunity is provided to the sword decorative body 5001 in the specific operation related effect rather than the case where it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 as the result of the effect. It is set such that the expectation for the jackpot symbol to appear is increased with the symbol variation being in the execution state in the case where it is shown that it is given. However, in the automatic button effect state, when there is no operation (effect acceptance) within the effect acceptance period that occurs in response to a specific operation-related effect, for the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, It is more desirable to set the ratio to be the same in the case where it is shown that the operation opportunity is given with respect to the case where it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001.

  According to such a configuration, a presentation situation with a relatively low degree of expectation (which implies that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as a presentation result of a specific operation-related presentation. Also, since the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions is not changed by this (the rendering result of the specific operation related rendering), the expectation for the above-mentioned automatic rendering function to function is this It becomes possible to maintain suitably. As described above, it becomes possible to enhance the game interest by paralleling two different effects (specific operation related effects, expected degree indication by the automatic effect function) which are not influenced by the other effect results.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of an effect whose expectation level is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 262 (a) shows that the number of reservations is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination on the effect display device 1600 Show the status of the production being performed. As shown in the figure, a display showing that the automatic button effect state is being controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, the “auto button The setting is displayed continuously).

  FIG. 262B shows an effect situation in which a specific effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 262A is being executed. As shown in the figure, in the specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, “press The character display such as “” and the bar display showing the remaining time of the specific effect reception period appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, if an operation for the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), a specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed as an effect after the operation according to the effect reception. And so on), and also in a plurality of modes (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectation, "superheat!" With relatively high expectation, etc.) with different expectations within the display area. Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is also ended when there is an effect reception without the remaining time being consumed.

  On the other hand, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the specific rendering acceptance period (when the rendering acceptance has not occurred), the ratio of 60% The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 40%.

  That is, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted within the specific rendering acceptance period As, as long as the effect reception has been performed, the effect will not be performed after the operation that should have occurred. Then, after this, a specific state of acceptance of the effect is generated, and the effect is advanced in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), although the operation button 410 has not been operated within the specific rendering acceptance period. After the operation is performed within the specific effect reception period, the effect after operation having the same content as when the effect is received is performed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a prison object) is effect operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area Although one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Or “excessive heat!”, Etc.) is displayed, post-operation rendering occurs in response to being operated within a specific rendering reception period. In either case, or in the case where a post-operation effect is generated due to the automatic effect function functioning, in either case, the modes displayed in the display area are mutually the same. Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (e), after the specific effect reception period occurs, the effect is developed in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment, whether the specific effect reception period is generated as “the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions” or “the above-mentioned automatic effect function It is decided (selected) on the basis of the result of the big hit judgment at the time of execution of the symbol variation about whether to generate as a production reception period where “does not function”, and as a result, 60% in a specific production reception period The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at the ratio of, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the ratio of 40%. For example, when the jackpot is elected as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding election, Period will be generated or "demonstration reception period where the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function" will be generated, and if it is a big hit as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the bad selection will be referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "a production reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or "a performance reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" are generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a rate of 60% in the specific effect reception period, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 40%.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the specific effect reception period is generated as "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", the above Which of these periods should be generated so that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears will be higher when the symbol variation is stopped than when it is generated as a “demonstration reception period when the automatic rendering function of the function does not function”? Are determined (selected) based on the result of the above-mentioned big hit judgment.

  According to such a configuration, the automatic rendering function functions when an effect reception period occurs in which it is determined that an aspect (such as "super heat!") With a high degree of expectation appears as an effect after operation when the effect is accepted. Although the ratio to perform becomes relatively high, when the effect acceptance period where it is determined that the aspect with low expectation (such as “chance!”) Appears as the effect after operation when the effect is accepted occurs, the automatic effect The rate at which functions function will be relatively low. Therefore, if an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether or not the automatic effect function works when the operation button 410 is not performed intentionally within the effect reception period By confirming, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation about whether the big hit design appears due to the design fluctuation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "if the effect reception (operation to the operation button 410) is performed within the effect reception period, the effect after the operation which could have been confirmed can not be confirmed either" While there is a risk that a demerit may occur, it is possible to cause the player to exercise a play selection such as “does not intentionally operate the operation button 410 within the effect reception period”. It is expected that the game interest will be maintained properly.

  However, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), even if the automatic rendering function functions when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed intentionally within the effect receiving period, it is expected as a post-operation effect. This is a case where low aspect (such as “chance!”) Can also appear, even if it is suggested that the automatic rendering function has a relatively high degree of expectation. With such an indication of continuous expectations (improvement due to the function of the automatic rendering function, suggestion according to the mode of the rendering after operation), it will be possible to achieve a dignified rendition, and maintain the game interest favorably. It will be expected.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), even when the automatic rendering function does not function when the operation button 410 is not performed intentionally within the effect receiving period, the effect receiving is also performed. Since it is possible that the high expectations have appeared in the post-operation presentation that should have appeared, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. However, when the rendering situation shown in FIG. 262 (c) (the automatic rendering function does not function and the rendering does not appear after the operation) appears, the rendering situation shown in FIG. 262 (d) (the automatic rendering function) Is desirable, but it is desirable to make the expectation lower than when a situation where a low expectation appears as an effect after the operation).

  FIGS. 263 and 264 show that the automatic presentation function suggests the degree of expectation when the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation related presentation (see FIGS. 241 to 261) occurs in the automatic button presentation state. A specific example is shown.

  FIG. 263 (a) shows that the number of reservations is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) has a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination on the effect display device 1600 Show the status of the production being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, a display indicating that control is performed in the automatic button effect state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled (here , "Auto button setting" is displayed continuously.

  FIG. 263 (b) shows the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246 (specific operation-related examples illustrated separately from this) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 263 (a) The effect may be the effect status) in which the effect is started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. And the common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, it is concealed to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given . However, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific operation-related effect, whether an effect status indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation, The appearance status indicating that the sword decorative body 5001 should be operated appears as the second rendering result with a relatively high degree of expectation, whereby the operation button 410 with a relatively low degree of expectation and the degree of expectation relatively It becomes to be shown which of the tall sword ornaments 5001 the operation opportunity is given to.

  FIG. 263 (c) shows that the operation button 410 should be operated as a result of the first effect with a relatively low degree of expectation as a result of the specific operation related effect shown in FIG. 263 (b) being performed. The effect situation which shows in appears, and a mode that the effect reception period with respect to the operation button 410 generate | occur | produced is shown. In the effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, “press” The character display and the bar display showing the remaining time of the specific effect reception period appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c), a specific decoration member SDY (such as a prisoner or the like) is displayed as an effect after the operation according to the effect reception. While the rendering operation is performed, any of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low degree of expectation or “superheat!” With a relatively high degree of expectation) or the like having different degrees of expectation also within the display area It will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is also ended when there is an effect reception without the remaining time being consumed.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation for the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect receiving period (when the effect receiving is not generated), the above-mentioned is described at a ratio of 20%. The automatic rendering function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is designed to function at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is puzzled as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is activated, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect reception period. It may happen that the operation can not be performed. Therefore, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs in the automatic button effect state (see FIG. 263 (c)), an effect that occurs without the specific operation-related effect being executed. The effect within the symbol variation is performed so that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions more frequently when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period compared to the reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) Processing can be carried out. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxious feeling such as "the appropriate operation can not be performed within the effect reception period and the effect corresponding to the operation may not appear". It becomes possible to provide an interest as to which of the body 5001 is activated through the specific operation related rendition. In order to obtain such effects, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that indicates the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic rendering function has functioned.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the periods controlled to the automatic button effect state, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation related effect (specific display effect) is performed. Until it is finished, as shown in the figure, the display (in this case, "Auto button high accuracy middle") indicating that the ratio is at a high level at which the automatic rendering function is functioning continues. Is supposed to appear.

  When the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 263 (d), it is assumed that the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted within the effect accepting period, As long as the effect reception has been performed, the effect will not be performed after the operation that should have occurred. Then, after this, a specific state of acceptance of the effect is generated, and the effect is advanced in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time. However, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the rendering reception period (when the rendering reception does not occur) In the case of the effect shown in FIG. 262 (b), the above-mentioned automatic effect function is effective when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur). It is desirable to make expectations higher than if you did not.

  Further, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 80%, the rendering is performed as shown in FIG. 263 (e) even though the operation button 410 has not been operated within the rendering reception period. After the operation is performed within the reception period, the effect after the operation, which has the same content as when the effect reception is made, is performed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a prison object) is effect operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area Although one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Or “excessive heat!”, Etc.) is displayed, post-operation rendering occurs in response to being operated within a specific rendering reception period. In either case, or in the case where a post-operation effect is generated due to the automatic effect function functioning, in either case, the modes displayed in the display area are mutually the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 263 (f), the rendering progress is made in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific rendering reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, FIG. 264 (g) shows a state in which the sword decorative body 5001 should be operated as a second rendering result with a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of performing the specific operation related rendering shown in FIG. 263 (b). The effect situation which shows that there is appears, and a mode that the effect reception period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 generate | occur | produced is shown. In this rendering situation, as shown in the figure, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, “ The words "Please put the sword" and the bar that shows the remaining time of the specific effect reception period will appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in the operating state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410, and the operating state of the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position. Operation is allowed.

  Here, if an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 264 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 receives the effect reception within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c). The same post-operation effect as when being played is performed. However, when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c). An aspect with a high degree of expectation among a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low degree of expectation, “superheat!” With a relatively high degree of expectation, etc.) The rate of appearance in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. In addition, when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is received within the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is also consumed the remaining time. The point ended when the effect reception is received is also the same as in the case of the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period in the effect situation shown in FIG. 264 (g) (effect reception is not generated In the case of (3) (c), although the production status shown in FIG. 263 (c) is higher than expected, production reception occurs in the production status shown in FIG. 263 (c). As in the case of not being performed, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a ratio of 20%, and the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a ratio of 80%.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation related rendition being performed, a rendition situation indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first rendition result having a relatively low degree of expectation (FIG. 263). Even when (c) appears, the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions is not changed by this (the rendering result of the specific operation related rendering), so the above-mentioned automatic rendering With regard to the expectation for the function to function, it will be possible to maintain this favorably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects and anticipation with the automatic effect function) that are not influenced by each other's effect results in parallel, and an adverse effect result appears in the effect on one side It will be possible to suppress the decline in the amusement of the time. However, in this case, when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed in the effect reception period in the effect situation shown in FIG. 263 (c) (when the effect reception is not generated), the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functional In the case of the effect shown in FIG. 264 (g), when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period (when the effect reception is not generated), the above-mentioned automatic effect function is Expectations will be lower than if it worked.

  When the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 264 (h), it is assumed that the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not accepted within the rendering acceptance period. The effect is not performed after the operation that should have occurred as long as the effect reception has been performed. Then, after this, a specific state of acceptance of the effect is generated, and the effect is advanced in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time. However, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 264 (g), the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the rendering reception period (when the rendering reception does not occur). Even when there is no such situation, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is performed when the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect reception period (when the effect reception is not generated) in the effect situation shown in FIG. 262 (b). It is desirable that expectations be higher than if they did not function.

  Also, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 264 (i), although the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the rendering reception period, An effect is performed after the operation having the same content as when the operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception is made. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a prison object) is effect operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area When one of a plurality of modes (for example, "Chance!" Or "Intense heat!", Etc.) is displayed, but post-operation rendering occurs in response to being operated within the rendering reception period The mode displayed in the display area is the same as each other in any case where the effect after the operation is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, as shown in FIG. 264 (j), after the presentation reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related presentation occurs, the presentation progress is made in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time.

  In addition, whether the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 263 (c) and FIG. 264 (g)) is generated as “the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions” or As in the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) which occurs as a specific operation-related effect is not executed, it is also possible to generate the effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not function. At the time of execution, it is decided (selected) based on the result of the big hit judgment, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at a ratio of 20% in the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation related rendering The above-mentioned automatic rendering function is designed to function at a rate of 80%. For example, when the jackpot is elected as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding election, Period will be generated or "demonstration reception period where the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function" will be generated, and if it is a big hit as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the bad selection will be referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "a production reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or "a performance reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" are generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a ratio of 20% in the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)), 80% The above-mentioned automatic rendering function is designed to function at a ratio of

  Also in the same manner, the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 263 (c) and FIG. 264 (g)) is also generated as a “effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions” If it happens, the percentage of the jackpot symbol appearing will be higher when the symbol variation is stopped than if it is generated as “a production acceptance period where the above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function”. It is determined based on the result of the above-mentioned big hit judgment (selection) which of these periods it should occur as.

  The post-operation effect occurs in the case of the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) and the specific operation-related effect is not performed. The effect may be different as in the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)). However, even in the case of performing as different effects, it is desirable that one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation be able to appear in the effect after operation. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  The sword decorative body 5001 used in the effect example shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be a sword decorative body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. Also, in FIG. 263 and FIG. 264, although it has been described as an example where “effect using an automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation related effects shown in FIG. The “effect using a function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effect shown in FIGS.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 263 and FIG. 264, when a specific operation-related effect is executed in a state not controlled to the automatic button effect state, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect In addition to the fact that the setting operation to the automatic button rendering state is not accepted in the inside, the "setting operation to the automatic button rendering state can not be accepted" state prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period. It is desirable to generate from at least the effect situation shown in FIG. 263 (b) (the action condition for which a specific operation-related effect has been started) to be generated and continued until the effect reception period. According to such a configuration, since it will not be accepted even if the setting operation to the automatic button rendering state is performed after confirming that the specific operation related rendering has been started, the automatic button rendering state It is possible to provide "effects using the automatic effect function" targeting only those who are continuously playing the game while maintaining the game, and the game is continuously performed while maintaining the automatic button effect state It will be able to provide dramatic value for doing.

  In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect being executed, or an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 263 (c), 264 (g) ), The first display mode (for example, blue button image BTG or blue sword decoration image SYG) or the second display mode (for example, green button image BTG or green sword decoration) A state in which an “effect reception acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions” is occurring as compared with the case where the first display mode appears, when the image SYG is allowed to appear and the second display mode appears. It is desirable that the percentage of

  In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect being executed, or an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 263 (c), FIG. ), The third display mode (for example, the red button image BTG or the red sword decoration image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the third display mode appears, It may be made to be in the state where the effect reception period in which the function functions is always generated.

  According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, "if the effect reception (operation to the operation button 410) is performed within the effect reception period, the effect after the operation which should have been confirmed can not be confirmed either. To provide a source of judgment as to whether or not to use a dramatic selection such as “does not intentionally operate the operation button 410 within the effect reception period” while there is a risk that a dramatic demerit such as may occur. Will be expected to be maintained, as well as to maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not “representation using an automatic rendition function” is applied, the effect reception period corresponding to each “specific operation related rendition” illustrated in FIGS. 241 to 261 and 263 and 264. It is desirable that the time period of time t3 is generated as a period having a longer time than the effect reception period (such as FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect being performed. That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is puzzled as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is activated, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect reception period. A situation may occur where it becomes impossible to perform the operation, but by giving a long time to the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation related rendering”, it is possible to suppress such a situation from occurring. Will be expected.

  In particular, in the example of FIGS. 263 and 264, it is set in consideration of the fact that the ratio at which the automatic rendering function functions is relatively high in the effect reception period corresponding to “specific operation related effect”. For example, whether the automatic rendering function functions by setting the rendering reception period to have a time longer than the rendering reception period that occurs without the “specific operation related rendering” being performed It can be said that this is desirable in order to maintain the playability of the game longer for the purpose of improving the amusement of the game. In this case, with regard to the timing at which the automatic rendering function functions, in the effect reception period which occurs without the “specific operation related rendering” being performed, the timing arrives when the first time has elapsed after the period occurs. On the other hand, in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, the automatic effect function is to be reached when the second time longer than the first time has passed since the period has occurred. It is important to last longer for the expressiveness of whether or not it works.

  In addition, the time from the start of these periods to the end of the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect” and the effect reception period that occurs without the “specific operation-related effect” being performed Even in the case of making different, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is reduced. It is desirable to only make the speeds different. That is, in this case, even when the effect reception period corresponding to "specific operation related effect" occurs, the period is continued for the same time as the effect reception period which occurs without "specific operation related effect" being performed. To be able to make it appear that it is possible to maintain the stage effect on whether or not the auto-representation function works, in combination with the “frustration” by being continued for a longer period of time than expected. Will be able to

  According to the example shown in FIGS. 262 to 264, the first effect reception period (effect reception period for specific operation means (operation button 410)) when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) Even if the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (the automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily required. Although it is not necessarily performed, in the effect reception period which occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific display effect (specific operation related effect) is performed, the specific display effect is generated without being executed. The specific operation means (operation button 410) within the first effect reception period than the effect reception period 1 of 1 (the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) So that the ratio is performed is high (auto-effect function for the operation button 410) first automatic presentation means according to the process when the operation is not performed against.

  In this respect, as such an automatic button effect state, the ratio ("60%-40%", "20%-80%") at which the automatic effect function functions depends on the type of the effect reception period as described above When the automatic button effect state to be set is set as the “first automatic button effect state”, the proportion at which the automatic effect function functions is different according to the type of the effect reception period (“50% −50%”, “10 "%-90%") is set to be different regardless of the "second automatic button effect state", and when the effect reception period occurs, regardless of the type as that period to set the automatic effect function to always function The third automatic button effect state to be played may be further prepared, and it may be possible to set any of the effect states including the normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. Moreover, the normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function is not prepared, but always played in the automatic button effect state (the first automatic button effect state, the second automatic button effect state, the third automatic button effect state) Or, an effect may be performed.

  Further, the effect examples shown in FIG. 262 to FIG. 264 may be modified as follows. That is, when the automatic rendering function functions in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the generation of the first effect reception period (first The above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the timing in the rendering reception period of (1), and the first rendering reception period is ended and the post-operation rendering corresponding to this is generated. However, when the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the generation of the first effect reception period (the The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at the timing within the effect receiving period of 1. After that, the first effect receiving period is ended while the effect is not executed after the operation (the effect after the operation is not executed even after that) ). On the other hand, when the automatic rendering function functions in the second effect receiving period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third effect receiving period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second effect receiving period or The above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the timing when the second predetermined time which is longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third effect receiving period, and the second effect receiving period or the third At the same time as the effect reception period is ended, the effect is generated after the operation. However, if the automatic rendering function does not function within the second effect receiving period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third effect receiving period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second effect receiving period or The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the third rendering acceptance period has occurred, and thereafter, the second rendering acceptance period or the third rendering is not executed. The effect reception period of is ended (even after that, the effect is not executed after the operation).

  According to such a configuration, in the first effect reception period on the side where the ratio of functioning of the automatic rendering function is low, the automatic rendering function can function at a relatively early stage, and the automatic rendering function is Even if it does not function, it will be safe because it will have enough time to receive the effect by the player's own operation until the end of the first effect reception period. You will be able to play games with heart. On the other hand, in the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period on the side where the ratio of functioning of the automatic rendering function is high, the automatic rendering function can function only at a relatively late stage, and the automatic performance function is Providing a game with a sense of tension even though the ratio of functioning of the automatic rendering function is high, since the player does not have much time to operate it when not functioning. Will be able to

  In the above modification, in the first effect reception period, the case where the above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed (the timing in the first effect reception period) and when it does not function However, in the second effect reception period and the third effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (the timing in the second effect reception period) You may do so. Even with such a configuration, if the automatic rendering function can only function at a relatively late stage and the automatic rendering function should not function (by any trouble), the time for the player to operate himself It can be expected that the same effect can be obtained because it is considered that the player is delusional that there is not much left behind.

  In addition to the example of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, in other example of effects, the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or may be always controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the setting to the automatic button effect state itself may not be performed, and the automatic effect function may be always provided as a gaming machine that can function at a predetermined ratio.

[Operation unification control when in automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-described other example) Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (The automatic button effect state is to be terminated Desires may arise. Such aspiration often occurs when an effect reception period for giving an operation opportunity to the player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the period It is difficult to perform both the operation for terminating the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity is lost. If so, the game interest may decline.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period regarding the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the effect reception is received A process to end the automatic button effect state and an operation according to the effect reception only by performing the operation on the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 and the like) to which the operation opportunity is to be given within the period. The effects (processes that can cause changes in effects) are performed respectively (operation unification control in an automatic button effect state). As a result, even if a desire to cause the automatic button effect state to end and cause the effect to be developed depending on the player's own operation is generated within the effect reception period, the loss of the operation opportunity is avoided to switch the effect mode. Will be able to do smoothly.

  As described above, when setting to the automatic button effect state when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is permitted only for the operation button 410 among the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. .

  On the other hand, although this is also described above, when canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated in the state where the effect acceptance period has not occurred. An operation for canceling the setting is permitted only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state where the effect reception period is occurring, when the operation to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 or the like) to which the operation opportunity is to be given is performed in the effect reception period. A process of ending the automatic button effect state and an effect after the operation according to the effect reception (a process capable of causing a change in the effect) are respectively performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the state where the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the operation is not received, and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

  However, among the players, we play a game by our unique gaming method, such as "advance operation is performed only when it is desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without generating the switching of the effect mode)". It can be assumed that some want it. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 (or the sword decorative body 5001) within the effect reception period regarding the specific effect when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect Although processing for ending the state (specific rendering state) and processing for causing a change in the rendering are performed respectively (operation unification control in the automatic button rendering state), control to the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) is performed When the operation to the special operation means is performed within the effect reception period regarding the specific effect when being Dynamic button effect state (specific effect state) may process causes a change in the effect depending on the manipulation process is not performed to terminate it is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state is ended and it is desired to actively play the operation game after this, the operation on the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is performed within the effect reception period. If you want to perform only rare operations while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without generating the effect mode switching), perform operation on the special operation means within the effect reception period, etc. It is possible to realize the game desired by the player only by selectively using the operation means as described above.

  Hereinafter, the operation unification control in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 267.

  FIG. 265 (a) shows that the number of reservations is 1 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination on the effect display device 1600 In the effect situation being performed, it is shown that the effect reception period for receiving the pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred while the reach state is being formed. As shown in the figure, a display showing that the automatic button effect state is being controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, the “auto button The setting is displayed continuously).

  Further, as shown in the figure, during this effect reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, Arrow display in the direction and a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410. However, in actuality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state, but also the operation on the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 in which no change has occurred is also permitted.

  265 (b) to 265 (d) do not operate the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), but the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the effect reception period It shows a state in which the post-operation effect is performed which has the same content as when the operation is performed and the effect reception is performed. When the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is ended, and an operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and a special operation means (denoted as "PUSH" in the figure) Any operation opportunity for the button 1410) is lost.

  That is, in the post-operation presentation according to this presentation example, progressive presentation development appears, and any presentation result of a plurality of modes (FIG. 265 (c), FIG. 265 (d)) having different expectations Even if final appearance is decided at the start of symbol variation (decided based on the result of the big hit judgment), first, a specific effect image (here, an explosion as shown in FIG. 265 (b) To display the smoke image). After that, when the rendering is progressed to a rendering result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 265 (c), the specific rendering image shown in FIG. 265 (b) (here, the explosion While the smoke image by) gradually disappears, it will be displayed an effect image (here, a fortune of "Yoshi") that suggests that the effect is a result with a relatively low degree of expectation. When the stage is advanced to a high stage result, as shown in FIG. 265 (d), the specific stage image (here, the smoke image by the explosion) shown in FIG. 265 (b) gradually disappears In the course of the game, an effect image (here, a fortune of "Nakakichi") is suggested to indicate that the effect is a result with a relatively high degree of expectation.

  Then, the flow of effects shown in FIGS. 265 (a) to 265 (d) appears as basic effect progress when the effect reception period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function After the post-operation effect (FIGS. 265 (b) to 265 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless the player performs an operation. .

  However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (automatic button effect state There may be a desire to end it. Such aspiration often occurs when an effect reception period for giving an operation opportunity to the player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the period It is difficult to perform both the operation for terminating the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity is lost. If so, the game interest may decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), it is detected that the operation is performed. Based on the fact that the operation button 410 is positioned at the operation position, processing for terminating the automatic button effect state and effect after operation according to effect acceptance are respectively performed (automatic operation Operation unification control in the button presentation state). When the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is ended, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function can not function, and special operation means ( The operation opportunity for the button 1410 described as "PUSH" in the drawing is also lost.

  When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), as shown in FIG. 266 (e), the operation is performed in the effect reception period and the effect reception is performed. First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as an effect after the operation according to the event. After that, when the rendering is progressed to a rendering result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 266 (f), a specific rendering image (here, an explosion shown in FIG. 266 (e)) While the smoke image by) gradually disappears, it will be displayed an effect image (here, a fortune of "Yoshi") that suggests that the effect is a result with a relatively low degree of expectation. When the stage is advanced to a high stage rendering result, as shown in FIG. 266 (g), the specific stage image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 266 (e) gradually disappears In the course of the game, an effect image (here, a fortune of "Nakakichi") is suggested to indicate that the effect is a result with a relatively high degree of expectation.

  However, when an operation on the operation button 410 is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), a process of ending the automatic button effect state is also performed based on the operation. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 266 (e) to (g), after the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for rendering, it is indicated that the automatic button rendering state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The indication (here, “Auto button setting in progress”) is to be hidden. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggested indication (here, “auto button release”) is made to appear (see FIG. 266 (e)).

  Further, as described above, in the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), special operation means (in the drawing, “PUSH” is described) in which no change occurs as well as the operation button 410 in the light emission state. The operation on the button 1410 is also allowed. Then, the special operation means (a button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 "performs the operation only when it likes it while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without generating the effect mode switching) It is mentioned above that it is prepared in order to make possible our own game technique such as “progress the production”.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 267 (h), the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a). In addition, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) comes to be displayed as a post-operation effect according to the operation being performed within the effect receiving period and the effect receiving being performed. After that, when the rendering is progressed to a rendering result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), a specific rendering image (here, an explosion shown in FIG. 267 (h) While the smoke image by) gradually disappears, it will be displayed an effect image (here, a fortune of "Yoshi") that suggests that the effect is a result with a relatively low degree of expectation. When the stage is advanced to a high stage rendering result, as shown in FIG. 267 (j), the specific stage image (here, the smoke image by the explosion) shown in FIG. 267 (h) gradually disappears In the course of the game, an effect image (here, a fortune of "Nakakichi") is suggested to indicate that the effect is a result with a relatively high degree of expectation. When the operation for the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is accepted for the effect, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is ended, and the above-mentioned automatic effect is generated. As the function becomes inoperable, the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is also lost.

  However, when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the automatic button effect state based on the operation There is no process to end the process at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 267 (h) to 267 (j), even after the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for rendering, it is indicated that the automatic button rendering state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The indication (here, “Auto button setting in progress”) is continuously displayed.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment, the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a). When the operation is performed, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions (FIG. 265 (b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 266 (e)) I have made it possible for the rendition to appear. Such special effects may be effects using a movable body or a lamp, but in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 267 (j), the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned in the effect display device 1600 In addition to the effect image (effect after operation) appearing in the case (FIG. 265 (b)) or when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 266 (e)), the glitter and sparkling effect display is additionally displayed I am trying to Instead of the glitter and sparkling effect display, effects using a movable body or a lamp may be additionally implemented.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period regarding the fortune effect when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the change contents of the effect to be generated When the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period regarding the fortune effect The content of the change in the effect to be produced in the case is different from each other. And in this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, glittering effect display) appears, "The operation with respect to the operation means was performed and the effect appeared after the operation according to the effect reception, but the automatic button effect state is It can be recognized while enjoying the effects after the operation that the setting is not canceled and the state is continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), even in the case of displaying a rendering image (here, a fortune of "Yoshi") that suggests that the rendering result is a result with a relatively low degree of expectation, A rendition (here, a glittering effect display) can be made to appear.

  In addition, such special effects (here, glittering effect display) are made to appear additionally to the above-described post-operation effects at a predetermined rate based on the result of the big hit judgment, and the special When a rendition is additionally appeared, it is desirable that the proportion of the jackpot symbol appearing in the symbol fluctuation is higher than when the special rendition does not appear. However, in this case, it is beneficial for the player to operate not the operation button 410 but the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. There is a concern that the operation against Therefore, when the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the special effect (here, sparkling) If the effect display does not appear, any effect results appear by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) or by the above-mentioned automatic effect function. It is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation is lower than in the case where it occurs.

  According to such a configuration, by the operation on the “special operation means (button described as“ PUSH ”) 1410, the“ operation on the operation means is performed and the effect appears after the operation according to the effect reception. In order to create an automatic button rendition state that has not been set and has been continued, there is a regressive disadvantage such as "It may be suggested that the percentage of big hit symbols appearing due to symbol variation is extremely low." Since there is a risk of being able to be held, it is expected that by making such a playful choice be exercised by the player, it is expected to maintain the gaming interest favorably.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), even though the same effect mode as the example shown in FIG. 266 (f) appears, the above-mentioned effect on the effect is produced. The situation where it is possible to recognize that the ratio in which the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation is lower than the example shown in FIG. 265 (c) or 266 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), although it is made possible to recognize that the situation has a low degree of expectation, the presentation mode is shown in FIG. 265 (c) or 266 (f). By having the same as the case, the third party who is not operating the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is in a rendering situation that fails to make a dramatic selection Is difficult to grasp, and it is expected that this will suppress the decline in the game entertainment.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when any effect selection is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), FIG. 265 (b) or FIG. e) As shown in FIG. 267 (h), etc., a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed, but the specific effect image is relatively displayed as an effect after operation It may be made to be displayed in either of two or more modes from which the rate in which the appearance mode (here, the fortune of “Nakakichi”) appears with a high degree of expectation, or the rate in which the special effect appears is different.

  In addition, even if any effect selection is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), this effect is omitted without displaying a specific effect image, and an effect mode having a different degree of expectation Here, either of “Okichi” or “Nakakichi” fortunes may be made to appear directly as an effect after operation. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to comprehend that a rendering situation (FIG. 267 (i)) that has failed in rendering selection appears to be difficult to recognize, a rendering mode with a different degree of expectation ( Here, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) when making "Okuji" or "Nakakichi" (Omokuji) appear as effects after operation.

  In addition, it is made possible that the effect that the expectation degree is suggested can be performed even during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), so that the above described judgment as to whether or not to take the risk is taken. May be

  In addition, the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the state when in the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, other operation means already prepared may be responsible.

  In addition, during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), does a period occur in which an operation with respect to the operation button 410 can be accepted among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) Or, the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) as to whether a period in which an operation for the operation on the other operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted occurs It may also occur as a result.

  In addition, during the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to operation button 410, a first effect in which an operation opportunity for special operation means (a button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is also given. Even if a reception period (see FIG. 265 (a)) and a second effect reception period in which no operation opportunity for the special operation means (a button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is given are included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 265 (a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effects described above (FIGS. 241 to 261) are performed as compared to when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable that the rate at which symbol variation appears before it stops is high. According to such a configuration, the ratio at which the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appears appears depending on which of the first effect receiving period and the second effect receiving period is occurring. It will function as a suggested effect.

[Stable side automatic rendering process]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-described other example) Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means are permitted to receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated" It is possible to generate an effect reception period of. Therefore, when being in the state where it is controlled to automatic button production state (specific production state) this kind of special production reception period occurs, and vis-a-vis any operation expedient within the special production reception period When there is no operation, to which of the plurality of operation means the automatic rendering function is to be activated (which of the plurality of operation means causes the same change as when the effect is accepted) Is a problem.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means are permitted to receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated" If there is a production reception period of the "is there a possibility that the higher expected results will appear" rather than "the lower expected results may appear" Processing that enables the automatic rendering function for the operation means different from the "operation means on the side that can generate the effect that the appearance result with lower expectation may appear" on the basis of (the stable side automatic effect Processing is enabled.

  According to such a configuration, of the plurality of effect modes that can occur when effect reception is made for any of the plurality of operation means within the special effect reception period, the effect mode having the lowest degree of expectation is: Since it will not appear when the automatic rendering function works, the occurrence of such a situation as "when the user has forgotten to perform an operation, the rendering mode with the lowest degree of expectation is appeared by the automatic rendering function" It will be possible to avoid it properly.

  Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect process in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270.

  First, an example of an effect when a special effect reception period occurs while the automatic button effect state is not controlled but in the normal effect state will be described. In FIG. 268 (a), in the normal rendering state, the number of reservations is 3 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is on the effect display device 1600 with a specific rendering pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Can be made to allow the player to select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the operation of the sword decoration of the sword decorative body 5001 while the reach state is being formed. It shows an effect situation in which an effect indication that suggests that a special effect acceptance period starts is shown. In this production situation, although there is a situation where neither the production reception for the operation button 410 nor the production reception for the sword decorative body 5001 has been activated yet, the operation button 410 and the sword are from the situation. In order to prompt determination of which of the decorative objects 5001 should be operated, the operation button 410 is in a light emitting state, and the sword decorative body 5001 has been moved to the extraction position. Further, in the effect display device 1600, a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG are displayed.

  FIG. 268 (b) shows the special effect reception period suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 268 (a) (the player may press either the operation of the operation button 410 or the operation of the sword decoration of the sword decoration 5001. It shows the rendering situation in which a rendering reception period that can be selected by the side has occurred. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display on the effect display device 1600 (here, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG) which has appeared since the effect situation shown in FIG. 268 (a), the operation button In a state in which the state of the 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is kept as it is, an instruction display prompting an operation to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 (here, to the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG Corresponding downward arrows, which are displayed respectively, and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special effect reception period, etc., appear.

  Here, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 268 (b), a character image such as "stable" is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as "disturbance" is displayed corresponding to the sword decorative image SYG. It is done. However, instead of this, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operation means can receive effects.

  That is, in this example of production, when the effect for the operation button 410 is received within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b), the effect for the operation button 410 is received first as the effect after the button side operation. After being displayed (Fig. 268 (c)), "50 bodies are destroyed" as a rendition result which suggests that the degree of expectation is lower as the number of defeats is smaller and the degree of expectation is higher as the number of defeats is larger And the effect (FIG. 268 (d), FIG. 268 (e)) to make one of "100 body destruction" appear based on the result of the big hit judgment is executed. For example, in the effect after button-side operation when winning a big hit, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at a rate of “40%”, and in FIG. 268 (e) at a rate of “60%”. The effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at a rate of "60%" and the rate of "40%" appears in the effect after the button side operation when the stage effect shown is displayed and the jackpot is dropped It is possible to make the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) appear.

  On the other hand, when the effect for the sword decorative body 5001 is received within the special effect reception period, it is first displayed that the effect for the sword decorative body 5001 has been received as the effect after the operation on the sword side ( Figure 269 (f)) As the staging results suggest that the lesser the number of defeats, the lower the degree of expectation and the greater the number of defeats, the higher the degree of expectation, “S Destroy 1 body”, “100 bodies” An effect (FIG. 269 (g) to FIG. 269 (i)) is made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination of any of 777 body destruction. For example, in the effect after the sword side operation when winning a big hit, the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (g) appears at a rate of “10%”, and in FIG. 269 (h) at a rate of “50%”. The effect mode shown appears so that the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (i) appears at a rate of “40%”, and the effect after “sword operation at the time of losing the jackpot” is a rate of “40%” The effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (g) appears, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h) appears at the rate of “50%”, and the effect shown in FIG. 269 (i) at the rate of “0%” It is possible for an aspect to appear.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the effect mode having a small number of defeats regardless of which of the effect after button-side operation and the effect after sword-side operation appears as a result The degree of expectation is lower than the production mode in which the number of defeats is large. Also, in the case of the same effect mode (for example, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e), the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h), the effect mode shown in FIG. 270 (e) described later) Although the degree of expectation may be different, it is desirable to make it the same.

  In such a configuration, a special effect reception period for allowing effect reception to be generated for any of the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decorative body 5001 (second operation means) is generated. Since different operation effects (effect after button-side operation, effect after sword-side operation) can be generated according to the type of the operation means operated within the effect reception period of 1, one operation means is operated As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  In particular, the same degree of expectation is not shown by operating any of the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means), but the sword decoration 5001 (first A specific effect mode (here, shown in FIG. 269 (g)) that suggests that the big hit symbol is unlikely to appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) only when operating the 2 operation means). I want to see the effect (post-sword operation effect) on the side of the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) until I bear such a risk, since it is possible that the 1 It will be expected to maintain the game interest by giving conflict and stimulation about the game.

  And in this case, after the button side operation production is selected from among the effect modes among the effect modes that appear when any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated within the special effect reception period. In this case, it is functioning as a relatively stable post-operation effect in the sense that the appearance risk of “the effect mode of“ 1 body defeat ”shown in FIG. 269 (g)” is excluded. In addition, the effect after sword side operation is “a specific effect mode (here, the lowest degree of expectation) among the effect modes that appears when any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. Then, in the sense that it has an appearance risk of “the rendering mode of“ 1 body defeat ”)” shown in FIG. 269 (g), it functions as a post-operation presentation relatively including a disturbance.

  Furthermore, in this example of presentation, from the appearance of the appearance shown in FIG. 268 (a) to the appearance of the appearance shown in FIG. 268 (b) (here, within the special presentation acceptance period), The effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (ab) can be made to appear based on the result of the big hit judgment, and when the effect mode appears, it is more than when the effect mode is not appeared When the operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001, the appearance ratio of the “specific presentation mode with the lowest expectation (here, the presentation mode of“ one-body destruction ”shown in FIG. 269 (g)”) is low. It is possible to carry out the development progress in a way that will This percentage may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, up to the risk that the “specific presentation mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the presentation mode of“ one-body destruction ”shown in FIG. 269 (g)”) may occur, As a judgment material as to whether or not to operate the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it is possible to use the rendering result as to whether or not the rendering mode shown in FIG. 268 (a-b) has appeared. It is expected to suitably improve the game entertainment when the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b) occurs.

  When the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b) occurs but the special effect reception period is not made within the special effect reception period in the normal effect state, the above-mentioned automatic effect is received. The function does not function, and the effect is advanced without any of the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation being performed.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 270 (a) to 270 (e) show an example of effect when such a special effect reception period occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state.

  As shown in FIGS. 270 (a), 270 (a-b), and 270 (b), even when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the automatic button effect state is controlled. The effect display appears to indicate that the special effect reception period starts, except that the display (in this case, “auto button setting in progress”) showing the effect is continuously appearing in the effect display device 1600. If it is in the above-mentioned normal effect state (Figure 268 (a), Figure 268 (a-b), and Figure 268 (b)), the effect is the same as before until the special effect reception period is ended. Progressed.

  However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decorative body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. Enable the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 which is different from the sword decoration 5001 on the side that can generate the rendering with the possibility that the "one-body destruction" rendering aspect shown in 269 (g) It is possible to execute a process (stable side automatic rendering process) to be performed.

  That is, in this case, although neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decorative body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 270 (b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated. Thus, the same change as in the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the special effect acceptance period is caused to the effect. Therefore, after displaying that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been made as effect after button-side operation (FIG. 270 (c)), the less the number defeated, the lower the degree of expectation and the greater the number of defeated The effect that "50 body destruction" or "100 body destruction" is made to appear based on the result of the big hit judgment as the effect result that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher (Fig. 270 (d), Fig. 270 (e) ) Will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the lowest degree of expectation is among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when the effect is accepted for any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 within the special effect acceptance period The effect mode (in this case, the effect mode of “1 body defeat” shown in FIG. 269 (g)) can not appear when the automatic effect function is functional, “when there is a failure to operate It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as that the presentation mode with the lowest degree of expectation appears by the automatic presentation function.

  Here, due to the convenience of the automatic rendering function, there is a concern that the player will not operate any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button rendering state. However, as described above, in the special effect reception period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 270 (ab) can appear based on the result of the big hit determination, and when the effect mode appears , The presentation after the sword side operation in the proportion of the appearance of the "specific performance mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here the performance mode of" 1 body destruction shown in Figure 269 (g) ") is low Since an opportunity to enjoy can be provided, it is expected to preferably encourage operation on the sword decorative body 5001.

  In the example of effects shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, a period in which an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted and a period in which an operation for the sword decorative member 5001 is accepted are simultaneously generated and terminated simultaneously. Although control is performed as the effect reception period, those periods may not necessarily be generated simultaneously. For example, if a period in which an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted and a period in which an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted are overlapped in those partial periods, those periods are separated. It may be generated at timing.

  In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected among the plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the big hit determination, "the effect is accepted depending on which operation means is operated, and the effect differs depending on which operation means is operated. The above special presentation acceptance period may be generated without fail. That is, in this case, at a relatively early stage from when symbol variation is started with a specific effect pattern, "which of a plurality of operation means should be operated within a special effect reception period, and a special effect reception period occurs It is possible to think about a creative strategy based on the occurrence of a special presentation acceptance period, such as "Do you have to perform the setting operation to the automatic button presentation state before you do?" . For example, since it will be possible to confirm "how much advance production is performed with what kind of presentation mode (expected degree)" before the special presentation reception period occurs, these confirmations It becomes possible to use the result as a judgment material on "which of the plurality of operation means should be operated in the special effect reception period", and it is possible to play the game until the special effect reception period occurs. This will be able to be maintained suitably for the interest.

  However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410 within the special effect reception period, or when there is an operation on the sword decorative body 5001, furthermore, an automatic effect function As to which presentation mode is to appear when the character functions, it is determined by drawing (judgment) based on the result of the big hit judgment at the start of symbol variation or at the occurrence of presentation reception (or at the time of the function of automatic presentation function). It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, even if a special effect reception period has not yet occurred, the player may be allowed to select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the operation of the sword decoration of the sword decoration 5001. When it is in the production situation where the effect display (Fig. 268 (a), Fig. 270 (a)) suggesting that the special effect reception period starts, the setting to the automatic button production state is permitted It is desirable to control this as a prohibited period so as not to According to such a configuration, it suggests that a special effect reception period in which the player can select either of the pressing operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of the sword decoration of the sword decorative body 5001 is started. After confirming that the effect display has been started, this will not be accepted even if you try to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, so the game is continuously performed while maintaining the automatic button effect state It becomes possible to provide the "stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state" only for the person who is playing, and the effect for continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state To provide valuable value.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, “the specific effect aspect having the lowest degree of expectation (FIG. 269 (g)) that can appear when the effect is performed after the sword side operation is Although it was decided to carry out as a unique effect mode that is different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the post effect is performed, for the “specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation”, the effect after the button side operation is It may be executed as the same aspect as the presentation aspect that can appear when it is performed (for example, (“50 body destruction shown in FIG. 268 (d)”). Even if "the specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation" appears as a result of being performed, it looks like the same effect mode as the effect mode that can appear when the effect is performed after the button side operation appears Operation button Third parties who do not know which one of the 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated can make it difficult to recognize that they are in a rendering situation in which the degree of expectation is extremely low. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, only one effect situation such as “a specific effect mode is displayed based on effect reception” is appearing. Nevertheless, the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state depends on whether the effect situation is generated by the operation on the operation button 410 or by the operation on the sword decoration 5001. Because the degree of expectation that the big hit design appears in) becomes different, it has more interesting as a rendition using multiple operation means It becomes possible to.

  However, it is a case where the "specific presentation mode with the lowest degree of expectation" in the effect after sword side operation is performed as the same effect mode that can appear even when the effect after button side operation is performed. Even with regard to “the most highly anticipated special effect mode” in the effect after the sword side operation, a unique effect mode (for example, different from any of the effect modes that may appear when the effect is performed after the button side operation (It is desirable to execute it as “777 body destruction shown in FIG. 269 (i).) According to such a configuration,“ specific presentation mode with the lowest degree of expectation ”in staging after sword side operation When it appears, it is difficult to recognize that the third person who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 has been operated is in a rendering situation where the degree of expectation is extremely low. And, when the "most special presentation mode with the highest degree of expectation" appears in the post-sword operation, even if it is a third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the player is in a rendering situation in which the degree of expectation is extremely high, so that the player bears the above-mentioned risks without worrying about the eyes of the third party. It becomes possible to enjoy the effect (effect after operation on the sword side) on the sword decorative body 5001 (second operation means) side. It may be any as long as it can be recognized, and for example, uniqueness between other presentation modes may be ensured by executing movable body operation and lamp emission.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, the effect mode of “777 body destruction” as a result of performing effects after the sword side operation (FIG. 269 (f) to FIG. 269 (i)) (FIG. i) has become possible, and any of the other presentation modes (FIG. 268 (d), 268 (e)) when the presentation mode (FIG. 269 (i)) of the "777 body destruction" appears. 269 (g) and 269 (h)), the ratio of the jackpot symbol appearing in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) is higher than that when the symbol 269 (g) and FIG. 269 (h) appear. This percentage may be 100%. However, the effect mode (FIG. 269 (i)) of the "777 body destruction" may not necessarily be made to appear. In this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) is not shown. The appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h) is made higher than the appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) by the amount of lowering the expectation of the effect mode shown in (g) It becomes.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, the effect after button side operation (FIG. 268 (c) to FIG. 268 (e)) and the effect after sword side operation (FIG. 269 (f) to FIG. 269 (i) Even if any of the above is carried out, the common rendering mode (here, the rendering mode of "100 body destruction") can be made to appear, but the common rendering mode is made not to appear It is also good. In addition, in the effect after the button side operation, only the display change appears, but in the effect after the sword side operation, in addition to the display change, the movable body operation, the lamp emission and the like may be executable. Further, the effect after the button-side operation and the effect after the sword-side operation do not have commonality as effect contents relating to the number of defeats, and the effect contents themselves may be executed as effects different from each other.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, when the effect reception is generated, including when the effect is accepted by the function of the automatic effect function, first, any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 Although it is assumed here that the display (FIG. 268 (c), FIG. 269 (f), FIG. 270 (c)) is suggested to indicate whether the effect has been accepted, the degree of expectation is suggested without making the display appear. You may make it perform the production | presentation which makes the production | presentation result appear.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, the effect mode of “777 body destruction” as a result of performing effects after the sword side operation (FIG. 269 (f) to FIG. 269 (i)) (FIG. When i) appears, the above-mentioned specific operation relation is more than when any other presentation mode (FIGS. 268 (d), 268 (e), 269 (g), 269 (h)) appears. The rate at which the effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appears before the symbol variation is stopped, and the operation means with the higher degree of expectation when the specific operation-related effect appears (sword decoration body It is desirable to increase the rate at which the operation opportunity is given to 5001). According to such a configuration, in the example of effects shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, it is possible to suitably promote performing the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the effect risk is high.

[Process for accepting effects according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-described other example) Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the first display effect is displayed And processing for generating a first expected effect (effect after operation indicating an expected degree) based on the effect received by the operation, and · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · processing processing to generate the first expected effect The second display effect can be displayed within the period, and when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the middle of the second display effect being displayed, the above-described second display effect is received based on the effect received by the operation. It is possible to execute processing for a plurality of different operation effects such as processing for generating a second expected effect (effect after operation indicating an expected degree) different from the expected effect of 1 That.

  In such a configuration, depending on the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed in the effect reception period, the effect type as expected effect (effect after operation) appearing at the time of operation is different As a result, it becomes possible to preferably enhance not only the game interest when operated but also the game interest from when the effect reception period occurs to when it is operated.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect reception period (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted when at least the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the second display effect is displayed in the effect reception period in which the first display effect is displayed or the effect reception period for permitting the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, the effect reception is received A process for generating the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) as when the operation button 410 is operated even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period. Is made executable.

  According to such a configuration, when an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect of displaying the first display effect appears in the effect reception period. Whether or not the first display effect is executed, and the effect status in which the second display effect is displayed in the effect reception period appears, whether or not the operation button 410 is operated Regardless, the second display effect will be executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed within the effect reception period, the operator is worried about forgetting to operate Will be able to enjoy the production without

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first display effect can not be displayed only when an effect reception period for generating an effect after operation occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect reception period for generating the effect after the operation does not occur. And
· A production situation in which a production reception period that is controlled to an automatic button production state (a specific production state) and allows production reception (operation) to the operation button 410 has occurred and the first display production is displayed When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in, processing for generating the first expected effect (effect after operation) and processing for ending the automatic button effect state are respectively performed (effect shown in FIG. 271 described later See progress),
· A production situation in which a production reception period that is controlled to an automatic button production state (a specific production state) and allows production reception (operation) to the operation button 410 is occurring and the second display production is displayed If an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in, the process of generating the second expected effect (effect after operation) is performed, but the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 272 described later) See the development progress),
· An effect that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and does not generate an effect reception period allowing effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 and that a second display effect is displayed When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the situation, neither the process for generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) nor the process for generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button is performed. Also, processing to end the rendering state is not performed (see the rendering progress shown in FIG. 273 described later),
・ No effect reception period which is controlled to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and allows effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 has not occurred, and the first display effect and the second display effect Processing for generating a first expected rendering (post-operation rendering) and processing for generating a second expected rendering (post-operation rendering) when an operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a rendering situation in which none of them is displayed Each of the processes is performed such that the process of terminating the automatic button presentation state may be performed according to the presentation situation (the presentation reception process according to the display type).

  According to such a configuration, the first display effect appears when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 when the first display effect appears and the second display effect does not appear. In the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is performed when the second display effect is not present and the second display effect appears, the type (the first after the operation effect) according to the operation (the effect reception) The expectation presentation (the second expected presentation) is different from the first, and the expected presentation (post-operation presentation) itself does not appear even if the second display effect appears and it operates only There is a possibility that the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed. Therefore, the diversity as the effect using the operation button 410 is secured, and it is possible to suitably improve the game interest when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed.

  Hereinafter, the effect receiving process according to the display type when in such an automatic button effect state is described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 271 shows that the period of timing tb11 to tb13 (refer to FIG. 271 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is displayed, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. The example of a presentation when the 1st presentation pattern which can be set up as a presentation acceptance period which permits is shown is shown.

  In this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” is reached, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), in the effect display device 1600 The button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appears (First display effect).

  Then, if an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted at timing tb12 prior to the above timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271 (c), the symbol fluctuation (in the execution state) is performed based on the effect acceptance The effect after the first operation (in the drawing, the fortune of "Nakakichi" in the figure) is executed (the first expected effect) indicating the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation). At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the effect reception and returned to the normal effect state, and the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 also has the effect reception without digesting the remaining time. It will end at the same time. Therefore, at timing tb12 at which the effect was received, a display showing that "the automatic button effect state is being controlled" (here, "the automatic button is being set") appearing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 so far ) Will also be hidden.

  However, in this case, regardless of the period of timing tb11 to tb13, at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271 (d), the first after-operation effect generated by the effect reception ((d) In order for the first expectation effect) to not be ended yet and to be in the middle of execution, the game interest is suitably maintained over the period of the timing tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing when the effect acceptance is received. It is desirable to do.

  FIG. 272 shows that the period for timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 272 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is displayed, while the automatic button effect state is being controlled. The example of a presentation when the 2nd presentation pattern which can be set up as a presentation acceptance period which permits is shown is shown.

  In this second effect pattern, when the timing tb 21 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410” is reached, as shown in FIG. 272 (b), in the effect display device 1600 , "Ghost OBK with a present box" to appear (second display effect).

  Here, when “Haunted OBK with a present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, when the operation button 410 is operated, an effect whose expectation degree is suggested is necessarily generated. Since there is no limitation to this, there is no indication of an instruction prompting the operation on the operation button 410 (arrow display in the downward direction or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period).

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 272, it is possible to display the ghost OBK having the present box within the period of the timing tb21 to tb23, and the period before the ghost tb23 is displayed in the period in which the ghost OBK is displayed. When the operation to the operation button 410 is performed at the timing tb22, the effect is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 272 (c), the big hit symbol is the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the effect acceptance. The second post-operation effect (in the drawing, the letter display of “superheat”) indicating the expected degree of appearance is performed (second expected effect).

  However, at this time, the effect reception period occurring from the timing tb21 is ended at the time when the effect reception is received without the remaining time being consumed, but the automatic button effect state is not set without being canceled. This is to be maintained. Therefore, at timing tb22, the "display showing that the automatic button effect state is controlled (in this case," auto button setting in progress ") appearing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 also continues its display. It will be done.

  In addition, regardless of the period of timing tb21 to tb23, at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 272 (d), the second after-operation effect generated by the effect reception (second In order to maintain the game entertaining condition suitably over the period of the timing tb21 to tb23, it is possible that the expectation effect of the game is not finished yet and is in the process of execution, regardless of the timing of reception of the effect. Desirable.

  FIG. 273 is to generate the second post-operation effect in the period of timing tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 273 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation while being controlled to the automatic button effect state The example of a production | presentation when the 3rd production | presentation pattern which displays "haunted OBK with a present box" is performed is shown, although the production reception acceptance period of has not generate | occur | produced.

  In this third effect pattern, when the timing tb 31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), in the effect display device 1600, a ghost OBK with a present box is made to appear (second display effect).

  However, as described above, in the effect situation where the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the effect after operation is suggested that the degree of expectation is suggested even if the operation button 410 is operated. Since generation is not necessarily limited, an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (arrow display in the downward direction or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) does not appear.

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 273, the display of the ghost OBK with the present box is enabled within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33, but as shown in FIG. 273 (a), the ghost OBK is displayed In the relevant period, the "effect reception period for accepting the effect reception (operation) on the operation button 410" is not generated. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 272 (a) and 272 (c), even if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the ghost OBK holding the present box is displayed, after the operation according to the operation is performed. The effect (effect after the first operation, effect after the second operation) will not appear, and the ghost OBK with the present box will be displayed over the period of the timing tb31 to tb33.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the effect reception period regarding the effect after operation does not occur in the automatic button effect state. In this case, basically, the process of ending the automatic button effect state (setting release) is performed, but even if the effect reception period regarding the effect after operation is not generated, it is shown in FIG. 273. If an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while such a rendering situation (a staging state in which a ghost OBK with a present box is displayed), a process for generating a rendering after the operation and an automatic button rendering state are It is assumed that the effect is advanced so that none of the processing to be terminated is performed.

Therefore, when the mode shown in FIG. 273 (b) (the ghost OBK with a present box) which is the same mode as FIG. 272 (b) is displayed, the second operation shown in FIG. 272 (c) Even if the operation button 410 has been operated in anticipation of the occurrence of the second effect (the second expected effect), although the effect change does not occur, the automatic button effect state is not canceled without being set. It will be possible to continue this. In this case, as a method not to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state,
-Even in the state where the effect reception period for the post-operation effect has not occurred, only detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is enabled, and this is not performed when the effect reception period for the post-operation effect has not occurred If there is a detection, it is judged whether or not the timing at which the detection has been made is "within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33 at which the ghost OBK holding the present box is displayed", and "the present box is held When it is within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33 when the hatched OBK is displayed, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the timing when the hatched OBK with the present box is displayed If it is not within the period of tb21 to tb23, processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is performed Approach to (the method to set the period of timing tb31~tb33, as the prohibition period in accordance with the setting release of the automatic button directing state)
・ In the period of the timing tb21 to tb23 when the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, a method of detecting whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated or not is adopted. Is possible, and any implementation method may be used.

  FIG. 274 shows that the period for timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 274 (a)) of the symbol variation execution period is “controlled for effect (operation) for the operation button 410 while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. Although the above-mentioned first effect pattern that can be set as “allowed effect receiving period” is executed, an example of effect is shown when the operation button 410 is not performed within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13.

  As described above, in this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception acceptance period for permitting the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410” is generated, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), the effect display In the device 1600, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) Display) appears (first display effect).

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 274, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timing tb11 to tb13, but the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is performed when the timing tb12 'before the timing tb13 comes. Is made to function so that the same change as when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed is caused to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274 (c), at timing tb12 ', the expectation for the jackpot symbol to appear in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the above-mentioned automatic rendering function A first post-operation effect ("Okyoshi" fortune in the drawing) to be suggested is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the effect reception period occurring from the timing tb11 is ended when the automatic effect function functions without digesting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is continued without being canceled. Become. Therefore, at timing tb12 ', the "display showing that the automatic button effect state is controlled (here," automatic button setting in progress ") which has appeared up to that point in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is also continued. It will be displayed.

  Further, even when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the timing tb12 ′, the first after-operation rendering (the first operation generated by the above-described automatic rendering function) is performed at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 274 (d). It is desirable that the expectation effect (a) is not finished yet, and is in the process of execution, in order to preferably maintain the game entertainment over the period of the timings tb11 to tb13.

  FIG. 275 shows that the period for timing tb21 to tb23 (refer to FIG. 275 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is “controlled for effect (operation) for operation button 410 while being controlled to the automatic button effect state Although the above-mentioned second effect pattern that can be set as “acceptable effect receiving period” is executed, an example of effect is shown when the operation button 410 is not performed within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23.

  As described above, in this second effect pattern, when the timing tb 21 for generating the “effect reception acceptance period for permitting the effect reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” is reached, as shown in FIG. 275 (b), the effect display In the device 1600, “Haunted OBK with a present box” is made to appear (second display effect).

  Here, as described above, when “Haunted OBK with a present box” is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated, unlike when the button image BTG is displayed. That an instruction to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appears. There is no.

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 275, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timing tb21 to tb23, but the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is performed when the timing tb22 'before the timing tb23 comes. Is made to function so that the same change as when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed is caused to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 275 (c), at timing tb 22 ', the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) is based on the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functioning. The second post-operation effect (in the figure, the letter display of "superheat") is executed (the second expected effect). However, even in this case, the effect reception period occurring from the timing tb21 is ended when the automatic effect function functions without consuming the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is continued without being canceled. It becomes. Therefore, at timing tb 22 ′, “display showing that control is being performed in the automatic button effect state (here,“ automatic button setting is in progress ”) which has appeared so far in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is also continued. It will be displayed.

  In addition, even when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at the timing tb22 ', the second after-operation rendering generated by the above-described automatic rendering function (the second (at the second timing) is performed at the timing tb23 as shown in FIG. It is desirable that the expectation effect (a) is not finished yet, and is in the process of execution, in order to suitably maintain the game entertainment over the period of the timing tb21 to tb23.

  By the way, although illustration is omitted, although the above-mentioned third effect pattern (see FIG. 273) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is executed within the period of the timings tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, the above-mentioned automatic rendering function can not function and the setting of the automatic button rendering state is also canceled because the effect reception period for generating the effect after the second operation does not occur in the first place. It goes without saying that it will be continued (that is, no change will occur).

  In the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the effects that are developed with different contents are executed between the first display effect shown in FIG. 271 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 272 and 273. Type as a post-operation effect when the operation is performed according to which of the first display effect and the second display effect is displayed according to whether the operation button 410 is performed (first In addition to being expected to be different from the second expected presentation), the expected presentation (post-operation presentation) itself may not appear even if the second display effect is being operated There is a risk that the process of terminating the automatic button effect state is not performed. Therefore, the diversity as the effect using the operation button 410 is secured, and it is possible to suitably improve the game interest when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed.

  The first display effect includes a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, and may be performed in any of these effect modes. Also, with regard to the second display effect, there are a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, and may be performed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect be executed as display contents having contents having nothing to do with each other. In the example of the effects shown in FIG. 271 to FIG. 275, in the first display effect, the button image BTG or the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 is displayed, while in the second display effect, the button Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (haunted with a present box) not displayed when the first display effect is performed is displayed. It has become.

  In addition, as the first expected effect, there are a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, and may be performed in any of these effect modes. In addition, there are also a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation for the second expected effect, and it may be possible to be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected presentation and the second expected presentation are executed as presentation contents having contents unrelated to each other. In the example of effects shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the fortune image is displayed in the first expected effect, but the fortune image is not displayed in the second expected effect, and the degree of expectation by the character display Suggestions are to be made. By executing one of the first expected presentation and the second expected presentation as a movable presentation or a presentation based on a lamp display, the contents may have nothing to do with each other.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 271 to FIG. 275, when the second display effect is appearing as the effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the execution period of the symbol variation, “the effect for the operation button 410 A second effect pattern and a second display effect appear in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of symbol variation) that the effect acceptance period for accepting acceptance (operation) occurs. When there is a third effect pattern that is determined beforehand (for example, by the determination process performed at the start of symbol variation) that “the effect reception period for allowing effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 is not generated It was decided to prepare. However, after preparing a second effect pattern in which it is determined in advance that “the effect receiving period for accepting the effect receiving (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” occurs when the second display effect appears. A determination (lottery) is made as to whether or not to generate a second expected effect based on the fact that the effect acceptance has been made within the “effect acceptance period for accepting the effect acceptance (operation) with respect to the operation button 410”. By causing the second expected effect to be generated when the specific result is obtained in the determination, and not generating the second expected effect when the specific result is not obtained in the determination, as shown in FIG. The presentation example shown in FIG. 275 may be realized. In addition to the second effect pattern according to such another example, when the second display effect appears, "the effect reception period for accepting the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. The above-described third effect pattern may be prepared in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of symbol variation).

  When the second expectation effect is generated as a result of the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 being performed while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is being performed. The ratio that the jackpot symbol appears may be higher in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) than when the first expected effect occurs as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 being made. desirable.

  Moreover, when the second display effect is performed, the above-described specific operation related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) is performed until the symbol variation is stopped, as compared to the case where the first display effect is performed. It is desirable that the rate of occurrence during the period is high. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) being performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the specific operation It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for the related rendering (see FIGS. 241 to 261) to be performed, and it is possible to preferably suppress the game entertainment.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed, the second display effect (FIG. 272 (b), FIG. 273) The above-mentioned automatic rendering function is made to function at any time when (b) is displayed. However, when the second display effect (see FIGS. 272 (b) and 273 (b)) is not necessarily displayed, even if the operation is performed, the second expected effect does not necessarily occur. When the rendering function is made to function, when the second display effect (see FIG. 272 (b) and FIG. 273 (b)) is displayed, the operation is performed leaving it to the above-mentioned automatic rendering function. There is concern that it will be lost. Therefore, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, but the second display effect (FIG. 272 (b), FIG. 273 (b) When the second display effect is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function when the reference is displayed, and even if the second display effect is displayed, it is not understood that the second expected effect will occur, but at least the operation has to be performed. For example, the second expected effect may not occur.

  Further, in the example of the effects shown in FIG. 271 to FIG. 275, when displaying the ghosted OBK, "the effect accepting period for accepting the effect accepting (operation) for the operation means" is generated while the ghosted OBK is displayed. You may do so. Further, in the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the ghost OBK is displayed, the automatic effect function functions within the "effect receiving period for accepting the effect receiving (operation) for the operation means" Even when the operation is performed, the ghosted OBK may not be displayed, and the effect that the ghosted OBK is displayed may be continued also at the timing tb23 and the timing tb33.

[Auto-strike function in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-described other example) Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the user is requested to perform a plurality of operations (such as pressing the operation button 410 continuously) to a predetermined operation means, and the effect reception is generated each time there is an operation. There is something I can do. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, it becomes a problem how to cause the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function when such a specific effect reception period in which a plurality of operation effects are performed occurs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. The effect when a plurality of operations are performed only by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) in which the predetermined operation means is maintained in the operation state for a relatively long time without operating the plural times The automatic multiple operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) that causes the mode to appear is mounted, and the automatic multiple operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) is a function by performing the operation on the predetermined operation means in the long operation mode When the operation state is maintained, an effect is accepted each time a predetermined time elapses, and processing to generate effects after operation multiple times according to these It is set to be executed.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation for the operation means is not performed within the specific effect reception period, the operation for the operation means is performed in the aspect of the long operation within the specific effect reception period, and the automatic operation is performed. As in the case where the operation function (automatic consecutive hit function) functions a plurality of times, processing for generating an effect according to the effect reception every time a predetermined time elapses is executed (automatic effect function).

  According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has an automatic continuous hitting function activated when an operation by so-called long press is performed within a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. When the automatic button effect state is controlled at least, the same effect mode as when the automatic continuous hitting function is activated appears even if the operation by the long press is not performed within the specific effect reception period. Therefore, even when the automatic effect function is functioned when the specific effect reception period requiring multiple operation reception occurs in the automatic button effect state, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period The player is not dissatisfied with the frequency of occurrence of the character and can enjoy the effects.

  FIG. 276 (a) is an operation opportunity of “a plurality of times (such as a continuous hit etc.) operation to the operation button 410 in the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a specific effect reception period to which “is applied” is executed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed multiple times in a single-shot operation mode in which the operation state is maintained only for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. Shows an example of rendering when performed over the.

  As shown in FIG. 276 (a), in this effect example, every time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the single operation mode within the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) When it is detected that the position is changed from the position to the operation state (here, it is detected to stand up), the effect reception according to the operation is made, and the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception is performed . Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times operation detection (effect reception) is performed for operation button 410 reaches a specific number, or a specific result is obtained by lottery when effect is received, etc. The effect mode is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific effect condition, and the specific effect reception period is ended at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  Here, although omitted in the figure, within the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), a specific time from the start of the specific effect (effect after operation) according to the effect reception to the end thereof There may be new presentation acceptance (operation detection) inside. In such a case, the specific effect (post-operation effect) in the state of being executed at the time the effect is received is interrupted, and a specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is newly generated. Therefore, it is desirable that the operation feeling (representation reactivity) when the player operates is suitably maintained. Note that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is ended when a specific time has elapsed since the start, unless a new effect reception is generated again while the specific effect is being executed. Become.

  In FIG. 276 (b), when not being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation opportunity of the operation “a plurality of times (such as a continuous hit or the like) with respect to the operation t A specific effect pattern that can be set as a “specific effect reception period to which“ is applied ”is executed, and an operation in a long mode operation (so-called long press) in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively long An example of rendering when an operation on the button 410 is performed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 276 (b), in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), while the operation state of the operation button 410 is maintained in the long press mode, the operation button 410 is in the operation state. A process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) occurs based on the operation detection (effect reception) when it has become The auto consecutive hit function is to be executed. As this process (automatic consecutive hit function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed under the condition that the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t 1 elapses, and those operation detection (effect It is possible to execute as processing of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) based on the reception). Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times operation detection (effect reception) is performed for operation button 410 reaches a specific number, or a specific result is obtained by lottery when effect is received, etc. The effect mode is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific effect condition, and the specific effect reception period is ended at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 277 (a) is an operation opportunity of “a plurality of times of operation (such as continuous hitting) of the operation button 410 for the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state A specific effect pattern that can be set as a specific effect reception period to which “is applied” is executed, and an example of effect when no operation is performed in the specific effect reception period is shown.

  First, when no operation is performed in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not performed even once, and the timing tc13 is not performed. When it reaches, the specific effect reception period will be ended.

  On the other hand, if no operation is performed in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, as shown in FIG. 277 (a), The above-mentioned automatic rendering function functions at timing tc12 at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the generation reception period has occurred. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function performs a new specific effect every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic continuous hitting function functions. The processing to generate the effect after operation is executed.

  In addition, as this process (automatic effect function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time the predetermined time t 1 passes, and a new specific effect (effect reception) is performed based on the operation detection (effect reception). It is possible to execute as processing such as "to generate an effect after operation". In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic rendering function is functioned at the timing tc12, the automatic continuous hitting function is functioned to use it to “detect operation every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and to detect those operations A process may be performed to generate a new specific effect (effect after operation) based on (effect reception). Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times operation detection (effect reception) is performed for operation button 410 reaches a specific number, or a specific result is obtained by lottery when effect is received, etc. The effect mode is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific effect condition, and the specific effect reception period is ended at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 277 (b) shows an operation opportunity of “a plurality of times (such as a continuous hit) of the operation button 410 for a period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state. The specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect reception period to which“ is applied ”is executed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is long-pressed in the state where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning in the specific effect reception period. The example of presentation in the case of being performed is shown.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), as in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a), the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function at timing tc12, whereby the first specific effect at timing tc12 After generating a new special effect (post operation effect) is generated each time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic continuous hitting function functions (or by causing the automatic continuous hitting function to function). The process to make it be executed.

  However, in this rendering example, it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a long press mode at timing tc 12 a when the processing by the automatic rendering function is being executed. Therefore, at timing tc12a, when the operation on the operation button 410 is detected in the automatic button effect state, the automatic button effect state is canceled (ended). However, in this example of effect, although the operation by the player is detected at the timing tc 12 a, the effect is not accepted. Then, after the specific effect (effect after operation) according to the effect reception is not generated at the timing tc 12 a in this way, a process (predetermined time t 1) which has been executed before the automatic button effect state is released. This process is continued without ending a new specific effect (process to generate an effect after operation) each time e.

  According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect reception period, the operation by the long press at any timing in the state. Even if is started, there will be no change in the rhythm or tempo for the occurrence of a specific effect (effect after operation) triggered by the operation and no delay in the progress of the effect, and it was already in the running state The process (process for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a form that is taken over after the operation mode by the long press is started. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is in a functioning state within the specific effect reception period, the player operates the operation without concern about the adverse effect on the effect in the executing state. It will be possible to do so, which will preferably prompt the player to operate. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), although the player is in the effect status different from the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a) in that the long press operation by the player is started at timing tc 12a. The same aspect will appear as the aspect of the specific effect appearing within the specific effect reception period.

  In this case, the process (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) which has been in the execution state is taken over after the operation mode by the long press is started. It is possible to execute in the form of an automatic double-stroke function that functions when a long press operation is performed within the specific effect reception period, and a function when not operating within the specific effect reception period The same process (a process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed regardless of which of the automatic effect functions to be performed functions. It is nothing but from.

  However, after the start of the long press operation by the player at timing tc12a, it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the operating state every time the predetermined time t1 is digested, and the operating state is in the operating state On the condition that the determination is made, the processing being executed from the time of being in the automatic button effect state (processing to generate a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued It will be. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is not in the operating state at the time when the predetermined time t1 based on the specific effect performed last time is digested, a new specific effect (action after operation) is generated at that time Instead, the process being executed since the automatic button effect state (process for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is ended.

  In the example of the effect using the automatic continuous hitting function shown in FIG. 276 (b) or the automatic effect function shown in FIGS. 277 (a) and (b), the predetermined time t1 is based on the timing when the specific effect is finished. Although the processing (auto continuous hitting function, the first mode as an automatic effect function) to generate a new specific effect (effect after operation) was executed after the lapse, it is replaced by this and the timing when the specific effect starts is taken as a standard As a second processing of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) after a predetermined time t2 has elapsed, an automatic continuous hitting function and a second mode as an automatic effect function may be executed. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than the specific time required from the start to the end of the specific effect, but preferably from the start to the end of the specific effect Set to be shorter than the specific time required for According to such a configuration, when a specific effect is in the process of being executed, a new specific effect is executed in a form of interrupting it, so that only the operation by long press is performed, or Even though no operation is performed, it is possible to feel the feeling as if the single-shot operation is repeatedly performed at high speed, and it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 277 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed before the timing tc12 at which the automatic rendering function functions (within the period of the timings tc11 to tc12), at that time The automatic button effect state is canceled (ended). At this time, the first specific effect is generated according to the operation on the operation button 410, and thereafter, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses if the operation is a long press mode. A process (automatic continuous hitting function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed, and if the operation is a single-shot mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state Every time a new specific effect (post operation effect) will be generated.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, when the effect reception is made when the specific effect is in the process of execution, the specific effect in the process of being executed is interrupted according to the effect reception Although it has been decided to generate a new specific effect, it may be possible to generate a new specific effect according to the effect reception in parallel with this without ending the specific effect in the middle of execution.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, when the previous specific effect generated by the one-shot operation is in the process of being executed and the new one-shot operation is performed and the effect is accepted, When a new specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is generated, while the previous specific effect generated by the automatic effect function (or the automatic double-stroke function) functioning is in the process of being executed Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has been operated from the original position by a single-shot operation or a long press operation, even when it is detected, a new specific effect (effect after operation) is not generated. It is decided to continue the processing (processing to generate a specific effect every time a predetermined time has elapsed). And after this, when the operation state is maintained when the predetermined time based on the last specific effect has passed (in the case of a long press operation), the process that is already in the execution state (the predetermined effect for a predetermined time Since the processing to be generated each time it has been continued is continued, it is possible for the player to end the automatic button effect state while suitably continuing the operation system effect being in the execution state from the automatic button effect state. It becomes possible to shift to a state in which the operation system effect is performed by the operation by the key, and it is expected that the player participation awareness is enhanced by this.

[Setting process according to type of effect pattern depending on automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-described other example) Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is in the execution period of symbol variation, by operation to a predetermined operation means (for example, operation button 410) The setting and cancellation concerning the automatic button presentation state can be made, and by such simplification of the operation, the setting and cancellation concerning the automatic button presentation state can be performed while maintaining the gaze to the progression of the presentation during the symbol change. I am trying to do it.

  However, if the automatic button effect state is set or canceled during the execution period of the symbol variation, the processing load increases due to the setting change not assumed at the start of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is started at the start It is feared that it will adversely affect the determined progress of presentation. In this respect, as the type of “effect pattern to be executed based on the result of the big hit determination”, at least “a first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set”; Since the second effect pattern "that can not set the specific effect reception period where the prompting instruction display appears can not be set" is set, depending on the type of effect pattern, the setting or cancellation concerning the automatic button effect state is not necessarily executed promptly There may be cases where no problem arises. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state, it is in the execution period of the symbol variation. By making the processing mode according to the setting or releasing according to the automatic button effect state different, the increase of the processing load during the execution period of the symbol variation is suppressed.

  FIG. 278 is a “first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction to prompt operation appears can be set” when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of reservations is in three effect conditions. It is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation (cancellation operation) for canceling an automatic button effect state or an operation (setting operation) for setting is performed within an execution period of the symbol variation. . Note that the first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a lost variation.

  As shown in FIG. 278, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of reservations is in three effect states, “a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display for prompting operation appears may be set. It is assumed that symbol variation is started in the effect pattern. Then, although it is in the execution period of the symbol variation, in the state where the automatic button effect state can be released (the state where the release operation is permitted), the effect development as the first effect pattern is made .

  Then, in this example of effect, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at timing td11 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting release of the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Be done.

  Further, in this production example, after the setting of the automatic button production state is canceled in this way, the operation on the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is in the operation state at timing td12 in the specific production reception period shown in the drawing. ) Is assumed to be detected. When the operation for the operation button 410 is detected within the specific effect reception period, the effect reception is performed, and after the operation according to the effect reception is performed, the effect is executed, and the specific effect reception period ends without digesting the remaining time It will be done. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, the effect reception is performed when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, It can not be accepted as the setting operation to the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the effect reception is performed and the post operation operation is executed, and the automatic button effect state is canceled. The operation as an operation is also accepted, and the automatic button effect state is canceled (ended).

  Furthermore, in this example of rendering, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is detected at timing td13 shown in the figure after the specific rendering acceptance period is ended in this way, although symbol variation is in progress. The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) with the operation button 410 in the operating state. It is supposed to be executed when it is detected. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during symbol variation may also be performed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state.

  And in this production example, when the symbol variation is stopped after the setting to the automatic button presentation state is made, there is a pending state after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol variation is stopped The next pattern variation is to be digested (variation start). Then, in the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, the rendering progress is made with the state being set in the automatic button rendering state unless the release operation by the player is performed.

  As described above, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 278, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is being executed, the specific effect within the period in which the first effect pattern is executed When the operation button 410 is operated when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be performed while the first effect pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that symbol variation has been started with "the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set" while being controlled to the automatic button effect state Also, by performing the release operation before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is possible for the specific effect reception period to be generated in a state in which the automatic button effect state has been released, and the player himself operates It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when a desired desire arises. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the release operation is received before the specific effect reception period starts, but the release operation is performed after the specific effect reception period is ended. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

  Further, according to the above configuration, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears appears." Is also allowed. Although the effect example shown in FIG. 278 assumes that the setting operation is received after the specific effect reception period ends, the setting operation by the player within a period before the specific effect reception period is started. The setting operation can be accepted even if the operation is performed. Therefore, when symbol variation is started with "the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set" in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect reception period occurs. By performing an operation on the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in a period earlier than that, the specific effect reception period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state This is also possible, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when it is desired to enjoy the rendering after the operation by the automatic rendering function.

  In addition, in order to obtain such effects, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of symbol variation, any effect determination result regarding the determination (lottery) according to the effect contents in the first effect pattern It is desirable to make sure that this is generated for the specific effect reception period even if it is obtained. In addition, the specific effect display can be made to appear in the period of symbol variation, and when the specific effect display appears, the specific effect reception period always occurs before the symbol variation in the execution state is ended. It is desirable to make the presentation progress. According to these configurations, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect reception period occurs by confirming the content of the effect appearing within the execution period of the symbol variation, and until the specific effect reception period occurs. It is possible to select whether to release or set the automatic button effect state.

  At this time, with regard to the specific effect display, it is possible to make a suggestion as to whether or not the effect after operation is likely to be performed in a high expectation mode when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period. If it is performed by any of a plurality of modes, it will be expected to be used for the determination of whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  Furthermore, for the specific effect display, there is at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display, and when the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears It may be permitted to set (or release) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player during the period from when the specific effect reception period occurs to when the second specific effect display appears. If it is not permitted to set (or release) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player during the period from the appearance of the second specific effect display to the occurrence of the specific effect reception period, the specific effect will not occur. It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment from the appearance of the display to the occurrence of the specific effect reception period.

  In FIG. 279, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of reservations is in the three effect states, “the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears can not be set ") Starts the symbol variation, and the processing example when the operation (cancellation operation) or the setting operation (setting operation) for canceling the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation It is a time chart which shows.

  As shown in FIG. 279, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of reservations is in three effect states, “a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display for prompting operation appears can not be set. It is assumed that symbol variation is started in 2 effect patterns. Then, in the example of this effect, as in the case shown in FIG. 278, although there is an execution period of symbol variation, it is in a state where the automatic button effect state can be released (a state where the release operation is permitted) Progress of presentation as the second presentation pattern will be made.

  Then, in this example of effect, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at timing td21 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting release of the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Be done.

  That is, when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is in an execution state, the merit of ending the automatic button effect state seems to be small, but, for example, the effect mode with high expectation of big hit When it appears, normally, when the symbol variation in the on-hold state is digested, there is a high possibility that the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set” appears. At this time, there may be a desire (a desire to end a specific rendering state) to return to the normal rendering mode in which the player can make a progress depending on the player's own operation.

  In this respect, according to the above configuration, during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set is being executed, and in the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is also being performed Also, the automatic button effect state can be ended by the operation of the player. Therefore, when the "first effect pattern for which the specific effect reception period is set" is still in the hold state, it is possible to end the automatic button effect state in advance, whereby "within the first effect pattern" It can be avoided that the automatic button effect state is ended immediately before the specific effect reception period of is set, etc., and the situation that “the operation means (operation button 410) must be performed without passing” occurs.

  Furthermore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is performed at timing td23 shown in the figure after the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the second effect pattern is not being controlled to the automatic button effect state and the specific effect acceptance period is not set, it is within a period being executed. At least the second effect pattern, even if the player has performed an operation (even if the operation button 410 has been operated from the original position and the operation state has been maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds)). During a period in which the player is executing, the setting operation by the player is not accepted (setting to the automatic button effect state is not performed). Note that, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during symbol fluctuation is performed even when it is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state Within the period when the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting operation by the player is not accepted.

  That is, even if “setting from the normal rendering state to the automatic button rendering state” is performed immediately before the specific rendering reception period occurs, it is necessary to perform any operation within the specific rendering reception period. Or, even if the operation has been performed, the effect will be accepted and the effect will be executed after the operation. In view of such a fact, during the period when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is being executed, it is necessary to promptly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed. It is considered that no problem will occur if the setting to the automatic button effect state is made before the specific effect reception period that may occur after the next symbol variation is digested is started.

  In this respect, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 279, the setting operation by the player is performed within the period in which the second effect pattern (variation in loss) in which the specific effect reception period is not set is being executed. Even if the period is over (while symbol variation is being executed), the automatic button effect state is not set, and the symbol variation according to the second effect pattern is terminated and the symbol is stopped. When in the state of symbol stop) (timing td 24 in the figure), setting to the automatic button effect state is made based on the setting operation. Thus, within the period when the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not permitted even if the player performs an operation, and the timing to be set is the symbol Since it was carried over after it was stopped, the processing load is increased by the fact that the setting change concerning the effect state which was not decided at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol occurs (due to the operation by the player) during the execution of the symbol fluctuation. Such can be suitably suppressed.

  And, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation is stopped, the automatic button effect state is set, and in the hold state The next pattern variation that has been there is to be digested (variation start). Then, in the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, the rendering progress is made with the state being set in the automatic button rendering state unless the release operation by the player is performed.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, in the state in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the second effect pattern is being executed, the period during which the second effect pattern is in the execution state Even when the operation button 410 is operated at any timing, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. After that, control to the automatic button rendition state can be executed. In this way, it is possible to preferably suppress the processing load from increasing due to the setting change related to the effect state not being determined at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol during the execution of the symbol fluctuation (by the operation by the player). It will be.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that after the symbol variation of the second effect pattern for which the specific effect reception period is not set is stopped, the next symbol variation in the holding state is started However, when the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is stopped (the missing symbol is stopped), the automatic button is performed when the symbol is stopped (the missing symbol is stopped) even if the next symbol variation is not on hold. The setting to the presentation state will be made.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when the setting operation by the player is performed within a period in which the second effect pattern (loss fluctuation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed, the second effect pattern The setting to the automatic button effect state is performed when the symbol variation is stopped, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, the point is that the automatic button within the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed What is necessary is that the timing to be set is carried over after the symbol is stopped without allowing the setting to the effect state. For example, when in the state of symbol stop (lost symbol stop), or within the period when the next symbol change is being performed, it is desirable that setting to the automatic button effect state be made. That is, at the time when the next symbol change is started, if it is in the effect situation that "it is decided to change the setting according to the effect state in the symbol change", the effect is produced according to the determined schedule. Since it is only necessary to make progress, it is suitably avoided that the processing load is increased due to an unintended state change on the way of execution of the symbol variation.

  In this case, even when the next symbol variation is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the previous one), when it is in the state of symbol stop (lost symbol stop) or the next symbol variation is executed It is desirable that the setting to the automatic button rendering state be made within the period of time. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the second effect pattern, it is determined which effect pattern the next symbol variation is executed in. It is possible to carry over the timing at which the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed after the symbol is stopped without performing the.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is operated in the period during which the second effect pattern is being executed to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the second effect pattern. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be made only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is ended while the next symbol variation is in the hold state, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol variation, but the next symbol variation is performed. When the second effect pattern is ended while the second effect pattern is not on hold, the automatic button effect state can be set when the second effect pattern is in the state of symbol stop (stop symbol stop).

  In addition to "the second effect pattern (the change in lost) in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears can not be set", the specific effect reception period in which the instruction for prompting the operation appears can not be set When the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the third effect pattern, the symbol stop state or the execution period of the big hit game is further prepared. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be performed inside.

[Prohibited period for setting the automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-described other example) Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is in the execution period of symbol variation, by operation to a predetermined operation means (for example, operation button 410) The setting for the automatic button presentation state can be made, and by such simplification of the operation, the setting for the automatic button presentation state can be performed while maintaining the gaze to the presentation progress during the symbol change. ing.

  However, if specific processing related to effects such as effect setting is permitted by the operation of the player during the execution period of the symbol variation including the setting process to such an automatic button effect state, tension is There is a possibility that the entertainment interest may decline due to the lack of stage. Therefore, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, at least when a specific effect reception period has not occurred, the specific process related to effects such as effect setting is performed by the operation by the player. In an acceptable gaming machine, it is desirable that a prohibited period in which the specific process relating to the above-mentioned effect is not permitted be started between the start of symbol variation and the occurrence of a specific effect reception period. That is, in this case, there is a concern that the prohibition period will occur, and the operation means (the operation button 410, etc., etc. may not occur while the prohibition period does not occur even in the state where the specific effect reception period does not occur. It becomes necessary to carry out the operation for), and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the player participation in the game and the effect.

  Hereinafter, although an example of a presentation adopting “setting processing to an automatic button production state” as “specific processing related to presentation” will be described in detail, “specific processing related to presentation” is not limited thereto. The process may be applied as another process, such as a process of changing the effect mode in which the first character is the leading role to another effect mode (effect mode in which the second character is the main field).

  In FIG. 280, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period (specific effective period) in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears appears (specific effective period)” FIG. 281 is a time chart showing an example of processing when an operation for setting to an automatic button effect state is performed within an execution period of fluctuation, and FIG. 281 shows an example of effect when effect is advanced in the third effect pattern FIG. Note that the third effect pattern may be either a hit change or a loss change, and may be the same as the above-described first effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (a), when it is in a rendering situation that is not controlled to the automatic button rendering state, "a specific rendering acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears may be set now. It is assumed that symbol variation is started in "pattern". Then, although it is in the execution period of the symbol variation, in the state where the automatic button effect state can be set (the setting operation is allowed), the effect development as the third effect pattern is made .

  However, in this production example, when symbol variation is performed in “the third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears appears can be set”, timing te11 before the specific effect reception period occurs In FIG. 280), operation acceptance for setting to the automatic button effect state itself or generation of a prohibited period in which setting processing to the automatic button effect state is not permitted is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (b), in this prohibited period, a specific effect (in-prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed. In addition, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 281 (b) (an image during prohibition), an image in which a chain is attached to a padlock is displayed, and a character such as “Auto setting invalid” is displayed as a button lock effect. It is done.

  The prohibited period thus generated is ended when a timing te12 when a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11 comes. However, even if an operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed until the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. ) Is made not to cause any change.

  Then, when the prohibition period is ended at timing te12, the specific effect (in-prohibited image) is not displayed, and the setting process to the automatic button effect state is returned to the permitted state. After that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 281 (e)), at timing te13, a specific effect reception period appears in which an instruction to prompt an operation appears (See FIG. 281 (f)). In the example shown in FIG. 281 (f), although it is set as an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001, an effect reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. It may be set as a period.

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (f), the specific effect reception period is generated in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set, so The above-mentioned automatic rendering function does not function at a specific timing. However, even before the prohibition period is started even if the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears appears can be set” is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 280. It is possible to cause the specific effect reception period to be generated while the automatic button effect state is set by setting the automatic button effect state to the automatic button effect state. In this case, the specific effect effect is generated. The above-mentioned automatic rendering function can be functioned at a specific timing within the reception period.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting for the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is not the timing when the operation button 410 is in the operation state, but the operation button 410 is in the operation state It may be performed when maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds). However, in this case, when the operation button 410 is operated and maintained for 2 seconds within a period of less than 2 seconds before the timing te11 shown in FIG. 280 is reached, after the timing te11 occurs The setting to the automatic button rendering state can be permitted. Therefore, the specific effect (in-prohibited image) is not generated at the timing te11 at which the prohibited period is started as in the example shown in FIG. 280, but is generated delayed at the timing te11. Is desirable.

  FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 are diagrams showing modifications of the prohibition period (here, the prohibition period concerning setting of the automatic button presentation state) according to the “specific processing related to the presentation such as presentation setting”.

  That is, as described above, in the effect example described above with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281, when a prohibited period occurs at timing te11 (see FIG. 280), the first specified time (e.g. 25) after the prohibited period occurs. Even if an operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed until the second is over and the operation is ended, the setting operation can not be accepted, and in addition, the above specific effect (forbidden image) Is intended to prevent any change.

  However, in the following modification described in detail with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283, the prohibited period is “one that requires a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) from occurrence to end”. Is the same, but when a second specified time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specified time elapses after the occurrence of the prohibition period, an operation (operation button by the player for early termination of the prohibition period) This is different from the above-described example of rendering described in detail with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281 in that processing that allows for the operation of 410) can be performed.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (a), when the effect state is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, “a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears may be set now. It is assumed that symbol variation has been started in 3 effect patterns. Then, even in this modification, although there is a period of execution of symbol variation, it is in a state that can be set to an automatic button effect state (a setting operation is permitted), and the effect progresses as the third effect pattern. Will be done.

  In addition, at timing te11 (see FIG. 282) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception for setting to the automatic button effect state itself or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is permitted. In addition to starting the generation of a prohibited period that is not performed, a specific effect (in-prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is also displayed in this prohibited period, as in FIGS. This is the same as the effect example described above with reference to 281.

  However, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 282, a period until a timing te11a, which is a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11, in the prohibition period (a period during which the cancellation is not possible). Then, even if the operation (the operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period, no change occurs in the specific effect (the prohibited image) (see FIG. 283 (c)). Refer to the operation from the timing te11a to the timing te12 (the timing when the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses from the occurrence of the prohibition period) (period in which the cancellation is permitted), the operation by the player When (an operation on the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute processing that can end the prohibition period early.

  More specifically, when the timing te11a comes and the prohibition period can be ended early by the player's operation (operation on the operation button 410), the timing te11a comes first in the effect display device 1600. The special image which has not appeared is displayed in the period up to (period in which it is determined that the cancellation is not possible). In this modification, as shown in FIG. 283 (d), an image NJG indicating the remaining time as the prohibition period is displayed as the special image.

  That is, in the prohibition period according to this modification, such an image NJG appears when the timing te11a comes (see FIG. 283 (d)), a period during which the prohibition period can not be canceled (the period (see FIG. 283 (d)). From timings te11 to te11a), it can be suggested that transition to a period in which the cancellation of the prohibition period is permitted (timings te11a to te12) is allowed, and this indicates the prohibition period in the remaining time is indicated. Can be functioned as an effect on whether to end early.

  Then, when the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed in a period (timing te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the prohibition period is permitted among the prohibition periods, the operation button 410 is in the operation state. The processing to end the prohibition period early is executed based on the information. As a result, after the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not arrived yet.

  Here, in this modification, when the prohibition period is ended early by the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) by the player, also in the effect display device 1600, the effect changes based on the first operation. Processing can be performed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 283 (e), the image in which the chain is attached to the padlock is destroyed, and a character such as "cancellation success" is displayed to cause the effect change. As a result, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

  Then, in the state where the prohibition period is ended early in this way, when the second operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 comes, as shown in FIG. When the second operation is performed (here, the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting processing to the automatic button presentation state can be performed. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, a display (in this case, "automatic button setting in progress") appears in accordance with the effect setting being made.

  After that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 283 (f)), at timing te13, a specific effect reception period appears in which an instruction to prompt an operation appears (See FIG. 283 (g)). In the example shown in FIG. 283 (g), although it is set as the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001, the effect reception in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 It may be set as a period.

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (g), the specific effect reception period is generated while the automatic button effect state is set, so the specific effect reception period is generated. If no operation is performed by the player before the specific timing arrives, the above-described automatic rendering function will function. However, even in the effect example shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (g), the first operation is performed within the period (the timings te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the ineffective period is permitted, and the ineffective period is first performed. In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (f), if the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not performed by performing the second operation in the early ended state and performing the second operation in the early ended state. It goes without saying that the same presentation situation will appear.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 280 to FIG. 283, the specific effect reception period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted” is ended. As soon as the “prohibited period in which the setting processing to the automatic button rendering state is not permitted” is ended (in a manner connected to the prohibited period), the specific rendering acceptance period may be generated. That is, in this case, if a prohibited period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect reception period will occur while the setting opportunity to the automatic button effect state is in the prohibited state. It becomes possible to raise the player participation awareness when the effect reception period is not occurring.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, in the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted”, the effect is accepted within the specific effect acceptance period occurring thereafter. It is also possible to cause one of a plurality of effect modes that differ in the appearance ratio of a relatively high expectation degree as the effect after operation, or the appearance ratio of the big hit symbol due to symbol variation in the execution state.

Also, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283, based on the result of the big hit determination,
-When in the third state in which the effect image of FIG. 283 (e) appears, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, "padlock") in which the proportion (expected degree) in which the big hit symbol appears in the symbol change in the execution state is different Appear in any of a number of different presentation modes, etc.) where the destruction of the image in which the chain is attached is different.
-When in the second state in which the effect image of FIG. 283 (d) appears, when the third state is reached, the "specific third effect aspect (a plurality of third Among the modes, a plurality of second effect modes (for example, “a plurality of effect modes having different colors of the image NJG”, etc.) in which the proportion (expected degree) in which the third effect mode most advantageous to the player appears is different Make one appear,
-When in the first state in which the effect images of FIGS. 283 (b) and (c) appear, when the above-mentioned second state is reached, the "specific second effect mode (plurality among the plurality of second effect modes A plurality of first effect modes (for example, “a plurality of effect modes having different colors of the background image”) in which the ratio (expected degree) in which the second effect mode most advantageous to the player appears among the second effect modes of It is desirable to execute processing such as “appear” or the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible that the degree of expectation can be suggested stepwise by the mutually related renderings while the rendering is developed within the prohibition period and the processing in which the prohibition period is terminated early is executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player participation awareness can be enhanced by promoting the early termination of the prohibition period as well as being able to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the prohibition period. In this sense, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are performed as effects that the movable decorative body can not operate, and only for the third effect mode that directly leads to the early termination of the prohibited period It is desirable to be able to be implemented as an effect aspect which operates a decoration. The predetermined movable decoration is operated when a specific third effect mode appears among the plurality of third effect modes, and the predetermined movable decoration is activated when a third effect mode different from the specific third effect mode appears You may not move the body.

  Further, with regard to the effects illustrated in FIGS. 281 (e) and (f) and FIGS. 283 (f) and (g), the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc. The above-mentioned effect (specific operation as to whether a period in which an operation can be accepted or a period in which an operation on another operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted is generated It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261).

  Further, in the example of the effects shown in FIG. 280 to FIG. 283, it has been described that the specific effect reception period is always generated after the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted” is generated. However, it does not necessarily need to occur for the specific effect reception period, and after generating the "prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted", the symbol variation stops without the generation of the specific effect reception period. You may make it prepare the presentation pattern which can be done.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, in the “prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted”, the effect pattern having a relatively low jackpot expectation (for example, a super reach state) It is desirable that the appearance ratio be higher in the effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern in which the super reach state occurs) in which the jackpot expectation degree is relatively higher than the effect pattern in which the occurrence of the effect does not occur. That is, in this case, although the effect pattern having a relatively high hit probability appears, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state is forcibly lost for a predetermined period. It is possible to encourage the player to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player participation awareness for getting a big hit will be enhanced.

  However, if the setting process to the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period, the decrease in interest of the player desiring the occurrence of the automatic button effect state can not be avoided, as shown in FIGS. As shown, when there has been a certain amount of time, it is possible for the player to enable the early release of the prohibition period, and when it is released, the setting operation by the player to the automatic button presentation state is returned again to the permitted state. It is desirable to

  Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target to be set by the operation by the player may be other operation means such as a touch panel, a sword decorative body 5001, a cross key, etc. besides the operation button 410. In addition, the prohibited period may be ended early by operating an operation target different from the operation target used for setting to the automatic button rendering state, and the setting to the automatic button rendering state may be performed. The prohibited period may be ended early by operating the operation target to be used. However, when the prohibition period is ended early by operating the operation target used in setting to the automatic button effect state, the modes (single press, long press, etc.) at the time of operation should be made different from each other. Is desirable.

  As described above, although FIGS. 280 to 283 show an example of presentation in which “setting processing to an automatic button presentation state” is adopted as “specific processing related to presentation”, this is shown as “specific processing associated with presentation” It is not limited to. However, with regard to “specific processing related to effect”, even if symbol variation is performed in any type as an effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, it is possible to the operating means within the execution period of the symbol variation. It is desirable that the operation can be performed.

[Automatic rendering function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-described other example) Even if the operation is not performed, the process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed may be executable. Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is in the execution period of symbol variation, by operation to a predetermined operation means (for example, operation button 410) The setting for the automatic button presentation state can be made, and by such simplification of the operation, the setting for the automatic button presentation state can be performed while maintaining the gaze to the presentation progress during the symbol change. ing.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the operation means, besides the operation button 410, movable operation provided movably by a predetermined driving force between the original position and the operation position In the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player (in this case, the sword decoration body 5001) is provided by the player within the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Even when the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed can be performed.

  By the way, when generating the effect reception period for such a movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), as shown in FIG. There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to the player so as to move from the first to the operation position and operate the movable operation means in the moved state. In this operation opportunity, instead of the operation of returning from the operation position to the original position, the effect reception may be performed by an operation of moving the operation position to a position different from the original position.

  However, at the time of occurrence of such an effect reception period, there is a possibility that some abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), whereby the movable operation means (here, If the sword decorative body 5001 can not be driven from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) can not be properly provided, and the effect receptionist is There is a concern that it will not be possible to produce an effect after the corresponding operation. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, some abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), whereby the movable operation means (here, Even when the effect reception period as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) occurs while the sword decorative body 5001 can not be driven from the original position to the operation position, the automatic button effect state is controlled. When the game is being performed, processing (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change as when a specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected within the effect reception period can be made executable. .

  According to such a configuration, even if some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) and the state becomes inoperable, the movable effect can be performed by using the automatic rendering function. After the operation using the operation means, it is possible to properly bring out the effect.

  However, when any abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) and it is in a state where it can not operate, the operation itself for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is Since it is in a difficult situation, if an operation on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is requested to perform setting to the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state), the automatic button Setting to the rendering state (specific rendering state) can not be performed, and eventually, rendering after the operation according to the reception of the rendering on the movable operation means (the sword decorative body 5001 in this case) can not occur.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) Even when the effect reception period for any of the above occurs, the same effect change as when the operation is performed on the operation means (here, the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) to which the operation opportunity is given is generated. The processing can be performed (automatic rendering function). And on this, about setting to an automatic button production state (specific production state), it is executable only by operation to operation button 410 among operation button 410 and movable operation means (here, sword ornament 5001). It is supposed to be.

  That is, in this case, the operation is not performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) which may not be able to operate when an abnormality or failure occurs, but only on the general push-type operation button 410. It is possible to generate an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). Therefore, even if abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) during the execution period of the symbol variation, setting to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) by the operation on the operation button 410 By doing this, it is possible to appropriately generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001).

  Incidentally, in order to suitably secure the operability at the time of such an abnormality or failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) provided for the setting operation to the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) It is important that it is provided as an operation means that is basically not driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so as not to be the target of the above-mentioned restoration processing in case of abnormality or failure. It can be said.

  However, even if the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) has an abnormality or failure, as long as the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) maintains the stopped state, the abnormality or failure Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that they are in the state, it can not be expected that the setting to the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) will be performed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) has an abnormality or a failure at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. The restoration processing for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to the normal (original position) is performed. The restoration processing can be executed as the above-described processing contents, and for example, the restoration operation (operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to the original position is A predetermined number of times (for example, three times) is repeatedly executed as the upper limit until the original position is properly returned.

  According to such a configuration, the movable operation can be performed by confirming that the restoration processing is started with respect to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) at the start timing (or the end timing) of the symbol variation. The player can recognize that the means (the sword decorative body 5001 in this case) is in an abnormal / faulty state. Furthermore, as a result of execution of the restoration process, the movable operation means (here, the sword) is confirmed by confirming whether the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is properly returned to the original position. The player has determined whether the restoration process for the decorative body 5001 has succeeded and the state in which the abnormality or failure is occurring has been eliminated or whether the state in which the abnormality or failure is occurring is continuing because the restoration process is unsuccessful. It will be possible to recognize. That is, in this case, when the player recognizes that the restoration processing has failed and the state in which an abnormality or failure is occurring is continued, the operation to the operation button 410 causes an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Setting of the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decorative body 5001) causes an abnormality or a failure in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). It becomes possible to appropriately generate the effect after the operation according to the effect reception.

  However, after confirming that restoration processing for the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decorative body 5001) in a state in which an abnormality or failure has occurred has failed, the setting operation to the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) Even if it has been performed, the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) occurs before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution of the restoration process). If there is a problem of concern that the effect can not be properly generated after the operation according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special effect reception periods in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) can be generated. The maximum time required for the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) (restoration operation (5 Addition time between the time when the operation in seconds is repeated up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 3 times) and the time required for setting operation to the automatic button rendering state (specific rendering state) (2 seconds in this case) It is possible to execute processing to make the presentation progress so that the special presentation acceptance period is not generated only after the lapse.

  According to such a configuration, when symbol variation is started with a rendering pattern that can generate a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable operation Even if the means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) has an abnormality or failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality or failure is occurring before the special effect reception period occurs. Since the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be performed, the effect after operation according to the operation acceptance to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is appropriate Will be able to generate. That is, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect reception period occurs in a state in which an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (the sword decorative body 5001 here), the special effect In the reception period, the same effect as when the operation on the movable operation means is performed is caused to the effect.

  FIG. 284 is a time chart showing an example of such effect processing.

  As shown in FIG. 284, in the example according to this rendering process, when an abnormality or a failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable operation means (here, at the start timing of the symbol variation) In this case, restoration processing for restoring the sword decorative body 5001) to normal is executed for a maximum of 15 seconds. Moreover, 2 seconds are required for setting operation to an automatic button presentation state. In addition, the special effect reception period can be continued for up to 3 seconds, and for the operation after the operation corresponding to the operation reception for the movable operation means (the sword decorative body 5001 here) being accepted. It is supposed to take 10 seconds.

  In view of such time setting values, first, 15 seconds (restoration processing), 2 seconds (setting operation), 3 seconds (special effect reception) as effect patterns (variation patterns) that can generate the special effect reception period. A period longer than "30 seconds" obtained by adding 10 seconds (reproduction after operation) and 10 seconds (representation after operation) is assigned, and "15" (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation) are added. Unless it is something to make progress progress so as to generate a special effect reception period at a timing later than “seconds”, symbol fluctuation (in the state where abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) It is not possible to ensure the above-mentioned effect when the effect pattern that can cause the special effect reception period is started.

  Therefore, in the figure, as the plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination, effect patterns A to E to which different time (pattern fluctuation time of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) is allocated are illustrated In the effect patterns A to C assigned only a time shorter than "30 seconds", which is the above-mentioned addition time, only the effect progress that the special effect reception period can not occur is executed. . On the other hand, in the effect patterns D and E to which a time longer than "30 seconds", which is the above-mentioned addition time, is allocated, the special effect reception period can be generated, but symbol variation is started. By making it that only special effects development period that can not occur special production acceptance period is executed at a timing before “17 seconds (15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) addition time))” To ensure the above-mentioned effect when symbol variation (effect pattern that can generate special effect reception period) is started in the state that abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, sword decoration 5001) I have to.

  In the example according to this effect process, the special effect reception period can be generated for all of the plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than “30 seconds”, which is the above-mentioned addition time, is allocated. The special effect reception period may be generated only in part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than “30 seconds” is assigned.

  However, in fact, if there is a case that the special effect reception period occurs immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation) from the start of symbol variation, restoration processing fails If you do not perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) immediately after recognizing that it has been done, the special effect reception period is generated with the setting changed to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) It can not be realistic. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually takes time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If the above-described time setting values are not designed on the assumption of such time values, it can be said that the above-described effects are not effective.

  In this respect, it is designed to include such time values as well, such as a plurality of operation valid periods (for example, 8) which generate a post-operation effect each time a plurality of operations are received and received. Or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) that is accepted for production when the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given is maintained in the operation state for a predetermined time or more, and generates the effect after operation In the effective period (effect reception period), even if the operation is started late from the occurrence of the effective period, the operation or long press may be performed several times or more appropriately until the effective period ends. It is possible to do over the

  In view of such facts, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation) among the above-mentioned time settings, use a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) It is desirable to That is, in this case, “15 seconds (restoration process)”, “8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)”, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period, A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds" obtained by adding "3 seconds (special effect reception period)" and "10 seconds (action after operation)" is allocated, and "15 seconds Generate special presentation reception period at a timing later than "23 seconds" or "25 seconds" added with (restoration process) and "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)" As described above, the effect is to be developed, and among the effect patterns A to E, only the effect pattern E can be implemented as an effect pattern that satisfies the condition.

  In addition, for multiple operation effective period (for example, 8 seconds) and long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds), it does not necessarily occur among the effect patterns (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period. It may be generated by another effect pattern. In addition, as the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), only one of a plurality of operation valid periods (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) may be generated. In this case, the length of the valid period on the generation side is set to 2 seconds (setting operation) instead. In addition, as pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), if it is possible to generate both multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds), those valid periods It is desirable to set the long side of in place of 2 seconds (setting operation).

  Further, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is effective, it is required to absorb the symbol variation one after another in a shorter time, so in the gaming state in which the time shortening function is effective, each time setting described above It is not always necessary to design such a system. However, in this case, there is a concern that the special effect reception period may occur while the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). Therefore, even during the period when the restoration processing is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the setting operation by the player. It is desirable to make it possible. According to such a configuration, although the restoration processing is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the post-operation effect as the effect using the movable operation means Can be implemented, and efficient processing can be realized in which both restoration processing and post-operation presentation for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) are performed in parallel. Note that this process is not limited to the gaming state in which the time saving function is enabled, but may be applied to a gaming state in which the time saving function is not enabled. In this case, the design according to each time setting described above Will not do.

  Further, in the example according to the rendering process described with reference to FIG. 284, the rendering using the movable operation means may be executed as any of the renderings shown in FIGS. 190 to 261. . When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the “effect using the movable operation means” shown in the figure is realized as an effect that sequentially performs the specific operation-related effect, the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect. The Rukoto.

  In addition, a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is generated only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, even if the operation is not performed, the effect reception with respect to the movable operation means may always be performed within the special effect reception period so that the effect after operation appears. It should be noted that when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not controlled, there is an operation opportunity for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) during symbol fluctuation at least in the normal game state. A special effect reception period to be granted is not generated, but an effect reception period to which an operation opportunity is given is generated with respect to the operation means (here, the operation button 410) which is not a target of the above-mentioned restoration processing in abnormality / fault. Is possible. The effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (here, the operation button 410) which is not the target of the above-mentioned restoration processing in the abnormality / failure is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) It can also occur when When such a configuration is adopted, design may be performed for each time setting described above, but it is possible to use a movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) without performing design for each time setting described above. It becomes possible to ensure the above-mentioned effect when the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period is started in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred.

  Moreover, in the example according to the effect processing, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by setting operation by the player, but control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) The game does not necessarily have to be made by the player's operation. For example, it is controlled based on the result of the big hit judgment, or the setting to the automatic button rendering state itself is not performed, and the automatic rendering function always functions It may be provided as a possible game machine.

[Post-operation presentation that suggests the automatically accepted operation target]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the first reception effect (effect that the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) according to the establishment of the predetermined effect condition is performed Even when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the period, when a predetermined timing within the period when the first reception effect is performed comes, the effect reception is automatically generated, and there is an operation on the operation button 410 The same post-operation effects are to be performed. In addition, an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 in a period in which a second reception effect (a production in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001) according to the establishment of a rendering condition different from the predetermined performance condition is performed. Similarly, when a predetermined timing within the period when the second reception effect is executed comes, the effect reception is automatically generated, and the same post-operation effect as when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. It is supposed to be run. Therefore, even when the operation means on the side of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 to which the operation opportunity is not given is erroneously operated when the reception effect is generated, the operation opportunity is lost during the operation It is suppressed that the situation where it becomes impossible to confirm a post production will occur. The “predetermined effect condition” and the “effect condition different from the predetermined effect condition” may be separately established as a result of the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination.

  However, if there is a case where the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know due to “look away” and the effect is executed after the operation according to the effect reception, the effect after the operation becomes the operation target The player is not involved in any operation means (e.g., the operation button 410). That is, in this case, the player can not recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is the post-operation effect generated due to the operation, and thus the first reception effect and the second reception effect In the case where the degree of expectation is different, it is feared that the game interest may be reduced due to the inability to recognize it.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned different rendering condition is the ratio at which the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied (the ratio at which the first reception rendering is performed) Judgment concerning various effects (representation judgment based on the result of the big hit judgment) is performed so as to be higher than the ratio satisfied (the ratio that the second reception effect is executed), and within the symbol variation based on the result of the judgment It is designed to control the production. As a result, even when the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, it is possible to predict that the possibility that the first reception effect has been executed is relatively high. Become.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment, “image suggesting the type of the operation target (the first image) which appeared during the period when the effect reception is permitted when the effect reception is automatically generated. If it is the reception effect of 1, it corresponds to the button image BTG, and if it is the second reception effect, it corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG), and the above-mentioned automatically generated effect is maintained as it is in the display state. After the operation based on the reception, the effect is started. According to such a configuration, even when the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, the effect after operation is executed while the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably suppress not being able to recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is the post-operation effect generated due to the operation.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) and the display position of the “image suggesting the type of the operation target” may be the same before and after the effect is generated after the operation. It may be different, and the point is that it is represented as a display on the effect display device 1600 at the time when the effect is started after the type of the operation means which has been the operation object is operated. Just do it. In addition, when the effect after operation is generated based on the effect reception generated by the operation by the player, the “image suggesting the type of the operation target” may be hidden when the effect after operation is generated. As in the case where the above-mentioned effect reception is automatically generated, the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" is not displayed but is maintained as the display state, and after-operation effect based on the operation by the player is started You may do so. However, in view of simplification of design and processing load etc., "image suggesting the type of operation target" is not displayed but is maintained as a display state regardless of whether or not the effect reception is automatically generated. Then, it is desirable to start the effect after the operation based on the operation by the player.

  FIG. 285 shows an example of the progression of effect when starting the effect after operation while keeping “the image suggesting the type of the operation object” as the display state without displaying “image suggesting the type of operation object” when the effect reception is automatically generated. It is a time chart which shows. FIGS. 286 and 287 are diagrams showing an example of an effect display that appears on the effect display device 1600 when an effect pattern to be developed in the effect shown in FIG. 285 is executed. The effect example will be described as being in a situation where the effect reception can occur automatically.

  That is, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, a specific effect pattern that can be set as the effect reception period for allowing effect reception (operation) of the periods tf1 to tf3 of the symbol variation execution period. Is started based on the result of the big hit determination, as shown in FIG. 286 (a), in the effect display device 1600, first, variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed.

  In this specific effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), it is expected that the effect reception (operation) will be permitted soon before the arrival of the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) in the execution period of the symbol variation. As the suggested precursory effects, the specific operation related effects (which may be the specific operation related effects illustrated separately from this) illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246 and the like are performed. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. And the common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, it is concealed to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given . However, when timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) comes after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation. It is expected that the rendering situation indicating that it is in the state appears, or that the rendering situation indicating that the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state appears as the second rendering result having a relatively high degree of expectation. It becomes to be indicated which of the low degree operation button 410 and the relatively high expectation sword decoration 5001 the operation opportunity is given.

  FIG. 286 (c) shows the result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b), and as a result, the operation as the first effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation at timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) A presentation situation indicating that the button 410 should be operated appears, and a first reception presentation where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started (on the basis of the result of the jackpot determination) The first rendering condition (rendering pattern in which the rendering result shown in FIG. 286 (d) appears later) or the second rendering condition (rendering result shown in FIG. 286 (e) (displayed later) The presentation situation when the pattern is satisfied is shown.

  In this rendering situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bird's-eye image looking over the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area, and the user is prompted to operate the operation button 410 An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  However, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within a period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set to allow acceptance of effects, and a predetermined timing within the effective period (here In the above, it is assumed that the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated at timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

  That is, in this case, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation of the operation button 410 in the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set to allow the effect It becomes. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) does not operate, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600) 286 (d)) or “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 286 (e) where intense heat !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (a cast object) operates) ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  However, even if the effect after operation is executed in any of the modes, the overhead image (button image BTG) with the operation button 410 turned on is not hidden and is maintained, and the effect after operation is started. Even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, the effect after the operation is performed according to the “effect reception for the operation button 410” (relatively high expectation Can be recognized as being on the lower side after the operation).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 285, the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated for a period in which the effect reception is permitted, and is terminated early at timing tf2 when the effect reception is automatically generated. It will be. Then, after the acceptance of the effect is not permitted, the effect is started after the operation with the overhead image (button image BTG) in which the operation button 410 is turned over being displayed, but the operation button 410 is turned over. The bird's-eye view image (button image BTG) is not displayed before timing tf5 at which the effect after the operation is ended comes.

  According to such a configuration, a bird's-eye view image is displayed over the operation means (here, the operation button 410) which has been set as the operation target within the period from the start of the effect after operation to the end thereof. A period (timing tf2 to tf4) and a period (timing tf4 to tf5) in which the same image is not displayed appear. Therefore, the overhead image is not displayed even when the effect after operation is started with the overhead image displayed over the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that has been the operation target kept in the display state. It will be expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension due to having to confirm the post-operation presentation before being done.

  Moreover, in this example of presentation, it is supposed that the period of timing tf2-tf3 and the period of timing tf3-tf4 are set to the same length. According to such a configuration, when the time obtained by doubling the “remaining time indicated by the bar display” has passed when the effect reception is automatically generated, the operation unit (in this case, the operation button) As it becomes possible to recognize that the bird's-eye view image that is turned over 410) is hidden, it is suppressed that the bird's-eye view image is overlooked (the bird's-eye view image is not displayed during execution of the effect It will be expected to reduce the decline in the game entertainment when played. In this case, also for the bar display, when the effect reception is automatically generated, the display may be continued without hiding the display.

  On the other hand, in this presentation example, in the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related presentation shown in FIG. 286 (b) is performed, it is not the presentation situation shown in FIG. The rendering status shown in 287 (f) (third rendering condition (a rendering pattern in which the rendering result shown in FIG. 287 (g) described later appears in the rendering determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination), or the fourth There are cases where the rendering condition (a rendering situation in the case where a rendering pattern in which a rendering result shown in FIG. 287 (h) described later appears) is satisfied is displayed.

  Also in this effect situation (FIG. 287 (f)), as shown in the figure, a button image BTG (an overhead image looking over the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, An instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, character display such as “press”, arrow display downward, and bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. Under the present circumstances, the point that the operation button 410 made into the provision object of the operation opportunity is in the light emission state is also the same as that of the presentation condition shown to FIG. 286 (c).

  However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), the button image BTG (the overhead image with the operation button 410 being turned over) is displayed in a specific mode (here, a mode in which a flame is worn). The rate at which the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation (relative to the expectation as the effect after the operation) than in the case of the normal mode (here, the mode in which the flame is not shown) that appeared in the rendering situation shown in 286 (c) It has been suggested that the situation where high rendering results (here, the rate at which “super heat !!” appears) is high.

  Also in this example of the effect, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the effect reception is permitted, and the predetermined timing within the effective period (here In the above, it is assumed that the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated at timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

  In this respect, even when the effect reception is automatically generated when the button image BTG is displayed in the specific mode, as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and (h), the button image BTG is in the normal mode. Similar to the above case (FIG. 286 (d), (e)) in which the effect reception is automatically generated when the displayed effect situation is displayed, "the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object does not operate, effect display device Is displayed in the chance display mode 1600 (see FIG. 287 (g)), or “the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is operated, and intense heat !! in the effect display device 1600 is The displayed high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 287 (h)) is executed as an effect (the same change as when effect is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410) after the operation.

  However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and (h), the bird's eye view of the operation button 410 is not hidden even if the effect is performed after operation in any mode. While this is displayed in the specific mode (here, the mode in which the flame is lit), the post-operation effect is started. Thereby, even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, the specific mode with a high degree of expectation from the fact that the effect after the operation is performed according to the “effect reception for the operation button 410”. It is possible to recognize that the button image BTG has been displayed in (here, a mode in which a flame burns).

  That is, in this example, even if the same effect mode (for example, chance !!) appears as an effect after operation, the operation is performed in a specific mode in which a bird's eye view of the operation button 410 is displayed. When the post effect is started (see, for example, FIG. 287 (g)), when the post effect is started while the overhead image with the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode (for example, Since the percentage of big hit symbols appearing is higher than that of FIG. 286 (see FIG. 286 (d)), it is preferable to make the game entertaining by making it possible to recognize such a difference in presentation even after the presentation after operation is started. It will be expected to be maintained.

  Also in this effect example, the timing at which the period for which the effect reception is permitted is ended, the timing at which the overhead image (specific mode) over the operation button 410 is not displayed, and the period from timing tf2 to tf3. The points where timing tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length as shown in FIG. 285 are the same as in the example described above with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to (e). is there.

  On the other hand, in this rendering example, the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation related rendering shown in FIG. 286 (b) is performed is shown in FIG. 286 (c) or 287 (f). In any of the rendering situations shown in FIG. 287 (i), the fifth rendering condition (the rendering result shown in FIG. 287 (j) described later appears in the rendering determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination) There may be a case where the effect pattern when the effect pattern) or the sixth effect condition (effect pattern showing the effect shown in FIG. 287 (k) described later) is satisfied.

  In this rendering situation (FIG. 287 (i)), as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG (a bird's-eye view image looking over the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area And an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 (here, a character display such as “put a sword”, an arrow display to the lower right, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) Is supposed to appear. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 to which the operation opportunity is to be given operates to the operation position, whereby the operation to the original position by the player is permitted.

  And also in this example of production, the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) operated as an operation target within a period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so as to allow acceptance of the production It is assumed that the automatic rendering function for the sword decorative body 5001 is activated at a predetermined timing (here, timing tf2 (see FIG. 285)) within the effective period.

  In this respect, even when the effect reception is automatically generated when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the effect state in which the button image BTG is displayed as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and (k). As in the above case (Fig. 286 (d), (e) or 287 (g), (h)) in which the effect reception is automatically generated when the Is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 287 (j)), or “specific decoration member SDY (crestling object) operates, and the effect display device 1600 Is displayed as a high expectation mode effect (refer to FIG. 287 (k)) is executed as an effect (the same change as when effect is accepted by an operation on the sword decorative body 5001). It has become.

  However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and (k), the sword decorative image SYG in which the sword decorative body 5001 is overlooked is not displayed even if the effect is performed after operation in any mode. It is made to start the production after operation with the state displayed without turning it on. Thereby, even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, it can be recognized that the effect after the operation is performed according to the “effect reception for the sword decorative body 5001”. Become.

  That is, in this example, even if the same effect mode (for example, chance !!) appears as the effect after the operation, the operation is performed while the sword decoration image SYG in which the sword decoration 5001 is turned is displayed. When the after effect is started (see, for example, FIG. 287 (j)), when the after operation is started while the overhead image with the operation button 410 being displayed is displayed in the normal mode or the specific mode As the percentage of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than that of (see, for example, FIG. 286 (d) or 287 (g)), it is expected to maintain game interest favorably. .

  Also in this production example, the timing when the period for which the rendering acceptance is permitted is ended, the timing when the bird's-eye view image (sword decoration image SYG) looking over the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed, or the timings tf2 to tf3 The point that the period of and the period of the timings tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length is as shown in FIG. 285, and in the case of the example described above with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to (e). Is the same as

  According to the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, since the effect after operation is generated in a state where the operation object suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different big hit expectation degrees, the operation object suggestion It is possible to simultaneously check both the mode of the image and the mode of the post-operation effect, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, the effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) appears, the effect shown in FIG. The same effect contents are made to appear as an effect after operation when the effect situation shown in appears. However, instead of this, the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c) and the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f) (in the situation where the reception effect is generated where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) The same post-operation effect is generated in the above, but (in the situation where the reception effect is given to the sword decoration 5001 where the operation opportunity is given) is different from this in the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (i) A post effect (for example, post operation effect shown in FIG. 269) may be generated. Further, after the production situation shown in FIG. 286 (c), the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), and the production situation shown in FIG. You may make it appear. In addition, when these other examples are adopted, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) may not necessarily be performed.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, after performing the “prediction effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) (here, specific operation-related effects)” which suggests that the reception effect will occur soon, “Reception effect where operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c), FIG. 287 (f))” and “operation opportunity given to the sword decorative body 5001 In the reception effect (FIG. 287 (i)), one of the reception effect (effect status shown in FIG. 287 (i)) is generated. It is not necessary to generate "the presentation situation shown)". That is, in this case, after the precursor effect indicating that the reception effect is to be generated is executed soon, at timing tf1, it is shown in FIG. 286 (c) as the reception effect in which the operation button is given an operation opportunity. Although either of the effect situation to be displayed and the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f) will be displayed, even in such a case, the operation button 410 is started when the effect is started after the operation That the degree of expectation for the post-operation effect will be different depending on whether the insulted bird's eye view image is displayed in the normal mode or in the specific mode with high expectation (here, the mode in which the flame is covered) Therefore, it is expected that the game interest will be maintained properly.

  In this case, it is desirable that the contents of the prognostic effect in this case be executed as those that can not appear in the prognostic effect when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. Further, a common precursor is in the case where the bird's-eye view image with the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode, and the case where the bird's-eye view image is displayed in the specific mode with high expectation (here, the mode in which the flame is covered). It is desirable to perform rendering so that a bird's-eye view image with the control button 410 being displayed appears in a normal mode or a specific mode as a result.

  Moreover, about the bird's-eye view image which looked up the operation button 410, it shall be displayed in either of three or more modes including a normal mode and a specific mode, and an expectation differs depending on which of those modes is displayed. You may do so. However, in the above presentation example, even if a bird's-eye view image with the operation button 410 turned over is displayed in any of these modes at timing tf1, post-operation presentation is started while the mode of the bird's-eye view image is displayed. It will be.

  In addition, after a specific precursor effect is made to appear, "the stage of the stage shown in Fig. 286 (c)", "the stage of the stage shown in Fig. 287 (f)", and "the stage of the stage shown in Fig. 286 (c) Similarly to the above, in the effect display device 1600, a bird's-eye view image in which the operation button 410 is turned over is displayed in a normal mode, but when there is no operation by the player, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not activated. One of the effect situations (not shown) may not appear. That is, in this case, when a reception effect is generated in which a bird's-eye view image in which the operation button 410 is turned over is displayed in a normal mode, it is grasped whether the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated when there is no operation by the player. Since it can be made difficult, it is expected that the sense of tension when the reception effect is generated (tension about whether the player should operate it and start the effect after the operation) should be suitably maintained. Become so. On the other hand, when the bird's-eye view image in which the operation button 410 is swung is displayed in a specific mode, even if the player does not perform the operation, the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated and the post-operation rendering always occurs As a result, combined with the suggestion that the degree of expectation is high, it becomes possible to preferably improve the game entertainment.

  It should be noted that, based on the result of the big hit determination, not "the presentation situation shown in FIG. 286 (c)" but "the presentation situation shown in FIG. 286 (c)" An overhead image is displayed in the normal mode, but when the player does not perform an operation, the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is not activated, and a rendering situation (not shown) is generated after the operation. If no operation is performed on the operation button 410 before the effect reception period ends, the effect after operation is not performed. However, also in this case, when the effect reception period is over and the effect state in which the effect reception is not permitted is reached, the overhead image with the operation button 410 being turned over is not displayed but is displayed in the normal mode. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, although a reception effect is generated in which the bird's-eye view image in which the operation button 410 is swiped is displayed in a normal mode, the effect is not executed after the operation is not performed by the player. It becomes possible to recognize that it has become, and when the bird's-eye view image in which the operation button 410 is turned over is displayed in the normal mode in the next reception effect, the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated. In particular, it is expected that the player is urged to operate without excessive expectation.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 to FIG. 287, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, the display mode of the bird's eye image with the operation button 410 turned over or the eyebrow image with the sword decoration 5001 turned is changed. Although it was made to start production after operation in the state where these overhead view images were displayed by the display mode changed, the display mode and display position in the effect reception period are the same as the operation position of the operation button 410 The effect may be started after the operation in a state where an image or a bird's-eye view image looking over the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed.

  The after-operation effect started with the bird's-eye view of the operation button 410 and the bird's-eye view of the sword decorative body 5001 displayed is light emission by the display effect on the effect display device 1600 and the lamp provided on the game board 5 It may be any one of an effect, an effect by sound, and a movable effect by a decorative combination, or may be an appropriate combination of these effects. In addition, although it will be described later, a first after-operation effect that starts with a bird's-eye view of the operation button 410 or a sword image of the sword decoration 5001 displayed, a bird's-eye view of the operation button 410, sword decoration A second post-operation effect starting after timing tf4 at which the bird's-eye view image looking over the body 5001 is not displayed may be respectively executed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 to FIG. 287, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, the operation is performed while the bird's-eye image with the operation button 410 turned over or the eyelid image with the sword decoration 5001 turned over It was made to start the post production. However, in terms of processing load, even when the effect reception is generated by the operation by the player, the after-operation effect is started with the bird's-eye image with the operation button 410 turned over and the bird's-eye view with the sword decorative body 5001 displayed. It is desirable to make the post-operation effect be performed in the same process as in the above case.

  Also in the above-described effect example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, as in the case of the effect example described later, a bird's-eye view image with the operation button 410 turned over and a bird's-eye view image with a sword decoration 5001 turned over are displayed dynamically. After the operation, the effect may be started while maintaining the dynamic display.

  In addition, even when the reception effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is generated indicating that the reception effect is about to occur, and then the reception effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is executed, the operation button 410 is also operated. The effect may be started after the operation with the overhead image displayed.

[Effect after operation to make it difficult to recognize the timing of automatic reception]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post effect. However, if it is desired that the player perform an operation after the operation by the player's own operation while such an "automatic effect function" can be activated, a predetermined period of time during which the reception effect is performed will be made. It is necessary to operate before the received timing (the timing at which the automatic rendering function is activated) comes, and if the player is trying to operate it, the effective period as the reception rendering is that much It will be substantially shortened. Therefore, in the situation where such receptionist production is being executed, it is not possible to recognize what kind of operation should be performed, or an image that suggests an elapsed time (remaining time) after the effective period has occurred. If there is something to be confirmed one by one, when the player himself tries to operate, the effect reception may be automatically generated, and there is a concern that the amusement of the game may be lowered.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of bird's-eye view images (for example, the operation button 410) are bird's-eye images of a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) targeted for effect reception. "How to move a specific operation means" by displaying as a moving image by sequentially displaying a plurality of bird's-eye-view images drawn so that the operation state (operation state) as each is different The method of operation is to be suggested. In addition, when displaying a bird's-eye view image as a moving image in this manner, a predetermined bird's-eye view image determined in advance among a plurality of bird's-eye view images is displayed as an image to be displayed first. By sequentially displaying the bird's-eye view images, it is only necessary to see how much the display as the moving image has progressed, and an elapsed time since the specific reception effect (effective period) occurs It is also possible to recognize.

  That is, in this case, only by looking at the bird's-eye view image looking over the specific operation means to be subjected to the effect reception, the operation method about "how to move the specific operation means" and the specific reception effect are executed It becomes possible to simultaneously recognize the elapsed time since the period (the effective period) has occurred. As a result, it becomes possible to shorten the time required to grasp the operation method and the remaining time after the player thinks that he or she wants to operate, and as a result, it can be operated before automatic reception of the effect reception occurs. It will be expected to prompt.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process for automatically generating the effect reception can be performed at a timing after half of the specified reception effect is executed. Also by this, it is made to urge to be able to operate before the production reception is automatically generated.

  However, even if these processes are performed, it can not be completely avoided that the situation in which the effect reception is automatically generated prior to the player's own operation is generated. Therefore, it can be said that it is more important to take measures to make it difficult to reduce the game interest even if the situation occurs. In the case where the countermeasure is taken, the above-mentioned "prompt to be operated prior to automatic generation of effect reception" may not necessarily be performed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, even if the effect reception is automatically generated, the process of displaying the overhead view image as a moving image is continued without stopping. That is, by continuously displaying the overhead image as the moving image continuously after the effect reception is automatically generated and the effect is started after the operation, a predetermined time after the generation of the effect reception is automatically generated (moving image It is difficult to recognize that the effects are started after the operation while the image is continued), and the player performs the operation while the overhead image as the moving image is continuously displayed. In this case, it is possible to give an impression as if the effect was started by the operation.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the player's operation is performed behind "automatic generation of effect reception", it is as if the effect change occurred due to the operation. In order to give a good impression, the post-operation presentation is performed as a stepwise presentation. As a result, it is possible to give an impression as if the effect change of the second and subsequent stages occurred due to the operation by the player, and the operation opportunity by the player is taken away by "automatic generation of effect reception" It will be expected that it will be difficult to give the impression.

  FIG. 288 shows a plurality of bird's-eye view images (sword decoration image SYG) in which a specific operation means (in this case, sword decoration 5001) to be subjected to effect reception (the sword decoration body 5001) is selected when a specific reception effect is generated. A diagram showing an example of displaying as a moving image by sequentially displaying an image (here, a plurality of bird's-eye view images drawn so that the operation state (operation state) as the sword decorative body 5001 is different) is there.

  Now, assuming that a specific reception effect is executed based on the result of the big hit determination and a period in which the effect reception is permitted occurs, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a specific operation means (here, here) that is the target of the effect reception First, the sword decorative image SYGa (predetermined bird's-eye view image) shown in FIG. 288 (a) is displayed as the “first displayed image” as a bird's-eye view image (sword decorative image SYG) looking over the sword decorative body 5001). At this time, a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted is also displayed in the state of the gauge full.

  Here, the sword decoration image SYGa shown in FIG. 288 (a) is a moving image of “a bird's-eye view image looking over the sword decoration 5001” when a reception effect is given to the sword decoration 5001 where an operation opportunity is given. When displaying as an image, it is always selected as the "image to be displayed first." That is, the state in which the bar display of "gauge full" is displayed within the period in which the effect reception is permitted may be regarded as the state in which the sword decoration image SYGa is displayed, and these images correspond to each other. It can be said that it is a thing.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 288 (b) to 288 (f), the bar display indicating the remaining time is depicted as a moving image whose gauge amount is decreased with the passage of time (a plurality of gauge A plurality of bird's-eye view images (in the figure, the sword decoration is displayed so that the motion amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG is represented as a moving image that increases with time). The images SYGb to SYGf) are displayed in a predetermined order.

  According to such a configuration, only by looking at the movement of the sword decoration image SYG that appears when a specific reception effect occurs, an operation method as to "how to operate the sword decoration 5001", It is possible to recognize both the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period for which the effect reception is permitted to occur (which can be grasped by the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa) It will be. Therefore, it is expected that it is expected that occurrence of such a timing that the effect reception automatically occurs comes before the player's operation is performed despite the player's own operation being attempted become.

  Here, in the specific reception effect, the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d) of the period during which the effect reception is permitted (the timing after half of the period during which the specific reception effect is executed has elapsed) The production receptionist is automatically generated at. Therefore, when the player tries to operate it, it is required to operate the sword decorative body 5001 until the moving image as the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and developed in the "sword decoration image SYGd". It becomes.

  By the way, if it is decided to execute a specific reception effect so that the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d) even if there is no operation by the player, “Sword decoration image SYGe” and "Sword decoration image SYGf" can be said to be an image that can not be originally displayed regardless of whether or not the player has performed an operation. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d), “sword decoration image SYGe” or “sword decoration image SYGf Is intentionally displayed, which will be described later.

  In FIG. 289 to FIG. 291, although a specific reception effect is generated in which a bird's-eye view image looking over the sword decorative body 5001 is dynamically displayed, the operation by the player is performed until the timing of automatically generating the effect reception comes. It is a figure which shows the example about the rendition which appears when it is not in time. The effect example will be described as being in a situation where the effect reception can occur automatically.

  FIG. 289 (a) shows that the number of reservations is 2 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination Indicates the situation.

  FIG. 289 (b) shows that the specific moving image TDG is based on the fact that a predetermined rendering condition (first rendering condition) is satisfied during execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 289 (a). It shows the presentation status of the display started. In addition, as a "predetermined presentation condition", for example, accumulating a certain value of the score accumulated in the presentation can be mentioned.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect mode that causes the sword decorative body 5001 to generate an operation opportunity is set as the execution waiting state (up to three times ) It is possible to execute a process to make it stand by. In this respect, in FIG. 289 (b), in the effect display device 1600, the display of “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” is started within a frame obtained by shaping the first coin and “sword stock”. By performing a display to change the count value from “0” to “1”, “the effect mode that causes the sword decorative body 5001 to generate an operation opportunity” is in the effect state that is newly put into the execution standby state Is supposed to be suggested.

  Here, with regard to the specific moving image TDG according to this effect example, the moving images are displayed by sequentially displaying the respective images shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to (e) within the frame in which the coin is formed. It has become. Then, after “the image shown in FIG. 255 (b)” is displayed and the images shown in “FIG. 255 (e)” are sequentially displayed, a series of these displays (FIG. 255 (b) e) is repeated by loop processing.

  In FIG. 289 (c), after the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” shown in FIG. 289 (b) is started to be displayed, the predetermined rendering condition (first rendering condition) is satisfied again Based on the fact that a new "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)", which is different from the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" which has already been started to be displayed, has been started to be displayed Is shown.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, “effect mode for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to generate an operation opportunity” is set as the execution waiting state (maximum It is possible to execute processing for waiting for up to three times. In this respect, in FIG. 289 (c), the second coin in the effect display device 1600 in which “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” is displayed within the frame where the first coin is formed. The display of “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” is started anew and display of changing the count value of “sword stock” from “1” to “2” is performed even within the frame that It has been suggested that the “presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001” for two times is in the stage of the production waiting state.

  Here, in this effect example, in the case where “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” is newly started to be displayed within the frame in which the second coin is formed, the frame in which the first coin is formed A process is performed to synchronously display with "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" which is already being displayed inside. That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the timer value of the predetermined timer related to the specific moving image TDG is updated at predetermined time intervals, and when the specific moving image TDG is newly displayed, the timer value is updated. The image according to the timer value (one of the images shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to (e)) is selectively displayed as the “image to be displayed first” with reference to FIG.

  For example, assuming that the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated every predetermined time within the range of “1” to “4”, if the timer value referred to above is “1”, FIG. When the timer value referred to above is “2”, the image shown in FIG. 255 (c) is displayed first. When the timer value referred to above is “3”, the image shown in FIG. 255 (d) is selectively displayed as the “image to be displayed first”, and If the timer value referred to is “4”, the image shown in FIG. 255 (e) is selectively displayed as the “image to be displayed first”. Then, after the new display of the specific moving image TDG is started in this way, whenever the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated, an image corresponding to the updated timer value is newly set as the “specific moving image TDG”. Display and make the previously displayed image invisible. By performing such processing on the specific moving image TDGa in the first coin and the specific moving image TDLb in the second coin, the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image are obtained. TDGb will be displayed as moving images synchronized with each other regardless of their display start timing (FIG. 289 (c), the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are both shown in FIG. 255 (d). Displayed as an image shown). The method for synchronously displaying the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDLb is not limited to this, and other methods may be adopted.

  However, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not display at least one specific moving image TDG for the update processing for each predetermined time with respect to the predetermined timer (for example, the situation shown in FIG. 289 (a)). In addition to the above, it is also carried out in situations where symbol variation has not been carried out, etc.), whereby "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" is formed within the frame in which the first coin is formed. "" Is not selected each time as to which of the images shown in FIG. 255 (b) to (e) is selected as the "image to be displayed first" According to the timing at which the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, “the image to be displayed first” changes. That is, although described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a “moving image as a sword decorative image SYG” in which “an image to be displayed first” is predetermined within a period when a specific reception effect is performed (FIGS. 288 (a) to (f)) and “a moving image as a specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e)) in which“ the image to be displayed first ”is indeterminate Are displayed respectively.

  Thus, after the specific moving image TDGb is newly displayed, as shown in FIG. 289 (d), the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are respectively displayed and developed as moving image display synchronized with each other. .

  Then, while the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDLb are displayed as a moving image display synchronized with one another in this manner and are displayed in the above-mentioned execution waiting state, "a production mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 When the condition (second rendering condition) for executing “2” is satisfied, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is displayed in the first coin as shown in FIG. 289 (e). It is suggested that “rendering mode to generate operation opportunity for sword ornament 5001” is started by performing display that the rendering operation (predetermined movement) such as coin toss appears on “specified moving image TDGa” I am trying to do it. At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs processing to change the "sword stock 2" displayed until that time to "during stock release", and a cointoss to "specific moving image TDGa" for the background image. It is made to produce the presentation change (effect) accompanying the appearance operation (predetermined movement) appearing.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a rendering operation (predetermined movement) such as coin toss appears in the “specific moving image TDGa”, as shown in FIG. 289 (f), the “specific moving image TDGa” is displayed. Is performed without moving it back to its original position, and the “mode of producing an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001” is executed, whereby the player to the specific moving image TDGa It is made to be prompted by the Here, as the effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001, first, displays such as "Sweeping chance" and "I want to wear a sword" are displayed on the effect display device 1600. A process of moving the sword decorative body 5001 to the operation position is performed.

  From this point onward, the specified moving image TDGa that has performed a predetermined movement continues to progress in display from before moving in the moved state. Therefore, even in the moved state, the specific moving image TDGa is displayed and developed as a moving image display synchronized with the specific moving image TDGb displayed in the second coin. In the moved state, the specific moving image TDGa according to this embodiment is displayed in a mode different from that before moving (here, in a state of being slightly rotated sideways). It is suggested that “the presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity” is in a state of being started.

  Then, in this way, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the "effect mode for generating the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001" is started, as shown in FIG. 290 (g), the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 The specific receptionist presentation to which is given is started. In a specific reception effect, a bird's-eye view image looking over the sword decorative body 5001 is dynamically displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 288, whereby a sword decoration image that appears when a specific reception effect is generated. Just look at the movement of SYG, how to operate "How to operate the sword decoration 5001" and the elapsed time from the time when the acceptance of the presentation acceptance is allowed (the sword decoration image SYGa As described above, it is possible to recognize both the starting point, which can be grasped by the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decorative image SYG.

  Therefore, also in this production example, if an effective period corresponding to a specific reception rendering occurs at the timing shown in FIG. After the bar display showing the remaining time in which the user is permitted is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 288 (a), respectively, FIG. 290 (h), (i) (corresponding to The display is progressed in each mode.

  However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the player does not perform the operation within the effective period corresponding to the specific reception effect, and is shown in FIG. 290 (j) (corresponding to FIG. 288 (d)). When the timing comes, the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, and the effect is started after the operation according to the effect reception.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, the bird's-eye view image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as a moving image even when the effect reception is automatically generated within a specific reception effect. It is supposed to continue without interrupting the processing. That is, as shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l), a bird's-eye view image (sword decoration image as a moving image also after the effect reception is automatically generated and the effect is started after the operation By continuing to display SYG) as it is, it is recognized that post-operation rendering has been started for a predetermined period of time (while the moving image is continuing) after automatic reception of the rendering acceptance. If it is difficult for the player to perform an operation by the player while the sword decoration image SYG is continuously displayed ((290 (j) and (291) and (l) in FIG. 291)). By this operation, it is possible to give an impression as if the effect was started after the operation.

  Further, in this rendering example, after the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is at least continued (within the periods shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l)), after the operation The same (common) effect mode (expected degree is the same even in the case of causing any of the first effect result (FIG. 290 (m)) and the second effect result (FIG. 290 (n)) having different degrees of expectation to appear as effects The aspect which is not suggested is made to appear (the stage change of presentation). Here, as shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l), the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the “mode in which the aura member 5040 appears” as the “same effect mode” and An effect equivalent to the aura member is also displayed on the sword decoration image SYG displayed on the display device 1600.

  Then, after the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, “the specific decoration member SDY (chairman's work) operates based on the result of the effect determination performed in the symbol change, and Is displayed in the display device 1600 (see FIG. 291 (m)), or “the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is operated, and intense heat is generated in the effect display device 1600! The “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 291 (n))” in which “!” Is displayed is further executed as an operation effect (a second-stage effect change) after the operation. Further, while the expectation is suggested by the effect after the operation in this manner, drive control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 and the aura member 5040 to the original position.

  As described above, according to the configuration in which the post-operation effect is executed as a stepwise effect, the operation by the player is “automatic generation of effect reception (timing shown in FIG. 290 (j) (FIG. 288 (d)))”. In the case where the dynamic display as the sword decorative image SYG is continued even if it is not in time (in the time shown in FIG. 290 (l) (FIG. 288 (f))) Then, after the operation, the effect (the second stage of the effect change) is performed after the operation in a mode in which the expectation degree is suggested, so that it has an impression as if the effect change occurred due to the operation. It is expected that "automatic generation of effect reception" will make it difficult to give the impression of the player being deprived of the operation opportunity.

  In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, the effective period corresponding to the reception effect in the particular reception effect (FIGS. 290 (g) to (j) and 291 (k) and (l)). The image to be displayed at the time of starting (the image to be displayed first) is a predetermined "moving image as sword decoration image SYG (Fig. 288 (a) to (f))" and the image is undefined In each case, a different “moving image as a specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e))” is displayed. That is, the progress situation in the "moving image as the specific moving image TDG (Fig. 255 (b) to (e))", not the "moving image as the sword decoration image SYG (Fig. 288 (a) to (f))". There is a possibility that the player side may recognize the elapsed time from the start of the specific reception effect when the player side confirms it, but according to the above configuration, the specific reception effect is generated. As a result of erroneous recognition of the elapsed time since the start of the game, a situation occurs in which the operation by the player is not in time for "automatic generation of effect reception (FIG. 290 (j) (timing shown in FIG. 288 (d))". Even in this case, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Incidentally, the specific reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291 is also basically developed in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the rendering situation shown in FIG. 290 (g) appears, and at timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, the rendering situation shown in FIG. 290 (j) appears. It has become. However, at timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, only post-operation effect not indicating the expectation is executed, and at timing tf4 shown in FIG. 285, the moving image continued as the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed. It can be said that this is different from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 in that the effect after operation indicating the degree of expectation is newly started after the arrival of. In addition, in the example of this effect, the above-described other example regarding FIG. 285 may be applied.

  Also in this example of production, as in the case of the example of production shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the effect reception to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period (timing tf2 to tf3 And the time from the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period to the non-display of the moving image (timing tf3 to tf4) may be set as the same length of time desirable.

  In addition, a plurality of modes are prepared as the specific moving image TDG, and a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation are also prepared as a bird's-eye view image (here, a sword decoration image SYG) in which the operation means to be operated is overlooked. Then, when the predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied, it is determined which of a plurality of modes is to be displayed as the specific moving picture TDG, and the specific moving picture TDG is displayed in any of those modes. Depending on whether it is done or not, an aspect with a high degree of expectation may easily appear as the overhead image (here, the sword decoration image SYG).

  In the above presentation example, the second presentation condition is satisfied after two specific moving image TDGs are displayed, and "the presentation mode for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to generate an operation opportunity" is exemplified. However, the second effect condition may be satisfied in a state where only one specific moving image TDG is displayed. In addition, even when the second rendering condition is satisfied (when a predetermined motion appears in the specific moving image TDG), “a rendering mode for causing an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001” is not necessarily required. For example, one of a plurality of effect modes including “effect mode for generating an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001” may be selectively performed. Also, in the above-mentioned effect example, such a specific moving image TDG may not necessarily be displayed, and a specific reception effect is started when a predetermined timing arrives while symbol effect is being performed. You may

  Although "the same bird's-eye view image (here, sword decoration image SYG)" and "the bar display with the same length" are displayed within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, the effect reception is permitted The first reception effect and the second reception effect which are different in the length of the effective period may be performed. That is, in this case, for "bar display", the speed at which the gauge amount decreases is made different according to the length of the effective period, but for "the bird's-eye view image (here, sword decoration image SYG)", Even if any of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being performed, the operation method for “how to operate the operation object (here, the sword decorative body 5001)” Recognize both of the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period for which the effect reception is permitted to occur (which can be grasped by the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa) As it is possible, it is desirable to make the display progress as a moving picture in the same manner. According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed. As long as the image SYG) is confirmed, it is possible to grasp the elapsed time from the acceptance of the effect reception. Then, based on the elapsed time grasped in this way, which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed by confirming whether the remaining gauge amount of the bar display is large or small It will be possible to recognize That is, since the expectation for the effect is usually different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. , It will be expected to maintain the game interest favorably.

  In addition, when preparing the above-mentioned 1st reception effects and 2nd reception effects, it is desirable to set the time until an effect reception is automatically generated after an effective period generate | occur | produces as mutually different time. When the time is set to a different time as described above, the time until the effect reception is automatically generated may be mistaken, and as a result, a situation may occur in which the operation is not in time despite the player's own operation. However, according to the example of the effect of continuing the dynamic display by “the bird's-eye view image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)” or performing the effect in stages after the operation, such a situation may occur. Also, the decrease in the game interest will be suitably suppressed.

  In the above presentation example, when a bird's-eye view image (here, a sword decoration image SYG) looking over the operation means to be operated is displayed as a moving image in a specific reception effect, as shown in FIG. The operation from the position to be displayed (see FIG. 288 (a)) to the position at which the operation is finished (see (FIG. 288 (f)) is adjusted to the length of the effective period as the particular reception effect. We decided to make the display progress. However, one operation from “the position where the operation is started (see FIG. 288 (a))” to “the position where the operation has finished (see (FIG. 288 (f))” It is not necessary for the display to advance, for example, “position where operation starts (see FIG. 288 (a))” and “position where operation has ended (see FIG. 288) over the time until the valid period ends. (F)) may be displayed as a moving image that repeats the reciprocating motion. The point is that the image to be displayed at the start of the effective period corresponding to the reception effect (the image to be displayed first) is predetermined, and the moving image is in a predetermined order and progress rate thereafter as well. If it is something to be developed (sequentially displayed by a plurality of images), an operation method as to "how to operate the operation object (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" and acceptance of effects are permitted. Both the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period (which can be grasped by the movement amount of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa (here, movement amount including the number of times of reciprocation)) are respectively It is possible to recognize.

  In the above-mentioned effect example, the “post-operation effect which is executed in stages” performed based on the effect reception may be in another mode. For example, in a state where a moving image as a bird's-eye view image looking over the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated is continued, "a light emission effect by a lamp provided on the game board 5" 1 Start as an effect after the operation of the stage. And after the moving image as a bird's-eye view image which looks over the operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) to be operated is not displayed, and "the light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5 In the situation where “is performed as the effect after the first stage operation,“ display effect in the effect display device 1600 ”or“ movable effect by the decoration role ”(or at least one of them) in two steps The effect is started after the operation of the eye (in the effect after the second-step operation, an effect target different from the effect target used in the effect after the first-step operation is used). According to such a configuration, "a light emission effect by a lamp provided on the game board 5" means "a display effect on the effect display device 1600" or "a movable effect by a decoration role" (or at least one of them). It is expected that it will function as a prelude effect of the stage effect, so even if it is recognized that this is the effect after the first stage operation, the sense of incongruity (the effect is accepted and the predetermined time has passed Until then, it is possible to provide the post-operation presentation without the post-operation presentation using the presentation display device 1600 and the uncomfortable feeling that the presentation is not performed after the operation using the decorative combination.

  In addition, the same effect target (for example, light emission effect by a lamp provided on the game board 5) is used in the effect after the first stage operation and the effect after the second stage operation, and then the operation object is selected. In a state where a moving image as a bird's-eye view image looking over the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is continued, post-operation rendering (light emission rendering by a lamp) is performed in a form that does not indicate an expectation Thus, after the moving image as the overhead image is not displayed, the post-operation effect (light emission effect by the lamp) may be developed as a mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested.

  A plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as modes of a moving image as a bird's-eye view looking at the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated, and the moving image is displayed in any of these modes Even in this case, the moving image may be continuously displayed even after the effect reception has occurred in any of the modes.

  Even if the bird's-eye view of the operating means (in this case, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated is displayed as a moving image, if the operation for the operating means is not performed within the effective period, effects A special reception effect without any reception may be generated by the establishment of another effect condition different from the effect condition for generating the specific reception effect. That is, in this case, the effect reception is automatically generated by displaying “a moving image by the same bird's-eye view image (here, sword decoration image SYG)” and “a bar display with the same length”. It becomes possible to make it difficult to grasp which of “specific reception effects” and “special reception effects” in which the effect reception is not automatically generated is being performed, and a reception effect with a sense of tension is provided. Will be able to However, with "specific reception effect" where production reception is automatically generated and "special reception effect" where production reception does not occur automatically, it is possible that effect reception appears as different presentation content after operation. It is desirable in order to make it possible to recognize which reception effect was given. In addition, the effect pattern that can generate either "specific reception effect" that the production reception automatically generates, or "special reception effect" that the production reception does not occur automatically, or both of them occur at different timings By preparing a possible effect pattern and performing any one of a plurality of effect patterns including the effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination at the time of pattern change, at a predetermined timing within the pattern change “ A specific reception effect or a special reception effect may appear.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIG. 289 to FIG. 291, a moving image as a bird's-eye image looking over the operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function. While continuing the progress concerning the dynamic display, the post-operation presentation is started, and the post-operation presentation is performed stepwise. However, in terms of processing load, even when the effect reception is generated by the operation by the player, the moving image as a bird's-eye view image looking over the operation means (in this case, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated is It is desirable that the post-operation effect is started while continuing the progress of the target display, and that the post-operation effect is performed in stages so that the post-operation effect is executed in the same process.

[Post-operation effect that suggests the type of the automatically accepted reception effect effect]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post effect. However, in the pachinko machine 1 having such an "automatic effect function", since the effect reception is automatically generated even if the player has forgotten to operate it, the player has an operation opportunity. It is feared that it will be reduced to a mere display effect where only a predetermined moving image flows, as well as the sense of tension at the time of being given disappears.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate the first reception effect and the second reception effect which differ in time from the occurrence of a period during which the effect reception is permitted to the automatic generation of the effect reception. Above, regarding the remaining time image (for example, bar display) and the bird's-eye image (for example, button image BTG) displayed respectively at the effect reception, they are made to be the same image. That is, in this case, although the first reception effect is generated, the user is prompted to be erroneously recognized as the second reception effect being generated. "The effect reception does not occur automatically despite the timing when the effect reception should be generated automatically after the period when the effect reception is permitted occurs. (Or, the timing when the effect reception should be generated automatically still comes. Because the unexpected situation such as “the effect receptionist occurs automatically even though it is in the stage where it is not) comes to occur, the tension feeling until the automatic occurrence of the effect reception can be suitably maintained by this It will be expected.

  However, even if the first reception effect is generated, what kind of effect will be generated if it is misrecognized that the time until the effect reception is automatically generated is different from the second reception effect being generated. It is not possible to understand whether progress has been made, and it is feared that the game entertainment will decline in the opposite direction. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the bar display indicating the remaining time as the effective period is continuously displayed even after the effect reception is automatically generated. That is, in this case, even if it is not possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed when the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted is generated, the effect reception is automatically generated (the operation after operation starts ) By making it possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect was being executed by confirming how much gauge remaining is left as a bar display when performing It becomes possible to start rendering after operation.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the same effect is produced and the same overhead image and the same bar display are displayed even when the effective period occurs, the same. It is possible to execute the progress of the effect which has the case where the effect reception is automatically generated within the effective period and the case where the effect reception is not automatically generated. In such a configuration, even if a omen effect or a reception effect is generated, it becomes impossible to distinguish whether or not the automatic reception is received within the effective period, so that the reception effect can be performed with a sense of tension. become able to.

  FIG. 292 and FIG. 293 are diagrams showing examples of the first reception effect and the second reception effect which differ in time from the occurrence of a period (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted to occur to the automatic occurrence of the effect reception. is there. The effect example will be described as being in a situation where the effect reception can occur automatically.

  292A is in the state where the number of reservations is 3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, and the reach state Shows the production situation that formed the.

  Figure 292 (b), during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in Figure 292 (a) (here in the reach state, but may be in the non-reach state) reception of effects (operation) Indicates a rendering situation in which the prognostic rendition is being suggested, suggesting that it will soon be permitted.

  292 (c) shows the situation in which the first reception effect where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) is performed (the result of the jackpot determination In the effect determination performed on the basis of the first effect condition (effect pattern shown in FIG. 292 (e) described later effect pattern), or the second effect condition (FIG. 292 (f) described effect result The presentation situation) is shown when the presentation pattern to appear is satisfied.

  In this rendering situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bird's-eye image looking over the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area, and the user is prompted to operate the operation button 410 An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  However, in this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the reception of the rendering, and the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period. The case is assumed. FIG. 292 (d) depicts a portion where the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated during the execution period (effective period) of the first reception effect, and the automatic rendering function is activated. Then, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation of the operation button 410 within the effective period set to allow the effect reception will be produced on the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 292 (e)) or “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 292 (f)) in which the intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) operates. ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this respect, in this effect example, even if the effect after operation is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 292 (e) and (f)), “the remaining time as the period for which the effect reception is permitted is indicated. The bar display is made to start the post-operation effect in a state where it is not hidden and maintained. Thus, by confirming how much the remaining amount of the gauge remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the effect can be received after the period for which the effect reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect which are different in time until the automatic generation occurs. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. , It will be expected to maintain the game interest favorably.

  On the other hand, in this production example, after the presentation situation shown in FIG. 292 (a) appears, the presentation situation in which the prophecy effect shown in FIG. 293 (g) appears instead of the prophecy effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) (The third rendering condition (rendering pattern showing the rendering result shown in FIG. 293 (j) described later) or the fourth rendering condition (FIG. 293 (k) described in the rendering determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination) When the effect pattern in which the indicated effect result appears or the fifth effect condition (the effect pattern in the case where the effect condition shown in FIGS. 293 (l) and (m) described later is satisfied) appears There is.

  Then, after the precursor effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 293 (g), as shown in FIG. 293 (h), the second reception effect where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started It will be done.

  However, in this second reception effect, although the time from the occurrence of a period during which effect reception is permitted to the activation of the automatic effect function is shorter than the first reception effect, As shown in combination with 293 (c) and FIG. 293 (h), the button image BTG (the bird's-eye view image with the operation button 410) and the bar display (the gauge length is the same) suggesting the remaining time of the effective period And the same image as in the case of the first reception effect described above.

  That is, in this case, in either of the effect situations when the effect situation shown in FIG. 293 (c) is generated and when the effect situation shown in FIG. 293 (h) is generated, the first receptionist It becomes difficult to recognize which of the effect and the second reception effect is occurring, and it becomes possible to give a tense feeling as to when the effect reception occurs.

  And in this example of production, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that acceptance of the effect is permitted, and the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period. The case is assumed. FIG. 293 (i) depicts a portion where the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated in the execution period (effective period) of the second reception effect, and the effective period occurs. When the automatic rendering function is activated at a timing earlier than the second reception effect, the same change as in the case where the effect reception is made by the operation on the operation button 410 is produced on the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure See “293 (j)” or “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 293 (k) in which intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (crimson object) operates) ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this respect, in this effect example, even if the effect after operation is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 293 (j) and (k)), “the remaining time as the period for which the effect reception is permitted is indicated. The bar display is made to start the post-operation effect in a state where it is not hidden and maintained. Thus, by confirming how much the remaining amount of the gauge remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the effect can be received after the period for which the effect reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect which are different in time until the automatic generation occurs. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. , It will be expected to maintain the game interest favorably.

  However, in this example of the effect, even when the prognostic effect in the mode shown in FIG. 293 (g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 293 (h) are sequentially displayed, FIG. As shown in l), it is possible that the effect situation (fifth effect condition) in which the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being activated if the operation by the player is not performed. ing.

  That is, in this case, a precursor effect (see FIG. 293 (g)) of the same content occurs, and the same bar display (including gauge length, gauge reduction, etc.) also occurs when the effective period occurs. And (D) are respectively displayed, but the effect reception is executed as a second reception effect which is automatically generated within the effective period (see FIGS. 293 (i) to (k)), There is a case where there is a case in which there is a case where the event is executed as a third reception effect that does not occur automatically (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)). In such a configuration, even if the omen effect with which the specific aspect appears or the reception effect with which the specific aspect appears is displayed, it is not possible to distinguish whether or not it is automatically accepted within the effective period, so a sense of tension It will be possible to perform receptionist effects by

  Moreover, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 293 (m), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being activated, the effective period is ended and the effect reception is received. While this is not permitted, "bar display showing the remaining time as a period for which the effect reception is permitted" is maintained without being hidden. Therefore, it is a reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated by confirming that the effect status does not occur after the operation although the gauge remaining amount is “0”. Can be recognized, and it is expected to suppress the decline in the game entertainment. In the drawing shown in FIG. 293 (m), “?” Is made to appear, but it is also possible not to make any effect change.

  Also, in this example of the effect, although the type of precursor effect (see FIGS. 292 (b) and 293 (m)) is different, the same overhead image and the same bar display are displayed respectively when the effect reception is generated. Because the time until the automatic rendering function is activated is different though it is different (see Figure 292 (c) and Figure 293 (h)), when you miss the admonition, it is relatively To be able to provide the effect of whether the automatic rendering function is activated at an early timing, whether the automatic rendering function is activated at a relatively late stage, or the automatic rendering function is not activated at all It becomes possible to have a sense of tension and perform receptionist production. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the prognostic effect has been performed in the mode shown in FIG. 292 (b), it can be recognized in advance that a reception effect is generated in which the automatic rendering function is always enabled. As a result, it will be expected to maintain the gaming interest favorably.

  In this example of presentation, the display mode is made different between the pro-end effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) and the pro-end effect shown in FIG. 293 (g), but these are performed in the same display mode You may That is, in this case, even if both the omen effect and the reception effect are confirmed, the operation opportunity is concealed in a state where it is concealed at which timing the automatic effect function is activated and further the automatic effect function is activated originally It becomes possible to grant.

  Incidentally, each reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293 is also basically developed in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the rendering situation shown in FIG. 292 (c) or FIG. 293 (h) appears, and at timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, FIGS. Or the rendering situation shown in FIGS. 293 (j) and (k). However, in the example shown in FIG. 285, there are cases where the automatic rendering function can not be activated, and the timing tf2 at which the automatic rendering function is activated is delayed according to the established rendering condition (rendering pattern) or It can be said that this is different from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 in that the effect may be delayed or the effect will be started after the operation while the bar display remains. In addition, in the example of this effect, the above-described other example regarding FIG. 285 may be applied. Also in this effect example, after the operation, the effect may be started while leaving the bird's eye view of the operation means in addition to the bar display. Further, in the case where the effect is started after the operation while leaving the bird's-eye view image looking over the operation means, the bird's-eye view image may be continued as a moving image as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289.

  Also in this example of production, as in the case of the example of production shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the effect reception to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period (timing tf2 to tf3 ) And the time from the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period to the time the bar display is not displayed (timing tf3 to tf4) may be set as the same length of time desirable.

  In addition, also in this effect example, when the effect is started after the operation while the bar display is left, a stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

  In addition, the time from the occurrence of the second acceptance effect to the automatic occurrence of the effect acceptance and the bar display not being displayed is from the time from the occurrence of the first acceptance effect to the automatic occurrence of the effect acceptance It is desirable to set as a short time. According to such a configuration, it is made clear that the second reception effect is not automatically generated at a relatively early timing when the bar display is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 292 (d). (In the case of the second reception effect, it should already be hidden), so that it is possible to enjoy the remaining effective period while being aware of the possibility of being the first reception effect.

  In this example, when the reception effect for which the automatic effect function is not activated is regarded as the third reception effect, the effect pattern (FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)) for generating the third reception effect is not necessarily prepared. May be

  The first reception effect and the second reception effect may be sequentially generated within one symbol variation. However, when the above-mentioned second reception effect is executed, which has a relatively short time until the automatic performance function is activated, the first reception effect may occur thereafter until the symbol is stopped, When the above-mentioned first reception effect is executed which has a relatively long time until the automatic effect function is activated, thereafter, the second reception effect can not occur until the symbol is stopped. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who recognizes that the time until the effect is accepted by the execution of the first acceptance effect is relatively long is at a relatively early timing when the second acceptance effect occurs. It is expected that the situation where the operation opportunity is lost due to the automatic generation of the effect receptionist of will be suitably suppressed.

  Also in the above-mentioned example of an effect, a bird's-eye view image in which the operation means is overlooked may be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) having different degrees of expectation. And when the 1st mode with a low degree of expectation is out, the automatic rendering function is not always activated (third reception effect), but when the 2nd mode with a high degree of expectation is out, the automatic rendering function is always activated (A first reception effect or a second reception effect).

  In the above example, the first reception effect (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs and the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs. The third reception effect (see Figs. 293 (l) and (m)) occurs, and when the effect is received, the same post-operation effects (such as the operation of the specified decorative member SDY (chairman)) Is supposed to be done. However, when the first reception effect (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs, and when the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs, the third The presentation after the operation may be different when the presentation reception is made, when the reception presentation (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)) occurs.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 292 and FIG. 293, after operation is performed with the bar display remaining, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function or when the effective period ends without activating the automatic effect function. The effect was made to appear or the effect was not started after the operation was started. However, in terms of processing load, even when the effect reception is generated by the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display remaining, and the post-operation effect is executed in the same process. Is desirable.

[Precursor effects that also function as effects to indicate whether they are automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post effect. However, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with such an "automatic effect means", since the effect reception is automatically generated even if the player has forgotten to operate it, an operation opportunity is given to the player It is feared that the feeling of tension at the time of shooting will not be lost, but it will be reduced to a mere display effect only flowing a predetermined moving image.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, non-automatic reception effects not targeted for the “automatic effect function” and automatic reception effects targeted for the “automatic effect function” can be respectively generated. That is, in this case, since the effect reception does not necessarily occur automatically, it is expected that the sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is suitably maintained.

  However, even though there is a non-automatic acceptance effect that is not targeted by the “automatic effect function”, it may not be operated as a result of erroneous recognition that the effect acceptance is generated without the operation by the player. It will lose the generation opportunity of the effect receptionist, and there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic reception effect is always generated as the reception effect corresponding to the indication effect when the indication effect is executed in the special mode. It is made to be able to control the fall of the game interest by the generation opportunity of presentation reception being lost without being able to understand whether it is activated or understood.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during a period in which the prognostic effect is executed in the special mode, an automatic reception effect in which the receptional effect corresponding to the prognostic effect is an object of the “automatic effect function”. Even if it is possible to recognize that it will be executed, the indication effect is ended, and when the reception effect (automatic reception effect) is actually generated (effective period), the reception effect is “automatic effect It is made difficult to recognize which of the automatic reception effect directed to the function and the non-automatic reception effect not directed to the "automatic effect function". For example, in any of the non-automatic reception effect and the automatic reception effect, a bird's-eye view image in which the same operation means is the operation target and the user looks over the operation means, or a bar display with the same length of gauge amount etc. It will be difficult to recognize which reception effect is occurring.

  According to such a configuration, if the audience effect is overlooked in any mode, after the reception effect is started once, whether or not the "automatic effect function" is activated. It is difficult to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the tension feeling until the automatic reception of the presentation reception is suitably maintained while performing the presentation indicating whether or not the "automatic presentation function" is activated. .

  FIG. 294-FIG. 296 are figures which show the example of presentation in which it is suggested whether the reception presentation in which an "automatic presentation function" is activated generate | occur | produces by the aspect of a prognostic presentation. Here also, although an example of rendering when the automatic rendering function can be activated (automatic rendering mode or a gaming machine in a state in which automatic rendering can always be performed, etc.) will be described, in this rendering example Since the reception effect that is not considered to be activated can also be generated, the display such as "during setting of the auto button" is not performed.

  In FIG. 294 (a), the number of reservations is 3 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, and the reach state Shows the production situation that formed the.

  Figure 294 (b), during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in Figure 294 (a is here reach state, but may be non-reach state) reception of effects (operation) Indicates a rendering situation in which the prognostic rendition is being suggested, suggesting that it will soon be permitted.

  Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 294 (b) is generated when the timing tg1 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives, and the overhead image over the operation button 410 to be operated is It is displayed as an effect image (special mode) moving so as to swirl toward a location appearing later. Then, when the accompaniment effect is executed in such a special mode, an automatic reception effect to be an object of the "automatic effect function" is always generated as a reception effect corresponding to the adjective effect, Thus, it is possible to grasp in advance that the “automatic effect function” is activated in the subsequent reception effects during the period in which the indication effects are performed. In addition, although a display such as "auto button!" Is also displayed in the prelude effect according to this effect example, this may not necessarily be displayed.

  In FIG. 294 (c), the effect situation shown in FIG. 294 (b) and the timing tg2 (see FIG. 296 (a)) comes (a presentation performed based on the result of the big hit determination) Indicates a first determination condition (a presentation pattern in which a presentation result shown in FIG. 294 (e) described later appears) or a second determination condition (a presentation pattern in which a presentation result shown in FIG. 294 (f) described below). It is depicted that the reception effect where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 has just started.

  In this rendering situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bird's-eye image looking over the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area, and the user is prompted to operate the operation button 410 An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  And as described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 294 (c), the effect reception is automatically generated (“automatic effect function” is activated) when a predetermined timing within the effective period comes even without the operation by the player. The same post-operation effect as when the player performs an operation appears. However, although it will be described later, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 294 (c), is there an automatic reception rendering in which the “automatic rendering function” is activated or a non-automatic in which the “automatic rendering function” is not activated? It is difficult to recognize whether reception effects are occurring. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated after the reception effect is started once it is overlooked in which aspect the precursor effect is being executed. Have difficulty. Therefore, it is preferable to maintain a sense of tension until the reception of presentation is automatically generated while performing the presentation (prediction presentation of the special aspect) indicating whether or not the “automatic presentation function” is activated. Will be expected.

  And in this example of production, operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that acceptance of production is permitted, and operation button 410 is performed at a predetermined timing tg3 (refer to FIG. 296) within the effective period. It is assumed that the automatic rendering function for is activated. FIG. 294 (d) depicts a situation where the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at timing tg3, and when the automatic rendering function is activated, the acceptance of the presentation is permitted. The effect is the same as in the case where the effect is accepted by the operation of the operation button 410 within the effective period set to Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 294 (e)) or “High expectation mode effect (see FIG. 294 (f)) in which the intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (簾) is operated. ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this respect, in this example of the effect (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 295), even if the effect after operation is executed in any mode (FIGS. 294 (e) and (f)). , “Bar display showing the remaining time as a period for which the effect reception is permitted” is not hidden and is kept after this, and the post-operation effect is started. That is, although detailed description is omitted, also in this example of the effect (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 295), the effect reception is automatically performed after a period (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated. The first reception effect and the second reception effect with different times until occurrence are prepared, and by confirming the remaining amount of gauge remaining at the time when the effect is started after the operation, It is possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect of which the reception effect is “a period from the occurrence of a period (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted (effective period) to the automatic generation of the effect reception being different) It is supposed to be. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. , It will be expected to maintain the game interest favorably. Also in this production example, the above configuration ("bar display" is not hidden but is maintained in a state of being displayed without being displayed in the item of "post-operation presentation in which the type of the accepted reception presentation is suggested" is suggested. You may make it employ | adopt suitably also about each structure other than making an effect | play after operation).

  In addition, in the example of this effect (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 295), the overhead image display described in the item of “post-operation effect in which the automatically accepted operation object is suggested” is left You may make it employ | adopt the structure of starting presentation after operation as it is. Further, in this case, each configuration other than the above configuration described in the same item (in which the effect is started after the operation with the overhead image display left) may be adopted as appropriate. Further, in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the effect is generated after the operation without leaving the bar display as it is not necessarily employed, and this may be omitted.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 294 (a in the reach state but may be in the non reach state) is being executed, FIG. 294 (b) The presentation situation where the prognostic effect of the specific aspect shown in FIG. 295 (g) appears instead of the prognostic effect of the special aspect shown in (The third judgment condition in the production judgment performed based on the result of the big hit judgment A presentation pattern in which the presentation result shown in 295 (j) appears, or a fourth judgment condition (a presentation pattern in which the presentation result shown in FIG. 295 (k) described later), or a fifth judgment condition (FIG. l) A presentation situation in the case where the presentation pattern shown in the presentation situation shown in (m) is satisfied may appear.

  Here, the precursory effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) is generated when the timing tg1 (see FIGS. 296 (a) and (b)) arrives, and the operation button 410 to be operated is selected. The two bird's-eye view images are displayed as effects (a specific aspect) until they approach and overlap each other, but in the precursor effect, the bird's-eye view image obtained by looking over the operation button 410 to be operated is not necessarily used. It is also good. Then, when the accompaniment effect is executed in such a specific mode, an automatic reception effect targeted for the “automatic effect function” is generated as a reception effect corresponding to the abbrd effect, and in the “automatic effect function”. There is a case where a non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted is generated as a reception effect corresponding to the accompaniment effect, so that during the accompaniment effect operation is performed during this accompaniment effect, the "automatic performance function" It is not possible to grasp in advance whether or not In addition, although a display such as “auto button?” Is also displayed in the prelude effect according to this effect example, this may not necessarily be displayed.

  FIG. 295 (h) shows a rendering situation when the prognostic effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) is performed and the timing tg2 shown in FIG. 296 (a) comes. It is depicted that the receptionist presentation with the opportunity has just started.

  In this rendering situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bird's-eye image looking over the operation button 410) is displayed in the display area, and the user is prompted to operate the operation button 410 An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  And as described above, in the case of the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h), the case where the effect reception is automatically generated within the effective period (the “automatic effect function” is activated) even if there is no operation by the player There is a case where the effect reception is not generated (the "automatic effect function" is not activated) within the effective period if the player does not perform the operation. And although this was also mentioned above, in the production situation shown in FIG. 295 (h), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (the bird's-eye image looking over the operation button 410) and the remaining time for which reception of the presentation is permitted The bar display showing each is only displayed, and it is difficult to distinguish the effect situation shown in FIG. 294 (c). Thereby, while performing the effect (precursor effect of the special aspect) which suggests that the "automatic effect function" is activated, it is preferable to preferably maintain the sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated. It will be expected.

  In this respect, when there is an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated, if timing tg3 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives without the player's operation being performed, the diagram is displayed. As shown in 295 (i), a rendering situation appears in which the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated. After that, when the automatic rendering function is activated, the same change as in the case where the rendering acceptance is made by the operation of the operation button 410 within the effective period set to allow the rendering acceptance is generated for the rendering. It will Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 295 (j)) or “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 295 (k) where intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (crimson object) operates) ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, even if the effect is performed after operation in any of the modes (FIG. 295 (j), (k)), “the remaining time as the period for which the effect reception is permitted is permitted. "Bar display showing" is made to start the post-operation effect in a state in which this is not hidden and maintained. Thus, by confirming how much the remaining amount of the gauge remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the effect can be received after the period for which the effect reception is permitted (effective period) occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect which are different in time until the automatic generation occurs. That is, normally, since the expectation for the effect is often different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the effect after the operation while recognizing the type of the reception effect. , It will be expected to maintain the game interest favorably.

  However, although this was also mentioned above, in this example of presentation, in the case where the prognostic effect in the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 295 (h) are sequentially displayed Even if there is an operation by the player, the effect reception may not be generated within the effective period (the "automatic effect function" is not activated). In this case, when timing tg4 arrives without the player's operation being performed, as shown in FIG. 295 (l) and FIG. 296 (b), the automatic rendering function is not activated and the reception is performed. An effect situation (at the time of selection of an effect pattern according to the establishment of the fifth determination condition) in which the effective period as the effect ends is to appear.

  That is to say, in this case, when the prognostic effect of the specific aspect (see FIG. 295 (g)) is performed, the same overhead image and the same bar display are displayed in the reception effect corresponding to the prognostic effect. No, if the effect reception is automatically generated within the effective period (see FIGS. 295 (i) to (k)) and not automatically occur (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)). Because of this, it is possible to have a sense of tension and perform receptionist production.

  Moreover, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 295 (m), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being activated, the effective period is ended and the effect reception is received. While this is not permitted, "bar display showing the remaining time as a period for which the effect reception is permitted" is maintained without being hidden. Therefore, it is a reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated by confirming that the effect status does not occur after the operation although the gauge remaining amount is “0”. Can be recognized, and it is expected to suppress the decline in the game entertainment. In the drawing shown in FIG. 295 (m), “?” Appears, but it is also possible not to cause any effect change.

  Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the effect reception to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period (FIG. 296 (a) The indicated timings tg3 to tg4) and the time until the bar display is not displayed from the timing when the period originally set as the effect reception period is ended (timing tg4 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)) It is desirable to set as time of the same length.

  In addition, also in this effect example, when the effect is started after the operation while the bar display is left, a stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

  Also, the time when the bar display is left when the automatic rendering function is activated (timing tg3 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)) and the time when the bar display is left when the automatic rendering function is not activated ( It is desirable that the timing tg4 to tg5a) shown in FIG. 296 (b) be the same time.

  The above-mentioned non-automatic reception effects (Fig. 295 (g), (h), (l), (m)) and the above-mentioned automatic reception effects (Fig. 294 (b) to (f)) May occur in the However, when the non-automatic reception effect is performed, the automatic reception effect may be generated after that, but when the automatic reception effect is performed, the non-automatic reception effect may not be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by the automatic reception effect being executed may lose the opportunity for the occurrence of the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that it will be possible to suitably suppress such problems.

  Also in the above-mentioned example of an effect, a bird's-eye view image in which the operation means is overlooked may be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) having different degrees of expectation. And about the 1st mode with a low degree of expectation, although it may be displayed in any of a receptionist effect in which an automatic production function is activated, and a reception effect in which an automatic production function is not activated, about a 2nd mode with a high degree of expectation May be allowed to appear only when a reception effect for which the automatic rendering function is activated is occurring.

  In the above example, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) which occurs after the admonition effect of the special mode and an automatic reception effect (the FIG. 295 (i) which occurs after the aura effect of the specific mode The same post-operation effects (演出 (k)) and non-automatic reception effects (see Fig. 295 (l) and (m)) that occur after prognostic effects in a specific mode are performed when the reception is made. The operation of a specific decorative member SDY (such as a prison object) is performed. However, automatic reception effects (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) that occur through precursor effects in the special mode (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) and automatic reception effects that occur through the precursor effect in the specific mode (FIGS. ) And non-automatic reception effects (see Fig. 295 (l) and (m)) that occur through precursory effects in a specific mode) so that different post-operation effects are performed when the effects are received. You may

  In the above example, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) which occurs after the admonition effect of the special mode and an automatic reception effect (the FIG. 295 (i) which occurs after the aura effect of the specific mode For symbol (k)) and non-automatic reception effects (see Fig. 295 (l) and (m)) that occur through precursory effects in a specific mode, the symbol changes at the same timing tg1 after pattern variation starts Although the effect is started and the reception effect is started at the same timing tg2, the respective start timings may not necessarily be the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed with different effect patterns.

  It is possible to make the presentation time of the special mode shown in FIG. 294 (b) different from that of the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g). For example, with regard to the aura of the special aspect shown in FIG. 294 (b), a relatively long presentation time is used to make it difficult to overlook this, and the aura of the specific aspect shown in FIG. If a relatively short rendering time is used so that it will be easy, the missing will tend to occur only when a bad admonition effect appears for the player, and it will be fun before the reception effect starts. Can be suppressed.

  Although the above-described effect example has been described as the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) which occurs after the admonition effect of the special mode (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) In FIG. 295 (i) to (k)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated through the prognostic effect of the specific mode, the operation button 410 is an operation target You may do so. Furthermore, in the case of an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) which occurs after the admonition effect of the special aspect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)), the reception effect with the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation target is generated. There may be cases where there is a reception effect with an operation target. Needless to say, in the case of generating a reception effect for operating the sword decorative body 5001, the overhead image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

  In the example of the above-mentioned production, a part of a period in which the prognostic effect (special mode, specific mode) is executed and a period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, if at least a part (for example, a part of a spiral effect) of the precursor effect is left only for a predetermined time after the reception effect is started, this may gradually disappear. Even after the effective period starts, it is possible to grasp that the automatic rendering function is activated in the early stages. Note that among the prognostic effects of the special aspect and the prognostic effects of the specific aspect, only the prognostic effects of the special aspect may be left after the reception effect is started.

  In this effect example, when a prognostic effect (FIG. 295 (g)) of a specific mode appears, a non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the “automatic effect function” always occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the adjective effect By doing this, it may be possible to grasp in advance that the “automatic rendering function” is not activated in the subsequent reception rendering during the period in which the precursor rendering is performed. That is, in this case, after the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h) is generated, if the operation by the player is not performed, FIGS. 295 (l) and (m) will sequentially appear, and FIG. 295 (i) ~ (K) will be omitted.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 294 to FIG. 296, after the operation is performed with the bar display remaining, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function or when the effective period ends without activating the automatic effect function. The effect was made to appear or the effect was not started after the operation was started. However, in terms of processing load, even when the effect reception is generated by the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display remaining, and the post-operation effect is executed in the same process. Is desirable.

[Registration effect that also functions as a production that suggests whether it will be accepted automatically]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post effect. However, in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with such an "automatic effect means", since the effect reception is automatically generated even if the player has forgotten to operate it, an operation opportunity is given to the player It is feared that the feeling of tension at the time of shooting will not be lost, but it will be reduced to a mere display effect only flowing a predetermined moving image.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the prognostic effect is executed in a specific mode, a non-automatic reception effect not subject to the "automatic effect function" is generated as the reception effect corresponding to the accomplice effect There are cases where there is a case where an automatic reception effect to be made an object of the "automatic effect function" occurs. That is, in this case, since the effect reception does not necessarily occur automatically, it is expected that the sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is suitably maintained.

  However, even though there is a non-automatic acceptance effect that is not targeted by the “automatic effect function”, it may not be operated as a result of erroneous recognition that the effect acceptance is generated without the operation by the player. It will lose the generation opportunity of the effect receptionist, and there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the prognostic effect is executed in a specific mode, the reception effect corresponding to the probation effect occurs in either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect Although it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is difficult to recognize, within the effective period after the reception effect is started, it is possible to make it possible to display a display that makes it possible to recognize that the reception effect is generated by the automatic reception effect. The loss of the generation opportunity of the effect reception without the automatic effect function being activated or understood can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 297 to 299 are diagrams showing an example of an effect that makes it possible to recognize that the “automatic effect function” is activated only in the reception effect among the pro-event effect and the reception effect. Here also, although an example of rendering when the automatic rendering function can be activated (automatic rendering mode or a gaming machine in a state in which automatic rendering can always be performed, etc.) will be described, in this rendering example Since the reception effect that is not considered to be activated can also be generated, the display such as "during setting of the auto button" is not performed.

  In FIG. 297 (a), the number of reservations is 3 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, and the reach state Shows the production situation that formed the.

  FIG. 297 (b) shows the effect reception (operation) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 297 (a) (here, it may be in the reach state but may be the non-reach state) Indicates a rendering situation in which the prognostic rendition is being suggested, suggesting that it will soon be permitted.

  Here, the prognostic effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) is generated when the timing th1 (see FIG. 299 (a)) arrives, and two eyebrows over the operation button 410 to be operated are The images are displayed as effects (a specific mode) until the images approach and overlap each other. In particular, in this rendering example, the first bird's-eye view image on which a display such as "relief" is suggested to suggest that "automatic rendering function" is enabled, and "automatic rendering function" is enabled or concealed. The second bird's-eye-view image on which the display such as "dodokidoki" is made is displayed as an effect (a specific aspect) until the second bird's eye image approaches and overlaps each other. When the accompaniment effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) appears, as the reception effect corresponding to the accompaniment effect, there is a case where an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated occurs, and the “automatic effect function” Since there are both cases where non-automatic reception effects that are not activated occur, while the indication effects are being performed, either automatic reception effects or non-automatic reception effects are performed after the indication effects are performed. It is difficult to recognize what happens. In this precursor effect, it is not necessary to necessarily display the bird's-eye view of the operation button 410 which is the operation target, and after the precursor effect is performed, which of automatic reception effect and non-automatic reception effect occurs? As long as it is difficult to recognize the

  FIG. 297 (c) shows the first overhead image displayed as “relief” indicating that “automatic rendering function” is enabled as a result of the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) being performed. Among the second bird's-eye images on which the "automatic presentation function" is activated or concealed and the second bird's-eye image on which the display is made "don't care", the first bird's-eye image on which the display such as "relief" is made remains. In the production situation where the second bird's-eye view image on which the display such as “speaking” is made is not displayed (the first determination result (the presentation result shown in FIG. 297 (e) described later in the presentation determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination is An effect pattern that appears is shown, or a second determination result (when an effect pattern that shows the effect result shown in FIG. 297 (f) described later is obtained). Such an effect situation appears when the timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a)) comes, and at the timing th2, the acceptance effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started It will be done.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, a first bird's-eye view image displayed as “reliable” as a button image BTG (a bird's-eye view image obtained by looking at operation button 410) corresponding to operation button 410 is within the display area. And an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appear. It is supposed to be. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  In this respect, when the first bird's-eye view image (reliable) is displayed in the reception effect, “The effect reception is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the effective period comes even without the operation by the player (“ automatic effect function ” It is limited to a situation where "automatic reception effect" in which the same effect appears after the operation as "when the operation is performed" is performed. Therefore, by confirming that the first eyelid image (reliable) is displayed when the reception effect is generated, it is determined that the "automatic effect function" is being executed as an automatic reception effect to be activated. It will be possible to recognize.

  According to such a configuration, while the accompaniment effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed, "the automatic reception effect whose automatic effect function is activated" is the reception effect corresponding to the abbrd effect It is made possible to grasp that the “automatic reception effect for which the automatic rendering function is activated” is being executed when the reception effect is started while concealing what will occur after this. Become so. That is, in this case, after the reception effect is started, the tension feeling is suitably enhanced by concealing whether or not the "automatic effect function" is activated until immediately before the reception effect is started. By making it possible to grasp this, it becomes possible to suppress the loss of the generation opportunity of the effect reception without the ability to understand whether the “automatic effect function” is activated or not.

  And in this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the reception of the rendering, and the predetermined timing th3 (see FIG. 299 (a)) within the effective period. It is assumed that the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is activated. FIG. 297 (d) depicts a situation where the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at timing th3, and the presentation acceptance is permitted when the automatic rendering function is activated. The effect is the same as in the case where the effect is accepted by the operation of the operation button 410 within the effective period set to Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 297 (e)) or “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 297 (f)) where intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) operates. ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this respect, in this example of the effect (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 298), even when the effect after operation is executed in any mode (FIGS. 297 (e) and (f)). The bird's-eye view image (button image BTG) with the operation button 410 hidden is not hidden and is maintained, and after-operation effects are started. Thereby, even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, it is possible to recognize that the effect after the operation is performed in response to the “effect reception for the operation button 410”. Since there is a description such as "reliable", it can also be recognized that "the situation in which the post-operation presentation is automatically generated by the automatic presentation function being activated" is present.

  In this effect example, for a period in which the effect reception is permitted, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated and it is early at the timing th3 when the effect reception is automatically generated. It will be finished. Then, after the acceptance of the effect is not permitted, the effect is started after the operation with the overhead image (button image BTG) in which the operation button 410 is turned over being displayed, but the operation button 410 is turned over. The bird's-eye view image (button image BTG) is not displayed before the timing th6 at which the effect after the operation is ended comes.

  According to such a configuration, a bird's-eye view image is displayed over the operation means (here, the operation button 410) which has been set as the operation target within the period from the start of the effect after operation to the end thereof. A period (timing th3 to th5) and a period (timing th5 to th6) in which the same image is not displayed appear. Therefore, the overhead image is not displayed even when the effect after operation is started with the overhead image displayed over the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that has been the operation target kept in the display state. It will be expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension due to having to confirm the post-operation presentation before being done.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) is performed, the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) is generated instead of the reception effect shown in FIG. 297 (c). There are also cases where it is possible.

  That is, FIG. 298 (g) shows a first display showing "relief" indicating that the "automatic rendering function" is enabled as a result of the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) being performed. Among the images and the second on-the-fly image on which the "automatic rendering function" is activated or concealed, the second on-the-fly image on which the "on-the-fly" display is made is left. , The first 摸 image on which a display such as "reliable" is made is not displayed (the third judgment result (the effect shown in FIG. 298 (i) described later in the effect judgment performed based on the result of the big hit judgment) A presentation pattern in which the result appears, or a fourth judgment result (a presentation pattern in which the presentation result shown in FIG. 298 (j described later) appears, or a fifth judgment result (shown in FIG. 298 (k), (l) described later) Production patters that appear It shows the case) the emission) is obtained. Such an effect situation appears when timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a) or (b)) comes, and at this timing th2, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. Receptionist production will be started.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, a second bird's-eye view image displayed as “fuzzy” as a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a bird's-eye image looking over the operation button 410) is in the display area And an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the effect reception is permitted) appear. It is supposed to be. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  In this respect, when the second bird's-eye view image is displayed within the reception effect, “The effect reception is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the effective period comes even without the operation by the player (“ automatic effect function ” When the player is in a situation where the same effect as the operation performed by the player is performed and the automatic reception effect that the same effect appears after the operation is being performed, the effect reception does not occur without the operation by the player. There is a situation in which there is a situation in which a non-automatic reception effect is not executed after the operation is being performed. Therefore, when the reception effect is generated, it is impossible to recognize whether the "automatic effect function" is activated or not by confirming that the second bird's-eye view image (throbbing) is displayed. It becomes understandable, and this makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

  According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed, and while the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect (see FIG. 298 (g)) is being performed. In either case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the "automatic rendering function" is activated, which makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

  Then, when the acceptance detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as “automatic acceptance effect in which the automatic effect function is activated”, timing th3 (FIG. 299 (FIG. 299 (FIG. 299)). When a) is received, as shown in FIG. 298 (h), a rendering situation appears in which the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated. After that, when the automatic rendering function is activated, the same change as in the case where the rendering acceptance is made by the operation of the operation button 410 within the effective period set to allow the rendering acceptance is generated for the rendering. It will Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed on the symbol change, “a specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) operates, and a low expectation mode effect (chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (figure 298 (i)), or “high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 298 (j) where intense heat !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the specific decoration member SDY (a cast object) operates) ) Is to be executed as a post-operation effect.

  As described above, even in this embodiment, even if the effect is performed after the operation in any of the modes (FIGS. 298 (i) and (j)), the overhead image (button image BTG) obtained by turning over the operation button 410 ) Is not hidden and is maintained so that post-operation effects are started. Thereby, even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, it is possible to recognize that the effect after the operation is performed in response to the “effect reception for the operation button 410”. After the operation as a result of the automatic production reception being generated as a result of being concealed that there is a state such as "the automatic reception production where the automatic production function is activated is generated" because there is a notation such as "dookidoki" Will be able to recognize that they are in a situation where

  On the other hand, when the reception detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as “non-automatic reception effect not activated automatic presentation function”, timing th4 (FIG. 299 (FIG. 299 (FIG. 299)). When b) is received, as shown in FIG. 298 (k) and FIG. 299 (b), the presentation situation in which the effective period as the reception presentation is ended without the automatic presentation function being activated. (When the effect pattern is selected according to the fifth determination result obtained) appears.

  And in this production example, as shown in FIG. 298 (l), even when the effective period as the reception effect is ended without the automatic effect function being activated, the effective period is ended and the effect reception is received. While this is not permitted, this is maintained without hiding “the bird's-eye view of the operation button 410 (button image BTG)”. Therefore, after the operation reception has not been performed automatically as a result of the reception of the effect not being generated while concealing being in the state in which the automatic reception effect is activated in which the automatic effect function is activated is not performed after the operation It becomes possible to recognize what is in the situation. In the drawing shown in FIG. 298 (l), "?" Is made to appear, but it is also possible not to make any effect change.

  Also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of effect reception to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period (FIG. 299 (a) The indicated timing th3 to th4) and the time from the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period to the non-display of the overhead image (timing th4 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)) It is desirable to set as and for the same length of time.

  In addition, the time when the overhead image is left when the automatic rendering function is activated (timing th3 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)) and the time when the overhead image is left when the automatic rendering function is not activated ( It is desirable that the same time as timing th4 to th5a) shown in FIG. 299 (b).

  The above-mentioned non-automatic reception effects (Fig. 298 (g), (k), (l)) and the above-mentioned automatic reception effects (Fig. 297 (b) to (f)) may occur sequentially within one symbol variation. You may do so. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is performed, the automatic reception effect may be generated after that, but when the automatic reception effect is performed, the non-automatic reception effect may not be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by the automatic reception effect being executed may lose the opportunity for the occurrence of the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that it will be possible to suitably suppress such problems.

  Also in the above-mentioned example of an effect, a bird's-eye view image in which the operation means is overlooked may be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) having different degrees of expectation. And about the 1st mode with a low degree of expectation, although it may be displayed in any of a receptionist effect in which an automatic production function is activated, and a reception effect in which an automatic production function is not activated, about a 2nd mode with a high degree of expectation May be allowed to appear only when a reception effect for which the automatic rendering function is activated is occurring.

  In the above presentation example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first overhead image is displayed with a display such as "reliable" and a second overhead image in which a display such as "throbbing" is displayed are displayed. Receptionist (see Fig. 298 (h)) and non-automatic receptionist effect (see Fig. 298 (k)) in which a second bird's-eye view image with a display such as "dookidoki" is displayed. When it is done, the same post-operation effects (such as the operation of a specific decorative member SDY (a cast object)) are performed. However, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first bird's-eye image displaying "relief" is displayed and an automatic reception in which a second bird's-eye image displaying "fluttering" is displayed When the effect is accepted for the effect (see Fig. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see Fig. 298 (k)) in which the second bird's-eye image on which the display such as "dookidoki" is displayed is displayed The effects may be performed after each different operation.

  In the above presentation example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first overhead image is displayed with a display such as "reliable" and a second overhead image in which a display such as "throbbing" is displayed are displayed. Pattern changes for automatic reception effects (see Figure 298 (h)) and non-automatic reception effects (see Figure 298 (k)) in which a second bird's-eye view image is displayed, such as "Dokidoki." Although the indication effect is started at the same timing th1 after the start and the reception effect is started at the same timing th2, these start timings may not necessarily be the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed with different effect patterns.

  Receptionist effect (see Fig. 297 (c)) where the first bird's-eye view image with a display such as "reliable" is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)) Between (h) and (k)), the length of the effective period in the reception effect may be made different. In particular, in the reception effect (see FIGS. 298 (h) and (k)) in which the second bird's-eye image on which the display such as "dookidoki" is displayed is displayed, the first bird's-eye image on which the display of "safety" is displayed By setting the effective time shorter than the reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)), tension in the effective period can be more suitably maintained.

  In addition, an automatic reception effect (see Fig. 298 (h)) in which a second bird's-eye view image displaying "dookidoki" is displayed, and a non-autom The length of the effective period in the reception effect may be different between the reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)). In particular, in a non-automatic reception effect where the "automatic effect function" is not activated (see FIG. 298 (k)), rather than an automatic reception effect where the "automatic effect function" is activated (see FIG. 298 (h)) By setting a short effective time, tension in the effective period can be more suitably maintained.

  Although the above-described effect example has been described as the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the case of an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first bird's-eye view image displaying "safety" is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)) An automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) in which the bird's-eye view is displayed and a non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the second bird's-eye image with a display such as "dookidoki" is displayed In this case, the operation button 410 may be an operation target. Needless to say, in the case of generating a reception effect for operating the sword decorative body 5001, the overhead image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

  In the example of the above-mentioned production, a part of a period in which the prognostic effect (special mode, specific mode) is executed and a period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, at least a part (for example, a predetermined effect etc.) of the aura effect is left entirely or partially overlapping with the overhead image only for a predetermined time after the reception effect is started, and this is gradually If it disappears, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp that the automatic rendering function is activated in the early stage, even after the effective period of the reception effect is started. It should be noted that a reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first eyelid image displaying “safety” is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)) and a reception effect in which the second eyelid image displaying “flickering” is displayed ( In any of the reception effects shown in FIG. 298 (h) and (k)), at least a part (for example, a predetermined effect, etc.) of the aura effect overlaps entirely or partially with the overhead image. It may be left in the form.

  In this effect example, the reception effect in which the second bird's-eye view image on which the display such as "Sudden" is displayed is displayed may be generated only as a non-automatic reception effect not subject to the "automatic effect function". That is, in this case, after the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) is generated, if the operation by the player is not performed, FIGS. 298 (k) and (l) will sequentially appear, and FIG. 298 (h) ~ (J) will be omitted.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 297 to FIG. 299, when the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, or when the effective period is ended without the automatic effect function being activated, after the operation with the overhead image left The effect was made to appear or the effect was not started after the operation was started. However, in terms of processing load, even when the effect reception is generated by the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started with the overhead image remaining, and the post-operation effect is executed in the same process. Is desirable.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIG. 297 to FIG. 299, the first toe image on which the display of "reliable" is made is displayed. Are the same as the prognostic effects corresponding to the reception effects for which is displayed. However, under the condition that a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the first stage image in which the display such as "relief" is made is displayed as a precursor effect corresponding to the reception effect that is normally displayed (FIG. 297 (b) You may make the effect | action content different from (refer reference) appear. For example, if a flame effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is high is added to the accompaniment effect, "the degree of expectation is high" and "the automatic rendering function is enabled" are predetermined. Since it is suggested in advance only when the rendering conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the fun of the game while maintaining tension when the effective period occurs.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIG. 297 to FIG. 299, when the effect reception is generated, or when the effective period is ended without activating the automatic effect function, the user looks at the operation means to be operated The display mode of the image is changed, and the effect is started after the operation (or the effect is not started after the operation) in the state where the overhead image is displayed in the changed display mode. After the operation, the effect may be started (or the effect may not be started after the operation) in the state where the overhead view image is displayed with the display mode and the display position in the period).

  The after-operation effect started with the overhead image displayed over the operation means to be the operation target is a display effect on the effect display device 1600, a light emission effect by a lamp provided on the game board 5, an effect by sound, and It may be any one of the movable effects by the decorative role, or may be an appropriate combination of these effects. In addition, the timing after the first operation effect which is started with the bird's-eye view image displayed over the operation means to be operated and the bird's-eye view image hidden over the operation means to be operated is not displayed th5 A second post-operation effect to be started thereafter may be respectively executed.

  Also in the above-described effect example shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, as in the case of the above-described effect example, a bird's-eye image looking over the operation means to be operated is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display is maintained After the operation, the effect may be started in the state where it is performed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 297 to FIG. 299, when a reception effect is performed by adding a notation such as "reliable" or "dokidoki" to the bird's-eye view image and changing the mode as the bird's-eye view image. We suggested that "automatic presentation function" be activated. However, a special image that is displayed only when the "automatic effect function" is activated may be displayed within a period (effective period) in which the reception effect is performed, and this is necessarily displayed as the overhead image mode You do not have to. In this case, it is desirable not to hide the special image that is displayed separately from the overhead image, and to start rendering after operation while leaving this as it is. Similarly to this, with regard to a notation such as "dodokidoki", after the operation, the effect may be started (or the effect may not be started after the operation) while leaving it separately from the overhead image.

  In the example of the above presentation, by making the display such as "relief" or "fuzzy" different during the period when the reception effect is performed, it is suggested that the automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is activated is generated. I decided to do it. However, instead of this, by changing the mode (light emission mode, operation state (presence or absence of vibration), etc.) of the operation means to be operated, an automatic reception effect is generated in which the “automatic effect function” is activated. You may make a suggestion about what you are doing. Alternatively, during the period when the reception effect is performed, both the display of "relief", "surrounding" and the mode of the operation means to be operated (such as the light emission mode and the operation state (presence or absence of vibration)) are differentiated. In this case, one of the display such as "reliable" or "deep" or the mode of the operation means to be operated (such as the light emission mode or the operating state (presence or absence of vibration)) It is desirable that only the state be continued and the other end the state and the post-operation effect be started in order to shift the gaze to the newly generated post-operation effect.

  In the above example, when an automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is activated occurs, a display such as "relief" is made in a period before the occurrence of the predictive effect in the automatic reception effect A specific display mode may appear to suggest that a reception effect is produced in which the first overhead image is displayed. In this case, it is desirable that the specific display mode be hidden at least before the reception effect is started, such as within a period from when the precursor effect is started to when it is ended.

  In the above presentation example, after a specific image (drowsy) is temporarily displayed which suggests that the “automatic effect function” may not be activated within a period in which the adjective effect is being performed, the specified image (deep throat) is The reception effect may be started in the form of changing to a special image (reliable) which has been hidden until the start. Even with such a configuration, it is not possible to recognize that the "automatic presentation function" is enabled within the period in which the admonition effect is being performed, and the tension when the active period occurs is suitably maintained. Will be able to

[Improvement of performance using the automatic rendering function]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic rendering function for the operation target is activated at a predetermined timing within the effective period in which the effect reception is permitted, and the operation is performed without the player's operation. It is possible to generate a post effect. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a device for enhancing the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be provided by creating such novel rendering using the “automatic presentation function”. I have to.

  FIG. 300 is a diagram for explaining a novel rendering effect using the automatic rendering function. More specifically, the reception effect is generated based on the number of suspension (0 to 3) maintaining the unexecuted state when the symbol variation is newly digested, or the automatic effect function is activated. It is a distribution table of random numbers to be provided for the effect determination of the object. The total number of random numbers is "100", and one of these random numbers is acquired, and the reception effect is generated by referring to which distribution table the acquired random numbers are distributed to. An effect determination as to whether the automatic effect function is to be activated is performed. Also in this case, an example of effect when the automatic effect function can be activated (automatic effect mode or a gaming machine in which automatic effect can always be performed) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 300, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the first effect situation (for example, specifying) Proportion that is "non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic performance function" when the reception effect occurs in the symbol variation (render pattern) that is digested when the situation is less than "2", which is the number) However, when there is a second effect situation (for example, a situation more than the specific number "2") with a large number of reservations (with some degree of continuation of the game), the reception effect is produced within the symbol variation (effect pattern) digested The control according to the effect is performed so that the rate is higher than the ratio of "non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function" when the event occurs.

  In addition, here, in symbol fluctuation (rendering pattern) started when the number of reservations is still small, to relatively increase the ratio of generating “non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function” On the other hand, in the symbol variation (rendering pattern) started when the number of reservations is large, the ratio for generating the “non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function” is relatively lowered. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic reception effect targeted for the “automatic effect function” is also the symbol variation (rendering pattern) started when the number of reservations is small. The occurrence rate is made relatively high, and the occurrence rate is made relatively low in the symbol variation (rendering pattern) started when the number of reservations is large. However, the degree of change in the occurrence rate is considered to be milder (mild) than in the case of non-automatic reception effects that are not targeted by the “automatic effect function”, and this causes the “automatic operation function” to occur when reception effects occur. The proportion of non-automatic reception effects not targeted by the effect function is set to be lower as the number of reservations increases.

  According to such a configuration, when the reception effect is generated, the ratio of the non-automatic reception effect to the non-automatic reception effect is higher when the reception number is generated than when the number of holdings is small. Therefore, when the game has just been started and the number of reservations is small, it is possible to increase the player's participation in the game and to encourage the enthusiasm. In addition, since the percentage of non-automatic reception effects decreases when the game continues to a certain extent and the number of reservations is large, another effect ((I do not get bored with the effect of raising the participation in the game) It will be possible to provide a calm stage effect). As described above, by changing the presentation related to the operation while the game is continued, it is expected to be less likely to be bored and to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, when the player is bored in the above-mentioned other stage performance (the stage performance with calmness) and quits the game, the stage number is reduced, so that the stage for the participation in the game is enhanced. Since it comes to reappear, it is expected that such a change in stage effects will discourage game interruption.

  The important point of the invention according to this example of rendering is to change the rate at which the "automatic rendering function" is activated by increasing or decreasing the number of holdings, thereby changing the rendering of the "automatic rendering function". It is to produce. Therefore, the generation ratio of the reception effect may or may not be different between the symbol variation digested when the number of reservations is small and the symbol variation digested when the number of reservations is large. It can be said that there is a technical feature in how the rate at which the "automatic effect function" is activated changes with respect to the reception effect when the reception effect is generated within the symbol variation.

  For example, among "non-automatic reception effects not targeted for the automatic performance function" and "automatic reception effects targeted for the automatic performance function", only "non-automatic reception effects not targeted for the automatic performance function", The occurrence ratio differs between when the number of reservations is small and when the number of reservations is large, and for "automatic reception effects targeted for the automatic performance function", the number of reservations is small The occurrence rate may be the same between a certain time and when the number of reservations is large. That is, in this case, for "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function", for example, the random number distribution as shown in FIG. 300 remains and the symbol variation started when the number of reservations is small In the pattern), the rate of occurrence is relatively increased, and in the case of pattern variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is large, the rate of occurrence is relatively decreased. However, with regard to automatic reception effects targeted for the “automatic effect function”, the same generation ratio (for example, the value of “automatic reception function” shown in FIG. Regardless of the number, all will be "20" etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is ensured that the same post-operation effect as when there is an operation is performed even without the operation by the player (proportion of occurrence of "automatic reception effect subject to automatic effect function") For itself, this will be uniform regardless of the number of holds. Therefore, even if the generation ratio of "non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function" is changed according to the number of suspension, the player does not depend on the situation of the game for the operation forgotten Security can be provided to create a sense of security.

  In addition, about "non-automatic receptionist production not considered as an object of automatic production function", a plurality of production modes (one with different display contents during reception production, one with different presentation after operation, one with different operation target, etc.) In addition to the case where the non-automatic reception effect is generated only in any one effect mode based on the result of the effect determination at the time of symbol variation, the non-automatic reception effect is sequentially performed over a plurality of times in two or more effect modes. It may be generated. That is, in this case, the generation ratio of “non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function” means a ratio at which at least one of the effect modes is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation.

  In addition, also for “automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic performance function”, a plurality of effect modes (such as those with different display content during reception effect generation, those with different effects after operation, those with different operation targets, etc.) In addition to the case where the automatic reception effect is generated only in any one effect mode based on the result of the effect determination at the time of symbol variation, the automatic reception effect is generated sequentially over a plurality of times in two or more effect modes. There may be cases. That is, in this case, the generation ratio of “automatic reception effect directed to the automatic effect function” means a ratio at which at least one of the effect modes is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation.

  However, when the non-automatic reception effect is performed, the automatic reception effect may be generated after that, but when the automatic reception effect is performed, the non-automatic reception effect may not be generated thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by the automatic reception effect being executed may lose the opportunity for the occurrence of the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that it will be possible to suitably suppress such problems.

  Further, in the above example of rendering, only one of “non-automatic acceptance rendering not targeted for the automatic rendering function” and “automatic acceptance rendering targeted for the automatic rendering function” is performed within a period in which symbol variation is performed Although an example has been described as occurring, "non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic performance function" and "automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic performance function" may be sequentially generated. In this case, in the table shown in FIG. 300, the total number of random numbers obtained by adding the distribution value “without reception effect” and the distribution value “with reception effect” exceeds “100”.

  Further, in the above example of production, the operation means to be operated is at least one of “non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic performance function” and “automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic performance function”. There may be more than one. For example, when an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means and a random number value of "20" assigned to "automatically receive function" when the number of reservations is "0", the second operation means It may be further distributed according to the case where the operation opportunity is given.

  It should be noted that the determination as to whether “non-automatic acceptance effect not targeted for the automatic performance function” is to be generated or the determination as to whether “automatic acceptance effect to be the target of the automatic performance function” is to be generated is made upon symbol variation. It is desirable to be executed as one of the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination.

  As described above, in the above-described example of rendering, when there is a large number of reservations, "non-automatic reception rendering not targeted for the automatic rendering function" is difficult to occur. In this respect, when "non-automatic reception effects" occur despite such a large number of pending numbers, it is more than when "non-automatic reception effects" occur when there are few pending numbers. If the rate at which the "automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic performance function" is further generated is high within the one symbol variation in which the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs, only when the number of reservations is large, It becomes possible to make "non-automatic reception effect production" function as a production that suggests that "automatic reception production effect" occurs (a production effect that is suggested before the accompaniment effect on automatic reception production is performed), Also makes it possible to make the rendition of the automatic rendition function different. In addition, as a method of increasing the rate at which “automatic reception effect” is generated within the symbol variation in which “non-automatic reception effect” is generated, “automatic reception effect” itself is not raised but the generation ratio of “automatic reception effect” itself. It is desirable that the rendering condition for generating the "automatic reception effect" be easily established in response to the production condition for the "non-automatic reception effect" being satisfied.

  In addition, when there is a situation where the number of reservations is the largest (a situation where "non-automatic reception effect production" is the least likely to occur), if "non-automatic reception effect production" occurs, one of the symbol variations in which "non-automatic reception effect production" occurs You may make it generate "automatic receptionist production" by all means. According to such a configuration, "non-automatic reception effect production" can be made to function as a prognostic effect for "automatic reception effect production", and also by this, it is possible to make the effect related to the automatic performance function different. become.

  A bird's-eye view image or a background image that looks over the operation means depending on whether the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs (the effective period) or the automatic reception effect occurs (the effective period) It is desirable to make the display contents different. In this case, of the display images displayed when the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs (the effective period) and when the "automatic reception effect" occurs (the effective period). It is desirable to generate an effect reception and leave an effect reception after operation while leaving this as non-display for at least a different part, and for this, “an operation whose operation object is suggested to be received automatically is indicated It is as having demonstrated by the example of production of "post production." If you want to create an effect reception and make an effect appear after an operation while leaving a different part (such as a bird's-eye view of the operation means) hidden and not displaying it, select “Automatically accepted operation object The configuration, another example, and the like described in the “post-operation effect that is suggested” may be adopted as appropriate.

  About each above-mentioned composition concerning the example of the production concerned (improvement performance improvement using the automatic production function) and its modification, the non-automatic reception production which is not the object of the automatic production function and the automatic reception which is the object of the automatic production function The present invention may be applied to each of the above-described presentation examples in which the presentation and the presentation can be generated.

[Useless use of channels by automatic rendering function]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited (for example, 32 channels), even if a special result is obtained in the jackpot determination according to the winning, the channel to which sound data is to be assigned. In a situation where there is no space (a situation where the number of empty channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the fact that a special result is obtained, and this can not be output (or sounds already in playback state) There is a concern that the game's interest in entertainment may be reduced by

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the symbol variation is started until it is ended. During the period, the process of causing the display effect to progress according to the specific effect pattern in the effect display device 1600 is performed, and the process of assigning and reproducing the sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel is performed. Do. Then, when the display effect in the effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is allocated to the predetermined channel, and is output in the suppression mode or silent state, this state The reception effect for the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) is generated. As a result, when the effect reception is generated, the sound of "BGM playback" maintains the state of being output in the suppression mode or silent state, while the big hit symbol (special display mode in the effect pattern) The special effect sound indicating the expected degree of appearance is output in a non-suppressed mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special rendition may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, at the time of outputting the special effect sound according to the effect reception, the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the predetermined channel, and is output in the suppression mode or silent state of the thing. In this way, it is possible to provide an atmosphere that seems to be easy to use in the channel. Therefore, providing an operation opportunity to cause the player to output the special effect sound in a state where the feeling of uneasiness such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" is removed. This makes it possible to curb the decline in game entertainment.

  Note that data relating to various effect sounds such as a plurality of BGM data is stored in a predetermined storage means, and various effect sounds are reproduced by being read from the storage means and assigned to a channel. Become.

  By the way, when specific BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") according to a specific effect pattern is allocated to a channel and this is to be output in a suppression mode or silent, it is generally allocated to a channel It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound being played (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (the process of changing the volume initial value defined in the sound data to reduce the same) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of effect reception), a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (“ It is possible to give the player an operation opportunity (generate an effective period of effect reception) after setting the sound of “reproduction of BGM” to be output in a suppression mode or silent state.

  However, as well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the effective period of effect reception will be generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. Whether it is random (depending on the player) can not be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to end the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the effective period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM playback" in advance so as to make the specific music come out at an indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when the player performs an operation, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "special BGM reproduction at the time of special effect sound reproduction" and is displayed. It is also conceivable to perform processing to reproduce. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the contents of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped and the pattern is ended, the timing of the pattern stop, etc., it is within the effective period. If the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing or it is determined to be indeterminate (up to the player), the sound of “BGM reproduction” is newly reproduced at the timing of the operation (effect reception). There is a concern that so-called sound shifts may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of symbol stop and the game interest may be reduced. In short, considering that "the remaining time from the occurrence of the effect reception to the end of the symbol variation is also undefined", the length corresponding to the remaining time determined to be indeterminate at the timing when the effect reception occurs. It can be said that it is also difficult to newly assign BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") to a channel.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as sounds of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of super reach production, the sound data at the second half of super reach production, etc.) are specified according to the time series defined by each sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. Perform processing of sequentially assigning to channels. And among a plurality of sound data stored as the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, a specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation When a predetermined channel is assigned according to the time series being played, the predetermined channel is assigned and started from timing before the effective period of effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. It is made to be reproduced while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the

  In this respect, in a partial section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, processing concerning the sound output with a suppression mode or silence as compared to the other sections If the data content that defines that is to be performed is preset (stored as silent data) and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, It is made to become the time-series relation in which the effective period of production reception occurs in the partial section (special period). In addition to this, even if the player performs an operation at any timing within the effective period of the effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial period), the special period from the special period (partial period) The sound of "BGM playback" is a special effect sound according to the reception of presentation across the two sections in the specific sound data in the period (other section) after the (partial section) ends. It is made to reproduce | regenerate in the non-suppression mode in the channel different from the predetermined channel allocated.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of super reach effect, super The volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed only by performing processing of sequentially assigning sound data in the latter half of reach production to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the respective sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. In any case, it becomes possible to create a "suppression mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by the player is accepted in the "suppressed mode or a state (special period) output in silent mode" created in this way, the special process with high immediacy triggered by this is not performed in the special mode. While the effect sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of "BGM reproduction" in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is output in the "suppression mode or silent state" (special period) regardless of the effect reception. Is maintained for a predetermined time. And after this, in the form that special effect sound is being played in, in a form to which it is included, a part section (suppression mode or sound output of silence) of specific sound data (one sound material) is finished. Since the data contents of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) are reproduced, it is possible to secretly restore the sound of "BGM playback" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when an operation by the player is accepted in a state in which the sound of "BGM playback" is output in a suppression mode or silence, an aspect of non-suppression of special effect sound by a process of high immediacy triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of the sound shift between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that while making the reproduction start.

  As described above, with regard to “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern, in a partial section (special period) when viewed in time series, the suppression mode or silent output compared to the other sections The data content (silence data etc.) that prescribes that such processing is to be performed will be set in advance, but the volume from the initial value is set in the "suppression mode or the state of silence output (special period)". The volume may also be reduced by adjustment. According to such a configuration, an adverse effect due to noise or the like from the channel to which BGM data is allocated can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern is being reproduced, in the section (normal section) different from the above-mentioned special section Also, the reception effect for the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 and the like) is generated.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, the reception effect occurs in a situation where there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be assigned (a situation where the number of empty channels is 0). If there is a possibility that the player's operation is accepted for the effect, the effect sound corresponding to the effect reception is output by stopping the output of any effect sound in the reproduction state, or according to the effect reception The directing sound is forced to stop its own output. And, in this case, there is a lack of excitement such as when a big hit is judged, such as “The production sound is forcibly terminated midway, no production sound is reproduced even though the production has been accepted” As a result, even on the player side, a sense of not wanting to generate such a negative accompaniment situation (a sense that it should not be generated by the operation) will work.

  Then, although the reception effect is generated, the operation by the player is not easily performed, and there is a concern that the improvement of the game entertainment can not be performed well. If you try to simply apply the above-mentioned "technique for automatically generating reception effects" against the player's intention of "does not want to generate effect reception", the game interest will be reduced conversely. It can also be done.

  On the other hand, as for the developer side, in the reception effect with confidence or conviction, regardless of the state of use of the channel, “The effect reception is generated by the player's active operation and the effect is given after the operation. It may be assumed that there is a desire to have fun.

  Therefore, as described above, in the above configuration, the special BGM effect sound can be output in a suppression mode or silent mode in a section from the specific BGM data allocation to the channel until the allocation end. There is a normal section different from the special section. Then, in the normal section, "non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic performance function" can be generated as the reception effect, and in the special section, the "automatic reception effect for the automatic performance function" is received. It can be generated as an effect.

  That is, in this case, in the "normal section where the specific BGM effect sound can not be suppressed or silenced and can be output in the normal mode", whether or not to generate the effect reception (by predicting the availability of the channel) Since the choice right is left only to the player, the reception effect is automatically generated contrary to the player's intention such as "Because there may not be enough free channels, so that the effect reception should not be generated". Will be suitably avoided (preventing use of the channel by the automatic rendering function).

  On the other hand, in the “special BGM effect sound can be output in a suppression mode or silent mode”, an impression (as seen from the player side) as if the specific BGM effect sound deviated from the channel assignment and a margin was created in the empty channel Even if you feel like there is a vacancy in the channel, you will be able to have it. Therefore, it is possible to actively prompt the player to operate the game while removing the anxiety such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound". From the beginning, even if the player does not perform the operation, the reception effect is automatically generated. "If the effect reception is somehow generated, the next time the player will generate the effect reception by his / her operation" Can be encouraged to

  FIG. 301 is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment condition of each channel when such processing is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example when such a process is performed will be described with reference to FIG. Although the special section is described as a silent section in which silent data is set in this example of effect, the special section may be a suppressed section in which data in a suppression mode is set.

  As shown in FIG. 301 (a), during a period in which a specific effect pattern according to the result of effect determination is being executed, at timing tm11, the specific effect pattern corresponding to the effect being developed is dealt with The sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and is in a situation where it is already played back (here, stereo playback). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one of the sound data over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start of the symbol variation to the end when the specific effect pattern is determined to be executed. The sound material may be reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and each of the different sound data prepared for each of the periods may be divided. It may be reproduced sequentially based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In any case, in the example shown in FIG. 301, one sound data (one sound) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the drawing including the timing tm11. Material) is assigned to channels 02 and 03, and is in a state of reproduction.

  In this respect, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), one sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) assigned to channels 02 and 03 and being in a reproduction state is When tm 14 is reached, playback is made in a silent section in which silent data content (silence data) is set. As a result, even if the volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed for the sound of "BGM playback" corresponding to the specific effect pattern, it is possible to output it silently while assigning it to the predetermined channel. .

  According to such a configuration, in the silent section after the timing tm 14 occurs, an atmosphere is provided in which there is a possibility that the use status of the channel is enough for the sound of "BGM playback" to appear to be removed from the channel. On the other hand, in the normal section before the timing tm14 occurs, the sound of "BGM playback" provides an atmosphere that seems to be insufficient in the channel usage state as it occupies the channel. Will be

  That is, although illustration is omitted, timing tm 14 is generated for various sounds different from the sound of “BGM playback” (for example, a notice effect sound, an effect sound accompanying the occurrence of a valid period, a winning sound, etc.) In any of the subsequent silent sections and the normal section before the timing tm 14 occurs, they are respectively assigned to appropriate channels to be brought into a reproduction state. In particular, in a normal section, a plurality of sounds are often output at the same time in order to stimulate the effects or to suggest that the gaming situation such as winning or paying out has occurred, so how many channels are required It is difficult to know if it is in use (whether there is a spare channel or not), and combined with the fact that the sound of "BGM playback" is always in playback state, it seems that there is no spare channel usage status. Will be provided. Also, the reproduction channels "00" and "01" are dedicated channels for assigning the various error sounds described above, and the number of channels that can be used as effect sound is also reduced by this.

  Then, in this example, when the timing tm12 arrives in a normal section where the channel use status seems to be insufficient, the normal operation of giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) Generate receptionist effects. When an effect is received by the player performing an operation by the player during the operation valid period A (timing tm12 to tm13) for the internal reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), the effect is received. As one of the effects after the operation according to the effect reception, "special effect sound A" is assigned to an empty channel (channels "08" and "09" in the drawing) and reproduced. On the other hand, when all the channels to which “special effect sound A” can be assigned are in use at the time when the effect is accepted within the operation effective period A, any of the sounds in the reproduction state is forced along the way In this way, "special effect sound A" is assigned to the channel in the form of ending, or processing is not performed without assigning "special effect sound A" to the channel.

  However, it has been described above that some players have a sense that they should not cause the reception of effects in the normal section where the channel use situation seems to be short. Therefore, in this production example, the normal internal receptionist production (operation effective period A) that occurs in the normal section where the channel use situation seems to be insufficient is referred to as "non-automatic reception production not targeted for the automatic production function". Is supposed to generate. As a result, the player has no choice but to select whether or not to generate the effect reception within the operation effective period A. Therefore, the effect channel may not be generated. Therefore, the effect reception is not generated. It is suitably avoided that the reception effect is automatically generated contrary to the player's intention such as “I want to use it” (a waste of the channel is prevented by the automatic effect function).

  That is, if an operation by the player is not performed on the operation means to be operated in the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A), the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A (operation effective period A) is not generated. Will be ended, and after the operation including the “special effect sound A”, any effect will not be executed, and the effect will be developed thereafter.

  On the other hand, in this rendering example, as described above, when the timing tm 14 comes, a silent section appears to be felt that there is room in the channel usage status. Then, when the timing tm 15 arrives in such a silent section, the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) for giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 etc.) is generated. The player is positively urged to be accepted by the operation by the player with anxious feeling such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output a special effect sound". That is also as described above. In addition, if production reception occurs in operation effective period B (timing tm15-tm16) to reception production in silence, as shown in Drawing 301 (a) and (b), after production according to the production reception, as for production As one, "special effect sound B" is assigned to an empty channel (channels "10" and "11" in the drawing) and reproduced.

  In this respect, with regard to the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) according to this effect example, the anxiety such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" has been removed In view of being in the state, this is to be generated as “automatic reception effect directed to the automatic performance function”. That is, in this case, there is no intention that the player "does not generate an effect reception because there may not be enough free channels", so reception effect is automatically generated against the player's intention. It is possible to reliably execute the post-operation effect according to the effect reception within the silent effect reception effect (the operation valid period B) while suitably avoiding the omission.

  In addition, in the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) according to this effect example, the period until the predetermined timing tm 15a in the operation effective period B comes regardless of the presence or absence of the operation by the player (operation When the timing tm 15a arrives at the latest (when the automatic rendering function is activated), the effect acceptance always occurs. Then, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), while the "special effect sound B" is being played back as one of the effects after the operation according to such effect reception, the above "BGM reproduction is performed. The relationship is such that a timing tm 17 at which the sound of "" changes from a silent section to a normal section comes.

  According to such a configuration, the silence interval of the specific sound data (sound of "BGM playback") is ended and others are added in the form of being incorporated into the "special effect sound B" being played back. Since the data content of the section (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, it becomes possible to secretly restore the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in the non-suppressed mode, It becomes possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the effect reception is generated in a state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output as silent data, reproduction of "special effect sound B" is started in the non-suppressed mode by high immediacy processing triggered by this. While causing the sound to be generated, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of the sound shift in the BGM between the various effects and the timing of stopping the design after that. Thus, also in order to secretly return the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in the non-suppressed mode, the above-mentioned in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is set as the target of the “automatic effect function. It can be said that it is important to generate it as “automatic reception effects”.

  In addition, within the operation effective period B (timing tm15 to tm16) according to this production example, the symbol to which “special effect sound B” can be assigned is not in use state, so that the symbol is being changed. Execution periods such as various advance notice effects are set respectively.

  FIG. 302 is a diagram for describing the technical features of the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) according to this effect example in more detail. Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) will be described in more detail.

  As described above, the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) according to this effect example is normally within a period during which specific sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm12 in the section, it is generated as "non-automatic reception effect not subject to automatic effect function". Although illustration is omitted, a prophetic effect (for example, FIG. 293 (g)) is suggested to indicate that the player is given an operation opportunity when the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) occurs. It is desirable that the precursor effect is executed as display content different from the precursor effect performed upon occurrence of the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B).

  When the operation valid period A corresponding to the normal internal reception effect occurs, the operation valid period A is ended due to the effect reception occurring accompanying the operation in the operation valid period A, or the operation valid period A is ended. The mode (or another example) described with reference to FIGS. 293 (h) and (l), for example, until the operation effective period A is ended while the operation is not performed and the effect reception is not generated. For example, an image prompting an operation or an image indicating the remaining time is displayed. Then, when an operation is performed within the operation effective period A and the effect reception occurs, in addition to the output of the “special effect sound A” as one of the effects after the operation, FIGS. 293 (j), (k Another post-operation rendering is further performed in the aspect (or another example) described with reference to FIG. In addition, when performing effects after operation in stages, it is desirable to first output "special effect sound A" first. On the other hand, when the operation effective period A is ended with no operation being performed in the operation effective period A and the effect reception is not generated, for example, the mode (or its aspect described with reference to FIG. 293 (m) In other cases, etc., the rendering situation after the operation effective period A is ended will appear.

  Here, the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) according to this effect example is set as a period from the timing tm12 to the timing tm13 when “time Ta” has elapsed, and the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) When the effect reception has been generated in the A), the "special effect sound A" is outputted over the "time Tc" longer than the "time Ta".

  That is, in this case, even when the player performs an operation immediately after the internal reception effect (operation effective period A) occurs at timing tm12 and the effect reception occurs, the “special effect sound A” is As shown in FIG. 302 (a), the channel is allocated and output until timing tm13a after timing tm13. On the other hand, when the player performs an operation immediately before timing tm13 when the internal reception effect (operation effective period A) is ended and the effect reception occurs, “special effect sound A” is shown in FIG. 302 (b As shown in), the channel is allocated and output until the more delayed timing tm 13 b.

  According to such a configuration, the “special effect sound A” corresponding to the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) has a channel over a wider range than the operation effective period A, such as timing tm12 to tm13 b. It can be understood that it can be used. This means that at timings tm12 to tm13b, at least four channels (BGM by stereo, special effect sound by stereo A) can be used, and there is no room in the vacant channel by that amount.

  In this respect, as shown in FIG. 302 and FIG. 303 together, in the case of the internal reception effect according to this effect example, “time Ta” as the operation effective period A ) Is set to a time shorter than "time Tb". This makes it possible to relatively shorten the time (timing tm12 to tm13b) until the output of "special effect sound A" is ended, and by the generation of the effect sound accompanying the normal reception effect. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation where the channel is insufficient. Also, by making the time as the operation effective period A relatively short in this way, it appears that there is not enough room in the free channel, and it is possible for the player to be in a period when the automatic rendering function can not be activated. It also makes it possible to create a stage effect that makes it possible to choose whether to operate or not.

  In this example, the output of "special effect sound A" is terminated before the timing tm14 at which the transition to the silent section occurs at the latest (Figs. 302 (a), ( see b)). In this respect, according to the above-described configuration in which the timings tm12 to tm13b are relatively shortened, silence is generated relatively early after normal reception reception effects are generated while maintaining the relationship between the timings tm13b and tm14. It will also be possible for a section to appear, and a dramatic interval may also be suitably eliminated.

  FIG. 303 is a diagram for describing the technical features of the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) according to the example of the effect in more detail. Next, the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period B) according to this effect example is silent during a period in which specific sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm15 in the section, it is generated as "automatic reception effect directed to the automatic performance function".

  As described above, although illustration is omitted, a prophetic effect which suggests that an operation opportunity is given to the player when the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is generated (for example, FIG. see b)).

  In this respect, although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, even when symbol variation is performed with a predetermined effect pattern different from the specific effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination, the predetermined timing When B. comes, BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern can be output in a suppression mode or silence. However, when a “period of output in a suppression mode or silence” is generated in a predetermined effect pattern, no reception effect is generated when a predetermined time (a fixed period) elapses from the generation of the period. Then, it is arranged that the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") is progressed to be returned to the effect state output in the non-suppressed mode.

  In view of the pachinko machine 1 in which such effect development (predetermined effect pattern) can appear, the above-mentioned pro-event effect (for example, FIG. As for 292 (b)), it is difficult to recognize whether or not the reception effect is generated when the silent section appears by making it start after the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears comes in and it becomes tense It is desirable to maintain a feeling. At this time, it is desirable that the expectation progress is higher in the effect of the reception effect in the silent section than in the effect of the effect of the reception effect in the silent period.

  By the way, as a method of outputting BGM data (sound of "BGM playback") in the suppression mode or silent in the above predetermined effect pattern, it is limited to the method of setting the data contents (volume initial value) itself as the suppression mode or silent This may be realized by performing volume adjustment from the initial value. That is, in the predetermined effect pattern, the reception effect can not be generated while the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") is output in the suppression mode or silent, and the BGM data (of "BGM reproduction" Since the timing at which the sound should be returned in the non-suppressed mode is also not fixed and is predetermined, even if the volume adjustment from the initial value is performed, such as the above-mentioned sound shift etc. There is no inconvenience.

  And now, as shown in FIG. 303 (a), assuming that the operation effective period B corresponding to the in-silence reception effect is generated, the effect reception due to the operation in the operation effective period B is generated. Until the operation valid period B is ended, or until the operation valid period B is ended by the fact that the operation is not performed within the operation valid period B and the effect reception is automatically generated, for example, FIG. 292 (c) In the mode (or another example) described with reference to (d) and the like, an image for prompting an operation, an image showing a remaining time, and the like are displayed.

  Here, the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) according to this effect example is set as a period from the timing tm 15 to the timing tm 16 when “time Tb” has elapsed, and the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) When the effect reception has been generated within the B), the "special effect sound B" is output over the "time Td" longer than the "time Tb".

  That is, in this case, even when the player's operation is performed immediately after generation of the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) at timing tm 15 and the effect reception is generated, the “special effect sound B” is As shown in FIG. 303 (a), the channel is allocated and output until timing tm17a after timing tm17 after returning to the normal section. On the other hand, at the timing tm 15a at which the automatic rendering function is activated within the silent reception acceptance effect (operation effective period B) (the timing at which the specific time (<time Tb) has elapsed since the operation effective period B occurred). When the effect reception is automatically generated, the “special effect sound B” is assigned to the channel and output until the timing tm 17 b which is further delayed as shown in FIG. 303 (b).

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the setting process by the player according to the “automatic effect mode” is not installed, and the operation by the player when the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) occurs If there is not, at timing tm 15a, the "automatic rendering function" is always activated to automatically generate a rendering acceptance. Therefore, although the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) itself occurs as a period that can be continued from timing tm15 to timing tm16, it is substantially continued only from timing tm15 to timing tm15a. It can be said that it is an impossible period. That is, in this case, the effect reception can not occur within the period from the timing tm15a to the timing tm16. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, such a camouflage period (timing tm15a to tm16) And the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is intentionally generated as a longer period (timing tm15 to tm16).

  According to such a configuration, unlike the case of the above-mentioned normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A), there is a margin in both the number of empty channels and the remaining time as the operation effective time B. It becomes possible to give an operation opportunity to the player in an atmosphere of sense of security that looks like, and it is thereby possible to improve the game interest.

  In order to make the remaining time as the operation effective time B have a margin, the gauge amount applied to the bar display indicating the remaining time of the internal reception effect (operation effective period A) is filled at timing tm15. It is desirable that after displaying as a tongue state, it is displayed so as to decrease in such a manner (speed) that this becomes 0 as timing tm 16 comes. Also, in this case, the timing tm 15a comes in a state where the gauge amount according to the bar display is left, and the effect reception is automatically generated, so the mode (or, as shown in FIGS. 292 (e), (f) As shown in the other example), the bar display is not hidden, and the "special effect sound B" is started to be output while continuing to be displayed, whereby the normal internal reception effect (operation valid period A) is made. It is desirable to be able to recognize that the "automatic rendering function" has been activated. The bar display left in this way will be hidden when "special effect sound B" is in the output state.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, the operation effective time B can be substantially shortened compared to the time recognized by the player (the remaining time indicated by the bar display). For example, if it is assumed that an operation by the player may be performed immediately before the timing tm 16 at which the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is ended, the effect reception may occur. “Is assigned to the channel and output until the timing tm 17 c further delayed as shown in FIG. 303 (c). Then, "special effect sound B" corresponding to the reception effect in silence (operation effective period B) has a possibility that the channel can be used over an extremely wide range such as timing tm15 to tm17c. It can be understood that you just lose the room of the free channel.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, as described above, the operation effective time B is substantially shortened with respect to the time recognized by the player (timing tm15 to tm16) (timing tm15 to tm15a) The period during which the “special effect sound B” corresponding to the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) can use the channel is shown from the range (timing tm 15 to tm 17 c) shown in FIG. 303 (c). It becomes possible to narrow it to the range (timing tm15 to tm17b) shown in 303 (b), and it becomes possible to give extra space to the vacant channel by that amount.

  However, in the above example, even in the case where the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is viewed as a substantially shortened period (specific time from timing tm15 to timing tm15a), it is usually the case This time is set to be longer than the time Ta set as the internal reception effect (operation effective period A). Adopting such a configuration is important in creating a feeling of security that seems to be enough for both the number of free channels and the remaining time as the operation effective time B. You can say that.

  Further, in the above-mentioned example of the effect on the silent section, "uncomfortable feeling by returning the sound of" BGM playback "as the non-suppressing mode when the operation by the player is accepted as the non-suppressing mode" is further added In order to make it hard to remember, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound B larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the sound of BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section while attention is focused on the special effect sound B having a large volume initial value.

  Further, in the example of the effect according to the silent section, the special effect sound B is generated based on the effect reception, but only when the specific effect condition according to the variation pattern or the result of the big hit determination is satisfied. The special effect sound B may be generated based on the fact that the effect has been accepted. In addition, even when the specific rendering condition is not satisfied, the operation valid period is generated at timing tm 15, and when the rendering is received within the operation valid period, it is determined based on the rendering being accepted. Play the production sound of (eg failure production sound). And, even if it is operated at any timing within the operation effective period, the sound of BGM reproduction is densely reproduced to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is being reproduced. It is desirable to make it the same as in the case of the above-mentioned example of the point to which it is made to shift to.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (a failure effect The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). Will be set to arrive after the

  Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in the lost mode without the BGM reproduction sound being restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. It is also good. In this case, at timing tm14, the assignment of the sound for BGM reproduction to the channels 02 and 03 may be ended, and this may be made an empty channel.

  In addition, when special effect sound B is generated, the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction is reduced by performing the combination of the display change and the movable effect for operating the predetermined movable body based on the effect reception. It is desirable to do so in order to make the sound of BGM reproduction secretly shift to the reproduction state in the normal section. In this case, when the special effect sound A is to be generated, it is desirable that the movable effect for operating the predetermined movable body is not performed only by the display change occurring based on the effect reception.

  Further, in the above example of rendering, the sound of “BGM playback” is silently output in a partial section, but the invention is not limited thereto, and is output in a mode suppressed more than the sound of “BGM playback” in other sections. As long as it is Here, the mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered can be exemplified as a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is lowered.

  Further, in the above example of rendering, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" assigned to a predetermined channel is set by setting a time-sequential period to be a suppression mode or silence to itself. Without adjustment, it is possible to create a suppression mode or a silent output state (special period) simply by reproducing this. However, the sound data of "BGM playback" allocated to a predetermined channel does not necessarily have to set the time-sequential period set as the suppression mode or silence to itself, for example, at timing tm14 of "sound of BGM playback" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (which may be mute). That is, in this case, even if the effect reception is generated at timing tm 15a, the process of raising the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” from the specific value (processing to return to the initial value of volume) is not performed. . Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing tm 17 comes, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is raised from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the volume initial value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is being reproduced as in the other example described above. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial value of the volume) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is specified with a specific value in a state where the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is finished. You may make it perform processing (processing to return to volume initial value) to make it rise from, or even if the said symbol variation is ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  Further, in the above presentation example, a restriction process is performed to make it more difficult to generate a new sound for an empty channel, at least from a predetermined timing before timing tm14 comes to timing tm17. Is desirable. In addition, as such a restriction process, for example, a specific game having nothing to do with the result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol variation being executed, such as a hold winning sound, a general sound effect sound, a volume adjustment sound, etc. It is desirable that the sound be a target of restriction, and that the specific gaming sound that is the target of restriction not be reproduced without being newly assigned to the channel.

  In addition, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment, a specific effect sound (BGM in a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before timing tm 14 comes To play the background music, not the music, but it is desirable to be an effect sound or an effect sound such as a speech), and while the specific effect sound is being reproduced, the timing tm 14 comes and the BGM is reproduced. It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppression mode or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it can be made difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state. In addition, for the specific effect sound, the reproduction state is ended before the timing tm15 at which the special effect sound B (or a predetermined effect sound) can be output (the timing tm15 or the timing tm15). Is desirable in order to alleviate the anxiety that the special effect sound B is not output.

  In addition, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment, the sound of BGM reproduction from the timing when the special effect sound B (or the predetermined effect sound) is output It is desirable that a plurality of channels be output of the effect sound until a timing tm17 at which the suppression mode or the state of silence is ended. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound B are output, the sound of BGM reproduction can be easily incorporated into those effect sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction can be output. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the playback state in the normal mode.

  Also in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described presentation example, setting processing by the player according to the “automatic presentation mode” may be installed. That is, in this case, when the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated and the effect reception occurs when the predetermined timing arrives even in the normal reception effect (operation effective period A). . On the other hand, when the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) occurs when the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated when the predetermined timing before the timing tm 15a comes. It is desirable that it be made effective and receipt of presentation be generated.

  In the above example, the execution periods of various notice effects etc during symbol change are set so that the number of free channels does not become 0 even during the execution period of the internal reception effect (operation effective period A). You may The point is that by continuously outputting the sound of "BGM reproduction" in a non-suppressed mode, it is only necessary to provide an atmosphere that feels that there is no spare channel available for that amount. Also, conversely, the number of free channels may be 0 during the execution period of the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B). The point is that the sound of “BGM playback” is output in a mode of suppression or silent, as long as it provides an atmosphere in which a vacant channel can be felt by that amount.

  In the above example of rendering, "special rendering sound A" is assigned to channels "08" and "09", while "special rendering sound B" is assigned to channels "10" and "11". The “special effect sound A” and the “special effect sound B” may be assigned to the same channel.

  In the above-mentioned example of presentation, it is decided to start the prognostic effect with respect to the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) after the arrival of the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears. However, the precursor effect may be started before timing tm14 at which the silent section appears, and timing tm14 at which the silent section appears may occur while the precursor effect is being performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect such as whether or not a silent section appears while the precursor effect is being performed.

  In the above example of rendering, the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is selected as the operation target for the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) and the silence internal reception effect (operation effective period B). The reception effect in the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) is executed as the reception effect with the operation button 410 as the operation target, while in the silence reception effect (operation effective period B), the sword decorative body 5001 is the operation object It may be made to be performed as a received reception effect. In this case, different bird's-eye view images (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) are different between the execution period of the reception effect in the normal reception (operation effective period A) and the execution period of the reception effect in the silence (operation effective period B). As it will be displayed, when the effect after operation is started by the reception effect of those, the overhead view image is not displayed as in the mode (or another example) described with reference to FIGS. It is also possible to start the post-operation effect while continuing to display this without displaying.

  In the above-mentioned effect example, in the specific effect pattern, the internal reception effect (operation valid period A) is generated only once when in the normal section, but when it is in the normal section, the non-automatic reception is performed. The normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) as the effect may be generated a plurality of times. However, it is desirable to perform different post-operation effects in the normal internal reception effects. On the other hand, in a silent section in a specific effect pattern, a reception within silence is made so that "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in a non-suppressed mode while "special effect sound B" is being reproduced It is desirable that the effect (operation effective period B) be generated only once. Then, it is desirable that the after-operation effect by the normal internal reception effect (operation effective period A) and the after-operation effect by the silent internal reception effect (operation effective period B) have different effect contents.

[Movement effect triggered by the establishment of another condition different from the condition of the symbol game]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when the gaming ball is received in the starting opening (the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004), the determination regarding the hit is performed. As a result, when the jackpot is won, a jackpot game is executed in which a large number of game balls can be acquired after executing the symbol variation displayed while the jackpot symbol is displayed, and after the jackpot game, it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to control the game state (time reduction state, probability change state). In addition, while such a symbol game is played, in peripheral control MPU 1511a, effects (for example, timer effects, various effects such as timer effects, operation effects, pre-reading effects, etc. in addition to effect patterns) are made according to the result of the judgment regarding hits. As described above, it is possible to execute, etc., and thereby to maintain the game interest until the big hit game is performed.

  However, only by performing effects according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back decoration unit 3100, the back movable display unit 3200, specific There is a concern that it becomes difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operation rate over a long period of time because the decorative members SDY (such as a prison object) become monotonous.

  Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the display contents and the movable in the effect display device 1600 are also performed when another condition that is not related to the determination processing concerning the progress of the game and the symbol variation (the symbol game start condition) is satisfied. It is possible to execute a process that is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the decoration. That is, in this case, display change and movable body movement appear in a mode beyond the category of symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, thereby maintaining the pachinko machine 1 at a high operation rate for a long period of time Can be expected.

Here, it changes to the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition not related to the judgment processing concerning the progress of the game and the symbol variation (symbol game start condition) according to it is satisfied. As a method of causing, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. It should be noted that any of the following methods can be used to cause changes in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition not related to the symbol game start condition is satisfied. It is also possible to adopt a method different from any of the methods listed below, but a situation where symbol variation is not temporarily executed (the processing flag shown in FIG. 167 is “0”, and the number of reservations) Even if the condition is “0”, the above-mentioned other condition must be satisfied, and even if the other condition is satisfied in the situation, the display content on the effect display device 1600 or It should be possible to make changes in the behavior of the movable decoration.
・ A technique to regularly execute an effect lottery not related to symbol variation, and to obtain that a specific result is obtained in this effect lottery as the above “satisfaction of another condition” • The number of times of cumulative operations for a specific operation means The above-mentioned method of making it reach the predetermined number as “the establishment of another condition” The time is measured (for example, the power is turned on) by the RTC (real time clock) function or the arithmetic processing in peripheral control MPU 1511a (or main control MPU 1310a) Method of measuring the time from the end of

  In general, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured by using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is determined that another condition is satisfied, and the display contents in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is adopted, when a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition not related to the symbol game start condition is satisfied, the change timing is reached. In general, it takes a relatively long time (eg, at least several hours) to cause changes in the behavior of the display content or the movable decoration even though such a long time is required. It is feared that the entertainment interest may be reduced if a situation that can not be made occurs.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which a movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is preset is a symbol game start condition. Can be generated based on the establishment of another specific condition (for example, that the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time). And, in the situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not in the original position although it should be in the original position, etc.) and the specific state is not generated, While it is possible to start processing for causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation when the corresponding restoration operation time has arrived, the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In a certain situation, even if a predetermined restoration operation time has arrived, processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation can be started without starting processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation, and performing predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined timing in a specific state. .

  That is, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the symbol game start condition, the processing for performing a predetermined restoring operation according to the symbol fluctuation side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state, movable body abnormality can be performed in a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation It is expected that the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body (the operation when another condition is satisfied) is more reliably performed by restoring.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 304, an example of processing contents when operating the movable decorative body when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 304, for convenience of explanation, “RTC state in which display content different from before appears when it is determined that the elapsed time since power on has reached a predetermined time using the RTC function ( "It is possible to execute the process of causing the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C to operate sequentially in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state)". It is not limited to this as a method of causing a change in the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) not related to the game start condition is satisfied. As described above, it is possible to appropriately adopt each technology described below even when other methods are adopted.

  Now, assuming that it is in a state before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, in peripheral control MPU 1511a, the remaining time until the elapsed time from power on reaches the predetermined time (until the RTC state occurs) The remaining time of) will be updated regularly. In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at timing Rt2, an elapsed time from power on reaches a predetermined time to generate an RTC state (specific state), and an RTC state (specific state) occurs. Based on the above, it is possible to execute processing for sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C. As described above, the flow of gaming up to now is achieved by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C being sequentially operated based on the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the second condition) that is not related to the situation of symbol variation. It will be possible to have a sense of expectation as if it changes. At this time, the display content in the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

  In order to more suitably enhance the sense of expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as a rendering period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), and the rendering If a jackpot wins during the period (RTC state) from the occurrence to the end, progress of the rendering by the effect character that can not appear when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state) It is more desirable to provide presentation benefits such as enabling special presentation mode).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, a condition not related to the situation of symbol variation is established at timing Rt1 slightly earlier than such timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before). Based on the satisfaction of the condition (the satisfaction of the first condition), it is possible to execute the pre-display indicating that the RTC state is about to occur (the second condition is met). That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example, whether the timing Rt1 has arrived or not in addition to the timing Rt2 is determined by periodically checking the lapse of time since the power is turned on, and the timing Rt1 is determined. When it is determined that the has arrived, the previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing (behavior of the movable decoration) corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed . The “previous display” can be executed as, for example, a display such as “immediately RTC status” or a countdown display toward timing Rt2.

  According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body motions are the result of the big hit determination Because it is suggested in advance to the player that they are not based on (no big hit expectation), it is suitably avoided that the game's interest is reduced due to a recognition error by the player You will be able to

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 304, only a display (a display not conforming to the symbol variation) appears without any expectation as a display content in the effect display device 1600 at least in a period of timing Rt1 to Rt2. The decorative pattern (rendering pattern) is not displayed so as not to be displayed. That is, in this case, three movable decorative bodies A, B and C are sequentially operated while only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) appears as the display content in the effect display device 1600 without any expectation. Since the process of causing the player to start the game is started, it is expected to more preferably avoid the decrease in the game interest due to the recognition error by the player.

  Here, “previous display appearing at timing Rt1” and “movable body movement appearing at timing Rt2” respectively correspond to “display not conforming to symbol variation” and to “behavior of movable ornament not conforming to symbol variation” It is Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the behavior of the display and the movable body respectively occurs regardless of the execution situation (including the presence or absence of execution) of the symbol variation at those timings. However, depending on the state of execution of the symbol variation, the movable ornaments A, B and C are not ready to operate (the movable ornaments A, B and C are in the original position even though the timing Rt2 has arrived) There is a concern that it may not be possible to position the movable decorative bodies A, B and C in sequence even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived.

  For example, when any of several variation patterns is selected as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the movable ornament A, the movable ornament B, There are cases where the movable effect using the movable decorative body C is executed, but the movable body operation timing (here, at the time of occurrence of the RTC state) in the above-mentioned RTC state comes during the execution of such movable effects. In some cases, at least the movable decorative body among the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C which is in the process of execution can not be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to design variation" Can be assumed.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes, the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as well as various movable modes provided in the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to execute movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state). Then, if it is determined that there is a movable decorative body that is not in the normal state (abnormal determination) in this movable abnormality determination, the movable decorative body to be determined is determined in a predetermined manner following the processing of the abnormal determination. By performing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (for example, an operation of moving to the original position), it is possible to make an early restoration of the movable decorative body in an abnormal state possible. Therefore, the movable body operation timing in the above-mentioned RTC state comes in the middle of executing the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation (the movement to move to the original position, etc.) to the movable decoration. If there is at least one of the movable ornaments A, B, and C at least in the middle of the restoration operation, it can not be used as the above-mentioned “behavior of the movable ornament not conforming to the pattern variation”. Can be assumed.

  In addition, as "restoration operation time corresponding to design change", for example, start time of design change (time to acquire the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when design change is started), and design change It can be executed (execution of restoration processing based on acquisition of a command) at least one of the stop timing (timing to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when symbol variation is stopped) It is.

  Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 304, the movable decorative body is specified according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after at least the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs When it is in the period until the movement in the mode (in this case, the sequential movement by the three movable decorations A, B and C), the movable decoration used in the period (movable decoration A, movable decoration B) By prohibiting the movable decorative body C) from being used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol variation side, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable ornament not conforming to the symbol variation) It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the behavior of the body can not be performed by the movable effect on the symbol variation side.

  However, at this time, even if the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern, there is a concern that the amusement of the game may be lowered. In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at timing Rt1, only a display (a display not conforming to symbol variation) is displayed, which does not show any degree of expectation as the display content in the effect display device 1600. As mentioned above.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when there is a symbol variation (in the figure, B variation (loss) in the middle of execution) when timing Rt2 arrives, “any expectation has been displayed. Do not hide the display (display from timing Rt1) that is not shown at all at this point in time, and keep this over the period until timing Rt2a when the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, B fluctuation (loss) is stopped) I try to maintain it.

  According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated and the symbol variation is actually performed, the effect display device 1600 is decorated Only the display in which the rendition pattern by the symbol is hidden and no expectation degree is shown will appear. And while such a display appears, the action by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential movement by the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C) is developed, It is expected to preferably suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the movable effect according to the effect pattern not being executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, when the symbol variation (in the figure, B variation (loss) in the figure) is ended (stopped) when timing Rt2 arrives (when timing Rt2a comes) , Even if it is within the operation period by the movable ornament according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display without any degree of expectation (display from timing Rt1)" which has been displayed until then is not displayed It is possible to appear a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (the specific state). Then, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started after that, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation It is made to start as usual the display in which the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern or the notice effect is indicated.

  However, even if a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started in this way and the effect pattern is displayed, the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes After that, as long as the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode (here, sequentially operated by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the movable body movement time in the RTC state, It goes without saying that the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, although the movable effect on the symbol variation side is strictly prohibited, since the movable body operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by prohibiting the movable effect on the symbol variation side The decline in interest will be suppressed.

  As such prohibition processing, it is judged whether it is in the situation where it should be prohibited at the start of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure), and when it is judged that it is in the situation where it should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol fluctuation (figure Among them, C fluctuation) itself may be set as a prohibition target of movable representation (movable representation using at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes in the middle of the corresponding symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure), the movable decorative body Even if the period until the movement in the specific mode (here, the sequential movement by three movable decorations A, B and C) is completed is completed, until the pattern variation is ended, the movable presentation ( At least the movable decoration A, the movable decoration B, and the movable decoration C) can not be performed.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the game is entertaining by setting the timing for causing the specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) to be the timing Rt2a later than the original timing Rt2. There is a concern that the However, although the RTC state itself occurs at timing Rt2, the effect bonus due to the occurrence of the RTC state is controlled to the special effect mode when the jackpot is won between the time when the RTC state occurs and the end) Etc.) because only symbol variation (C, D variation in the figure) after symbol variation that was first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state is targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to cause a specific background (for example, in an RTC state) to appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

  By the way, during the period until the timing Rt2a comes (during the timing Rt2 comes) the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) which was in the middle of execution is finished ), “The movable decorative body operates in a specific mode according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state since the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs (here, three movable decorative bodies A, B, It can also be assumed that "the period until the end of the sequential operation by C" ends. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which the "display showing no expectation degree (display from the timing Rt1)" appears is maintained. This is an example shown in FIG. 304, and the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after the timing Rt2) Not because

  Furthermore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 304, the movable decorative body is a specific aspect according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs at least arrives. In the period until the operation (in this case, the three movable ornaments A, B, and C sequentially operate) is completed, the restoration processing is triggered by this even if the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation has come By prohibiting (preventing a process to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state) so as to prevent this from being performed, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (not conforming to the design variation) It is possible to suppress that the behavior of the movable decoration can not be performed by the restoration process on the design fluctuation side.

  According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the game start condition, a predetermined restoring operation according to the symbol fluctuation side is performed. Processing is disabled, and processing that causes a predetermined restoration operation to be performed at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be performed. It is expected that the movable body abnormality is restored according to a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without being received, and the operation in the above-described specific mode by the movable decorative body is more reliably performed. .

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 304, it is controlled to the normal gaming state, and when it is in the middle of the stage where symbol variation (in the figure, A variation (loss)) is being performed according to the big hit determination. It is assumed that the timing Rt1 comes. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, a display such as “immediately RTC status” appears on the background display on the effect display device 1600 as a display not conforming to the symbol variation, for example. Then, the symbol variation (in the figure, A variation (losing)) is ended and a new symbol is displayed from the time when the display such as "immediately RTC status" is performed until the timing Rt2 at which the RTC status occurs comes. Fluctuation (fluctuation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 comes when the symbol variation is being performed, and at the timing Rt2, as the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation, three movable A process of operating the decorative bodies A, B and C sequentially is performed. Note that “display not conforming to symbol variation” from timing Rt1 is continued for a period until a new symbol variation (in the drawing, variation B (loss)) is stopped.

  Further, although this is also described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, “the three movable decorative objects A according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes In the period until the sequential operations by B and C are completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5 ') ", at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, It is decided to prohibit this so that the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C and the restoration process on the symbol variation side are not performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, in the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a, although the symbol variation (in the figure, B variation (loss) is being executed, the effect display on the symbol variation side ( It is controlled as a period in which none of the display showing the expectation degree, the movable effect on the symbol fluctuation side (the movable body motion indicating the expectation degree), and the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side is executed (No. One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 304, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expectation is expected) It is controlled as a period during which neither the movable body operation in which the degree is shown nor the symbol fluctuation side restoration processing is performed (the second limitation).

  It should be noted that the control at such timings Rt2 to Rt2a (no effect display on symbol variation side (display showing expectation) and movable effect (movable body operation showing expectation) is not performed) It is executed even if the symbol variation in the period is not the lost variation but the one performed based on the jackpot win (big hit variation). That is, in this case, the jackpot symbol suddenly appears when the timing Rt2a at which the operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in the middle of execution is not performed at all. Therefore, as a player who has been expecting to be in the RTC state, it is possible to enjoy the enjoyment as a surprise effect that exceeds the expectation. In addition, after the jackpot symbol appears in this way, a jackpot gaming state will occur while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C are sequentially operated.

  Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, with respect to the display from timing Rt1 (only the display in which no change in the decorative symbol is performed and any expectation is not shown), the symbol fluctuation in the process of being executed when the timing Rt2 arrives It will be made non-displayed at the timing Rt2a to be stopped, and instead, a specific background (such as "in RTC state") after the RTC state is generated will be displayed. In addition, when symbol variation (in the figure, variation pattern C) is newly started in a state in which a specific background (such as "in the state of RTC") is displayed, effect display (the degree of expectation is indicated according to the variation pattern) Display will be executed as usual. However, after the timing Rt2a has arrived for the movable effect on the symbol variation side using the movable ornaments A, B, and C, unless the process of operating the three movable ornaments A, B, and C sequentially is completed. Will also be maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, even when the effect pattern in which the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative members A, B, and C is performed is temporarily selected based on the result of the big hit determination, it is at the time of the movable effect The in-liquid-crystal display, sound, lamp lighting, etc. are normally performed, but the corresponding movable decorative body is not operated.

  Further, although this is also described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, three movable decorative bodies A and B according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes. And C, the restoration operation timing (here, start of symbol fluctuation) corresponding to symbol fluctuation in a period until normal operation by C, C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5 ') " Even if the time and the stop time have arrived, it is prohibited to carry out the restoration process (the process of causing the movable decoration in an abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation) triggered by this. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at timing Rt2a, stop timing (restoration operation timing) of symbol variation (in the figure, B variation (loss)) or symbol variation (in the figure, C variation (loss) Although the start timing (restoration operation timing) of)) comes, at these restoration operation timings, even if there is a movable decoration in an abnormal state, restoration with respect to the movable decoration is performed. Processing is never performed.

  However, in the period from timing Rt2 to Rt5 (when abnormal, timing Rt2 to Rt5 '), instead of prohibiting the restoration processing on the symbol variation side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state It is determined whether or not Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in the abnormal state, and the movable decorative body A is operated in the normal operation mode based on the result of the determination. A process to operate (operation when normal) is performed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A is, for example, after the movable decorative body A at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (first position), and then at the predetermined effect position. It is possible to realize as the operation mode of moving the movable decorative body A to the original position.

  Next, at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends, it is determined whether the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in the abnormal state, and the movable decorative body B is operated in the normal operation mode based on the result of the determination. A process to operate (operation when normal) is performed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B is, for example, after the movable decorative body B in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position), and then in the predetermined effect position. It is possible to realize as the operation mode of moving the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  Then, next, at timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B ends, it is determined whether the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in the abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in the normal operation mode. A process to operate (operation when normal) is performed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C is, for example, after the movable decorative body C at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (third position) and then at the predetermined effect position. It is possible to realize as the operation mode of moving the movable decorative body C to the original position.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (e), when the timing Rt5 after each operation by the movable decorative members A, B, and C is sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) is generated. “The behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” is ended, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state by any of the abnormality determinations, processing for causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation Is made executable. However, while a series of movable body operations (here, the sequential movement by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) are being performed at the time of occurrence of the RTC state, a predetermined value is set for the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. If the player feels that he or she is performing the restoration operation of the game, it may be a surprise, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoring operation for the movable decoration in an abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three movables) when the RTC state occurs. It is made to execute as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable ornament in an abnormal state, instead of being performed independently as an operation separate from the sequential objects A, B and C). . That is, in this case, the predetermined restoring operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state. It is possible to preferably avoid a decrease in the game fun when performing a predetermined restoring operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is assumed that it is determined that the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, it is not a process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (operation at normal time) but an operation including an operation of restoring the movable decorative body B (restoration) It is possible to execute processing to operate (special operation) in the operation mode of. Then, after this, the movable decorative body B restored (restored) is not operated (normal operation) in the normal operation mode, and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. 304 (e) is not performed. As with the timing after the normal operation by the decoration B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decoration C is in the abnormal state, and when the movable decoration C is not in the abnormal state, the movable decoration A process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is performed. The time required for the normal operation of the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation of the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

  According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration B after the occurrence of the RTC state (for example, during the operation of the movable decoration A, etc.), the movable decoration B causing the abnormality While the timing to operate should be reached, regardless of the situation on the symbol variation side, it will be left in an abnormal state and left. Then, when the timing at which the movable decorative body B should be operated comes, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the operation mode at the time of normal operation. It is possible to restore the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred while suitably maintaining the rendering mode at the time of occurrence of the RTC state such as “sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, C”. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as an operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state is executed, so that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. A drop in gaming interest when doing a game is preferably avoided.

  In addition, the symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially executed by the three movable ornaments A, B and C according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It is started when it is in the middle stage and is continued until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C is completed. Therefore, the stop timing (restoration operation timing) of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the drawing) and the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the next symbol fluctuation (D fluctuation (loss) in the drawing) come. When you do, because the prohibition state for restoration processing on the symbol fluctuation side has already been released, when there is a movable decoration that is in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration processing is executed for the movable decoration The Rukoto.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special mode including the restoring operation”, the “special mode including the restoring operation” is “the normal operation”. The movable decorative body B may be restored (original position return) according to an operation mode different from the “mode”, and may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at timing Rt1, only a display (for example, “soon, RTC status” or the like) in which no degree of expectation is shown as the display content in the effect display device 1600 appears. Then, the display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display content is different based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, “RTC preparation state”, etc.) It may be switched to. However, even if the display content is switched at timing Rt2 to make a new display appear, a display (symbol variation) in which no degree of expectation is shown as the display content in the effect display device 1600 in the period of timing Rt2 to Rt2a It is important to make it appear that it does not conform to

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the case where abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B has been described, but in operating the movable decorative bodies A and C, the operation mode at the normal time is also shown when abnormality is judged. Alternatively, it may be desirable to operate each in a special manner, including a restore operation.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in the specific mode is set as the generation time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the RTC state (specific state) occurs.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, “not conforming to symbol variation based on arrival of timings Rt1 and Rt2 satisfied based on the function (RTC function) not conforming to symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side It was decided to start "display" and "the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the design variation". However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function not conforming to the symbol variation on the main control MPU 1310a side, "a display not conforming to a symbol variation" or "behavior of a movable decorative object not conforming to a symbol variation" May be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, “the movable decorative body operates in the specific mode according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives (here, 3 It is something which prohibits this so that the restoration processing on the design fluctuation side is not performed when it is "the period until the end of the sequential operation by two movable ornaments A, B and C)", thereby the RTC state It is made difficult to cause a situation where the movable body operation (behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in (specific state) can not be performed due to competition with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if restoration processing for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C may be started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration processing is put into the execution state. Among them, the RTC state (specific state) may occur, and the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the design variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state). There is concern that it will not be earned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even during the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, restoration processing for at least three movable decorative objects A, B, and C among various movable decorative objects provided in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. It is desirable to prohibit this from being performed.

  FIG. 305 shows a modification to the example shown in FIG. 304. “In the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, at least three of the movable decorative bodies A, B and C among various movable decorative bodies provided in the pachinko machine 1 are shown. This is different from the example shown in FIG. 304 in that the restoration process is not executed.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 305, in the period from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timing Rt1 to Rt2), the abnormality determination for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B and C (or , Restore process) not to execute itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state in a display (such as "soon, RTC state") not based on the symbol variation is restored. No, it will be left in an abnormal state.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 305, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs is reached, first, three movable decorative bodies A, B and C are executed prior to executing processing relating to the movable body movement in the RTC state. It is determined that an abnormality determination (a first abnormality determination) is performed as to whether or not any one of them is in an abnormal state.

  As a result of the abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation time (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has come; The processing as described above (the processing related to the movable body operation in the RTC state) is performed with reference to FIG. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination as to whether or not the movable decorative body to be operated has an abnormality is separately executed again, and there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 304 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 304 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is executed prior to the start of the processing related to the movable body movement in the RTC state, and the processing related to the movable body movement in the RTC state is started. The second abnormality determination will be executed prior to operating the movable decorative body B even after the second decoration.

  On the other hand, prior to the execution of the processing relating to the movable body movement in the RTC state, as a result of the abnormality determination being made, it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C When this happens, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed by delaying the arrival of the movable body operation time in the RTC state. That is, the condition in which the abnormality determination is made is "a condition where the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet been started". By restoring the movable decorative body in the abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be performed in the “normal mode” instead of the “special mode” described above. Become so.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 305 (f), at timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, "the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body is It is assumed that it is determined that one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C has an abnormality as a result of the abnormality determination when "a situation where is not yet started" is performed. Then, the movable decorative body determined as abnormal is maintained while "the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not arrived yet and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started". Will perform the restoration process for

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 305 (e) and 305 (f), it is determined in the RTC state as compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C are abnormal. The mobile operation timing is delayed (in the figure, from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b), but using the period (timing Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) generated by such a delay Then, after the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal is restored, the movable body operation time in the RTC state can be made to come. After that, when the movable body operation time in the RTC state comes, the processing as described above with reference to FIG. 304 is performed.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 305 (f), it is assumed that it is determined that no abnormality occurs in any of the movable decorative bodies when sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C. doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the manner described with reference to FIG. 304 (e). Then, when timing Rt5b after three movable decorative bodies A, B and C have sequentially operated in the normal mode respectively comes, “a movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) The behavior of “1” is ended, and the prohibition state (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 305 (g), when operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially, it is determined that the movable decorative body B is abnormal (timing (timing) After abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) in Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), it is assumed that an abnormality has newly occurred in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the manner described with reference to FIG. 304 (f). Then, after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are in a mode according to the determination results (the movable decorative bodies A and C are in the normal mode, and the movable decorative body B is in the special mode) When the timing Rt5b arrives, "the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation" at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (specific condition) is ended, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing of the symbol variation side ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B also in the first abnormality determination, the restoration processing (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination The operations in the special mode are respectively executed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the movable abnormality occurs immediately before the start of the RTC state or during the movable body operation immediately after the start, a series of movable body operations (here, three) occur when the RTC state occurs. It becomes possible to appropriately execute (sequential operation by the movable ornaments A, B, C), and a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the RTC state can be suitably maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 305, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at timing Rt2, restoration processing is sequentially performed on the movable decorative bodies in these abnormal states, and then the RTC state is It is desirable to carry out a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by three movable decorative bodies A, B and C) at the time of occurrence. In this case, a series of movable body movements at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are performed as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored) increase. Although the timing at which the) is started is delayed for a longer time, it becomes possible to execute the series of movable body operations at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state in the normal mode. The restoring operation for a plurality of movable ornaments may be performed in parallel, and in this case, it is possible to suppress a delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs. become.

  However, even in the example shown in FIG. 305, it is interesting to see that the player may feel that the predetermined restoring operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state, and the game is entertaining. There is a concern that the Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and (g), when the "restoration operation" is ended, "sequential operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, C" is executed subsequently (sequential execution ) So that a series of movable body operations up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be viewed as "a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state", It is made difficult to recognize that the predetermined restoring operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state.

  Therefore, in the case of the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormal occurrence situations, a display (error code or the like) indicating that an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body can be displayed. In the example shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and 305 (g) as well as in the example shown in 304 (f), the restoration operation (restoration process) is performed on the movable decoration in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body (during recovery operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during a period in which the movable decorative body B is operated in the special mode (during operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality determination) There is no indication (such as an error code) to indicate that you are doing. In addition, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode ends, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode starts after the operation in the special mode ends, and FIG. f) The display contents in the effect display device 1600 triggered by the occurrence of these timings at the timing when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C start the sequential operation after the restoration operation shown in f), (g) is over There is no such thing as causing Also in these cases, it is assumed that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state so that only "a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state" is performed. It can be said that it is important to make it hard to recognize.

  In FIG. 304 and another example thereof, and in FIG. 305 and another example, three movable decorative bodies A, B and C are sequentially operated as movable body operations based on the occurrence of the RTC state. The movable decorative body (one, two, three or more, etc.) which is not limited to the above but is also used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side, based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the game start condition (starting condition) What is necessary is to operate in a specific mode at the movable body operation time within the specific state that occurs.

  In addition, as a movable decorative body operable at the movable body operation timing in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, provided so as to be operable) Operation buttons 410, sword decoration 5001 and the like, and a panel-side movable decoration (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific decoration member SDY (ceiling object) provided on the game board 5 side Etc.) may be used respectively.

  However, for example, in FIG. 304 and another example thereof, and FIG. 305 and another example thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies operable at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) In the case of using the frame-side movable decorative body (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 or the like) which is also used, the frame-side movable decorative body also used as such an operation means after the timing Rt2a arrives. A situation may occur where "operation not conforming to symbol variation" is taking place.

  That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the display which has been displayed up to that time "Display" is hidden at this point, and a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can be made to appear. Then, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started after that, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation It was also mentioned above that the display in which the expected degree such as the presentation pattern or the notice presentation is indicated is started as usual. Therefore, within the period when such a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the drawing) is performed, the frame-side movable decorative member (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative member 5001) which is also used as the operating means Although in the state of being provided for the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, depending on the effect pattern, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame-side movable decorative body which is also used as the operation means, Confusion may occur in the stage. In addition, in the period of the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (and further, the period of the timing Rt1 to Rt2 before that), a display not conforming to symbol variation (a display not showing any degree of expectation) appears. Even if symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is performed, no operation opportunity is given within the period.

  Therefore, although the specific operating means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in the state of being provided for the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, according to the result of the big hit determination for the specific operating means When the effect time for providing the operation opportunity has arrived, the effect display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) prompting the user to perform an operation on the specific operation means, It is desirable not to accept the effect even if the specific operation means in the state of performing the specific operation is operated. According to such a configuration, when the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being executed, it is possible to play the game that the operation operation was originally provided to the specific operation means. It is possible to suggest to the In addition, by not accepting an operation for a specific operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a failure or an abnormality due to the operation being performed for the specific operation means in the operating state. It will be expected.

  However, during the execution period of the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted although the specific display prompting the user to perform the operation for the specific operation means is performed. If such things happen frequently, the entertainment interest may decline due to the fact that the presentation is not developed. Therefore, among the frame-side movable decorative members provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the operation button 410 provided movably, the sword decorative member 5001, etc.), the operation effect within the symbol variation according to the big hit judgment The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies operable at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) It is desirable to do. In this case, within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation ratio of the operation effect in the symbol variation. When it is applied, it is desirable that the display related to the operation instruction image and the reception of the effect when it is operated (the predetermined effect according to the reception of the effect) be performed as usual.

  That is, of the frame-side movable decorative members provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the operation button 410 provided movably (for example, vibration or the like), the sword decorative member 5001, and the like) The movable decorative body in which the specific operation means (for example, sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low generation ratio of the operation effect in the inside is operable at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) By using it as one, the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state. For example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the presentation time for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the big hit determination to the sword decorative body 5001) will occur.

  In addition, a frame-side movable decorative member provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably, a specific operating means having a relatively low generation ratio of operation effects in the symbol variation) is movable in the RTC state (specific state) When it is used as one of the movable ornaments that can be operated at the operation time, an operation independent of the sequential movement by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is performed when the RTC state occurs. It is desirable that the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed. According to such a configuration, the special operation (see FIG. 304) or the restoring operation (see FIG. 305) is performed on any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Also, it is possible to perform the operation not conforming to the symbol variation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without receiving the influence (such as delay) by the operation. In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C be used as a board-side movable decorative body. Thereby, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is restored, the possibility of interference occurring with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and provided on the door frame 3 side. It becomes possible to execute the operation by the frame side movable decorative body in parallel.

  Then, on this, after the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body having a relatively low generation ratio of operation effects in symbol variation) When the time taken to complete the operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) not conforming to the symbol variation according to 5001)) is made “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the big hit judgment are executed Even in this case, a predetermined operation opportunity provision timing (here, the frame side movable decoration) in the effect pattern, unless “specific time” has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation (the effect pattern starts). It is desirable to perform such settings for each effect pattern (timing of operation opportunity provision within) so that a body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001) does not arrive. .

  According to such a configuration, in FIG. 304 and another example thereof, and FIG. 305 and another example thereof, even if symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at timing Rt2a, the symbol variation is within the symbol variation. By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (according to the occurrence of the RTC state Since the operation has already been completed and the effect can be accepted, it is possible to enhance the effect upon occurrence of the RTC state without sacrificing the effect on the symbol variation side.

  Also, as described above, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the frame side movable decoration body (for example, With regard to an operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) which does not conform to the symbol variation by the sword ornament 5001), while the execution can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation that is first digested after that must be started behind this, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, sword decorative body 5001) for that delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a) ) Can be made to have a margin for completing the operation not conforming to the symbol variation by the.

  Moreover, also when performing operation | movement at the time of generation | occurrence | production of the RTC state by a frame side movable decorative body (for example, sword decorative body 5001) as operation | movement independent of sequential operation by said 3 movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, At the time of execution, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable that the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed as the operation of (1) or the operation of the normal mode is performed in the form following the restoration operation. Note that the “special mode including the restoration operation” in this case also restores the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) according to the operation mode different from the “normal operation mode” (return to the original position). For example, it may be the minimum operation mode required to return to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001).

  Then, the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is “normal mode”, “special mode including restoration operation”, and “restoring operation”. Even when the operation is performed in any of the following modes, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as long as the operation is not completed. It is more desirable that the setting according to each effect pattern be performed so that the timing at which the operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, when any of the effect patterns according to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) Regardless of whether the operation is performed in the normal mode or in the abnormal mode, only after the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) It becomes possible to be able to give an operation opportunity to.

  In addition, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, at least one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the effect reception. A specific movable effect may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, an operation (RTC by the frame-side movable decorative body) Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C is still in the process of execution, the operation opportunity is It becomes impossible to receive the effect, and there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment. Therefore, when the time from the timing Rt2 required for the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C to be completed when performed sequentially in the normal time mode is the big hit judgment Even if any of the effect patterns according to is executed, unless the "specific time" and the "special time" have passed since the start of the symbol variation (start of the effect pattern) And each effect pattern (operation opportunity provision timing in the inside) so that a predetermined operation opportunity provision timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001) does not arrive) It is desirable to make settings for

  When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is also in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) It is desirable for the timing Rt2 to arrive while keeping the abnormal state dare.

  On the other hand, among the above three movable decorative bodies A, B and C, this is the case for a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body A with a fast operation order, a movable decorative body with a long time required for the restoration operation, etc.) If an abnormal state occurs within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is prohibited, but a movable decoration different from a specific movable decoration (for example, the operation sequence is delayed) With respect to the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C, a movable decorative body requiring a short time for the restoration operation, etc.), when this is an abnormal state within the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration for the movable decorative body The processing (restoration operation) may be performed without being prohibited. This is because, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) does not have to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A performs the movement when the RTC is generated. It is because it is possible to execute the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in the normal mode if it can be completed during this period.

  Also, the timing at which a series of operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the RTC state occurs, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is started. It may be different from the timing.

[Recovery processing for movable abnormality with less influence on movable presentation]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), it is possible to cope with symbol variations when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more precisely, in a state where the specific state is not generated). When the recovery operation time to perform (for example, start time or stop time of symbol variation) comes, it is possible to execute processing for performing a predetermined recovery operation on the specific movable decorative body. However, regardless of the state of presentation, it is exciting to perform such restoration processing, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "pattern change start time" is set as "the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change". And now, as shown in FIG. 306, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processes Will be performed.
-Based on the fact that the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a is acquired when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern according to the symbol variation is set, and the symbol variation is performed on the set effect pattern Processing to make the effect progress in the inside ・ Identify based on the fact that the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side is acquired when the symbol variation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) Of performing predetermined restoration operation on the movable ornament of

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, it is assumed that "a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within symbol variation" is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 comes, progress of rendering according to “a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” and a predetermined restoring operation for the specific movable decorative body A situation appears in which the processing to be performed is parallel to each other.

  In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern is executable, an effect pattern (relatively with a degree of expectation) in which the effect is paired with the specific effect pattern. A low performance pattern is prepared. Then, in the effect pattern (a effect pattern having a relatively low degree of expectation) which is a pair relationship, although the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, it is directed to the specific timing tm2. The same effect as in the case of "a specific effect pattern (a relatively high expected effect pattern) capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within symbol variation" is performed. Ru. As described above, at the specific timing tm2, two presentation patterns (a presentation pattern for operating a specific movable decorative body, a presentation pattern for not operating a specific movable decorative body) having a pair relationship in a presentation are prepared. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect with an effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display about whether to operate or not) Is made feasible, and such entertainingness is suitably maintained by such an expressiveness.

  However, if there is still a situation where processing for causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation even at the time when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the start of the symbol variation, the specific timing It becomes clear that the particular movable decorative body is in a situation where it can not perform rendering operation even though tm2 has arrived. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect with the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the game interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 306, the progress of rendering according to “a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative object to operate at a specific timing tm2” in the effect pattern, and a predetermined for the specific movable decorative object. When a situation occurs in which the process of performing the restoration operation (the restoration processing based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) appears in parallel, the “specific” process is performed until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration condition. The process of causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation is ended. In addition, although it is possible to employ | adopt various methods as "the process which performs a predetermined | prescribed decompression | restoration operation | movement with respect to a specific movable decoration body", in the following description, "an abnormal state is eliminated, or It is assumed that the process of repeatedly performing the restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body until the predetermined upper limit number is reached is executed.

  More specifically, with regard to “the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation”, the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decorative body is abnormal. The time it takes to be done will be different. For example, when the abnormal state is eliminated and the original position is restored by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body, “a predetermined restoration for the specific movable decorative body is performed. The timing tx at which the processing to perform the operation is completed will also arrive relatively early, but the number of times this is repeated before the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration fails and is restored (restoration) The more the timing tx at which the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation is completed, is advanced in a delayed manner to a later time. And at the latest, if the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and it is not yet restored (restoring) but another restoration operation is executed, the timing tx will be exceeded. By ending the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation while the body is in the abnormal state, the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation during the specific timing tm comes to an end regardless of the state of the restoration. It will be.

  In addition, if it takes x hours to perform one restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body, one pattern is performed so that the relationship of “x time × n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is established. The upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoring operation within the fluctuation is set, and the processing for causing the predetermined restoring operation to end even if not restored (restoring) when the upper limit number n is reached is ended. By doing this, the process for causing the predetermined restoration operation to be performed may be ended before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the state of restoration.

  According to such a configuration, the development of the specific effect pattern that can operate the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation and the predetermined restoring operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. When a specific situation appears, the process of causing a predetermined restoration operation to be performed is completed before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decoration is restored before the specific timing tm2 arrives but also when the specific movable decoration is not restored, the specific timing tm2 Since the movable decorative body comes to be in the stop state, it can be suitably maintained as to the effect on whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 comes. become. For example, even if a specific movable decorative body is stopped at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 comes, it may cause some behavior or the movable decorative body does not operate. Also, it is possible to give hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (when the lamp of the movable decoration emits light when the rendering operation by the movable decoration is performed), etc. .

  However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is in a restoring operation while the predetermined effect is being performed, it has an effect as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which “the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed is ended before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the state of the restoration. It is more desirable to maintain the game interest.

  In addition, as the predetermined effect, for example, when a specific display result (for example, a display result hit by an attack) appears in a specific movable decorative object, the operation is performed unless the specific display result appears. When it is provided as "does not exist", it is possible to illustrate "a display effect that appears in advance in a form that asks whether a specific display result appears or not", and a specific movable decorative body is " When it is provided as one that operates based on the effect received by the player's operation (or the effect is accepted but it does not operate), "the effect that causes the specific display to prompt the operation by the player to appear" It is possible to illustrate.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, the specific movable decorative body recovers from the abnormal state (restoration) at the timing tx when the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed. Is assumed to be normal. In this way, even if the abnormal state is at the start of fluctuation (or "restoration operation time such as the previous symbol stop"), the specific timing tm2 within the fluctuation of the symbol comes under restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to render a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx when the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is completed, the specific movable decoration can not be restored (restored) from the abnormal state, and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, the timing tx) until the symbol variation is ended and the next restoration operation timing comes. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to cause the specific movable decorative body to perform rendering operation at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the rendering performance as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation at the specific timing tm2, thus providing a surprise effect. Will be able to

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines are becoming equipped with movable ornaments that perform multi-step movement with more complicated structures, and such movable ornaments have a longer process until their completion as their restoration processing. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation or a effect pattern that is paired with this, etc., when those effect patterns are started Within a time shorter than the time required for the specific timing tm2 to arrive (more preferably, the time for the predetermined effect to be performed) even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state It has been mentioned above that it is required to end the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoring operation. That is, in this case, it is only possible to restore the specific movable decorative body in an emergency and simple manner every time it becomes abnormal, and this accelerates the deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It may also be.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment prepares a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and from the main control MPU 1310a side when symbol variation starts When the special effect pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, while the special effect pattern is being developed (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is being performed), the specific movable Control is performed so as not to operate the decorative body and prevent the appearance of a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display on whether or not to operate). Then, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) and (d), as a result of the timing tm 11 when symbol variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, rendering progress according to a special rendering pattern And a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body appears in parallel, at least while a special effect pattern is being performed (period until symbol stop) Will allow this to continue without terminating the restore process.

  More specifically, in the restoration process started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored only by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body. Even if this is the case, the restoration process is not completed at least while the special rendering pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is performed over the entire period.

  According to such a configuration, restoration processing in a more serious manner (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration) aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state Since it becomes possible to perform additional implementation, etc., this special effect pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration and diagnosis, and the player will be carefully restored in this way as well. You will be able to watch the situation and enjoy the subsequent production with confidence. In this sense, it is desirable that a special effect pattern be prepared to be selectable only when it is determined to be a big hit. In addition, as a display content on the effect display device 1600, it is desirable to make a unique display mode such as "It is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while".

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) and (d), the timing tm 11 arrives when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is continued without ending it even after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the restriction that "the recovery processing is forced to be performed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed although the abnormality occurs in the specific movable decorative body" is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform restoration processing in a more serious manner.

  However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended, if there is a case that the effect pattern corresponding to the new symbol variation is performed without interruption of the reserve process, the next restoration operation time (here, next time Design fluctuation start time will come. At this time, assuming that the restoration process started at timing tm 11 is still continued, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (eg, not located at the original position). It will be done. Then, if it is possible to newly start the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only the restoration process can not be performed, the contents of the process are naturally limited, and the inability to sufficiently cope with the abnormality may accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307A (b) and (d), it is in a situation of executing restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body When the next restoration operation time (here, next symbol fluctuation start time) comes, it is made to continue this in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time without ending the restoration processing in the execution state . According to such a configuration, "despite the occurrence of an abnormality in the specific movable decorative body, regardless of the status under which the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is being performed is under any circumstances. With regard to the restoration process, the restriction that “the pattern change must be performed for each unit to be performed” is eliminated, so that the restoration process can be performed in a more serious manner.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 307A (c) and (d), as a result of a new symbol variation being started when the restoration process for a specific movable decorative object is being performed, the new symbol variation As, "a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) to (c), it is started from timing tm 11 regardless of the state of the game or the effect after the special effect pattern is finished (further, the state of restoration, etc.). For the timing tx at which the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is completed, the time required for the next specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation to arrive (more preferably, It is desirable to finish within a time shorter than the time until the predetermined effect is performed. Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (the time required for the special effect pattern to be digested), a specific movable over a relatively long time until the time of timing tm12 to tx is ended It will be possible to continue the restoration process for the decoration.

  When a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed after the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is ended, the situation appears. Do not end the restoration process within the new special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis), straddle three or more times of the symbol variation (effect pattern) (after the one restoration process is started, One restoration process may be continued in the form of two or more restoration operation timings).

  In the example shown in FIG. 307A, at the timing tx when the “process for causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that it will be in the state. As described above, by continuing the one restoration process in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored conventionally. However, this can be made recoverable, and it becomes possible to perform a rendering operation of a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, in spite of the fact that one restoration process is continued in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), at the time tx, the specific movable decorative body is abnormal When the state can not be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained from timing tx until the symbol variation is ended and the next restoration operation time further arrives. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to cause the specific movable decorative body to perform rendering operation at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the rendering performance as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation at the specific timing tm2, thus providing a surprise effect. Will be able to

  It should be noted that in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific operation is performed each time the restoration operation time (here, symbol fluctuation start time) arrives. When the restoration process for the movable ornament of the present invention is started several times, if the specific movable ornament is broken to an unrecoverable degree, the specific movable ornament can not be restored. There is a concern that the fun of the game may be reduced by repeating the recovery process for the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is put in an abnormal state, the number of execution times of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) reaches the predetermined upper limit number although the restoration operation timing has arrived for the predetermined upper limit number Although it is not restored from the abnormal state, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body even if a new restoration operation time comes after that.

  However, on the other hand, only after a specific effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the predetermined upper limit number after the specific movable decorative body is put in an abnormal state. If there is a situation where an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears, a special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and its condition One restoration process may be continued in the form of straddling the next rendering pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is put in the abnormal state, although the restoration operation timing has arrived by the predetermined upper limit number, it is not restored from the abnormal state. Even when the “1” th restoration operation time has come, this will be continued without ending the restoration process for the specific movable decoration. In this manner, with regard to the aspect in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation time, the predetermined upper limit number is set even if the number of times the restoration operation time arrives while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable to treat as one count of recovery processing so that it is not terminated so as not to prevent the recovery processing in a more serious manner from being prevented.

  By the way, about such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation), the board side movable decorative body (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, the back, etc. provided on the game board 5 side) In addition to the medium movable effect unit 3200, the specific decoration member SDY (such as a pottery), etc., basically, it is executed in the manner as described above also for the frame side movable decoration provided on the door frame 3 side. Ru. However, among the frame-side movable decorative members provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative members that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation button 410 provided movably, the sword decorative member 5001, etc.) In some cases, restoration (restoring) may be performed in a manner different from that in the case of the specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which symbol variation is performed, movable operation in which the operation opportunity imparting effect of giving the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed. An effect pattern of a system (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252) is prepared. And, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “a process of moving the sword decorative body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 252 (f))”; "Process of generating effect reception period for sword decorative body 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))", further "display prompting operation (character display such as" press down ", bar display showing remaining time of effect reception period Processing (refer to FIG. 252 (f)) is performed. As a result, when the sword decorative body 5001 moved to the operation position is operated (here, an operation to be pushed in) and this is received as an effect, “specific decoration member SDY And the like (see FIG. 252 (g)) and “the process of causing a change in display content (see FIG. 252 (g))” are performed. Become. Note that the board-side movable decorative body subjected to the rendering operation in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described in FIG. 306 or 307A.

  However, in the “process to move the sword decorative body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” in such an operation opportunity giving effect, it is not executed when the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state. While it is possible to execute when it is in the state, the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state with respect to the “processing to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001” and “the processing to display prompting for operation”. It can be executed at any time or in an abnormal state. Therefore, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by the player who saw the “display prompting the operation” and the effect is accepted, A process of performing a rendering operation of a panel-side movable decorative body such as a specific decoration member SDY (a jumbo object) and a process of causing a change in display content in the effect display device 1600 are respectively performed. Moreover, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the abnormal state is that the sword decorative body 5001 receives an external force by the operation by the player and the operation part operates. It may also occur if the problem is resolved by itself.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 etc. provided movably provided) which is also used as operation means In the case of an abnormal state, a return process for applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative member (operation means) to the original position (in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307A) The restoration process) is performed at each timing of “the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)” and “after the effect is accepted by the player operation in the effect pattern of the movable operation system”. It is made feasible.

  According to such a configuration, when the panel-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the panel-side movable is aimed at timings such as start time and stop time (more strictly, after start and stop) of the symbol variation. When the frame side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state while the process of restoring the decorative body is performed, the original timing (during the fluctuation period) is different from the original timing of the start or stop of the design change. The frame-side movable decoration (operation by the player) may be applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means), and the frame-side movable decoration (operation may be canceled). Since the process of restoring (removing) means is performed, it is expected that the original position return of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in an abnormal state can be realized early. .

  FIG. 308 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the original position when the sword decorative body 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decorative body (operation means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 308, an effect pattern of the movable operation system (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity imparting effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 while the symbol variation is performed) is executed now. At timing tm21, it is assumed that "a process of moving the sword decorative body 5001 from the original position to the operation position" is performed. Then, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operation position, “processing for generating a presentation reception period for the sword decorative body 5001”, “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ pressing in ”, and effect reception period If the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 and the effect is accepted while the bar display showing the remaining time of the is being executed (timing tm 22), “specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) etc. A process of causing the board-side movable decorative body to perform rendering operation and a process of causing a change in display content of the presentation display device 1600 are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 308, based on the fact that the effect has been accepted, the specific movable decorative body described in FIG. 306 and FIG. 307A is operated as a board-side movable decorative body.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 308, an abnormality occurs in the sword decorative body 5001 at the timing tm22 when the effect is received in this way and this is not returned to the original position, and the specific movable decoration that performed the effect based on the effect It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (the movable decoration on the panel side) and the abnormality is not returned to the original position. At this time, the determination that the abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 and the determination that the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration will be made respectively, but the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration. With regard to the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound and the display notification that accompany it are executed, but also the specific notification sound and the display with regard to the determination that the abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable that at least one of the notification be performed. This is that the sword decorative body 5001 is "placed in the place where the player can reach (door frame 3)," and if it is notified that this is an abnormal state, repair work from the abnormal state will be performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is "placed out of the reach of the player (the game board 5)", which has become abnormal. The player can not help anything as a player, and simply emphasizing that the movable effect is not performed may promote a decrease in the amusement of the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 308, an abnormality is detected in the specific movable decorative body while performing the “process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform rendering operation” based on the fact that the effect is accepted at timing tm22. Although this will occur, the process of causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600 is performed as usual, thereby recognizing that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, with the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body both kept in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, at timing tm23, the symbol variation which is already in the holding state is immediately digested (for example, after 0.6 seconds) so as to be digested (started), and the new symbol It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 306 is executed as the effect pattern according to the change. That is, in a specific effect pattern, a specific movable decorative body is rendered to operate at a timing tm2 at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, at the time of symbol variation start The timing tx at which “the process of causing the specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is started is started within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the state of restoration). It is as mentioned above that it is made to be finished by the time it is until a predetermined production is started.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment, “specific movable decoration is made based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (here, at the time of symbol variation start) for the sword decorative body 5001 as well. It is possible to execute a process of causing the body to perform a predetermined restoring operation and a process of applying (driving force) to return it to the original position in parallel with at least a part of the operation. Moreover, the timing at which the “process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed is also similarly within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, the predetermined effect regardless of the state of restoration). Until it is started)).

  According to such a configuration, the recovery operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed at the timing tm2. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a rise when the restoring operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, the timing at which restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body starts and ends is the same as the timing at which restoration processing for the sword decorative body 5001 starts and ends. However, only one of the timings may be the same, or any of the timings may be different.

  Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 307A, “the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation”, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears, as described with reference to FIG. 307A. It is possible to continue even after the special effect pattern is over, and of course, the symbol variation that is on hold after the special effect pattern is over is immediately digested (started after 0.6 seconds, for example) In the situation where it is possible to carry out by continuing this process (one restoration process) without ending it when straddling the next restoration operation time (here, next symbol variation start time), It is desirable that “the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoring operation” can also be performed in the same mode (the mode described with reference to FIG. 307A). That is, in this case, also in the "process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoring operation", when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoring operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing) is straddled. It will be executed in the form, but it should be finished regardless of the situation of restoration between the start of the next symbol fluctuation and the time required for the timing tm2 to arrive. Become.

  In addition, after this is made abnormal also for the sword decorative body 5001, only a special effect pattern (a effect pattern for restoration and diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then a special effect pattern ( When a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears, the special effect pattern for the predetermined upper limit number and the subsequent effect pattern are straddled It is also possible to continue one restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 in question.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that at timing tx, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration processing for the sword decorative body 5001 are ended, but both restoration fails. Therefore, at timing tm2, the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is developed while the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the abnormal state. As a result, the symbol variation is stopped at timing tm24.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force is applied to a specific movable decorative body (does not apply a driving force by a motor or the like) within a period of timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern. Even when returning to the original position (in a normal state) due to, the rendering operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at timing tm2. That is, it can be said that the application of an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) to a specific movable decorative body within the period of timing tx to tm2 is itself an abnormal situation. In such a low-reliability situation, it is highly possible that it will not fail even if the rendering operation is performed by a specific movable decorative body, so that not doing this suppresses the decline of the game entertaining It is desirable to do it.

  Moreover, when the restoration process with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 fails and the abnormal state occurs again, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification associated with this be performed. That is, if there is a case where the recovery process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and notification is made every time the abnormal state occurs again, a misunderstanding is given as if it is the player's responsibility that the abnormal state is not eliminated. Since there is a risk that the above-mentioned notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and a display notification) is performed only when the first abnormality occurs from the normal state to the abnormal state, the player is urged to perform a repair operation. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 308, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are restored by the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, symbol variation start time) arriving after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state. Then, now, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again while only the sword decorative body 5001 is in the abnormal state, and as shown in FIG. 308, the sword decorative body 5001 which is in the abnormal state at timing tm 25 is Assuming that the effect is accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect the possibility that the abnormality occurring in the sword decorative body 5001 is eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state at timing tm 25 is accepted for presentation by the operation of the player, the sword decorative body 5001 is It is possible to apply a driving force so as to return to the position (retain in the original position). In this case, in view of the fact that the movable decorative effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed based on the effect reception, the period during which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed (once The period when it succeeds in the return operation) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is ended (the specific movable decorative body is returned to the original position) It is desirable to make it finish before it is returned, in order to make it hard to recognize that such return processing is being performed. However, in view of the fact that there are few chances for recovery of the sword decorative body 5001 that has been unable to return so far due to such external force (operation by the player), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the original position. If the process of applying the driving force to return to its original state (return operation to the sword decorative body 5001) fails, the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is ended. By continuing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (execution of the return operation to the sword decorative body 5001 again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation, thereby the player It is desirable to prompt for help. However, it is desirable that, even if the return processing fails, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification associated with the return processing is performed.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decorative body 5001 using such external force (operation by the player) is successful, and thereafter, While the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are kept in the normal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

  Thus, according to the example shown in FIG. 308, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) which is also used as the operation means is set for the panel-side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) In addition to the restored operation timing (when symbol variation starts), the restoration operation timing (timing after the effect is accepted) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as the operation means, is likely to be in an abnormal state because it is directly contacted by the player, but it is an original state even if it is an abnormal state. An abnormal state is eliminated since a large number of opportunities for position return are given and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying a driving force, a mode of returning using at least an external force) are also used as a method of returning. The possibility of game play is also high, and the decline in

  In addition, about processing which gives driving force for returning to the original position to the sword decorative body 5001 after the effect is accepted by the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 which is in the abnormal state, the symbol fluctuation start A driving force may be applied to the sword decorative body 5001 with contents (different operation modes) different from the restoration processing performed when the time (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the sword decorative body 5001 is returned using the external force (operation by the player), the processing is performed with contents different from the processing when the external force is not used. It is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, regarding the processing, it is decided to execute in a simple mode that the return processing is ended within the symbol variation regardless of the status of the return, and when the return fails, it becomes more serious at the next restoration operation timing. It is desirable that a proper recovery process be performed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 308, the restoration operation timing (here, symbol variation start timing) has arrived by a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing on the sword decorative body 5001 has been executed the number of times. Even if the situation is not restored from the abnormal state, it is movable when the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) comes. Even when the effect-related effect pattern of the operation system is started and effects are accepted by the player's operation on the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state at timing tm 25, after the effect is received, the sword decorative body 5001 is It is desirable to perform processing for applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (retain in the original position). That is, as described above, the return processing after the effect is accepted is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decorative body 5001 which has not been able to return so far due to an external force (operation by the player) is increased. From the fact that it can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even in the above-mentioned situation where return without external force is given up. Therefore, “process to generate effect reception period for sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))” and “display for prompting operation (“ press down ”character display or bar indicating remaining time of effect reception period It is important that the process of performing the display) (see FIG. 252 (f)) is performed as usual even in the above-mentioned situation where the return without external force is collected.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 is pushed in a state of being located at the operation position (when moving to a specific detection position) when a first operation opportunity is given and when it is in an original position (pushing to a specific detection position When the operation means is provided such that there is a case where the second operation opportunity is given so as to operate), even if the effect reception has occurred in the second operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not given, but the driving force for returning to the original position is given only when the effect reception is generated at the first operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the second operation opportunity is given, even if the effect is accepted, the amount of movement of the operation part is relatively small, and the possibility that the abnormal state is eliminated is also expected to be naturally low.

  In addition, the process for applying the driving force for returning to the original position to the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword decorative body 5001 which has been in the abnormal state is accepted by the operation of the player is not necessarily the effect reception It does not need to be performed on condition that it is done, for example, it may be made to execute after completion of the effect reception period.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 304 to 308, the symbol variation start timing (and the timing after receiving the effect) is illustrated as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation. However, regarding the restoration operation timing, The predetermined timing may be determined on the condition that symbol fluctuation is executed at least, and may be used as at least one of symbol fluctuation start timing and symbol fluctuation stop timing, for example. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration processing is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and this start Allowing the restored processing to end until the timing tm 2 in the specific effect pattern that has been reserved is reached, or to execute it so as to extend over after the end of the special effect pattern that has been reserved The above-described respective processes are performed.

  Further, the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may be different according to the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state in which the movement frequency of the movable decorative body is high occurs, an abnormal state is more likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is high. Therefore, in the special effect state, a normal effect state It is desirable to make the game possible so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the case of.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 etc.) used as an operation means or a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the above special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 307A, the abnormal state is over the period after the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol variation is started. It is possible to continuously execute one restoration process for the movable decorative body in the above. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, a symbol variation start time) arrives while one restoration process is continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is renewed again Because it does not start it, and it will continue this without ending one restoration process that is already in the running state, it can be moved separately from the movable ornament that is the target of the restoration process. When the decorative body newly becomes abnormal, it becomes a problem at which timing the restoration process for the other movable decorative body is started.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307A, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative object started at timing tm11 is a new restoration operation time (next time after time tm12 when the special rendering pattern ends) It is continuously executed without ending even when crossing over the start time of symbol variation. In this respect, an abnormality has newly occurred in the movable decorative body other than the specific movable decorative body between the time when the timing tm 11 elapses and the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) comes In the case where at least one of the following methods 1 to 3 or “both method 1 and method 2” or “both method 1 and method 3” is used, the restoration process for the other movable ornament It is desirable to do

  Method 1: In the case where at least a specific movable decorative body is provided as a panel-side movable decorative body while the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body When a new restoration operation time (the next design change start time) arrives while one restoration process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (the next design change start time) Is newly started on another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) based on the arrival of.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state, It will be treated as effective for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) for which restoration processing is not yet executed, and the other movable decorative body will be triggered by the timing (new restoration operation timing) It is possible to newly start the restoration process on the body (frame-side movable decoration). That is, in this case, a situation appears in which restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) and restoration processing for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are simultaneously performed, There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorations, and early return of the movable decorations will be expected.

  Method 2: When at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body continues Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) arrives during execution, at that time, the specific movable process (the movable decoration on the panel side) is not started, and a specific process is started. After waiting for the completion of one restoration process for the movable decoration, another movable decoration (board-side movable decoration) is based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) Start the restoration process for the body).

  According to the method 2, although the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for the specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state, It will be treated as an effective thing with respect to another movable decorative body (board side movable decorative body) in which the restoration processing is not yet executed. In this respect, when starting the restoration process for another movable decoration (the board-side movable decoration), the process waits for completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decoration. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of the movable ornaments will be expected.

  Method 3: When at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body continues Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) comes in execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). Is not executed, and waits for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body, and then takes another movable decorative body (the movable side of the board (in the movable side of the board) Start the restoration process for the decoration body).

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is the restoration process for the specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state, and another movable decoration that is not yet in the execution state It is treated as invalid for either of the restoration process for the object, and even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration, unless one restoration process for the specific movable decoration is ended. No processing for an abnormal state is performed. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being performed, those movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to sufficiently cope with the abnormality, and it is expected to suppress the progress rate of deterioration as the movable decorative body.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 307B and FIG. 307C, regarding modes (the above-described methods 1 to 3 and the like) when a new restoration operation timing (such as start timing and end timing of symbol variation) arrives during execution of the restoration operation. I will explain in detail.

  First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decorative body (the above-mentioned "specific movable decorative body"), the second movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, and the second movable decorative body are described as movable decorative bodies capable of rendering operation for convenience of explanation. At least the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body are provided. When only one of the movable decorative bodies is not in the normal state, the movable decorative bodies not in the normal state are the “first movable decorative body”, the “second movable decorative body”, and the “third movable decorative body”. In any of the movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body, the movable decorative body which is not in the normal state has a restoration operation time (pattern The restoration operation (restoration processing) is started when the start timing and the end timing of the fluctuation have come.

  However, when there are a plurality of movable ornaments that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, all of the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state are restored simultaneously with the restoration operation timing. If there is a case where (restoration processing) is started, it is feared that the player can not concentrate on the effect according to the symbol variation and will be raised.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this explanatory example, when there are a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes, a part of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state Only when the restoration operation time has arrived, it is possible to start the restoration operation, thereby avoiding that all the movable ornaments not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once. The restoration operation is realized in a mode according to the situation.

  For example, now, as shown in FIG. 307B, timing tm 32 when symbol variation (first time) is finished (losing stop) and next symbol variation (second time) is started (restoration corresponding to symbol variation When the operation time has come), abnormality occurs in all of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body. It is assumed that In addition, although "abnormality" here means that it is in the condition where "abnormality" was detected by the detection means, it does not necessarily need to be in the condition where "abnormality" is detected, and the movable decorative body It may simply mean that "abnormal" is occurring (undetected state) as.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this explanation example, based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm 32), the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed. However, here, with respect to the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, and the fourth movable decorative body, the respective restoring operations are started in parallel, but the third movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body For the movable decorative body of the above, the recovery operation is not started, and the process is on standby in the abnormal state. As a result, it is avoided that all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once, and the restoration operation according to the situation is realized.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the third movable decorative body which is kept in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm32, it waits for the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35) to arrive. Instead, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed. As a result, it is possible to restore all the movable ornaments not in the normal state to the normal state relatively early while avoiding avoiding that all the movable ornaments not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once become.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fifth movable decorative body which is kept in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm 32 is when the next restoration operation timing (the timing tm 35) comes. Also, the restoration operation is not started, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm 36 when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is ended. As a result, it is preferable to prevent the plurality of movable decorative bodies from paralleling the restoring operation in a combination that hinders concentration on the effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307B, the restoration process for the second movable decoration is ended before timing tm 34 when the restoration process for the first movable decoration is ended, but the second movement When the restoration process for the decoration is completed, the "third movable decoration" or the "fifth movable decoration" does not start the restoration operation. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, the restoration process for the fourth movable decoration is ended after timing tm 34 when the restoration process for the first movable decoration is ended, but the fourth movable decoration The third movable decorative body does not start the restoration operation and does not maintain the standby state until the restoration process for the body is completed. When the restoration process for the fourth movable decoration is completed, Movable ornament of "does not start restoration operation.

  That is, the third movable decorative body starts restoration processing (restoration operation) when timing tm 32 arrives if the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is not in an abnormal state. If a specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state, restoration processing (restoration operation) is not started when timing tm 32 comes, and the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) After completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) of the movable decorative body 1), the restoration processing (restoration operation) is started.

  In addition, the fifth movable decorative body starts restoration processing (restoration operation) when timing tm 32 arrives if the first movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is not in an abnormal state, but the first movable decorative body If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not started when timing tm 32 comes, and the respective restoration processing of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body After waiting for (restoration operation) to finish, restoration processing (restoration operation) is started.

  Thus, according to the pattern variation, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorative body of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the effect) among the plurality of movable decorative bodies. It is possible to perform restoration processing while suitably maintaining an environment in which the effects can be concentrated.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, although the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state earlier than the “third movable decorative body”, the “first movable decorative body” is When the restoration process for “3” is completed, first, the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is started first. As described above, by not performing restoration processing in the abnormal state order, it becomes possible to preferentially restore normality from the movable decorative body with high stage importance, and it is preferable to make the game fun. It will be expected to be maintained.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) is ended (stoppage of lost) and the next symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the timing tm 35 (restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) at which the variation (third time) starts is reached. Such restoration operation timing functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body which has not been restored to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation timing (timing tm 35) without using such a function as the restoration operation timing. ing. As a result, based on the arrival of the timing tm 35, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is repeated. For example, in the case where the symbol variation (third time) executes the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body in the symbol variation (third time) There is a high probability that “the third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state” before the timing at which the “3” is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in the abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body may be restored to the normal state when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. If it does, it will be made possible to perform the rendering operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, the third movable decorative body is at timing tm 32 (the second pattern change is started) when the second pattern change (the second pattern change) is ended (the first pattern change is terminated). It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at a timing tm 31 before the restoration operation timing (corresponding to the symbol variation) comes. Then, as a result that timing tm32 (restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation) has arrived in the abnormal state, restoration processing (restoration operation) is started with a delay (timing tm34) to the timing tm32.

  However, for the third movable decorative body, it is later than timing tm 32 (restoration operation timing corresponding to pattern variation), and within a period in which the first movable decorative body is executing restoration processing (restoration operation) Even if a normal state is maintained until the “timing tm33” which is the timing of, and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm33, the restoration processing of the first movable decorative member (restoration operation as in the example shown in FIG. 307B It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm34 when the) is ended. That is, in this case, although the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at timing tm 33 and is in a situation where the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived, another movable decorative body Restoration processing (restoration operation) can be started using restoration operation timing (timing tm 32 which comes before timing tm 33) which is a trigger of restoration processing (restoration operation) for 1 movable decorative body) It will be possible to return to the normal state early. Details of the “restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm 32” will be described later.

  At this time, when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is prolonged and exceeds the timing tm35, it is desirable to continuously execute the restoration process so as to cross the timing tm35. Further, at timing tm35, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not started, but at the timing at which the restoration processing for the first movable decorative body performed so as to straddle timing tm35 is completed, It is desirable to start restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body.

  In this case, although the fifth movable decorative body is in the abnormal state when the timing tm32 (restoration operation timing) arrives, it is in the abnormal state when the timing tm32 (restoration operation timing) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decorative body" which has not been done can be started earlier than the "fifth movable decorative body", the movable decoration with high stage importance is important. It will be possible to restore normality preferentially from the body. Note that the “fifth movable decorative body” is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the “third movable decorative body” that was in the normal state when timing tm 32 (restoration operation time) arrived. Thus, restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm 32 is started. The “restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32” refers to the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative member in a program executed based on the arrival of timing tm32 And a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration, and an aspect in which each of these restoration processes is sequentially executed It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "third movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state, and it is determined that the abnormal state is in effect. The restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is in the "third Start the restoration process for "5 movable ornaments". If the "third movable decorative body" is not in the abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, the restoration process is not performed on the "third movable decorative body", and the "fifth movable decorative body" It is determined whether the movable decorative body of "is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is present, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decorative body" is in the normal state at the timing tm34, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34. It becomes.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, the “restoration process for the first movable decorative body” started with the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (first time) is “symbol variation (1 It is not finished even at the time when the timing tm 42 "when the next) pattern change (the second time) is started and the next pattern change (the stop of losing) is started (the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change has come) Of the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body when the timing tm 42 arrives. However, it is assumed that all cases are in an abnormal state.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, first, the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is not re-started from the beginning based on the arrival of the timing tm 42, and the timing tm 42 (the timing The execution is continued so as to straddle the restoration operation timing). As a result, based on the arrival of the timing tm 42, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration processing (restoration operation) is repeated. For example, in the case where the symbol variation (the second time) is to perform the movable effect using the first movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the first movable decorative body within the symbol variation (the second time) There is a high probability that “the first movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state” before the timing at which the “1” is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in the abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body may be restored to the normal state when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. If it does, it will be made possible to perform the rendering operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42), the restoration processing for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed. However, here, with regard to the fourth movable decorative body, although the first movable decorative body in the process of execution and the respective restoring operations are started in parallel, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body The movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body do not start the restoration operation and stand by in an abnormal state. As a result, it is avoided that all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once, and the restoration operation according to the situation is realized.

  In particular, for the second movable decorative body, as shown in FIG. 307B, when the first movable decorative body is in a state such as “not in the normal state and not performing restoration processing (restoration operation)”, Based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm 32), the restoration processing (restoration operation) is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body. Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) when the first movable decorative body is in a state such as “not in a normal state and executing restoration processing (restoration operation)”. When the recovery operation time (timing tm 42) arrives, the recovery process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started.

  That is, in the situation where the first movable decorative body executes the restoration process (restoration operation) across the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42), the first movable decorative body returns to normal (return to the original position) It can be said that it is in a situation where the player side is distracted by the “first movable decorative body” which is in such a state. And, in such a situation, if many movable decorative objects cause the restoration process (restoration operation) to be newly started, the player can not concentrate on the effect according to the symbol variation, resulting in a new appearance. Is concerned.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fourth movable decorative body of the movable decorative bodies (see FIG. 307B) capable of executing the restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel with the first movable decorative body In the condition shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration process is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body in the process of execution. On the other hand, with regard to the second movable decorative body, in the situation shown in FIG. 307C, the first movable movable body is not started in parallel with the first movable decorative body which is in the process of execution. It is maintained as a standby state until the restoration process for the decoration is completed. Then, in a state in which the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is finished, the time for the restoration operation time (timing tm 45 in FIG. 307C) newly awaits, and the timing tm 45 comes based on the arrival of the The restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started. As a result, when the first movable decorative body takes time to return to normal, it is suppressed that many movable decorative bodies newly start restoration processing (restoration operation), and the above-mentioned concern Will be resolved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as for the third movable decorative body which is kept in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at timing tm 42, similarly to the example shown in FIG. Without waiting for the arrival of (timing tm 45), the restoring operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm 44 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is ended. As a result, it is possible to restore all the movable ornaments not in the normal state to the normal state relatively early while avoiding avoiding that all the movable ornaments not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once become.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as for the fifth movable decorative body that is kept in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at timing tm 42, the next restoration operation timing is the same as the example shown in FIG. The restoration operation is not started even when (timing tm 45) arrives, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm 46 when the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is ended. It is like that. Thereby, it is suitably avoided that a plurality of movable ornaments parallel the restoration operation in such a manner as to inhibit concentration on presentation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307C, although the restoration process for the fourth movable decoration is ended before the timing tm 44 when the restoration process for the first movable decoration is ended, the fourth movable When the restoration process for the decorative body is completed, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, and the “fifth movable decorative body” do not start the restoration operation.

  That is, the third movable decorative body starts restoration processing (restoration operation) when timing tm 42 arrives unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If a specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state, restoration processing (restoration operation) is not started when timing tm 42 arrives, and the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) After completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) of the movable decorative body 1), the restoration processing (restoration operation) is started.

  The fifth movable decorative body starts restoration processing (restoration operation) when the timing tm 42 arrives if the first movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is not in an abnormal state, but the first movable decorative body If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, restoration processing (restoration operation) is not started when timing tm 42 comes, and each restoration processing of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body After waiting for (restoration operation) to finish, restoration processing (restoration operation) is started.

  Thus, according to the pattern variation, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorative body of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the effect) among the plurality of movable decorative bodies. It is possible to perform restoration processing while suitably maintaining an environment in which the effects can be concentrated.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) is ended (stoppage of lost) and the next symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the timing tm 45 (restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) at which the variation (third time) starts is reached. Such restoration operation timing functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body which has not been restored to the normal state. However, here, with regard to the third movable decorative body, the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation timing (timing tm 45) without using such a function as the restoration operation timing. ing. As a result, based on the arrival of the timing tm 45, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration processing (restoration operation) is repeated. For example, in the case where the symbol variation (third time) executes the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body in the symbol variation (third time) There is a high probability that “the third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state” before the timing at which the “3” is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in the abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body may be restored to the normal state when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. If it does, it will be made possible to perform the rendering operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, in the third movable decorative body, timing tm 42 (the second pattern change is started) at the end of the pattern change (the first pattern stop) (the first pattern stop). It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at a timing tm 41 prior to the arrival of the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation. Then, as a result that timing tm42 (restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation) arrives in the abnormal state, restoration processing (restoration operation) is started with a delay (timing tm44) to the timing tm42.

  However, for the third movable decorative body, it is later than the timing tm 42 (restoration operation timing corresponding to pattern variation), and within the period in which the first movable decorative body is executing restoration processing (restoration operation) Even if a normal state is maintained until the “timing tm 43” which is the timing of, and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm 43, the restoration processing of the first movable decorative body (restoration operation as in the example shown in FIG. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm 44 when the) is ended. That is, in this case, although the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at timing tm 43 and the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived, another movable decorative body Restoration processing (restoration operation) can be started using restoration operation timing (timing tm 42 which comes before timing tm 43) triggered by restoration processing (restoration operation) for 1 movable decorative body) It will be possible to return to the normal state early. The details of the “restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42” are as described in the “restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32”.

  In this case, although the fifth movable decorative body is in the abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoration operation timing) arrives, it is in the abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoration operation timing) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decorative body" which has not been done can be started earlier than the "fifth movable decorative body", the movable decoration with high stage importance is important. It will be possible to restore normality preferentially from the body. Note that the “fifth movable decorative body” is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the “third movable decorative body” that was in the normal state when timing tm 42 (restoration operation time) arrived. Thus, restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm 42 is started. The "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42" is the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative member in a program executed based on the arrival of the timing tm42. And a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration, and an aspect in which each of these restoration processes is sequentially executed It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "third movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state, and it is determined that the abnormal state is in effect. The restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is in the "third Start the restoration process for "5 movable ornaments". If the "third movable decorative body" is not in the abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, the restoration process is not performed on the "third movable decorative body", and the "fifth movable decorative body" It is determined whether the movable decorative body of "is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is present, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decorative body" is in the normal state at the timing tm44, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44. It becomes.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm 42) arrives, the movable decorative body (the first state) is not in the normal state (not in the original position even though it should be movable). Of the movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body, the restoration operation time (pattern variation (which occurs before this) With regard to the movable decorative body (the first movable decorative body) that is performing the restoration operation triggered by the start timing of the first time), the restoration operation is ignored without continuing the restoration operation, and this is continued However, with respect to the movable decorative body (the fourth movable decorative body) which has not been subjected to the restoration operation, the restoration operation can be started triggered by this without disregarding the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42). That is, in this case, depending on the situation in which each of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is placed, there are those that ignore the function as the restoration operation time and those that do not ignore it. In the midst of being carried out, restoration processing suitable for the situation will be realized.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 307C, the “first movable decorative body” performs the restoring operation triggered by the arrival of the restoring operation time (the start timing of the symbol fluctuation (the first time)) corresponding to the symbol fluctuation. When the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol variation (the second time)) corresponding to the symbol variation comes again during the execution, the first movable decorative member that is performing the restoration operation comes again At the timing of the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol variation (the second time)), the restoration operation can be continuously executed without being retried. That is, in this case, it takes time and effort to return to the normal state, and as a result, even if the restoration operation time comes again while performing the restoration operation, it is ignored because it is in the process of being executed. It is possible to continue the restoration operation without interruption, which makes it possible to prompt an early return of the movable decoration in an abnormal state.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, while the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is being performed across a plurality of variations, another movable decorative body (third movable decorative body) may be When an abnormality occurs, the third movable decorative body does not start the return operation at the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm 42) corresponding to the symbol variation, and the first movable decorative body in the process of execution is started. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the end of the restoration processing (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is not performed again when the restoration operation time comes (timing tm 42), and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is restoration operation It is not started at the arrival of the timing (timing tm 42), and the restoration process for the third movable decoration (immediately after the completion of the “restoring process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)” is continued. Since the restoration operation is to be started, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decoration of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the presentation) of the plurality of movable decorations. However, the plurality of movable decorative bodies can be returned to normal relatively early.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the third movable decorative body becomes abnormal at timing tm 43, the third movable decorative body has not come to the recovery operation time after becoming abnormal. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of timing tm 44 (the end timing of the “restoration process for the first movable decorative object (restoration operation) performed to straddle the restoration operation time)”. ing. That is, in this case, although the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at timing tm 43 and the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived, another movable decorative body Restoration processing (restoration operation) can be started using restoration operation timing (timing tm 42 which comes before timing tm 43) triggered by restoration processing (restoration operation) for 1 movable decorative body) It will be possible to return to the normal state early.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as a result of continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation) so as to straddle the restoration operation time, the movable ornament using the movable decoration within the symbol variation in which the movable decoration returned to normal When the execution timing of the effect arrives, the movable effect can be performed using the movable decorative body that has just returned to normal. In such a configuration, by continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state at an early stage by the timing when the movable effect is started.

  In addition, even if the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation arrives multiple times during the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration, all of them are ignored, and the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is performed. It is desirable to make it continue.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are in a relation of paralleling the restoration processing (restoration operation) as shown in FIG. 307B. is there. However, as shown in FIG. 307C, when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) comes while only the first movable decorative member is executing the restoration operation, the second movable at timing tm 42. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the decoration was not started, so that each restoration operation was not performed in parallel. As a result, when the first movable decorative body takes time to return to normal, it is suppressed that many movable decorative bodies newly start the restoration process (restoration operation).

  Then, when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm 45) comes after the restoration operation of the first movable decoration ends and returns to normal, restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is performed at the timing tm 45. It is made to start. According to such a configuration, the situation in which the first movable decorative body takes time to return to normal is eliminated, and immediately after the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started after waiting for the arrival of a new restoration operation timing (timing tm 45), it is possible to concentrate on the effect. It becomes possible to adjust the environment appropriately.

  At this time, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is ended due to a failure, a new restoration operation time (after the restoration process (restoration operation) ends) When the timing tm45) arrives, based on the arrival of the timing tm45, restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started. That is, in this case, since it is not possible to provide a movable effect using the first movable decorative body, normalizing only the second movable decorative body allows normal operation and the movable effect using the second movable decorative body It is desirable to make it feasible.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307 (C), after restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed and returned to normal, a period until a new restoration operation timing (timing tm 45) arrives When the first movable decorative body becomes abnormal again, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body restore their respective ones when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm 45) comes. It is desirable to start the processing (restoration operation) in parallel.

  In the above-described example, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is unsuccessful (does not return to the original position), the first movable decorative body It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body based on the end of the restoration processing (restoration operation). In addition, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration fails (does not return to the original position), the restoration process (restoration for the third movable decoration) is performed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the operation).

  In the above-described example, when the third movable decorative body is not in an abnormal state at the time when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is finished (timing tm 34, tm 44), the first movable decorative body It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the end of the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the body. In addition, when the third movable decorative body is newly brought into an abnormal state within the execution period of the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body” started in this way, the fifth movable decorative body When the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not performed based on the end of the restoration processing (restoration operation), when a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives It is desirable to perform restoration processing (restoration operation) on the third movable decorative body. However, when the new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, the restoration operation time comes when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body is not finished yet and is in the execution state. When "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament" is not started, and restoration operation time after "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the fifth It is desirable to start the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body”.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) corresponding to the symbol variation (the second time) comes, the symbol variation (1 With regard to the first movable decorative object that is performing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation time (timing tm 42) without resuming the restoration process (restoration operation) For the fourth movable decorative body that does not execute the restoration process (restoration operation) but ignores it, the restoration operation is triggered not by disregarding the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42). I'm trying to get started. In this respect, even the fourth movable decorative body that starts the restoration process (restoration operation) without neglecting the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) is new while the restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed. When the restoration operation time (timing tm43) comes, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation time (timing tm43) and to continuously execute the restoration operation so as to extend over the restoration operation time.

  When there is a movable decoration in a state where restoration processing (restoration operation) is being performed and a movable decoration that is in a waiting state for execution of restoration processing (restoration operation), there is an effect display related to symbol variation Even if a specific abnormal state that is not visible (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as abnormal due to a magnetic abnormality, etc.) occurs, while the above notification according to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state is being executed, The restoration process (restoration operation) which is already in the execution state is also continued without stopping it, and the restoration operation time is reached for the movable decorative body which is in the execution waiting state of the restoration processing (restoration operation) It is desirable to start the (restoration operation) anew.

  If there is a movable decorative body in a state of executing restoration processing (restoration operation) or a movable decorative body in a waiting state for execution of restoration processing (restoration operation), those movable decorative bodies are used When the execution timing of the moveable effects comes, the drive power for the effect execution is applied even if the drive power for the restoration process (restoration operation) is given to those moveable ornaments. It is desirable for achieving an early return to the normal state that there is no (no rendering operation). However, although the driving force for performing presentation is not given to those movable ornaments, the light emission provided in each movable ornament so that this may appear about the luminescence mode according to movable ornaments It is desirable to make the part emit light as usual. That is, in this case, the movable effect itself is not executed, and a part of the effects constituting the movable effect (light emission effect) is appropriately performed, so the degree of expectation (the ratio of the appearance of the big hit symbol) , And “0” and “100” (including “0” and “100”), different light emission modes appear in the “movable ornament not in the normal state”, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the fun of the game.

  In addition, with regard to the movable decorative body in the state where the restoration process (restoration operation) is ended due to a failure, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not performed even if the restoration operation time comes again, so at least power on continues. It can be said that the movable decorative body is not operated in movable presentation as long as However, even with the movable decorative body in such a state, when the timing at which the movable effect using the movable decorative body is performed comes, the movable effect itself is not performed, but the movable effect is configured. It is desirable that a part of the effect to be performed (light emission effect) be properly performed. That is, in this case, the movable decorative body has a different light emission mode depending on the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears and includes “0” and “100”) “the restoration process (restoration operation) ends in failure. It will also appear in the '', and it will be possible to maintain the game interest favorably.

  Note that the movable decorative body in the state of executing restoration processing (restoration operation), the movable decorative body in the waiting state for execution of restoration processing (restoration operation), and the state in which restoration processing (restoration operation) ended in failure. With regard to the movable decorative body in the above, the light emitting portion may be allowed to emit light as usual even when other effects are performed.

  The restoration operation timing may not only come in response to symbol variation, but also may come in due to another condition. Then, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is started at a specific time that arrives on a condition different from the symbol variation, while performing a specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration processing (restoration operation), When performing the restoration operation at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation, the restoration process (restoration operation) should be started (executed) in the non-informing state without performing the specific notification (the movable body abnormality notification). Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) corresponding to the symbol variation (the second time) comes, the symbol variation (1 With regard to the first movable decorative object that is performing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation time (timing tm 42) without resuming the restoration process (restoration operation) For the fourth movable decorative body that does not execute the restoration process (restoration operation) but ignores it, the restoration operation is triggered not by disregarding the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42). I'm trying to get started. As described above, even when the first movable decorative body takes time and effort to return to the normal state, the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) corresponding to the symbol variation arrives and the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not ignored. About "the 4th movable decoration that will start", it is used for important effects such as operating when the hit result is derived by the symbol change, or during the start or execution of the big hit game It is desirable to have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, for the third movable decorative body, “restoration processing (restoration operation for the first movable decorative body) succeeds in normal return (reference position detection) and failure (reference position Even if it is terminated (completed) in any of the cases where it is not detected), restoration processing (restoration operation) is started based on completion of the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, based on the fact that "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" ends in failure to return to normal, and that "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" ends. In the case where the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” performed is completed with normal return successfully, the third movable decorative body is abnormal again within the symbol variation that has succeeded in the normal return. When it comes to the state, "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" is not performed when restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation comes, "restoration processing for the third movable decorative body ( It is desirable to perform “restoration operation”.

  However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation arrives, the “fifth movable unit started based on the end of the“ restoration process (restoring operation) for the third movable decoration ”. When the restoration process (restoration operation) for the decoration is in an execution state, the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" and the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" "Restore processing for the first movable ornament" triggered by "restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation" that comes after the "restoration processing for the fifth movable ornament (restoration operation)" is finished. It is preferable that the “restoration operation (restoration operation)” be performed on the third movable decorative body without performing the “restoration operation”.

  It should be noted that after the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” is completed successfully after normal return, while “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” is being performed Even when an abnormality occurs again in the first movable decorative body, "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" is executed so as to straddle the restoration operation timing corresponding to the next symbol variation. In this case, it is desirable that the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” is not started at the restoration operation time. That is, in this case, “restoration processing for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)” at the restoration operation timing that comes after “restoration processing for the third movable decoration (restoration operation) ends with success or failure in normal return Will be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm 42) corresponding to the symbol variation (the second time) comes, the symbol variation (1 With regard to the first movable decorative object that is performing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation time (timing tm 42) without resuming the restoration process (restoration operation) Ignore this and let it continue. In addition, with regard to the third movable decorative body, the restoration operation time (timing tm 42) is ignored, and the completion of “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” is completed, Based on the restoration process (restoration operation) was started. In this respect, when the first movable decorative body becomes abnormal again while the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" thus started is being executed, the "third movable decorative body" When the restoration process (restoration operation) for the body is completed, the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation is not started based on the end based on the end, but rather than starting the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body It is desirable to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" based on the new arrival.

  However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation newly arrives, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration” is not completed and the situation in progress (the restoration operation time is crossed) It is desirable to ignore the restoration operation timing and to wait for the completion of “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” when it is in the situation where Then, the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament” is started at the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation that comes after the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament” is finished. It is desirable to make it

  That is, in this case, the “first movable decorative body” and the “third movable decorative body” are restored so as to restore the “first movable decorative body” to the normal state when both are in the abnormal state. When the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes while the third movable decoration is not in the normal state although the processing has a relation to be performed, the first movable decoration performs the restoration operation. When the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of time (when the third movable decoration is in a state where the restoration process is not performed) and when the restoration operation is not started (the third movable decoration is Since there is a situation where the restoration process is being performed, it is possible to realize the restoration process according to the situation.

  The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with setting change means capable of changing the selection probability of the winning probability or the effect pattern according to the hit determination. However, it is desirable to use the restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation as the same timing (for example, at the start of symbol variation), regardless of the setting of these probabilities.

  A movable decoration provided at a position where the player can contact the first movable decoration, the second movable decoration, the third movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration, and the fifth movable decoration. The body may be included. In this case, the movable decoration provided at the position where the player can contact is considered to be most likely to be in an abnormal state, so the restoration operation time comes regardless of the situation of the other movable decoration. Then, it is desirable to be provided as a "fourth movable decorative body" which starts restoration processing (restoration operation).

  After providing the light guide plate in which the light guiding pattern is exposed in front of the movable decorative body, without restricting the effect of exposing the light guiding pattern during the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body It is desirable to make it executable in order to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body.

  The “first movable decorative body” and the “second movable decorative body” shown in FIG. 307B and FIG. 307C are prepared so as to have a rendering relationship in which both are in an operating state in a specific movable rendering. It is desirable to do. For example, the “first movable decorative body” and the “second movable decorative body” may be decorated in relation to each other, or operated as a movable effect based on pattern variation (rendering pattern). Prepare the decoration (such as the completion of a character or a string of characters) as a shape. The third movable decorative body is prepared as a specific movable effect or one not used when forming one decoration. According to such a configuration, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is avoided that one decoration is formed in the same mode (operation at the same time) as the movable effect based on the symbol variation (render pattern) As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment.

  For the “first movable decorative body”, “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”, “fourth movable decorative body”, and “fifth movable decorative body”, the game board It may be divided into what is provided on the 5 side and what is provided on the door frame 3 side.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, the “first movable decorative body”, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, and the “first movable decorative body” Although it was decided to include five movable decorative bodies, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body However, it is not necessary to provide all of the movable decorative bodies, and one of the movable decorative bodies may be provided and appropriate two or three. Even with such a configuration, having the technical features described in reference to FIG. 307B and FIG. 307C (in what manner the restoration process is performed in relation to the “first movable decorative body”) It becomes.

[A penalty when operating the operation unit that can emit light]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player changes the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511 a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) Will be performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process of changing the setting value (brightness setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  In addition, about change acceptance about such a setting value (volume setting value, brightness setting value), and adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the condition does not change the symbol, and the symbol changes. Both in the present state and in the present state, it is possible to execute each operation by the player.

  By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the number of operation units to be operated by a player tends to increase, but these operation units may be treated in a miscellaneous manner. As a result, one of the operation units At the same time, if it breaks down, operability and rendition will drop significantly, so it will be inevitable to reduce the fun of playing games.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, separately from the operation button 410,
-A sword decorative body provided with a sword 5010 (sword 501, a handle 5012, and a collar 5013) movable (variable) by a predetermined operation (sword operation, sword operation) between the setting position and the cutting position 5001 (see Figure 192, Figure 222, etc.)
And an operation (extraction operation) for removing the sword 5010 (the blade 5011, the handle 5012, and the collar 5013) from the sheath 5020 even though the operation opportunity is not given. Repeated operation may cause a failure.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a rendering light emitting unit (not shown) is disposed to each of the blade 5011, the handle 5012, and the collar 5013, and the sword 5010 (blade) A special detection unit (not shown) capable of detecting whether or not the reference numeral 5011, the handle 5012, and the collar 5013) is at a specific position (original position) in which the sheath 5020 is in the storage state. And, at least during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed (non-playing state with no game effects or symbol variations according to the big hit determination), the sword portion 5010 is identified as a result of detection by the special detection unit. When it is determined that the position (original position) is not present, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to generate an effect restriction period as a penalty.

  According to such a configuration, at least in the non-playing state in which no symbol variation is performed, the sword unit 5010 is operated by a predetermined operation, and the effect light emitting unit (the sword 5011, the handle 5012, and the hook 5013) As a result of being displaced, it becomes possible for the effect restriction period to occur when it is detected that the operating portion is not located at the specific position, so that it is possible to suitably suppress the handling of the operation unit.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned "change of the setting value (volume setting value) applied to the output sound volume of the effect sound" and the above "setting value (luminance setting value) applied to the light emission luminance The above-described effect restriction period is generated while all of the above “changes” are accepted by the operation of the player. However, although this will be described later, in this production restriction period,
-With regard to the effect sound, even when the setting value (volume setting value) applied to the output volume is changed, the effect sound is not output at the volume according to the volume setting value, and the volume adjustment While the confirmation sound is not output,
-With regard to the effect lamp, when the set value (brightness set value) relating to the light emission brightness is changed, the effect light emitting portion provided in the sword unit 5010 to be detected among the plurality of effect lamps provided in the pachinko machine 1 (The blade 5011, the handle 5012, and the collar 5013) are not emitted at a brightness according to the brightness setting value, but are provided at a site different from the sword 5010 to be detected. With regard to the effect lamp (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decoration board of the game board 5 and the like), processing such as effect light emission with luminance according to the set value is made executable, etc. It can be done.

  According to such a configuration, although the setting value change for the sound volume and the setting value change for the luminance can both be accepted when the effect limitation period occurs, it is related to the sound volume setting The degree of restriction is different between the process and the process related to the luminance setting.

  That is, with regard to the effect sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the effect sound is not output in a form in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is By making the output not be output, the player is given a sense of tension (may have done something that can not be done).

  On the other hand, with regard to the luminance, even if the luminance setting value is changed for the effect light emitting part (the sword part 5011, the handle part 5012 and the collar part 5013) included in the "sword part 5010" operated by the player. Although the effect light emission is not performed in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected, the effect lamp provided at a site different from the “sword portion 5010” operated by the player is changed By making it possible to perform effect light emission (for example, light emission according to the timing when a specific advance notice effect is performed) in a form in which the brightness setting value is reflected, the rough handling of the "sword portion 5010" is the cause. While making it possible to recognize that a production restriction is imposed and warning it, it is preferable to appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole is intended to continue playing a game or a presentation It made. In this sense, as for the effect lamps on the game board 5 where the game balls run down or win, as is normal, the effect light emission is executed in a form in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected. Is desirable. In this way, it is possible to give a warning for handling the operating unit in a complicated manner, while suitably avoiding "the player's willingness to start playing the game or prompting the end of the game". become.

  Moreover, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the release condition for each restriction is made different depending on the restriction on the process related to the volume setting and the restriction on the process related to the luminance setting. . In particular, with regard to “processing related to volume setting” on the side that has imposed relatively strict restrictions at the beginning, it is strongly urged to continue the game by making it be improved to the normal state relatively early. On the other hand, the "processing related to the brightness setting", which had initially imposed a relatively sweet limit, showed a tendency to improve, while slowing the overall improvement speed or The restriction is left as it is, which makes it possible to maintain tension properly over a long period of time and to prevent rough handling again.

  FIG. 309 is a time chart showing an example of restrictions on volume setting and luminance setting when a penalty is generated for an operation on the sword 5010.

  Assuming now that the game is in a non-playing state in which a game is not being executed, such as in a demonstration screen, and in a normal state in which no error state or penalty has occurred, in this state, as shown in FIG. The execution of the process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is permitted. When the volume setting value is changed, a process of adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) is executed, and the adjusted volume The volume adjustment confirmation sound is output.

  In the same state, execution of processing to change the setting value (brightness set value) by the player regarding the brightness is also permitted. When the luminance setting value is changed, processing of adjusting the light emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (processing of reflecting the luminance setting value as light amount) is executed, and a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is output. It will be.

  In the same state, the handle LED (effect light emitting portion in the handle 5012), the eyelid LED (effect light emitting portion in the hook 5013), the blade LED (effect light emitting portion in the blade 5011), and the operation outside LED (game All of the effect lamps on the board 5 are in the state of “normal light emission”. Note that the state of “normal light emission” corresponds to “a state in which light emission is maintained” as long as it is provided as an effect lamp that always keeps light emission regardless of the state of effect. However, if the lamp is provided as an effect lamp that emits light based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition, the light emission waiting state in which the light emission state is permitted when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied It is a concept including “the light off state” and may not necessarily be in the light emitting state. In addition, it is desirable that the sheath portion 5020 be provided in a light transmitting manner so that the light emission mode of the blade LED can be confirmed even in the knato state.

  However, as shown in FIG. 309, as a result of performing the predetermined operation at timing to1 despite being in the non-playing state where the operation effect can not occur, as a result of the sword 5010 (the blade 5011, the handle Assuming that it is detected that 5012, buttocks portion 5013) is not in the state of a sword with respect to sheath portion 5020 (detection that it is not in the specific position (original position)), pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment. Then, first, the first effect suppression state is to be generated.

  In the first effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, the execution of the process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is permitted. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the process of adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is not performed, and the volume adjustment No confirmation sound is output.

  In the same state, execution of processing to change the setting value (brightness set value) by the player regarding the brightness is also permitted. In this respect, when the brightness setting value is changed, the pattern LED (effect light emitting portion in the pattern portion 5012) in the sword portion 5010 moved (displaced) by the predetermined operation among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 , And the processing for adjusting the light emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (the light setting value for the luminance setting value) for the amber LED (effect light emitting unit in the collar unit 5013) and the blade LED (effect light emitting unit in the sword unit 5011) Although the process of reflecting as) is not executed, the non-operation LED (the effect lamp on the game board 5) not moved (displaced) by the predetermined operation is based on the changed luminance setting value. A process of adjusting the light emission luminance (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light quantity) is performed. In the same state, although it may be possible to adjust the light emission luminance of some of the plurality of effect lamps (LED outside the operation unit), the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the adjustment is performed. It is like that.

  According to such a configuration, in the first effect suppression state, although both the setting value change for the sound volume and the setting value change for the luminance can be accepted, it is related to the sound volume setting The degree of restriction is different between the process and the process related to the luminance setting.

  That is, with regard to the effect sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the effect sound is not output in a form in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is By making the output not be output, the player is given a sense of tension (may have done something that can not be done).

  On the other hand, with regard to the luminance, even if the luminance setting value is changed for the effect light emitting part (the sword part 5011, the handle part 5012 and the collar part 5013) included in the "sword part 5010" operated by the player. Although the effect light emission is not performed in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected, the effect lamp (operation is provided on the game board 5 which is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation and in which a game is performed For extra LED, the effect light emission in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected (for example, if the game is started in this state and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a specific advance effect is performed It becomes possible to perform light emission according to the timing etc.). Therefore, it is possible to preferably appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the effect while warning the rough handling of the "sword portion 5010".

  More specifically, in the first effect suppression state, the handle LED (effect light emitting portion in the handle portion 5012) continues the light emission state (light emission for penalty) in a predetermined light emission luminance and light emission mode. It is controlled, for example, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed brightness setting value is not reflected, and the symbol variation is started and according to the result of the big hit determination Even if the light emission request is generated, the light emission aspect corresponding to this does not appear.

  In addition, the weir LED (the effect light emitting unit in the buttock unit 5013) can emit light as normal even in the first effect suppression state, and the effect lamp always maintains the light regardless of the condition of the effect If it is provided as "a state in which light emission is maintained", it is considered as a "predetermined effect" if it is provided as an effect lamp that emits light when a predetermined effect condition is established. The light emission waiting state in which the light emission state is permitted when the condition is satisfied is set. However, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the amber LED does not emit light in such a manner that the changed brightness setting value is reflected. Even in the section 5010, while allowing the light emission effect to promote the continuation of the game, it is possible to warn of rough handling of the "sword portion 5010".

  In addition, the sword LED (the effect light emitting unit in the blade 5011) is controlled to continue the extinguished state in the first effect suppression state, for example, the symbol variation is started and the light emission request according to the result of the big hit determination Even if it occurs, it does not respond to this. Therefore, in the blade LED, even if the luminance setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, it is impossible to effect the effect light emission in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected.

  On the other hand, no limitation is imposed on the LED outside the operation unit provided outside the sword unit 5010 which has been moved (displaced) by the predetermined operation, and the above-mentioned "normal light emission" state is continued It will be. Therefore, when the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed brightness setting value can be reflected (if it is in the light emitting state), and symbol variation is started and light emission according to the result of the big hit determination When a demand arises, the light emission aspect according to this will appear.

  In such a configuration, a restriction is imposed only on the effect lamp provided in the "sword portion 5010" which has moved by the predetermined operation, and therefore, for the game board 5 on which a game is to be performed The first effect suppression state is generated because it seems that the light emission luminance can be adjusted as usual when the luminance setting value is changed when there is such a thing that gazes only gather. There is a concern that will not be recognized. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the luminance setting value is changed by the operation of the player in the first effect suppression state, and the emission luminance of a part of the plurality of effect lamps (LED outside operation section) Even if the adjustment is performed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the effect is in a restricted state even when "sword portion 5010" is not visually recognized, and returns "sword portion 5010" to the original position. Will be able to prompt.

  Then, after the occurrence of such a first effect suppression state, at timing to 2, an operation to position the sword portion 5010 to the sword state is performed, and it is detected that the sword portion 5010 is in the knife state (specific If it is detected that the user is in the position (original position), the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs processing to shift from the first effect suppression state to the second effect suppression state.

  In the second effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, regarding the sound volume, all the restriction contents in the first effect suppression state are canceled and processed as normal. Not only the execution of the process of changing the volume setting value is allowed, but also the execution of the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume and the execution of the process of outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound are permitted. It has become.

  On the other hand, with regard to luminance, although the "restriction to the luminance adjustment confirmation sound" is released among the restriction contents in the first effect suppressed state, the "partial restriction to the luminance adjustment" is continued without being cancelled. It is supposed to be Therefore, in the second effect suppression state, the execution of the process of changing the brightness setting value, the execution of the process of adjusting the emission brightness of the LED outside the operation unit among the plurality of effect lamps, and the output of the brightness adjustment confirmation sound Although the execution of the process is permitted, the process of adjusting the light emission luminance of the effect lamp included in the sword unit 5010 among the plurality of effect lamps is not permitted to be performed (restricted state). It will be maintained as it is.

  That is, the second effect suppression state is a state that is generated based on "the fact that the sword 5010 is in the state of being inserted" is detected in the first effect suppression state, and the sword 5010 is already at the specific position (original Position), and it can be said that the rough handling has been eliminated. In response to this, with regard to "processing related to volume setting" that had imposed relatively strict restrictions at the beginning, it is strongly urged to continue the game by making it quickly and greatly improved to the normal state. The main purpose is

  However, if all restrictions are immediately released by simply returning the sword 5010 to a specific position (original position) after the first effect suppression state has occurred, the function as a penalty is insufficient. Yes, there is a risk that the rough handling of "Sword 5010" will come back. In this respect, according to the above-described configuration, in the first effect suppression state, when it is detected that the sword unit 5010 is in the sword state, transition to the second effect suppression state is made. Then, regarding the luminance, although the "restriction to the luminance adjustment confirmation sound" is released among the restriction contents in the first effect suppressed state, the "partial restriction to the luminance adjustment" is continued without being canceled. It is like that.

  That is, in this case, the "sword portion 5010" which is the object of the rough handling becomes an effect restriction by itself, so that the atmosphere in which it is difficult to perform the further rough handling with respect to the "sword portion 5010" (" It will be possible to provide "is broken or not" etc., and in turn it can be expected to prevent recurrence.

  On the other hand, in the second effect suppression state, since the rough handling of "sword part 5010" has already been eliminated, the situation where the player is gazing at the game board 5 where the game is played It can be said that the situation where concentration on games is in a desirable situation. In this point, in the second effect suppression state, the luminance setting value is changed when the player is watching the game board 5 on which the game is performed (the situation where the sword portion 5010 is not visually recognized). The brightness setting value is changed by the operation of the player to make it appear that the light emission brightness can be adjusted as usual (it seems to be in the normal state), and a part of the plurality of effect lamps (operation When the emission luminance of the extra LED is adjusted, a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is output. In this way, the player is concentrated on the game, and it is possible to avoid that the rough handling of the sword unit 5010 recurs.

  According to the second effect suppression state like this, the "processing related to the brightness setting" on the side that imposed a relatively sweet restriction at the beginning is a target of rough handling while showing improvement tendency It is possible to maintain the sense of tension appropriately for a long time and prevent the player from re-handling the rough handling by keeping the restriction only to the "sword part 5010" which has become a long time, while preventing the player from being treated again. It will be expected to concentrate on

  Moreover, in the second effect suppression state, some of the effect lamps (pattern LED, amber LED, blade LED) among the plurality of effect lamps are excluded from the adjustment targets of the light emission luminance, but other than that When the light emission luminance of the effect lamp (LED outside the operation unit) is adjusted, a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is output as in the case where the light emission luminance is adjusted in the normal state. That is, in this case, even if the second effect suppression state occurs, it is not a situation where the operation by the player can not be accepted, but it is possible to react by the operation by the player as in the normal state. It becomes possible to appeal, and it is possible to suitably promote the continuation of the game by the player.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even in the case where the light emission luminance is adjusted for only a part of the effect lamps (LED outside the operation part) in the second effect suppression state, the state is normal. The same brightness adjustment confirmation sound as that at a given time is assigned to a channel and output. As a result, even in a situation where only partial adjustment can be made, it is expected to give a sense of security as if it has already returned to the normal time, and to promote motivation to continue the game. However, when the second effect suppression state is ended and it shifts to the normal state, the brightness in the pattern LED is adjusted in such a way that the brightness setting value at that time is collectively reflected, but in this case the brightness It is important not to output the adjustment confirmation sound in order to make it appear as if it had already returned to normal.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the second effect suppression state occurred. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (timing to 3), it is possible to execute the process of ending the second effect suppression state and shifting to the normal state.

  In other words, for the transition condition from "the first effect suppression state with relatively strict degree of effect restriction" to "the second effect suppression state with relatively weak effect restriction degree", "operation by the player is a trigger" This makes it possible to establish this early, thereby making it possible to keep the desire for game continuation from being reduced. However, regarding the transition condition from "the second effect suppression state with relatively sweetness of effect restriction degree" to "the normal state", "a predetermined time has elapsed since the second effect suppression state occurs" It is not permitted to establish this early. By adopting these transition conditions, it is possible to effectively issue warnings for rough handling while making it possible to maintain a desire to continue the game suitably, which in turn can be expected to prevent a recurrence It will be.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, a plurality of effect lamps provided in the "sword portion 5010" which is a target of miscellaneous handling. With regard to some of the effect lamps (here, the amber LED and the sword LED) of (the handle LED, the amber LED, and the sword LED), the second effect suppression state is ended and the normal state is restored. Also, only "limited" emission is permitted.

  More specifically, although it is possible to perform light emission as normal with regard to the amber LED and the sword LED, even if the luminance setting value is changed, the changed luminance setting value is reflected. However, the effect light emission can be performed only at a predetermined luminance setting value. That is, in this case, in particular, only the effect light emission under the same restriction is continuously performed after the occurrence of the first effect suppression state for the indigo LED, which may cause a failure in part. It will be expected that it will be made to be conscious and it will be suppressed that the rough handling with respect to "Sword part 5010" is relapsed. Alternatively, even after the effect suppression state ends and becomes the normal state, it can be made to function as a history in which the effect suppression state has occurred before that, and stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 is expected. Will be able to In addition, about the said production | presentation restriction | limiting left with respect to a coffin LED and a blade LED, you may make it maintain impossible with cancellation, for example, conditions different from before, such as RAM clear and power-off etc. It is desirable to be made releasable.

  According to such a configuration, even after the completion of the first effect suppression state and the processing related to the volume adjustment is returned to normal, further stepwise improvement is required for the processing related to the luminance adjustment As a result, it becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension for a longer time while maintaining the gaming desire.

  In addition to the non-playing state (during demo screen etc.), the first production suppression state (furthermore, the second production suppression state), the pattern according to the result of the game execution state (big hit determination) in which the game is being executed When it is detected that the sword unit 5010 is not in the sword state (detected that it is not in the specific position (original position)) even when it is in the middle of a fluctuation or a jackpot game state etc.) It is desirable to do. That is, even in the gaming state (during the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment, etc.), the sword 5010 should not be treated in a miscellaneous manner in the state where the operation opportunity is not given, etc. It is because it is desirable to be treated properly.

  However, even if it is in the state controlled to the “second effect suppression state” shown in FIG. 309, the reception regarding the change of the luminance setting value is made when it is in the game execution state (the symbol variation is in the execution state) It is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound when the brightness adjustment according to this is performed. That is, when the “first effect suppression state” is shifted to the “second effect suppression state”, at least the processing side related to the volume adjustment is released from all restrictions, so the sense of tension is well maintained. There is a concern that you will not be able to Anyway, in order to strongly encourage game continuation, it is important to greatly improve the restriction on the "processing related to volume adjustment" which has been so strict.

  In this respect, "when tension can not be maintained well" means that the game is resumed under the condition that the second effect suppression state has occurred (the situation where the first effect suppression state where the production restriction is strict is finished). It is assumed that it is a case where it has ended, conversely, it is also assumed that in a situation where the game is not resumed, the situation where tension can be maintained well. Therefore, even in the second effect suppression state, when it is in the execution state (resumption of the game) of the symbol variation assumed that tension can not be maintained well, it is not possible to dare output the brightness adjustment confirmation, "brightness If only the processing related to the adjustment is seen, it can be expected that a proper sense of tension will be given by making the first effect suppressed state not appear to be improved.

  In this sense, in the situation where it is controlled in the “second effect suppression state” shown in FIG. 309, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the reception regarding the change of the volume setting value is made, and the volume adjustment according to this Even when the above is performed, the volume adjustment confirmation sound may not be output. In addition, for such special processing (processing not to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound, processing not to output the luminance adjustment confirmation sound) when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the second effect suppression state ends and the restriction is one. It may be applied also when the situation is returned to the normal state in the form of parted. That is, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output while the game execution state is in progress, or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the meaning can not be understood and the game is performed. It is because there is a possibility that it can not be concentrated.

  In the above-described example, the handle LED, the eyelid LED, and the blade LED are provided. However, the sword 5010 may have at least the handle LED as an effect lamp. Even with such a configuration, the gaming intention can be maintained by showing gradual improvement while warning the rough handling to "sword portion 5010" in the first effect suppression state and the second effect suppression state. It is possible.

  Further, in the above example, as soon as "detecting that the sword unit 5010 is in the sword state" is detected in the first effect suppression state, the "first effect suppression state" is shifted to the "second effect suppression state" Although the processing is performed, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, based on the fact that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since "detection that the sword 5010 is in the cutting state" in the first effect suppression state. A process may be performed to shift from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”. According to such a configuration, while allowing relatively early transition from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”, at least a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is a effect restriction It becomes possible to maintain it in the strict first effect suppressed state. The predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) may be set to be shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) required from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end of the second effect suppression state. Although desirable, it is not necessarily limited to this.

  Further, in the above described example, although the generation factor of the effect restriction is the predetermined operation on the operation means (sword portion 5010), it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, even if it is a specific object which is not an operation target by the player (for example, an object which can be moved between the first state and the second state, such as the decorative movable body or the door frame 3), If it is forced to be displaced, it may cause a failure. Therefore, based on the fact that the specific object is detected not to be in the original position after at least providing "a lamp subject to the effect limitation such as the above-mentioned handle LED" as the at least effect lamp to the specific object. It is desirable to generate the effect suppression state as described above. That is, in this case, regardless of whether it is in the non-playing state or the playing state, the first effect suppression state as described above is based on the fact that the specific object is detected not to be in the first state (original position). The second effect suppression state as described above is generated based on the detection that the specific object is returned to the first state (original position), and a predetermined time has elapsed from the generation. It will be returned to the normal state (or the restricted normal state) based on that.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Further, in the above example, after the change to the sound volume setting value is received for a plurality of times in the “first effect suppression state”, the “second effect suppression” is performed when transitioning to the “second effect suppression state” At the time of transition to the “state”, the sound volume adjustment is performed in a form that the contents of multiple changes to the sound volume setting value so far are collectively reflected. In addition, if the change to the luminance setting value is received multiple times in the “first effect suppression state” or the “second effect suppression state”, when the state is returned to the normal state at timing to3, the “normal state” is performed. At the time of the transition, the luminance of the handle LED is adjusted in a form in which the contents of multiple changes to the luminance setting value up to that time are collectively reflected. The method (including the output presence or absence of the adjustment confirmation sound at that time) of the method in which such multiple setting value changes are collectively adjusted at “a timing” is the contents described with reference to FIGS. This can be realized by appropriately adopting Also, in this case, since the timing to2 when the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing to3 when the brightness setting value can be collectively reflected are different, it is possible to gradually show the way to return to the normal state. As a result, the player can be motivated to continue the game by making it look as if it had already returned to normal time or making it appear to be recovering. In addition, the predetermined time from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end may be about 10 seconds.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be made recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. It is

[Brightness adjustment at notification of abnormality]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, in addition to the volume adjustment buttons (the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332), various types of the pachinko machine 1 are provided. There is a button for adjusting the brightness to the effect lamp (the lamp targeted for effect control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a), and if it is determined that the button for adjusting the brightness is operated, the game regarding the brightness applied to various effect lamps It is possible to execute a process of changing the setting value (brightness setting value) by the user (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, if there is a rendering lamp that is in a light emitting state when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, a process of adjusting the emission brightness of the rendering lamp based on the changed brightness setting value ( A process of reflecting the luminance setting value as the light quantity is performed. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  In addition, with regard to the effect lamp that is not in the light emission state when the brightness setting value is changed, when the light emission request based on the result of the big hit judgment is made thereafter, the brightness according to the changed brightness setting value It will be in the light emission state. More specifically, if it is provided as an effect lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the state of effect, light emission according to the changed brightness setting value as soon as the change of the brightness setting value is accepted If it is to be changed to a light emission mode with luminance, but is provided as a rendering lamp that emits light based on that a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied (representation request according to a big hit determination), the predetermined The effect light emission is performed as the light emission luminance according to the changed luminance setting value at the timing when the effect condition of the above is satisfied. That is, until the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect light emission with the light emission luminance according to the changed luminance setting value is maintained in the state (light emission waiting state) that is enabled.

  In addition, with regard to the change acceptance according to the luminance setting value and the adjustment processing according to the changed luminance setting value, the player does not change the symbol, and the player changes the symbol. It becomes possible to execute each by operation by.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, when the specific abnormality detection as illustrated in FIG. 156 occurs, the abnormality notification according to the abnormality type is performed, but as the hole side, the cheating is performed If there is a type of abnormality detection that is unlikely to occur, there is a possibility that the player may want to continue the game as it is. That is, even if the minor abnormality is not serious, as a result of giving an abnormality notification as a result of giving an abnormality notification and the player may end the game, the operation rate as the pachinko machine 1 is increased. There may be disadvantages due to the decline.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is in a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-short state) Among the plurality of effect lamps, a part of the effect lamps (for example, the effect lamps provided on the game board 5) can emit light by the effect (during the effect light emission or the condition light emission conditions are satisfied) It is possible to execute abnormal notification light emission using at least the special effect lamp (for example, the effect lamp provided on the door frame 3) included in the other effect lamps while keeping the waiting state (off state) up to And

  And, even during the execution period of such abnormal notification light emission, it is possible to receive the change of the luminance setting value each time the operation is received by the player, and the light emission by the effect is still possible. While it is possible for the emission brightness of the above-mentioned some of the effect lamps to be adjusted based on the changed brightness setting value, the above-mentioned changed brightness for the above-mentioned specific effect lamps The abnormal notification light emission is performed only at a predetermined luminance setting value regardless of the setting value.

  According to such a configuration, even when the abnormal notification light emission is being performed, the luminance setting value is changed each time the player receives an operation that is partially among the plurality of effect lamps. Is reflected, and effect light emission with the reflected luminance setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably promote the continuation of the game by the player while notifying the hole side of the abnormality.

  However, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the abnormal notification light emission is performed during the period in which the target of the brightness adjustment is partially limited as described above, the change of the brightness setting value is accepted. Even if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not necessarily output, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again when the remaining time until the period for which the brightness adjustment target is limited is completed is short To make it possible for the player to indicate that it is at a stage where light emission at normal time will be permitted soon after abnormal alarm light emission is finished. I have to.

  FIG. 310 is a time chart showing an example of the light emission mode of the effect lamp in the abnormal notification period according to the specific abnormality detection.

  As shown in FIG. 310, at a timing tp1 when a game is not being executed, such as in a demonstration screen, at a specific timing (for example, a non-time-shortened state, right gate passage (abnormal game) Is detected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment generates a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) based on the detection.

  In this lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), for a part of the effect lamps (corresponding to the “LED-A group” in the figure) of the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1, effect light emission As it is possible, the abnormal notification light emission is performed using the other effect lamps (corresponding to the “LED-B group” in the drawing). In addition, about abnormal alerting | reporting light emission, it is not necessary to necessarily execute using all the lamps for presentation other than that, A part of lamp for presentation other than that (for example, lamp for specific presentation provided in the door frame 3) It may be performed using only.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific state (for example, a state in which right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time-short state) occurs, a part for effect With regard to the lamp (corresponding to the “LED-A group” in the figure), the light-emitting effect is performed in the same manner as when the specific state is not occurring, and this makes the hole side abnormal. While the notification is made, the continuation of the game by the player is suitably promoted.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the change acceptance of the luminance setting value is permitted even in the state where the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated. Then, with some of the effect lamps (corresponding to the “LED-A group” in the figure) that are set to “do not perform abnormal notification light emission”, their light emission luminance is the same as when not in the lamp warning period. The adjustment can be made based on the changed luminance setting value (immediate change if always emitting light, waiting for light emission at the changed luminance setting value if emitting light according to the presentation request) Has been adjusted (can be adjusted).

  On the other hand, for the other effect lamps (corresponding to "LED-B group" in the figure), even if the luminance setting value is changed during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), the lamp is changed. The luminance setting value is not reflected, and the anomaly notification light emission is performed only at the predetermined luminance setting value (adjustment reflection impossible). That is, in this case, light emission can be performed at the same time in which different luminance setting values are reflected between some of the effect lamps and the other effect lamps, which makes it possible to perform effects separately from the effect light emission. It is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the abnormal notification light emission, which is not related to the above, is being performed. In this sense, for effect light emission, it is desirable that the luminance set value can be changed only in the range equal to or less than the luminance set value adopted by the abnormal notification light emission.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the abnormal notification light emission is being performed, even if the change of the luminance setting value is accepted, the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not necessarily required. I try not to output. That is, until timing tp2 when the remaining time until the end of the period for which the brightness adjustment is limited is limited is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) arrives (timing tp1 to tp2) Even if the luminance setting value is changed and the light emission luminance of some of the effect lamps is actually adjusted, control is performed so as not to output the luminance adjustment confirmation sound. Then, based on the arrival of the timing tp2, when the change of the brightness setting value is accepted (when the light emission brightness of some of the effect lamps is actually adjusted), it is possible that the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again To create a situation that

  According to such a configuration, if the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not output despite the change of the luminance setting value during the execution period of the abnormal notification light, the remaining time until the period is ended is While it can be recognized that the situation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), when the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output when the brightness setting value is changed, the period is ended. It becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until is in a situation shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Therefore, even if the abnormal notification light emission itself has no change and continues in this state, it is suggested to the player internally that it is in a state of proceeding to a normal state (improvement) As a result, even when abnormal notification light emission is performed for a relatively long time, it is expected that a desire to continue the game is preferably promoted.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, all the effects are produced even during the execution period (timing tp2 to tp3) of the abnormal notification light emission in which the luminance setting value is only partially reflected (the LED-A group). The same sound as in the normal state where the lamp is able to reflect the luminance setting value is output as the above-mentioned luminance adjustment confirmation sound, thereby giving a sense of security as if it has already returned to the normal state, During the period in which the abnormal notification light emission is being performed, the decrease in the game entertainment is suppressed. However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 310, at the timing tp3 when the execution period of the abnormal alarm light emission ends, even if the luminance setting value has been changed a plurality of times until that time, the luminance setting value at that time is set. The effect light emission will be performed in the form of being collectively reflected to the other effect lamps (“LED-B group” that had been emitting abnormal notification light until then), but at this time the brightness adjustment confirmation sound It is important to make it not output as if it had already returned to the normal state.

  In the above example, when in a non-gaming state where a game is not being executed, such as in a demonstration screen, in a specific state (for example, a state where right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time-shortened state) It has been described as an example in which the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated based on the fact that it has been detected. However, it is detected that a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time-short state) is detected when in the gaming state (such as symbol fluctuation state) in which the game is being executed Also in this case, a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated based on the detection.

  Also in the case of generating a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) when in a game execution state in which a game is being executed (such as a symbol variation state or a big hit gaming state), basically the same as in the above example. It is. However, in this case, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to timing tp1 to timing tp2 to timing tp2 regardless of whether the remaining time is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has arrived. It is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound at tp3). That is, since the case of being in the game execution state means that the game is just being continued by the player, it is assumed that the possibility that the game will be ended is extremely small. Therefore, even if a situation (timing tp2 to tp3) that can be returned to the normal state soon comes, by maintaining the control that the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not output, it is still in the execution period of abnormal alarm light. It is more desirable to make it possible for a player to recognize accurate information such as Further, in this case, even after the execution period of abnormal notification light emission (timing tp1 to tp3) is ended and the normal state is established, the state in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output is maintained while the game execution state is continued. You may do so. If the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the game execution state, the meaning may not be understood and the game may not be concentrated.

  In the above example, when it is in the game execution state from the non-playing state (due to the start of the symbol variation), during the period from tp2 to tp3 in which the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output. In the case where the game is performed, etc.), "control for not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (inaudible control at timings tp1 to tp2)" is re-executed based on the game execution state. Then, "control for not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound" is maintained until the timing tp3 arrives, or until the game execution state is ended.

  Further, in the above example, for example, even when the period (timing tp2 to tp3) after the timing tp2 when the remaining time becomes smaller than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) comes, If it is re-detected that a specific state (for example, a state where right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-short state) is re-detected when within a period, the above-mentioned from the time of the detection It is desirable that the process (process after the timing tp1) concerning the abnormal notice light emission be performed again. That is, in this case, even if the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output, the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is returned to the non-output state.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the timing tp3 comes, all of the effect lamps are shifted to the normal state in which the adjustment based on the luminance setting value can be received. However, in the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), a plurality of effect lamps are prepared as effect lamps which can not be adjusted based on the brightness setting value, and when the timing tp3 comes, Although only a part can receive adjustment based on the brightness setting value, at least a certain effect lamp can not receive adjustment based on the brightness setting value even in the normal state after the timing tp 3 has arrived You may do so. According to such a configuration, since a limitation on brightness adjustment will be left for a specific effect lamp, the lamp warning is made even before the lamp warning period ends and the normal state is reached. It becomes possible to function as a history of occurrence of a period, and it becomes possible to expect stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 concerned. In addition, about the said restriction | limiting left with respect to the lamp | ramp for a specific production, although you may make it maintain impossible with cancellation, it is made to be able to be released, for example by RAM clear or power-off etc. Is desirable.

  The brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output as the same sound as the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and although it can not be confirmed which “confirmation sound” has been output, some “confirmation sound” is output. It is desirable to make certain that it is recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. It is

  In addition, it is desirable that, during the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission according to the above-described example, acceptance of a change of the setting value for the volume of the effect sound is also permitted based on the operation acceptance by the player. Then, in this case, the “processing regarding notification sound and volume adjustment” during the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission can be realized by appropriately adopting the contents described with reference to FIGS. In this case, the “processing related to notification sound and volume adjustment” described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168 may be ended (collective reflection of the volume) when the timing tp 3 comes, It may be made to end (collective reflection of volume) when tp2 arrives. In such a configuration, the timing tp2 at which the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing tp3 at which the luminance setting value can be collectively reflected are different from each other. The player can be motivated to continue the game by making it appear as if it had already returned to its normal state or making it appear to be recovering.

  Further, in the above-described example, the specific state is illustrated as “the state where right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in non-short time state”, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be the same as the case of the example described above (such as a door opening abnormality or a state in which a magnetic detection abnormality has occurred).

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

[14. Effect control by scheduler]
In the game machine, various effects are performed during the game by voice output, lamp lighting / blinking, image display, etc., and various effects are attempted in order to enhance the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control substrate 1510 which is an effect control device based on the command output from the main control substrate 1310 and executes effects according to the gaming state of the game Do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that performs signal transmission in a single direction.

  In order to cooperatively execute a plurality of types of effects, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technology for realizing various effect displays using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially defined in time series. By preparing a control process for realizing a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols in accordance with the scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect display can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. The scenario data can also include BGM designations. In this case, by outputting the BGM designated by the sound source IC, it becomes possible to output the sound corresponding to the display screen.

  However, in the gaming machine, a more elaborate presentation is required. In the above-described prior art, it has been difficult to interlock various effect devices such as voice output, lamp lighting, image display, etc. to perform various effects. For example, BGM could not be changed while executing image display according to scenario data. In addition, when outputting a sound effect according to the user's operation in the middle of the image display, the image display and the BGM output are stopped, and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effects is finished, the BGM and the image display are restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM has been played, and it is an effect that gives a sense of discomfort. The lighting and blinking of the lamp are controlled by an individual program regardless of the content of the image display according to the game state, and it is difficult to realize various lighting and blinking in conjunction with the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a main command from the main control board 1310 and executes a game effect. In the present embodiment, each configuration for executing the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after describing the configuration and outline of functions for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment, details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and Outline of Each Function]
FIG. 311 is a functional block diagram for explaining the configuration and outline of functions for executing effect control in this embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. 5080 is provided.

  The input command analysis unit 5010 receives an input of a main command and analyzes the input command. Based on the analysis result of the main command, the effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030, and determines block control information (effect block number). A layer will be described. In the present embodiment, a layer is set for each effect division such as background or character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are superimposed and displayed to display an image on the liquid crystal display device. Output Thereby, for example, if only the background is different and the display (action) of the character is the same, it is possible to share the layer for displaying the character. Thereby, the capacity of the effect data (scheduler data) can be reduced, and the development efficiency can be improved. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying an effect for each layer.

  The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing effects. With scheduler data, in order to control effects in each effect device, a plurality of functions instructing a predetermined process to be executed among a plurality of processes requested according to the effect devices are stored in the order to be executed It is data. The effect block data includes “liquid crystal effect block data” for executing effects to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, “liquid crystal symbol block data” for fluctuating display of identification symbols on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of "sub effect block data" for controlling lamps, features and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each rendering device is called, and the rendering device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

  The output module unit 5080 receives the rendering device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits rendering device drive data to each rendering device based on the rendering device control information. Each effect device performs an operation based on effect device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the effect control unit 5020 is configured as software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. It is realized by The effect control unit 5020 may be configured as another arithmetic circuit and configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Subsequently, the details of the configuration of modules etc. for realizing the respective functions described above will be described. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a module and the like in the periphery control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but a part or all of them may be configured as hardware.

  In the present embodiment, a system module 5100 for driving each rendering device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules regarding effects. Further, a presentation control unit 5020 is included to create presentation device control information for driving each presentation device based on the main command.

  The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In the present embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one set information, and the command status value, the command mode value, and the check status value of the command status and the mode value are sequentially arranged from the first byte, and divided into 3 times of 8 bits each. The main command buffer 5110 receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and discards the received command if it is not determined that the received command is correct. If it is determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200.

  The main command includes information representing the contents related to the effect among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, it is possible to include in the main command the presence or absence of a game ball on the starting winning opening, the special pattern lottery result, the variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, and the like. Further, when the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, door open and other sensor outputs, operation of the start lever and the stop button, rotation or stop of the reel, success or failure of the role at the time of stop may be mentioned. In addition, the command mentioned here is an illustration and can contain various commands according to the model of a game machine, and the contents of an effect.

  The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command relates to the effect. If it is determined that the command relates to the effect, it is delivered to the effect control unit 5020.

  Based on the analysis result of the main command, the effect control unit 5020 identifies a layer to be subjected to effect control from the layer data table. Then, a block data number (rendering block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and a block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the rendering block control unit 5040.

  The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing an effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lighting / blinking of a lamp, operation of a character, and the like.

  When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal rendering block data is block data for performing liquid crystal display rendering, and includes one or more drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification symbols, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  The liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) object, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for liquid crystal display includes a liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying rendering elements such as background and characters, and a liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying identification symbols. included.

  The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed in a frame cycle (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds) which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal presentation block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is delivered to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) through the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540 a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs the display data to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated, for example, by a method of expanding character data designated by the liquid crystal display list command in a designated position on a frame buffer.

  When the effect block number is determined, the sub effect block control unit 5320 executes sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub effect block data is block data for performing effects of a lamp, a sound, and a motor, and includes one or more sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub rendering scheduler data, each rendering device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs an operation defined in advance in the sub rendering scheduler data.

  The sub rendering block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of the various rendering devices, and executes the sub rendering scheduler data included in the sub rendering block data. The scheduler executing unit 5060 for controlling various rendering devices includes a sub rendering 1 f scheduler executing unit 5333 that controls the rendering device at one frame intervals, and a sub rendering 1 ms scheduler executing unit 5334 that controls the rendering device at 1 millisecond intervals. included. As described above, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it is possible to execute the rendering according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specification of the rendering device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the update interval of drawing, it becomes possible to synchronize sound output and the action of a character with the liquid crystal display. In addition, if the detection interval of the sensor is 1 ms unit, it is possible to promptly cope with a problem in the operation of the accessory.

  The sub effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than liquid crystal display, but in this embodiment, as an example, three types of effect control of sound (sound) output, lighting / blinking of a lamp, and operation of a prize explain. Note that the rendering control by the sub rendering 1 f scheduler executing unit 5333 and the sub rendering 1 ms scheduler executing unit 5334 will be described without particular distinction as being the same except for the execution cycle. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of rendering device will be described.

  First, the case of executing effects by sound output will be described. If the sub rendering block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output to execute the scheduler data. Then, when the function (for example, SPLAY) for sound output is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameter. A plurality of schedulers can be activated. For example, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel by controlling the outputs of BGM and effect sound effects with different schedulers, and sound can be output simultaneously. . The sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads out the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs it from the speakers 921, 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

  Next, the case of performing the effect by the lamp will be described. If the sub rendering block data includes scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. When the lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be activated, and a plurality of lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

  The lamp module 5600 creates lamp driving data for each cycle (one frame or one millisecond) and outputs the data to the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores lamp driving data generated by the lamp module 5600 and outputs the data to the serial control IC 5150. By making the ramp data output buffer 5130 double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously create and output ramp data in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the lamp data output will be the next operation of the lamp data creation to increase the lamp control processing time by increasing the lamp system or overlapping the lamp layers. With the cycle, the process relating to the creation of lamp data may be completed within the processing cycle.

  Specifically, when the ramp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously generated ramp drive data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA to output the previously generated lamp drive data, and the respective lamps are lit and blinked. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling the lighting and blinking of the LED is the same as the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise noted.

  Finally, the case of controlling a drive device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating the accessory will be described. If the sub rendering block data includes scheduler data for drive control, the scheduler execution unit activates a drive scheduler (motor scheduler) to execute the scheduler data. Then, when a drive control function (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the drive module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be activated, and a plurality of drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

  The driver module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive module 5700 and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each drive device is not the same timing as the output timing from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal in the next cycle of all motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after completion of serial transmission of all motor data, so as the serial transmission time of motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until completion of serial transmission becomes overhead, and the overall processing time for each frame period It is because there is not enough. In the present embodiment, by shifting the timing of latch signal output corresponding to motor data serial transmission, it is realized that the waiting time until completion of serial transmission is set to 0, but a plurality of DMAs can be used by the CPU used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and the latch signal is output by the DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until the serial transmission completion can be set to 0 similarly. At the same time as the output of the motor drive data, effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each effect drive photo information is received by serial communication via the parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data configuration]
In the present embodiment, scheduler data can have various structures. For example, a call function may be provided to capture other scheduler data as part of the scheduler data. Scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the process defined by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, temporarily executes the other scheduler data specified by the call function, and continues the process of the original scheduler data Will run. By doing this, it is possible to utilize general-purpose effects in various situations, as in the case of calling a subroutine in a general program.

  This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has effects specific to gaming machines, as will be shown next. In the gaming machine, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Among players, there are those who can find subtle differences in the contents of the effect during the lottery and infer the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the general-purpose effect contents can be utilized in various scenes by the call function, such subtle differences can be eliminated, and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game.

  The scheduler data may include, as another configuration, a conditional branch function that switches the effect contents according to the gaming state. Scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes defined by the scheduler data, and at the time of execution of the conditional branch function, determines the gaming state based on the main command, and executes the contents of effects according to the gaming state . By doing this, it is possible to cope with variously diverging gaming states with one scheduler data. Examples of the game state used for conditional branching include the result of a lottery performed during a game and the presence or absence of an operation of a button or the like by a player. In the case of the roll-to-roll type gaming machine, the stopped state of the rotating reel, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state to the start winning opening may be used. Further, the condition may be branched depending on the occurrence of an error in the game.

  The contents of the effect after conditional branching can be variously configured. For example, after conditional branching, it may be configured to be completely separated into two or more processes. In addition, after the predetermined processing is performed by the conditional branch, the processing may be returned to the processing before the branch. According to the latter aspect, for example, after processing for temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without discomfort.

  As described above, the gaming machine can include various rendering devices, and as one example, can also include a display device for displaying an image. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image, such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing apparatus is an apparatus that develops an image into a bit map in accordance with a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like prepared on a screen by a bit map can be used.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 313 is an explanatory view showing the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, the case of a sub-effect, which is mainly performed by executing scheduler data including functions, is described, and in particular, a sound (sound) output is described as an example.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates scheduler 5502 of the type and number according to the effect device at the time of effect execution. Scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires scheduler data specified in the sub effect block data from scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of scheduler data will be described later.

  The sound function executed at the time of sound output includes "SPLAY" for reproducing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping a phrase being reproduced, "VOL_PH" for setting a volume level at the time of phrase reproduction, and the like. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and control specified by parameters and the like is executed. Upon receiving the execution of the function for sound, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data, and outputs the sound source drive data to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source.

  The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but in order to facilitate understanding, the number of channels will be described as four. In addition, the sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. Note that the speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of the respective channels Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. Does not mean that

  The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channel is managed by channel management work 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated at the lower right of the figure. In the work 5507, a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute are stored. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether or not stereo output is to be performed. The output volume is a volume for each channel. The loop attribute is a specification of whether or not to repeat playback. These pieces of information are specified by the sound module 5500 based on the function for sound.

  As above, FIG. 313 shows the basic concept of effect control in the present embodiment, taking sound output control as an example. The sub rendering scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler specified by the sub rendering block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function for controlling each rendering device is called and processed by the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, and driving device module 5700) corresponding to each rendering device.

[18-4. Flow of data in presentation control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the effect control of the gaming machine has been described above. Subsequently, a flow of effect control from reception of the main command to acquisition of scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for presentation control]
FIG. 314A is a diagram for describing a configuration until data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is acquired. As described in FIG. 312, when the main command is received from the main control board 1310, the effect control unit 5020 analyzes it by the command analysis module 5200, and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

  The effect control unit 5020 is based on the layer data table, each layer, the fluctuation pattern layer (layer performing the effect related to the fluctuation pattern), the hold layer (layer performing the effect related to the hold effect), the game instruction layer (game instruction Based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200 for each layer, communication error layer (layer for notifying communication error), notification layer (layer for performing various notification), and abnormality notification layer (layer for notification of abnormality). And performs acquisition and update management of effect block data numbers corresponding to each layer. Further, the effect block data number acquired is handed over to the effect block control unit 5040. If the effect block number is, for example, a change pattern layer, the change pattern by liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by change pattern, the change pattern by liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table, the change pattern by sub effect block data Determined from the combination number table. The unit of division of the effect block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) which are common effects in a series of effects (for example, effects executed from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop). In addition, block data including control information such as presentation contents for each presentation apparatus and presentation time is defined for each block. By controlling the effects in units of effect blocks based on the effect block numbers, effects by the respective effect devices can be synchronized. Further, the arrangement of layers corresponds to the layer on the liquid crystal display, and in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern layer is the rearmost, the anomaly notification layer is the frontmost, and this is displayed on the front as important information It is a configuration for

  When the effect block control unit 5040 receives a block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, a scheduler control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub effect block corresponding to each layer) The corresponding block data (liquid crystal rendering block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub rendering block data 5053) are acquired by the control unit 5320). Each block data contains, as described above, scheduler data for executing effects.

  For example, when the main command is a start winning command, the holding layer is specified, and liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for displaying a hold on the liquid crystal display screen or sub effect block data for outputting sound effects at the time of starting winning. 5053 is obtained. In addition, at the start of change of the special symbol, a change start command or the like is transmitted to specify a change pattern layer. Furthermore, when reporting the occurrence of an error or a warning, a command is transmitted to specify an abnormality detection layer. Also, by performing effects for each layer, it is possible to simultaneously overlap and perform a plurality of effects.

  The liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal rendering block data 5051 from the liquid crystal rendering block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal rendering block data number, and then the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 performs the liquid crystal. Activate the production 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071. Then, the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071 is executed on the liquid crystal rendering 1 f scheduler to instruct the liquid crystal module 5400 to process the function defined in the liquid crystal rendering schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the instructed function based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1540 a, and outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540 a, and the gaming board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal rendering 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  When liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 is acquired from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, liquid crystal symbol block controller 5311 executes liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution portion 5332. The liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated by The liquid crystal symbol 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 is executed on the liquid crystal symbol 1 f scheduler to instruct the liquid crystal module 5400 to process the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the instructed function based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1540 a, and outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540 a, and the gaming board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  After obtaining the sub effect block data 5053, the sub effect block control unit 5320 specifies an execution cycle (one frame or one millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub effect block data 5053 or the like. Then, when the execution period is one frame, the sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 starts the sub effect 1f scheduler, or when the execution period is 1 millisecond, the sub effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 generates the sub effect 1 ms. Start the scheduler.

  Furthermore, the sub rendering 1 f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub rendering 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub rendering schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub presentation schedule data 5073 has no difference depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the schedulers of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data to be commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, thereby reducing the data volume. In addition, it is possible to promptly cope with the change of the execution cycle of the rendering device. In addition, the same schedule data can be simultaneously executed by different schedulers, which makes it possible to share scheduler data, prevent the occurrence of the same kind of problem at a plurality of places, and realize the reduction of data capacity. it can.

  Here, a specific example in which the same schedule data is simultaneously executed by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 314B is a diagram for explaining the liquid crystal rendering effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. In step-up notice, four types of step-up notices 1 to 4 are executable, and by performing an effect in which the effect contents are developed step by step, the player is expected to see the result of the fluctuation display of the symbol. Suggest a degree.

  In the step-up notice 1, when the step-up 1 effect is executed, the notice effect is ended. In step-up notice 2, step-up 2 effect occurs immediately before the end of step-up 1 effect, and after step-up 2 effect ends, the advance effect ends. The effects are similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and after the end of the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect, the advance effect is finished.

  In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also execute the step-up notice effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In order to output different sounds at each step of the step-up effect in the sound effect, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each progress state (step) of the effect. On the other hand, in the lamp presentation, in order to display the same lamp pattern at each stage of the step-up presentation, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

  In addition, since the next step-up notice is started immediately before the end of the step-up notice at the current stage when the liquid-crystal effect of the step-up notice progresses to the next stage, a plurality of step-up effects are performed simultaneously at the same time. There is a period of As described above, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for subsequent step-up effects in the lamp effect, but in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the same scheduler data can be simultaneously executed by a plurality of schedulers It has become. Therefore, when performing the same effect at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the execution periods of the effect overlap.

  Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up is performed when the step-up 2 effect occurs which is started shortly before the end The advance ramp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH 02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data is executed simultaneously (overlapped) without defining the same scheduler data in duplicate, so that the effects of the same pattern can be performed in parallel in a series of effects. It is realized to carry out.

  The sub rendering 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub rendering 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls up modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the rendering device to be controlled, and defines in sub rendering schedule data 5073 Indicate the processing of the specified function. Each module processes a function whose execution is instructed based on the designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the driving data to the rendering device.

18-4-2. Execution Summary of Scheduler Data]
FIG. 315 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the time of execution of scheduler data according to the present embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect contents based on the analysis result of the main (main substrate) command by the command analysis module 5200, and the various effect devices are configured by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 and the drive device module 5700. Control. FIG. 315 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referenced to set this command.

  In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number designated by the effect block control unit 5040, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect numbers is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table is provided with an effect management pointer that indicates the storage address of the scheduler data. Although the effect management pointer is prepared for the number corresponding to the effect number, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

  In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 315, the effect numbers 01H, 02H, etc. indicate storage addresses of the effect management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. The effect number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured to associate the effect number with the effect management pointer, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and It is sufficient to carry out the processing. Further, if the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number, the amount of data in the effect management table can be reduced and the above-mentioned search becomes unnecessary, so that the load required to process the scheduler data can be reduced.

  Each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is basically composed of a function and a parameter as shown in FIG. The function is, as described above, an instruction for controlling the rendering device, and for example, is for instructing each module to operate the rendering device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. In addition, you may provide the function which does not need to specify a parameter.

  The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors (drives) and users. Sequence control is a basic function for effect control, and lamps, sounds and motors are functions for controlling each effect device. Users are functions that do not belong to these groups. Specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 318 to 320.

  In the example shown in FIG. 315, the “call” function is designated at the address A2. The "call" function belongs to the group of sequence control, saves the pointer value of the next function, and sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer. The scheduler executor 5060 can temporarily return to the address specified by the parameter and process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the above-described saved pointer value.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the “call” function next to the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, an audio operation number is set at A32, and a lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3 n. When the rendering command ends these processes, it returns to the address A2 where the "call" is specified, and shifts to processing of the next address A3.

  Thus, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to capture the contents of the series of blocks BL3 designated by the addresses A31 to A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the capacity of scheduler data and to reduce its creation load. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Among players, there are those who can find subtle differences in the contents of the effect during the lottery and infer the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, according to the present invention, general-purpose effects can be utilized in various situations by calling, so that such subtle differences can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict lottery results and the like. It is possible to suppress the loss of the interest of the game.

  Thus, although it is possible to use the "call" function, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the program of the interpreter. As described above, the main function used in scheduler data 5401 is to set the contents of instructions to other schedulers, such as "character item operation number set", "voice operation number set", and "lamp operation number set". This is because it merely indicates the very limited functions that the scheduler execution unit 5060 can realize.

  In the example shown in FIG. 315, NOP (wait) is executed next at the address A3. The "NOP" function waits for the designated number of frames and continues processing of scheduler data. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is awaited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] has elapsed. As described later, in the present embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily terminates the processing of scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing if the value of parameter Prm [031] is not 0, and if this value is 0. Perform processing to shift to the next address function.

  In the present embodiment, a work of the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 314A is used to specify a voice operation number or the like. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores voice operation numbers and the like in the work according to the specification of scheduler data. Further, a layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 314A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel among these layers.

  The scheduler data is similarly defined by the functions and parameters after the address A11 of the conditional branch. In the example shown in FIG. 315, the conditional branch is not provided after the address A11 of the conditional branch until the end of the rendering (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the above-mentioned block BL1, the bonus command (address A22), the voice operation number (address A21), etc. can be specified without considering the conflict with the block BL1. . Instead of these settings, the block BL3 and the like may be fetched by the "call" function.

  In scheduler data, a conditional branch and a "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number may be generated to switch the effect contents, and different addresses may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 315, if the condition “random number value ≦ Th1?” Is attached to the address A2, the effect of the addresses A31 to A3n is executed when this condition is satisfied. In addition, if the condition A1 (random number value ≦ Th2?) Is added after the address A2 (address A2 + 1) and the address A41 (not shown) is called, the address A31 and subsequent ones are added according to the value of the random number. Different effects are performed. As described above, if different addresses are called by conditional branching according to the random number, the effect contents can be switched at random by the random number, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching of the contents of the effect in this manner is referred to as “effect lottery” in the present specification.

  In the effect lottery, the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device may all be switched, or only a part may be switched. In the case of switching all, it is sufficient to designate all the display, sound and lamp contents in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. When switching only a part, only the part to be switched is specified in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and the other parts are specified uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

  In addition, conditional schedulers and "call" functions may be used to specify different scheduler data to be called according to random numbers for effect drawing. In this case, as a result of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device performing the effect lottery independently, the effect mode realized by the combination becomes very colorful, and there is an advantage that the interest can be further enhanced.

  However, regardless of the display, sound, lamp, and the result of the effect drawing of the drive device, in order to realize an effect without a sense of discomfort, it is preferable that these effects end simultaneously. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be the selection target of the effect lottery has the content that the effect ends at the same time. In addition, it is not an essential requirement that the effects end in the same time, and the effects of these effects may not be the same.

  The effect lottery with scheduler data has various advantages as well as an advantage that the lottery mode can be switched according to the output status of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device. For example, when the effect lottery is instructed, the drive device is executing the figure-like distribution operation of 8 and the other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery on the drive device. May be Similarly, for the display, sound, and lamp, the effect lottery may be prohibited according to the situation when the effect lottery is instructed. In addition, in the effect lottery prohibition, the effect lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting selection of a part of scheduler data.

  As described above, the effect lottery switches the contents of the effect by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510 to the last, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this manner, it is possible to realize effects that are more diverse than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and it is possible to further enhance interest.

[18-4-3. Outline of sound (sound) output control]
Subsequently, the function of the sound module for controlling the output of sound will be described. FIG. 316 is an explanatory diagram showing the function of the sound module 5500 of this embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and outputs a voice. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from the plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for speech. Further, in each scheduler 5502, work 5507 for operation management is prepared. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

  When the voice operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table to specify scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice operation number table is a table in which the sound pointer and the sound layer are associated with the voice operation number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. As the voice operation number, any identification information can be used, but as in the case of the effect number described above, the capacity reduction of the voice operation number table and the processing load reduction at the time of referring to the table are more effective Has the advantage of making it possible.

  The sound pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

  Scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used by the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320.

  In the example shown in FIG. 316, the “call” function is defined at the address SA2. After executing a series of blocks subsequent to the address SA31 (not shown), the scheduler execution unit 5060 processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

  In the address SA3, phrase reproduction is defined. Scheduler execution unit 5060 reads phrase data 5508 corresponding to phrase number 00H designated by the parameter, and reproduces this.

  Moreover, the example of a structure of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. The phrase number is identification information attached to each piece of phrase data. Although any identification information can be used in this embodiment, the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as a phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

  The channel is an output channel designated at the time of phrase reproduction. The left and right panpots and the upper and lower panpots are the left / right / upper / lower output balances of the speakers provided in the gaming machine. Volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of the sound to be reproduced. When the music number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads out the sound source data corresponding to the music number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces the sound. A loop is a designation as to whether or not to repeatedly reproduce sound. Stereo is specification of whether or not to output stereo.

  A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operating state indicates whether each layer is operating or not. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In the present embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is an address of scheduler data 5505 which the scheduler 5502 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 316, as the process proceeds, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified by the scheduler data 5505 and is sequentially subtracted as time passes. The sound module 5500 executes the following function when this value becomes zero.

  The number of call nests and the number of loop nests indicate the number of nests of calls and loops multiply specified by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, when scheduler data 5505 of another address is called by the “call” function (second call) in the processing after address SA31 called by the “call” function (first call) of address SA2, call nesting is performed. The number is two. After completing the second call and returning to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The same goes for loops. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop top address is the top address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. The loop top address or the like is provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Outline of lamp output control]
Then, the function of the lamp module which controls the output of a lamp is demonstrated. FIG. 317 is an explanatory view showing the function of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lighting / blinking control of the lamp. Similarly to the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also receive and process requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with the lamp layer for the lamp. In each scheduler 5602, work 5603 for operation management is prepared. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

  When the lamp operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table to specify scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which the lamp pointer and the lamp layer are associated with the lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although any identification information can be used as the lamp operation number, using the storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and reduces the processing load when referencing the table, as in the case of the effect number described above. It has the advantage of making it possible.

  The ramp pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the ramp pointer [1].

  The scheduler data 5505, like the effect data (FIG. 315), is composed of functions and parameters. The function used by the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 317, the “call” function is defined at the address LA2. After executing a series of blocks subsequent to address LA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address LA3 next to address LA2.

  The gradation pattern setting is defined at the address LA3. Scheduler execution unit 5060 sets gradation pattern data 5606 stored in address LA11 designated by the parameter. A gradation scheduler 5604 is provided in the lamp scheduler 5602 in association with each other, and lights the lamp with the designated gradation data 1, and when the time designated by the timer value elapses, Lights up. Here, an example in which two types of gradation data are designated is shown, but even when three or more gradation data are designated, the lamp is lit while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after the address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes of the addresses LA11 to LA1 n, the lighting of the lamps is ended. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the process of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601 and executes the process of the next address up to the stop (address LAn).

  Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the drawing. The scheduler status indicates whether or not the scheduler is running. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The ramp performs the next function when this value becomes zero. The gradation data timer represents a waiting time until execution of the next gradation data when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 317, when executing the gradation data defined at the address LA11, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 is shifted to the gradation data 2 When the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 is ended, and the processing shifts to the processing of the address LA12.

  The ramp pointer is an address of scheduler data 5601 which the scheduler 5602 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 317, as the processing proceeds, the values of the ramp pointers sequentially transition to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is an address of the gradation pattern data 5606 which the gradation scheduler 5604 is executing. In the example in the figure, as the processing proceeds, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The number of loops is the number of repetitions of the loop, and the loop top address is the top address of the loop range. As in the case of sounds, loops may be nested.

[18-4-5. Outline of Drive Control]
Subsequently, the function of the drive module 5700 for controlling the operation of the drive will be described. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. The control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600 and is not shown. The drive unit module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and performs operation control of the drive unit. The driver module 5700 can also receive requests from multiple schedulers to perform processing.

  The control items of the drive device include, for example, movement amount (stepping motor rotation step angle), movement time, movement speed (motor rotation speed), excitation method, trapezoidal drive, rotation direction, and the like. Furthermore, an instruction to execute a return operation to return to the origin position or an instruction to stop the mechanical end (stop at the limit position of the movable range when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically restricted) are given. included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotational speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed step-wisely at the start and stop of the rotation.

  Scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used by the scheduler data to control the drive will be described later with reference to FIG.

[18-5. function]
In the above, the example which uses a function in the module used for presentation control was demonstrated. Here, other functions will be described. FIG. 318 to FIG. 320 are diagrams showing an example of the function in the effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are classified into sequence control, lamp, sound, motor and user groups. Hereinafter, the functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function Details (Sequence Control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of presentation. FIG. 318 gives an example of the function of sequence control. The outline of each function will be described below.

  "STOP" is a function that represents the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a function for waiting which waits for a time according to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time according to the number of times of execution differs depending on the processing cycle for executing the "NOP" function, and in the case of execution in a frame cycle, one frame is about 33.334 milliseconds in this embodiment. If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed in 1 ms cycle, it will also wait for about 30 ms if the execution number is specified as 30. "NOP_F_VALUE" takes the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value as parameters, and terminates the "NOP_F_VALUE" function when the conditions based on scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value are satisfied, If not satisfied, it is a conditional weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

  “MEMW” is a function that uses the target scheduler work number and value as parameters, and writes the specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area. “LOOPST” is a function for performing repetitive processing (loop), designates the loop top, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. In addition, when "0" is set to the number of loops, it becomes an infinite loop. “LOOP” is a function for specifying the end of repetitive processing (loop).

  “RET” is a function for returning the process to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the effect management table. "CALL" is the above-mentioned "call" function, which executes processing from a designated address (block), and information specifying an address value, a label, etc. is specified as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after the process of the call destination is executed, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

  “SUBC” selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the branch table, and executes the selected process. That is, the "call" function is executed based on the specified condition. A specific example using “SUBC” will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of the call destination is completed by the "SUBC" function, the process returns to the process of the call source (the process following the "SUBC" function).

  "SUBJ" selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the table, and executes the selected process. That is, the "JUMP" function described later is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBJ” will be described later with reference to FIG. It does not return to the process of the caller that executed the "SUBJ" function, but continues the process of the callee as it is. “JUMP” sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address or label.

  "REQ" is a function for activating another scheduler designated by the parameter. A specific example using “REQ” will be described later with reference to FIG. "REQF" is a function for activating another scheduler specified by the parameter, as "REQ", and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter has elapsed. Prohibit launching. In "REQ", control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REQF" can be made to be independently executed during a designated scheduler data process, for example, other scheduler data to operate the bonus in the case of bonus initialization is executed and controlled. It can prevent becoming impossible.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The functions belonging to the group of lamps are functions for controlling the flow of lamp effects. FIG. 319 gives an example of functions relating to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “HPLAY” is a function for executing lamp tone data reproduction processing to light the lamp based on the tone data specified by the parameter. In “HPLAY”, the lamp is reset even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, and the lamp reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

  "KPLAY" is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data designated by a parameter, as in "HPLAY". In "KPLAY", when the lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the lamp in progress is continued without being reset.

  “HPLAY2” is a function that executes a lamp tone data reproduction process by specifying a layer in addition to the tone data using parameters. The processing is the same as “HPLAY”. "KPLAY2" is a function that performs a lamp gradation data reproduction process by specifying a layer in addition to the gradation data by using parameters, as in "HPLAY2". The processing is the same as “KPLAY”.

  "HPLAY" and "KPLAY" execute designated lamp tone data reproduction processing for reproducing the lamp tone data designated by the parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted at the time of reproduction by "HPLAY", and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning, and the lamp gradation data is reproduced at the time of reproduction by "KPLAY" Continue without interrupting the playback of the. That is, while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed using "KPLAY", no particular processing is performed.

  “HPLAY2” is the same as “HPLAY” except that the layer to reproduce the lamp gradation data is designated by the parameter in addition to the function of “HPLAY” described above, and the process is the same as “HPLAY” except that the layer is designated by the parameter.

  "KPLAY2" has the same processing as "KPLAY" except that in addition to the function of "KPLAY" described above, a layer to reproduce lamp gradation data is specified by a parameter, and a layer is specified by a parameter.

[18-5-3. Function Details (Sound (Sound))]
The functions belonging to the group of sounds are functions for controlling the sound output. FIGS. 319 and 320 show examples of functions relating to sound control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “SPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, it is reset, and the reproduction of the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. "SXPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter, similarly to "SPLAY". In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is reproduced, the sound continues to be reproduced without being reset. “STOP_PH” is a function for executing phrase stop processing for stopping the reproduction of sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter.

  "PAN_PH" is the phrase in playback specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of the "PAN_PH" function execution, using the transition time and panpot end coordinate position specified by the parameter as well, the panpot end It is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position at the transition time designated to the coordinate position. "PAN_PH2" allows you to specify the panpot start coordinate position with parameters in addition to the function of the "PAN_PH" function, as with the "PAN_PH" function, the voice output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of function execution This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position at the transition time specified from the panpot start coordinate position specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position.

  "VOL_FADE_PH" is specified from the volume value at the start of "VOL_FADE_PH" function execution to the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter up to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameters. It is a function to increase or decrease the volume value at the transition time. "VOL_FADE_PH2" allows you to specify the fade start volume value with the parameter in addition to the function of "VOL_FADE_PH" function, and like the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase is a parameter at the start of function execution It is a function to increase / decrease the volume value at the transition time designated from the fade start volume value designated by to the fade end volume value.

  “VOL_PH” is a function that performs increase / decrease of the volume value of the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter with the volume value specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” is a function to mute the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function that cancels muting of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

  “SCPLAY” and “SXCPLAY” execute specified channel music reproduction processing for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. When the same phrase is already reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted at the time of reproduction by "SCPLAY" and the same phrase is reproduced from the beginning, and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without being interrupted at the time of reproduction by "SXCPLAY". That is, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being played back, no particular processing is executed.

  "PAN_CH" performs a panpot targeting a phrase, while "PAN_PH" performs a panpot targeting a ch (channel), where ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Processing is the same as "PAN_PH" except for "PAN_CH2" also performs the panpot targeting the phrase while "PAN_CH2" performs the panpot targeting the ch, except that ch is designated by the parameter and the phrase changes to ch "PAN_PH2 Processing does not change.

  "VOL_FADE_CH" fades to a phrase while "VOL_FADE_PH" fades to a phrase, while "ch" is faded to a channel, ch is "VOL_FADE_PH" except that the phrase is changed to a channel and designated by a parameter. Processing does not change. "VOL_FADE_CH2" also fades to a phrase, while "VOL_FADE_CH2" fades to a phrase, while "ch" is faded to a channel, with "VOL_FADE_PH2" except that the phrase specified in the parameter changes to ch. Processing does not change.

  "VOL_CH" increases / decreases the volume value for "ch" while "VOL_PH" increases / decreases the volume value for "phr", while "ch" is specified by the parameter and the phrase changes to "ch" The process is the same as "VOL_PH" except for the above. As for "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", while "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mentioned above performs mute (mute) targeting a phrase, mute (mute) targets ch, ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch The process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" except for the above. As for "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", while "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" mentioned above performs cancellation of mute (mute) targeting a phrase, cancellation of mute (mute) targeting ch is performed, ch is a phrase specified by a parameter The processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function Details (Motor)]
The functions belonging to the group of motors are functions for controlling the outputs of the motors and solenoids. FIG. 320 shows an example of functions related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. “MMPLAY” executes motor regeneration processing for causing the motor designated by the parameter to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number. "SOL_ON" executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to execute an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. "SOL_OFF" executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function Details (User)]
The functions belonging to the group of users are functions for executing control which does not belong to the group described above. An example of these functions is shown in FIG. 320, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MBUF_SET” executes motor output buffer scheduler work value set processing for setting the scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. "COMMAND" and "COMMAND 0" are processes for issuing a command from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a or the like. For example, a command for starting drawing on the liquid crystal display device is issued. On the other hand, the command issued by “COMMAND 0” is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. “MEMC” executes a scheduler memory copy process of copying the contents of the scheduler work area being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Subsequently, a scheduler for calling each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string in which functions necessary to execute a series of processes are defined in order of execution. One or more schedulers are provided for each management purpose, but all schedulers can execute all functions, schedulers for sound can execute functions related to lamps, and schedulers for features There is no difference between the processing cycles (frame or 1 ms) other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) which can execute the function for sound and a plurality of schedulers provided for each application, and it is also possible to mix and execute all functions. Further, the number of executions of the schedulers is not limited, and a plurality of registered schedulers can be simultaneously executed.

  FIG. 321 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified by state transition or a device to be controlled. The following outlines typical types of schedulers.

  First, to explain an example of a scheduler related to state transition, there is a special view state scheduler (special view state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling transition of the gaming state of the entire game. In effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, transition of the gaming state is controlled based on a command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special view state scheduler is 1 f (frame).

  Also, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, etc. For example, when the player operates the effect button, wins an execution lottery for effect, or transits a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, it transits to another state Do. The processing cycle of the sub state scheduler is 1 f (frame).

  The scheduler for the sound is a background that controls the output of the sound that is output along with the background display and the fluctuation display of the symbol, the scheduler for executing the symbol sound scheduler data (SND_SCH01), and it is output at the time of notice effect execution. There are a scheduler (SND_SCH 02, 03) that controls the output of the raku sound, and a scheduler (SND_SCH 04) that controls the output of the sound when the advance notice is executed by the character. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

  In the related schedulers for lamps, as in the case of the sound-related scheduler, a background for controlling lighting / flashing of lamps accompanying background display or variable display of symbols, a scheduler for executing symbol lamp scheduler data (LMP_SCH01 There is a scheduler (LMP_SCH 02, 03) which controls lighting / flashing of the lamp at the time of the preview effect execution, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH 04) which controls lighting / flashing of the lamp at the time of the preview execution by the character. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the ramp is 1 f (frame).

  In addition, a scheduler is also defined which controls sounds and lamps in conjunction with each other. A sound / lamp notification layer that executes sound output and lamp lighting / blinking to notify such a scheduler as a notification such as ball breakage or ball clogging or alarm detection due to abnormality detection by a magnetic sensor etc. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01 to 05) that is generally used to perform effects in which sound output and lamp lighting / blinking are interlocked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

  For a motor-targeted scheduler, a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing a system operation, and a scheduler for executing motor ram clear scheduler data for performing setting at the time of RAM clearing MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing motor role initialization scheduler data for initializing arrangement of role, etc., motor role correction scheduler data for performing position correction of the role. Scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH), and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing an action of an accessory by presentation etc.

  The scheduler for executing the action of the prize or the like by the performance etc. is a general purpose used independently of the scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the action of the particular prize or the kind of the prize and the like. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

  The processing cycle of the scheduler for the motor is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the management of the gaming state, the processing cycle of the scheduler for sounds and lamps (this embodiment 1 f = about 33.334 ms) It has become.

  Although the number of schedulers controlling each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled to be dynamically increased or decreased according to the game state or the notice. As a result, each scheduler can be started independently of the number of effects provided to the gaming machine or the number of effects, and the restriction for executing effects can be reduced.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (stage 1)]
Although the functions used in the effect control and the outline of the types and functions of the scheduler performing a series of control combining these functions have been described above, specific examples of application of scheduler data and functions will be described below with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Summary of production]
FIG. 322A is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322A, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, a logo character 5001, a star character 5002 (left star character 5002a, middle star character 5002b, right star character 5002c), and a public character 5003. Is placed.

  A logo title 5001 is disposed at the upper left of the game area. When the logo role object 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the effect is completed. Furthermore, in addition to the movement in the vertical direction, it is also possible for the logo combination 5001 to perform an effect of vibrating in the vertical and horizontal directions before and after the movement.

  The star character 5002 is disposed above the game area, the left star character 5002a is on the left, the middle star character 5002b is on the center, and the right star character 5002c is on the right. Each star character 5002 is operable independently of one another, and one or more star characters 5002 operate at a predetermined timing according to the contents of the effect.

  The left star character 5002a moves downward to the left and is movable to a position slightly lower than the center of the game area. In addition, the middle star character 5002b moves downward and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star character 5002c moves to the lower right, and can move to the center of the game area slightly lower right. Each star character 5002 may stop before moving to the final arrival position, or may return to the halfway position and stop after reaching the final arrival position.

  The prison cast 5003 is disposed at the upper center of the game area. The prison object 5003 can be dropped (moved) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position and the lower position. The player moves from the initial position to the middle position and stops temporarily, and then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position all at once in accordance with the operation of the effect button by the player or the lottery result of the prisoner notice effect. An operation mode is set. As in the case of the logo character 5001, it is possible to perform the effect of vibrating vertically and horizontally before and after movement of the prison character 5003.

  Subsequently, the flow of the notice effect performed in one symbol change will be described. First, step-up notice, button (BTN) cut-in notice, group notice, star feature notice and button (BTN) logo drop notice will be described with reference to FIG. 322B. In addition, the flow of the preliminary announcement effect including the preliminary announcement effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 322B shows an example of execution timing of advance notice effect executed in a series of fluctuation display from the start of fluctuation of special symbol to the stop in this embodiment, and a diagram for explaining scheduler and scheduler data used at this time is there. In the series of variable display shown in FIG. 322B, the step-up notice and the button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the change. After that, reach occurs, and in the second half of the fluctuation, group announcement, star announcement and button (BTN) logo combination announcement is executed. For each advance notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, and operation of special effects are executed.

  Hereinafter, a part of scheduler data for executing each preliminary announcement effect will be extracted, and the control by the scheduler data and the function configured will be described. Specifically, scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" for controlling the lamp in step-up notice (Fig. 323), scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" for controlling the lamp in button cut-in notice (Fig. 324) Motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” (FIGS. 325 to 327) for controlling the operation of 5002 and motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (FIG. 328) for controlling the operation of the logo symbol 5001 in the button logo feature falling notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control at step up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed such that the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp changes in stages according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 322B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” belongs to notice group 01, and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) “LMP_SCH 02”.

  FIG. 323 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that performs lighting / blinking control of a lamp in step-up notice of this embodiment.

  When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP" is executed. This function is the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” and specifies the address of scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of step-up notice work area “YKK_STP”. The step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”.

  The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON indicating the address of scheduler data, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is to be processed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is realized that the lamp is turned off when the advance notice is not won. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a step-up notice corresponding to the step-up number (1 to 4).

  In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice whose step-up number is 4 and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. Scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” executes the ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY) by designating the gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, and waits 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process Thus, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked in the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the background, symbol ramp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH01".

  Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the processing of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice whose step-up number is 4 and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. Scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” executes lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY) by specifying lamp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up, and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step Execute the wait process of Thus, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked for 3 seconds in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 01 ramp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH02”.

  Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the process next to the caller (the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

  The step-up notice has been described above. Here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will be described. The first is that it is possible to call scheduler data for the lottery result by one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result values) which are dynamically rewritten. is there. Depending on the contents of the advance notice, there are also cases where the range of lottery result values is several hundred, and in the case of two branches such as IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and it becomes too complicated to manage corrections and the like. On the other hand, "SUBC" solves the above problems easily by using the work memory contents as an index. Further, although the number of the work memory and the number of the call address tables for branching are one in the present embodiment, a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by providing a plurality of both. The second one takes the form of "CALL", so it is possible to execute common scheduler data after the "SUBC" function is executed, and there is no need to list the number of scheduler data after branching, By describing one scheduler data, it is possible to execute the same process after every branch. Further, in order to cope with the problem of the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements of the call address table for branching, the "SUBC" function may be ended without performing the branching process.

  That is, the function "SUBC" can select scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in a table format, and can call the selected scheduler data. In simple conditional branching, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data of branch destinations, but with function "SUBC", branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. This makes it easy to handle additions and changes to the contents of presentation, and can improve development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control at button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the change, and the notice is executed until the end by accepting the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled in accordance with the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

  The button cut-in notice belongs to notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03" as shown in FIG. 322B. Since the step-up notice belongs to a different notice group and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, it is possible to execute the notice in parallel.

  FIG. 324 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in advance notice of this embodiment.

  When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, first, the function "KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA" is executed, and then the wait process "NOP: 30" of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thus, the designated lamp is lit (flickers) for one second based on the gradation pattern data “PTA_CUT_STA”. At this time, a ramp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

  Subsequently, in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player, the loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. In order to correspond to one frame per loop, 90 cycles correspond to 3 seconds. In loop processing, functions from “LOOPST” indicating the start of the loop to a function “LOOP” indicating the end of the loop are executed up to a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed up to 90 times.

  To describe the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to button cut-in advance notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” and identifies the start address of scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. The button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, “0: button OFF” when the effect button is not operated, and “1: button ON” when the effect button is operated. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Further, the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is rewritten with a program for button processing other than the scheduler data.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: button OFF”, the button cut-in advance notice button OFF lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” Ru. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" (function "LOOP") of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" of the caller. Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited and the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends.

  On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set to button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", button cut-in notice button ON button cut-in notice button ON lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" in button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" Is selected. The content of scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is function "SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT", scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" Is executed as a parameter.

  An address of button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data is stored in the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT". Specifically, SUBJ_NON indicating the address of the scheduler data, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are stored. Note that SUBJ_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is to be processed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is realized that the lamp is turned off when the advance notice is not won. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the lighting pattern (color, lighting time) of the lamp corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

  In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area “YKK_CUT” stores a lottery result value indicating a button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4 and the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed. In the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4”, first, the lamp is lit in red (gradation data pattern “PTA_CUT_RED”) by lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and wait processing of 150 frames is performed for 5 seconds. Let At this time, ramp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used to drive scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven using the notice group 02 ramp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH03".

  Note that the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is not called CALL but is called JUMP, so execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function “STOP” and returns to the caller scheduler “SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT” do not do. Therefore, there are two types of termination of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed and when the "STOP" function included in schedulers "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1" to "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. There is.

  The button cut-in advance notice has been described above. Here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. The first is that it is possible to call scheduler data for the lottery result by one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result values) which are dynamically rewritten. Depending on the contents of the notice, there is also a thing that the range of lottery result value will be several hundreds, and in the bifurcation like IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and it becomes too complicated to manage correction etc. . "SUBJ" solves the above problem easily by indexing the work memory contents. Further, although the number of the work memory and the number of the call address tables for branching are one in the present embodiment, a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by providing a plurality of both. The second one takes the form of "JUMP", so it is possible to execute different processing for each of the branched scheduler data after the execution of the "SUBJ" function. Also, as in the case of "SUBC", in order to cope with problems in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, branch processing is not performed and the "SUBC" function is ended. You may do so.

  That is, like the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" selects scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and the selected scheduler data It is possible to make the process transition to and obtain the same effect as the function "SUBC".

  Also, unlike the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" continues to execute the processing of the schedule data of the call destination and does not return to the process of the call source, so it is suitable for selectively executing the process. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed is different depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to suppress the effect from being repeatedly executed by using the function “SUBJ”. On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the process by the scheduler data of the calling source, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after the calling destination process is executed, and the processing can be simplified.

  Therefore, by using the functions "SUBC" and "SUBJ", the structure of the scheduler data can be simplified and the structure can flexibly cope with the processing branch. Furthermore, since it is easy to cope with additions / changes simply by changing the branch destination of the table format, it is possible to improve development efficiency and to easily cope with specification changes of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control in star feature announcement]
Subsequently, control of the star character preview performed in the second half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. Reach occurs in the variation display of the special symbol, and when it shifts to the second half of the variation, group notice occurs, and star feature notice is executed independently of group notice. For the star character preview, there are three types of star characters 5002 (in this embodiment, left star character 5002a, middle star character 5002b, and right star character 5002c) operable by a driver (motor). By operating, the degree of expectation of symbol variation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of appearances of the star character 5002, the higher the degree of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 322B, the star character preview of this embodiment is executed by driving the star role trailer motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH02” (left star title scheduler data scheduler). Be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH 02 to 04) for operating the star character 5002 is provided in advance, but it is also possible to use a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH 05 to 09). .

  FIG. 325 to FIG. 327 are diagrams for explaining the contents of scheduler data for performing motor control in the star symbol preview according to the present embodiment. Fig. 325 shows scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" for controlling the whole flow and left star character 5002a, Fig. 326 shows scheduler data for controlling the right star character 5002c "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2", and Fig. 327 shows scheduler for controlling the middle star character 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3."

  When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA" is executed. This function is the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star character trailer branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the address of scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the star work preview work area “YKK_HYA” with reference to the designated star work advance notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”. . The star character work preview work area "YKK_HYA" stores a lottery result value of the star work trailer notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star work branch notice call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

  The address of star character appearance scheduler data is stored in the star character trailer branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA". Specifically, SUBC_NON indicating the address of scheduler data, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call that indicates that nothing is to be processed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is realized that the feature is made inoperative when the advance notice is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are scheduler data addresses for executing star feature announcements. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is only left star feature 5002a, SUBC_MOT_HYA2 is left star feature 5002a and right star feature 5002c SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star characters 5002.

  In this embodiment, a lottery result value indicating execution of a star character preview for causing the left star character 5002a, the middle star character 5002b, and the right star character 5002c to appear in the star character work work area "YKK_HYA" "3" is stored, and scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In the case of operating only the left star character 5002a, the lottery result value of the star character preview is "1", and in the case of operating the left star character 5002a and the right star character 5002c, the star character lottery "2" is set as the result value.

  The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies a parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the pattern of the appearance operation of the left star character 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor reproduction process. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" on which the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is executed.

  Next, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” appearing as right star character 5002 c by function “REQ”. The function "REQ" is a function for executing scheduler data specified by a parameter by the scheduler specified by a parameter as well. Here, the right star character 5002 c appearing scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed using the right star character 5002 c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03”. Similarly, the mid-star character 5002 b appearing scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed by the function “REQ” using the mid-star character 5002 b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04”. In the present embodiment, motor reproduction processing (function “MPLAY”) for operating the right star character 5002 c and the middle star character 5002 b is performed in the same frame as the motor reproduction processing for the left star character 5002 a. ing. As described above, the star data 5002 can be controlled in parallel by causing the schedulers to operate the respective star characters 5002 to be executed by different schedulers.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing “NOP: 300”. During this weight time, the left star character 5002a operates in a designated manner. After the end of the weight processing, the function "RET" is executed to return to the calling star character trailer motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1", and the function "stop" ends the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1".

  Next, control of the right star character 5002 c will be described with reference to FIG. The right star character 5002c appearing scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the scheduler "MOT_SHC03" for the right star character 5002c scheduler data designated at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

  When scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is started, as shown in FIG. 326, a parameter “PTA_HYA_RGT” indicating an appearance operation mode (pattern) of right star character 5002 c is designated to execute motor reproduction processing “MPLAY”. . Subsequently, 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing "NOP: 300" are executed. This weight time is the operation time of the right star character 5002c. After the end of the wait processing, the processing is ended by the execution of the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

  Finally, control of the middle star character 5002b will be described with reference to FIG. The mid-star character 5002 b appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is executed using the mid-star character 5002 b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04” specified at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 327, a parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating an appearance operation mode (pattern) of middle star character 5002b is designated to execute motor reproduction processing "MPLAY". . Subsequently, 300 frames (10 seconds) of weight processing "NOP: 300" are executed. This weight time is the operation time of the middle star character 5002b. After the end of the wait processing, the processing is ended by the execution of the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star character 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star character 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the mid-star character 5002b are function "REQ". By using this, it is possible to operate each item in parallel. That is, the operations of the respective prizes can be executed in parallel without special control by executing the individually defined scheduler data as necessary. The advantage of having scheduler data run in parallel is that, first, a single feature operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing a plurality of operations corresponding to a notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, and the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called, thereby enabling easy control. In the present embodiment, an example in which three types of prizes are operated in parallel has been described, but it is possible to execute more prizes in parallel as long as there is no problem in the operation of the prizes. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of prizes in parallel without the need for complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize an effect rich in variations.

[18-7-5. Motor control in the notice of drop of logo and features]
Subsequently, control of the logo combination falling notice performed in the second half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. The logo feature drop notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star feature notice. The logo feature drop notice is a notice effect operating in such a manner that the logo feature 5001 with the logo of the gaming machine is dropped vertically in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a big hit than usual Indicates that is high.

  As shown in FIG. 322B, the logo feature drop notice of this embodiment is performed by driving the logo feature drop notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” (logo feature thing scheduler data scheduler). To be executed. The general purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH 05 to 09) can also operate the logo combination 5001.

  FIG. 328 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that performs motor control in the logo combination falling notice according to the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, first, the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT" is executed, and thereafter, the wait process "NOP: 30" of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thereby, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT". Specifically, the logo feature 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

  Subsequently, in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player, the loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. As described above, in loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed up to 90 times.

  Describing the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo feature drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. Ru.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo combination falling notice lottery result branching call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, and based on the contents of button logo combination preview work area “YKK_LGO”, the leading address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination Identify. The button logo feature notice work area "YKK_LGO" stores the result of the button logo feature fall notice lottery, and when the button logo feature fall notice lottery is out, "0: not executed", the button If the player has won the logo lottery item falling lottery execution lottery, "1: logo falling notice execution" is set. The result of execution of the button logo combination falling notice execution drawing corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo combination falling notice lottery result branching call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”.

  While "0: not executed" is set in the button logo combination preview work area "YKK_LGO", the logo combination drop notice is not executed in the button logo combination drop notice lottery result branching call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", and the motor scheduler is not executed. Data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP") of the scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" of the caller. Therefore, if the button logo combination falling off lottery is missed, loop processing is executed 90 times, and then the loop processing is exited, function "STOP" is executed, and scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. .

  On the other hand, when "1: logo drop notice execution" is set in button logo role notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when it is elected to run button logo role fall notice lottery, button logo feature fall In the notice lottery result branching call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is selected at the time of the execution of the logo combination falling notice. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo feature drop notice button branch call address table It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo combination product drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and when the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF”, the effect button is operated. If it has been set, "1: button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo / feature drop advance notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”.

  While the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" is set to "0: button OFF", the button logo notice of falling button button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", the logo notice of falling button OFF button motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and the process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" of the caller. This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the loop processing of 90 times even if the player has won the lottery for the button logo function falling notice, the function "STOP" is exited from the loop processing. The scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is ended.

  On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor logo when the logo combination falling notice button is ON in the button logo combination falling notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" The data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" first execute the function "COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON". The function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the logo combination 5001 is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_LGO_ON". The parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo character 5001. Furthermore, the weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 120". At this time, the logo character 5001 performs the dropping operation for 3 seconds, and stops at the dropping position for the remaining 1 second.

  Furthermore, by executing the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI", the logo character 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Subsequently, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 90", while the logo character 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the end of the weight processing, the execution of the logo character falling operation is ended, so the function "MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0" is executed, and the button logo character preview lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed". The process returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN". This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" returns to function "LOOP" but the button logo feature preview lottery result is rewritten as "0: not executed", so the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" for dropping button logo features is executed The remaining loop count processing is performed, and execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is ended by the function "STOP".

  As described above, it is possible to display an effect on the liquid crystal only when the logo character 5001 is dropped and at the drop timing of the logo character 5001 by internally issuing a command when dropping the logo character 5001. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function “COMMAND”, it is possible to cooperate with a plurality of types of rendering devices and execute as needed at appropriate timing, and it is possible to perform a more entertaining rendering .

  In this embodiment, although the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal in the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source using the function "COMMAND", control is performed from the scheduler to the program by processing the command issued by the function "COMMAND" on the program side. By temporarily returning, performing complicated processing that can not be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result in the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, processing that can not be originally controlled by the function command can also be performed. Moreover, the merit of issuing a command in scheduler data is that time management and execution determination by a program are not necessary by setting the command issue timing as the processing timing as it is. Further, it becomes possible to interactively process an external input (a button, a jog dial, a touch pad) by a user not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, issue a command using the function "COMMAND", and perform processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is a function of transmitting a fixed value command, but the content of the work area is transmitted as a command by designating a work area instead of the fixed value. May be

[18-8. Application example of scheduler data (at power on)]
Next, scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the gaming machine is powered on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variable display will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 329 is a diagram for explaining scheduler data to be executed when the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is powered on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, the main control board 1310 outputs a power on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 drives scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" with the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH" when the power-on command is received.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed, the sub internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and scheduler data corresponding to the sub gaming state (sub internal state) is activated. With the progress of the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON”, the liquid crystal display screen displays a screen corresponding to the sub internal state, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc. as shown in FIG. Be done. At this time, the main gaming state is in a standby state. When the standby state is ended, the game is started, and when the game ball is won in the start winning opening, the main gaming state and the sub internal state transition to the fluctuating state.

[18-8-2. Power on control]
Subsequently, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 330 is a view for explaining the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control substrate 1510 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

  As described above, when the game machine is powered on or when a predetermined event occurs in game control on the main control board 1310, a main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. Ru. As described in FIG. 312, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100, and is analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module specifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, etc., and activates the corresponding scheduler to execute scheduler data.

  Also, when the function "COMMAND 0" (FIG. 319) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 as in the main command and analyzed by the main command analysis process. Be done.

  When the main command or the command output by the function “COMMAND 0” is received, a command for executing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis process. The generated commands include a command for activating the scheduler and a command for controlling various rendering devices (sub internal output command).

  In the command for starting the scheduler, for example, scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change of the gaming state on the main control board 1310 and the change of the sub internal state due to the progress of the control on the peripheral control board 1510 Scheduler data for executing a rendering corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined such that various rendering devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, besides activating the scheduler directly from the command, it is possible to activate another scheduler by the function "REQ" included in the scheduler data.

  On the other hand, the command for controlling the rendering device (sub internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command or the like for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the rendering device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where it is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. Commands for controlling the rendering device are temporarily stored in the sub internal output command buffer, and are processed in order of storage from the top of the buffer.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by further activating another scheduler from the scheduler, it is possible to hierarchically combine and execute a plurality of schedulers by receiving one main command. As a result, it becomes possible to componentize various controls in the peripheral control board 1510 in units of scheduler data, and by combining schedulers, a plurality of types of effects can be implemented in parallel while realizing various effect control. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine, such as making the debugging work more efficient.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, command analysis processing can be made common by command output by the function “COMMAND 0”. This makes it possible to share the scheduler data selection logic by command analysis and the function parameter determination logic, resulting in the problem that a large number of scheduler data combinations must be managed in a table. Can be suppressed.

  Subsequently, activation of the scheduler and execution of scheduler data in the case of receiving a command at power-on from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 331 is a diagram for describing a process of executing scheduler data at the time of power on in the embodiment.

  As described in FIG. 330, when the game machine is powered on and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process, and the scheduler is executed. The activation process activates the substate scheduler, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. In executing each scheduler data, execute the function "COMMAND 0" and issue a command to create a sub internal state, and further output a lamp or sound corresponding to the sub internal state as necessary. .

  Specifically describing the scheduler to be executed, first, the state power on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH". In the state power on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON”, the function “COMMANDO” issues a command “COM_STS_TAIKI” to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" in the standby state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", a standby state is established for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" to transition to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO" to stop the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_MDEMO” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the maker demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 300", a standby state is established for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" to transition to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO" to stop the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and state model demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" of the model demonstration state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", a standby state is established for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the waiting state, the function "COMMANDOO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" for transitioning to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

  The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and state anti-goto scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state anti-goto scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” is executed using the sub state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO” is executed. Thereby, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the anti-goto state. Furthermore, by executing the function “SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO”, the reproduction of sound is started based on the sound data “PTA_SND_GOTO” in the goto prevention state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 450", a standby state is made for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed by “main command analysis processing”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed. At this stage, the gaming machine becomes ready to play, and the game is started, and this waiting state is looped until the gaming ball is won.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 can be set only by receiving the power on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND 0" can be controlled as if the main control board 1310 has issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter value, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting a command with the function "COMMAND 0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is effective especially when there is a restriction on the capacity of the game control program.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (representation 2)]
Subsequently, an example will be described in which a jail object drop notice is executed instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo part drop notice. The prisoner drop notices are divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, control different from the control described above is performed in that control is performed such that the parameter used in the first half of the previous notice is taken over in the second half of the notice.

[18-9-1. Summary of production]
FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of change display from start of change to stop of special symbol in this embodiment, wherein (A) is an effect to be executed from start of change to end thereof It is a figure which shows the scheduler data for performing presentation, and the scheduler performed, (B) is a figure explaining the position of the prison object 5003 in a prison object falling notice.

  In the series of change displays shown in FIG. 332 (A), a button (BTN) first half drop notice of a step up notice and a first half of a notice of dropping of a prison object is executed in the first half of change. After that, reach occurs, and in the second half of the change, the group announcement and the button prison object first-half drop notice continued from the first half are executed followed by the jail product second-half fall notice. For each advance notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, and operation of special effects are executed. The contents of the step-up notice are as described above.

  Next, referring to FIG. 332 (B), the contents of the prison object dropping advance notice will be described. As mentioned above, the prisoner falling notice is divided into a button (BTN) first half falling notice and a second half falling notice of the prisoner.

  In the first half, the first half of the button, the first half falling notice of a drop of a prison object, by operating the effect button, advance notice proceeds. Therefore, even if the player has won the execution lottery for the first-half falling notice of the button holding character, the falling effect of the holding object 5003 is not executed unless the production button is operated. On the other hand, in the second half, the second half of the second half, the second half falling notice is performed based on the result of the execution lottery of the second half of the second half falling notice, regardless of the operation of the effect button.

  When the player has won the lottery for execution of the first half falling notice of the button prison object and operates the effect button at a predetermined timing, the prison object 5003 falls to the middle position. Furthermore, when the prison character 5003 falls to the middle position and if the winning lottery for the second half drop notice of the prison character is won, the prison character 5003 falls to the lower position. That is, the prison object 5003 is dropped from the upper part (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the jail product drop notice, and is dropped to the lower part (lower position) in the second half. In addition, when it is elected to the execution lottery of the second half of the jail drop notice, it falls to the lower part regardless of the position of the jail article 5003. In addition, when the prison notice is dropped, the prison control 5003 returns to the upper part (initial position).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 332 (B), the announcement of dropping of the prison object is executed in six types of patterns. Specifically, if the result of the lottery for executing the first half falling notice of the button prisoner is not elected, it does not depend on the operation of the effect button, so the second half falling advance notice of the second run is not elected (pattern 1) There is a case of winning (pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, since the button prisoner first half falling notice and the prison second half falling notice are not won, the prisoner 5003 is not dropped and kept from moving from the top. In the case of pattern 2, since the prison object 5003 does not fall but is located at the upper part without dropping in the case of the prison official falling notice, and since the winning lottery is won in the second half dropping notice of the prison object, the prison object 5003 goes from the top to the bottom Fall at a stretch.

  When the player has won the lottery for executing the first half falling notice of the button, the presentation mode of the first half falling notice of the button differs depending on whether or not the presentation button is operated. Therefore, the four types of presentation modes can be executed depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button and the result of the execution lottery for the second half falling of the prison object.

  If you have won the execution lottery of the first half drop notice of the button prisoner, and do not operate the production button, and further, if the result of the selection lottery of the second fall of the prison drop is non-winning, the prison object 5003 does not fall Remain on top (pattern 3). If you win the execution lottery of the first half drop notice of the button prisoner and operate the production button, and further, if the result of the execution lottery of the second fall of the prison drop is non-winning, the prison object 5003 at the time of operation of the production button Drops from the top to the middle, and remains in the middle until the end of the prison drop notice (pattern 4).

  If you have won the lottery for the first run of the first half of the button prison notice, and do not operate the production button, and if you have won the run lottery for the second fall of the prison, you have not operated the presentation button. The prison object 5003 is positioned at the top without falling until the second half falling notice of the object is started, and falls from the top to the bottom in the second half dropping notice of the second jail thing (pattern 5). If you have won the lottery for the execution of the first half drop notice of the button prisoner, operated the effect button, and further won the run lottery for the second half fall notice of the prison object, the prison object 5003 from the top at the time of operation of the presentation button It falls to the middle, and further drops from the upper part to the lower part in the second half drop notice of the prison object (pattern 6).

  As described above, six patterns of effect modes can appear in the prison object falling advance notice according to the present embodiment, and scheduler data for controlling the operation of the prison object 5003 in the jail article falling advance notice will be described below. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 332 (A), a button prison object first half falling notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for controlling the operation of the prison object 5003 in the first half drop notice of the button prison object and the second half of the prison object The second half falling advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which controls the operation of the prison object 5003 in the falling notice will be described.

[18-9-2. Various controls in the prisoner's drop notice]
FIG. 333 is a view for explaining the contents of a button “first half falling advance notice scheduler data“ SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1 ”for performing motor control in the first half falling advance notice of the button first time drop according to the first half of the first half falling notice of this embodiment. . As described above, when the player has won the lottery for executing the first half drop notice of the button prison object, the function "LOOP" accepts the operation of the effect button for 3 seconds, and operates the prison object 5003 when the effect button is operated. Execute the effect to make it. In the case where the execution lottery of the first half falling notice of the button is not won, if the effect button is not operated even if it is won, the operation is ended without operating the prison object 5003. A motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the buttoned prisoner first-half falling advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect when the game board side effect display device 1600 causes the prison object 5003 to rattle. After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and thereafter, the wait process "NOP: 30" of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thereby, based on the operation pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT", the specified operation is performed for one second. Specifically, the prison object 5003 rattles.

  Subsequently, in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player, the loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. As described above, in loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed up to 90 times.

  Describing the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" takes as a parameter the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button interceptor first-half falling notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" To be executed.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button first half falling notice randomization result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”, and scheduler data to be a branch destination based on the contents of button first half falling notice work area “YKK_NTA1” Identify the start address of The result of the execution lottery of button first half falling notice is stored in the button first half falling notice work area “YKK_NTA1”, and in the case of not winning the execution of the button first half falling notice of lottery, “0: In the case of winning the non-winning selection button and the first half falling notice of lottery execution of the button, "1: first half falling execution notice of the first half of prisoning execution" is set. The result of the execution drawing of the button first half falling advance notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button first half falling advance notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”.

  When "0: not selected" is set in the button prisoner first-half falling notice work area "YKK_NTA1", the button prisoner first-half falling notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the button prisoner thing The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is selected when the first half falling notice is not executed. The content of scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the button Combo 1st half falling notice lottery is "not won". End the execution of.

  On the other hand, when "1: First half drop notice is executed" is set to the button first half drop notice work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, when the button lottery for first half drop notice is won. In the first half falling advance notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” of the button prisoner product, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” is selected at the time of the execution time of the falling prediction of the falling prison object. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button forged part first half notice button branch call address It is executed with the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button first-come-first-served fall advance notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. . As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo feature drop notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and “0: button OFF when the effect button is not operated. When the effect button is operated, “1: button ON” is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button combination first half falling advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: button OFF”, the button first half drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, the button first letter drop first notice button OFF motor scheduler The data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" of the caller (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the loop processing of 90 times even if the player has won the lottery for executing the first half drop notice of the button prison object, the loop processing is exited and the function "STOP" Is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” ends.

  On the other hand, when the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “1: button ON”, the button jackpot first-half falling notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, the button first-half falling notice button ON When the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. First, the content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" executes the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" and issues a command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect at the time of dropping the prison object, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution section 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to an intermediate position. Furthermore, weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is performed by the function "NOP: 120", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

  Finally, by executing the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1”, “1” is written in the scheduler wedge position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” to record that the prison object 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. After that, the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is ended by the function "STOP".

  When the button first half drop notice which is the first half of the jail drop notice is finished, the second half fall notice of the jail drop is started. FIG. 334 and FIG. 335 are diagrams for explaining the contents of a prison object late falling advance notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that performs motor control in the latter case of the second half falling advance notice of the prison object falling notice of this embodiment. is there. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used for execution of the second half falling advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" of the prisoner as in the case of the button first half fall advance notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

  When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA" is executed to start drawing an effect that suggests whether the prison object 5003 falls on the game board side effect display device 1600 or not. . Thereafter, weight processing “NOP: 90” of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of the big hit becomes large when the prison object 5003 falls, the player's sense of expectation is enhanced by performing the effect drawing for 3 seconds.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the second half late notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters .

  Scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” of the prisoner, and based on the contents of second half drop notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler data of the branch destination Identify the start address. The result of the execution lottery of the second half of the jail drop notice is stored in the second half of the second half notice of work of the second half of the work area "YKK_NTA2". When the winning a prize for the second half of the jail dropping notice is selected, “1: running of the second half of the jail dropping notice is executed” is set. The result of the execution lottery of the second half falling notice of the prisoner corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the second half falling notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” of the second half.

  If "0: not selected" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2" for the second half drop notice of the prisoner, the second half fall of the second half drop notice lottery result for the second run of the second run The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON” is selected when no advance notice is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" executes the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON", and the value of scheduler eyelid position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the result of the second half falling notice lottery result of the prisoner object branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" Branch based on

  If “0: initial position” is set in the scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the second half drop notice of the second half is not made in the second half drop notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" at execution is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is restored.

  When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected in the case of the second half falling advance notice not executed in the second half fall notice lottery result branching call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" Ru. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is restored. After that, the value of scheduler work position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is overwritten on “0: initial position”, and scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is ended.

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the prison character objects fall in the second half drop notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. When no notice is given and no notice is given, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is selected.

  In the first half falling advance notice execution / second half fall advance notice non-winning condition of the prisoner, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” first executes weight processing “NOP: 120” of 120 frames (about 4 seconds). In the weight processing executed here, as described later, when the prison object 5003 is at the lower position, it is a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the prison object 5003 is originally at the middle position, it waits for four seconds.

  After the end of the weight processing, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the prison object 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Furthermore, in order to secure the operation time of the prison object 5003, the wait process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2."

  In addition, when “1: second half falling notice” is set in work area “YKK_NTA2” for second half late notice 2 of the prison character, the second half last notice lottery result of the second half of the jail item is branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN” is selected when the second half falling advance notice is won. The scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" executes the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN", and branches based on the value of the scheduler eyelid position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the drop of the prisoner drop notice 2 branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2 DOWN" .

  When “0: initial position” is set in scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the first half drop notice of a prison object in the second half drop notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” Motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of execution / second half falling notice.

  In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (Fig. 335), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed, and a command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the prison object 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, weight processing of 240 frames (about 8 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 240", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

  Then, at the timing when the prison object 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect that the prison object 5003 has reached the lower position. Furthermore, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and the drawing of the effect is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Then, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter “PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the prison object 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

  Subsequently, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed, and the above-mentioned scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is called to return the prison object 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. Thereafter, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the scheduler chopstick position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the first half drop of the prison object in the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2 DOWN” Notice execution, second half falling notice at the time of winning the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

  In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 335), first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END” is executed to issue a command “COM_NTA_MID-END”. The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the prison object 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" in the same frame as the issuance of command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the prison object 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 120", and in the meantime, the prison object 5003 is dropped from the middle position to the lower position.

  Then, at the timing when the prison object 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect that the prison object 5003 has reached the lower position. Furthermore, the weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and the drawing of the effect is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Here, to match the timing when the prison object 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position and the timing to start the operation of returning the prison object 5003 to the initial position, 120 frames (approximately Execute wait processing for 4 seconds). This time is the time until the prison object 5003 moves from the initial position to the middle position.

  After that, as in the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN", the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed to return the prison object 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the prison object 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. Thereafter, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

  When the prison character 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0” is executed to set the value of the scheduler eyelid position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” to “0: initial position” And update the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  In the prison drop object, scheduler data is divided into a first half and a second half, and in the first half, the operation of the second prize is different depending on whether the player operates the presentation button. Therefore, the position of the prison object 5003 can be specified by writing the position of the prison object 5003 using the function “MEMW” in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the second half. . As a result, the movement amount of the motor can be determined for each position of the prison object 5003, and by calling each corresponding scheduler data, it is possible to execute the rendering according to the operation result of the rendering button.

  Further, also in the return operation to the initial position after the operation of the prison object 5003, common scheduler data is called up by the movement from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

  The function “MEMW” can write a fixed value to a predetermined area at the time of execution of scheduler data, and can refer to a common value by referring to the execution of other scheduler data. In this way, it is possible to specify, at the time of execution of each scheduler data, a value indicating a state or the like that changes due to the execution of a plurality of scheduler data. The process can be completed only by the definition of the scheduler data without creating the scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processes depending on the state, and it is possible to streamline the creation and debugging of scheduler data and to facilitate management. Further, in the present embodiment, the function is a function of writing a fixed value, but by designating a work name with a parameter of a function instead of the fixed value, data transfer from the program side or processing based on command information Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. The unique feature of the function "MEMW" can be processed with respect to information not determined at the start of scheduler data execution including the function "MEMW" as long as the information is determined by the execution of the function "MEMW". This enables control of effective time and interactive control.

[18-10. Configuration example of scheduler data (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of preliminary announcement effects has been described above. The execution contents of such a series of notice effects are drawn based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Further, specific effect contents are drawn for each of the notice effects.

  Hereinafter, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, a procedure for controlling the execution of a series of preview effects, and a basic presentation related to the series of preview effects and variation patterns (regardless of lottery other than preview effects) The configuration of scheduler data for executing a background effect and an effect related to a symbol effect that is rendered and has a one-on-one variation pattern will be described.

  In this embodiment, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change is managed in block units (rendering section) divided in predetermined configuration units. For example, until the reach occurs from the start of the symbol variation, or until the symbol stops when the reach does not occur (the first half variation), the block from the reach occurrence until the symbol stops (second variation) ), And the period from the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. Further, each block is assigned a time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and an execution timing and an execution time of the advance notice effect within the allocated time are defined. The data corresponding to the time corresponding to each block and the basic effect to be executed are combined to form block data.

  In addition, when the basic divisions related to the variation are compared with a plurality of variation patterns, the rule of block division divides the same basic representation part into common block data, and divides the part having a difference in basic representation of liquid crystal display into block data Do. Referring to FIG. 336A, in the variation pattern classified liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment, the variation pattern “10H01H” is normally changed for 6 seconds. It has become a loss, and normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then a pattern effect of loss is performed. Since the six-second effect of normal fluctuation and the loss-stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, they are divided into liquid-crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) for six seconds of normal fluctuation and liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) of lost-stop.

  The fluctuation pattern “10H02H” is usually lost for 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the symbol effect of the loss is performed. Because the 12-second effect of normal fluctuation is also used in other fluctuation patterns, it is divided as liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK) of normal fluctuation for 12 seconds, and the symbol effect of losing is exactly the same as the fluctuation pattern "10H01H" The liquid crystal effect block data of the stop of the loss is commonly used the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD 02_BLK) of the stop of the break which is divided into the liquid crystal display blocks by the fluctuation pattern “10H01H”. As for the other variation patterns, similarly, with respect to the part which has already been block data-ized with respect to the basic effect, it is commonly used and block data-modification is newly performed with respect to the part having a difference.

  As described above, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data by performing blocking, and all the variation patterns and the basic effects such as big hit other than the variation are achieved by combining the unique liquid crystal effect block data. It becomes possible to realize all the variation patterns and the basic effects such as the big hit other than the variation. Although it is important that the total amount of effect data to be created is significantly reduced, the main purpose of blocking is the liquid crystal effect including a specific basic effect when there is a change in a specific basic effect. The change is to be reflected in all variation patterns using block data.

  With regard to the liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, the format and function are completely different from the sound, lamp, and scheduler data of the feature in the present embodiment in order to control the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. The configuration in which the rendering scheduler data for rendering and the rendering scheduler data for preliminary rendering are combined has the same configuration as the sub rendering block data for controlling sounds, lamps, and special effects. In addition, drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and moving image material ID, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, color related to a picture or movie displayed on the background, effects relating to a design Information, alpha information, etc. are configured with functions that can specify control information for generating display list commands for the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source, and the type and execution timing of effects related to notice effects generated in block data Information to be shown is embedded.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, block data for causing the liquid crystal display device to variably display the identification symbol is defined as liquid crystal symbol block data separately from block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for fluctuating display of the identification symbol independent of the control of the other liquid crystal effects. For example, even in the case where the shape of the identification symbol is changed and displayed variably, a common advance presentation effect is provided. It becomes possible to carry out with a liquid crystal display. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal effects. In addition, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for preview effect related to the symbol are combined for each block data is the same as the sub effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the aspect of the fluctuation display of the identification symbol is embedded.

  FIG. 336A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 336B is a diagram for explaining liquid crystal symbol block data combination numbers (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by fluctuation pattern storing combinations of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 337 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of sub-effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in the present embodiment.

  The variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating combinations of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, unique numbers identifying liquid crystal rendering block data to be configured are held in chronological order with respect to variation pattern numbers. For example, when the variation pattern number is “10H03H”, it is configured by “LCD03_BLK” that indicates normal variation for 12 seconds in the first half variation, “LCD04_BLK” that indicates normal short reach in the second half variation, and “LCD02_BLK” that indicates the time of out of range stop. Be done. At this time, “LCD03_BLK”, “LCD04_BLK”, and “LCD02_BLK” are stored in this order. Thus, the configuration of the basic effect and the advance effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 435, the same liquid crystal rendering block data is used in all of the same rendering sections. For example, when the first half fluctuation is usually 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the notice effect that is actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal rendering block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal rendering block data can be uniquely identified for each fluctuation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 336B, the variation pattern-classified liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating combinations of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal presentation block data combination number table. . Further, the sub rendering block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (same combination, same rendering time) corresponding to the liquid crystal rendering block data of the same variation pattern number in a one-on-one manner.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 337, the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is, like the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table, information indicating combinations of block data for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, sub-effect block data corresponding to the change pattern number is defined by liquid crystal effect block data of the same change pattern number and liquid crystal symbol block data in a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to one-on-one.

  Next, an execution procedure of the notice effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern will be described. Here, an execution procedure of the basic effect and the advance effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, an outline of a procedure for executing effect control based on liquid crystal effect block data, effect control based on liquid crystal symbol block data, and effect control based on sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 338 is a diagram for describing an overview of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

  When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the variation pattern number “10H03H” is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 Notice.

  As described in FIG. 314A, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used and determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and based on the determined block number, each variation pattern number “10H03H” The corresponding block data number is acquired from the variation pattern classified liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the variation pattern classified liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) and the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) Do. By setting all block data numbers corresponding to the respective rendering devices to the same number, it is possible to execute all the renderings of the respective rendering devices synchronously.

  Then, the effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for the number of all layers to the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 and the sub effect block control unit 5320.

  After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is a liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is a sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 is a normal fluctuation 12 seconds liquid crystal effect block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half fluctuation, the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 is a normal fluctuation 12 seconds liquid crystal graphic block data "ZUG03_BLK The sub effect 1 f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normal fluctuation 12 seconds sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”.

  When the processing of the liquid crystal rendering block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal rendering 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal rendering block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the rendering content is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, designates parameters according to the contents of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits the DISPLAY list to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, whereby drawing is performed on the liquid crystal display device.

  When processing liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated to execute drawing scheduler data according to the variation display mode of the identification symbol. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as in the case of processing the liquid crystal rendering block data.

  On the other hand, when processing of sub rendering block data is started, one or more sub rendering 1 f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub rendering block data are activated, and scheduler data specified according to the rendering content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or the execution cycle may be set at startup as shared.

  As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data specification function for controlling an effect device such as a lamp ("KPLAY"), a speaker ("SPLAY"), and a character ("MPLAY"). The designated effect is configured to be executed by sequentially executing the effect data designation function in the defined order. The effect data specification function is transmitted to the modules (the lamp module 5600, the sound module 5500, the drive device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and effects are performed by the various effect devices by each module.

  It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "REQ, REQF". By executing the effect data specification function in the scheduler data called at this time, it is possible to control various effect devices. Furthermore, control using a command instead of a function is possible by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND 0". For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data specification function for controlling the movement of the character, the movement and drawing of the character cooperate with each other as in the case of the prison object falling notice effect described above. Can be performed.

  Here, a procedure for executing effect control using sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 339 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the control pattern start process according to variation pattern related to the variation pattern layer of this embodiment.

  In the effect block control unit 5040, the change pattern layer is selected by the effect control unit 5020 based on the change pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and the control of the block data number by change pattern corresponding to the change pattern is changed. Control is started using the pattern-based sub rendering block data combination number table (FIG. 337). The row position of the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (FIG. 337) is set in the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table row index (step S7001). For example, in the case of the table shown in FIG. 337, if the variation pattern number is “10H01H”, “0” is set to the variation pattern-sub effect block data combination number table row index and the variation pattern number is “10H03H”. For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set to the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data combination number table row index.

  Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row index to “0” (step S7002). It starts from the sub rendering block data corresponding to the first column of the designated row (the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data combination number table row index). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the fluctuation pattern-based sub effect block data control scheduler activation process by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). As a result, a scheduler for executing the variation pattern-based sub effect block data is activated, and scheduler data included in the sub effect block data is executed.

  FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data control activation process of this embodiment.

  First, scheduler execution unit 5060 obtains the number of the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data number table from the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data combination number table based on the row and column indexes (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to "0" (step S7012). As a result, the process is started from the top record of the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data number table specified from the variation pattern classified sub rendering block data combination number table.

  Subsequently, scheduler execution unit 5060 activates scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data by variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the variation pattern classified sub effect block data number table (FIG. 342 (B)). Specifically, based on the sub effect block data number table row index, sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to a notice) from the sub effect block data number table get. One or more pieces of scheduler data are registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the advance notice), and a scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or more scheduler data are made to correspond on the basis of the lottery result of the advance notice and the like.

  Furthermore, when the activation of all the scheduler data defined in the sub effect block data ends, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub effect block data number table row index, and the sub effect block data number table row index changes pattern It is determined whether the number of elements in the row of another sub rendering block data number table has been exceeded (step S 7014). If the number of elements in the row of the sub rendering block data number table by variation pattern has been exceeded (the result of step S 7014 is “YES”), the sub rendering block data control activation process ends. On the other hand, if it does not exceed the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data number table row element number (the result of step S 7014 is “NO”), the next sub rendering block data is processed.

  FIG. 341 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the sub-attribution block data control update process by variation pattern of this embodiment. In the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data control updating process, within the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to a notice) configuring the variation-pattern-based sub effect block data number table Is a process for executing the next variation pattern-based sub rendering block data when the execution of all the scheduler data in the above is completed. The variation pattern-based sub-effect block data control updating process is periodically executed to monitor the execution status of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data.

  First, scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data number table from the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination number table using the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination number table row and column index (Step S7021). Thereby, sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to advance notice) constituting the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data number table is specified and defined as sub-effect block data It is determined whether the scheduler being executed is being executed (step S7022). If it is under execution (the result of step S7022 is "YES"), execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub effect block data control updating process is ended.

  Next, scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all the schedulers of the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to advance notice) defined in the sub effect block data for each variation pattern If the process is completed (the result at step S7022 is "NO"), the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data combination number table column index is incremented, and whether the next column data is the end data ("DATA_END") or not Is determined (step S7023). If it is the end data (the result in step S7023 is "YES"), since the series of effects has been completed, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data control updating process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (the result at step S7023 is "NO"), scheduler execution unit 5060 starts to execute the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data corresponding to the next column data. Then, the variation pattern-based sub effect data block control scheduler activation process is executed (step S7024).

  As described in FIG. 336A, FIG. 336B and FIG. 337, the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing, By making the execution time of each block data the same, it is possible to synchronize effect control by the drawing scheduler, effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and effect control by the plurality of schedulers. Also, by performing blocking, if the same variation pattern, the number of activations of the scheduler defined in the effect block and the effect block is always the same number regardless of the combination of effects and the presence or absence of the appearance of effects Complexity can be reduced, and as a result, quality can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing effect control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub effect schedulers, it is possible to cooperate the operations of various effect devices, and perform various effects without discomfort can do. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices can be independently developed and confirmed in units of rendering devices and block data. Development efficiency can be improved.

  FIG. 342 is a view for explaining the procedure for executing the basic effect and the advance effect of the variable display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and (A) shows the timing for executing the basic effect and the advance effect and the related (B) indicates the configuration of sub-effect block data by fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern-based sub rendering block data includes background sub rendering block data and preview sub rendering block data for executing background rendering and preview rendering. Although FIG. 342 (B) shows a combination of two types of sub effect block data of background block data and advance notice block data, the number of sub effect block data can be varied.

  As shown in FIG. 342, the sub pattern block data classified by fluctuation pattern constituting fluctuation display of fluctuation pattern “10H03H” are “SCH03_BLK” (normal fluctuation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), “SCH02_BLK” It is constituted by the loss stop). The variation pattern classified sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation to the stop of the left symbol and the right symbol. The variation pattern-basis sub effect block data “SCH 04 _BLK” corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol is stopped and the result of the variation display is determined to be lost and the determined symbol is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 342 (A), the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern includes sub effect block data relating to step-up notice, BTN logo symbol drop notice, and notice of symbol stop notice, and sub effect relating to background Block data is defined. Further, in the sub rendering block data “SCH 04 _BLK”, sub rendering block data relating to cut-in notice and group preview and sub rendering block data relating to the background are defined. Furthermore, in the sub rendering block “SCH02_BLK”, the sub rendering block data relating to the background is defined without defining the preview rendering sub rendering block data. In the figure, the execution of the advance notice effect is not overlapped, but a plurality of advance notice block data may be defined and executed so as to overlap a plurality of advance notice effects. The contents of each preliminary announcement effect shown in FIG. 342 are as described above.

  Hereinafter, effect control by each sub effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 342 (B), two types of sub rendering block data in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" will be described.

  In the sub rendering scheduler data relating to the background, normal variation 12 seconds background sub rendering block data is defined. In the normal fluctuation 12 seconds background sub-effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12 seconds background are defined. Since the normal variation 12 seconds background sub-effect block data is scheduler data relating to the background, the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is obtained. Therefore, the process is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” ends.

  The function "NOP" and the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the BTN logo combination drop notice sub-effect block data, and the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the advance notice. The function "NOP" is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal rendering scheduler, and is defined to perform sub-rendering in accordance with the liquid crystal rendering. As step-up notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub rendering block data has the same rendering time as the step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data. The BTN logo combination falling notice sub-representation block data defines a sub-representation scheduler number and sub-representation scheduler data related to the BTN logo combination falling notice. The BTN logo combination falling advance notice sub effect block data has the same presentation time as the BTN logo combination falling advance liquid crystal effect block data. The symbol stop notice sub effect block data defines a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice. The symbol stop notice sub rendering block data has the same rendering time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal rendering block data. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub effect block data.

  By executing the above sub rendering block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering block data, scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub rendering block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering It will be.

  At this time, from the start of fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal rendering block data (step-up notice), the liquid crystal rendering block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal preview rendering from the end of the liquid crystal rendering block data corresponding to each liquid crystal preview rendering Between the start of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal advance notice effect (pattern stop advance notice) and the end of execution of the sub-effect block data by variation pattern “SCH03_BLK” "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub rendering scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal rendering block data in the variation pattern-based scheduler block by the function "NOP", the scheduler etc. is sequentially scheduled by the program etc. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of data, it is possible to execute the effects of each of the effect devices corresponding to the liquid crystal advance notification effect at the designated timing. In addition, it is assumed that the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data may be omitted.

  The execution time of the advance notice effect set by the scheduler data for controlling the effect device such as the lamp, the sound, and the thing is defined as the common time for each of the notice effects. As a result, since the time from the start of control by the sub effect block data to the execution of each advance notice effect is uniquely determined, the control timings of the respective effect devices can be synchronized.

  Further, the time information at the time of execution of the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data is managed not by the start of variation but by a relative value from the start of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data execution. Thus, when the same variation pattern-based sub-effect block data is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data has a presentation start time from the start of the variation for each variation pattern. Although different from that, since the time value is relatively managed in the variation pattern classified sub effect block data, it can be processed without any problem. In the case of the variation pattern classified liquid crystal effect block data, it is similarly managed by the relative value from the start of execution of the variation pattern classified liquid crystal attraction block data, and similarly in the case of variation pattern classified liquid crystal symbol block data It is managed by a relative value from the start of data execution.

  Next, the variation pattern-basis sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" will be described. The variation pattern-based sub rendering block data "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub rendering block data are executed in parallel.

  In the sub rendering scheduler data related to the background, normal short reach background sub rendering block data is defined. In the normal short reach background sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. The normal short reach background sub rendering block data is scheduler data relating to the background, so it has the same rendering time as the variation pattern-based sub rendering block data “SCH 04 _BLK”. Therefore, the process is continuously executed until the variation pattern classified sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" is ended.

  In the sub rendering scheduler data related to the preview, a function "NOP", a cut-in preview sub rendering block data, and a group preview sub rendering block data are defined. The function “NOP” is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal rendering scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub rendering in accordance with the liquid crystal rendering. The cut-in advance notice sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in advance notice. The cut-in advance notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in advance notice liquid crystal effect block data. As the group advance sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the group advance are defined. The group advance sub rendering block data has the same rendering time as the group notification liquid crystal rendering block data. The variation pattern-based sub rendering block data “SCH 04 _BLK” is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub rendering block data.

  By executing the above sub rendering block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering block data, scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub rendering block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal rendering It will be.

  In addition, in the variation pattern classified sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK”, the same as the variation pattern classified sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”, but the number of the sub effect block data sequence is the same. no problem.

  Finally, in the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK", since the effect related to the advance notice is not performed, only the lost stop background sub-effect block data is executed. In the sub rendering scheduler data relating to the background, missing stop background sub rendering block data is defined. In the user stop background sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the background of normal fluctuation 12 seconds are defined. Since the lost stop background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” is obtained. Therefore, the process is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” ends.

  FIG. 343 is a view for explaining the relationship between variation pattern-based liquid crystal effect block data and variation pattern-based liquid crystal symbol block data according to the present embodiment. The liquid crystal rendering block data by variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data by variation pattern are different only in the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub rendering block data Since the data format and control method are common, the description is omitted.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the sub effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described in FIG. 314B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 344 is a view showing an image of creating a drawing data file in step-up effect units (step-up 1 effect to 4 effects) of the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of the present embodiment with the video synthesis / motion creation graphic tool. is there.

  The drawing data file is created in step-up effect units, and is composed of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. Further, as shown in FIG. 344, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into liquid crystal rendering scheduler data in the present embodiment on a step-up rendering unit basis.

  The reason that the drawing data file is not created in a one-on-one relationship with the liquid crystal preview effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, four types of step-up notices as in this embodiment. If it is executable, it is necessary to change the drawing data file for 4 lines, and taking into consideration the work time required for the change and the risk of correction omission, drawing data files are created with a unique number for each step, It is because it is more efficient to implement the advance notice in combination.

  FIG. 345 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment. (A) shows the configuration of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, in the present embodiment, four types of step-up notices can be executed, but (A) and (B) show step-up notices 1 and 2. In step-up notices 3 and 4, step-up 3 effect and step-up 4 effect are executed at predetermined timings.

  The step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data will be described. First, it is determined which step-up notice of step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice acquired at the start of fluctuation. Ru. If the lottery result value of the step-up advance notice is not selected, the step-up advance notice is not executed since the step-up advance notice liquid crystal effect block data is not executed.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result value of step-up notice is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of step-up notice is step-up notice 2, Step-Up Notice The step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

  In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when step-up 1 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed, the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, and thus the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is ended.

  In addition, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02, and after waiting for the time designated by the parameter, step-up 2 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed. Step-up 2: Since the data to be executed next is “DATA_END” after the completion of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data execution, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH 02 is ended.

  As described above, a plurality of variations of a single preview can be realized by combining the presentation scheduler data of the preview in the minimum configuration unit.

  Subsequently, step-up notice sub-effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 345 (B). The step-up notice sub rendering block data is configured to correspond to the step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data, the block configuration and the execution time all in one-to-one correspondence. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the rendering devices with the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result of the advance notice, and it is possible to realize the rendering with a sense of unity.

  The step-up notice sub rendering block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal rendering block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the function executed by the sub rendering scheduler data. Since the data format and control method are common, the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub effect block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the variation pattern classified sub effect block data combination table "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO". Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub effect block data in accordance with the data access order, it becomes possible to execute the basic effect and the notice effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices in parallel and to define scheduler data to be executed at the same timing with the same execution time. The effects can be synchronized. Furthermore, when execution of the scheduler data is started, thereafter, a predetermined operation is performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, simply by executing the corresponding block data based on the information specifying the effect content such as the variation pattern, the scheduler data defined hierarchically is automatically acquired, and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be activated and schedule data can be independently executed by each scheduler, it becomes possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, and the development efficiency can be increased. Can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler analyzes scheduler data described in a predetermined format, and controls the rendering device. Therefore, even when the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic device included in the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is updated), a common schedule can be obtained by installing the scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it becomes possible to utilize software assets related to presentation control of a gaming machine in the long run.

  The scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is realized by software, the scheduler activated at the time of execution of the scheduler data may be stopped after use to release the memory use area. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, it may be opened when a predetermined time has elapsed after execution of the schedule data is completed, or may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine is in the customer waiting state.

[19. Production control by liquid crystal production scheduler data]
Then, the detail of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data which comprises liquid crystal presentation block data is demonstrated. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, like the sub rendering block data, is configured by a combination of functions for controlling the rendering target. In the sub effect block data, the output of sound, the lighting of the lamp, the operation of the drive device, and the like are controlled, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[19-1. Scheduler function for liquid crystal effects]
First, functions (scheduler functions for liquid crystal rendering) that constitute liquid crystal rendering scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler function is a command (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data that composes the liquid crystal rendering block data described above, and the command is embedded in the sound source built-in VDP 1540a by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function. Send and execute the effect. Further, when executing the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function, it is possible to change the attribute (for example, the color, the shape, the operation content, etc.) of the object to be displayed by specifying the parameter.

[19-1-1. Scheduler function for liquid crystal effects]
FIG. 346 is a diagram illustrating an example of a liquid crystal rendering scheduler function of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, an outline of each liquid crystal rendering scheduler function will be described.

  Each liquid crystal rendering scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub scheduler setting.

  First, the functions belonging to the group of coordinate setting will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is, for example, for specifying the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and setting the liquid crystal display object. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ” designate the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position to set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" designates the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" designates the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY” designates the X axis and Y axis coordinate positions, and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target.

  Next, a group to which a function for scaling (scale setting) of a display target (still image or moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling refers to, for example, setting the center of a display area to be specified to perform enlargement or reduction when displaying on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored on a CGROM, or converting a unit of coordinates. It is to By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” belong to the scale setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" designates X-axis and Y-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX” specifies the X-axis value to set the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ” specifies the Z-axis value to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" designates X-axis and Y-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE XYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, a group to which a function for setting an angle when rotating and displaying a liquid crystal display object will be described. It is not necessary to store a plurality of liquid crystal display objects after rotation by storing only the liquid crystal display object as a reference in the CGROM and designating an angle to display, thereby suppressing an increase in storage capacity. it can.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” belong to the group of rotation angle settings. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. In addition, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” rotates the liquid crystal display object by designating an X-axis value, a Y-axis value, and a Z-axis value.

  Subsequently, other functions will be described. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA” is α setting processing, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating the degree of transmission, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not transmit the background color at all.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME” is a frame setting process, and more specifically, sets a frame value which is a drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display object. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during the animation processing.

  The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying a liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object is displayed on the front on the screen or moved to the back side. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is a background, the Z index is set so as to be drawn on the back.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group in order to set information on the effect SW. The effect SW, which will be described later in detail, is information incorporated in control information for performing drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back to switch effect contents , To perform another rendition. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW” sets presentation SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the moving image index number on the CGROM. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW” sets frame rendering SW information to the entire liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” sets SW information in which information of special control to be described later is defined in liquid crystal rendering scheduler data.

  The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling a sub-scheduler. By defining highly versatile processing as a sub-scheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, the processing can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for liquid crystal effects]
Heretofore, an example of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described. Subsequently, parameters specified at the time of execution of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function will be described by way of an example. FIGS. 347 and 348 are diagrams showing examples of parameters for the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function in the present embodiment.

  The parameters of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function are managed for each group in the same manner as the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function. The group of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler function and the group of parameters are divided into different groups. The group of parameters includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, and sub effect scheduler function.

  "AAD_FRAME" "AAD_POS" "AAD_POS2" "AAD_POS3" "AAD_ALPHA" "AAD_ANGLE" "AAD_ENTRY" "AAD_ENTRY" "AAD_ENTRY_B" "AAD_SKIP_B" "AAD_SCALE" "AAD_SCALE" "Etc. are included. Each parameter will be described below.

  “AAD_FRAME” is a parameter for specifying a frame value, and is 16 bits in length. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for specifying the X-axis coordinate position, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS2” is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for specifying an α value, which is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and is 8 bits in length. “AAD_ANGLE” is a parameter for specifying the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and is 16 bits in length. “AAD_ENTRY_B” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SKIP” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and is 16 bits in length. “AAD_SKIP_B” is a parameter for specifying the number of frames to be skipped in liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SCALE” is a parameter for specifying a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter for specifying the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter for specifying the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter for designating the size of the liquid crystal display object in XY 2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter groups of the effect SW include “AAD_LCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_LCDSW”, “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM”, “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_KICKLCDSW”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” and the like.

  “AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the total number of registered effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW” is a parameter for designating the number of the presentation SW, and designates two 16-bit lengths. “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_KICKLCDSW” is a parameter for specifying the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit lengths. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the total number of registered frame rendering SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing a frame rendering SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters of the footage setting includes “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY”, “AAD_SEQFOOT” and the like. “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter for specifying the index number of a still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of symbol replacement related parameters includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter for specifying a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter groups of the sub rendering scheduler function include “AAD_SUBENTRY”, “AAD_SUB”, and the like. “AAD_SUBENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of sub-scheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SUB” is a parameter for specifying a sub-scheduler function number, and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Conventionally, effect control in a game machine has been realized by combining and executing a program for individually controlling various effect devices, a program for linking a plurality of effect devices, and the like. These programs are described by program code representing the operation contents and control procedure of the rendering device for each content of the notice in addition to the command related to the variation pattern, and are created by a highly skilled programmer. In liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data are called up in a frame where effects are executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, symbol, advance notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of gaming machines, it has been required to execute a wide variety of effects, and it has been necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, a high level of technology is required for individual programmers and the number of development steps is increased, making it difficult to secure personnel (programmers) that are both qualitatively and quantitatively required. Furthermore, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the number of man-hours required for the test for the operation check and the quality improvement of the gaming machine also increases.

  Then, in order to solve the above-mentioned subject, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it is possible to realize the effects to be executed in cooperation with liquid crystal drawing (image display) by program code. Instead, the program data for the gaming machine is output by the tool for creating the liquid crystal rendering effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality.

  Specifically, a tool capable of creating data for performing liquid crystal rendering effects is used by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in time series. In this tool, a single effect rendering data (notice, background, pattern, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and effect blocks are grouped together for each variation pattern, jackpot, etc. to create an effect common block, By combining a plurality of effect common blocks, a series of effect drawing such as a fluctuation pattern or a big hit is realized.

  However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects relating to lottery, effect and symbol substitution, and interactive effects to external input by the player occur, so only simply execute the combined effect common block as it is So, it is impossible to realize all the effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when creating the effect common block with the above-described tool, the effect switch (effect SW for calling a program for executing effects at a predetermined timing or executing predetermined control) ) Can be set (built in). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM, and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, callback always occurs regardless of “ON” and “OFF” of the effect SW. Further, when the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, predetermined control is performed based on the predefined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The rendering SW is set to each of the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal rendering common block, the liquid crystal rendering block, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, each display target in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, a still image, and a moving image.

  When the liquid crystal rendering block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the rendering block included in the rendering common block at the time of liquid crystal rendering, and detects the incorporated rendering SW, the program function is dynamically called based on the detected rendering SW (callback To do). Then, based on the information processed by the called back program function, a display list command can be created to realize ON / OFF of the effect display and replacement of the effect. In the program function called by the callback, it is also possible to execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of a lamp, operation of a role, etc.). In addition, processing such as setting of information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting of a flag and updating of data of a predetermined area, is also possible. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to realize display or non-display of drawing by a plurality of effect blocks, effect and pattern replacement, and interactive effect to external input by the player. .

  The program function for turning on / off the liquid crystal effect called by callback and replacement of the effect is incorporated in advance in the peripheral control unit 1530 and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, by setting the presentation SW so that a designer or plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge sets presentation elements such as images and videos at the time of presentation design, and calls a program function defined in advance. Complex rendering specifications can be realized. Further, by creating the presentation block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) in the composition unit of the presentation using the presentation creation tool, the development period can be significantly shortened, and in addition, the contents of the presentation can be obtained based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the presentation SW without performing the test, simplification of the test process and significant reduction of the time required for the test can be realized.

[20-1. Configuration of production switch]
Subsequently, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 349 is a view for explaining the configuration of the effect switch in the present embodiment. The presentation SW is uniquely identified by the presentation SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the presentation, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

  The effect SW group ID, the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW attribute, the effect SW start command address, the effect replacement information table address and the like are associated with the effect SW number.

  The presentation SW group is a set of presentation SW grouped according to the execution mode of the presentation, the presentation SW group ID is an identifier of the presentation SW group, and defines to which presentation SW group the presentation SW group belongs. The effect SW reset group has the same configuration as the effect SW group, and the effect SW group belonging to the effect SW reset group is set to OFF by specifying the effect SW reset group ID, and effects collectively belonging to the effect SW group are displayed. It can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be specified.

  FIG. 350 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of this embodiment. Further, as described above, the effect SW includes active and passive, and the effect SW group is configured of one or more active effect SWs and passive effect SWs. Specifically, it includes the leading group number of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group and the number of active effect SWs, and the number of the leading group number of the passive effect SW and the number of passive effect SW.

  The presentation SW attribute is information indicating an attribute of the presentation SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal presentation SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for specifying whether to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. The replacement information is information for specifying whether or not to call a callback function for effect replacement at the time of evaluation of the effect SW. Special control information (special control behavior) is information for specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function at the time of evaluation of the presentation SW. The passive / active information indicates a method of evaluating the presentation SW. In the passive, the presentation SW is statically evaluated, and in the active, the presentation SW is dynamically evaluated.

  The effect SW start command address is an address of the effect SW start command table. The effect SW activation command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW activation command table. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of the present embodiment. FIG. 351 exemplifies the presentation SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and the presentation SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is composed of data for the number of commands and the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up notice production]
Next, effect control using the effect switch will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing an example of the step-up notice in the present embodiment, in which (A) shows a step where the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) shows a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device in each step. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 352A, the step-up notice of the present embodiment can be executed up to four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each step, the development effect to the next step is executed. . When the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed. When the step-up notice does not develop, the step-up notice ends.

  Here, variations of the step-up notice effect at each stage will be described. In the step-up notice 1 which is the first step after the start of the step-up notice effect, an effect is executed in which the display screen is filled with black ink. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the black color and the fill pattern. For example, when the color of black is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation becomes high in the order of white, red, and rainbow colors. Further, as the filling pattern, the more the position where the filling starts, the higher the degree of expectation, and the degree of expectation may change at the position where the filling starts. For example, when the filling is started from only the lower left, the expectation is low, and when the filling is started from the lower left and the upper left, the filling is started from the lower left, the upper left, and the upper right. In order, the degree of expectation is high, and the degree of expectation is highest when the fill is started from the four corners.

  Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each step, the development effect to the next step-up notice is executed. In the development effect, the effect is executed in a common manner in the middle to increase the player's expectation regardless of whether or not the player actually develops to the next stage. In the case of the step-up notice 1, first, the screen is filled with a combination of the color of the ink and the filling pattern determined by lottery for the liquid crystal display screen. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (becomes thinner) and characters for displaying in step-up notice 2 appear. In the case of developing into the step-up notice 2, the ink is discharged as it is and the display of characters becomes dark, and the effect is continued. On the other hand, when the development rendition fails, the display of the characters does not become dark, and the ink is peeled off and not displayed.

  In the step-up notice 2, characters corresponding to the degree of expectation are displayed. The character pattern has high expectations in the order of "change", "silence", "feeling", "continuation" and "one shot kill". In the effect mode of the step-up notice 2, first, with the characters displayed, the screen is filled while enlarging the area to be filled with the combination of the black color and the fill variation in the step-up notice 1. After that, when the screen is completely filled with ink, it shifts to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the ink gradually fades out before the screen is completely filled with the ink, and finally the ink completely slips off, and the displayed character disappears. It will end up.

  In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black in the step-up notice 2, and from this state, an effect of gradually releasing the black is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern of the ink expulsion. For example, when the ink is discharged from only one lower left, the expectation is low, and when the ink is released from two places, lower left and upper left, the ink is removed from three places lower left, upper left and upper right The degree of expectation is high in the order of cases, and the degree of expectation is highest when ink is released from the four corners. If the characters are displayed in the process of the ink being discharged and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the characters have been developed, the development effect is successful, and the process shifts to step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been released, the development effect has failed.

  The step-up notice 4 is the final step of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the contents (pattern) and color of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character pattern has high expectation in the order of "match", "good chance", "development", "heat fight", "extensive heat", "happiness". In addition, the color of letters is expected to be high in the order of black, white, red and rainbow. In the effect mode of the step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed character is enlarged is performed.

  Subsequently, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above by the effect SW will be described. FIGS. 353 to 355 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW according to this embodiment. FIG. 353 is a view showing the correspondence between all the effects of the step-up notice 1 and the effect SW. FIG. 354 (A) shows step-up notice 1 for executing step-up notice 1 of painting with black ink from four directions of the screen 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and drawing image, (B) shows red black from the upper right and lower left of the screen. The step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the drawing image for executing the step-up notice 1 to fill in are shown. FIG. 355 is a view showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

  FIG. 353 shows all the effects produced in step-up notice 1 and is divided into each drawing (black drawing lower left, black drawing upper left, black drawing lower right, black drawing upper right, character failure, character success), The names of the presentation SW and the contents of the presentation are described in correspondence with each division. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 effects with 4 effects for each of the lower left, upper left, lower right and upper right drawing segments, and a total of 26 effects with a total of 10 effects with 5 failures for each of the character failure and character success drawing segments. It has become. In addition, the effect that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing segment is always one, and only one of the drawing segments “character failure” and “character success” is performed. Therefore, the maximum effects performed simultaneously in step-up notice 1 The number of effects is 5 in total including the drawing division "lower left", the drawing division "upper left", the drawing division "lower right", the drawing division "upper right" and the drawing division "character failure" or the drawing division "character success".

  Also, according to the notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1, the method of determining the effect of each drawing section will be specifically described. First, a lottery for step-up notice 1 is performed to determine the contents of effects relating to the drawing of ink. Specifically, the effect contents relating to the ink drawing include the selection of the position where the ink appears from the drawing section “lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right”, and the color of the ink appearing from the appearance position of the selected ink. Become. In addition, it becomes either the drawing division "character failure" or the drawing division "character success" and the contents of the character displayed at this time.

  Next, step-up notice 1 configuration of liquid crystal effect scheduler data and step-up notice 1 liquid-crystal effect scheduler data are executed without any control and step-up notice 1 drawing image will be described using FIG. 354 (A). . As mentioned above, the total number of effects of Step-up notice 1 is 26 effects in total, but Step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data has lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, letter failure, and character success drawing divisions Only presentation data of is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is executed without performing any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data are simultaneously executed, as shown in the drawing of the step-up notice 1 drawing image At the same time, black ink spreads from the lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right of the screen at the same time, and the character of "change" is lightly displayed in the drawing division "character failure" and the drawing division "character success". In the case of failure, the character of "change" is erased, and at the same time, in the drawing division "character success", the character of "change" is clearly displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 354 (B), the drawing division “lower left” is “red”, the drawing division “upper left” is “none”, the drawing division “lower right” is “none”, and drawing is performed according to the lottery result of step-up notice 1. The command of division "upper right" is "red", drawing division "character failure" is "improvement", and drawing division "character success" is "none" is issued. As a result, in the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left", and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and the character "Iki" is lightly displayed in the drawing section "character failure", and then , The character of "imitation" is deleted in the drawing division "character failure".

  At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the corresponding effect is set to ON according to the contents of each issued lottery command. Specifically, step up notice 1 drawing command drawing division “lower left” is set to “red” while “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON, and step up notice 1 drawing command drawing division “upper right” is to “red” “LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED” is set to ON, and “LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA” is set to ON with respect to the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “letter failure is compelling”. On the other hand, step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing division "upper left" is "none", step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing division "lower right" is "none", step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing division "character success" is "none" Since the effect is not performed in the command of “,” neither effect SW is set to ON but is set to OFF.

  By the above, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left" out of all the effects of the step-up notice 1, and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and "improvement" in the drawing section "character failure" The effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON corresponding to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

  Then, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data of FIG. 354 (A) while referring to FIG. 355, for performing an effect according to the lottery result of step-up notice 1 of FIG. 355 (B) Explain the mechanism to perform the effect replacement.

  FIG. 355 is a diagram for describing master data defined on liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for each drawing segment in the present embodiment, and a rendering SW corresponding to replacement data to be replaced with the master data. Specifically referring to the lower left black effect replacement group in FIG. 355, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is an index number on the CGROM of a moving image in which black black spreads from lower left. And the corresponding presentation SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”. On the other hand, the presentation SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the presentation SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the animation where white black spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the animation where red black spreads from the lower left It becomes the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI” corresponding to the index SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” and the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the ink of the rainbow spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left black rendering replacement table. In addition, the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black black spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the lower left black rendering replacement table.

  The liquid crystal rendering 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command in order to draw effects, and is defined in step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data Triggered (detected) by the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”, a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

  In the replacement program function called by the callback, the lower left ink effect replacement table is referred to, all the effect SW registered in the lower left ink effect replacement table are determined, and the effect SW set to ON is specified. Do. In this embodiment, since the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section "lower left" is "red" and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, "from the lower left" corresponding to the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" The video number on the CGROM of "red ink" is specified.

  The replacement program function called by the callback passes the specified moving image number on the red black CGROM from the lower left specified to the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal rendering 1 f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 is a CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black black appears from the lower left defined in the step up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above movie number, the display list command is created using a movie number on the CGROM corresponding to a movie in which red black appears from the lower left handed from the replacement program function. create.

  The feature of replacement of effects by callback in the present embodiment is a low-level control structure (in the present embodiment, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, a data structure that is easy to change and suitable for tooling) to a high-level control structure (this embodiment It is possible to separate the detection of replacement timing and replacement control by calling a program function for replacement, a program function for changing but not suitable for changing but executing a complicated process by callback. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, which is a data structure, is used to realize complex processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the identifier for calling back (the on / off setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment), the processing is always executed by the callback. Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of this embodiment by callback, the structure for performing complicated control on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side is incorporated, and the complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler on the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side When effect control is realized by analyzing and executing data, the complexity of the program code to be processed by the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit increases, and when adding a new function or changing a function, it is always required. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data needs to be changed. In this case, it is always necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only the occurrence of a failure due to the change of control but also the function that operated normally before the change is affected and a new failure occurs. There is a risk of

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regardless of the identifier for callback (the on / off setting value of the presentation SW), callback execution is always performed by callback and a plurality of callbacks are executed. Determine the executability and processing content in the callback function of. By creating a corresponding callback function to realize a single function, it is not necessary to change the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data structure even when adding a new function or changing a function, and a call corresponding to a new function It can be realized by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. For this reason, the influence range due to the change or addition of the function remains in the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting the other callback functions and causing the failure is reduced. In addition, compared with the case where the execution analysis of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is centrally executed with a single large program, the method of performing the execution analysis by using a plurality of callback functions for realizing each function and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data However, the structure and configuration of the program can be further simplified.

  In the present embodiment, specialization has been made to replacement of effects, but the mechanism of control by callback in this embodiment is not only replacement of effects but also replacement of symbols, control of display or non-display of effects, and drawing target The present invention is also applicable to conversion of drawing data and execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices and conversion of scheduler data.

  Here, the purpose of defining the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black black spreads from the lower left of the master data in both step-up notice 1 liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the lower left rendering replacement table explain. If you do not define the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master's presentation SW in the presentation replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master presentation SW must be the liquid crystal presentation scheduler Only the data exists, and the effect SW for replacement corresponding to the master and the index number on the CGROM corresponding only exist in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect replacement table and the effect SW are each defined in several thousand. In a situation where changes in gaming specifications and addition of gaming specifications occur frequently between planning and development of gaming machines and being put into the market, consistency between index numbers of moving images (images) on CGROM and presentation SW It is extremely difficult to maintain

  In the relation between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, an index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW may be incorrectly defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement. It is possible that the upper index number is erroneously registered in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs between the command value of the effect lottery and the data number of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW on the replacement table, and the replacement is performed with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery . Since the degree of expectation is set for each of the effects, it is likely that a jackpot-only effect that does not appear in the fluctuation of the outset may appear, which is a fatal defect as a gaming machine. As in the present embodiment, by defining the effect replacement table including index numbers on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW, confirmation of consistency can be realized by comparing the total number of effects and the replacement table. Become. Further, in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, even if any data in the replacement table is defined, it operates without any problem, so it becomes a control method extremely unlikely to cause a problem. In this embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is drawn as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the master's CGROM on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used, and it is always replaced Display list commands are created using the index numbers on the master's CGROM defined in the table, and effects are drawn.

  In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the ink is gradually erased from a part or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and the characters appear when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the ink is completely erased without displaying the characters, and the step-up notice ends. The effect of gradually removing black from the top of the display area is executed regardless of success or failure, so that 4 types of effect SW flags for 4 types of drawing patterns that gradually remove black per vertex (Layer) is defined. Further, two types of presentation SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development presentation are defined.

  The upper left black replacement group other than the lower left black replacement group, the lower right black replacement group, the upper right black replacement group, the letter failure effect replacement group, the letter success effect replacement group are the same as the configuration and control method. It is.

  In step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed thereafter, a presentation SW flag (layer) according to the mode may be defined in the animation of the displayed character, or one kind of presentation SW flag ( Only the layer) may be defined, and the parameter animation type may be set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects are created by individually defining the rendering effect pattern according to the appearance position of the black ink or the character content and setting the rendering SW flag corresponding to the rendering to be performed to ON. It is possible to carry out or combine effects. Since switching of effects and combinations are only switching the setting of the effect SW flag, it is possible to set parameters using tools, such as a planner who configures effects without requiring new techniques such as creating a program. Various variations of effects can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize several tens of types of drawing patterns simply by combining four types of drawing patterns according to the appearance position of the black and two types of display patterns as a result of the development effect. This makes it possible to minimize the type of program to be developed, improve the development efficiency of the presentation control program of the gaming machine, and streamline the inspection of the developed presentation control program, thus improving the quality. Can.

[20-3. Outline of control based on presentation switch]
Subsequently, an outline of control based on the effect switch will be described. FIG. 356 is a diagram for explaining a control procedure by the effect switch of the present embodiment, and in particular, shows an evaluation procedure of setting the effect SW to ON. In this embodiment, first, upon receiving a main command (main control command) that triggers rendering start from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1530 issues an internal control to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510. An issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issue command is a command for executing a notice lottery or executing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

  The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internal issue command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered in the command string of the effect SW determination data, and if there is matching data, peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command string. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530 c is set to ON.

  The presentation SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is a presentation SW determination command sequence for turning on the presentation SW. The effect SW determination command sequence is not a fixed length, and it is possible to combine a plurality of command values, a main control command value and a sub internal command value, or combine peripheral control internal issue command values and peripheral control internal command values. . For example, the variation start designation command value and the probability state designation command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background designation command of the peripheral control internally issued command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character preview are defined side by side It has become possible.

  By defining a plurality of commands side by side, for example, when the mini characters displayed in different effects are different depending on the background even if they are the same mini character preview, the background command value is determined, and after the background is identified, the mini character command value is determined. Although it is possible to specify the effect of the mini character corresponding to the background for the first time, a plurality of determinations may be required for several minutes of the command. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by arranging the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character preview side by side, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be made a mini character corresponding to the background. With regard to the effects defined by a combination of a plurality of commands, the corresponding effects can be specified in the same manner as the effects defined by a single command without the need to judge a plurality of times. Moreover, since it is possible to define a plurality of effect SWs for the same command value, it is possible to simultaneously activate a plurality of effect SWs with a single command value.

  The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number, and is the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all the effect SWs in combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

  From the above, as shown in FIG. 356, when the command “0x103001” is received, “LCDSW_LEFDW_S1” of the effect SW number 100 is registered in the effect SW determination data, so the effect SW flag stored in the RAM Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

  As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIG. 353 to FIG. 355, a predetermined process is called up at the time of execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding advance notice effect. Be

  In addition, in the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. Hereinafter, an example of these functions will be described. FIG. 357 is a diagram for explaining an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function has an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

  The LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON, from the steady program or the called back program. The LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the presentation SW not from the presentation SW activation by a command but from a steady program or a called back program.

  LEDSW_OFF is a function that turns off the presentation SW from a steady program or a called back program. In addition, when the attribute “all reset” is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the effect SW to be reset based on the “target SW for reset effect group ID” of the “effect SW information table” corresponding to the effect SW number. Set all the presentation SWs belonging to the group to OFF.

  The LEDSW_GET is a function for acquiring attribute information of the target rendering SW from a steady program or a called back program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function for acquiring a frame time from activation of the active rendering SW from a steady program or a called back program.

[20-4. Implementation example of production switch]
Subsequently, an implementation example of control using a presentation switch will be described. FIG. 358 to FIG. 363 are diagrams showing a part of program code for executing control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each drawing is described in C language.

  As described above, the rendering SW is set to each of the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal rendering common block, the liquid crystal rendering block, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, and each display target in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, a still image, and a moving image. In addition, since presentation SW is set to all the presentation blocks, the process based on presentation SW is always called back at the time of execution of a presentation block. The callback is executed even if it is not necessary to execute a specific process, and it is determined in the callback function that the specific process is not performed, and the callback function is ended.

  FIG. 358 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code defining the effect SW information table, (B) is bit assignment of the effect SW control information , (C) is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW group

  The presentation SW information table is configured based on the presentation SW information table management structure shown in (A), and the presentation SW group ID, the reset target presentation SW group ID, the presentation SW control information (presentation SW attribute), the presentation SW It includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

  The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW group is grouped by functions, such as effect SW for performing the same (same type of) preview effect, effect SW for pending display, or effect SW for notification. ing. The presentation SW group ID is represented by bits, and one presentation SW can belong to a plurality of presentation SW groups.

  The effect SW group ID to be reset is identification information for specifying an effect SW group for which the effect SW is set to OFF when “Reset all effect SW” is specified in “attrib bit assign” described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively designate effect SWs for which processing is to be canceled (reset) simultaneously at the time of switching of the effect SW or the like. Similar to the effect SW group ID, the effect SW group ID to be reset is expressed by bits, and it is possible to specify a plurality of groups.

  The presentation SW control information is information defining the function of the presentation SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal presentation SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive active information. Further, the presentation SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the presentation SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 358 (B), and the contents will be described below.

  The passive (PASSIVE) active (ACTIVE) information indicates the evaluation method of the presentation SW, and becomes “PASSIVE” when the bit is “0” and “ACTIVE” when the bit is “1”. In passive, even when the command to activate the rendering SW is received multiple times during the period in which the rendering SW is defined, the rendering effect corresponding to the rendering SW is performed only once, and in the active, the rendering is performed in the period in which the rendering SW is defined When the command for activating the SW is received a plurality of times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the corresponding effect is received. Active is used, for example, when displaying a rendering effect corresponding to button pressing when the button is pressed multiple times within the button valid period.

  Special control information (special control behavior) is information for specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function at the time of evaluation of the presentation SW. When the bit is set to "1", the callback function on the user side is called instead of the callback function on the system side.

  The replacement information is information for calling a callback function for effect replacement at the time of evaluation of the effect SW. When the bit is set to “1”, a callback function for replacement defined in advance is called up at the time of evaluation SW evaluation defined for each display object, still image, and moving image in liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Be

  The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for specifying whether to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. When the bit is set to “1”, at the time of the evaluation SW evaluation, the effect SW belonging to all the groups set in the “reset target effect SW group ID” is set to OFF.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 358 (A). As for the effect SW command information address, defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of effect SW evaluation. The command to be output is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and control and effect of a new effect SW are executed by the output command.

  The production SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when “1” is set in the replacement information bit of the presentation SW control information (when “replacement is specified” is specified) The address of is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of related effect SWs are set, they are managed as effect groups. The effect group includes the effect SW group ID, the active effect SW top ID, the number of active effect SW, the passive effect SW top ID, and the number of passive effect SW.

  The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW top ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the top of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active rendering SW is the number of active rendering SW arranged from the rendering SW corresponding to the active rendering SW leading ID. The passive effect SW top ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the top of the passive effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the passive effect SW leading ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the effect SW group ID to be reset, if “effect SW all reset” is specified in “attrib bit assign”, the continuous belonging to the effect SW group ID It becomes possible to simultaneously set the plurality of passive effect SWs and the plurality of continuous active effect SWs to OFF.

  FIG. 359 is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines an effect SW number corresponding to an effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 359, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to using the effect SW number as an index.

  By defining the presentation SW numbers in an enumerated manner as described above, when setting or referring to the presentation SW numbers in the program, it is not necessary to handle them directly as numerical values, and the readability of the program can be improved.

  Next, the presentation SW flag and presentation SW information table will be described. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining an effect SW flag and an effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) showing an effect SW flag, and (B) showing an effect SW information table.

  The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the process based on the corresponding effect SW on the callback function side that calls back (ON / OFF). As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. When the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, “1” (ON) is set, and when not executed, “0” (OFF) is set.

  The presentation SW information table is defined by the presentation SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 358 (A), and each element of the presentation SW information table is read when the program is executed, and the constant is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. Further, the presentation SW information table is stored in an array having the presentation SW number as an index as in the presentation SW flag, and data corresponding to all the presentation SW is stored.

  Subsequently, a presentation SW replacement table information and a presentation SW replacement table for performing presentation replacement will be described. The presentation SW replacement table information is included in the presentation SW information table as shown in FIG. 358 (A). FIG. 361 is a diagram showing an example of effect SW replacement table information and program data for defining a production SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment; (A) is a effect SW replacement table information; ) Shows a presentation SW replacement table.

  FIG. 361 (A) is program data showing a configuration of the effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table information, the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data are stored. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

  The presentation SW master data is presentation SW data defined in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, and corresponds to the case of “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1” when the black color is black (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data, and there is, for example, a case where the color of black is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) or the like, and the material information is replaced with corresponding replacement data by evaluating the presentation SW.

  FIG. 361 (B) is program data showing a configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of the material numbers defined in the replacement table are defined, and in the present embodiment, the number of columns is one and the number of rows is four. After defining the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating replacement material is stored. In this embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

  The specific replacement method first refers to the presentation SW replacement table information, and evaluates all the presentation SW presentation switch master data and the presentation SW replacement data defined in the presentation SW replacement table information. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by the command issued by the result of the effect lottery. Here, it is assumed that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same row of the effect SW replacement table is specified by using the number of rows of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. In the effect replacement data, the material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponding to the line of the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is a material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number for specifying a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer configuration]
Next, layers for displaying images and videos will be described. By dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of regions (layers, layers) and drawing the layer, it is possible to use the display result in a versatile manner. For example, by separating the background layer, even if the character to be displayed is changed, it can be drawn in a common manner.

  In this embodiment, by storing and managing a table (layer information table) for storing layer information separately, even if there is a change in some layers, other layers are not affected. Can.

  FIG. 362 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list for storing an address for storing each layer information table, (B) is a layer information table (background Show the contents of The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called by using the effect SW as a trigger, and whether to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. Also, FIG. 363 is a view showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) shows the contents of the layer information table (the first half of the notice), (B) shows the layer information table (notice The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables of the first half 1 and the second half 2 determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, as in the background layer information table.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 362 (A), layer information tables for background, symbol display, first half notice, jackpot effect, character operation, hold display, etc. are defined.

  Further, FIG. 362 (B) shows a layer information table for background, and in the effect in the present embodiment, a sea background, a mountain background and a river background are defined, and a background according to the gaming state (time reduction Middle background, high background, middle background) are also defined. Furthermore, a variation such as changing a part of the background color can be added by the effect SW.

  FIG. 363 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half 1 of the preview, roulette preview, blackout preview, window preview are defined, and a command for clearing the preview is also defined. FIG. 363 (B) shows the layer information table for the first half 1 of the preview, step-up notice, button mini character notice, and conversation notice are defined, and the layer table for clearing notice the same as in the first half of notice. Is also defined. The layer table for clearing notices is used to finish the drawing of notices executed in the layer table of each notice defined in the layer information table of each notice. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and “effect SW all reset” is defined in “attrib bit assign”. Then, when the rendering SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, the rendering SW for all the notices belonging to the rendering SW group ID defined in the resetting target rendering SW group ID is set to OFF, and the drawing corresponding to the rendering SW Ends and is hidden. It should be noted that the layer table for clearing the notice is empty data since no effect is performed.

  At the end of the list storing the layer table and the area allocated to the table storing the layer information, the termination determination record is stored, and when the termination determination record is detected, it is determined that the data reading is completed. It is possible to This makes it possible to dynamically change the amount of data (the number of records) without setting the number of elements in advance for each list or table.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Subsequently, an implementation example of the notice effect by the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Effect Layer Table / Liquid Crystal Effect Block Data]
FIG. 364 is a view showing an example of the liquid crystal layer table and the program data defining the liquid crystal rendering common block in the present embodiment, (A) is a liquid crystal layer table of step-up notice effect, (B) is a liquid crystal rendering common block Shows the configuration of

  As shown in FIG. 364 (A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect, the liquid crystal effect common blocks corresponding to the number and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table are liquid crystal effect common blocks. It is defined in combination with the total number of drawing frames and the rendering SW. In the present embodiment, a total drawing frame number (580), the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. A callback is executed based on the rendering SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and it is determined whether to execute the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” based on the information of the rendering SW “LCDSW_STEPUP” in the callback function.

  The liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is defined in the order of the rendering SW, the total number of drawing frames, the loop start frame position, the reproduction time, and the liquid crystal rendering block. As shown in FIG. 364 (B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal rendering blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. A terminal (terminal) is set after the step-up notice 4 and is configured to be able to cope with the increase / decrease of the number of steps by adding / removing the liquid crystal rendering block. For example, when the step-up notice 5 is added, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the end.

  Similar to the effect SW defined in the layer table, the effect SW controls the executability of the corresponding liquid crystal effect block based on the setting value. The total number of drawing frames defines the total number of effect frames of the liquid crystal rendering block. Describing by using the step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the reproduction of the liquid-crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 is performed by (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame is to be restored after the end of the reproduction of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the first row.

  The reproduction time is the reproduction time of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. The relationship between the total playback time, the loop start frame position, and the playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal rendering block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". Therefore, after the playback of the liquid crystal rendering block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is completed, the liquid crystal rendering block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is performed again. When loop reproduction is to be performed from the beginning or the middle of, the number of frames to be looped is added to the reproduction time, and the total number of frames is defined as the total reproduction time. Since the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” is (150) frames, the playback is performed in the total playback time if the latter 50 frames are looped twice after the completion of the playback of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” This can be realized by defining a (250) frame of time (150) frame + loop playback time (50 × 2) frame and defining a (100) frame at the loop start frame position. An effect such as performing fluctuation without determining a symbol at the time of pseudo-series effect can be realized by using a function of loop reproduction.

  Moreover, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of reproduction despite the total reproduction time and the reproduction time of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the present embodiment being the same is that something is wrong The drawing is not updated when the next effect common block is not executed, and the drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total reproduction time is exceeded in order to prevent the liquid crystal screen from stopping.

  The control by the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” in the case of executing effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3 in this embodiment is performed by performing a lottery for notice related to effects in peripheral control board 1530 and then step up The peripheral control internal command related to the notice effect, the step-up notice 1 command, the step-up notice 2 command, and the step-up notice 3 command are issued. Subsequently, in response to the issued command, the step-up 1 production SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 production SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 production SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON. On the other hand, since the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued, the step-up 4 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" remains set to OFF.

  After setting of the presentation SW, callback is executed based on all the presentation SW defined in the liquid crystal presentation common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, and a callback function is called. In the called back function, it is determined whether each effect SW is set to ON, and a liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. Since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2”, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” On the other hand, since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” is set to OFF, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4” is not executed. As described above, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal rendering blocks in the liquid crystal rendering common block and control whether or not the liquid crystal rendering block is to be executed using the rendering SW. In addition, it is possible to switch the display / non-display of each effect.

  Subsequently, the contents of the liquid crystal rendering block of each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 365 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal rendering block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

  As the contents of the liquid crystal rendering block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal rendering block is defined. The function used in the liquid crystal rendering block which is the number of execution frames, the function or the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is the two types of “LCD_NOP” and “LCD_NULL” and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. “LCD_NOP” is a function for weighting by the number of execution frames, and “LCD_NULL” is a function indicating the end of the liquid crystal rendering block.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal rendering block will be specifically described. To explain with reference to the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2”, the top (3) indicates that “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is 3). In the next line, since “LCD_NOP” in which the number of execution frames (120) is designated is given, the process waits for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal rendering block. (120) After weighting for the frames, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). Thereafter, “LCD_NULL” in which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is ended.

  As described in FIG. 352, at the end of step-up notice at each step of step-up notice, realized by using the weight of “LCD_NOP” to realize the execution of the development effect to the next step-up notice. doing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal rendering block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” does not perform weight, and starts execution of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1”. The liquid crystal rendering block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes the weight by "LCD_NOP", and after performing the weight for (120) frames, by starting the execution of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2", the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" is obtained. The liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts to execute when a frame has elapsed since the start of the execution (120). Thereby, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the step-up notice 2 of the next step.

  In addition, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data in chronological order in the liquid crystal rendering block, and when the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is defined continuously, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data corresponding to the period of the number of execution frames To execute the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data of the next line.

  In the effect scheduler data of step-up notice 2, after the total number of functions is defined, function NOP for waiting while executing step-up notice effect 1, function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU 2 for executing step-up notice effect 2, Finally, a function LCD_NULL indicating the end of scheduler data is defined. The same applies to step-up notice 3 and step-up notice 4.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
As mentioned above, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data of the step-up notice rendering has been described. Subsequently, an operation of the effect button is performed while the symbol is changing, and an effect that a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen will be described by operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Aspect of button mini character production]
FIG. 366 is a diagram for describing an overview of button mini character presentation according to the present embodiment. The button mini character effect is performed when the main command is received or when the change start is performed, and the winning lottery is performed, and the game is won. In the button mini character effect, when the effect button is operated in the reception period of the operation input of the button, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half effective period and the second half effective period are set in the reception period of the button operation input, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

  To explain further, when the player has won an execution lottery of the button mini character effect and 90 frames (f) have elapsed from the start of the change, the button mini character first half period becomes effective. The button mini character first half valid period is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) for prompting the user to press the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at the start of the button mini character first half valid period. When the button is operated during the button mini character first half period, the mini character is displayed. Specifically, although it will be described later, when the button is operated during the button mini character first half period, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

  When the button is operated in the second half of the button mini character effective period, the mini character is displayed in the same manner as the second half of the button mini character effective period. In FIG. 308, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case of operating the button in the button mini character first half period, but may be displayed in the same manner, or when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period. The character may be displayed in a different manner as far as possible.

  When the button is operated in the second half of the button mini character effective period, the mini character is displayed in the same manner as the button mini character first half effective period. In FIG. 366, the character is displayed in a mode different from that when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period, but may be displayed in the same manner, or when the button is operated in the button mini character first half period. The character may be displayed in a different manner as far as possible.

[23-2. LCD Production Common Block]
FIG. 367 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to button mini character effects in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 367, the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" corresponding to the button mini character effect is the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal rendering common blocks corresponding to the number and number of liquid crystal rendering common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table. It is defined in pairs with the number and the presentation SW. In the present embodiment, the total drawing frame number (180) frame, the rendering SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF", and the liquid crystal rendering common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" are defined. Subsequently, the total drawing frame number (150) frame, the rendering SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT”, and the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002”, first, the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” is executed during the (180) frame. After that, during (150) frame, the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” is ended.

  Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal rendering common block of button mini character rendering will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks of button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” in FIG. 368 are similar to the rendering layer table and the liquid crystal rendering block data described in FIG. The presentation SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" that call a callback function to determine whether to execute the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" are active renderings with active attributes defined in the rendering SW control information. It becomes SW. Therefore, the rendering effect (rendering block) corresponding to the rendering SW is executed as many times as the button is operated.

[23-3. Liquid crystal rendering block data]
FIG. 369 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal rendering block data for executing button mini character rendering according to the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal rendering block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 369 are the same as the liquid crystal rendering block data described above. First, in the first half of the process, “LCD_NOP” defined at the top of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” is executed, and weight is applied for 90 frames from the start of the change. . Subsequently, (90) frames are executed for liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" corresponding to the button mini character first half period, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is ended. In addition, in the second half of the effect, “LCD_NOP” defined at the top of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” corresponding to the button mini character second half effective period is executed, and weight is performed for 30 frames from the start of fluctuation. Thereafter, (120) frames are executed for liquid crystal rendering scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" corresponding to the button mini character second half effective period, and the execution of the liquid crystal rendering block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is ended.

  As described above, since the presentation SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are active presentation SW, the presentation SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are set to ON while the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIBEF” and “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT” are being executed. When the command to execute is issued multiple times, the rendering effect corresponding to the effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” is executed for the number of times issued. Also, a callback is always generated for each frame by the presentation SW, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control at the time of pressing the button is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame until the end of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data execution even after the end of the button pressing control. Control that sets the period during which callback is being executed as the button effective period without determining the button effective period separately by creating liquid crystal effect scheduler data that performs effect rendering during the button effective period and controlling with the active effect SW Is possible. For example, it is possible to count the number of times of continuous strikes by continuously hitting the button, and to perform effects according to the number of times. In addition, the lamp can be turned on in response to the button operation by calling up sub rendering scheduler data including a function for controlling the lamp in the callback function. Furthermore, by calling sub rendering scheduler data including a function for controlling a bonus, operation according to the number of button operations can be performed, and scheduler data can be executed to return to the initial position after the button operation valid period ends. In the procedure of returning the bonus to the initial position, for example, the effect block including a function of causing the bonus to return to the initial position is executed by causing the "LCD_NOP" to wait until the button operation valid period ends.

[24. Design liquid crystal effect scheduler]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to replace the drawing contents in accordance with the game state and the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be notified. Similarly, it is possible to replace the identification symbol to be variably displayed in the variably display game when predetermined conditions such as a gaming state are satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described below.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the fluctuation display of the identification symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol, and reels in which identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are allocated to each row. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a mode according to the gaming state, and each reel is defined for each mode. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

  The display of the identification symbol is updated every frame as in the case of the notice effect, and the effect SW is assigned. In the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the rendering SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the still image or the moving image for displaying the identification symbol and the index number on the CGROM is defined as master data . A reel number is defined in the effect SW for identification symbol replacement. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each game state or effect. For example, if the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, river background, and sea background are different, the left symbol on the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, and the left symbol on the river background is R3, middle symbol Is R4, right symbol is R5, left symbol of mountain background is R6, middle symbol is R7, right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it becomes possible to correspond individually to the gaming state and effects, and it becomes possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

  Further, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each reel arrangement number of the identification symbol. Identification pattern is displayed in order of 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 with reel arrangement and next to 0 is the design and identification symbol of the identification symbol when it is displayed back to 1 The reel index is defined as the total number and the display order of the identification symbols. A plurality of reel indexes can also be defined.

  Further, as a table for replacing the identification symbol, there is a replacement symbol table for the identification symbol corresponding to the reel number and the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, index numbers on a CGROM of a still image or a moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement are defined for each reel index.

  The replacement of the identification symbol is performed using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the replacement symbol table of the identification symbol. In the reel index replacement work number table, work numbers for reel replacement on one or more RAMs corresponding to each reel index are defined. Reel replacement work is displayed when the identification symbol can be recognized as if it were stopped or stopped by the player, such as the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo continuous change or the confirmation symbol number value of the identification symbol The identification symbol number value is stored in advance at the start of fluctuation by the peripheral control program in accordance with the contents of the effect.

  The identification of data for replacing the identification symbol will be described. When a callback is executed based on the effect switch for identification symbol replacement, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is in the call back function for identification symbol replacement. Based on the reel index replacement work number table, the target reel index replacement work number is specified. Furthermore, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is taken out, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the number of displayed identification symbols displayed in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is identified in the identification symbol replacement table, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image in the identified table is corrected. Identify using index replacement work number.

  In addition, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as in the case of the effect replacement, the index number on the master's CGROM on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used for the replacement of the identification symbol. A display list command is always created using an index number on the master's CGROM defined in the replacement table, and rendering contents are drawn.

  Furthermore, by carrying out replacement of the identification symbol every frame, even if an erroneous identification symbol is displayed due to the occurrence of noise or the like, it is possible to immediately return to a normal display. In addition, by setting the reels according to the gaming state, it is possible for the player to grasp the gaming state regardless of the contents of the identification symbol even when a failure occurs in replacement of the identification symbol due to an error. The decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

[25. Callback timing]
Then, the generation | occurrence | production timing of the callback at the time of presentation SW detection is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing division by the parameter delivered to the function in the callback function to be called back.

  FIG. 370 is a diagram showing an example of drawing divisions that can be determined within the callback function at the time of callback execution by the effect SW of this embodiment.

  As for “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A”, a callback occurs after “Liquid crystal A drawing starts” before “Liquid crystal A drawing start” and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A” starts. In addition, “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B” generates a callback before liquid crystal B drawing start, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B” generates a callback after liquid crystal B drawing start. The liquid crystal A and the liquid crystal B become different liquid crystals, and it is possible to determine the completion of drawing before the start of drawing of each liquid crystal, thereby drawing on the liquid crystal B triggered by the drawing completion of the liquid crystal A or ending the drawing of the liquid crystal B It becomes possible to draw on the liquid crystal A at the same time.

  In "LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM", a callback occurs before all drawing is started, and for "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM", a callback occurs after all drawing is completed. It is possible to initialize the frame buffer with a necessary background color before drawing by performing determination before the start of drawing, or instruct other rendering devices to execute effects when drawing is completed by determining the end of drawing. It becomes possible.

  In "LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM", a callback occurs before drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and in "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM", a callback occurs after drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. Predetermined processing can be performed before or after the start of drawing of a specific layer. For example, by performing determination before the start of layer drawing, when a plurality of notifications are generated when drawing a layer of notification, it is possible to enlarge and draw a display of a notification with high priority. Also, by performing determination after start of layer drawing, by drawing effects around a drawn pattern according to the timing at which a high expected pattern stops before starting drawing of a symbol layer, a pattern with high expected degree The effect can be displayed around the symbol only when the symbol stops.

  As described above, it is possible to specify the drawing section and execute predetermined processing before or after the start of drawing or completion. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 370, “LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK” can generate a callback before common block drawing start, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK” can generate a callback after common block drawing completion. The execution of a specific liquid crystal rendering block corresponding to a single rendering that constitutes a liquid crystal rendering common block is stopped by performing determination before the start of common block rendering, and rendering of rendering is not performed, or the liquid crystal rendering common block It is also possible to execute the liquid crystal rendering common block different from the liquid crystal rendering common block to be executed which has been determined in advance at the start of the fluctuation by performing the determination after the drawing end.

  In addition, “LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR” generates a callback before the liquid crystal rendering block in the liquid crystal rendering common block starts, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR” generates a callback after the liquid crystal rendering block is completed. By performing the determination before the start of the liquid crystal rendering block drawing, it becomes possible to change the liquid crystal rendering block to be executed based on the result of the external input by the player. Further, by performing determination after the start of the liquid crystal rendering block drawing, it becomes possible to add a new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal rendering block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal rendering block drawing a single rendering. Furthermore, “LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST” can generate a callback after the completion of still image and moving image drawing, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST” can be generated before starting still image and moving image drawing in liquid crystal rendering scheduler data. By performing determination before the start of drawing of a still image or a moving image, replacement of various effects becomes possible. In addition, it is possible to add renderings of effects corresponding to replacement contents of various effects by performing determination after drawing completion of a still image or a moving image.

  As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing section, it is very important to determine the drawing section in various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Effect switch group management]
As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal effect schedule data for each liquid crystal effect block, and images and moving images are drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the classification of effects. Be done. Further, as described above, one or more effect SWs are set in each layer.

  When rendering is performed, an image or the like is rendered in parallel to the plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal rendering schedule data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Furthermore, drawing by step-up notice 1 is performed on the notice layer (notice_first half 1 layer). FIG. 371 is a view showing an example of a drawing result of an individual layer and a drawing result of all layers at the time of execution of advance notice rendering according to the present embodiment.

  At this time, one or more effect SWs are set in each layer, but if these effect SWs are to be managed individually, there is a possibility that the processing becomes complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SW is grouped and managed for each of the layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the division of the effect.

  For example, the presentation SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 371, an effect SW group background, an effect SW group symbol, and an effect SW group advance notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These presentation SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the presentation SW may be managed for each state of the gaming machine and the category of the presentation.

  As described above, by grouping and managing the effect SWs, individual effect elements can be collectively controlled. For example, when the symbol display and the hold display in line with the currently displayed background is changed to another background when starting a new change, the background layer, the symbol layer, and the hold layer in the division according to the background The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. This makes it possible to collectively hide the symbol display and the hold display matched to the current background together with the background, and by performing the symbol display and the hold display matched to the new background in a plurality of layers. It is possible to switch the drawing for only the necessary effect display from among a plurality of effect displays superimposed and displayed in layers.

  In addition, in the effect across the gaming state, for example, in the big hit effect after the start of the change from the start of the change, the symbol is not displayed, the background is changed to the effect of the big hit, but with regard to hold It is also possible to display continuously. Such control defines the effect group to be hidden as described above as the reset object effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which the effect SW all reset has been specified is a liquid crystal effect common block at the start of fluctuation or It can be realized by defining it as a liquid crystal rendering common block at the start of the big hit rendering.

[27. Exception common block]
In the embodiment described so far, in order to enhance the control of the complicated game effects in order to enhance the interest of the player, all effects are managed as common blocks in block units of a certain length. In this way, a rendering block is selected according to the variation pattern and the result of the preliminary lottery, and a series of rendering effects such as symbol variation display and a big hit are realized by drawing based on the selected rendering block, and complex control is realized. Instead of this, control was implemented to synchronize sub renderings such as features, lamps, and sound output with the drawing contents. For the common block, a period divided at a predetermined timing from the start of symbol fluctuation to the symbol determination is set, and these periods correspond to, for example, the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation, and are assigned to fluctuation patterns It was set according to the variation time of the symbol.

  By configuring in this manner, the common block can be generally used with a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Furthermore, the degree of freedom in combining common blocks can be increased by securing the independence between the preliminary announcement effect performed in the first half fluctuation and the preliminary announcement effect performed in the second half fluctuation.

  However, as described above, since the common block is divided by a predetermined period, it is difficult to realize the effect that continues from the start of the change to the end of the change only by combining the effect blocks having a predetermined length. When performing rendering over such a plurality of periods, each common block is executed independently, in addition to the fact that the preceding common block and the subsequent common block are associated and the versatility is lowered. Therefore, there is a risk that the control becomes complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the presentation. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to create and control program codes individually instead of setting program data.

  Then, in order to solve the above-mentioned subject, in this embodiment, not only the variation display of the symbol and the series of big hit of the design are performed by combining the effect blocks of a certain length in all effects, but the length of the effect blocks Is exceptionally not a fixed length, but is configured to allow the effect block length according to the effect period. Furthermore, rendering effects can be rendered by combining rendering blocks having different rendering times, and rendering blocks that straddle the combined rendering blocks can also be rendered simultaneously, thereby realizing rendering effects that continue from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation.

  As the effect across a plurality of periods, for example, there is a countdown effect in which a number is counted down and displayed with the start of fluctuation of the symbol, and the countdown display is continued across the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation. FIG. 372 is a view for explaining an example of a common block spanning a plurality of periods according to this embodiment, in which (A) shows the display timing of the symbol and the execution timing of the notice effect, (B) shows the liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block, The structure of the liquid crystal advance presentation block by the common block which spans a plurality of periods is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 372, the former half fluctuation is “normal fluctuation 12 seconds” and the latter half fluctuation is “normal short reach”, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H”. As shown in FIG. 372 (A), step-up notice and BTN logo part drop notice are executed in the first half change, and cut-in notice and group notice are performed in the second half change. The contents of each preliminary announcement effect are as described above. Also, the countdown notice is executed from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice.

  In FIG. 372 (B), the liquid crystal rendering block data of the notice effect (step-up notice, BTN logo feature drop notice, cut-in notice and group notice) using the common block and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice. It shows the configuration of the effect block of the countdown notice to be executed during the period until the end time. Each block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

  The effect block of the countdown notice is composed of a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts, a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data ends, and the second half fluctuation ends after the liquid crystal effect notice block data ends. . The function NOP stands by until the liquid crystal effect announcement block data starts, NOP executed before the step-up announcement starts, and the function NOP pauses until the second half change ends NOP executed after the group announcement ends. The same waiting time is set.

  As described above, by making it possible to set an exception in the execution period of the effect block, it becomes possible to more flexibly operate the common block. In addition, by setting the waiting time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence such as the execution timing of the other effect blocks being shifted due to the exceptional setting. The control of the exception common block is also controlled by the callback function using the effect SW, similarly to the other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
In order to enhance the interest of the game and to shorten the processing time for drawing, drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is extracted from the frame buffer and stored separately from the frame buffer in the capture storage area of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Then, processing such as image reuse, deformation, and additional drawing was performed. Thus, various rendering expressions are efficiently realized by temporarily storing drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame.

  FIG. 373 is a view for explaining a conventional configuration for writing an image in a frame buffer by writing an image written in each layer. As shown in FIG. 373, conventionally, an image drawn in each layer is superimposed on a frame buffer and written, and then output to a display device.

  Specifically, first, a moving image or a still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer using a display list command. Next, the moving image or still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Furthermore, the moving image or still image displayed on the notice layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Finally, the display buffer command is used to overwrite the moving image or still image related to the reserved layer on the frame buffer to create drawing data of one frame.

  Thereafter, the peripheral control board 1530 copies drawing data for one frame to be displayed, which is created in the frame buffer, to a capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. An effect is newly added around the pattern to the drawing data stored in the buffer for capture, and then written back to the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame for the next display.

  In this way, drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created simply by adding an effect to the drawing data that has already been created. However, in such conventional image conversion, only image conversion for drawing data for one frame can be realized, and in addition to addition of new drawing elements for a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame, It is limited to the enlargement and reduction of the whole liquid crystal drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on the drawing element drawn in each layer or each drawing element in the layer on the capture buffer.

  The reason why the image conversion can not be performed for each drawing element is that drawing elements in each effect, for example, background, design, advance notice, etc., are overwritten on the frame buffer in the layer order, so It is overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. Also, since the drawing element is a set of colored dots (points) when drawn on the frame buffer, it is possible to overwrite the drawing element with another drawing element even if it is attempted to extract the drawing element in a rectangle. Because, the data of the drawing element of the overwritten part is lost.

  At present, the need to reuse image data for one drawn liquid crystal display has become scarce due to the improvement of VDP processing capability, but diversifying the expressions of presentation for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming In order to execute complicated drawing processing, an increase in load was expected.

  In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and perform various effects, image data of one frame of liquid crystal display of a created frame buffer is captured, and deformation or new drawing on the captured image is performed. When drawing new image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display instead of adding the image, dynamically change the image during drawing, in each effect display unit constituting the image data for the one screen of the liquid crystal display Realize complex rendering by adding new drawing.

  Specifically, a single effect rendering data (notice, background, pattern, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW is provided in units of effect blocks in liquid crystal effect scheduler data for performing display by the effect block. Incorporate Then, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and a process (program function) is dynamically called (call back) based on the information of the rendering SW incorporated in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data.

  When changing the image, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the corresponding rendering block in the called program function are not drawn on the frame buffer, but allocated on the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on the off-screen buffer (image display information temporary storage means). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to the change of the image of the specific advance notice, the addition of a new image, and the replacement of the effect of the background only, the change of the image or the new image Additions can be realized.

  Hereinafter, a configuration will be specifically described, in which the image drawn in each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the converted image is written in the frame buffer. FIG. 374 is a diagram for describing a procedure for converting an image file stored in the off-screen buffer according to the present embodiment and writing the converted image file in the frame buffer.

  As described above, one or more buffers for image conversion called an off-screen buffer different from the frame buffer are allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Then, image conversion is performed by the image conversion buffer, and complex image conversion is enabled by combining the image converted on one or more off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer.

  Explaining further, the rendering SW is embedded in the liquid crystal rendering block data that configures each layer corresponding to the rendering and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data that configures the liquid crystal rendering block data, and is embedded when creating the display list command at the time of liquid crystal rendering The callback function is called by the callback based on the selected presentation SW, and image conversion is performed in the callback function.

  In FIG. 374, first, before the drawing of the background layer is started, the drawing object is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the presentation SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each rendering element of the background layer, a display list command for enlargement of each rendering element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the rendering SW. In this way, the enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

  Subsequently, before the drawing of the symbol layer is started, the drawing object is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, an effect is applied to the pattern drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the effect SW at the drawing timing of each effect element of the pattern layer Create display list command. By transmitting the display list command, an effect can be applied to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Subsequently, before drawing of the advance notice layer is started, the drawing object is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn within the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing at which the rendering of all the rendering elements related to the preview layer is finished, a display list command for rotating the preview rendering of each rendering element of the preview layer is performed within the function called back based on the rendering SW. create. By transmitting the display list command, each rotated notice is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and furthermore, the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Finally, all rendering elements of the holding layer are written to the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

  According to the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, not the image conversion for the entire screen, but the image conversion regardless of the drawing unit of each layer, the drawing element constituting the layer, and the drawing order in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

  The present embodiment is characterized in that callback based on the same effect SW is performed multiple times at each drawing timing in a period from the start of drawing of a liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the type of drawing timing are as described using FIG. 370 described above.

  Further, by performing image conversion by callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether the image being drawn is an object of image conversion. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of variation-related drawing, an image is generated based on the result of the lottery result value of the advance lottery and the result of the interactive operation by the user's external input at the time of creating the display list command for drawing the image conversion target image. It is possible to determine the method of conversion.

[29. RAMless transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on animation data stored on the CGROM, and the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a processes the created display list command to perform drawing at the time of game effect execution. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in the buffer allocated to the peripheral control RAM 1530 c, and external request DMA (transfer means) after the completion of display list command creation for one screen. Was used to send the contents of the buffer to VDP.

  However, at present, the rendering specification becomes complicated, and the processing load increases, so that the processing time of the advance lottery process at the start of fluctuation increases, while the lamp lighting data layer synthesis processing due to the increase in the number of lamp systems, motor system The processing time of the motor data creation process by the increase in the number is also increasing. Since the processing time of peripheral control such as rendition etc. is executed at a fixed cycle, there is a possibility that the process can not be completed within the cycle when the above-mentioned high load process is executed in duplicate. .

  In exceptional cases where processing can not be completed within a cycle, processing can not be completed within a cycle on a regular basis, and game control by the main control device and effect control by the peripheral control device are synchronized based on the processing cycle. As a result, there is a risk that the progress of the game and the effects of the game performed by each of the rendering devices may diverge, and the interest of the game may be significantly reduced.

  Therefore, it has been necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing by, for example, reducing the time required for processing with high load in peripheral control processing such as rendering. Therefore, in this embodiment, drawing processing with relatively high load in peripheral control processing, in particular, the above-mentioned processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM and creating the native display list command that can be processed by the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source A means for reducing and shortening the processing time of the entire peripheral control process will be described.

  First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a will be described. FIG. 375 is a diagram for describing a procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c and transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 375, first, various liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler display list control module, and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data into the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data includes information (a parameter value corresponding to a VDP register number or a register number) related to a display list command to be transmitted to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Since it is not, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source can execute. The converted VDP native display list commands are temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c. In addition, when the callback function called by the effect SW is executed when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as needed, and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  Then, in the process of processing the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs display list transfer setting to the external request DMA. As a result, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530 c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a.

  Upon receiving the transferred VDP native display list command, the sound source built-in VDP 1540 temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

  As described above, the display list command group of one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530 c, and the display list command group is output from the buffer to the VDP 1540 a using the external request DMA at the next processing cycle of creating the display list command group. It realizes drawing by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting a large amount of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for one screen into a VDP native display list command group is a large processing load. In the case where a plurality of VDPs of different makers are mounted on one game machine, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data which is an intermediate data format is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP for each maker. It becomes possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration capable of transferring a part or all of the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without storing in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is applied. FIG. 376 is a view for explaining the procedure for transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c according to this embodiment.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 376, first, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler display list selection management module performs display list transfer setting for the external request DMA. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530 c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b.

  Although the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b as in the case where the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, each liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is converted VDP native display list command group And an interrupt display list command.

  The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal rendering scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal rendering scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes the image in the frame buffer. Furthermore, analysis of the display list is interrupted at the timing of analyzing and executing the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group, and a transfer interruption request is generated to the external request DMA. Thereafter, an interrupt is generated to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an interrupt from the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the peripheral processing MPU 1511 determines that the interrupt cause is the interrupt by the interrupt display list command in the interrupt processing module, and executes the callback. In the callback function, replacement of effects and replacement of symbols are performed with reference to the callback information table for liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The method of replacing the effect is the same as the description using FIG. 361 described above, and the method of replacing the symbol is also the same as the description using FIG. 361 described above. In the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data corresponding callback information table, the rendering SW corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is defined. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, and a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and is transmitted to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list command of display list analysis resumption to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a analyzes a display list command of display list analysis restart, generates a transfer restart request to the external request DMA, and restarts analysis of the display list command.

  As described above, by processing only the replacement part of the rendering using the callback function, the peripheral control RAM 1530 c (temporary storage means) is used without any conversion of the VDP native display list involved in all the rendering other than the replacement. Instead, transfer can be performed from the peripheral control ROM 1530 b to the voice generator built-in VDP 1540 a using an external request DMA (transfer means).

  By configuring as described above, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the built-in sound source VDP 1540 a without storing in the peripheral control RAM 1530 c. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511 a accompanying the display of the image, and to speed up the image processing. In addition, since the use area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be effectively used.

  In the peripheral control ROM 1530b, only the frequently used VDP native display list command group may be stored, and the less frequently used VDP native display list command group may be processed according to a conventional procedure. As a result, processing of the frequently used display list command can be shortened, and overall processing speed can be increased, and an increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530 b can be suppressed. In addition, the display list command corresponding to a highly versatile image (moving image) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530 b, and processing of different images is performed according to the conventional procedure according to the difference in model and version to improve development efficiency. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
A processor (CPU, MPU) used in game control and peripheral control (rendering control) of a game machine can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used with a 32-bit CPU are char (character, character) type, int (integer) type, and long (long integer) type, and they are 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes in size, respectively. . The floating point type is a float (single precision) type or a double (double precision) type, and has a size of 4 bytes or 8 bytes, respectively.

  The processor used for peripheral control of a gaming machine is either a CISC processor or a RISC processor, a byte capable of reading and writing data stored in all addresses in units of 1 byte of data on memory (ROM, RAM) It is a machine. Note that the address for reading and writing multi-byte data is not limited to this. When the processor reads multiple bytes of data, it always reads from the byte boundary, and an access violation occurs when the processor accesses the byte boundary. The behavior at the time of alignment violation occurrence depends on the processor, but for example, instead of continuing the processing, execution of the program may be delayed due to multiple memory accesses, or the processing may be interrupted due to the occurrence of a runtime exception. I hate it.

  However, in the development of the current game machine, when a program for controlling a game is executed, the data structure including a plurality of pieces of information on the memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of the alignment. There were many cases. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur at the time of program execution, and the program execution speed may be reduced. In peripheral control of a gaming machine, since it was necessary to complete all processing within a predetermined processing cycle, a reduction in program execution speed may be a serious problem. In particular, since the effects of the gaming machine are configured based on a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and store various information in different types of data types. Data structures are adopted.

  In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the data structure including a plurality of information used for game control, each information is stored when data corresponding to the data structure is stored in the memory. Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the area for storing. This adjusts the start position of data access by the processor and arranges the information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, thereby preventing occurrence of an alignment violation and preventing a decrease in program execution speed. Can. It is a huge task to adjust the alignment to the data structure on all the ROM and RAM on the ROM, so the load on the processor is large and the processing time is long. It is desirable to adjust the alignment with the data structure on the ROM and the RAM related to the control processing related to the liquid crystal drawing processing and the lamp control processing. Moreover, there is no problem in performing alignment adjustment other than the above-mentioned process.

[Help image to promote understanding of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination being performed, any one of a plurality of expected effects (such as advance notice effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the preliminary effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (such as preliminary effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect pattern determination or advance notice effect determination is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the determination, and variation due to the decorative symbol according to the result of the big hit determination The rendering will be executed together with the expected rendering (noticing rendering) applied to the background depiction (background preview) and the movable body operation (feature rendering). And as a result, when the change production by the decoration symbol is executed with the expectation production concerning the background depiction and the movable body movement etc as a result of being displayed stop by the big hit design, the big hit game as a privilege is executed to the player It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative symbol is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movable The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  However, when such an expected effect is realized as background depiction (background advance notice), basically, it has an effect such as "how much should the ratio for causing an image with high expectation to appear to be set?" It is only done to Therefore, the fundamental problem such as "it becomes difficult to have a feeling of expectation to the big hit if an image with high expectation (expected presentation) does not appear" has not been solved yet.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that the special effect is to be performed as a result of the advance effect determination (when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background depiction It is possible to execute the process of displaying the background image used in the image in a special mode different from the original image data, and when displayed in the special mode, the expectation level is higher than when it is not displayed in the special mode It is suggested that it can be suggested that the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing is high.

Here, as the “process to display in a special mode”, for example,
A process of displaying original image data as rotational processing data rotated by a predetermined angle (rotation around an x, y, or z axis (or an appropriate combination) in a display area, etc.),
It is possible to exemplify processing such as processing for displaying original image data as mosaic processing data having a predetermined degree of “blur”.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the original image data is subjected to only slight processing (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.) when predetermined rendering conditions are satisfied. It is decided to carry out a special effect to display this (displayed in a special mode). According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to positively detect and recognize the fact even if special effects are performed in which only slight processing is performed on the original image data. However, in exchange for this, even if the special rendition is not being performed, you may be able to remember the feeling and illusions that "you may be in the state where the special rendition is being performed" As a result, even if a state in which an image with a high degree of expectation (special effect) has not appeared continues, it is expected that the sense of expectation for the big hit is suitably maintained.

  However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status related to such “display in a special mode”, it becomes difficult to recognize even the possibility of being in a situation with high expectation. In the end, doing special effects can lose its own meaning.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment displays a help image as to whether "processing in a special mode" is being executed according to the operation by the player. Can be executed. According to such a configuration, since the help image can be displayed according to the operation by the player, it is impossible to recognize whether the "processing to display in a special mode" is being performed. It is expected that the reduction of the risk of the loss of

  However, the “help image” according to this explanatory example does not clearly indicate whether “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed or not, and it is intended to include the recognition difficulty. ing. It is hope that even if it does not appear to be in the state of being executed "processing to display in a special mode" just because it dares to have such recognition difficulty, it can not be convinced that it is in the state of being executed. Will be able to be left, and it will be possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

  FIG. 377 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when performing a state transition between a non-playing state (such as in a demonstration screen) in which a game is not executed and a game execution state in which a game is executed. .

  FIG. 377 (a) shows a display example in the above-mentioned effect display device 1600 when in the non-playing state (in the demonstration screen, etc.) in which the game is not executed. As shown in FIG. 377 (a), in the effect display device 1600 in the non-playing state, a character image PG (here, here to help determine whether the special effect is being executed). A guide image AG is displayed that suggests that a character spoofing a penguin can be made to appear by operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410). In this explanatory example, an explanatory note and a character image PG are respectively displayed as the guide image AG.

  When the start winning combination occurs and the game (variation of the special symbol according to the big hit determination) is started in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (a), the effect display device 1600 first displays FIG. 377 (b) The guidance image AG is hidden as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed together with the expectation effect (notice effect) applied to the background depiction (background advance notice), the movable body operation (feature effect) and the like. In this way, by causing the guide image AG to be automatically hidden when the game is started, it is possible to prevent adverse effects on the rendering when in the game execution state, It becomes possible to preferably appeal the presence of the character image PG (here, a character in which the penguin is beaten).

  FIG. 377 (c) shows a display example in the above-mentioned effect display device 1600 when the change effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377 (b) is ended (stop display).

  In the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), when the holding information remains, the guidance image AG is not displayed by the fact that the fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is newly started by the holding information being digested. The rendering situation shown in FIG. 377 (b) will appear again with the state as it was. On the other hand, if no hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), the state is shifted again to the non-play state (in the demo screen, etc.). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the game is not newly started for a predetermined period of time after the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377 (b) is ended (stop display), the guidance image AG is The displayed condition (the condition shown in FIG. 377 (a)) will appear again. In the effect display device 1600 when the guidance image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may be hidden.

  And in the "process to be displayed in a special mode" according to this effect example, the state in which the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the "specific effect pattern" (when the predetermined determination result is obtained in the effect determination) , And can be executed when a specific effect image appears (within a predetermined timing in a specific effect pattern).

  In FIG. 378, there is performed an expectation effect that the princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image in a state where the fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is being executed in the “specific effect pattern”. An example of display on the effect display device 1600 when in the off state is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, when at least "expected effect in which a princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image" is performed, the condition that the predetermined effect condition is satisfied is satisfied. A process (a process of displaying in a special mode) can be performed in which each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) is subjected to a slight rotational processing and then displayed. There is. When the princess character (specific effect image) on which the "processing to display in a special mode" is executed is displayed, the princess character (specific effect image) on which the "processing to display in a special mode" is not executed is The percentage of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than when displayed.

  More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the "process to display in a special mode" is not executed, and the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (hime character) It is displayed as it is. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (b), each original image data of the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (hime character) is subjected to three times rotational processing on the left and then displayed. In the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c), processing (processing to display in a special mode) is executed, the original image data of the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (hime character) is 6 degrees to the left The processing to display these after the rotational processing of (processing to display in a special mode) is being performed.

  As is clear from FIGS. 378 (a) to 378 (c), even if the “processing to display in a special mode” is performed, each original image data of the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) The machine is designed to be subjected to only a small amount of rotational processing. In particular, in FIG. 378 (a) to (c), it is possible to compare and see in FIG. 378, but in the actual stage, FIG. 378 (a) corresponding to the result of stage determination ) Only one of (c) is displayed and can not be compared among them. Therefore, even if FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) appear, it is difficult to be sure that they are in the state displayed in the special mode, but in the state displayed in the special mode It is expected that the player is aware of a certain possibility (high likelihood), and even if FIG. 378 (a) appears, it is not displayed in a special mode. It is difficult to be convinced, and the degree of leaving hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) such as "may be in a state of being displayed in a special mode" will be expected.

  In addition, processing which displays these after giving 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) rotation processing on the left to each original image data of decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) (processing to display in special mode) ) May be performed as processing for separately performing rotational processing on each of the original image data and then displaying them, or the respective original image data may be combined and converted into one image, It is possible to execute as processing for applying rotational processing to the image of and displaying it.

  In addition, in FIGS. 378 (b) and 378 (c), when the image shown in FIG. 378 (c) is displayed, the ratio in which the big hit symbol appears more than when the image shown in FIG. 378 (b) is displayed You may make it have the relationship which becomes high. Alternatively, when “processing to display in a special mode” is executed, after temporarily displaying FIG. 378 (a), it is displayed as a moving image whose inclination changes momentarily in the order of FIG. 378 (b), (c) You may make it Alternatively, both of FIG. 378 (b) and (c) may not necessarily be prepared, and only one of FIG. 378 (b) and (c) may be displayed.

  However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to determine the implementation status of such "display in a special mode", the meaning of performing such special effects is lost. I could do it. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation button 410 is in a state in which at least "expected effect in which a princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image" is performed. And the like, it is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image as to whether the process of “displaying in a special mode” is being performed by an operation on a predetermined operation means such as.

  FIG. 379 shows that the help image is displayed based on the player's operation being accepted in the state where “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image” is being performed. A display example on the effect display device 1600 of the time is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, when at least “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image” is performed (see FIG. 378), an operation by the player (operation button Character image PG (here, a character sipping a penguin) is useful as a help image to help check if “special effects (here, tilt effects) are being performed” if 410) is performed. It is supposed to be displayed.

  More specifically, when the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (a) will appear. When the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (b) will appear, and when the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c) When an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player is performed, the situation shown in FIG. 379 (c) will appear.

  However, as is apparent from FIGS. 379 (a) to 379 (c), when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it can be used to determine whether the “processing to display in a special mode” is performed. It is configured that there is no explicit indication as to whether "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed. It is possible to be strongly aware of the possibility that “processing in a special mode to be displayed” appears to be being performed, because it is possible to intentionally have such recognition difficulty. Even if it appears that the process of displaying in a special mode is not being performed, it can not be convinced that hope for the feasibility of the process can be left, and the sense of expectation is maintained. It will be possible.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 379 (a) to (c), the character image PG (help image) according to this presentation example is in a state in which “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being performed. Regardless of the manner of execution, the display can be made only in one mode which is a predetermined position and which holds the ruler horizontally in the horizontal direction. As described above, the image (here, a ruler) displayed so as to extend in the horizontal direction without being influenced by the “processing to display in a special mode” is made to appear by operation by the player. (Here, the ruler) can be functioned as a reference image (help image) indicating whether or not the “special effect (in this case, tilt effect) is being performed” state.

  In particular, in this effect example, the image is not influenced by the “process in the special mode” at the overlapping position with the image (the princess character) to be subjected to the “process in the special mode” and the horizontal direction The standard image (in this case, a ruler) displayed so as to extend to is made to appear. Therefore, by confirming the degree of overlap with the image (Hime character) to be subjected to the special processing, it can be further useful to determine whether the special processing is being performed. become.

  That is, in such an example of the effect, the special effect subjected to the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is an effect which is slightly tilted, and when the effect of tilting is performed, the effect of tilting is Expectations are higher than if it is not done. Therefore, the player operates the predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) to determine whether the tilting effect is being performed, but even if the operation is performed It is arranged to intentionally have difficulty in recognizing that the process of displaying in the special mode is not notified. As a result, it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility that the degree of high expectation is high when it appears that the directing effect is executed, and even if the directing effect is not seen to be performed, It will be expected to leave hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) such as "it may be in a state in which a directing effect is being performed".

  Furthermore, it is considered as an object of "processing to display in a special mode" a standard image (here, a ruler) as to whether or not the "special effect (in this case, tilt effect) is being performed" state. One effect is to display at least a part of the image (decorative symbol SZ, background image) in the form of overlapping at least a part, and the standard image (here, a ruler) This single effect (the degree of expectation) As a result, it is possible to provide an interesting feature such as exhibiting the function for the first time by comparing with an effect image (here, a princess character) which is not able to function as).

  In addition, according to such a configuration, it is possible to make the presentation progress without displaying the reference image (here, the ruler) as it becomes possible as soon as the player makes a selection (depending on the operation). When you are not quite confident that you are in a state where the direction (in this case, tilt direction is being performed), you can enjoy various ways of playing, such as not making the player perform the operation by dare Become.

  In the example of effect, the “process of displaying in a special mode” is performed as “the process of performing rotation processing on the original image data and then displaying”, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the processing may be performed as processing for performing rotation processing on image data created based on the original image data instead of the original image data and then displaying the image data. In addition, image data may not be subjected to rotational processing, but may be subjected to another processing or conversion. The point is that it is possible to execute a special process to convert and display an image having a mode different from the normal mode, and when the special process can be performed, the player performs an operation on the special process target by the operation of the player. If the reference image can be displayed, it is possible to achieve the above-described effects.

  By the way, in the above-mentioned effect example, "processing to display in a special mode" can be executed when "expected effect in which a princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image" is performed. Although it has been described as being, according to the result of the effect determination, it may be possible to be able to execute multiple times within the period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol SZ to the stop of the change. At this time, when the number of times the process of displaying in a special mode is performed is large, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol is higher than when the number of times is small.

  In addition, with respect to the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case), the decorative symbol SZ is used not only when "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image" is performed. It may be possible to be able to be displayed by the operation of the player over the entire period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in the stop state, display may be made possible by an operation by the player.

  That is, in this case, even if any background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, a process of causing the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) to appear is executed. It becomes. However, in view of the fact that the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) is "comparison reference image (reference image) to background image", the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image in each case. It is clear that it depends on the type of If the display position or display form of the character image PG (especially, here, a ruler) is changed according to the type of background image at that time, the character image PG is a comparison reference. It is possible that the essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that the gaming entertainment will be reduced due to the doubt of the credibility. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (the reference image) is required to be displayed as an invariant and absolute image regardless of the presentation situation.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG be changeable among a plurality of predetermined display positions in accordance with an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player. . However, regardless of which display position is displayed, it is important that the display form is the same.

  FIG. 380 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by an operation by the player.

  FIG. 380 (a) shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, when in this rendering situation, the player carries out an operation for displaying the comparison reference image (the reference image) with the suspicion that "the processing to be displayed in the special mode is not executed". If so, character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at any of a plurality of display positions (see FIGS. 380 (b) to (d)) predetermined according to the mode of the operation. Processing is performed.

  For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the left position (FIG. 380 (b)) in the display area. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, a character image as a comparison reference image (reference image) at the center position (FIG. 380 (c)) in the display area When processing for displaying PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, a comparison reference image (standard image) is displayed at the right position (FIG. 380 (d)) in the display area A process of displaying the character image PG as a) is performed.

  As is clear from FIGS. 380 (b) to (d), the character image PG (in particular, here, a ruler) itself is assumed to have the same form regardless of which display position is displayed. , Because the positional relationship between the background image (or the decorative pattern) that can be the target of the “process to be displayed in a special mode” and the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case) is different, “display in a special mode The ease of determining whether the process of “performing processing” is being performed also naturally becomes different.

  For example, when the character image PG (especially, a ruler here) is displayed at the position (the center position in the display area) shown in FIG. 380 (c), the character image PG (especially, a ruler here) is a comparison target Is displayed so as not to overlap with the background image, and when the character image PG (especially, a ruler here) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 380 (d) (the right position in the display area). Since the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) overlaps with the background image to be compared, it is displayed so as to hide substantially the entire background image (bidding ticket). It can be said that it is relatively difficult to determine whether the processing to be performed is being performed.

  According to such a configuration, the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case) as a comparison reference image (reference image) is played at “a display position suitable for comparison” which differs depending on the type of background image in each case. Since the information can be displayed by the operation of the user, it is possible to suitably provide a judgment material as to whether or not the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" is being performed.

  In this presentation example, the display position of the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) is made variable according to the number of times of operation on the operation button 410 within a predetermined time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press time on the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 are provided, and any one of the operation means is operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means in accordance with the subject. When the character image PG is displayed by operating the operation unit different from the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in a situation (reception period) where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. Will be possible.

  In addition, the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (standard image) can not function as an effect (expected degree) by itself, so it is necessary for comparison and judgment with the background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the expected effect (background image) becomes an worthless image that only makes visual recognition difficult. Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the time displayed by the operation by the player, it is desirable to automatically hide the screen without requiring any operation.

  However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) is displayed as the comparison reference image (specifically, the ruler here) and the type of the background image, the “processing in a special mode” is performed. In some cases, it may not be sufficient for the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to perform comparison and determination as to whether or not it is in Therefore, in the above presentation example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (standard image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operation means operated to cause the character image PG to appear is reoperated. If it is, the time for which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, every time the predetermined operation means is re-operated, it is intermittently displayed until the player is convinced if the non-display is made after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the operation timing. By performing such operations, the display state of the character image PG can be maintained, and comparison and judgment can be made thoroughly.

  However, simply permitting such endless continuous display as the comparison reference image (character image PG) may make it extremely easy to determine whether the special processing is being performed. . That is, the player may always get a confident conclusion that "special processing is being performed" or "special processing is not being performed", so that "special mode" It does not specify whether or not the processing to be displayed is being executed, but the above-mentioned purported meaning of "imposing the difficulty of recognition" is overdrawn.

  Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is being displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is reduced, such as shortening the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler of the character image PG by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm) It is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, each time the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is being displayed, in exchange for extending the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed. The comparison reference image (character image PG) Since the display area as a whole becomes smaller gradually (here, the ruler becomes shorter gradually), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) It is possible to preferably maintain the difficulty of recognizing whether the process of displaying in a special mode is being performed while making it possible to extend.

  However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the length of the ruler is displayed too short), this can not be used for comparison with the background image, resulting in a decrease in game interest. It may be connected. Therefore, for the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, the minimum size (here, the length of the minimum ruler) is set in advance, and the minimum degree When the size is reduced to the above, even if the predetermined operation means is operated again in this state, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed is not extended. It is desirable not to further reduce the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole.

  In addition, it is desirable that the size (display area) of such a comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed. . That is, in this case, each time the predetermined operation means is operated to cause the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear (or to extend the display time), the display area as the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole Becomes smaller (in this case, the ruler becomes shorter gradually), and finally it will not appear, so when you really want to know if "processing in special mode" is being executed It will be possible to urge to operate only, and other things will be expected to concentrate on the original performance contents.

  Note that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over even after the corresponding fluctuation effect is ended and the next fluctuation effect is started. According to such a configuration, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be given as an extremely valuable presentation opportunity, and basically, only by looking at the background image and the decorative pattern SZ, “special mode It is possible to provide an effect (see FIG. 378) that predicts whether the process of “displaying at” is being performed.

  Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIG. 379 and FIG. 380 is a state when it is displayed for the first time by an operation on a predetermined operation means after power on (or RAM clear). After that, every time the operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole becomes gradually smaller (here, the ruler becomes gradually shorter), and finally it will not even appear . However, when a specific detection is made or when a specific condition is satisfied, etc., a comparison reference image (if appearing at a plurality of positions, only a comparison reference image corresponding to any one of those positions) A process may also be prepared in which the display area as a whole is increased (here, the ruler is elongated) and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by operating the predetermined operation means.

  Further, as described above, when preparing a plurality of operation means set so that the display position of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is different, the operation according to which of the operation means is operated The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operation means. In this case, the remaining number of times (the number of operations to reach the minimum unit) for causing the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear is set separately for each operation means (display position). It is desirable that, when the operation is performed, only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operation means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

  For example, in the case of the effect example described with reference to FIG. 380, when the first operation means is operated in the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (a), the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (b) appears It becomes. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (b), when the first operation means is operated again, this is in exchange for the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state being extended. As described above, the display is small (the ruler is short). However, after this, even when the second operation means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (c) appears, and the comparison criteria associated with the first operation means being operated again. The reduced display as an image (character image PG) is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by the operation on the second operation means. Similarly, even when the third operation means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (d) appears, and the comparison reference image (character image PG) accompanying the re-operation of the first operation means. The reduced display as is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right position by the operation on the third operation means.

  In this respect, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (for example, the central position shown in FIG. 380 (c)), it corresponds to the specific position (central position) while (within 3 seconds) When another operation means (for example, the first operation means) is not operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already in the display state at the specific position (center position) is maintained in the display state. It is desirable that the comparison reference image (character image PG) be newly displayed at another position (left position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

  That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position where comparison with the background image is difficult due to the operation to the predetermined operation means, it is different from the predetermined operation means By operating the operation means, it is possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another display position. In this way, it is possible to add an interest in searching for at which position the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to improve the comparison.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at another display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has already been displayed is not triggered by this. There is no such thing as a display, and the display state is maintained. According to such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are simultaneously displayed, and the comparison material with the background image is increased by that amount (here, two rulers are arranged) (In which the horizontal length becomes substantially longer), so it is possible to see a background image that is difficult to compare, but in a state where “processing to display in a special mode” is being performed. It is possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at timings that you really want to know. However, this simultaneously consumes “the remaining number of times (comparison image (character image PG) can be made to appear) (the number of operations to reach the minimum unit)” set respectively for a plurality of operation means. Because it can be generated by exchanging for things, it can be said that the cost for greatly improving the ease of comparison is also large.

  Further, as described above, since the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds after) when displayed by the operation by the player, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images In order to increase the time during which PG) is simultaneously displayed, it is required to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. That is, in this case, it is determined whether or not the "special processing is being performed" only with the comparison reference image (character image PG) that appears by the operation on the first operation means, or the compensation is increased. However, it is necessary to make a prompt decision as to whether the second operation means is to be further performed to significantly improve the comparison, and the disadvantage of the player is that the decision is delayed. Since it will be expanded, tension can be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are simultaneously displayed, the timing at which the comparison reference images (character images PG) are not displayed may be different. The sizes (the lengths of the rulers) as the respective comparison reference images (character images PG) also differ according to the operation situation. Furthermore, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) in each operation means, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even when the specific operation means is operated, but when another operation means is operated, the comparison reference image As a rendering situation such as (character image PG) is displayed can also appear, which operation means should be operated to cause the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear. Also in the determination, it is possible to provide more interesting by adding a determination factor other than the type of background image to be compared.

  As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when it is displayed by the operation by the player, but the predetermined time passes It is desirable that the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is made to be non-displayed as a trigger when the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is stopped due to a lose before that. That is, as shown in FIGS. 379 and 380, in the state where the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the contents of the effect in the display area, and the comparison with the background image etc. It will be difficult to concentrate on the contents of the presentation. As a result, if the user does not notice that the vehicle has been stopped due to a loss, the purpose of the character image PG to be used for the effect is torn down. When this happens, it is desirable to hide the character image PG as a trigger.

  However, the character image PG may not be undisplayed when it is stopped in the big hit, and may be continued in the display state until a predetermined time elapses. That is, when the big hit is stopped in the big hit, the big hit game will be started even if you do not notice it, so when the character image PG becomes non-displayed after a predetermined time has passed, it is surprising It will be expected to function as an effect.

  Further, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that the comparison reference image (specific sound related to the character image PG) can be output. Even when the user is gazing, it can be easily recognized that the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. However, when such a specific sound is output, the following It is more desirable in order to maintain the game interest to adopt such a method.

  That is, although the number of remaining times (the number of times of operation up to the minimum unit) that can cause the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear is set separately for each operation means (display position), the remaining time If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, combined with the fact that the effect content in the display area is difficult to be recognized, the original effect is concentrated It will be difficult. Therefore, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, the scream of a penguin) can be output while the specific sound (for example, the squeal of a penguin) is “displayed in a special mode”. Makes its sound output acceptable only when it is not running. Thus, with regard to the execution of the “process to display in a special mode”, the specific sound (for example, penguin's cry) is not used as the positive indication on the positive side, but only the specific sound (for example, negative indication on the negative side) And penguins), a player who dislikes such a specific sound concentrates on the original presentation, and the possibility of "processing in a special mode" is likely to be high. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will be made to appear only at certain times.

  However, for the specific sound (for example, the sang of a penguin), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by the operation of the player when the “processing to display in a special mode” is not performed. It is desirable to make the sound output not necessarily acceptable even if That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image which has already been displayed is reduced (the length of the ruler is changed)) by the operation by the player. When a specific sound (for example, the sang of a penguin) is output, it will be recognized that "processing to display in a special mode" is not being executed, but the specific sound ( For example, when the sound of the penguin's cry is not output, there may be a state in which the “process to display in a special mode” is being performed or a state in which the “process to display in a special mode” is not performed. As it becomes louder, it becomes possible to maintain the fun when a specific sound (for example, the sang of a penguin) is not output.

  The specific sound (for example, the sang of a penguin) may be output under the above-described predetermined condition even when any of a plurality of operation means having different display positions is operated. However, if a specific sound can be output under the above-described predetermined condition only when a specific operation means is operated among a plurality of operation means, a specific sound may be output, In the "special mode", there is no possibility that a comparison reference image (character image PG) useful for judging whether "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being performed or a specific sound may be output. It is possible to allow the player to select whether or not the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears to be useful for determining whether or not the processing of “display processing” is being performed.

  Further, in the above presentation example, the special reference mode is displayed by displaying the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state in a small size (shorter the ruler) in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG). The difficulty of recognizing whether the processing is being performed is suitably maintained. In this respect, when the specific sound (for example, the squeal of a penguin) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (the character image PG) is relatively large. For example, if the volume of the penguin's cry) is made smaller than when it is output, recognition difficulty when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended to some extent. It will be expected to be maintained.

  Also, the size and the display position of the comparison reference image (character image PG) do not overlap each other when the comparison reference images (character image PG) are simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 380). It is desirable to set and. It becomes possible to increase the amount of comparison material with the background image by the amount that each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping.

  The comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as an image having transparency. According to such a configuration, even if most of the background image and the comparison reference image (character image PG) overlap, comparison is performed between the comparison reference image (character image PG) and the background image seen through. It becomes possible to carry out suitably.

  Further, in the above presentation example, whenever the predetermined operation means is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed small (shorter the ruler) and displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Any mode may be used as long as it is difficult to recognize whether the process of displaying the mode is being performed. For example, each time the predetermined operation means is operated, the shape and size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) itself remain the same, but the portion where the transparency is relatively increased is gradually enlarged. You may That is, in the case where the comparison reference image (character image PG) is "displayed at the specific transmission degree", the portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the specific transmission degree is small (specific It is important to display the part displayed with transparency short), and the part which is not displayed with specific transmission may be made to hide, and it is possible to make the transmission higher than specific transmission. It may be displayed to increase the visibility difficulty.

  As described above, “processing for displaying in a special mode” is, for example, shown in FIG. 378 (c) from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a) through the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b). It may be a dynamic depiction process of changing to a different display state. When the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is realized as such a dynamic depiction process, when the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is ended, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. After the display state shown in 378 (b), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a) is returned.

  In this respect, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) since it is displayed. It is desirable that the process of displaying in a special mode be performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, when the processing for displaying in a special mode as the dynamic depiction processing is being performed, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation by the player. While the comparison reference image (character image PG) is in the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c) passes through the display state shown in FIG. Since the movement such as “return to the display state shown in 378 (a)” will always appear, it is possible to facilitate comparison / determination as to whether the processing for displaying in the special mode is being performed. become able to.

  However, the “processing to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation by the player when the “processing to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing is being performed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is in the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b) is displayed from the display state shown in FIG. It is difficult to compare or judge whether the processing to be displayed in the special mode is being performed because the movement such as “returned to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a)” does not necessarily appear. Will be able to In addition, strategicity can be added by enabling the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) to be extended.

  Moreover, about the "process to display in a special mode" as a dynamic depiction process, according to the result of presentation determination, it is carried out in the time shorter than predetermined time (3 seconds), and from predetermined time (3 seconds) Also, it may be performed in a long time. In addition, “a process of displaying in a special mode” as a dynamic depiction process which is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) within a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol SZ to the time of the fluctuation stop. The “display in a special mode” as a dynamic depiction process performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at different predetermined timings.

  In addition, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after it is displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed For a specific sound that can be output (for example, a penguin's cry), the sound output is interrupted in a time (for example, 0.5 seconds which is less than a half time) much shorter than a predetermined time. Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the “processing to display in the special mode”, the specific sound is generated after the “processing to display in the special mode” is performed. Since it is suppressed that the output of (for example, penguin's call) is maintained, the specific sound (for example, for example, even though the “process to display in a special mode” is being performed) Can make it difficult to generate a rendering situation as if it is denied by the penguin's cry.

  In this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (for 3 seconds) in the form of display that spans from before the processing for displaying in the special mode is performed until after it is performed. Become. Therefore, when the “display in special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing is executed, for example, the display shown in FIG. 378 (a) while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. From the state, the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b) is changed to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c).

  Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is made up of the character and ruler that look over the penguin, only one of the character and ruler and look over the penguin may be displayed. The point is that any comparison reference image (character image PG) not subject to the "process to be displayed in a special mode" can be made available by the operation of the player. However, if a standard image (ruler) in which a length unit in the horizontal direction is shown is displayed, it may be easy to determine whether “processing to display in a special mode” is performed. It is possible.

  The guide image AG in the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 377 may not necessarily be displayed.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be made recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. It is

[Puzzle prevention for multiple operation means]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination being performed, any one of a plurality of expected effects (such as advance notice effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the preliminary effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (such as preliminary effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol is executed together with the expectation effect (notice effect) applied to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body operation (feature effect). And as a result, when the change production by the decoration symbol is executed with the expectation production concerning the background depiction and the movable body movement etc as a result of being displayed stop by the big hit design, the big hit game as a privilege is executed to the player It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative symbol is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movable The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets the setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) Will be performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process of changing the setting value (brightness setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  In addition, about change acceptance about such a setting value (volume setting value, brightness setting value), and adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the condition does not change the symbol, and the symbol changes. Both in the present state and in the present state, it is possible to execute each operation by the player.

  Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, many operation means (operation button 410, sword portion 5010, effect selection left button 331, and the like) are operated by the player. , An effect selection right button 332, and a brightness adjustment button (not shown). Then, when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the player is given an operation opportunity while the variable effect by the decorative symbol is being performed, and the game is entertained through such an operation effect. To maintain the

  However, when such a large number of operation means are provided, the existence of the operation means becomes prominent, and the player tends to become a target of mischief. Then, as a result of receiving the rough handling, if an abnormality or a failure occurs even in one of the operation means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly reduced, and a decrease in the game entertainment can not be avoided.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, although the gaming effect according to the big hit determination is not being executed, it is in the non-gaming state (state where the above-mentioned operation effect can not be generated). In the situation where there is a high possibility that misuse has occurred due to operation detection by multiple operation means, it is decided to generate a production restriction period (functional restriction period), thereby suppressing miscellaneous handling of the operation means I am trying to do it.

More specifically, in a state where a game is not started (non-playing state), among a plurality of operation means provided for the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of predetermined operation means which should not require an operation Here, when the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword 5010 is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is triggered by the detection.
In the effect display device 1600, in a state where a specific moving image (warning moving image) that can not appear in a state where a game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (reproduced),
・ Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Effective period during which a penalty is imposed, such as that even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change in the brightness setting value for the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed either A control is made to generate a period for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and the operation related to the volume is permitted, and the volume is permitted. The adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the normal operation as the non-play state is restored such that the operation acceptance regarding the luminance is accepted and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output.

  In the effect restriction period (function restriction period) according to the present embodiment, “even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output sound volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume The setting value is not displayed either, and "If the operation for the brightness adjustment button is performed, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed either" However, only one of the processing relating to volume adjustment and the processing relating to luminance adjustment may be limited.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) which are triggered to generate such an effect restriction period (function restriction period) are prepared. As a result, it is expected that the condition of occurrence of the effect restriction period will be complicated to give a tense feeling such as "Isn't the prank being actually monitored by the hole side".

  FIG. 381 is a time chart for describing an example of processing when generating a performance restriction period based on the establishment of a predetermined performance restriction condition in a non-gaming state (during demo screen and the like). is there.

  Now, it is controlled in the state where the game is not started (non-playing state), and the display at the time of standby in the effect display device 1600 (the situation where the decoration symbol is displayed in the stopped state, Is displayed, etc.). As described above, in such a situation, when the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output at the time of the operation. If it is in the state, a process of adjusting the volume (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly to this, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed, and if the predetermined effect lamp is in the light emitting state at the time of the operation, the process of adjusting the brightness (the brightness setting value is taken as the light amount Processing to be reflected is to be executed. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output.

  As described above, in the non-gaming state, when the player starts playing the game, the user operates the volume adjustment button or the brightness adjustment button so that the user can set the volume or the brightness to his / her preference Reception is accepted. Then, when the operation is accepted, it is expected to prompt the player to start the game by changing the volume setting value and the brightness setting value corresponding thereto.

  However, as described above, in the non-playing state, there may be a case where a puzzling operation is performed on a plurality of operation means including such a volume adjustment button and a brightness adjustment button. As a result, if an abnormality or failure occurs even in one of the operation means, the operability and effectability will be significantly reduced, and a decrease in the game entertainment can not be avoided.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment prepares several operation patterns (detection patterns) to be recognized as mischief detection, and in the non-playing state, one of the operation patterns is detected. Based on the fact that the operation has been detected, it is possible to execute processing for generating a production restriction period (functional restriction period) in which a penalty is imposed over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment recognizes that the condition concerning the effect restriction is satisfied when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-gaming state. And
a. The first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is clocked starting with the operation detection on the sword unit 5010, and the operation detection on the operation button 410 newly occurs until the first timer time is finished, The second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) starts counting in response to the operation detection for the newly generated operation button 410, and the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 starts while the second timer time is over. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurring are set
b. The third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started to be clocked by the operation detection to the operation button 410, and the operation detection to the sword unit 5010 newly occurs while the third timer time is finished. The fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is timed to start timing detection of the newly generated sword portion 5010, and the operation detection to the operation button 410 is performed until the fourth timer time is finished. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurring are set

  In addition, these operation patterns a and b are only examples, and when the detection condition concerning the operation pattern other than that is satisfied, it may be made to generate a production restriction period (function restriction period), or detection A plurality of target operation patterns may not necessarily be prepared, and only one of them may be used. Moreover, about 1st-4th timer time, all may be the same time and may be different time. Also, clocking may be performed using the same timer, or may be performed using different timers.

  Here, "long press on the operation button 410" and "continuous hitting operation (multiple operation) on the operation button 410" are not required in the state where the game is not started (non-playing state). It can be said. However, since these modes are modes that can be operated and instructed in the operation effect in the game execution state, the player has some purpose in starting the game even in the non-game state (e.g. It is assumed that it is possible to carry out these operations, and it is relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, the game execution state is set for “operation combinations for a plurality of operation means (for example, operations in the order of“ sword unit 5010 → operation button 410 → sword unit 5010 ”and the like) to be detected for the purpose of mischief. It can be said that it is important in order to avoid false detection that it is set as what is not operated and instructed as an operation effect at a certain time. This makes it possible to prevent the performance restriction period from occurring relatively frequently and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is greatly reduced.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, before and after the operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), the operation for the other operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010) is respectively performed. As a condition, the detection condition concerning the operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and the production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated only when the operation to a plurality of operation means is disturbed within a relatively short time. I have to. Therefore, players who have only touched once due to their uniqueness, not the intention of mischief, can be exempted from the penalty, and there is a relatively frequent occurrence of a production restriction period, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to more preferably avoid a drastic drop in the operation rate as

  In this way, stricting the detection conditions is to avoid that the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 drops significantly, and it is confusing with mischief by the mischief. Because it is assumed that the operation is performed in various combinations, even if the detection conditions are tightened, it is likely that the detection conditions will eventually be satisfied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 381, first, at timing tq1 when in the non-gaming state, an operation on the sword 5010 is detected. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and whether or not the second stage detection condition is satisfied before the first timer time is consumed. It will be in the state (the 1st step state) which judges whether or not.

  That is, as described above, in the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, three conditions (sword portion 5010 → operation button 410 → sword portion 5010) are imposed as conditions for generating the effect restriction period, and these conditions Each time is satisfied one by one, the stairs for generating the effect restriction period will be taken one step up.

  At timing tq1, one of the three steps up to the generation of the effect restriction period is to go up. The state of the first stage can be continued until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is finished, and the second stage detection condition (here, the operation on the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer time is over, it is returned to the original state where none of the above three conditions are satisfied (one step down the stairs and the 0th stage state).

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected at the timing tq2 when the first timer time is not completed (the first stage state), and the operation pattern is (Detection Pattern) Of the three conditions included in a, the “second-step detection condition” is satisfied. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and detects the third stage of detection condition (here, the last time) until the second timer time is completed. It is in a state (second stage state) to determine whether or not the detection condition of (1) is satisfied.

  That is, at the timing tq2, the second stair among the three stairs before generating the effect restriction period is to go up. The state of the second stage can be continued until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is consumed, and the detection condition of the third stage (here, the operation on the sword 5010) is not satisfied. When the second timer time is finished, it is returned to the original state where none of the above three conditions are satisfied (the two steps down the stairs and the 0th stage state).

  In the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation on the operation button 410 is again detected at timing tq3 when the second timer time is not finished digesting (the second step state), and the operation pattern (detection Among the three conditions included in the pattern a), the “third-step detection condition (last detection condition)” is satisfied. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the detection, in the effect display device 1600, display (reproduction) of a specific moving image (warning moving image) that can not appear in a state where a game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed. Start it. Along with this, even if there is an operation to the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed either, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. Furthermore, even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. , Produce production restrictions. Then, the effect restriction period (functional restriction period) in which such a penalty is imposed is continued from timing tq3 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

  According to such a configuration, since the effect restriction period occurs when the plurality of operations are operated in a jumbled manner, the operation by the mischief can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is necessary to clear the condition one by one and raise the state level (to go up the stairs) in order to generate the production restriction period, but when time runs out in the middle of the road All status levels are cleared and returned to their original status. As a result, even when the game is ended with the state level raised, it is also preferable that the effect restriction period is unintentionally generated when a new player tries to start the game. Can be avoided.

  In the process of rising the state level (moving up the stairs) in this way, the "volume control button" or "brightness adjustment button" which is the operation object to be restricted when the effect restriction period occurs. It may be assumed that the “adjustment button” is operated. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) can be set so that the player can set the volume and brightness to his / her preference when starting the game. It is acceptable. Therefore, even if the operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated during the process of rising the state level (up the stairs), the state is triggered by this. It is desirable not to cause a change in level or to affect the first timer time or the second timer time.

  That is, in this case, even if the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are targeted for the operation by the mischief, it is not possible to generate the effect restriction period triggered by this. However, at least the already raised state level does not decrease due to these operations, and once the effect restriction period occurs, the object of effect restriction is “volume adjustment button” or “brightness adjustment button”. The operations for these will be invalidated at all, so it is possible to suppress this for the "volume control button" and the "brightness adjustment button" which are not targeted for detection of the operation by the mischief. Will be expected to do.

  In addition, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used in detection of mischief, it is sandwiched between “two operations (timing tq1, tq3 in FIG. 381) for another operation means (for example, sword portion 5010)”. The condition "operation on the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (timing tq2 in FIG. 381)" that is to be formed is conditioned to be operated a predetermined number of times instead of one time. It is more desirable to

  That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", the operation on the sword 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within the fifth timer time (for example 3 seconds) according to the detection. An operation on the button 410 is detected, and an operation on the operation button 410 is again detected within a sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) according to the detection, and a seventh timer time (for example 3 seconds) according to the detection When the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again inside, the detection condition concerning the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” is satisfied, and the effect restriction period is generated. Moreover, about 5th-7th timer time, all may be the same time and may be different time. Also, clocking may be performed using the same timer, or may be performed using different timers.

  When the operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation on the sword unit 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. It is more desirable that the detection condition concerning the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. In addition, within the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds), not the operation on the sword unit 5010 but the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again (the number of times specified here is greater than the number of times to be detected (here two times) Then, the 7th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset when the third detection is made), and the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the production restriction period is not generated. Is more desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated n times (here, twice) at a timing while the sword 5010 is operated twice, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is applied. The detection condition is satisfied and the effect restriction period occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or twice (> n times) during the second operation on the sword 5010, the effect restriction period is As it does not occur, it is expected that the condition of occurrence of the production restriction period will be complicated and that a tense feeling such as "Isn't the prank act actually being monitored by the hall side?" Become.

  In addition, in order to achieve such complication, the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the operation on the sword unit 5010 is performed again within the timer time, or the operation button 410 is l When operating within each timer time for the number of times (> n times), it is desirable to be controlled separately to the state different from the original state (may be different between m times and l times) . Therefore, even when the operation is performed according to the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" in the state controlled to these different states, the effect restriction period does not occur.

  Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) between the two operations on the sword 5010, the effect restriction period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (> l times) If a production restriction period can be generated (same as when it is operated n times), the generation condition of the production restriction period is made more complicated, and "the mischief act is not actually monitored by the hall side. It is expected that the sense of tension such as Also in this case, it is needless to say that every time the operation button 410 is operated, a timer time occurs and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of "predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))" which are triggers for generating the effect restriction period will be prepared.

  However, such mischief acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnets Goto, and it may lead to the disadvantage of the hall side to take too severe measures. Therefore, with regard to the specific moving image appearing in the effect restriction period, rather than displaying the strong warning content, the content of the degree to explain the proper handling method for the game and the effect, etc. Is desirable.

  As described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and “the operation acceptance for the volume is permitted. As a result, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the operation acceptance regarding the brightness is permitted, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. Thus, the normal state as the non-play state is returned.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 382, the player starts playing a game at timing tq 4 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs. It may be assumed that transition to the game execution state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is generated by generating the start winning. In such a case, since the above-mentioned intended purpose for stopping the prank and starting the game has been achieved, in a state where a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet elapsed End the production restriction period (function restriction period) of a certain thing.

  However, if the game is started without waiting for the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility that reflection is insufficient, so at least the fluctuation of the decorative symbol that triggered the termination of the effect restriction period. Until the display is ended, each reception of the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment is permitted, but "even if the volume adjustment is performed, the current volume setting value is displayed but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, and the luminance is not Even if it is adjusted, it is desirable to control as a partially limited period, such as displaying the current brightness setting value but not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

  As shown in FIG. 382, when the game execution state is thus shifted, the detection for the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated regardless of whether or not it is controlled in the partially limited period. Become so. Therefore, even if the operation on the sword unit 5010 or the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the first timer time and the second timer time are not counted with these as a trigger, and the effect restriction period occurs. Absent.

  According to such a configuration, when transitioning to the game execution state without waiting for the original duration time as the effect restriction period, the game is performed in a form in which a part of the restriction content in the effect restriction period is left Since the transition to the execution state is made, it is possible to encourage reflection on prank acts without interrupting the progression of the game effect.

  In addition, as for the partial restriction period, the decorative symbol is put to a stop in the state where the number of reservations is 0, not only until the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol that triggered the end of the effect restriction period is ended. It may be allowed to continue at least for a period of time until it is in the non-playing state.

  In addition, a predetermined safe time is set at the timing when the game execution state ends and the non-gaming state is shifted (for example, timing tq5 shown in FIG. 382), and until the predetermined safe time elapses. It is desirable that the state in which the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is invalidated is continued despite the fact that the game is not in the gaming state. That is, it is assumed that the player's excitement does not cool down in the situation where the game execution state has just ended, and it is assumed that the operation on a plurality of operation means is performed excessively. If a penalty is imposed, it may lead to the immediate termination of the game. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time be set whenever the game execution state ends and the non-play state is entered.

  In addition, when it is shifted to the non-gaming state while being controlled as the above-mentioned partial restriction period, because there is still a possibility that reflection on the prank is still insufficient, partial restriction until safe time elapses The period may be continued. In this case, detection of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is permitted again when the safe time has elapsed.

  In addition, the safe time is set as a time value longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol variation time from the start of variation display of the decoration symbol to the stop thereof. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even if the variation display of the decorative symbol is immediately ended, detection of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is performed at least until the safe time is ended. It is possible to continue the invalidation state or to continue the partial restriction period.

  In addition, when the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started by the end of the production restriction period (functional restriction period), the symbol fluctuation time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol fluctuation time It is desirable that variable display of decorative symbols be performed. According to such a configuration, the above-described partially limited period can be continued for a relatively long time.

  Further, in the above-described example, even if detection approaching the occurrence of the effect restriction period is performed within the detection period for the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (in FIG. 381, a portion to which fine dots are applied). The behavior of is not to appear either. However, instead of this, a specific sound is output each time the timer time is set by the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time going up the stairs of the penalty occurrence), thereby prompting the user to cancel the operation by the mischief. You may do so. The specific sound may be output as a different sound according to the type of the operation means to be detected. Similarly to this, every time the timer time is set by the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time going up the stairs of the penalty occurrence), the display content in the effect display device 1600 changes. It is also good.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be made recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. It is

[Noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound at the time of opening a store]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination being performed, any one of a plurality of expected effects (such as advance notice effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the preliminary effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (such as preliminary effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol is executed together with the expectation effect (notice effect) applied to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body operation (feature effect). And as a result, when the change production by the decoration symbol is executed with the expectation production concerning the background depiction and the movable body movement etc as a result of being displayed stop by the big hit design, the big hit game as a privilege is executed to the player It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative symbol is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movable The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets the setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) Will be performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process of changing the setting value (brightness setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  In addition, about change acceptance about such a setting value (volume setting value, brightness setting value), and adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the condition does not change the symbol, and the symbol changes. Both in the present state and in the present state, it is possible to execute each operation by the player.

  By the way, since the hall is opened for a while and only new customers are about to start playing the game, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment can be frequently performed to start the game with the setting value according to one's preference. However, in this case, if there is a case where the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output each time the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment is made, the adjustment confirmation sound will be echoed in the hall and the atmosphere is ruined. It's a rise.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow the player to perform an operation for adjusting the volume or to accept an operation for adjusting the brightness between the time when the power is turned on and the predetermined condition is satisfied. However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state in which the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value can be accepted while the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is set to the “predetermined specific value”. It is supposed to be

  According to such a configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the setting value (volume setting value) and the brightness setting value for the output sound volume of the rendering sound are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”. It will be set automatically. That is, in this case, by adopting the "specific value" which is automatically set as the setting value of the sound volume which many players tend to prefer, many games can be played in the time zone in which the hall has just been opened. It can be expected that it will be difficult for a person to adjust the volume setting value and the brightness setting value according to his / her preference. The establishment of the predetermined condition may be that a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, or may be that a predetermined command from the main control MPU 1310 a is received, or in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. The identification process may end.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume setting value or the volume setting value is determined based on the establishment of the predetermined condition or based on the arrival of the predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is established. Allows acceptance of changes in luminance setting values, but does not output a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if changes in the setting values are accepted over a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 hour) First let's generate. Then, after such a special period (period for exclusive use of the store) is ended, when a change in the setting value is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. There is. As a result, while the hall is opened for a while (while the time required for various adjustments by a new customer to complete is passed), a state in which various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output is maintained. Thus, it is possible to give an opportunity to perform the volume control and the brightness control to start the game with the setting value that suits the user's preference.

  FIG. 383 is a time chart illustrating an example of the processing according to the special period (the period dedicated to opening a store).

  Now, as shown in FIG. 383, assuming that the power is turned on at timing tr0, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume by the player is satisfied until the predetermined condition is established. It is controlled as the state which does not permit the operation concerning adjustment and the operation reception concerning luminance adjustment. In such a situation, the detection (main control side) related to the game such as the start winning is not permitted, and the game can not be started. In the effect display device 1600, whether a dedicated display (preparation screen) during power recovery appears or no display output is performed, and the standby screen (pattern stop display, demo screen, etc.) is still Do not show.

  Thereafter, when a timing tr1 at which a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a) is reached, detection related to the game such as the start winning is permitted, and the game start waiting state ( It will be controlled as a state of waiting for the start winning). Also in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (the screen at the time of standby) is displayed, and it can be recognized that the symbol is waiting for variation.

  At this time, while the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”, “the acceptance of the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is permitted, but Even if the change of the setting value is accepted, a special period (opening period only period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output is generated. Such a period dedicated to opening a store can be continued until timing tr2 when a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has elapsed since the occurrence of the period, and when the period is ended at timing tr2, the volume is set. A period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when the change of the setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted is generated. In the effect display device 1600, the state in which the stop symbol is displayed (waiting for variation of the symbol) is maintained even after the timing tr2 has arrived, and the decorative symbol in the stop state and the background thereof are kept. Various background images displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) (images with lower priority in the layer than the decorative pattern) are displayed when the period for opening the store is shifted to the normal business period There is nothing to change.

  According to such a configuration, even after the state where the stop symbol is displayed (the screen at the time of standby) appears and the game start waiting state is made, until the timing tr2 arrives (until the period for exclusive use of the store ends) In the meantime, since the adjustment confirmation sound is not output, it is possible to preferably prevent the adjustment sound from being echoed immediately after the store is opened. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 comes (when the time required for various adjustments by a new customer has passed), the automatic confirmation to an adjustment confirmation sound can be output, When various adjustments by new customers have settled down, finer adjustments can be permitted while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. Moreover, since the automatic transition is made to the normal business period in which the adjustment confirmation sound can be output while maintaining the state in which the stop symbol is displayed (the screen at the time of standby), a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of opening. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the adjustment is not performed until the store-only period until the adjustment sound is output.

  It should be noted that after the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game start wait state (after timing tr1), when a change in the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, the setting value changed in the effect display device 1600 is used. Parameter display (parameter display on the volume side, parameter display on the luminance side) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to adjust to the setting value according to one's taste by confirming such parameter display.

  However, even if the output of the adjustment confirmation sound is not performed in this way during the period immediately after the opening (the opening dedicated period), the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is reflected as the volume or light amount. After all, the atmosphere in the hall may lead to dyeing in a single color, and there is concern that the atmosphere will be ruined and brought up. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change of the volume setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 comes, the changed volume setting value is reflected as the effect sound It is desirable not to Similarly, with regard to the brightness, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change of the brightness setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 comes, the changed brightness setting value is used as the light amount. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, each player adjusts the setting value according to his / her preference while confirming the parameter display on the effect display device 1600 during the period immediately after the opening (the opening dedicated period). That is, in this case, while giving an adjustment opportunity to the setting value according to one's preference, since the influence by the sound and light is not exerted around the pachinko machine 1, the atmosphere in the hall is It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  It is to be noted that only the brightness among the volume and the brightness may be maintained in a state where the changed brightness setting value is not reflected as the light amount even after the timing tr2 arrives. That is, while the game is not started, it should be avoided to reflect the adjustment to the side where the power consumption is increased by the operation by the mischief, and the brightness of the power consumption is larger than the volume while the game is not started. It is desirable not to reflect the adjustment. Further, unlike the volume adjustment sound, the brightness adjustment sound may not necessarily be output because the adjustment degree can not be confirmed.

  However, even when timing tr2 has not yet arrived (when the time as the exclusive period for the store has not been digested yet), symbol variation (variation display by the decoration symbol) starts based on the start winning combination After that, the player has completed the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment, and it is assumed that the adjustment frequency is greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected before timing tr2 after timing tr1, the opening dedicated period is ended early based on the detection. It is possible to execute processing to shift to the normal business period.

  However, during the fluctuating display period of the decorative symbol due to the start winning combination that ended the period exclusively for opening the store, the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, and the adjustment confirmation sound associated with the change is output If there is something to be done, it is assumed that many players will perform the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment after the period exclusively for opening the store is ended early, which may result in overturning at this end.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected before timing tr2 after timing tr1, the period dedicated to opening the store is ended early and the normal business period Although the transition is made to the above, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed until at least the fluctuation state of the decorative symbol generated thereby is ended (during fluctuation processing).

  FIG. 384 is a time chart showing an example of processing when a game is started when a period dedicated to opening a store (special period) is set.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 384, it is assumed that the start winning is detected at timing tr3 when the time as the special period has not been digested yet. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the processing for the period only for opening is ended to shift to the normal business period, and the fluctuation suppressing process is started in the normal business period. In this fluctuation suppression processing, while the fluctuation display relating to the decorative symbol is being performed, "the acceptance of the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is permitted, and the change of these setting values is output state. It is possible to execute the process to reflect it as the volume of the volume of the lamp or the light intensity of the lamp for production, but the process of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is changed The difference from “the processing for the period dedicated to opening the store” is whether or not the variation display related to the decorative symbol is being performed, and the change of the setting value is reflected as the volume or the light amount. The content of suppression for various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, such a fluctuation during suppression process is changed to the non-playing state (the number of held is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). And as long as it is not migrated, it keeps running.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol fluctuation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol fluctuation of the fluctuation time is executed only once), and the non-gaming state at timing tr4 (If the number of reservations is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed immediately) (for example, 1 hour has not passed since the occurrence of the store-only period ended early) Even in the state immediately after the opening of the store, the special period (period for exclusive use of the store) is not generated again.

  That is, in this case, in the non-playing state after timing tr4, when a change in the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output. It will be controlled. In the normal business period when suppression processing during fluctuation is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as a volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the light intensity of the effect lamp for which the changed brightness setting value is also in the light emission state It is supposed to be reflected as In addition, in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (the screen at the time of standby) is displayed, and it can be recognized that the symbol is waiting for variation.

  A player who creates a situation such as "finish the game running state immediately after opening the store-dedicated period (special period) early" can not be convinced with the adjustment content made while the adjustment sound is not output, and it will be started once It is assumed that the person who desires to adjust the game more finely by interrupting the played game, it is assumed that the special period (period for opening the store only after opening even if one hour has not passed since the power was turned on) It is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound without regenerating.

  In the above example, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) for which the period for exclusive use for opening (special period) is continued may be a fixed time after the period for exclusive use for opening (special period) occurs. It may be the time until the specific process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is ended.

  Further, the timing at which the volume setting value and the luminance setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values” may be the timing tr1 or a predetermined timing before the timing tr1. .

  Further, in the above described example, there is a technical feature in the configuration related to the store-opening dedicated period (special period) that occurs after timing tr1, and the contents described above for the processing in the period before timing tr1. It may be realized as different processing.

  Further, in the above described example, at timing tr2, a change is not made to the decorative symbol or background image in the effect display device 1600, but a display change to the extent that an image different from the decorative symbol or background image is additionally displayed If it is, you may make it carry out.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be made recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. It is

  Further, in the above-described example, only one of the setting value of the volume and the brightness may be changeable.

[Control to be applied to the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the presentation importance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination being performed, any one of a plurality of expected effects (such as advance notice effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether to cause the expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the preliminary effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (such as preliminary effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol is executed together with the expectation effect (notice effect) applied to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body operation (feature effect). And as a result, when the change production by the decoration symbol is executed with the expectation production concerning the background depiction and the movable body movement etc as a result of being displayed stop by the big hit design, the big hit game as a privilege is executed to the player It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative symbol is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movable The expected effects relating to body movements and the like are to be provided as effects having “a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the big hit being obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets the setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) Will be performed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is different from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). There are buttons for adjusting brightness to various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness is operated, the brightness applied to various effect lamps A process of changing the setting value (brightness setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is thus changed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light quantity) It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or raised.

  In addition, about change acceptance about such a setting value (volume setting value, brightness setting value), and adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the condition does not change the symbol, and the symbol changes. Both in the present state and in the present state, it is possible to execute each operation by the player.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first hit determination corresponding to the reception of the game ball in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 In any of the cases where the second hit determination is performed according to the game ball being accepted, the symbol variation (the first symbol variation, the second symbol variation) is performed according to the hit determination. After that, a benefit (big hit game) advantageous to the player can be provided. However, the expectation value for those benefits is set so that the second hit determination (the second symbol change) is higher than the first hit determination (the first symbol change).

  In the example described above, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the large winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum is repeated eight times and only about 1000 gaming balls are paid out In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening and closing pattern of opening the large winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum for 16 seconds. ing.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of the change of the sound volume setting value is “waiting for a game start state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed”, The first side execution state in which the first symbol variation is executed and the second symbol variation is not executed, and "the first symbol variation is not executed and the second symbol variation is executed In any of the second side execution states, the numerical range in which the change of the sound volume setting value is permitted is the same.

  According to such a configuration, even in any state (game start waiting state, first side execution state, second side execution state), it is possible to adjust the sound without being restricted by the setting range etc. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain game interest through sound adjustment in accordance with each state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when in the "game start waiting state" and the "first side execution state" described above, the setting value (volume setting value) for the output sound volume of the effect sound is changed When this is done, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the above-mentioned "second side execution state", control is performed so as not to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed.

  That is, in the "game start waiting state", since the effect sound is not output because the game is not being executed, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed, the change is made. It is not possible to confirm the volume of the later volume as an audible sound. For this reason, when in the "game start waiting state", it is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the setting value (volume setting value) applied to the output volume of the effect sound is changed.

  Also, in the "first side execution state", although there is a situation in which the effect sound according to the first hit determination is being output, with this situation, the probability of getting a big hit is relatively low. It is often controlled to the state (low probability non-short game state), and there is not much expectation for the effect. In recent years, when in such a low expectation game state, it has been confirmed that a player plays while watching a portable device such as a smartphone. Therefore, when the sound volume setting value is changed in the "first side execution state", the sound volume adjustment confirmation sound is issued to reliably notify the player of the change and the size of the sound volume after the change. It is desirable to output the

  On the other hand, in the "second side execution state", there is a situation where the effect sound according to the second hit determination is being output, and the probability of getting a big hit is relatively high, the high probability gaming state (high probability time short gaming state It is often controlled by In such a situation, since there is a high degree of expectation to the effect, there is a tendency for volume adjustment to enjoy the effect, so when the volume setting value is changed, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output. The entertainingness of the game may be reduced by making it difficult for the effect sound and the BGM to be heard according to the second hit. Therefore, in the "second-side execution state", control is made so as not to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed, thereby making the effect sound and BGM and the like according to the second hit determination clear. It is desirable to preferably maintain the game entertainment by giving an opportunity to adjust the volume under an audible environment.

  However, in the “second-side running state”, the player is more likely to be changed to the big hit mode after the second symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the lost mode because the expectation for the effect is increasing. It can be said that securing time (aftertones) for making people aware of it is important for maintaining game interest. In this respect, if the normal processing when being in the "game start waiting state" is performed immediately after being shifted to the "game start waiting state", the processing according to the "second side execution state" is performed. The player side can easily detect that the game is ended in the lost mode and is in the state of being shifted to the “game start waiting state”, and there is a concern that the amusement of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, when the processing concerning the "second side execution state" is completed and it is shifted to the "game start wait state", a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the shift to the "game start wait state" Control is performed so that normal processing when in the “play start waiting state” (processing for allowing the change of the volume setting value and outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) is not performed It is desirable to do. For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state", "the change of the volume setting value is permitted, but the volume setting value is changed. It is desirable that the process of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the process of not allowing the change of the volume setting value itself or the like be performed. However, it is more likely that the “second side execution state” is still continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the “second side execution state” to the “game start waiting state”. In the same way as in the “second-side execution state”, “To allow change of the volume setting value, but do not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed” It is more desirable to do so.

  On the other hand, in the "first side execution state", the degree of expectation for the effect is not increased, and basically, the first symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the lost mode. Therefore, when the processing in the "first side execution state" is finished and the processing is shifted to the "game start waiting state", unlike the case of the "second side execution state" described above, the "first side execution" The above-mentioned normal processing (allowing the change of the sound volume setting value and processing to output the sound volume adjustment confirmation sound when the sound volume setting value is changed) which is also performed when being in the state is continued as it is It is desirable to

  By the way, in the condition controlled to the "first side execution state", a mischievous operation is performed such that the operation on a plurality of operation means is performed in a relatively short time due to the stress that the jackpot does not win easily Is concerned. That is, as a result of being subjected to rough handling, if an abnormality or failure occurs even in one of the operation means, operability and rendition will be significantly reduced, and a further reduction of the game entertainment can not be avoided.

  Therefore, not only when being controlled to the "game start waiting state", but also in a situation where it is controlled to the "first side execution state", there is a possibility that the operation detection has occurred due to a plurality of operation means and mischievous When the condition is high, the effect restriction period (functional restriction period) in the explanation example of “preventing mischief for plural operation means (see FIGS. 381 and 382)” may be generated.

That is, in this case, some operations predetermined among the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 in any of the "game start waiting state (non-playing state)" and the "first side execution state" When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword unit 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is triggered by the detection.
In the effect display device 1600, in a state where a specific moving image (warning moving image) that can not appear in a state where a game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (reproduced),
・ Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Effective period during which a penalty is imposed, such as that even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change in the brightness setting value for the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed either Control is performed to generate a period of time for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image in the effect display device 1600 will be displayed even if an image regarding the “first side execution state” has appeared before that. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and the operation related to the volume is permitted, and the volume is permitted. The adjustment confirmation sound is also output, the operation acceptance regarding the luminance is permitted, and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output. The normal state as the “game start waiting state” or the “first side execution state” Will be returned to

  In addition, about the detailed content regarding this production restriction period (function restriction period), another example, etc., it is possible to employ | adopt suitably each content in the description example of "the mischief prevention with respect to several operation means." However, in this case, the production restriction period (function restriction period) is not terminated early even if the game start waiting state is shifted to the “first side execution state” when it is in the production restriction period (function restriction period). Under the same conditions as in the "game start wait state", various processes relating to the effect restriction period will be continued. As a result, it is expected to suppress the mischief operation when being controlled to the "first side execution state" with a low degree of expectation.

  On the other hand, when being transferred from the “game start waiting state” to the “second side execution state” when in the effect restriction period (functional restriction period), the “effect restriction period (described above with reference to FIG. 382) A process according to the early termination of the function restriction period) or a modification thereof is appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere at the time when the "second side execution state" having a high degree of expectation is finally executed is maintained, and it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound not being allocated to the channel, Although a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it can not be confirmed which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be made recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility of being an expected effect sound suggesting an expected degree may occur, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. It is

  Further, in the above-described example, only one of the setting value of the volume and the brightness may be changeable.

[Periodical period for which operation acceptance is permitted (effective period) its own performance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to perform fluctuation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the big hit determination. When one fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a prepares a plurality of expected effects (announcement effects prepared corresponding to the type of the selected fluctuation pattern). And the like), it is possible to execute an effect determination (such as an advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (s) are to selectively appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (such as advance notice effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected fluctuation pattern may be executed sequentially, In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, thereby making the result of the big hit determination. The variation production by the corresponding decorative pattern is executed together with the expectation rendering (notice rendering) applied to the background depiction (background preview) and the movable body operation (feature presentation). And as a result, when the change production by the decoration symbol is executed with the expectation production concerning the background depiction and the movable body movement etc as a result of being displayed stop by the big hit design, the big hit game as a privilege is executed to the player It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative symbol is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction, movable body operation, etc. The expected effect is to be provided as a function having "a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) of the big hit being obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  And, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of performing the variation pattern determination, the first variation pattern is selected regardless of the result of the advance presentation determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect ("intrinsic reception effect" described later) in which the effect reception is permitted when the based symbol effect progresses to a specific timing. In addition, even when the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, the second variation pattern is selected. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect ("additional reception effect" described later) in which the effect reception is permitted when the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern of 2 has progressed to a predetermined timing. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the notice effect determination, an operation reception effect (effectively permitted to receive the effect even if the symbol effect based on the second variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing Period does not occur. A plurality of first variation patterns for generating "intrinsic reception effects" and a plurality of second variation patterns for generating "additional reception effects" may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared as "inherent reception effect" and "additional reception effect" can be sequentially generated.

  However, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions etc. is a predetermined change for the effect member that is the object of the effect, as long as the operation is detected within the effective period. Since the effect after the operation to generate at least one of the display change in the display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decoration is only performed, the operation reception effect (effective Period) It has become scarce in its own stage performance, and there is a concern about the decline in the amusement of the game until the stage after the operation is performed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
A first operation effect means capable of executing an effect after operation in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern comes when an operation by the player is detected;
-When the operation by the player is detected, an elapsed time from the detected timing is continued until a predetermined time value is reached. It is supposed to prepare.

  According to such a configuration, the operation reception effect (effective period) itself is performed when the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is executed and when the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means is executed. Because different renderings are provided, it is expected to improve the amusement of the game until the rendering after the operation is performed.

  That is, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the effect after operation is executed up to a predetermined timing regardless of which of the early period and the late period within the effective period is operated. Therefore, it can be said that performing the operation immediately after the effective period occurs is advantageous for enjoying the effect by maintaining the execution state as the effect after the operation for a long time.

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the effective period, the elapsed time from the operation timing is continued until it reaches a predetermined time value. Post-operation presentation is performed. Therefore, to operate at a late time without operating for a while after the effective period has occurred, keep the overall rendering time as a whole from the start of the effective period to the end of the post-operation effect being maintained It can be said that it is advantageous to enjoy the production.

  In this case, the effect generation conditions of the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means are different. For example, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the first change pattern is selected as a result of the change pattern determination, and the symbol effect (rendering pattern) based on the first change pattern progresses to a specific timing In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the second change pattern is selected as a result of the change pattern determination and the notice effect determination corresponding to the second change pattern is performed. It is possible to obtain a special result and to realize it as what occurs when the pattern effect (rendering pattern) based on the second variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is generated when the first fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination and the pattern effect based on the first fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the first change pattern is selected as a result of the change pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first change pattern is different from the specific timing It may be realized as it occurs when the timing has progressed.

  FIG. 385 shows that the post-operation effect is executed in a form which is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the effective period to the detection It is a time chart which shows the example about operation receptionist production.

  Now, assuming that the symbol rendering (rendering pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr1 while the first rendering condition required for the generation of the "first operation receiving rendering permitted to receive rendering receiving" is satisfied, A first operation reception effect (effective period) is generated based on progressing to the timing tr1. The first operation reception effect (effective period) is ended without executing the post-operation effect when the timing tr3 when a predetermined set time has elapsed without the effect reception being made. During the execution period of the first operation reception effect for which the effect reception is permitted, the image display over the operation means to be operated and the gauge display of how long the effective time is left are performed to prompt the player to operate Operation promotion presentation is performed.

  When the first operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception permission sound indicating that the effect reception is permitted (or that the effect reception is permitted) is output. . However, although it will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptance allowable sound for the above-mentioned predetermined setting time, and the above-mentioned predetermined setting time has not been passed yet At a certain timing tr2, it is put in a non-output state so as not to be audible.

  Here, "the acceptance acceptable sound is output" means that "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at timing tr1, and the channel is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept also including making "the reproduction | regeneration period of a reception allowance sound" in the sound data which has become according to timing tr1. Alternatively, the "acceptable tone" may be output before and after the timing tr1 so as to cross the timing tr1. In addition, “to make the non-output state” in this case cancels the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel, and the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. However, it is a concept including the transition to a period in which the “reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound” in the sound data is ended and the subsequent sounds (including silent data) are reproduced.

  And as described above, in such a first operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" as an effect after operation based on the detection of the operation by the player and the effect reception being made With regard to the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the first effect member) started in this way, although it is started, it is based on the fluctuation pattern even when the effect reception is made at any timing within the effective period. It is made to end when a predetermined timing tr4 in the symbol effect (rendering pattern) comes. In addition, as the "operation-induced process using the first effect member", for example, it is possible to execute as a process for effecting the first decorative movable body based on the fact that the effect reception has been performed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 385, assuming that the effect is accepted at a relatively early timing tr1a within the effective period (timing tr1 to tr3), the effect after operation (operation-based process using the first effect member) is It is performed over a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 385, if the effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr2a within the effective period (timing tr1 to tr3), the effect after operation (operation-based process using the first effect member) Will be executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

  According to such a first operation reception effect, it is possible to operate immediately after the effective period occurs, as an execution state as an effect after operation (execution state of operation-based processing using the first effect member) Can be maintained for a long time, which is advantageous for enjoying the effects, etc.

  Although described later, in the first operation reception effect, the effect reception is performed when the reception permission sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect reception. Even in this case, the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr2.

  FIG. 386 is a time chart showing an example of the second operation reception effect in which the effect after operation is performed in a manner continued until the elapsed time from the detected timing reaches a predetermined time value.

  Now, assuming that the symbol rendering (rendering pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr11 while the second rendering condition required for the generation of the “second operation receiving rendering permitted to receive rendering receiving” is satisfied, A second operation reception effect (effective period) is generated based on progressing to the timing tr11. Also in the second operation reception effect (effective period), similarly to the case of the first operation reception effect, when the timing tr13 when a predetermined set time has elapsed without the effect reception being made, the effect after operation is not executed. It is supposed to end. Time values different from the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Even during the execution period of the second operation reception effect where the effect reception is permitted, the image display over the operation means to be operated and the gauge display of how long the effective time is left are performed to urge the player to operate Operation promotion presentation is performed.

  Even when the second operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception permission sound is output that indicates that the effect reception is allowed (or the effect reception is allowed). Ru. However, although it will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptance permission sound for the above predetermined set time, and the middle stage in which the predetermined set time is not yet elapsed At timing tr12, which is a non-output state, it is made inaudible.

  In addition to the new assignment of “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel at timing tr11, “the acceptance acceptable sound is output here” has already been assigned to the channel. It is a concept that also includes “the reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound” in the sound data being sent in accordance with the timing tr11. Alternatively, the "acceptable sound" may be output before and after the timing tr11 so as to span the timing tr11. In addition to canceling the assignment of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel in "no output" here, the assignment of the sound data to the channel is maintained. Also, the term "playback period of acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is a concept including ending to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played back.

  And as described above, in such a second operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using a second effect member" as an effect after operation based on the detection of the operation by the player and the effect reception being made For the post-operation effect (operation-based processing using the second effect member) started in this way, although it is started, even if the effect reception is made at any timing within the effective period, the effect reception is It is made to continue until the elapsed time from being done reaches a predetermined time value (for example, setting time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined setting time as an effective period). In addition, as the "operation-induced process using the second effect member", for example, it is possible to execute as a process for effecting the second decorative movable body based on the fact that the effect reception has been made.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 386, assuming that the effect is accepted at relatively early timing tr11a within the effective period (timing tr11 to tr13), the effect after operation (operation-based process using the second effect member) is It is executed from the timing tr11a to a timing tr14 when a predetermined time value has elapsed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 386, assuming that the effect is accepted at relatively late timing tr12a within the effective period (timing tr11 to tr13), the effect after operation (operation-induced process using the second effect member) Is executed from the timing tr12a to a timing tr15 (a timing arriving later than the timing tr14) when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

  According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate at a late time without operating for a while after the effective period occurs, until the effect after operation is ended after the effective period is started Thus, it is possible to provide such an effect that it is advantageous for maintaining the presentation time as a whole for a long time and enjoying the presentation.

  Although described later, also in the second operation reception effect, the effect reception is made when the reception permission sound is in the output state, and the effect after operation (the operation-based process using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. Even when it is executed, the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr12.

  As described with reference to FIG. 385 and FIG. 386, the first and second operation reception effects (effective period) are provided with different renditions themselves, and the operation reception effects (effective period) are mutually different effects By generating the event based on the satisfaction of the condition, it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (effective period) to the post-operation effect.

  However, only by adopting the configuration according to the first and second operation reception effects (effective period), the following problems remain. That is, in these operation reception effects (effective period), it is advantageous to enjoy the effect if it is operated earlier in the effective period, or it is advantageous to operate it at a later time within the effective period to enjoy the effect Since a preferable operation timing for enjoying effects is determined, such as being present, there are still aspects in which the effect in the effective period is scarce, and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, it is more preferable to execute the operation reception effect as the special operation reception effect having the aspect described below.

FIG. 387 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, if it is assumed that the symbol effect (rendering pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr21 while the special rendering condition required for the generation of the special operation reception effect is satisfied, the special effect based on the progress to the timing tr21 Generate an operation reception effect (effective period). Although this special operation reception effect (effective period) will be described later, different from the first and second operation reception effects, a predetermined set time has elapsed and timing tr23 comes with no effect reception being made. There is no such thing, and even if there is no operation, the effect reception always occurs within the effective period, and the effect is performed after the operation described later. Although this will also be described later, as the predetermined set time in the special operation reception effect, a time value longer than the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect or the predetermined setting time in the second operation reception effect is set.

  In addition, even when the special operation reception effect (effective period) is started, the reception permission sound that indicates that the effect reception is permitted (or the effect reception is permitted) is output. Be done. However, although it will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment generates a reception permission sound (FIG. 387) in response to the first and second operation reception effects (FIG. 385, FIG. 386). The output state is allowed to continue for a longer period of time. In this example of the explanation, the acceptance permissible sound shown in FIG. 387 is also made in a non-output state and inaudible at timing tr22 which is a stage where the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. However, the acceptance permission sound shown in FIG. 387 may be such that the output state can be continued until timing tr23 arrives.

  In addition to the new assignment of "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel at timing tr21, "the acceptance acceptable sound is output here" is already in the assigned state for the channel. It is a concept that also includes “the reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound” in the sound data being received in time with the timing tr21. Alternatively, the "acceptable sound" may be output before and after the timing tr21 so as to span the timing tr21. In addition to canceling the assignment of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel in "no output" here, the assignment of the sound data to the channel is maintained. Also, the term "playback period of acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is a concept including ending to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played back.

  In this respect, in the special operation reception effect, when the operation by the player is detected within the effective period and the effect reception is made, the “first movable shown in FIG. 385 is based on the fact that the effect reception is made. Operation-based processing using a decorative body (first effect member) and "operation-based processing using a second movable decorative body (second effect member)" shown in FIG. 386 are started in parallel with each other It has become. Therefore, although "operation-based processing using the first effect member" is started, "operation-based processing using the first effect member" started in this way is performed at any timing within the effective period thereof. Even when the effect reception is made, it will be ended when the predetermined timing tr24 in the symbol effect (rendering pattern) based on the variation pattern comes, “Operation using the second effect member” With regard to the “operation-induced process using the second effect member” started in this manner, although the “cause process” is started, even when the effect reception is made at any timing within the effective period, the effect reception is received. Continue until the elapsed time from the time when the event occurs is reached to a predetermined time value (for example, a setting time longer than the predetermined setting time as the valid period). To become.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 387, assuming that the effect is accepted at a relatively early timing tr21a within the effective period (timing tr21 to tr23), “Operation due to operation using the first effect member” of the effects after operation among the effects after operation Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24, but in the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” in the post-operation presentation, the time value predetermined from the timing tr21a is It ends at the timing tr25 which has passed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 387, assuming that the effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr22a within the effective period (timing tr21 to tr23), “after operation due to the operation using the first effect member” "Processing" is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24, but "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" in the post-operation presentation is predetermined from the timing tr22a It will be performed to the timing tr26 (the timing which comes after the timing tr25) which the time value passed.

  As described above, the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment is generated when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When the effect is received within the special operation reception effect (effective period), the first effect member continues the execution state until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. The operation-based process is performed, and the operation-based process using the second effect member is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value.

  According to such a special operation reception effect, it is possible to maintain a long execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" in the post-operation effect by operating immediately after the effective period occurs. As a price to be compensated, the end timing of the “operation-induced process using the second effect member” in the post-operation effect comes relatively early. Yes, if you operate at a late time without operating for a while after the effective period has occurred, the end timing of "operation-based processing using the second effect member" in the post-operation production is this Although it can be made to arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a demerit that it will not be possible to maintain long the execution state of "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" in the post-operation effect.

That is, in the special operation reception effect, there is no such thing as the most desirable operation timing to enliven the effect,
-In exchange for shortening the time until the operation-based processing using the second effect member is ended, the execution state of the "operation-based processing using the first effect member" is extended to enjoy this (Do you operate early in the validity period), or,
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of "operation-based processing using the first effect member", extend the time until the "operation-based processing using the second effect member" is ended and enjoy this (Do you operate late in the effective period?), Or
-The time for which the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is maintained as an execution state and the time until the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" is ended are sacrificed little by little, Do you want to balance as (do you operate with no timing as soon as possible within the effective period)
The special operation reception effect itself can be made to have a strategic operation effect such as this, thereby providing an operation reception effect that is hard to occur in which the operation timing can be selected according to the player's mood You will be able to

  Although it will be described later, in the special operation acceptance effect, when the effect acceptance is made when the acceptance allowable sound is in the output state, the effect after operation (the operation-induced process using the first effect member, based on the effect acceptance, While the operation origination process using a 2nd presentation member is performed, the output state of a acceptance | permission acceptance sound is cancelled | released at this time.

  Here, in the above-described example, when the effect is received within the special operation reception effect (FIG. 387), “the first effect member continues the execution state until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. It is decided to execute the operation-based process used and the operation-based process using the second effect member which continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value. . However, even when the special operation reception effect is generated, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied (for example, the case in which the big hit judgment has failed or the case in which the predetermined effect judgment has failed) Even if the effect is accepted within the special operation acceptance effect, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” is not performed, and this is compared with the case where the predetermined effect condition is satisfied (FIG. 387). It is more desirable that “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” in which “predetermined time value” is set relatively short be performed in different effect modes.

  According to such a configuration, even when the special operation reception effect is generated, “when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied,“ the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Operation-induced processing using the first effect member performed, and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value" Since it falls into the same effect content as the operation reception effect (the first and second operation reception effect) which is executed only one of them, the tension when the special operation reception effect occurs by giving such an effect risk It becomes possible to maintain the feeling suitably. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, "the operation-based process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "from the timing when the effect is received. The first operation reception effect or the second operation is performed when the post-operation effect is performed in parallel with the operation-based process using the second effect member continued until the elapsed time of the time reaches a predetermined time value. It is desirable that the ratio of the jackpot symbol appearing is higher than when the effect after operation appears in the reception effect.

  However, even though the special operation reception effect is performed, this may not be detected well (detection error) and the effect reception may not be performed, and as a result, the effective period ends without the effect reception being performed. If there is such a thing, the player who saw the situation that the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is not performed even though the operation is performed is misidentified as having fallen to an operation reception effect in which only one operation is performed And there is concern that the game interest will decline. Therefore, for the special operation reception effect, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the operation acceptance is automatically generated (automatically received) within the effective period, and “predetermined in the effect pattern” Operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until the reached timing comes, and "the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches the predetermined time value." It is desirable that “operation-based processing using 2 rendering members” be performed respectively. The method for automatically generating the operation reception (automatic reception) and the effect mode related thereto may be any of the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300, or an appropriate combination, and the contents of the description It is possible to use

  In the above-described explanatory example, upon generation of the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, the acceptance permission sound is output which suggests that the effect reception has been permitted. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 385 to FIG. 387, the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is an acceptance permission sound that is output when the special operation reception effect is generated. It is assumed that the reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the acceptance acceptable sound output at the time of generation of the effect.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception becomes acceptable (when the image display over the operation means to be operated and the gauge display indicating how long the effective time remains) The operation reception effect is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, by confirming how long the reception-acceptable sound from the output state to the output state continues. The operation causing process using the effect member and the operation causing process using the second effect member which continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value are executed. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not the special operation reception effect. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time that can maintain the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" in the execution state (delaying the timing at which the effect reception is made). Thus, when it is recognized whether or not the operation reception effect is "special operation reception effect", there is a disadvantage that the effective strategicity that can be selected by the player is narrowed.

  However, even when it is recognized whether or not the special operation reception effect is made, it is important to be able to leave the effective strategicity to some extent. Therefore, the output time (at the timings tr1 to tr2 and tr11 to tr12) of the acceptance allowable sound to be output when the first operation acceptance effect or the second operation acceptance effect is generated is “specified as the special operation acceptance effect (effective period) It is desirable to carry out as what will be made into a non-output state when a specific time which is less than half of the set time (timing tr21 to tr23) of "" has elapsed. According to such a configuration, when the specific time less than half of the “predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation reception effect (effective period)” has passed, the acceptance acceptable sound is not output. If the output state is maintained, it will be possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed, so that “a predetermined set time as a special operation reception effect (effective period) It is possible to provide dramatic strategicity in a state in which half or more of the timing tr21 to tr23) is left.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance permission sound output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated is subjected to effect reception when in the output state. Even though the output state is maintained, the acceptance permission sound output upon generation of the special operation reception effect is forced to terminate the output state when the effect is received when the output state is in the output state. I have to. That is, in this case, when the effect reception is made in a situation where the special operation reception effect is not recognized (a situation where the above-mentioned specific time has not elapsed since the reception acceptable sound is output), the operation reception effect is performed. It becomes an important concern whether the “special operation reception effect” and the aspect with higher expectation appeared as the post operation operation, but one of them (the operation reception effect is “special operation reception effect” It can be easily recognized only by confirming whether or not the output state of the acceptance allowable sound is ended with the effect acceptance as the opportunity. For example, even if it is recognized that the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is not generated as a result of the output state of the acceptance permission sound being not ended, the feeling is switched to "more expect as the operation after operation It will be expected to concentrate on "whether the high aspect has appeared". In this case, “if the aspect with higher expectation appears as the effect after the operation, the effect is designed to have a relationship such that the rate at which the special operation reception effect newly occurs is high until the symbol is stopped. Is desirable.

  Also, as described above, in the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, the image display over the operation means used as the operation target in each operation reception effect, and the effective time A gauge display indicating whether it remains or not is displayed, and an operation promoting effect for urging the player to perform an operation is performed. In this point, at least in the special operation reception effect, when the effect is received, the gauge display is left (displayed), “The execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. The operation-based process using the effect member and the operation-based process using the second effect member which continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value are respectively started. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it can be recognized after receipt of the effect based on the remaining amount of gauge remaining as display whether the timing at which the effect reception was made is within the effective period. This makes it possible to predict, for example, whether or not the execution state related to the operation-based process using the first effect member is immediately terminated. In addition, as a method of starting the effect after operation while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, using any one of the examples described with reference to FIG. 292 to FIG. 296 or an appropriate combination may be used. It is possible.

  In the special operation reception effect, if it is possible to operate immediately after the special operation reception effect occurs by executing the operation related display (precursor effect) that suggests the occurrence before the effect reception is permitted. It is desirable to do so. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player preferably enjoys strategic strategicity over the entire period within the special operation reception effect (effective period). On the other hand, even in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute the operation related display (indicative effect) that suggests the occurrence before the effect reception is permitted. The operation-related display may be executed as "a short-term precursory effect inferior to the timing indication function", as compared with the case where the special operation reception effect with a high degree of expectation occurs. It is desirable in order not to have it.

  Here, as an operation-related display (a precursory effect of a short time with a poor timing suggestion function) performed on the effect display device 1600 prior to the occurrence of the effective period of the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect, For example, it is possible to realize as an image displayed in a fade-in state (such as a white image) when "displaying an image looking over the operation means" appears in a fade-in mode.

  FIG. 388 is a time chart showing an example of processing relating to operation related display when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are performed, and processing regarding channel assignment of sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound. is there.

  That is, ergonomically, only by displaying the suggested image (operation related display) from several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the occurrence of the effective period, the effective period occurs. It is known that it becomes possible to operate so that presentation reception can be made at a time when it is not. However, even though it is several frames, it is possible to display "image display over the operation means" in the normal mode even though the effective period has not occurred. There is a possibility that a situation where the effect reception is not made even though the operation is performed in a state where the image display “foreseeing” is displayed, may cause a decrease in the game entertainment.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 388, a timing trA several frames ahead of the occurrence of the effective period of the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect comes The operation related display is started based on the above, but in the situation where the effective period has not occurred, "image display over the operation means" is not displayed in the normal mode.

  More specifically, at timing trA, “permissive” which can be realized as a fade-in image in which “image display over the operation means” is displayed in a fade-in mode, a predetermined effect image, etc. Start “pre-operation related display”. And when the above-mentioned timing tr1 (or timing tr11) comes in the state that "pre-permission operation related display" is displayed in this way, "the image which looks over the operation means from the state where" pre-permission operation related display "is displayed The state is shifted to the state in which “display” is displayed in the normal mode.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when the effective period occurs, the acceptance permission sound indicating that the effect reception is permitted is output. As shown in FIG. 388, the acceptance permission sound is not started to be output at timing trA, but is started to be output at the timing tr1 (or timing tr11).

  That is, in order to make it possible to operate so that the effect reception is made at the timing when the effective period has just occurred, the acceptance acceptable sound is also output from several frames before the effective period occurs. It seems that it is not desirable to make it However, when the acceptance acceptable sound is output from several frames before the effective period occurs, the output timing is shifted with respect to the appearance timing of "image display over the operation means". As a result, this may give a sense of discomfort as if a sound shift has occurred, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline. On the other hand, it is also possible to output a pre-acceptance operation related sound different from the acceptance acceptable sound in the period of the timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11). However, when the preliminary operation related sound is output in such a short period of time, the preliminary operation related sound may not be an independent performance sound but may be integrated with the reception allowable sound. In the end, there is a concern that a sense of incongruity may be produced as if a sound shift has occurred.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, several frames of the operation related display (pre-permitted operation related display) are displayed prior to the occurrence of the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect. On the other hand, the operation related sound (pre-permission operation related sound) is not executed intentionally, and only the acceptance acceptable sound is output when the effective period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 388, based on the arrival of the timing tr1, the "acceptance sound is included in sound data" is assigned to the channel to output the acceptance sound.

  In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 comes, the assignment of the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel is ended, so that the acceptance acceptable sound is in the non-output state. There is. However, the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” itself may continue the assignment state to the channel after the timing tr2, for example, the assignment state to the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. You may That is, in this case, the sound data itself is kept assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is ended at timing tr2.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 388, when the effect reception is performed between the timing tr1 to tr2 (the timing tr11 to tr12), the state in which the effect reception is permitted is ended and “image display over the operation means is performed. Hide "". On the other hand, as for "sound data including acceptance acceptable sound", the assignment state to the channel is maintained, and the acceptance acceptable sound is not forcibly terminated halfway as described above.

  FIG. 389 is a time chart showing an example of processing relating to operation related display when special operation reception effect is performed, and processing relating to channel assignment of sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound.

  As shown in FIG. 389, also in the special operation reception effect, operation related display (pre-permission operation related display) is performed from the timing trB before the timing tr21 at which the effective period occurs. However, the “period of timing trB to tr21” has a length more than twice (more preferably 10 times) the “period of timing trA to tr1” shown in FIG. In the pre-permission operation related display displayed within, “Expected degree as to whether post-operation effect performed when effect is received is performed in a mode with high expected degree” or “expected degree that the big hit symbol appears” As suggested, any of a plurality of presentation modes can be selectively made to appear. In addition, in the situation where the effective period has not occurred, the point that “image display over the operation means” is not displayed in the normal mode is the same as the example shown in FIG. 388.

  For example, in the “pre-permission operation related display” started at timing trB, the content is different from the “pre-permission operation related display” shown in FIG. 388, and “image display over the operation means” is followed ( A plurality of effect images are repeatedly moved and displayed toward the portion displayed at the timing tr21), and the aura effect with storyliness is slightly described such as making it non-displayed at the portion (see FIGS. 241 to 259) Any aspect of “specific operation related rendering” may be applied). At this time, any of a plurality of modes can be displayed as an effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested by which one of the modes is displayed. Then, when the timing tr21 comes in the state where the "pre-permission operation related display" is displayed in this way, the "image display over the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode from the "pre-permission operation related display" display It will be transferred to the state to be displayed.

  In this respect, also in the special operation reception effect, as described above, when the effective period occurs, the reception permission sound is output to indicate that the effect reception has been permitted, but this reception permission is allowed. As to the sound, as shown in FIG. 389, it is output from the timing tr21 as an effect sound reproduced in a partial section in the sound data allocated to the channel at the timing trB.

  That is, as described above, the special operation reception effects are significantly larger than the "minimum time required for ergonomically enabling operation immediately after the effective period occurs" before the effective period occurs. The “pre-acceptance operation display” with high performance is performed using a long time (timing trB to tr21). Therefore, in order to further improve the rendering in such a rendering period (timing trB to tr21), the rendering sound (pre-acceptance operation related sound) matching the "pre-permission operation related display" displayed in the same period is output It is desirable to make it In addition, since the rendering period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for rendering, even if the rendering sound (pre-permission operation related sound) is output within the period, acceptance acceptance is allowed The inconvenience that can be heard as a sound integrated with the sound can not occur.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, the effect display related to pre-permission operation is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the operation related sound prior to acceptance is output, and these output states are displayed as timing tr21. It is made to continue until Then, when the timing tr21 arrives, the "pre-permission operation related display" is displayed, and the "image display with the operating means turned over" is displayed in the normal mode, and the "pre-permission operation related" It is made to shift from the state where the sound is output to the state where the acceptance acceptance sound is output.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 389, based on the arrival of the timing trB, one sound data including the reproduction section of the "pre-permission operation related sound" and the reproduction section of the "acceptable sound" is used as a channel. The above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 is realized by allocating to the above.

  According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, a part of the sound data allocated to the channel in the form extending from the omen effect to the special operation reception effect for the acceptance allowable sound output when the effective period occurs It will be output as an effect sound to be reproduced in a period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is allocated to the channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (such as when the anticipation effect occurs), and the first half is an effect according to the anticipation effect (pre-permission operation related display) As well as it becomes possible to suggest the timing when the special operation reception effect occurs by the flow of sound (pre-permission operation related sound), after the effective period has occurred, the channel assignment is made based on the effect reception. Since the cancellation can be appropriately performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception is made. In addition, as an output method according to "one sound data" including the reproduction section of "pre-permission operation related sound" and the reproduction section of "acceptable sound", an expectation (when symbol variation is stopped first) Prepare a plurality of sound data different in the ratio of big hit design) to any one of the sound data (one sound data) as the result of big hit judgment (or presentation judgment (such as notice judgment)) It is desirable to realize the above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 by selectively assigning to the channel based on the basis. In this case, the same effect sound is output to the plurality of sound data in the reproduction section of "pre-permission operation related sound (precursor effect effect)", but is different in the reproduction section of "acceptance sound (operation acceptance effect)" It is more desirable that the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output the effect sound be included.

  That is, in the special operation reception effect, when the effect reception is made between the timing tr21 to tr22, the state in which the effect reception is permitted is ended and "image display over the operation means" is not displayed. In addition to this, the assignment state to the channel is ended also for "sound data including acceptance acceptable sound", and the output concerning the acceptance acceptable sound is forced to be terminated halfway through that. It is as having mentioned above. Therefore, it is confirmed by the player that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception is made by confirming whether the reception permission sound is forced to be in the non-output state when the effect reception is made. Will be able to make

  In addition, even in one sound data (timing trB to tr22), the section (first half part) of the effect sound (pre-permission operation related sound) corresponding to the omen effect (pre-permission operation related display) is in the reproduction state In a certain situation (timing trB to tr21), even if an operation is performed by the player, this is not forcibly terminated. The allocation state to the channel is canceled based on the operation by the player only in a situation (timing tr21 to tr22) in which the section (second half part) of the effect sound (acceptable sound) corresponding to the effective period is in the reproduction state It becomes.

  The one sound data (sound data including the operation-related sound before acceptance and the acceptance acceptable sound) is allocated prior to the timing trB, and has already been allocated at the timing trB. It is also good. As described above, the assignment state to the channel may be continued after the timing tr22. For example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is kept assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is ended at the timing tr22.

  In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 comes, the assignment of the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel is ended, so that the acceptance acceptable sound is in the non-output state. There is. However, the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” itself may continue the assignment state to the channel after the timing tr2, for example, the assignment state to the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. You may That is, in this case, the sound data itself is kept assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance acceptable sound" in the sound data is ended at timing tr2.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 385 to FIG. 389, “a plurality of acceptance acceptable sounds having different lengths for maintaining the output state” is prepared as an acceptance acceptable sound accompanying the occurrence of the operation acceptance effect, and the effect acceptance is performed. A different acceptance allowable sound is generated between the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect) having different effects after the operation. Therefore, if it is checked how much the output state of the acceptance sound is continued, there is a disadvantage that the above-mentioned dramatic strategic nature is narrowed, but the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or 2) It becomes possible to recognize which one of the operation reception effect is being generated.

  Moreover, the first acceptance permission sound (special operation acceptance effect) whose output state is terminated when the operation by the player is accepted as an opportunity is continued to the plurality of acceptance sound, and the output state continues And a second acceptable sound (first and second operation reception effects) to be included. Therefore, when the user is operated so that the effect is accepted while the acceptance acceptable sound is in the output state, the special operation acceptance is performed by confirming whether the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is ended when the effect is accepted It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) has occurred.

  However, the acceptance acceptable sound is originally to be in the non-output state when the effective period is ended, and the output state is maintained when the post-operation effect is started If there is, it may be an obstacle to the production. In this respect, in the above description example, the reception effect sound whose output state is ended when the effect reception is made, the first acceptance permission sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long ( It is used as a special operation reception effect).

  That is, in this case, when the effect is accepted in the output state of "the second acceptance acceptable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively shortened", the output state is maintained. However, since the time setting value at which the output state is maintained is originally short, the second acceptance allowable sound is soon to be in the non-output state, and it can be said that it is unlikely to interfere with the effect. On the other hand, when the effect is accepted in the output state of "the first acceptance acceptable sound on the side where the time setting value at which the output state is maintained is relatively long", the original time setting at which the output state is maintained Even if the value remains, the output state is terminated, so it does not interfere with the presentation.

  In addition, it is recognized which of the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) is generated by confirming how long the output state of the reception permission sound is continued. Even if there is a player trying, if the output state of the acceptance sound is maintained when the time setting value for the second acceptance sound has passed, the first acceptance sound is not the second acceptance sound. It is possible to predict that the situation is being output. In this point, even if it is confirmed that the output state of the first acceptance acceptable sound is not ended, by confirming that the first acceptance acceptable sound is in the non-output state when the effect acceptance is generated, It becomes possible to confirm early whether the prediction that special operation reception staging is occurring is correct.

  Further, in the configurations shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, when the effective period of the operation reception effect occurs, an unauthorized operation related display indicating that the effective period is about to occur soon will be displayed. The operation related display includes a first display of pre-permission operation related display (see FIG. 388) and a second display of non-permitted operation related display (see FIG. 389). In this respect, when the first pre-permission operation related display with a short display time is performed, the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" is not assigned to the channel, and the "period of occurrence" is generated. By assigning the sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound to the channel, the acceptance acceptable sound is output. That is, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the first before-permission operation related display is not output, but the operation from the time of occurrence of the effective period may be urged without causing the uncomfortable feeling as if the sound shift occurred. become able to.

  On the other hand, when the second pre-acceptance operation related display having a long display time is performed, the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" is sent to the channel from when the second pre-permission operation related display is performed. In the state of assignment, the reproduction period of the acceptance sound comes in accordance with the timing at which the effective period occurs, so that the acceptance sound is output. According to such a configuration, the first half portion is a precursor effect (pre-permission operation related display) by only allocating one sound data to the channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (such as when the precursor effect occurs). It is possible to suggest the timing for the special operation reception effect to occur by the flow of the effect sound (pre-permission operation related sound) according to the event, and after the effective period has occurred, based on the effect reception Since the channel assignment can be canceled as appropriate, the player can be made to recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception is made.

  That is, in the pre-permission operation related display shown in FIG. 389, the corresponding pre-permission operation related sound is output and the acceptance acceptable sound is further output at the occurrence of the valid period, but the pre-operation operation related shown in FIG. In the display, the corresponding pre-acceptance operation related sound is not output and the acceptance allowable sound is output when the valid period occurs.

  In addition, in the above-described example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, as the “effect member”, the effect display device 1600, a speaker, a effect lamp, a movable decorative body or the like can be used. Further, as the "first effect member", any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body can be adopted, and as the "second effect member", It is possible to employ any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body, which is different from the “first effect member”.

  Further, in the above-described example, the operation means to be operated may not necessarily be the same or different between the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect). When the operation means to be operated is different, the overhead image displayed in each valid period is different.

  In the first operation reception effect, "the operation-induced process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" is performed as the effect after operation, but “Operation-based processing using a first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives The “operation-induced process using the second effect member” may be performed as an effect after operation. Furthermore, an operation-based process using effect members different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed, but any operation after the operation according to the first operation reception effect may be performed. The origination process is also executed as the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives.

  In the second operation reception effect, performing “operation-induced processing using a second effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value” as post-operation effect However, “the operation-based process using the first effect member continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value” and “the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives The “operation-induced process using the second effect member” of which the execution state is continued until the time may be performed as an effect after operation. Furthermore, an operation-based process using effect members different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed, but any operation after the operation according to the second operation reception effect may be performed. The cause process is also executed as continuing until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value.

  In the special operation reception effect, "the operation-based process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received" "Operation-induced processing using the second effect member continued until reaching a defined time value" is performed as effect after operation, but the effect member is different from the first effect member and the second effect member The operation-based process used may be further executed. In the special operation reception effect, an operation-based process that is executed assuming that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and an elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received is predetermined Any operation-based process may be used as long as the process is continued until the value is reached.

  In addition, in the above described example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, the effective period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the effective period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) I am trying to By setting such a long time, it is possible to enjoy the effective period with the above-mentioned dramatic strategy.

  In the first before-permission operation related display with a short display time (see FIG. 388), “Expected degree as to whether the effect after operation performed when the effect is received is performed in a high expectation mode” or “big hit” There is no indication that "the degree of expectation that the pattern appears", but in the second pre-acceptance operation related display (see Fig. 389) where the display time is long, the degree of expectation after the operation performed when the effect is accepted is expected. It is desirable to be able to suggest an "expected degree" as to whether it is performed in a high aspect of "or an expected degree that a big hit symbol appears".

  In the “effective period of special operation reception effects” set as a relatively long time value, “after the operation performed when the effect reception is made by displaying any of a plurality of display modes having different degrees of expectation” It is desirable to be able to indicate the degree of expectation as to whether the rendition is performed in a highly expected manner or the degree of expectation with which the jackpot symbol appears.

  In addition, in the special operation reception effect, "at any time in the effective period when the effect reception is made," the effect by the first effect member generated due to the effect reception "is" attributable to the effect reception " In order to cause the player to recognize that the same effect content as the effect after the operation is to have the relationship in which the execution state is terminated earlier than the “effect by the second effect member that occurs”. desirable.

  In the above-described example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, the pachinko machine 1 can generate the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect based on the establishment of different effect conditions. However, the first operation reception effect does not occur as non-loading, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not be generated as non-loading, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect do not occur as they are not mounted, and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. .

  The special operation reception effect shown in the above described example shown in FIG. 385 to FIG. 389 is outputting the specific effect sound data (for example, effect sound data of BGM) assigned to the channel in the suppression mode or silence. Among them, a state in which the effect reception is permitted may be generated.

[More detailed performance about the acceptance sound]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to perform fluctuation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the big hit determination. Then, when one fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (for example, a notice effect) prepared corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (such as advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (such as advance notice effect) is to selectively appear. In addition, depending on the result of this effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (such as advance notice effects) prepared corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern may be sequentially performed, or a plurality of It is possible that none of the expected effects (such as the advance effect effect) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol is executed together with the expectation effect (notice effect) applied to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body operation (feature effect). And as a result, when the change production by the decoration symbol is executed with the expectation production concerning the background depiction and the movable body movement etc as a result of being displayed stop by the big hit design, the big hit game as a privilege is executed to the player It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative symbol is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction, movable body operation, etc. The expected effect is to be provided as a function having "a function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) of the big hit being obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) developed as SP reach (such as reach effect accompanied by background change) as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, If a variation pattern of is selected, even if any result is obtained as an effect determination (such as an advance notice determination), if the pattern effect based on the particular variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the effect is accepted It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (effective period) in which is permitted. However, although it will be described later, the acceptance allowable sound outputted upon the occurrence of the operation acceptance effect is such that the form is different according to the result of the effect determination, whereby the effect after the operation is executed in the aspect with high expectation It is intended to indicate the rate of being played or the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected among the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination being performed. Even when there is a special result obtained by the effect determination (for example, advance notice determination) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, if the symbol effect based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the operation for which the effect acceptance is permitted It is possible to generate a reception effect (effective period). However, if a predetermined change pattern is selected, no special result is obtained in the effect determination. Even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined change pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing, the operation reception effect (effective period) does not occur. .

  In addition to the above “specific variation pattern”, the variation pattern for generating an operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach even if any result is obtained as the preliminary effect determination is made. May also be provided. However, the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expectation change pattern (non-reach change pattern) even if any result is obtained as the preliminary effect determination. It is desirable to make sure that the selection rate is low.

  By the way, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions etc. is predetermined for the effect member to be the effect object, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). The operation is performed only after the operation to generate the change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body). Receptionist production (effective period) The production performance itself is poor, and there is a concern about the decline in the game entertainment after the production is performed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
・ During the execution period of the symbol effect (rendering pattern) based on the low expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), “BGM reproduction (rendering sound of a specific type)” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) is in non-suppression mode Among the being output, the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) is given during the execution period of the symbol presentation (rendering pattern) based on the low expectation non-suppression reception effect which gives the operation opportunity and the high expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern). Depending on whether "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppression mode or silence, or in a non-output state (a playback period in which an audible sound is recorded among sound data has ended, a channel assignment And at the same time, it is possible to at least generate a high expectation suppression reception effect for giving an operation opportunity.

  In such a configuration, when giving an operation opportunity, the output in the non-suppression mode of “BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)” is maintained (low expectation non-suppression reception effect), “BGM reproduction There is a case where (a specific type of effect sound) is output in a suppression mode or silence, or in a non-output state (suppression operation reception effect), and the mode according to those operation reception effects (low expectation non-suppression reception Since the proportion (expected degree) of winning a big hit will differ according to the effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect, the effect (when the operation opportunity is given) when the operation opportunity is given It becomes possible to improve the game interest by the effect of whether or not BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound) is suppressed.

  However, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, “BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)” is output in the suppression mode or in silence when the operation opportunity is given, compared with the low expectation non-suppression reception effect There is concern that the performance will be poor.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although it will be described later, when generating the high expectation suppression reception effect, the specific sound which is not output when the low expectation non-control reception effect occurs is acceptable acceptance sound It can be output as. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress poor rendering when high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although it will be described later, the acceptance acceptable sound output when the high expectation suppression acceptance effect is generated is more than the acceptance acceptable sound output when the low expectation non-suppression acceptance effect is generated The sound is used as the sound whose output state is maintained for a long time, and this also preferably suppresses poor rendering when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated.

  On the other hand, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, operation is performed because “BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)” is output in the suppression mode or silence at the time of giving the operation opportunity, or in a non-output state. There is also an aspect that it becomes possible to emphasize the staged sound according to this when the stage effect is generated, and it can be said that this is useful in improving the game interest. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although it will be described later, with regard to the acceptance sound that is output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is produced, the effect acceptance is made when the acceptance sound is in the output state The output state is ended based on the fact that the effect reception has been made. This makes it possible to emphasize the effect sound according to the effect after the operation without being disturbed by the acceptance allowable sound.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect is “If the operation is not detected within the set time for which the effect reception is permitted, the post-operation effect is not generated, and the set time is ended. In addition to being able to be generated by the non-automatic reception mode being performed, "the automatic reception mode capable of generating a post-operation effect even if the operation is not detected within the set time for which the effect reception is permitted" Can also be generated by

  That is, when the operation reception effect is generated by the automatic reception mode, the same post operation operation as when the operation is detected is executed even if the operation is not detected within the set time for which the effect reception is permitted. As a result, the player does not perform the operation, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the effect can not be confirmed after the operation. However, although it will be described later, more strictly, the output time for the effect sound in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the output time for the liquid crystal display in the post-operation effect is the operation It is supposed to be shorter than it was.

  Further, in the automatic reception mode (operation reception effect) according to this embodiment, although it will be described later, when no operation is detected, the effect reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within the set time (automatic button function is activated) After the operation reception is performed based on the automatically generated effect reception. That is, in this case, the effect reception is always generated before the specific timing within the set time arrives at the latest, so that the effect reception may be made within the time after the specific timing within the set time. It will disappear, and the length as an effective period which reception of a presentation is permitted will come to be shortened substantially. In this way, unlike in the case where the post-operation presentation is started after the set time has ended, such an automatic button function can be activated in the form of advancing the presentation tempo rather than not causing an extension during the presentation It can be realized.

  In addition, when the automatic button function is enabled within the set time as described above, the operation opportunity is substantially lost despite the situation where the set time has not ended. It is expected that the player side will operate positively at an earlier stage within the set time, afraid of this, or will play a game with a sense of tension for the effect.

  In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, the "gauge display of how long the effective time remains" displayed on the effect display device 1600 is until the specific timing when the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable not to indicate the remaining time, but to display the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. When such a display method is adopted, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, the effect reception is always performed at a time before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes “0”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although it will be described later, in addition to the operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode, the operation reception effect performed in the above-mentioned automatic reception mode is generated as well. It is made to be able to output the reception permission sound which suggests that the effect reception is permitted or the effect reception is permitted. As a result, the effect reception is automatically generated when the user forgets to operate, and it is possible to preferably suppress the situation where the effect reception can not be generated due to his / her operation.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode is generated, the specification is not performed when the operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode is generated. Since the sound can be output as the acceptance acceptable sound, by confirming the type of the acceptance acceptable sound, an operation acceptance effect to be executed in the automatic acceptance mode is generated instead of the non-automatic acceptance mode. Can be recognized.

  On the other hand, in the post-operation presentation, there is usually a risk of presentation being performed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, and therefore, it is always desirable to operate the post-operation presentation to be carried out There is also an aspect that is not limited. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, although the reception permission sound is output when the reception permission sound is output only for a time sufficient to suggest that the effect reception is permitted, which will be described later. By ending the process relatively early, it is made to create a "time in which it is possible to think whether or not to generate the effect reception" while the reception acceptable sound is not output.

  However, even if the acceptance sound is temporarily terminated early even in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, there is a concern that a misunderstanding may be caused that "the function acceptance of the automatic button is not permitted." It occurs. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to the present embodiment, the output state of the reception acceptable sound is maintained for a relatively long time, whereby the automatic button is not yet functioning and the production reception is permitted. It is suggested that the player is in the state, which in turn can encourage the player's operation in a sense of security that "the automatic button is not yet functioning".

  And, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in the suppression mode or silence as described above as an operation reception effect, or is not output. Gives an operation opportunity in a non-suppressed mode in which a suppression reception effect (here, high expectation suppression reception effect) for giving an operation opportunity in a certain place or "BGM reproduction (a specific type of effect sound)" is output While non-suppression reception effects (here, low expectation non-control reception effects) are allowed to occur in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode, the effect reception is now in a state of being permitted, or the effect reception There is a technical feature in that it is made to generate the acceptance sound which suggests that it becomes an acceptable state, respectively in the form which makes their original rendition more enhanced.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. However, when "accepting acceptable sound" is described again in describing the technical features, the "acceptable acceptable sound" is permitted to receive an effect. It indicates that the output has been started within the set time and the effect reception has been accepted, or the output is started before the set time for which the effect reception is permitted is started, and the effect reception is permitted. It is suggested that it will be in a state of motion, for example, it will be output as an effect sound such as "Pikeen". However, when the output state is made before the set time for which the effect reception is permitted is generated, the output state of the “acceptable sound” is maintained in a form crossing the timing for the set time to be generated ( It is required to be in the output state also within the set time (during the period in which the effect reception is permitted), and more than the time from the output state of the “acceptable sound” to the generation of the set time, It is desirable to set so that the time from the occurrence of the set time to the end of the output state of the "acceptable sound" will be longer. In this sense, "acceptable sound" is an output that can be output only when the set time (valid period) occurs, and is in the output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can be said that the output sound within the set time can be shifted to the non-output state (inaudible state) according to the operation by the player or by the elapse of the output time.

  In addition, “acceptable sound” may be assigned to a channel as single effect sound data and output (see FIG. 388), or another effect sound (for example, a set time (effective period) Output to be assigned to a channel as a single effect sound data combined with the omen effect performed before the occurrence of) or the effect sound output according to the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" etc. (Refer to FIG. 389), and the implementation method may be adopted appropriately.

  FIG. 390 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability change, non-time short), the start condition is satisfied (pending and taken), and as a result of the change pattern determination being performed, "predetermined change" in "low expected change pattern not even formed reach condition" Assuming that the “pattern” is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs effect determination (prediction determination and the like) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern. Then, after that, the variation design of the decorative symbol (such as the depiction of effects according to a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to a predetermined fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation production The effect (preliminary effect effect) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed to the effect (effect pattern) according to the selected “predetermined fluctuation pattern”. The effect pattern determination (sub control side) is performed based on the result of the fluctuation pattern determination (main control side) including each effect example described below, and the advance notice determination (sub control is performed based on the result of the effect pattern determination When the control side is performed, regarding the processing relating to the preliminary presentation effect, the “variation pattern determination” may be set as the “effect pattern determination”, and the “variation pattern” may be replaced as the “effect pattern” and processed.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained by the effect determination (for example, the advance notice determination) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a produces a variation effect of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 390 (b). An operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated when a timing tr32 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start has arrived. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect according to the low expectation change pattern (predetermined change pattern),
・ The “non-suppression reception effect (Diagram) setting the set time for which the effect reception is permitted while the“ sound of BGM reproduction ”according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode 390 (a) and (b)) and when no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) for which the effect reception is permitted, the effect does not occur after the operation. "Non-automatic acceptance mode (see Figure 390 (j))" where the setting time is ended
It is made to generate as "non-suppression / non-automatic receptionist effect" performed by.

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (rendering pattern) according to the low expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the generation of the operation reception effect is performed by the “sound of BGM reproduction” becoming a suppression mode. Since the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed is allowed to be set suddenly without involving the effect such as suggestive, etc. (non-suppressed reception effect), the player side strikes a surprise It becomes a form that tends to cause a delay at the beginning of the movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time is ended without the occurrence of the effect after the operation (non-automatic reception Aspect) By making conscious of the risk of losing the generation opportunity of the rendition after the operation, the tension feeling during the execution period of rendition (rendering pattern) relating to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is suitably made You will be able to maintain.

  However, although being executed as such “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production”, the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without any post-operation effect occurring against the player's intention. If there are frequent occurrences, there is a concern that the game interest will decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 390 (b), (c) and (g), a setting time (timing tr32 to tr33) at which acceptance of effect is permitted occurs. Also, when the timing tr31 a little earlier comes, the "acceptable sound" is started to be output, and the output state is maintained in the form straddling the timing tr32. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the effect reception is permitted at timing tr31 slightly before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs, and "after the operation against the player's intention, after the operation It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently say that the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without the occurrence of an effect. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" may not necessarily be generated before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs. For example, according to the generation timing of the set time generation timing tr32 May be generated.

  Although it will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first allowable sound output as an effect sound such as "Phiking!" And "Press!" And second acceptable sound to be output as a message sound. However, as shown in FIGS. 390 (d) and (h), in the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect (rendering pattern) according to the low expectation change pattern (predetermined change pattern), The second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. The game is also limited by the output restriction applied to such "acceptable sound". The delay is likely to occur at the beginning of the movement when the person tries to operate.

  By the way, as a countermeasure against the setting time (effective period) being suddenly set or being executed as a non-automatic acceptance mode during the execution period of the effect (rendering pattern) according to the low expectation variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), It is thought that the player who tries to try not to miss the chance of the occurrence of the effect after the operation may appear by continuously hitting the operation means (here, the operation button 410) from the time when the effect reception is not permitted. Be However, in this case, since the effect reception is permitted and the effect is started immediately after the operation, the started effect is “what is being performed according to the effect reception (effect after operation)”. It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "automatically generated as a mere advance notice effect not related to the effect reception", and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 390 (in particular, FIG. 390 (c)), in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect, the “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” is generated after the set time (effective period) has occurred. When the effect is accepted at the timing tr 32 a in the output state, the set time (effective period) itself is ended, while the “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” is not ended halfway, but the first (1) The output state is maintained until the timing at which the output as an allowable sound ends (the same timing as when there was no operation (FIG. 390 (g)). Thereby, the started effect is "according to the effect reception It is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations that are difficult to recognize whether it is what is being performed (post-operation effect) or whether it is automatically generated as a mere advance notice effect that is not related to the effect reception. Kill as to become.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 390, when the effect reception is made within the set time (effective period) (timing tr 32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (No. At least after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in (1 effect member) and after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, with regard to the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display), even when the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), it is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33. On the other hand, as to the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is received. However, even when the effect reception is made at any timing, in the state where the timing tr33 has not ended, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) It is required to maintain the output state.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 390, when the timing tr32 at which the set time (effective period) is set comes, the effect display device 1600 operates the operation means to be operated by the low expectation non-suppression reception effect While the insulted bird's-eye view image is displayed, gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has passed is performed. As a method of displaying a bird's-eye view image or a gauge display, for example, it is possible to adopt the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2), and those display images (a bird's-eye view image, a gauge display) It will be made non-displayed (all non-displayed at the same timing) based on it.

  However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a “special effect mode (automatic button effect state)” that enables the automatic button function for all operation reception effects for which operation instructions are given. The setting to the “special effect mode” and the setting cancellation may be enabled by the operation of the player. That is, in this case, even in the operation reception effect which occurs during the execution period of the effect (rendering pattern) according to the low expectation variation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), in the state of being set to the “special effect mode” , "Non-suppression reception effect" and will be executed in the "automatic reception mode" described above, and only when it is not set to the "special effect mode" "non-suppress / non-automatic reception effect" Will occur as However, in this specification (in particular, “More detailed rendition of the acceptable sound for reception and the related description”), unless otherwise noted, the “special rendition mode” is not set. Occasionally, it is described as an example of effect when the "special effect mode" is not installed as the pachinko machine 1 concerned.

  FIGS. 391 and 392 are time charts showing an example of effect contents when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-short time), the start condition is satisfied (dwelling termination), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, high expectation is developed to “SP reach (reach effect with background change etc.) Assuming that the “specific variation pattern” is selected among the variation patterns, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as an advance notice determination) corresponding to the particular variation pattern. Then, after this, the variation design of the decorative symbol (such as the depiction of the effect according to the specific variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of is executed additionally to the effect (effect pattern) concerning the selected “specific variation pattern”.

  However, as described above, in the effect (rendering pattern) according to the “specific variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 391 (b), even if any result is obtained as the effect judgment (preliminary judgment) In addition, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated when the timing tr 42 (the timing in the SP reach state) when the specific time has elapsed since the start of the change effect of the decorative symbol has come.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (effective period) to be generated at the timing tr42 in the specific variation pattern is
-Set the set time for which acceptance of the effect is permitted while "sound of BGM playback" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is output in the suppression mode or silent state "Reduction reception effect (FIG. 391 (a) , (B)), and even if no operation is detected for the operation means to be operated within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) for which the effect reception is permitted, When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation effect is started based on the fact that the effect reception is made. Aspect (see FIG. 391 (j))
It is made to generate as "suppression / automatic receptionist effect" executed by. In addition, as a method of outputting the "sound of BGM reproduction" in the suppression mode or silence, the "sound of BGM reproduction" is a method of previously setting a silent period (suppression period) in its own data, or A method of changing the setting of the volume value for the channel to which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is assigned to the suppression value (for example, "0"), a combination thereof, or the like can be adopted. Although it mentions later, this "control / automatic receptionist production" is also called "the 2nd control operation reception production", and the control mode here is also called the "strong control mode".

  According to such a configuration, the "sound of BGM reproduction" is suppressed in the execution period of the effect (representation pattern) according to the high expectation change pattern (the SP reach state in the effect (representation pattern) according to the specific change pattern). Since the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is set with the effect such as suggesting the occurrence of the operation reception effect by being output in a mode or silent (suppression reception Effects) From the player's side, it is easy to perform operation immediately after the operation reception effect occurs. In addition to this, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect is automatically generated at the latest when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives. Since it is (automatic reception mode), it becomes possible to enjoy operating in a sense of security that will not miss the effect after the operation that occurs in the operation reception effect at the time of high expectation.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as in the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" in Figs. 391 (b), (c), (g), "in suppression / automatic reception effect". As shown in the figure, when the timing tr41 a little before the occurrence of the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) for which the rendering acceptance is permitted occurs, the "acceptable sound" is started to be output and the timing str42 is straddled And keep the output state. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the suppression mode or silent state, a state in which the effect reception is permitted at timing tr 41 occurs soon Can be recognized, and it is expected that it will be difficult to frequently say that “the effect of the automatic button function is made to be accepted by the automatic button function, not against the player's intention,” Become so. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" may not necessarily be generated before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) occurs. For example, it is generated according to the set time generation timing tr42. You may do so.

  However, for the timing tr40 at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output in the non-suppressed mode to the state (or the non-output state) in which it is output in the suppressed mode or silent, the above-described operation In order to suitably obtain the effect (suppression reception effect), as shown in FIGS. 391 (a) to (c), the relationship “length of timing tr 40 to tr 41> length of timing tr 41 to tr 42” It can be said that it is important to set so as to come much earlier than "the output start timing tr41 of the above-mentioned acceptance acceptable sound that precedes the set time," so as to have the property.

  In addition, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect production” according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (c), (d), (g), (h), the above-mentioned “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” Unlike in the case of "", not only the first acceptable sound that is output as a sound effect such as "pikein!" As "acceptable sound," but the second allowable sound that is output as a message sound such as "press!" Also, the timing of the timing tr41 arrives at the same time as the timing tr41 arrives, and the status of the output is maintained in the form straddling the timing tr42.

  According to such a configuration, the effect display device 1600 determines which operation means of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like) included in the pachinko machine 1 is to be operated. Since there is a possibility of being able to be recognized from when the overhead image of the operation means to be operated is not yet displayed (timing tr41 to tr42), an operation reception effect occurs immediately It becomes easier to operate. That is, as described later, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect production" according to this embodiment, "when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation object" and "the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation object" based on the result of the advance effect determination. When the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target, a message sound such as “Press!” Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the operation target. In such a case, a message sound such as "Settle!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 391, the first and second allowable sounds are simultaneously started to be output, but the output start timings of the first and second allowable sounds are made different from each other. Alternatively, the output state may be sequentially made. In this case, the output of only one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound may be started from the state in which the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred.

  Also, in this presentation example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and (h), the “first acceptable sound” is adopted as the presentation sound that is output for a relatively short time, and the “second acceptable sound” Is adopted as an effect sound that is output over a relatively long time, but the long and short relationship between these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, with regard to the “first acceptable sound” and the “second acceptable sound”, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and (h), it is assumed that the output state is maintained over different times, and those outputs It is desirable that the time when the state is ended (time when the inaudible state) is made to come at different timings prior to the timing tr 42 A when the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how long the time until the timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button function is activated comes to rest, depending on which of the following situations the “acceptable sound” is in: It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently say that "the effect of the automatic button function is made to be accepted not by the player's own operation but against the player's intention".
-The first condition in which both the "first acceptable sound" and the "second acceptable sound" maintain the output state-The output state of one of the "first acceptable sound" and the "second acceptable sound" is maintained But the other has terminated the output state (inaudible status). The second condition-Both the "first acceptable sound" and the "second acceptable sound" have terminated the output state. Third situation (being inaudible)

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 and “suppression / automatic reception effect production” in the effect example shown in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, "Pikien!") Is output as the first allowable sound. That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) of the acceptance allowable sound is output as an effect sound not output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic acceptance effect”, but the sound effect (a part of the acceptance allowable sound) The first allowable sound) can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", so that the "sound of BGM reproduction" is being suppressed. It is possible to more easily recognize that the effect reception is permitted (the first allowable sound) while maintaining the effect appropriately (the second allowable sound).

  In addition, timing tr41-tr42 (or timing tr31-tr32) in the case of making acceptance acceptance sound (the 1st acceptance sound, the 2nd acceptance sound) precede to setting time (effective period) or a bird's-eye view image display. The time of (1) may be a minimum time (for example, one frame) in a control (processing) unit, or may be a time of two or more frames. That is, if it is possible to output the set time (the effective period) or the bird's-eye view image even if it precedes even a little, the player is in a state where the effect reception is permitted, or the operation means being operated There is a possibility that it will be possible to recognize as early as the preceding time by which time it is, so it is within the time until the set time is over or when the automatic button function is activated. It is expected to suppress forgetting to operate within the period until arrival.

  By the way, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic button mode, as described above, the operation opportunity can be lost by enabling the automatic button function (timing tr 42A) even within the set time (effective period). It is. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 (c) and (d), different from the effect example shown in FIG. 390 (c), the acceptance permissible sound (at least one of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound) When the effect reception is made when the one) is in the output state, the output state is ended based on the fact that the effect reception is made. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptance sound (the first acceptance sound and the second acceptance sound) is interrupted at that time, and this is a state where the effect acceptance is permitted ( As it becomes possible to recognize that the effective period has ended, "a state in which the reception of the effect has not yet occurred, and the automatic button function can be activated (a state in which the operation opportunity can be lost)" It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is in If the operation is performed and the effect is received before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (the effective period), the effect is received when the effect is received. It goes without saying that the automatic button function is not activated even when the timing tr 42 A arrives, since the state in which acceptance is permitted is ended.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 391, when the effect is received within the set time (effective period) (timing tr 42 a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (as an effect after operation according to the effect receiving) At least an after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and an after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. More specifically, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is performed at a specific timing that arrives after timing tr43, even when the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period). While the non-display (not visible) is to be made, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is to maintain the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is made. ing.

  However, as shown in FIG. 391, even when the effect reception is made at any timing within the set time (the effective period), the sound after the operation (output sound for the effect sound) is “BGM playback sound It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained when the timing tr 44 when “is returned from the suppression state (silence state) to the output in the non-suppression mode comes. On the other hand, with regard to the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the output state is ended at timing tr44 when the "sound of BGM playback" is returned to the output in the non-suppression mode. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, the "sound of BGM reproduction" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode, and the fact that the contents concerning the display effect are switched is generated. It will be expected to be greatly changed and to improve the game interest. The “sound of BGM reproduction” may be gradually returned by a method such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode. Further, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be ended at a specific timing after the timing tr44 instead of the timing tr44.

  In addition, also in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 391, when the timing tr42 at which the set time (effective period) is set comes, the effect display device 1600 operates the operation means being operated by the high expectation suppression reception effect. While the insulted bird's-eye view image is displayed, gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has passed is performed. In this respect, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, the non-automatic reception mode is also performed in the effect display device 1600 in view of the fact that a message sound (for example, "press!") As the second allowable sound is output. A message display (for example, “press!”) Which does not appear in the operation reception effect performed in step S is displayed. In addition, as a display method of a bird's-eye view image, a gauge display, and a message display, it is possible to employ | adopt the method shown in FIG. 206 (Z3) or FIG. 220 (R2), for example. The gauge display and the message display) are not displayed (all are not displayed at the same timing) when the set time has not yet elapsed based on the generation of the effect reception. The message display may not necessarily completely match the content of the message sound, as long as it prompts operation.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to (i), it precedes the timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button function within the set time (effective period) is activated. While the output state of the message sound is terminated (inaudible state), the message display is maintained at the timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button function is activated, and further, After the automatic button function is activated, it is designed not to be hidden (not visible) at least until the timing tr 43 when the set time is ended comes. The display state may be maintained after that. In addition, since the set time (effective period) is ended at the time of receiving the effect, in fact, it will be ended at the latest when the timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button is activated comes. Therefore, "the timing tr43 at which the set time ends" strictly means the timing at which it is ended when the set time is temporarily continued, and the time set at the timing tr42 It is a timing that comes when the timing tr42 has elapsed.

  According to such a configuration, the output state of the message sound (second acceptable sound) may be interrupted (inaudible state) when the effect is accepted by the activation of the automatic button function. Since the message display will not be hidden at a halfway stage within the set time, the effect reception is made by the operation detection for the operation object prompted by the message sound (second acceptable sound) or the message display It is possible to suggest to the player that there is no situation. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not instructed to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it suggests that the effect reception due to the operation is not generated. become able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in both of the operation reception effect not executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 390) and the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 391), Within the set time (effective period), a remaining time display (gauge display) indicating a remaining time until the end of the state in which the effect reception is permitted is finished can be performed. Then, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 390) not executed in the automatic button mode, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed on the basis of the time until the set time elapses. That is, in this case, as the time until the set time elapses decreases, the gauge amount decreases, and when this time becomes "0", the dynamic display is performed so that the gauge amount also becomes "0".

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode, the automatic button function is activated and the effect reception is automatically performed when the specific timing tr 42A within the set time comes without operation detection As described above, the generation acceptance is not permitted even if the set time has not yet elapsed since the specific timing tr 42A has arrived. Therefore, within the set time of such operation reception effect (FIG. 391), if "display the remaining time (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the state where the effect reception is permitted is finished" is performed, it is usually the case It is conceivable to dynamically display the remaining time display (gauge display) based on the time until the specific timing tr 42A arrives.

  In this point, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode, the effect reception is permitted after the specific timing tr 42A arrives. Even though it disappears, the remaining time display (gauge display) is not based on the time until the specific timing tr 42A arrives, but the remaining time display (gauge display) based on the time until the set time has elapsed It is made to display. That is, in this case, as the time until the set time elapses decreases, the gauge amount decreases, and when the set time becomes "0", the dynamic display is performed so that the gauge amount also becomes "0". However, here, since it is always transferred to the state where the effect reception is not permitted before the set time becomes “0”, the effect reception is not permitted in the state where the gauge amount is left It will be transferred to the state.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect is accepted by the activation of the automatic button function, the amount of gauge in the remaining time display (gauge display) will be left and left, so the player's intention Contrary to this, it is possible to indicate that there is a risk of losing the opportunity to operate, and this makes it possible to operate at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount at the next set time (effective period) Can be encouraged to do.

  Moreover, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode according to this embodiment, when the effect reception is generated by the operation detection, the remaining time is displayed before the set time has elapsed (( The gauge display can be hidden (not visible). On the other hand, when the effect reception is generated by the activation of the automatic button function (specific timing tr 42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in the state where the set time has not ended, and at least the setting It is made to maintain "the aspect of the dynamic display to which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) reduces gradually" until time passes.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect is accepted by the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues the dynamic display at least until the set time has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that the situation is not in the situation in which the effect reception has been made by the operation detection on the operation target whose operation is prompted by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not instructed to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it suggests that the effect reception due to the operation is not generated. become able to.

  As described above, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tr42 in FIG. 391, "when selecting operation button 410 as the operation target" and "select sword ornament 5001 as the operation target based on the result of the preliminary effect determination. There is a case. That is, in this case, there may be confusion as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (effective period) for which the effect reception is permitted is generated, and the set time may be 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time of On the other hand, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tr32 in FIG. 390, there is no “when selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the setting time. At this time, with regard to the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated, it is operated against the player's intention to set it later than the timing at which 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (effective period) has occurred. It is desirable in order to control the occurrence of the situation that you lose the opportunity.

  In addition, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tr42 in FIG. 391, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state Even when the operation means of the above is operated, it is desirable that the effect is accepted and the effect is performed after the operation. That is, there is a possibility that the player may be confused when a situation where the reception of the effect is not made despite the operation of the operation means appears, and it is appropriate after interrupting the erroneous operation state in such a situation. Since it is harsh to require further operation on the operation means on the side, even if the erroneous operation state is maintained, when the operation means on the side to be operated is operated, the effect reception is made It is desirable to do.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, it is possible to appropriately adopt the matters described in the “suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 178)” described above and descriptions of other examples thereof. That is, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43 and tr44 in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15 and ts16 in the effect example shown in FIG. Become.

  However, as described above, in the suppression operation reception effect, since the effect sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence when the operation opportunity is given, the effect is poor compared to the non-suppression operation reception effect Are concerned. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the acceptance permission sound output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is more than the acceptance permission sound output when the non-control operation reception effect is generated It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the time during which the output state is maintained is different. It is prepared, and based on the result of the notice effect determination, one of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound. Here, the “first mode” as the first acceptable sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 390 (c) and (g) and FIGS. 391 (c) and (g), and the “time maintained as the output state” “Is set as the shortest aspect among the above-mentioned plurality of aspects. In addition, it is desirable that the ratio (expected degree) in which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped is different depending on which of the above plural modes the first allowable sound is output.

  In addition, “Which of the plurality of modes is to be output as the first acceptable sound” and “Which of the plurality of operation means is used as the operation target” can be obtained as separate determination results in the above-mentioned notice effect determination. Alternatively, it may be obtained in the above-mentioned advance presentation effect determination as one determination result. However, in at least the first aspect among the plurality of aspects, the first permission is permitted in either the case where the “operation button 410” is the operation target or the case where the “sword decoration 5001” is the operation target. It is desirable to be selectable as a sound. Also in the second and third modes, it is possible to select whether the operation button 410 is to be operated or the sword decorative body 5001 is to be operated. You may do so.

  FIG. 392 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when the second mode is used as the first acceptance permission sound when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  As shown in FIG. 392, this effect example is basically the same as the effect example described above with reference to FIG. 391 including the generation conditions and the contents of the effect (further, description of the other example, etc.). Is the same. However, in this presentation example, as a result of the announcement presentation judgment being made, at timing tr 41, the first allowable sound is outputted not in the first aspect but in the second aspect longer than the first aspect. The point is different, and here, the output state of the first acceptable sound is maintained for a time longer than the second acceptable sound.

  According to such a configuration, the acceptance permission sound output upon generation of the suppression operation reception effect is output for a longer time than the acceptance permission sound (first mode) output upon generation of the non-control operation reception effect. Since it is possible to output as a sound to be maintained, when the operation opportunity is given, suitableness is maintained even in the situation where "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in the suppression mode or silent. You will be able to

  In addition, in order to improve the performance in the suppression operation reception effect, for the first permission sound output in the second mode, a sound not output as the reception permission sound in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is used. It is desirable to do.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, as in the case of selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target and in the case of selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target based on the result of the preliminary presentation effect determination. It is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is used as an operation target among the above. Therefore, also in this effect example, the second allowable sound is output in the same mode (for example, “press!”) As in the effect example shown in FIG. 391. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 392 (c) and (g), the first permissible sound is output in the second mode, Also by terminating the output state of the first acceptable sound (inaudible state) before the timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button function is activated, the automatic button function is also performed in this presentation example. It is possible to infer from the output situation of the acceptance sound that the time until the timing to be activated tr 42 A arrives is left.

  In particular, in this effect example, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained even after the output state of the "second allowable sound" output in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 is ended. By confirming whether or not the time until the arrival of the timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button function is activated can be estimated in more detail than in the case of the presentation example of FIG. 391 become. In addition, by outputting only the first acceptable sound of the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound in a longer alternative mode (second mode), the player side first uses the common second. 2 Estimate the “remaining time until the timing tr 42 A arrives” with reference to the timing when the output state of the allowable sound is ended, and thus, with the sense of security that makes the usual assumption, the first allowable sound is As more detailed guesses can be made in a challenging manner, it will be expected to keep the game entertaining suitable.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 392, the other items are the same as those in the effect example shown in FIG. 391. For example, when the effect is accepted when the acceptance acceptable sound is in the output state, the output is The point where the state is ended halfway is also the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG.

  When high expectation suppression reception effect (Figs. 391, 392) occurs in the above-mentioned "special effect mode", the timing at which the automatic button function is activated is within the set time It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, since the automatic button function can be activated by the player's intention, the message is displayed even when the effect is accepted by the automatic button function being activated. It is desirable that the output state is not maintained until the timing tr43 and is not displayed before the timing tr43 (the timing when the effect reception is made or the timing delayed by the above-described time). Also, at this time, with regard to the timing at which the automatic button function is activated, when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, it does not arrive in the output state, but the first allowable sound is output in the second mode It is desirable that the function be made to come to an end in the output state, and to terminate the first allowable sound outputted in the second mode halfway.

  In addition, in the case where the first permissible sound (sound effect as the acceptance permissible sound) is output in the first mode and in the case where the first permissible sound (effect sound as the acceptance permissible sound) is output in the second mode Not only the times for which the output state is maintained may be different from one another, but effect sounds different from one another may be used. For example, when the first allowable sound (sound effect as a reception allowable sound) is output in the first mode, an effect sound such as "pikein" is output, and the first allowable sound (sound effect as a reception allowable sound) When outputting in a mode, it is possible to output a rendering sound such as "Gaogao".

  In the above description example, the low expectation change pattern is defined as "the change pattern in which even the reach state is not formed", but is defined as "the change pattern in which the symbol is stopped without entering the SP reach state" When a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected among fluctuation patterns, the effect example shown in FIG. 390 may be performed.

  In addition, it is desirable that the "suppression / automatic reception effect effect" exemplified in the above example can not appear in the low expectation variation pattern (effect pattern corresponding to that) when in the normal gaming state, The "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" exemplified in the explanation example may also appear in (the corresponding effect pattern) the high expectation change pattern including the above "specific change pattern" when in the normal gaming state. . That is, even in the high expectation change pattern (rendering pattern corresponding to the), basically, the low expectation fluctuation pattern (correspond to Since the rendition which appears also in the rendition pattern) is executed, "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" exemplified in FIG. 390 can also appear during this period. Even in such a configuration, if "suppressed / automatic reception effect" appears (high expected change pattern), if "non-suppressed / non-automatic received effect" appears (low expected change pattern or high expected change) It can be said that the ratio (expected degree) in which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than the pattern).

  In addition, in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern corresponding to) generated when being in the normal gaming state, “BGM reproduction (rendering sound of a specific type)” is output in the suppression mode or silence when giving the operation opportunity It is desirable that the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is not performed in the automatic reception mode. This is a state in which the "special effect mode" is not set, or the case where the "special effect mode" is not installed as the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, for the length of time from "timing 42B for the automatic button function to be activated" to "timing 43 for the set time to end after the acceptance of effect acceptance is allowed", the minimum time in control (processing) units ( For example, it may be one frame) or two or more frames. For example, the message display can be viewed at "timing 42b at which the automatic button function is activated", and at least "the timing tr43 at which the set time has elapsed after acceptance of the effect is permitted" If it is continued until it arrives, it is possible to suggest the original length as the set time (the effective period), and there is a possibility that it may be recognized that the player has not performed the operation. Will be able to In the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, in any operation reception effect, a message sound (second acceptable sound) or a message display is displayed for "the timing when the automatic button function is activated" within the set time. It is desirable to output the relationships described above (see FIGS. 391 (h) and (i) and 392 (h) and (i)).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in FIGS. 391 (i) and 392 (i), “the time during which the message display is left after the effect reception is made (in the example, the timing tr42A to tr43 In the case of “(time period)”, due to the common use of the program, it will appear also when the effect reception occurs at other timing (Fig. 390 (e), FIG. 391 (e), etc.) By using the program of, the automatic button function may be generated only when it is activated. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 390 (e), the operation related display is not displayed at timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 391 (e), the operation related display is not displayed at timing tr42a. Become.

  Further, in the above described example (FIGS. 390 to 392), the display effect (liquid crystal display) after operation in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the effect sound output after operation by the speaker (second effect member) (effect The sound may be started at the same time, but the effect may be performed after the operation so as to shift the start time of the effects. For example, in the situation where the effect sound output (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) is started at timing tr42, the effect display device after the operation (liquid crystal display) is on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) The display effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed after the operation according to the timing at which the operation related display shown in FIGS. 390 to 392 is not displayed (or the timing at which the fade-out process is started) which has not been displayed yet. If it is made to start, switching of display production can be performed smoothly.

  As described in the above-described “suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 178)”, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, the precursor is in a period before the set time (effective period) An effect (for example, the aforementioned “specific operation related effect” or the like) may be performed. And in this case, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of modes in which the degree of expectation in which the jackpot symbol appears differs as a precursor effect, and to perform the precursor effect in any of these modes. Further, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as precursor effect sounds to be output during a period in which the precursor effect is performed, and a plurality of modes are output as a precursor effect sound according to the execution mode of the precursor effect It is desirable to make a selection. On the other hand, with regard to the first allowable sound, the first aspect and the second one are displayed with the bird's-eye image to be operated, the gauge display indicating the remaining time, and the message display of "Press!" It is outputted in any of a plurality of modes including the mode.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391 or 392 is generated, the specific sound that is not output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. Since the first allowable sound of the aspect and the second allowable sound) can be output as the reception allowable sound, it is preferable to suppress poor rendering when the suppression operation reception effect is generated. Will be able to In addition, by confirming the type of the acceptance permission sound, it is possible to recognize that there is a situation in which the operation reception effect is generated in the automatic reception mode, not in the non-automatic reception mode.

  In addition, with respect to the acceptance allowable sound of the non-suppression operation acceptance effect (FIG. 390), the first allowable sound that outputs the acceptance allowable sound as a sound effect and the second allowable sound that outputs the acceptance allowable sound as a message sound Among them, the second allowable sound is not prepared but only the first allowable sound is output, while the first allowable sound and the above-mentioned first allowable sound of the suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 391, FIG. 392) are output. It is made to be able to output both of 2 acceptance sounds. As a result, it is possible to preferably maintain the effect when the suppression operation reception effect is being performed.

  Further, in the above example of rendering, in the case where the same rendering sound is output as the first allowable sound in the non-suppressing operation receiving rendering (FIG. 390) and the suppressing operation receiving rendering (FIG. 391, FIG. 392) (FIG. 390, FIG. 391) And the case where different effect sounds are output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 390 and 392).

  That is, when the acceptance acceptable sound different from the normal time is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the effect acceptance is in the permitted state, and the operation opportunity may be lost. Therefore, while outputting the second allowable sound (message sound) as a sound that is not normally output, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output as a sound that is also output during normal operation. Is desirable. Then, while the acceptance allowable sound is output in such a mode, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is also output as the effect sound (the second aspect) which is not output at a normal time with a predetermined probability, at this time If the proportion (expected degree) in which the big hit symbol appears is higher than when it is output in the first mode, then “BGM playback (specific It is possible to preferably maintain the stage effect when the type of effect sound) is output in the suppression mode or silent mode. In order to obtain such an effect, when the suppression operation reception effect is generated (a specific variation pattern is generated), the first mode is output as the first acceptance permission sound in the effect judgment such as the advance effect judgment. It is desirable that the ratio to determine the effect be higher than the ratio to determine to output the second aspect.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, not only in the operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 390) but also in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391, FIG. 392) performed in the above-mentioned automatic reception mode. Because, on the occasion of the occurrence, the acceptance acceptance sound is suggested to indicate that the effect acceptance has been accepted, or that the effect acceptance can be accepted, so the effect acceptance is automatically performed by forgetting the operation It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which one's own operation opportunity is lost as a result.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the timing tr41 arrives, and the specific timing tr42A arrives in the set time (effective period) It is assumed that the effect reception is automatically generated when the specific timing tr 42A arrives while the effect reception according to the operation detection is not made. According to such a configuration, the effect can be started after the operation within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether or not the operation has been performed. It is possible to make it automatic button-ization without making the flow of the subsequent presentation different from when there was no, or causing an extension during the presentation

  Further, in the above presentation example, a "message sound prompting to be operated (second allowable sound)" may be output as the acceptance allowable sound, and the message sound (second allowable sound) may not be operated. It is not output in the "operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode" which is not received, and can be output only in the "operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode" which is not received and operated without an operation There is.

  That is, only in the operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode, a message sound (second allowable sound) directly representing that the operation should be performed is output, or various types of reception allowable sounds (first allowable sound, It is conceivable that the second allowable sound should be output, but in the post-operation presentation, there is a risk of presentation being performed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, so that the post-operation presentation is performed It is not always good to operate in order to improve the game interest. In this respect, “operation acceptance effect performed in the non-automatic acceptance mode” is an effect in which it is permitted to make a selection such as “Dare not cause the effect after operation”. Avoid automatically expressing the effect as a message (second acceptable sound) and do not output a message sound (second acceptable sound) and do not have the option to generate a post-operation effect or not It is desirable to output the message sound (second acceptable sound) only in the operation reception effect performed in the mode, or to output more types of acceptable sound. In addition, in "the operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode", when the set time is ended without the reception of the effect being received, it is expected that after the operation, the effect related to the operation and the effect related thereto are not performed. The presentation will progress without being suggested. It should be noted that in the non-motion reception effect, no message sound is output in any operation reception effect, but in the "operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode", a message sound is not output Operation reception effects may be included.

  Further, as described above, this pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of modes (“press!” And “set sword!”) As the message sound (the second acceptable sound), and the effects shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 In the example, depending on which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is the target to which the operation opportunity is given (based on the result of the preliminary effect determination), any one of the plurality of modes is selectively selected. It is made to output. In this case, when the target to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 and the message sound ("Press!") According to this is outputted, the target to which the operation opportunity is given is the sword decorative body 5001. It suggests that "big hit symbol appears when the said symbol change is stopped" by the effect after operation according to the effect reception compared with the time when the message sound according to ("Kotome!") Is output The ratio (expected degree) in which the presentation mode appears is set to be low. The ratio (expected degree) in which the presentation mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

  On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390, the message sound (second acceptable sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second acceptable sound) is not output, the operation target Is not the sword decorative body 5001, and the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and an operation reception effect to be executed in a non-automatic reception mode is generated. In addition, at least in the normal gaming state, it is suggested that "the big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped" in the effect after operation executed when the effect reception is made in the operation reception effect where the message sound is not output The ratio (expectation degree) that the effect mode to appear is the effect after the operation performed when the effect acceptance is made in the operation acceptance effect where the message sound is output “The big hit symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped It is made to become lower than the ratio (expected degree) in which the presentation mode which suggests that "" appears. In addition, the ratio (expected degree) in which the presentation mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation reception effect is generated, first, “Is the message sound (the second acceptable sound) output?” Becomes a branch point for knowing the level of the expectation, and the message sound ( When the second allowable sound is output, the level of the degree of expectation can be known by the mode. In addition, even when the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, when the message sound (the second acceptable sound) is output, it is possible to enjoy the post-operation effect with a relatively high expectation. become. Therefore, when the message sound (the second acceptable sound) is output, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is executed in the automatic reception mode so that the post-operation effect is not missed. On the other hand, when the message sound (the second acceptable sound) is not output, the degree of expectation is relatively low, and "the sword ornament 5001", which is used only when the degree of expectation is high, becomes the operation target Will disappear. That is, in this case, it is desirable to give the player the option of generating the post-operation effect by performing the post-operation effect in the non-automatic reception mode.

  Further, in the operation reception effect executed in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, when a set time (effective period) occurs, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed. In this respect, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to (i) and 392 (g) to (i), for the message sound, the timing at which the automatic button function within the set time (effective period) is activated. While the output status is terminated (inaudible status) prior to tr42A, the display status of the message display is maintained also at timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated, Furthermore, after the automatic button function is activated, the display is not hidden (not visible) at least until the timing tr 43 when the set time ends is reached. That is, in this case, when the effect is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display may be hidden at the stage when the set time has not elapsed according to the effect acceptance, but within the set time When the automatic button function is activated, the message display ("press!" Or "set!") Will be displayed continuously until at least the set time is over.

  According to such a configuration, the output state of the message sound (second acceptable sound) may be interrupted (inaudible state) when the effect is accepted by the activation of the automatic button function. Since the message display will not be hidden at a halfway stage within the set time, the effect reception is made by the operation detection for the operation object prompted by the message sound (second acceptable sound) or the message display It is possible to suggest to the player that there is no situation. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not instructed to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it suggests that the effect reception due to the operation is not generated. become able to.

  Further, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391 and FIG. 392) in which the automatic button function is activated, the remaining time display (gauge display) is performed when the effect reception is made by the automatic button function being activated at timing tr 42A. The amount of gauges in the game will be left as it is, so it can be suggested that there is a risk of losing the operation opportunity against the player's intention, which will make it possible to In the set time (effective period), it is possible to prompt the user to perform the operation at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount.

  Further, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391 and FIG. 392) in which the automatic button function is activated, when the effect is accepted by the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) is set at least Dynamic display was continued until the end of time. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation has not been accepted by the operation detection for the operation target whose operation is prompted by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not instructed to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it suggests that the effect reception due to the operation is not generated. become able to.

  In addition, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 and the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391, since the same effect sound (the first allowable sound of the first aspect) is output as the reception allowable sound, either Even in the case where the operation reception effect of is generated, it is possible to appropriately communicate to the player that the operation opportunity is given. Moreover, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391, since the second allowable sound not output in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is also output, which of the operation reception effects is generated It will also be possible to recognize Furthermore, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode in (a performance pattern corresponding to) a specific variation pattern, the ratio performed in the mode shown in FIG. 391 is relatively high. The proportion implemented in the illustrated manner is relatively low, and the proportion stopped in the jackpot symbol is relatively high when executed in the aspect illustrated in FIG. That is, in this case, the first allowable sound is not the “first mode” and is not used in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. Because it is output at the same time, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, in comparison with the case of the effect example shown in FIG. Since it may be used as in FIG. 392), it is preferable to suitably maintain the effect when “BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)” is output in the suppression mode or silent mode. become able to.

  Further, in the effect example (suppression operation acceptance effect) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not necessarily used as an effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time. It is assumed that the same acceptance allowance sound (first allowance sound of the first aspect) as that when the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 390) occurs may be generated. Then, on this, when the first allowable sound is output in the effect sound (the second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the effect sound in which the output state is maintained only for a short time (the first A new stage effect is added by increasing the rate at which the symbol is stopped with the big hit symbol as compared to the case where the first allowable sound is output in the aspect (FIG. 391). This makes it possible to recognize that the effect reception is permitted, and at the same time, the effect when “BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)” is output in the suppression mode or silent state It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 to FIG. 392, when the first allowable sound is output in the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the first allowable sound If the effect is accepted while the sound is being output, even if it is in the middle of the output, it will be in the non-output (inaudible) state (see FIG. 392 (c)). . On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output in the effect sound (first aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a short time (FIG. 390, FIG. 391), the first allowable sound is Only when it is output in the "operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode" (Fig. 391), when the effect reception is made on the way of the output, it is not output (inaudible) at that time (See FIG. 390 (c) and FIG. 391 (c)). That is, in this case, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, even if the effect is accepted when the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. Although the first allowable sound is in the output state also during the period of the timing tr41 to tr42, the effect of the first allowable sound is not received within this period even if the operation is detected. It goes without saying that the output state is not interrupted.

  That is, as described above, in the non-suppression operation reception effect, unlike the suppression operation reception effect, the operation reception effect occurs without the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" being suppressed, so the operation post effect is missed The possibility is relatively high, and when the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, there is a possibility that the post-operation effect can not be generated unlike the case where the operation reception mode is performed in the automatic reception mode. Therefore, in the case where these operation reception effects are generated, it is assumed that the player continuously strikes before the set time occurs. However, in this case, there is a concern that it will be difficult to understand if the operation is detected by the continuous hit, whether it is the effect generated as the effect after the operation or the advance effect not related to the operation, so as the first acceptable sound. It is desirable to eliminate these concerns by maintaining the output state until the end of the playback data (Figure 390). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, since there is no need to continuously hit, the first allowable sound is the first mode and the second mode when the player is hit continuously in order to suppress the game by such continuous hits. It is desirable that it is difficult to recognize which of the two has been output (the output is interrupted at an intermediate stage).

  Even when the effect is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display is within the set time only when the operation detection is late, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. The display may be continued until the end timing of the end, or the dynamic display may be continued until the end timing display (gauge display) ends within the set time (described above. Common programs, etc.).

  Further, as described above, in the post-operation effect, there is usually a risk of effect being executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, so that it is desirable to operate the post-operation effect to be performed to improve the game interest. It is not always good. In this respect, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 390 (non-automatic reception effect), it is relatively early if the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output only for a sufficient time to suggest that the effect reception is permitted. By using the mode (the first mode) to be terminated, "time for judging whether or not to produce the effect reception" is created in the absence of the reception permission sound. On the other hand, in the case of automatic reception effects (FIGS. 391 and 392), since there is no need to create such a time, the reception permission sound (first permission sound) is output in the same mode (first mode). In addition to the case, there is also a case where the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is output in a mode (second mode) longer than this, and it is suggested that the degree of expectation is different depending on those modes. . In addition, by maintaining the output state of the acceptance sound for a relatively long time, it can be suggested that the automatic button function is not yet activated, and thus there is a sense of security Among them, it is possible to prompt the player to operate.

  Also, in the case of automatic reception effects (FIGS. 391 and 392), the automatic button function is enabled even in the case where the reception acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is output in the long mode (second mode) (FIG. 392) Make the acceptance acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound) inaudible before the timing tr42A arrives, and at the same time, the two acceptance acceptable sounds (the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound) It is made to end.

  As a result, it is possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is activated does not come until the reception acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound) becomes inaudible. In the inaudible state, it is possible to indicate that the automatic button function can be activated soon if it is not operated early. At this time, in the second allowable sound whose output state is maintained longer than at least the long side aspect (second aspect) or the first allowable sound of the first aspect, the magnitude and pitch of the sound according to the passage of time It is desirable to change at least one of them in order to make it easy to recognize how much time has passed.

  In addition, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, when an operation opportunity is given, "BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" is output in a suppression mode or silent, thereby generating an effect after operation When it does, it is decided to do the creative device which the production sound which responds to this is heard clearly. In this respect, with regard to the acceptance allowable sound output upon occurrence of such a suppression operation acceptance effect, if the effect acceptance is performed when the acceptance allowable sound is in the output state, the effect is accepted based on the effect acceptance being performed. Since the output state is ended, it is possible to emphasize the effect sound according to the effect after the operation without being disturbed by the acceptance permission sound.

  In the above example, when “non-suppression / non-automatic acceptance effect” occurs, the effect state is maintained without interrupting the acceptance of the effect when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state. And However, instead of this, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” is relatively high expectation, for example, when it occurs in the SP reach state in (higher expected fluctuation pattern (effect pattern corresponding to)) Only when there is a situation, in order to encourage concentration on the effect, the effect is produced when the acceptance allowable sound (even if the same effect sound (the first mode) is output as the first allowable sound) is in the output state This may be interrupted when the reception is made.

  In addition, although the example of the effect shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392 described the case where "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurred, "non-suppression / automatic reception effect" or "suppress / non-automatic reception effect" etc. also occur. It may be made possible, and it may be made to advance production in the same mode, also when "non-suppression / automatic reception effect production" or "control / non-automatic reception effect production" occurs.

  Also, at the time of occurrence of the high expectation suppression reception effect, it is possible to output the third mode in which the output time is maintained as a first permissible sound for a longer time than the first mode (FIG. 391) or the second mode (FIG. 392) When the third aspect is output, it is desirable that a rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is higher when the symbol variation is stopped than when the first aspect or the second aspect is output. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the degree of expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first acceptable sound lasts, and the set time for which the presentation acceptance is permitted (effective It is possible to more suitably maintain the game entertainment within the period).

  At this time, in the third mode, it is desirable that the output state be maintained until timing tr 42 A at which the automatic button function is activated comes. That is, in this case, in order to focus on how long the output time of the first acceptable sound lasts, it is confirmed to be in the state of being output as the third aspect, not the first aspect or the second aspect. The longer the time it takes, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension within the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted. It will be. The other matters when the third aspect is output are the same as the contents described in FIG. 391 and FIG. is there.

  Note that the automatic button function may be enabled whenever timing tr42A in a specific variation pattern (the corresponding effect pattern) comes, or when a big hit is obtained, the particular variation It is activated when the timing tr42A in the pattern (the corresponding effect pattern) comes, but when the big hit is not obtained, the timing tr42A in the specific variation pattern (the corresponding effect pattern) comes It may not be activated.

  A plurality of types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within the set time (effective period), and in some of those effects, an acceptance sound (the first acceptable sound when the set time (effective period) occurs) The permissible sound and the second permissible sound) may not be output. That is, in this case, when the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted occurs, the case where the acceptance allowable sound is “0” and the case where the acceptance allowable sound is “1” (first allowable sound ) And when there are "2" acceptance acceptable sounds (1st acceptable sound, 2nd acceptable sound), there is an indication as to how much pachinko machine 1 "prompts the operation" You will be able to

  As a method for hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method may be employed in which fade-out is started when timing for non-display comes.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in the suppression mode or silent in the period of timing tr40 to tr44, but instead, it is not It may be made to be in an output state (for example, a reproduction period in which an audible sound is recorded in the sound data is ended, channel assignment is ended, etc.). That is, in this case, "BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" as new data is allocated to the channel at timing tr44, and an output state is made.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above presentation example, as described above, the high expectation change pattern (SP reach change pattern) is developed into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) as a result of change pattern determination. When a specific variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as presentation determination (such as an advance notice determination), if the presentation of the particular variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the presentation is accepted Operation acceptance effect (effective period) where is permitted,
-Set the set time for which the acceptance of the effect is permitted while the "sound of BGM reproduction" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in the suppression mode or in the silent mode "Reduction reception effect (Fig. 391 (a), (b) And (See FIGS. 392 (a) and (b)) ”and the operation on the operation means to be operated is not detected within the set time (timing tr 42 to tr 43) for which the effect reception is permitted. Even in the case where the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation effect is generated based on the effect reception being made. "Automatic reception mode (see Figure 391 (j) or Figure 392 (j))"
It is made to generate as "suppression / automatic receptionist effect" executed by.

  At this time, based on the result of the effect determination (preliminary effect determination), whether to output the sound effect (the first acceptable sound) among the acceptable sound in any of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode It is determined whether the message sound (second acceptable sound) of the acceptance acceptable sound is to be output by “press!” Or “set a sword!”, And the acceptance acceptable sound (first It is also as described above that each of the allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is output (FIGS. 391 and 392). And, as described above, when the second aspect is output as the first acceptable sound, the expectation is higher than when the first aspect is output, and "Katsune!" As the second acceptable sound. When the is output, the expectation is higher than when the "press!" Is output. In this case, as the order with high degree of expectation, "2nd mode & Osamu!", "2nd mode & press!", "1st mode & Osamu!", "1st mode & press!" It is desirable to maintain the game interest when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

  And although this was also mentioned above, even if it is a case where it is a case where it is made to output any of a plurality of modes as the 1st acceptance sound in the "control / automatic reception effect production" concerning the above-mentioned production example, the 1st acceptance sound is in output When the effect is accepted, it is interrupted (see FIGS. 391 and 392). In addition, with regard to the second allowable sound, even when the output is made by either "press!" Or "set sword!", This is possible when the effect is accepted when the second allowable sound is in the output state. It was decided to interrupt the

  However, instead of this, when the effect is accepted when the first allowable sound is in the output state in a mode different from the first mode among the plurality of modes, the output state is determined based on the fact that the effect is accepted. Although the process is ended, when the effect is accepted when the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state may be maintained without being ended. That is, in this case, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect production”, the output state of the first acceptable sound is interrupted halfway, and the first aspect having the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes even if the expectation can not be recognized Since it is possible to recognize that it is not, it will be expected to suppress the decline in the game interest. In addition, even if an aspect with a low degree of expectation appears in the effect after the operation, if there is a situation where the output state of the first acceptable sound with the lowest degree of the expectation among the plural modes is maintained, By re-recognizing that the rendering state is unlikely to have expectations in the first place, it becomes easier to accept the result appearing as the rendering after the operation, and it is expected to suppress the game interest from being significantly reduced.

  Even in the case of adopting such a modification, when the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" occurs in the predetermined variation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. 390, and The case where the first allowable sound of the “suppression / automatic reception effect effect” is output in the second mode within the specific fluctuation pattern is as described with reference to FIG. 392. That is, among the effect examples described above, the effect mode shown in FIG. 391 when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode in the “suppression / automatic reception effect effect” appearing in a specific variation pattern is “figure”. Instead of the effect mode shown in 393, it will be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 393, also in “the effect mode shown in FIG. 393,” the contents described in “the effect mode shown in FIG. 391” and the contents described in the other example are basically the same. is there. However, in “the effect mode shown in FIG. 393”, even if the effect acceptance is made at timing tr 42 a when the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first aspect, the output state is interrupted triggered by the effect acceptance. The output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. On the other hand, even if the “suppression / automatic reception effect effect” occurs in a specific variation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first mode having the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes (for example, a mode (for example, It has been described above that when output is made in the second mode) (for example, FIG. 392 (c)), when the effect reception is made at timing tr 42 a, the output state is interrupted based on the effect reception.

  According to such a configuration, when “suppression / automatic reception effect production” occurs in a specific variation pattern, the effect reception is performed at such an early timing that it is difficult to confirm which mode is the first allowable sound Even if it is done, the degree of expectation can be recognized by confirming whether or not the output state of the first allowable sound is ended with this as a trigger. In particular, in this presentation example (FIG. 391, FIG. 393, etc.), from the timing tr41 before the occurrence of the set time (effective period), the first permissible sound is output in a form straddling the timing tr42 at which the set time is set. And since the first allowable sound is not interrupted regardless of the state from the output state at timing tr41 to the arrival of timing tr42, as the first allowable sound It becomes possible to function as time for "discriminating" which is the aspect of.

  In this respect, in the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first aspect in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared as that the output state is maintained for a shorter time than any other aspect in which the output state is interrupted. And Thereby, even when the effect after operation is started when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, the effect sound as the effect after operation and the first allowable sound It becomes possible to shorten the time during which each output state is overlapped, and it becomes possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first allowable sound output in the first mode can be output also in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 (refer to FIG. 390 (c)). In the example of the effect, the interruption is not triggered by the acceptance of the effect, and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. Even if a situation not interrupted by the effect reception appears, it can be provided as an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  However, if the effect is accepted when the second allowable sound is in the output state, it is based on the effect acceptance being made even if any aspect is output as the first acceptable sound. The output state is interrupted (see FIG. 392 (d) and FIG. 393 (d)). That is, in this case, while the function of suggesting the degree of expectation when the effect reception is made early is exhibited for the first allowable sound, the situation where the effect reception is made by the operation detection for the second allowable sound ( It will play a function to indicate whether or not there is a possibility that the operation opportunity may be lost by the automatic button function, and by giving these different functions to the acceptance permission sound, when the operation reception effect occurs It is possible to preferably maintain the fun of

  On the other hand, the acceptance acceptable sound output upon generation of the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 390 may be always output in the first mode, or may be output in the special mode. Although it is also preferable, it is preferable to maintain the output state without ending it even if the effect reception is made while the output is made in the special mode. In the case of outputting in the special mode, it is desirable that the ratio in which the big hit symbol appears at the time of symbol stopping is higher than in the case of being output in the first mode. This percentage may be 100%. It may be outputted in a mode different from the first mode and the special mode.

  That is, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is adapted to maintain the output state in the non-suppressed mode, and there are problems such as poor rendering. Since it is not, it can be said that it is more desirable to be able to confirm the mode as the first allowable sound and to be able to recognize the degree of expectation even in the situation where the effect after operation is started.

  In addition, in the "suppression operation reception effect which gives an operation opportunity while the effect sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state", the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed or It goes without saying that other sounds can be output in the non-suppressed mode even in the inaudible state.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described example of the presentation, "the suppression of giving the operation opportunity while the specific type of the presentation sound is being output in the suppression mode or the silence or in the non-output state In the operation reception effect (FIG. 391 to FIG. 393), any one of "a plurality of modes in which the length of time for which the output state is maintained is different" is output when the set time (effective period) occurs. In the non-suppression mode, the output degree can be output, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) varies depending on the output mode. In this respect, also in the “non-suppression operation reception effect presentation which gives an operation opportunity in a situation where a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppression mode”, Acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) in a mode different from the first mode (such as different length, effect sound itself different, etc.) other than the case of outputting according to the non-suppressed mode in the first mode (FIG. 390) May be output depending on the non-suppression mode, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may be different depending on the output mode. According to such a configuration, both the acceptance permission sound output upon generation of the “non-suppression operation reception effect” and the acceptance permission sound output upon the generation of the “suppression operation reception effect” are set as “output state”. The output can be made in any of a plurality of modes in which the length of time to be maintained is different, and further, the degree of expectation becomes different depending on the output mode, so that “non-suppression operation reception effect” It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the effect reception is made, in any of the “suppression operation reception effect” and the “restriction operation reception effect”.

  FIG. 394 is a time chart illustrating an example of an effect in which the first acceptable sound is output in a specific mode when “non-suppression operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 394, in this effect example as well, parts that are not particularly noted are basically the same as in the effect example shown in FIG. However, in the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) according to this effect example, an effect judgment (for example, at the start of symbol fluctuation start) as to which of the plural modes is made to output the first acceptable sound As a result of the effect determination being performed, as shown in FIGS. 394 (c) and (g), it is not the “first mode” but the “specific mode”. The case where it is output by is assumed, and it is in the production | presentation condition where the ratio in which a big hit symbol appears is high when symbol fluctuation is stopped rather than the case where it is output by "1st aspect." The specific aspect is output over a longer time than the first aspect.

  Here, in any of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” and “suppression / automatic reception effect production”, the first allowable sound can be output by the first mode when the operation reception effect is generated. Is described above (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)). That is, in this case, in both of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” and “suppression / automatic reception effect production”, the same effect sound is output over the same time as the first allowable sound when the operation reception effect is generated The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, when the first permissible sound is output according to the specific mode when the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" is generated (Fig. 394), the first permission sound is the first when the "suppress / automatic reception effect" is generated. In the case where output is performed according to the two modes (FIG. 392), different rendering sounds that are different from each other are output as different first allowable sounds over different times. In this rendering example, when the first allowable sound is output by the second mode, the first allowable sound is output over a longer time than when the first allowable sound is output by the specific mode.

  However, on the other hand, when the same effect sound is output over the same time as the first permissible sound (the first aspect (see FIG. 390 or FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)) the degree of expectation (proportion of the big hit symbol) Is the "first mode" is output when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)" is generated, or "suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393))" It is different depending on whether it is output at the time of the occurrence of “herein.” Here, when the “first mode” appears at the time of the occurrence of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)”, the effect reception is received The degree of expectation (proportion) that the big hit symbol appears in the effect after the operation according to the “1st mode” appeared on the occurrence of “suppression / automatic reception effect (Figure 391 (or Figure 393))” If the production receptionist The big hit symbol appears in effect after corresponding operation is lower than the expected level suggested (percentage). The expectation (percentage) may be 0% and 100%.

  On the other hand, the degree of expectation ("the second aspect (Fig. 392)" or "the specific aspect (Fig. 394)") appears when different effect sounds are output as different first permissible sounds for different times ("the second aspect (Fig. 392)") The percentage of jackpot symbols appearing is the same as a predetermined value regardless of which of “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect production” and “suppressed / automatic reception effect production” is output. The expectation (percentage) may also be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound is output for the same time as the first allowable sound, either “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” or “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs. Expectations will not always be the same depending on In addition, even when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect effect" occurs, when the specific mode is output as the first acceptable sound, the "suppression · · · in the case where the second mode is output as the first acceptable sound The same expectation as "automatic receptionist production" will be suggested.

  That is, in this case, regarding “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” and “suppression / automatic reception effect production”, even if the first acceptable sound is output in the same mode (first mode), the degree of expectation is made different from each other In addition, since the first allowable sound may be output in a mode different from each other (second mode, specific mode), it is possible to make it appear that there is no expressive relationship with each other. . However, in reality, when the first acceptable sound is output in the second mode or the specific mode, the expectation degrees are made to be the same despite the fact that the effect sounds are different and the output time is different. Will be able to secretly For example, in the case where "BGM playback" is suppressed and "BGM playback" is not suppressed at the occurrence of the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted, the normal (reception acceptable sound is the first aspect) In the case of being output as), the effect after different operation (different expectation) is started when the effect is accepted, so that the effects appear to be mutually independent of each other. However, when the acceptance acceptable sound is output as the second aspect or the specific aspect, the operation when the effect acceptance is performed while showing that the effect is different depending on whether the “BGM reproduction” is suppressed or not It will be expected to provide surprise rendition by secretly providing relevancy, such as being able to make the same content (same expectation) appear as a post-representation.

  In this case, in any of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” and “suppression / automatic reception effect production”, a plurality of modes will be prepared as the first allowable sound, but the “first embodiment used in common” As for “,” it is desirable that any operation reception effect is set as an aspect in which the output time is the shortest among the plurality of aspects. In addition, the "second mode" as the first acceptable sound is set as the mode having the longest output time among a plurality of modes that can be output when the "suppression / automatic reception effect effect" occurs, and The “specific mode” as the first acceptable sound is set as the longest mode of the output time out of a plurality of modes that can be output when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect effect” occurs. It is desirable that the output times of are different (for example, “output time of a specific aspect” <“output time of a second aspect”) in order to make it appear that there is no dramatic relationship with each other.

  Moreover, in "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production", even if the first allowable sound is output in either the first mode or the specific mode, the output is not ended at any time regardless of whether or not the effect reception is made. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first acceptable sound can be left even after the effect after operation is started, “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect” with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed In the situation where you are listening to this, despite the fact that the first allowable sound is output in the "specific mode" that pushes up to the same expected level as the relatively high expected "suppression / automatic reception effects" It is possible to eliminate the possibility of On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first acceptable sound is interrupted when the effect reception is made by "suppression / automatic reception effect production" is as described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 393.

  In the example described above, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" (FIG. 392), and as the first allowable sound in the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" When the specific aspect was output (FIG. 394), they were made to have the same degree of expectation. However, in the above, the output time is maintained for a longer time than the “first mode (FIG. 391)” or the “second mode (FIG. 392)” as the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect effect” When "the third aspect" of "the third aspect" is enabled, "the third aspect" is outputted as the first acceptable sound in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", and the "third aspect" is output. In the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", the expectation is set to be the same as in the case where the "specific mode" is output as the first allowable sound. The “third aspect” is as described above.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 394, when the effect is received within the set time (effective period) (timing tr 32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (No. At least after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in (1 effect member) and after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, with regard to the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display), even when the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), it is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33. On the other hand, as to the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is received. However, even when the effect reception is made at any timing, in the state where the timing tr33 has not ended, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) It is required to maintain the output state.

  Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the term “time for which the acceptance acceptable sound is output” does not mean “the time for which the sound data of the acceptance acceptable sound is allocated to the channel”, and It means the length of time taken to output as an audible sound.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned example of rendering, in order to show that there is no rendering relationship between “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” and “suppression / automatic reception effect production”, “second mode” or “third mode” About "aspect", it is assumed that output is possible only by "suppression / automatic reception effect" among "suppression / automatic reception effect production" and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production", and about "specific mode" It is desirable that the output can be made possible only by the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” among the “automatic reception effect” and the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. In addition, when the "second mode" and the "third mode" are prepared as output candidates in the "suppression / automatic reception effect production", the "control / automatic reception effect production" unique acceptance permission sound (second Even if the mode and the third mode are output, the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" does not necessarily have the same expectation as when the unique acceptance acceptable sound (specific mode) is output. It is possible to more suitably improve the effect as the acceptance allowable sound that is output when the "suppression / automatic acceptance effect" occurs.

  In addition, the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effects (timing tr31 to tr33) may not be generated as effects related to the low expectation change pattern (non-reach change pattern), and for example, it is possible to increase to the SP reach state As described above, among the effects relating to the expected change pattern (for example, a specific change pattern), the effects may occur within the effect period before developing into the SP reach state.

  By the way, in the above-mentioned effect example, the “weak suppression mode (the first suppression mode) with a relatively low degree of suppression is possible for“ suppression operation reception effect ”in which a certain type of effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) can be suppressed. A plurality of modes including at least a “suppression operation reception effect)” and a “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” in which the suppression degree is relatively high or in a non-output state are prepared. It is also good. In addition, when the effect sound of a specific type is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the volume may be set to “0”.

  According to such a configuration, when a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated, it is possible to provide an effect on how much the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed. Become.

  Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned operation and effect, the degree of expectation depending on which of the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" has occurred It is desirable to make the (proportion of the jackpot symbols appear) different. In addition, here, the degree of expectation (ratio) suggested that a big hit symbol appears in “effect after operation according to effect reception” when “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs is “ When the strong suppression mode (the second suppression operation reception effect production) occurs, it is lower than the expectation (ratio) suggested that the big hit symbol appears in the "after operation according to the effect reception". The expectation (percentage) may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect production)", the effect according to the high expectation change pattern developed to SP reach (such as reach effect with background change) and even the reach state are not formed (or While the reach state can be formed, it does not develop into the SP reach) It is possible to appear in any of the effects according to the low expectation change pattern, but the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect ) May not be generated in the low expectation effect pattern but may be generated as an effect corresponding to the high expectation change pattern. Even with such a configuration, the degree of expectation when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs is the expectation when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs It can be said that it is lower than the degree.

  Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more suitably, it is possible to generate a transitionable "special effect state" based on that the special effect condition is satisfied, and in the "special effect state", the player can Every time the effect is accepted during the set time (effective period) in which the operation promotion image (for example, the bird's eye image or the gauge display) prompting the user to operate is displayed, a certain type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) It is desirable that after the operation reception according to the effect reception is performed (started), the effect is executed while the) is being suppressed. According to such a "special effect state", every time the set time (effective period) for which the effect reception is permitted is generated, the effect sound of a specific type (for example, the effect sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed by an amount It becomes possible to provide the stage effect about whether or not this stage effect (how much it is suppressed) apart from the expectation level suggested by the post-operation stage Thus, it is expected to further improve the game entertainment when the effect reception is permitted.

  In addition, an effect pattern (for example, high expectation change) in which "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can be sequentially executed within the symbol variation An effect corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern among patterns may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" on the relatively low expectation level occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation on the relatively high expectation level" (second suppression operation) Since there is a possibility that the “reception effect” will occur, it is necessary to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment when it is recognized by the player that the degree of suppression of the specified type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode) Will be able to

In addition, in order to more suitably suppress the decrease in game entertainment when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)"
・ When a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from among high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) that develop into SP reach (such as reach effect with background change) as a result of the fluctuation pattern judgment being performed, effect judgment Even if any result is obtained as (preliminary judgment etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern is generated when it progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, while “weak suppression mode (first suppression About the operation receptionist production) "
-Even when the above-mentioned specific fluctuation pattern is selected, even if the special result is not obtained in the effect judgment (predictive judgment etc.), the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern does not occur even if it progresses to a predetermined timing When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (predictive determination or the like), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern occurs when the effect has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern As compared with when “does not occur”, when the effect is accepted in the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)”, the ratio in which the post-operation effect is executed in a high expectation mode is higher It is desirable to

  In such a configuration, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" necessarily occurs in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" Does not necessarily occur, and when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” has a high expectation after operation It becomes possible to draw attention to whether or not the “weak suppression mode (the first suppression operation reception effect presentation)” occurs because the rate at which the is performed becomes high. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the first suppression operation reception effect) is generated.

  FIGS. 395 to 397 show “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” in the rendering according to the high expectation variation pattern (for example, the specific variation pattern). ]] Is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in, when generating sequentially. FIG. 395 shows an example of rendering when operation detection occurs relatively early after the set time (effective period) occurs, and FIG. 396 compares after the set time (effective period) occurs. FIG. 397 shows an example of effect in the case where the operation is detected at the extremely late stage, and FIG. 397 shows an example of effect in the case where the operation is not detected within the set time (effective period).

  Now, as a result of the start condition being satisfied (deferred consumption) and fluctuation pattern determination being performed, "specific fluctuation pattern" in "high expected fluctuation pattern developed to SP reach (reach presentation with background change, etc.)" If is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs effect determination (prediction determination and the like) corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern. Then, after this, the variation design of the decorative symbol (such as the depiction of the effect according to the specific variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production The effect (e.g., advance presentation effect) according to the result of (preliminary judgment, etc.) is additionally executed to the selected "specific variation pattern" itself (effect pattern).

  However, in the "specific change pattern", about the effect contents that appear after the timing tr40 (the timing in the SP reach state) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the change effect of the decorative symbol is started Is the same as that of the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. That is, first, when the timing tr40 comes, "a state in which the effect sound of a specific type (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or silence, even if any result is obtained as the advance effect determination. In this case, the state related to the suppression is referred to as the “strong suppression mode”, and thus the timing tr 42 (decorative symbol of When timing in the SP reach state) when a specific time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect comes, operation reception is permitted even if any result is obtained as the notice effect judgment An effect (effective period) is generated. Here, the operation reception effect that occurs in the presence of the “strong suppression mode” is referred to as “second suppression operation reception effect”.

  On the other hand, in the "specific variation pattern", when the timing tr51 (the timing before the development to the SP reach state) arrives, a predetermined time has passed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol is started, as the advance effect determination Under the condition that the special result is obtained, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is additionally generated for the symbol effect (rendering pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern. However, although it will be described later, the operation reception effect (effective period) generated at the timing tr 51 is different from the case of the operation reception effect (non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than that of the effect (strong suppression mode), processing may be performed to suppress the volume of “specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction)” under predetermined conditions.

  According to such a configuration, even when the effect corresponding to the “specific variation pattern” is being executed, when a special result is not obtained as the effect determination (such as the advance determination), as shown in FIG. The effect example shown in FIG. 392 will appear, that is, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” does not occur within the effect according to the fluctuation pattern, and the “strong suppression mode (second suppression) Only the operation reception effect) will be generated. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as the effect determination (such as the advance notice determination), as shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation within the effect according to the fluctuation pattern The “reception effect)” first occurs, and then the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 is further generated.

  In the example of effects shown in FIG. 395 to FIG. 397, since the contents of effects after the arrival of the timing tr 40 are as described with reference to FIG. 391, the explanation will be omitted here. In this case, for the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first acceptable sound is not the first mode shown in FIG. 391 or FIG. The related effects of the effect contents shown in FIG. 391, such as may be output in the second mode shown in FIG. 392, and the contents described above for another example and modification, are shown in FIGS. It goes without saying that the present invention is appropriately applied to the contents of the presentation after the timing tr40 (strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception presentation)) among the presentation examples to be performed.

  And, as described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 395 to FIG. 397, timing tr 51 (developed to SP reach state) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the change effect of the decorative symbol (effect according to the specific change pattern) is started. When a timing prior to the arrival of the effect arrives, an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated as a “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" generated at the timing tr51 in the fluctuation effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern,
-While the "sound of BGM playback" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in the non-suppression mode, set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is set, but within the set time (effective period) When the effect reception is made, “conditional suppression reception effect (FIG. 395) changes“ the sound of BGM reproduction ”from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (a mode having a relatively low suppression degree) triggered by the effect reception. (See (a) and (b)) ”and if no operation is detected for the operation means to be operated within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) in which the effect reception is permitted, The effect reception is not made, and as a result, each processing ("the sound of BGM reproduction" is changed from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode, or the after-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect Sound etc) is real The setting time without the (time) has finished elapsed "non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 397 (a), (b), see (f))"
It is made to generate as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception effect" executed by In addition, as a method of outputting the "sound of BGM reproduction" in the weak suppression mode, the volume value for the channel to which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is assigned is a case of the strong suppression mode (for example, volume value (audible volume It is possible to employ a method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, a volume value (audible volume) is “10”) whose suppression degree is lower than “0”).

  According to such “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic acceptance effect (first suppression operation acceptance effect)”, “effect sound of a specific type (a specific type of effect sound (unless the effect is accepted by the operation by the player) It is possible to make it appear that "non-suppression reception effect" shown in FIG. 390 and FIG. 394 is generated because there is no transition to “a state where the sound of BGM reproduction is output in the suppression mode”. It will be. That is, in this case, it is recognized for the first time that it is not "suppression reception effect" by changing to "a state in which the effect sound of a specific type (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode" Since it becomes possible, it is possible to improve the game interest by providing a surprise effect.

  In order to obtain such effects, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" can be generated depending on the result of presentation determination (such as advance notice determination). The variation pattern can be selected only when it is in a special effect state (for example, a pre-reading effect zone etc.), and when it is in the special effect state, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( The pattern of "big hit" appears when the symbol variation is stopped more than when the variation pattern can be selected depending on the result of the effect determination (eg, advance notice determination) and the variation pattern can be selected depending on the result of the effect determination It is desirable to make the ratio (the degree of expectation) be high. According to such a configuration, when “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect production” appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production (FIG. 390, FIG. 394)” appears. In addition to the above-mentioned surprise effect elements, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

  Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-described effects more suitably, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can be generated in any of the "normal presentation state" and the "special presentation state". In the “normal presentation state”, “non-suppression / non-automatic receptionist presentation (figure) according to one variation pattern (one variation pattern that is paired in a double) 390, FIG. 394) and “suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIG. 391, FIG. 392)” can be sequentially generated, and in the “special effect state”, one fluctuation pattern "Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) · non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" and "suppression (strong suppression mode) · automatic reception The effects (Fig. 391, Fig. 392) It is desirable that way.

  Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect", when the set time (effective period) has elapsed without reception of the effect, "a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) (3) without progressing to the state where “is output in the weakly suppressed mode” is applied to the subsequent effects (FIG. 397). That is, in this case, which of "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect production" and "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect production" has occurred, and consequently "normal production state" and "special performance state" It is difficult to recognize in which situation it is, and since the rendition after that comes to be developed, “it is output in the non-suppression mode that the expectation is relatively low” Even in the case where the operation reception effect (effective period) at the time of occurrence of "" occurs, it is possible to more actively prompt the operation by the player.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 395 to FIG. 397)” occurs and “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( In the case where “FIG. 390)” is generated, the same effect sound (first mode) is output over the same time as the above-mentioned acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound). Suppression mode) · It is made difficult to recognize which of the non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 395 to FIG. 397) and the “non-control / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” is generated.

In addition, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) · non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395-397)" is the same as when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 390)" occurs,
・ When timing tr50, which is a little earlier than the set time, comes, output of "acceptance sound (first acceptable sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained in the form straddling timing tr51. point,
· A point where a second permissible sound (for example, a message sound) is not output but only a first permissible sound (for example, a sound effect) is output · A set time (effective period) is set When the timing tr51 arrives, an overhead image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, which looks over the operation means being operated by the operation reception effect, and suggests the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. We adopt each each constitution such as point that gauge indication is carried out each and so on, too, and "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode), non-automatic receptionist effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" and "non-suppression, etc." It is made difficult to recognize which of “non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” is occurring. Therefore, as a method of displaying a bird's-eye view image or a gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2) is adopted as in the case where "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect effect (FIG. 390)" occurs. It is desirable that the same mode as the example of effect shown in FIG. 390 be adopted for the timing at which the display images (the bird's eye image, the gauge display) are made non-display based on the generation of the effect reception. desirable.

  Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” according to this embodiment, the setting time (effective as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 390) When the effect is accepted at the timing tr 51 a, tr 52 a (FIG. 395 (c), FIG. 396 (c)) that “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” is in an output state after the period The time (effective period) itself is ended, while the "acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated halfway, but the timing at which it is outputted as the first acceptable sound (the same as when there is no operation) The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 397 (c)).

  According to such a configuration, even after the effect reception has been made by the operation of the player, only by listening to the reception permission sound (the first permission sound), “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception It becomes difficult to recognize which of the effect (FIG. 395 to FIG. 397) and the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” is occurring. That is, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, the state in which the effect sound of the specific type (sound of BGM reproduction is output in the weak suppression mode) Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made, it is expected that tension will be suitably maintained each time the effect is accepted.

  In addition, even in "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic acceptance effect (Figs. 395 to 397)", if the effect is accepted within the set time (effective period) (in the figure, timing tr 51a, 51b ), After operation according to the effect reception, after operation operation display (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and after operation sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) And at least is supposed to occur. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, with regard to the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display), even if the effect reception is made at any timing within the set time (effective period), it is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr52. On the other hand, as to the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is received. However, even when the effect reception is made at any timing, in the state where the timing tr 52 has not ended, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) It is required to set to maintain the output state.

  In addition, with respect to acceptance acceptable sound and operation related display appearing in “Conditional suppression / non-automatic acceptance effect (FIG. 395 to FIG. 397)”, appropriately adopt another example or modification to the effect example shown in FIG. It is desirable to use the same approach as each other.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” generated at the timing tr51 in the effect according to the specific variation pattern is the effect A process of outputting the "sound of BGM reproduction" in a weakly suppressed mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) is performed over a predetermined fixed time from the timing of reception.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect is accepted at a relatively early timing tr 51 a after the set time (effective period) occurs (FIG. 395), the “sound of BGM reproduction” is in the weak suppression mode (the suppression degree is The timing tr53a for returning from the relatively low mode to the non-suppressed mode also comes relatively early, and as a result, the period in which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is set to the weakly suppressed mode and the "sound of BGM reproduction" A relatively long interval (timing tr53a to tr40) is held between the period in which the signal is in the strongly suppressed mode. On the other hand, when the effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr 51 b after the set time (effective period) has occurred (FIG. 396), the timing at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode tr53b also comes relatively late, and as a result, the period when "sound of BGM reproduction" is set to the weak suppression mode and the period when "sound of BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression aspect is compared Only a short interval (timing tr53b to tr40) can be held.

  That is, in this case, as the timing at which the player performs the operation in the first suppression operation reception effect is later (as the timing is closer to timing tr52), the period when the "sound of BGM reproduction" becomes the weak suppression mode ends The time until the period for setting the sound of BGM reproduction to the strongly suppressed mode starts becomes short. Thus, depending on whether the timing at which the player performs the operation in the first suppression operation reception effect is early or late, the timing at which the strong suppression aspect appears comes relatively early after the weak suppression aspect is ended, and is continuous. It can appear as if the suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) is being performed, or the timing of the strong suppression mode comes relatively late after the weak suppression mode is ended, and the “strong suppression mode” May become unrecognizable ", so that it becomes possible to improve the game interest from being able to make people feel uneasy.

  In addition, in this example of production, the length of time for which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the weak suppression mode (predetermined fixed time) is the effect after the operation (liquid crystal display, effect sound) It is set the same as the execution time, but it is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time during which “sound of BGM playback” is output in the weak suppression mode is set to be equal to or longer than the execution time of the effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound) after operation. It is desirable to make it possible to emphasize the effect after the operation when the effect reception is made. Furthermore, even if the effect is accepted at the latest timing tr 52 of the set time (effective period) of the “first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)”, the weak suppression mode is It is desirable to set the length of time during which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the weak suppression mode so that the timing to end comes before the timing tr40 which starts the strong suppression mode. In addition, in this example of presentation, the time of timing tr51a-53a and the time of timing tr51b-53b are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the effects according to one fluctuation pattern,
-The first suppression operation reception effect (period from the timing tr 50 to the end of the operation after operation) which suppresses the effect sound of a specific type (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode) And · · second suppression operation reception effect to suppress effects sound of a specific type (for example, effect sound of BGM playback) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode) (post-operation effect is ended from timing tr40) Period)
Can be generated sequentially. And, as described above, the second suppression operation reception effect "is a variation pattern that will not be executed even if the effect mode (type of acceptance acceptable sound, operation target etc. may change depending on the result of the effect determination) The first suppression operation reception effect can occur on the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (such as advance notice judgment), while the effect is executed as “pattern effect based on ing.

  In addition, as described above, the first suppression operation reception effect is also in the effect determination (prediction determination, etc.) in the effect corresponding to the low expectation change pattern (predetermined change pattern) in which the second suppression operation reception effect is not generated. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, only one of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect occurs during the symbol change, and the first suppression operation reception effect and the first [2] There are cases where the suppression operation reception effects are generated sequentially.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the period from "the timing at which the weak suppression mode is ended" to "the timing at which the strong suppression mode is started" Since the variable period is set to be variable according to the made timing, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) is further performed after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is ended. This makes it possible to provide an effect on whether or not to occur, and this makes it possible to improve the game interest. When the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) occur sequentially, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) does not occur. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped) is higher than when only the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs. In addition, in the variation pattern that generates the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is before the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When it occurs, an aspect in which the second suppression operation reception effect has a higher expectation (for example, the first acceptable sound is output in the second aspect) than when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is not generated. The rate of being executed is higher.

  By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) occurs, the degree of suppression is high (second suppression operation reception effect of strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression As described above, the degree of expectation is different depending on whether the first suppression operation reception effect in the aspect). However, even if it is attempted to estimate whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode) when a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed. In fact, it is difficult to estimate without comparison, whether the degree of suppression is in a high state (strong suppression mode) or in a low state (weak suppression mode). In particular, in the case where the volume value at the time of suppression is not made to have a large difference between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, it is all the more so that the sense of tension when the operation reception effect occurs Can be suitably maintained, and the player can be attracted to the effect.

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are output when the set time (effective period) for which the effect reception is permitted is generated. The first allowable sound is output as the same effect sound for the same time (in the figure, output in the “first mode”). That is, in this case, even if the first acceptable sound is confirmed, it can be difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode). By this, it is possible to maintain tension with respect to the effect more suitably, and to attract more and more players to the effect.

  However, in fact, if it is not possible to guess at all whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect element which helps to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is within the period from the start of the operation reception effect to the end thereof. It will be prepared as follows in time-sequentially scattered form.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the above-described situation appears in which the first allowable sound can be output as the same effect sound as each other over the same time (output in the first aspect in the drawing) Even if it is, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode based on the first permissible sound.

  That is, even if the effect acceptance is made while the output state is in the first state, the first allowable sound to be output when the first suppression operation acceptance effect is generated does not end the output halfway, and is output over a predetermined time. While the first permission sound to be output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated is made based on the effect reception when the effect reception is made when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated. The output is terminated halfway (see FIGS. 395 and 396). In such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first allowable sound in any of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, and it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. While making it difficult to infer the feeling of tension by making it difficult to guess, the first allowable sound itself also has a function that helps in inferring whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. Since it has been made to make it possible, it becomes possible to control that the game interest is reduced without being able to make the estimation.

  In addition to the first aspect, the first allowable sound output upon generation of the second suppression operation reception effect can not be output upon generation of the first suppression operation reception effect (second aspect, third aspect, etc. Output is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the manner in which the first permissible sound is output, the mode may be a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode even if the effect acceptance is not made when the first permissible sound is in the output state. This makes it possible to easily make an assumption as to whether it is desirable to maintain the game interest. However, in order to maintain a sense of tension with respect to the effect, the output in the mode (the second mode, the third mode, etc.) which can not be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated It is desirable that the rate of execution be low.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, the second allowable sound is also output in addition to the first allowable sound, so that the second By checking whether or not the allowable sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, the second allowable sound may not necessarily be prepared, and only the first allowable sound may be output in any of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression are also provided for the operation related display (display prompting the operation) appearing within the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted. Since a difference is given to the operation reception effect, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode also by confirming the operation related display. However, with regard to the operation-related display, in addition to appearing to be delayed with respect to the acceptance allowable sound, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect have only a partial difference. Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension with respect to the presentation by leaving some difficulty in estimating whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is not possible to estimate whether the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is in effect when the output of the acceptance sound or the operation related display is finished. Also, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by confirming the execution mode of the effect after operation. That is, in the effect after the operation according to the first suppression operation reception effect, both "the effect by the liquid crystal display" and the "effect by the effect sound" are performed for "a certain period of time from the time when the effect reception was received" On the other hand, in the effect after the operation according to the second suppression operation reception effect, "the effect by the effect sound" is "that is performed for a certain time from the time when the effect reception was received", but "the liquid crystal display The effect by “is to be ended when the predetermined timing tr 44 arrives”. That is, in this case, in the effect after the operation according to the second suppression operation reception effect, the time from the end of the “effect by the liquid crystal display” to the end of the “effect by the effect sound” at the timing when the effect reception is made. Becomes variable, and a large shift comes to occur, so by confirming such shift, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. .

  However, even if the presentation elements useful for estimation are prepared in such a time-sequentially scattered manner, some players may not notice these, and as a result, it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If you can not guess, you will end up with a decline in interest in gaming.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM reproduction is produced based on the effect reception being made within the set time (effective period). Into a weakly suppressed mode. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the rendering sound of BGM reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the setting time (effective period) is not yet generated, Among them, a set time (effective period) is generated so that the effect can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) suppress a certain type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) Since the timing to be made to be different, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode also by confirming the timing.

  Moreover, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), there is no operation detection within the set time (effective period) When this happens, the set time ends without the automatic reception of the effect (see FIG. 397). That is, in this case, if there is no operation detection within the set time (effective period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) triggered by the reception of the effect for the specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound for BGM reproduction) Since there is no compensation for being unable to confirm the effect after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode is not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode.

  Further, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the process of setting the "bGM playback reproduction sound" to the strong suppression mode is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect It is set as the timing before or after it. Therefore, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM playback effect sound" to the weak suppression mode is ended is set to be later than the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode also by confirming the timing at which the "rendering sound for BGM reproduction" is returned to the non-suppression mode.

  Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect according to the above-described example of the effect, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), regardless of at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect reception is made. The length of the period in which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged (see FIGS. 395 and 396). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect, after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depending on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted. The length of the period in which the effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel with the post-operation sound effect by the speaker (second effect member) is changed (see FIGS. 395 and 396).

  According to such a configuration, a presentation effect can be generated in "when the presentation reception (operation) will be performed", so that the game enjoyment until the presentation reception (operation) is made can be suitably maintained. Become.

  Further, in the above configuration, it is difficult to distinguish which of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect having different execution modes of the effect after operation is generated as described above. The sound is output as the same effect over the same time, or the effect elements that help identify them are prepared to be scattered in time series. As a result, it is expected to suppress the decline in amusement while maintaining a sense of tension over the effects.

  Further, in the above configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect having different execution modes of the effect after the operation can be mixed together within the effect according to one fluctuation pattern. From this, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension about "when the effect reception (operation) is to be performed" whenever the operation reception effect occurs. In addition, in order to obtain such effects, in addition to the aspect in which the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are mixed within the effect according to one fluctuation pattern, an effect according to one fluctuation pattern It is desirable that an aspect in which only the second suppression operation reception effect (or the first suppression operation reception effect) appears within a plurality of times is made executable.

  In addition, if it is aimed to obtain only the effect by the effect of "when do you perform the effect reception (operation)", the effect of the specific type in the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect The output in the non-suppressed mode may be maintained without suppressing the sound (the effect sound of BGM reproduction).

  In addition, regardless of which timing within the set time (the effective period) the effect is accepted, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) ) For operation acceptance effects where the length of the period in which the effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel with the operation after the operation is unchanged is a condition that a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (such as advance notice judgment) It is desirable that it be possible to generate the symbol and that it can not appear as a symbol effect (rendering pattern) based on the variation pattern.

  That is, in this case, by confirming the execution mode of the effect after operation, it can be inferred that the special result is obtained in the preliminary effect determination (the expectation is relatively high). It becomes different from the fluctuation pattern which always occurs regardless of the result of the notice effect judgment, and it is expected to improve the fun of the game when it is recognized that it is additionally performed unlike the effect (pattern effect) of itself. It will be. It should be noted that the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) depend on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted. The second suppression operation acceptance effect, in which the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel, changes, is generated only as an effect (pattern effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself. The variation pattern may be generated both as an effect (pattern effect) of the variation pattern itself and in a condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as advance notice determination).

  In addition, about the weak suppression mode which outputs "the effect sound of BGM reproduction" with the suppression degree lower than the strong suppression mode, when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur), it may appear You may That is, in this case, after the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, the weak suppression mode is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without providing the operation opportunity. And the ratio according to which the degree of suppression is further increased until symbol fluctuation is stopped as the number of times of the weak suppression mode including the first suppression operation reception effect increases in the effect according to one fluctuation pattern If the ratio (the ratio at which the second suppression operation reception effect is further executed) is increased, it is possible to further improve the effect through the suppression state of “the effect sound of BGM reproduction”. In addition, when the effect is accepted within the set time (effective period) that occurs while "the effect sound of BGM playback" is not in the suppression mode, "the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases (figure Furthermore, it is possible to add further entertainingness to the presentation of the embodiment shown in 390 or the embodiment shown in FIG.

  In addition, the strong suppression mode with respect to "the effect sound for BGM reproduction" may also be able to appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the second suppression operation reception effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "rendering sound for BGM reproduction" is set to the strongly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the strongly suppressed mode is returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode without giving the operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect on whether or not the operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

  Further, in the example of effects shown in FIG. 395 to FIG. 397, when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated, “effect sound for BGM reproduction” is displayed based on the fact that the effect reception is made within the set time (effective period). It was made to make it a suppression aspect (weak suppression aspect). However, instead of this, even when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated, "the effect sound of BGM reproduction" before the setting time is generated as in the case where the second suppression operation reception effect is generated. In the suppression mode (weak suppression mode), a set time (effective period) may be generated in which the effect reception is permitted among the suppression modes (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same variation pattern is selected, “prediction sound of BGM reproduction” is generated when the predetermined timing comes, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the presentation determination (such as advance notice determination). Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is selected or the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, it is possible to widen the range of the effect. In the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which “the effect sound of BGM reproduction” is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as the timing at which the post-operation effect is ended or later than that. It is desirable to make it come.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and 395 to 397, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the “effect sound for BGM reproduction” is a strong suppression mode (suppression mode or The processing to make silent output or non-output state) was made to end at the same timing as or before the end timing of the post-operation effect, but the post-operation end timing has come You may make it finish later. Moreover, in this case, as long as at least the special symbol (decorative symbol) is in motion (unless the symbol variation is stopped), even if "the effect sound of BGM reproduction" is not returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode Good.

  As described above, the acceptance permissible sound may not be generated slightly before the set time (effective period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (effective period).

  In the operation reception effect (second suppression operation reception effect) in the strong suppression mode shown in FIG. 391 to FIG. 393 and FIG. 395 to FIG. 397, the display effect after the operation on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) (liquid crystal display ) Is terminated at a predetermined timing tr44 in the effect according to the variation pattern, while the effect sound output (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) is accepted for the effect It shall be ended when a fixed time has passed from time to time. However, instead of this, both after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are fluctuated It is also possible to end each at a predetermined timing in the effect according to the pattern, or after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), and a speaker (second effect member) Both the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the effect reception is made.

  In addition, the effect sound of the specific type to be suppressed (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is the timing when the effect changes in the effect according to the change pattern or the start of pattern change (for example, SP reach effect is started It is output triggered by the arrival of timing etc.). On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started from indeterminate timing (desired to be operated) within the set time.

  The specific variation pattern described in the example of effect shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392 and the particular variation pattern described in the example of effect shown in FIG. It may be a fluctuation pattern. Further, the special effect state may be an effect state when the big hit probability concerning the big hit determination is relatively high, instead of the pre-read effect zone.

  In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the “specific type of effect sound” is set to a specific suppression value (a number larger than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode and output in an audible state The strong suppression mode is to make "a specific type of effect sound" inaudible (output in silence (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end channel assignment)). Good.

  Further, in all of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is used as the operation target and operation opportunities are given in the same operation mode. In this respect, the “first suppression operation reception effect” only uses the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode), but the “second suppression operation reception effect” refers to FIGS. 391 and 392 As described above, “when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when selecting the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation target based on the result of the preliminary presentation effect determination (second operation mode ")" Has become. Therefore, when the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it can be easily recognized that the strong suppression mode is not the weak suppression mode. It should be noted that in the case of selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode) and the case of selecting the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode), the effect is accepted. The corresponding effects are the same.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is:
The first operation mode in which the operation receiving unit (the part touched when the player operates) is not moved when the setting time (effective period) occurs, and the operation receiving unit by the driving force when the setting time (effective period) occurs An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second mode of operation to move to a specific position. Here, the “first operation mode” assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” gives an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001. 198 (A3) etc. that the sword decorative body 5001 is "one that can give the player an operation opportunity while moving to a specific position". As described above. However, the “first operation mode” and the “second operation mode” may be respectively provided to one operation means (one operation receiving unit), and an operation opportunity may be given by any of these modes.

And, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-A non-suppressed operation reception effect in which from the generation of the set time (effective period) to the execution of the effect after the operation is performed while outputting the specific type of effect sound (effect sound for BGM reproduction) in the non-suppressed mode, and -A suppression operation reception effect is prepared for outputting a specific type of effect sound (effect sound for BGM reproduction) in a suppression mode or silent state or in a non-output state, and further, as a suppression operation reception effect
-The first suppression operation reception effect that suppresses the effect sound of a specific type (for example, effect sound for BGM playback) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode) (for example, the above-mentioned "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect And the second suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-mentioned “suppression / automatic reception,” which suppresses the effect sound of a specific type (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) with a relatively high suppression degree (strong suppression mode) Production)
Have prepared.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception effect, further,
-In the first type of operation mode with respect to the operation means, while the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed in the strongly suppressed mode (in the suppressed mode or in the silent state or in the non-output state) (In this case, the restricted movement non-reception reception effect to which the operation opportunity with the operation button 410 is given, and · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · In the second operation mode (here, with the sword decorative body 5001 removed) with respect to the operation means), the control movement reception effect under the control is given, By preparing, it is intended to further improve the rendering when the operation opportunity is given.

  FIG. 398 shows an example (suppressed movement acceptance effect under control) that appears in “When the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)” in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) It is a time chart which shows. In the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), for the effect example (suppressed non-movement acceptance effect) that appears in “When the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)”, This is as described with reference to FIG. 391 and FIG. 395 (period from the timing tr 40 to the end of the effect after the operation) and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 398, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression and automatic reception effect), also in the case where “the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”, the second suppression operation reception In the effects (suppression and automatic reception effect), "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation object (first operation mode)" is basically the same as in the part where there is no notice of particular mention (FIGS. 391, 392, 395 to 397), it is possible to appropriately adopt the related effects described above, and other examples and modifications.

  However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, the processing for moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position by the driving force when the set time (effective period) occurs Although it is required to carry out, there is a problem as to when to carry out the process.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state or probability changing short gaming state), first, as shown in FIG. 398 (c) and (h), As long as the timing tr40 at which the specific type of effect sound (effect sound for BGM reproduction) is set to the strongly suppressed mode does not arrive, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. Therefore, for example, when the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, the operation opportunity in the second operation mode even if the set time for which the effect reception is permitted occurs. Is not given, and the operation opportunity in the first operation mode will be given. That is, in this case, as long as the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound for BGM reproduction) is not in the strong suppression mode, the player is no longer in the second operation mode even if the operation opportunity is given. It becomes possible to suppress the operation in the operation mode on the wrong side.

  On the other hand, when the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound for BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode (timing tr40), the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode while the strong suppression mode is set. There are two possibilities, that is, and the case where an operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, the player is triggered by the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound for BGM reproduction) becoming the strong suppression mode as “in which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode an operation opportunity is given As a result of being able to concentrate on '', it is possible to suppress the occurrence of operation errors among these.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by concealing which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given until immediately before the operation opportunity is given, from the timing tr 40 It is designed to suitably maintain a sense of tension and enjoyment of the game from the time the effect is accepted to the time the effect is started after the operation. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and 398 (h), when the timing tr42 at which the set time (effective period) occurs comes, the movement to the specific position by the operation receiver is started It is supposed to Here, when the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the degree of expectation (proportion of the big hit symbol appearing when the symbol variation is stopped) is higher than the case where the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. The notice effect judgment is made to be as follows.

  However, in this case, the effect reception itself is in a permitted state during a short time after the set time (effective period) occurs (during the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed) Nevertheless, since it is difficult to operate the operation receiving unit properly, the length as the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced, which may reduce the fun of the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and 398 (d), for the time required to move the operation receiving unit from the original position to the specific position, the acceptance acceptable sound Among the (first acceptable sound), the time is set to be shorter than the time until the first mode of the shortest output time ends the output. Thereby, even if any aspect (in addition to the first aspect, the above-described second aspect, third aspect, etc.) is output as the acceptance acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound), the effect acceptance is performed in the middle of the output state As a result, it is possible to make it possible to perform the output operation in the middle (the output end is possible in the middle), and even when the second operation mode appears, it is difficult to cause a rendering problem.

  Also, although this will be described later, in this embodiment, there is no operation on the operation receiving portion, and the operation receiving portion is moved to the specific position by the driving force for the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force. It moves at a higher speed so as to be shorter than the time required to move from the position to the original position (see FIG. 398 (h)). According to such a movement mode, it is possible to appeal a situation where efforts are made so as to reduce substantially the time to be substantially cut off as the set time (the effective period), and it is a game by the time being cut off It is expected to suppress the dissatisfaction of people.

  Moreover, in order to suppress such dissatisfaction more suitably, when generating the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect effect), the non-suppression shown in FIG. 390 as the set time (effective period) For the set time (effective period) of the operation reception effect of the mode (from timing tr31 to the effect after operation) or the operation reception effect of weak suppression mode (from timing tr50 to the effect after operation shown in FIG. 395) It is desirable to set a time value having a length equal to or longer than the time required to move the unit from the original position to the specific position. According to such a configuration, in the case of executing the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) in the second operation mode, a longer time value that has more than enough to compensate for the time that is substantially reduced Since a set time (effective period) is generated, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment. In this case, in order to make the program common, setting time with the same length may be set even when executing the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) in the first operation mode. desirable.

  However, as described above, during the times tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated, the effect is not substantially accepted, and the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced. In view of the above, when generating the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), the operation reception effect of the non-suppression mode shown in FIG. 390 (from timing tr31 to after operation operation effect) as the set time (effective period) And for the set time (effective period) of the operation acceptance effect (from timing tr 50 to effect after operation) of the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. Set a time value with a length greater than or equal to time and time from timing tr42A to tr43 after activation of the automatic button function. Rukoto can be said to be more desirable. Also in this case, in order to achieve commonality of the program, set a set time having the same length even when executing the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) in the first operation mode. Is desirable.

  Further, as described above, in the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being performed in the second operation mode and there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the same figure. As shown in 398 (a), (h) to (l), the effect reception is automatically generated at timing tr 42A, and based on the effect reception, the post-operation display effect in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) (Liquid crystal display) and effect sound output (effect sound) after operation by the speaker (second effect member) are at least respectively executed as effect after operation. However, in this case, although it is clear when viewed from FIGS. 398 (g) and 398 (l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) becomes short. Therefore, there is concern that the game interest will decline.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 398 (h), the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being performed in the second operation mode. If there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, "the speed at which the operation receiving unit is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is moved from the original position to the specific position It's daringly slower than "speed of time", so that it will be kept moving for a relatively long time. According to such a configuration, the operation receiving unit transmits the movable presentation (post-operation presentation) in exchange for shortening of the execution time of the display presentation (liquid crystal display) after operation in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation member). Since it becomes possible to expect to function as a part of

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 398 (h), “Moved effect from specific position to original position” by the operation receiving unit is after operation in response to automatic generation of the effect reception (automatic button function) It is started when a predetermined timing in the middle of the execution of the effect comes, but it may be started at the timing tr42A where the acceptance of the effect is automatically generated as in the post-operation effect.

  However, even if "moving from a specific position to an original position" is performed at a slow speed, it may not be possible to earn enough time as a movable effect with this alone, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain game interest. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 398 (h), after the operation receiving unit is moved from the specific position to the original position (or a position near the original position), vibration presentation is performed to vibrate the operation receiving unit. The period from the start of movement from the specific position to the original position (or a position near that position) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving portion is "by the operation receiving portion not operated by the player". It is made to function as a movable presentation period. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably realize the movable effect using the "operation receiving unit not operated by the player", and as a result of automatic generation of the effect reception, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) It is expected to suitably maintain the effect when the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the above becomes short. In this case, if the operation receiving unit is made to emit light in a state where the operation receiving unit is moved from the specific position to the original position, it is more preferable that the operation receiving unit is used as a movable effect. It is possible to appeal to

  Here, for the movable effect period (moving time from the specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the “operation receiving unit that has not been operated by the player”, is the timing tr44 when the strong suppression mode ends? It is desirable that the timing be terminated before the timing tr44. As a result, the effect sound of the specific type is returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode, and it is possible to smoothly promote the progress (switching of effects) in the contents of the effect according to this.

  In addition, as a second allowable sound (message sound), a message sound such as "Katanai!" Differs from the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect production) is performed in the first operation mode. A message display such as "press down" and a bird's-eye view image based on "sword decoration image SYG" may be displayed as an operation-related display or an operation-related display, so that an operation error can be less likely to occur. become.

  In addition, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), no operation opportunity is given in such a second operation mode, but the "specific type of effect sound" is set to the weak suppression mode. If an operation opportunity is given under the control, it may also promote the operation error when the recognition of which one of the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode appears is mistaken. In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 395 to FIG. 397, when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs, the operation opportunity is performed with the “specific type of effect sound” in the weak suppression mode. Since the weak suppression mode is made to appear based on the effect reception being made without giving it, a useless sense of tension and anticipation that "the operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be given" It will be possible to provide an effect without having it.

  In the example of the effect (second operation mode), even when the operation receiving unit is operated within the set time, as in the case where the operation receiving unit is not operated within the set time, FIG. As shown in c), when a predetermined timing (same timing) within a period in which the post-operation effect is being executed comes, the vibration effect is made to vibrate the operation receiving portion. According to such a configuration, regardless of at which timing the post-operation effect occurs, the vibration effect is performed when a predetermined timing before the timing tr 44 when the strong suppression mode ends is reached As a result, it can be suggested that the strong suppression mode will be ended soon and new presentation progress will appear.

  However, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, vibration presentation is started early based on the fact that the effect reception has been made by the operation, so that the effect after operation is being performed. A further improvement of the game interest may be achieved. That is, in this case, when the operation receiving unit is operated within the set time, the vibration effect is performed over a longer time than when the operation receiving unit is not operated within the set time.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed unless the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode. However, instead of this, the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is the non-suppression mode when the effect reception is permitted when the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strongly suppressed mode. The ratio at which the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode than when the effect reception is permitted when the effect sound of the specific type (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the weak suppression mode or the ratio (0 Or 100) may be increased.

  In addition, in the example of each effect (FIGS. 192 to 398) described above, in the operation reception effect where the automatic button function can be activated, the operation button effect is not activated as the set time (effective period). It is desirable to set a time value with a length greater than or equal to the "time from the activation of the automatic button function to the end of the setting time" for the setting time (valid period) . According to such a configuration, a set time (effective period) having a longer time value, which is more than compensating for the time substantially reduced as the period for which the effect reception is permitted, comes to occur. , It will be possible to preferably maintain the game interest.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect that may occur when in the normal gaming state,
・ Variation pattern based on the result of fluctuation pattern judgment Operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect production) to be executed as the effect (pattern effect) of itself It is ・ ・ that special result is obtained by the effect judgment (such as advance notice judgment) The operation reception effect (additional reception effect effect) to be executed as the effect performed additionally to the effect (effect pattern pattern) of the fluctuation pattern itself in the condition
At least to prepare.

  That is, “inherent reception effect” is selected (a special fluctuation pattern is selected) if a special result is obtained in the fluctuation pattern judgment (the judgment about which fluctuation pattern is to be executed) based on the result of the big hit judgment Is determined to be executed within the effect according to the determined fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, the "additional reception effect" is the "even if the predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect" is obtained by the fluctuation pattern determination (even if the predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected), It is not necessarily executed unless a result indicating that "additional reception effect" is to be generated is further obtained by effect determination (such as advance notice determination) according to the selected fluctuation pattern. Therefore, after the presentation according to the fluctuation pattern is started once, the effect judgment is made rather than the occurrence of the “inherent reception effect” that is linked to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) and the occurrence is determined It can be said that it is more useful for the player to generate the "additional reception effect" in which the generation is permitted depending on the result of the (preliminary judgment and the like), and it is more important in enhancing the game interest. In addition, even when the same effect contents (rendering pattern) appear as the effect according to the fluctuation pattern, when the “additional reception effect” occurs in the effect, the “additional reception effect” is generated in the effect. The percentage (expected degree) in which the jackpot symbol appears when symbol variation is stopped is higher than when symbol variation does not occur.

  In this point, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the internal reception effect that may occur when in the normal gaming state, a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of “BGM reproduction”) is a suppression aspect or In the case where the effect reception is permitted in silence output or in the non-output state, and in which the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of “BGM playback”) is output in the non-suppression mode There is a case where the receptionist of the production is accepted. On the other hand, in the additional reception effects that may occur when in the normal gaming state, the effect reception is not permitted while being output in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state, The effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is output in the non-suppression mode. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, additional effects can be added by paying attention to whether the effect sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence or is not output when the effect reception is permitted. It becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the reception effect will occur, and it is expected to maintain the game interest.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the inherent reception effects that may occur when in the normal gaming state are operated even if the operation is not detected within the set time for which the effect reception is permitted. Non-automatically executed in an automatic reception mode capable of generating a post-effect and when the operation is not detected within a set time for which the effect reception is allowed, the post-operation effect is not generated and the set time is ended There is a case where it is executed in the reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effects that may occur when in the normal gaming state are not performed in the automatic reception mode, but are performed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, the possibility that the additional reception effect is generated can be recognized by paying attention to whether the effect reception is automatically performed (automatic button function) within the set time. As a result, it will be expected to maintain the game interest until the effect reception is made.

  FIG. 399 is a time chart showing the contents of an effect that appears when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 399, when fluctuation pattern 1 is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination, first, in the effect judgment (such as the advance notice judgment according to fluctuation pattern 1) performed at the start of symbol fluctuation, the notice effect It is at least determined whether to execute A or not. As a result of the effect determination, when it is determined that the advance effect A is to be executed, the advance effect A is generated when the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 arrives, against the symbol effect (effect pattern) It will be additionally executed (timing tr61 to tr62), and when it is not determined to execute the notice effect A, the notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 comes. The symbol effect (rendering pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern 1 is to be executed.

  Here, when it is determined that the advance notice effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, when the timing tr 61 comes, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect change pattern 1 the effect of this itself (pattern Is performed additionally to the effect). Note that “perform additively” can be realized, for example, by displaying the notice effect A on a layer having a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the fluctuation pattern 1 itself appears. is there. Under the present circumstances, it may be made to display notice preparation A in the form which makes all of the symbol effects based on fluctuation pattern 1 invisible, and to make it invisible, or covers only a part of the symbol effects based on fluctuation pattern 1 The preview effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the lamp effect, the aspect of "the lamp effect according to the occurrence of the advance effect A" is output with priority over "the lamp effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 (effect pattern)". Further, in the case of the effect sound, the “effect sound according to the advance effect A” is allocated to a channel different from the “effect sound based on the change pattern 1”, whereby “based on the change pattern 1 (effect pattern)” "Effect sound according to the advance effect A" is additionally output with respect to the effect sound.

  FIG. 400 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 400, when fluctuation pattern 2 is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern judgment, first, in the effect judgment (such as advance notice judgment according to fluctuation pattern 2) performed at the start of symbol fluctuation, “addition It is determined at least whether or not to execute the “apparent reception effect”. Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this presentation example is the same as the “predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390”. Therefore, when it is determined that "additional reception effect" is to be executed as a result of this effect determination, "additional reception effect" is determined based on fluctuation pattern 2 (the predetermined fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 390). It will be executed additionally to the symbol effect (rendering pattern) when the timing tr31 in it comes (from the timing tr31 until the end of the operation after the operation), the effect of executing the "additional reception effect" If it is not determined that “additional reception effect” does not appear even if the timing tr31 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 2 arrives, the symbol effect (rendering pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern 2 is only executed Become.

  Here, for the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” based on the fluctuation pattern 2 (predetermined fluctuation pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode. Among them, the first permissible sound is output at timing tr31, the setting time (effective period) occurs at timing tr32, and the setting time ends at timing tr33 without the automatic button function being activated. Because these are as described above with reference to FIG. 390 and the like, the description will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400 is not particularly described as “the effect contents when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode” shown in FIG. 390. The parts are basically the same, and it is possible to appropriately adopt the related effects described above, other examples and modifications.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 400, an example in which the effect after operation according to the effect reception is executed in the form of the above-described other example in FIG. As stated. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, when the effect is received within the set time (effective period) (timing tr 32 a in the figure), based on the effect being received. And “post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)” and “post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)” as post-operation effects At least generate, but for this post-operation effect,
The "display after presentation (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (the first effect member)" is ended at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33 regardless of the timing at which the effect is received. ,
The “post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)” is executed in such a manner that it is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing when the effect reception is made. It will be.

  FIG. 401 is a time chart showing the contents of an effect that appears when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 401, when fluctuation pattern 3 is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern judgment, any result is obtained by effect judgment (such as advance notice judgment according to fluctuation pattern 3) performed at the start of symbol fluctuation. Regardless of whether or not it is performed, at timing tr40 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 3, processing for setting the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" to the above-mentioned "strong suppression mode" is performed, At timing tr41 where the symbol appears, “inherent reception effect” will be generated as a symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (from the timing tr41 to the end of the operation after operation).

  Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this presentation example is the same as “the specific variation pattern shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 or 395 to 398 and the like”. Therefore, for the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. 401, the effect sound of “BGM playback” based on fluctuation pattern 3 (specific fluctuation pattern) is in a strongly suppressed mode (for example, silence (volume 0)). When the timing tr41 arrives while the output state or the non-output state is in the inaudible state), the first acceptable sound is output, the set time (valid period) occurs at the timing tr42, and the set time Although the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated when “timing tr 42 A” before timing tr 43, which is the end of the passage, comes without reception of effects, for these, see FIGS. 391 to 393 or The description will be omitted because it is as described above with reference to "395 to 398" and the like. That is, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. 401 is the same as the effect contents of “suppression / automatic reception effect” shown in FIG. It is possible to employ | adopt suitably about FIG. 393, FIG. 395-FIG. 398 grade | etc.,).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal game state, "internal reception" is received as a symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is set to the strong suppression mode. While "representation" may occur, "additional reception effect" which is executed additionally to the pattern effect based on the variation pattern is not generated, while "BGM reproduction" is performed. During the period when the effect sound of "is in the non-suppressed mode," inherent reception effect ", which is a symbol effect based on the change pattern, may occur, or in addition to the symbol effect based on the change pattern In some cases, an "additional reception effect" to be executed may occur.

  That is, in this case, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" based on the fluctuation pattern is in the strongly suppressed mode, the possibility that the operation reception effect is "additional reception effect" is excluded. As a result, it becomes possible to generate a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted while an environment is established in which the operation reception effect is performed in any mode. . On the other hand, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in the non-suppression mode, it can be recognized that the additional reception effect may be generated. It will be expected to maintain the game interest.

  In order to preferably obtain such effects, "additional reception effect" and "intrinsic reception effect" may appear in different fluctuation patterns 2, 3 etc. It is desirable that “additional reception effects” and “intrinsic reception effects” can be made to sequentially appear even within the effects according to the specific fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern 3). It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" be generated at a timing prior to the "intrinsic reception effect".

  More preferably, within the effect corresponding to one fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), "additional reception effect" and "intrinsic reception effect" in the non-suppressed mode of the effect sound of "BGM playback" Are allowed to appear one after another, and "inherent reception effect" can be further made to appear while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the strongly suppressed mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp which of the "additional reception effect" and the "inherent reception effect" is occurring depending on the state of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode) When it is difficult to grasp which of “additional reception effects” and “intrinsic reception effects” is occurring (non-suppression mode) appears, and the suppression mode for the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” Can improve the fun of gaming.

  Furthermore, when an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is set to a strongly suppressed mode within the symbol effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the intrinsic It is desirable that "additional reception effect" does not occur within a period from the end of the reception effect to the stop of the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the operation reception effect is the "additional reception effect" when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode. In addition to being excluded, the possibility of "additional reception effect" appearing before the symbol variation is stopped is also excluded, so "additional reception effect" occurs. In response to any expectation (incoming acceptance sound, type of operation means, type of effect after operation, etc.) in which the generated “inherent reception effect” is to be performed. You will be able to concentrate.

  In addition, when "additional reception effect" occurs, "inherent reception effect (both non-suppression mode and strong suppression mode)" occurs later than when "additional reception effect" does not occur. As described above, it is desirable that the rate of execution in a mode with a high degree of expectation (acceptable sound, type of operation means, mode of presentation after operation, etc.) be high.

  Also, as described above, when the effect sound of “BGM playback” is set to the strongly suppressed mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is always generated during the period when the strongly suppressed mode is set. May be In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are selected as the selection candidate in the variation pattern determination, “A strong suppression mode is set, but during the strong suppression mode, an operation reception effect (inherent reception effect effect) A variation pattern that does not occur is not included, and if it is set to the strong suppression mode, a variation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (internal reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode is included. . Alternatively, even if the effect sound of "BGM playback" is set to the strongly suppressed mode, the period of the strongly suppressed mode may be ended without the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) being generated. You may In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are selected as the selection candidate in the variation pattern determination, “A strong suppression mode is set, but during the strong suppression mode, an operation reception effect (inherent reception effect effect) A variation pattern that does not occur and a variation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode are included in the strong suppression mode, respectively. .

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “strong suppression mode”, the “strong operation” is Even if the player does not notice that the mode is "suppression mode", it is possible to recognize that the possibility that "additional reception effect" is occurring is excluded based on the following effect elements.

  That is, even when the "inherent reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", first, even when the first allowable sound is "additional reception effect" Even when the effect sound that can be output is output over the same time (in the figure, output in the “first mode”), not “additional reception effect” but “based on the first allowable sound”. It is possible to recognize that the "inherent receptionist presentation" is occurring. More specifically, the first allowable sound (refer to FIG. 400) output at the occurrence of the "additional reception effect" ends the output halfway even if the effect is accepted when the output state is in effect. While the output is made over a predetermined time without allowing it to be output, it is output when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode" The first allowable sound to be played (see FIG. 401) is to terminate the output halfway according to the effect reception when the effect is received when the output state is made.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "BGM playback" directing sound is in the "strong suppression mode", the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs in addition to the first acceptable sound, Since the second allowable sound is also output, the possibility of the occurrence of the "additional reception effect" is excluded by confirming whether or not the second allowable sound is output. It is also possible to recognize that However, as described above, the second allowable sound may not necessarily be prepared.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 400 and 401, the operation related display (display for prompting the operation) appearing in the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is also possible. If the "intrinsic reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode" (with message display), the "additional reception effect" is generated It is possible to differentiate between cases (without displaying a message), and it is possible to recognize that the possibility that "additional reception effects" are occurring is also excluded.

  In addition, in the "intrinsic reception effect" that occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", while the above-mentioned automatic button function can be activated, In the "additional reception effect", the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated, and this also excludes the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is occurring. It is possible to recognize.

  As described above, when "inherent reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", various effects other than the effect elements regarding the "suppression mode" Since a mode different from that when "additional reception effect" is generated appears in the element, the possibility that "additional reception effect" is generated is relatively excluded. It is possible to easily recognize, and it becomes possible to promote concentration on the "intrinsic reception effects".

  On the other hand, when "inherent reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in "non-suppression mode", common points are added with "additional reception effect" and various effect elements. By making it difficult to recognize which of the "inherent reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" is occurring, the "additional reception effect" is generated. It is intended to provide an expressiveness that makes people aware of the possibility.

  FIG. 402 is a time chart showing the contents of an effect that appears when “Inherent reception effect” as a symbol effect based on a fluctuation pattern is generated while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is set to the “non-suppression mode”. It is. Note that “inherent reception effect shown in FIG. 402” corresponds to the change pattern when “a change pattern different from the one that can generate the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401” is selected. It may be generated as a symbol effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same variation pattern (specific variation pattern) as the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401 is selected, it occurs as a symbol effect according to the particular variation pattern. .

  As shown in FIG. 402, the "intrinsic reception effect" that occurs in the "non-suppression mode" also occurs in the "strong suppression mode", and the "inheritance shown in FIG. 401". As in the case of “Permanent reception effect production”, even when any result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary judgment), it always occurs when a predetermined timing (here, timing tr71) in the symbol effect arrives It has become a thing.

  However, the first allowable sound (first mode) output upon generation of the “inherent reception effect” shown in FIG. 402 is the first permission output upon the generation of the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 400. As in the case of the sound (first aspect), even if the effect is accepted when in the output state, the output is not terminated halfway, but is output over a predetermined time (timing tr 72 a) . Therefore, when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, it is difficult to distinguish which of the "internal reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" is occurring based on this. .

  Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, the second allowable sound is not output together with the output of the first allowable sound (first aspect), and this point is also shown in FIG. 400. It is the same as "additional receptionist production".

  Further, in the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the operation means to be operated as an operation-related display (a display prompting an operation) appearing in a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted Only the insulted bird's-eye view image and the gauge display indicating the remaining time are displayed, and no message display is displayed, and in this respect as well as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400. It has become.

  Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, the operation opportunity is also given as the operation button 410, and the "sword decoration 5001" is not operated This is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 400 in this point.

  Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, when the operation detection is not performed within the set time (effective period), the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated, and the effect after operation is A timing tr73 at which the set time (effective period) ends without arrival is reached, and this point is the same as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400.

  Thus, when "internal receptionist effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode", the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode" Unlike in the case where "intrinsic reception effects" occur, various performance elements are common to the occurrence of "additional reception effects", and "additional reception effects" may occur You will be able to be aware of sex.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, "internal receptionist effect (inherent reception effect whose automatic button function is not activated) is performed while the effect sound of" BGM reproduction "is in the" non-suppression mode ". When "occurs", there are cases where the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is output, and the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) there is a case where the setting time occurs without outputting itself. . On the other hand, when the "additional reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode", the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output itself. The set time is not generated, and the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is always output.

  According to such a configuration, when the acceptance of the effect is permitted while the effect sound of the "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppression mode", the "inherent acceptance effect" is generated when the acceptance acceptable sound is output. In contrast to making it difficult to recognize which of the "additional reception effects" and the "additional reception effect" is generated, when the acceptance acceptable sound is not output, the "inherent reception effect" is not the "additional reception effect". It becomes possible to recognize that it is in the state of being generated. It should be noted that whether or not the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output when generating the "intrinsic reception effect" while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppression mode". It is desirable to be determined in accordance with the type of fluctuation pattern, not the effect determination. "Inherent reception effect" in the non-suppression mode in which the acceptance sound (first acceptable sound) is output, and "inherent reception effect" in the non-suppression mode in which the acceptance sound (first allowable sound) is not output In the case of, may be sequentially performed within the same symbol effect (for example, symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern).

  Further, according to the above configuration, when the operation acceptance effect in which the automatic button function is not activated appears, the “inherent acceptance effect” and the “additional acceptance effect” are generated when the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is output. While it is difficult to recognize which is occurring, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is “inherent reception effect” when the reception permission sound (first permission sound) is not output. It will be.

  In the "additional reception effect", it has been described that the first acceptable sound can be output in a mode different from the first mode based on the result of the presentation determination (preliminary decision), but the "differential reception effect" It may not be output when “internal receptionist effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in “non-suppression mode” (for example, “specification shown in FIG. 394 Aspects)). However, for the different aspect, it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of the first acceptable sound be lower than that output in the first aspect.

  With regard to the "inherent reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, with respect to the portion where there is no notice in particular, another example or modification of the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 may be used as appropriate.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 399 and FIG. 400, for convenience of explanation, it is illustrated as if the effect determination is performed while the symbol effect is being performed, but the effect determination is actually Is performed at the start of symbol variation.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 to FIG. 402, in the case of the effect after operation according to the effect reception, the case where the big hit is obtained in the big hit determination and the case where the big hit is dropped in the big hit determination You may make it different. For example, when a big hit is obtained by the big hit determination, it is as shown in FIG. 390 to FIG. 402, but when it is dropped as a big hit by the big hit determination, FIG. Post-operation effects may be performed in a mode different from the effect example shown in 402.

  As described above, conventionally, rendering control on the peripheral control board 1510 has been realized by executing a combination of a program for individually controlling various rendering devices, a program for linking a plurality of rendering devices, and the like. These programs are described by program code representing the operation contents and control procedure of the rendering device for each content of the notice in addition to the command related to the variation pattern, and are created by a highly skilled programmer. In liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data are called up in a frame where effects are executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, symbol, advance notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of gaming machines, it has been required to execute a wide variety of effects, and it has been necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, a high level of technology is required for individual programmers and the number of development steps is increased, making it difficult to secure personnel (programmers) that are both qualitatively and quantitatively required. Furthermore, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the number of man-hours required for the test for the operation check and the quality improvement of the gaming machine also increases.

  Therefore, although this is also described above, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 of this embodiment, in order to realize effects to be executed in cooperation with liquid crystal drawing (image display) by program code in order to shorten development period and improve quality Instead, the program data for the gaming machine is output by the tool for creating the liquid crystal rendering effect, and various effects are executed based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality. I am trying to do it.

  More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each indicating the content of an effect. Each of the blocks has a flag (usability information) indicating whether the effect based on the block can be performed. This flag (usability information) is stored, for example, as rewritable information on the RAM.

  In the scenario data, for example, blocks corresponding to the number of effects prepared as candidates that can be executed based on the result of the effect determination are configured to be combined in time series. That is, when the starting condition for starting symbol variation is established, the effect determination on which type of effect is to be generated among the effects is performed first, and when the result is obtained, Based on the obtained result, the flag (usability information) is set to ON for the block corresponding to the effect type for which the determination result to be executed is obtained, and the determination result to be executed is obtained. The flag (usability information) of the block corresponding to the effect type that has not been output is maintained in the OFF state. Thereby, after symbol variation (variation pattern) is started, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) in time series (every unit time (one frame)) to correspond to the block set in the ON state Only the effect of the type is selectively executed.

  Here, with regard to scenario data, different data may be prepared for each type of fluctuation pattern, or may be prepared independently of the fluctuation pattern. When prepared as different data for each type of fluctuation pattern, only blocks corresponding to the effect types that may occur separately for each fluctuation pattern will be configured as scenario data combined in time series, Among the blocks, only the flag (usability information) of the block determined as the execution target is operated to the on state. On the other hand, when prepared as data prepared in common for each variation pattern, blocks (numbers corresponding to the blocks) corresponding to all the effect types are configured as scenario data stored in a table structure or the like. Of these blocks, it may be realized by operating only the flag (usability information) of the block determined as the execution target in the ON state. In addition, scenario data prepared independently of the fluctuation pattern may be prepared corresponding to the type of processing read out while processing (analyzing) the block (see “described later. Scenario data related to effects after operation), in this case, scenario data corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern and scenario data not corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern are respectively prepared, which corresponds to the type of fluctuation pattern As for the scenario data that is not used, the processing load and the storage capacity can be suitably suppressed since the scenario data can be commonly used in the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns.

  However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects relating to lottery, effect and symbol substitution, and interactive effects for external input by the player occur, so each block operated in the on state is executed. By itself, it is impossible to realize all the rendition.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to the present embodiment, processing identification information (rendering SW) for calling a program for executing effects or executing predetermined control at a predetermined timing is in a block or block. Are set (embedded) in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data associated with. Here, the processing identification information (rendering SW) is prepared for the types of programs to be called, and each of them is set to the on state or the off state. Alternatively, processing identification information (rendering SW) that can always function as the on state may be prepared. As a result, when processing identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, etc., according to the type of the acquired processing identification information. The process of the content is called, and the called process is performed. The process identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called or indicates the number in the table in which the number of the program function to be called is stored. It may be

  When the peripheral control board 1510 acquires (detects) embedded process identification information while executing and analyzing scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, etc., a program function corresponding to the type of the acquired process identification information. Call dynamically (call back). Depending on the type (process content) of the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of the lamp, operation of the feature, etc.) It is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent rendering control, such as setting and updating of data in a predetermined area. As described above, by calling the program function based on the process identification information, it is possible to realize display or non-display of drawings by a plurality of blocks, effects, replacement of symbols, and interactive effects for external input by the player.

  The program function called by callback is incorporated in advance in the peripheral control unit 1530, and does not have to be newly created for each model of the gaming machine. Therefore, even if a designer or a plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge, it is only necessary to design and design various rendering contents, and other than that, set processing identification information that calls a previously defined program function. By this, it is possible to easily realize even complex rendering specifications. Further, by creating the presentation block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) in the composition unit of the presentation using the presentation creation tool, the development period can be significantly shortened, and in addition, the contents of the presentation can be obtained based on random lottery results. By performing a test using a flag (usability information) and process identification information without performing a test, simplification of the test process and significant reduction of the time required for the test can be realized.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game control means (main control) capable of giving a privilege based on the determination of the big hit and the predetermined determination result (big hit winning) obtained. Based on the substrate 1310), effect control means (peripheral control unit 1511) capable of executing processing relating to various effects based on fluctuation patterns according to the determination, and image data as a display area based on processing performed by the effect control means And image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) for outputting the information, and the effect control means reads out time-series image information (the above-mentioned scenario data and block, or liquid crystal presentation scheduler data), and the time-series image information And an image information processing unit capable of executing processing for displaying an image on the basis of.

  In addition, in time-series image information (the above-described scenario data or block, or liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, etc.) according to this embodiment, processing identification information may be included in at least a part of the image. The information processing means can acquire the process identification information from the time-series image information, and can call a process according to the type of the acquired process identification information. In this way, while performing processing relating to an image every unit time (for example, one frame), processing relating to a rendering element (a lamp, a sound, a movable body, etc.) different from the image is based on a schedule for displaying an image. Can be started, so that when one collaboration is realized by different staging elements to realize one stage, it is suppressed that the start time is shifted between the stage elements Become.

  Although this point will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-series image information read out when the specific variation pattern is executed as the variation pattern, the process identification information is acquired every unit time. It is designed to include an interval. In such a configuration, time-series image information which is data for specifying "processing for displaying an image" in a time-series manner, and when processing identification information which is data for specifying reading of processing is included in itself. Since the time series image information read out when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the fluctuation pattern is included in a section where the process identification information is acquired for each unit time, the fine timing Even in the case where it is necessary to perform the rendering process, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the effect with the display image.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect reception is performed while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state. The permitted special operation reception effect is made executable. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of the effect is permitted in the operation related display before the permission performed when the special operation acceptance effect is generated and the special operation acceptance effect The allowable operation related display performed when the camera is in the ON state is displayed based on mutually different time-series image information (the above-described scenario data or block, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, or the like). That is, in the special operation reception effect according to the above configuration, since the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state, the operation effect is produced. It will be expected to concentrate on However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the rendering performance will be poor by the amount by which the specific type of rendering sound is suppressed. In this respect, in the above configuration, the before-permission operation related display performed when the special operation reception effect is generated and the allowable operation related display performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect are performed. Since the display effects are displayed based on different time-series image information, it is possible to realize various effects for display effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation is not detected within the period in which the effect reception is permitted, the special operation reception effect capable of generating the effect after the operation is executed. It is made possible. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of the effect is permitted in the operation related display before the permission performed when the special operation acceptance effect is generated and the special operation acceptance effect The allowable operation related display performed when the camera is in the ON state is displayed based on mutually different time-series image information (the above-described scenario data or block, liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, or the like). That is, in such a special operation reception effect, even after the operation is not detected within a period in which the effect reception is permitted, it is possible to generate an effect after the operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the player can not perform the operation and as a result, the effect can not be confirmed after the operation. Moreover, in the above configuration, the operation related display before permission performed when the special operation reception effect occurs and the allowable operation related display performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect are as follows. Since display is made based on mutually different time-series image information, it is possible to realize versatile rendition also with regard to display effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game.

  Further, as described above, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed is read from the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data associated with the block, and the read information is subjected to liquid crystal display control It is possible to output to the unit 1512. Although this point will be described later, as a block, the block is read without passing the wait time (wait processing period) and the first type block read after passing the wait time (wait processing period) required for the predetermined timing to arrive It is supposed to prepare the second kind block.

  More specifically, the first type block is a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) until the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the variation pattern and the timing to start the effect comes. It can be configured to be read out later. For the second type block, for example, availability information corresponding to the second type block in a process called on the basis of the process identification information acquired from the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data associated with the first type block Can be configured to be read out without passing the wait time (wait processing period) by being set to the on state.

  That is, in this case, the second type block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data shared between a plurality of timings and a plurality of fluctuation patterns. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the effect design and the effect change as well as the expectation of promoting the reduction of the processing load and the memory capacity.

  Although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first time-series image information (first block or first liquid crystal effect) of the time-series image information (block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data) The second time-series image information (the second block or the second liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) can be read out while the processing based on the scheduler data is being executed, and the second time-series image information is read out The processing based on the second time-series image information is put into an execution state in place of the processing based on the first time-series image information in the middle of execution. That is, in this case, it is possible to save time and effort for terminating the processing based on the first time-series image information halfway, and reduction of the processing load and memory capacity can be expected.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “block” according to this embodiment will be described again. When it is assumed that the image displayed on the screen is composed of "a plurality of image elements (a plurality of layers)", it is prepared separately for those image elements (a layer), and to display the image elements The image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) is provided with a process for reading out information (image number) corresponding to the image data (moving image or still image) to be output.

  Here, the processing (processing in the peripheral control unit 1511) for reading out the information (image number) corresponding to the image data is executed in the “peripheral control unit steady processing (FIG. 95)” activated every frame. It is determined for each frame whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be displayed currently based on the “block”, and if there is the information, it is read out, Based on the information read out separately for the frame, a drawing list is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). Thus, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) reads out the image data based on the drawing list, creates a display image, and then outputs the image to the display area, thereby displaying the image on the effect display device 1600. An effect will be realized.

  Here, the "block" itself may be configured as a data structure that designates "information (image number) corresponding to image data" every unit time, and in this case, the "liquid crystal" described above It is possible to omit the need for preparing "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data" separately from the "block" since it has the function as the rendering scheduler data ".

  However, the “block” according to this explanation example is for identifying the type of “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data”, and is currently displayed based on the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data” associated with the “block”. It is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be made, and if there is such information, it is read out and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). A plurality of "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data" may be associated with one "block", and in this case, the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data" is to be executed in a predetermined order, or Alternatively, one of the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data" is selectively executed.

  Also, in the "block" according to this explanatory example, a "liquid crystal effect" in which a schedule for each frame regarding information (image number) corresponding to "image data in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512)" is described. In addition to scheduler data, information on which to execute as the process related to lamp emission, information on which to perform as the process related to movable body operation, or which as the process related to sound output It also contains information on how to execute. That is, in this case, if a "block" for realizing a specific preview effect is read out, "image processing in the effect display device 1600" related to the specific preview effect based on the "block", The processing relating to lamp light emission, the processing relating to movable body operation, and the processing relating to sound output are read out and executed respectively, so that different rendering elements (image, lamp, movable body, sound When one effect (specific notice effect) is realized in cooperation with each other, it is suppressed that the start time is shifted between the effect elements.

  And as mentioned above, the "block" constitutes one scenario data together with or alone with other blocks, and "block" in which the availability information is in the ON state among the scenario data. By performing (analyzing) selectively only, the effect in the aspect according to the result of the effect determination is performed.

  However, as far as scenario data and blocks are concerned, any data may be used as long as it has a relationship that “scenario data can be configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each indicating the content of an effect”, separately from “block”. The detailed implementation method is not limited, including the provision of “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data”.

  FIG. 403 conceptually illustrates an example of processing procedures when various display effects are realized using “scenario data” and “block” when a specific variation pattern is selected based on the result of the big hit determination. It is a time chart. Although “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data” is described as “animation list” in FIG. 403, these are synonymous.

  As shown in FIG. 403, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this explanatory example, scenario data is prepared separately for each layer. For example, in the scenario data of “layer 2”, a plurality of scenario data indicating the contents of symbol effects are provided. The blocks (symbol block A, symbol block B, symbol block C, symbol block D) are configured to be combined in time series. However, in this embodiment, scenario data such as scenario data of layer 1 and layer 5 which includes only one scenario data as contents indicating effects is also included.

  As will be described later, the scenario data according to this explanatory example also includes “that is configured to be able to selectively execute any one of a plurality of associated blocks”. In this case, by operating only the unavailability information corresponding to the selected block among the plurality of blocks in the ON state, and keeping the unavailability information corresponding to the other blocks in the OFF state, the plurality of blocks One of them is selectively executable. Alternatively, the block according to this explanation example includes “a block configured to be able to selectively execute any one of the plurality of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data associated with each other”, In this case, only the unavailability information corresponding to the selected liquid crystal rendering scheduler data among the plurality of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is operated in the ON state, and the non-availability information corresponding to the other LCD rendering scheduler data remains in the OFF state. By making the above, any one of the plurality of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data may be made selectively executable.

  Now, assuming that a start condition for symbol variation (pending and holding) is satisfied, the peripheral control unit 1511 first acquires information on various determination results from the main control substrate 1310. The information acquired in this way also includes information on variation patterns, and the peripheral control unit 1511 reads out scenario data corresponding to the information (variation patterns), and associates the scenario data as a candidate for execution. An effect determination is performed as to which block (rendering effect) is to be executed among the plurality of blocks (blocks corresponding to the preliminary effects and the like). Then, for a block (rendering effect) for which an effect determination to execute is made among a plurality of blocks (rendering effect) associated with the scenario data, the availability information is operated (set) to ON state, and executed For the block (rendering) for which the effect judgment to the effect is not made, the availability information is kept in the OFF state.

  In addition, with regard to the availability information associated with each block (effect), when starting scenario effect (e.g., variation effect by decoration symbol) when scenario data is read, it is operated (set) to an off state ing. Then, based on the scenario data read out in this way, the above-described process is performed as to which block's availability information is to be operated (set) in the on state.

  Here, with regard to “blocks” whose availability information is operated (set) in the on state when starting the symbol effect, it is executed (analyzed) immediately after the symbol effect is started based on the scenario data, or the scenario It is executed (analyzed) following the other block (rendering) started based on the data, or executed at the timing after passing a predetermined waiting time (waiting processing period) for the scenario data or block ( It will be analyzed. However, the blocks (effects) also include “those which may be executed at a plurality of timings in one fluctuation pattern” and “thirks which may be executed in a plurality of fluctuation patterns”. That is, even if it is an effect mode that "the same content appears, if the mechanism is made to operate (set) the availability information of all blocks to be executed within the variation when starting the symbol effect" If the execution timings are different, it is necessary to prepare scenario data (or blocks) in which different wait times (wait processing periods) are set. That is, in this case, although different data are prepared in spite of the same rendering content and rendering is performed based on the data, there is concern that the processing load and memory capacity are adversely affected.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific variation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always targeted for execution, but the specific block (specific effect) is executed when executing the symbol effect. The symbol effect can be started in the off state without operating (setting) the availability information of the) in the on state. As such specific blocks (specific effects), in FIG. 403, “Erase EF block E”, “Operation waiting block E”, “Post operation block E”, etc. correspond to these specific blocks. Will be described later. Among these, “block E after operation” is executed as an effect (effect for which an effect content dedicated to the big hit is prepared) that clearly indicates whether the player has won or failed the big hit.

  In addition, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, even in the case of a block (representation) for which a result indicating execution as a result of the effect determination is obtained, this is also executed with another variation pattern or another timing. It is possible to start the symbol effect in the off state without operating (setting) the availability information in the on state when executing the symbol effect. Such a block corresponds to “operation waiting block A” or “appearing EF & operation waiting block D” in FIG. 403, but these blocks will also be described later.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403, it is assumed that the start condition is satisfied at timing ts1. Therefore, at timing ts1, scenario data separately determined for each layer is read out in a manner corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern. Subsequently, an effect determination is performed on which of the block associated with the scenario data thus read out and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is to be operated (set) in the ON state. An operation (setting) is performed on the availability information based on the result of the effect determination. Then, the scenario data is separately executed (analyzed) separately for each layer while the operation (setting) on the availability information is performed in this manner, so that the rendering progresses in a mode according to the result of the rendering determination.

  However, instead of this, even if scenario data determined in advance separately for each layer is read corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern, the effect determination according to the type of fluctuation pattern may be performed. Good. That is, in this case, the result of the effect determination performed before the scenario data is read out, the block associated with the read scenario data, and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data It will operate on the basis of.

  Here, in “layer 1” of the plurality of layers, “background image” displayed from the time when the symbol effect is not executed (the symbol is stopped and the game is not executed). It corresponds to the scenario data block (normal background block). Therefore, in the “layer 1”, a new block is not read out when the timing ts1 arrives, and the block (normal background block) that is already in the execution state is continuously executed ( Analysis).

  More specifically, in the normal background block, “which image data” should be output at “which timing” as “image data for background image” stored in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 “Liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for normal background”, which is information (time-series image information) for the above, is associated with each other. That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511, the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for normal background" is executed (analyzed) every unit time (one frame), and as a result, "image data (moving image or Whenever information corresponding to “still image” is acquired, the information is transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. At this time, one information (drawing list) may be created together with the information obtained from another frame, and may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 as the drawing list. As a result, the background depiction (normal background) according to the schedule defined in the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for normal background” is displayed on the rendering display device 1600. For blocks and scenario data that associate this "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for normal background", the timing when the power-on processing is finished, the corresponding rendering state (normal rendering state, high probability rendering state, special rendering mode, etc. It is desirable that the background image (background moving image) having the same content is set as time-series image information to be loop-displayed at predetermined time intervals, as the timing of entering into. In addition, the information corresponding to “image data for a background image (moving image or still image)” is displayed on the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 without creating information (drawing list) together with information obtained from another frame. You may make it transmit with respect to. The point is that the information corresponding to “image data (moving image or still image) for background image” may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in any manner.

  The normal background image displayed on the “layer 1” based on the normal background block is an SP on the “layer 3” based on the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” described later. When the background image at the time of reaching is displayed, the background image on the “layer 3” is preferentially displayed and thus the effect display device 1600 is not displayed. However, even if the background image at SP reach is displayed on “layer 3” as internal image processing, “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for normal background” on “layer 1” Processing on the normal background image based on is continuously performed, and is not put into a non-execution state according to the processing situation applied to the SP background image on “layer 3”. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 403, the normal background is displayed again in the period X after the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the time of SP reach is finished, and thus the normal background is displayed. Under this, a "symbol block D" for displaying a stop symbol is to be executed. As a result, when the jackpot symbol appears, it is possible to easily recognize which effect state has been won, and it is possible to suitably promote game understanding.

  On the other hand, the “layer 2” corresponds to a block (symbol block) of scenario data related to “render symbol (symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600)”. In the specific fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 403, since the SP reach effect is developed, the scenario data of “layer 2” is associated with “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for change before reach”. "For symbol" for which "symbol block B" which associates "block for symbol A" with "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for normal reach variation" and "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach variation" It is defined to sequentially execute (analyze) “block C” and “symbol block D” in which “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for stop symbol” is associated.

  However, in recent years, during the period when the SP reach background is displayed, the “render pattern” is often displayed smaller in the effect display device 1600, and further, “once the SP reach background is displayed, the normal background is temporarily displayed. The presentation may be made such as to be returned, and then the SP reach background is displayed again. That is, in this case, there is a concern that a shift may occur when there is any abnormality, by merely executing (analyzing) the display schedule for the "production symbol" and the display schedule for the "SP reach background" for each layer. Therefore, the “symbol block C” to which the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach variation” is associated may be executed based on the display schedule for the “SP reach background”. In this case, the process related to the background image functions to manage the schedule of the effect pattern.

  For example, for calling a process of turning on the availability information of the symbol block C at a predetermined timing in the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" described later. By attaching the process identification information, “pattern block C” and “pattern block D” can be executed based on the display schedule according to “SP reach background”. In this case, for "symbol block C" and "symbol block D", the availability information is kept in the off state when starting the symbol effect, and "symbol block A". The scenario data corresponding to “or“ the block for symbol B ”is not included in the scenario data, and is configured as another scenario data.

  Also, “layer 3” corresponds to the blocks (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) of scenario data related to “background image after start of SP reach effect start”. In this respect, “the background image after the SP reach effect is started” should not be displayed when the symbol effect is started, but should be started from the middle of the symbol effect. Therefore, in the scenario data of “layer 3”, a waiting time (waiting processing period) is set which functions so as not to execute the block “background image after the SP reach effect is started” until the corresponding timing comes There is. Thus, after passing a predetermined weight time (weight processing period) after the start of the symbol effect, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” are sequentially executed (analyzed), and accordingly Since the information can be read out for each frame, a background image of the SP reach effect appears on the effect display device 1600.

  That is, in this case, as the block, a first type block (blocks corresponding to the layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 403, etc.) read after passing a wait time (wait processing period) until a predetermined timing arrives. The second type block (blocks corresponding to layer 1, layer 2 and layers 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 403) to be read out without passing the wait time (wait processing period) is included. The second type block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as common data at all presentation timings, thus promoting reduction of processing load and memory capacity. In addition to being expected, it becomes possible to facilitate the effect design and the effect change.

  In this point, in SP reach production, after the display production of the same contents is started regardless of the big hit, the production contents for the big hit (for example, the production contents that the character wins etc.) and the for loss In most cases, it is configured to indicate the determination result of the big hit by branching to any of the rendering content of (for example, the rendering content in which the character loses). In this case, although the display effect of the same contents is executed regardless of the hit of the big hit until the middle stage of the SP reach production, they are different blocks (block for big hit, block for lost) If it is displayed as image data or image data, the processing load and memory capacity may be adversely affected.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, with regard to scenario data relating to SP reach effect, a block (SP reach background block) corresponding to image data that can be shared between a big hit and a lost time, and a big hit and It is divided into blocks (SP ending background blocks) corresponding to different image data at the time of losing, and these are sequentially executed. As a result, it is possible to execute the SP reach effect while suppressing the processing load and the memory capacity.

  By the way, in the scenario data relating to the SP reach effect, “SP reach background block” is read out after passing a predetermined wait time (wait processing period). Next, “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background” corresponding to the “SP reach background block” is read out. Although these processes are executed (analyzed) for each unit time, in “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background”, a section in which the same process identification information is acquired for each unit time (one frame) is The effect reception period (effective period) is generated not by time management by a timer or the like but by each frame management of liquid crystal rendering scheduler data.

For example, in the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 403, the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background" is executed separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present (analysis Process identification information "X1" is lined up every frame from the timing ts31 immediately after being done. Every time the process identification information "X1" is read out, the following "process X1" is read out and executed.
Process X1. A process in which an effect determination as to whether to generate an effect after operation corresponding to “block C after operation” is performed based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such process identification information (here, “X1”) is attached for each unit time is "Period period"), and in "process X1", the availability information of "block C after operation" associated with "layer 6" is turned on when effect determination is made. Operation (setting) is performed. As a result, the "post-operation block C" is read out for each unit time by the time corresponding to this, and "the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler associated with the" post-operation block C " In addition to the fact that data C is to be executed (analyzed) every unit time, “processing related to lamp light emission” associated with the “post-operation block C” and “processing related to movable body operation” By performing execution of “processing related to sound output” and the like, it is possible to generate post-operation effects corresponding to “post-operation block C”.

  In this way, even in the frame following the start of execution of each process associated with "block C for post operation", the "liquid crystal effect scheduler for the SP reach background" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" "Data" is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when an effect is received in the middle of a section (effect reception period) to which process identification information (here, “X1”) is attached for each unit time, “SP reach background for Processing identification information (here, “X1”) is read out from the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data”, and the “processing X1” corresponding to the processing identification information is executed. However, the “process X1” also includes a process of determining whether each process associated with the “post-operation block C” has been started to be executed. It is determined that the processing X1 is ended without performing any more processing based on the operation detection information by determining that the execution is started.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 403, although four pieces of the same process identification information (here, “X1”) are arranged from the timing ts31, they are read from the second process identification information (here, “X1”) The effect has been accepted within "Process X1", whereby "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data C" associated with "after-operation block C" in "layer 6" is executed (analyzed) The case is assumed. In this case, although the necessity for reading out the third and fourth process identification information (here, “X1”) filled in in the same figure is no longer lost, “the liquid crystal rendering scheduler for the SP reach background” While executing "data" every unit time, it is naturally read out. However, every time the data is read out in this manner, processing such as “finish processing X1 since the effect after operation has been executed” is executed in the “processing X1” corresponding to the processing identification information (here, “X1”) Thus, the process related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed).

  On the other hand, when the effect judgment is not made in the “process X1” (it is judged that the effect is not performed after the operation is performed), the use of the “block C after operation” associated with the “layer 6” The process X1 is ended with the availability information turned off. Then, until the section in which the same processing identification information (here, “X1”) is acquired is ended every unit time (one frame), “liquid crystal effect scheduler for SP reach background per unit time (one frame) The process identification information (here, “X1”) is read out from the “data”, and the above “process X1” corresponding to this is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, since the above section is ended by the fourth process identification information (here, “X1”), the fourth process identification information is read out according to this. When the effect determination is not made in the process X1, the effect after that is developed without the effect being performed after the operation according to the “block C for after operation”.

  According to such a configuration, even after the effect after operation is performed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), “for SP reach background The same process identification information (X1) for reading out the “process X1 that can generate an effect after operation” from the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data ”will be acquired. However, since it becomes possible to function substantially as an effect reception period (effective period) simply by analyzing such information, it is possible to facilitate simplification and commonality of effect design Become.

  Note that FIG. 403 merely shows such processing as a concept, and in practice, processing identification information is not acquired over only four frames. If it is made to function as an effect reception period, normally, it is often set as a section in which the same process identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the effect reception period occurring at the timing ts31, and the same applies to the effect reception period occurring at other timings. Also, as described above, such processing identification information may be attached to the block side instead of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data side, or the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data and the block may be provided as one data. Good.

Moreover, in the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” shown in FIG. 403, process identification information (“1” in this case) related to the operation effect is attached also at timing ts41. However, the process identification information of “1” does not read “the process in which the effect determination as to whether the effect is to be generated after the operation is performed” but the following “process 1” is read and executed. It has become.
Process 1. For the player who is in a state where a prophetic effect (such as an appearance effect display) indicating that "a production reception acceptance period (a production reception acceptance can be made by an operation can be made by an operation (effective period)) is about to occur soon A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to “Appearance EF & operation waiting block D” for performing operation waiting effects (the above-mentioned overhead image, gauge display, etc.) for prompting the operation

  According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare "appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal presentation scheduler data D)" separately from "SP reach background liquid crystal rendering scheduler data" With regard to the "appearing EF & operation waiting block D", although it is present, execution can be started from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts 41) defined by "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background" become. That is, in this case, execution of the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D” is started at any timing in the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background” or at a plurality of timings, or the “liquid crystal for SP reach background” Since “Execution EF & operation waiting block D” can be easily started from “Liquid crystal production scheduler data” in the fluctuation pattern different from the production scheduler data, the production design can be simplified and made common Can be suitably implemented.

  Here, when the "appearing EF & operation waiting block D" is executed (analyzed), the "appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D" corresponding to the "appearing EF & operation waiting block D" is read out . These processes are executed (analyzed) for each unit time, but in the “display EF & liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for operation waiting”, first, the presentation reception is not permitted, “the reception by the operation reception There is provided a section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a prophetic effect (such as an appearance effect display) indicating that the effect reception period (effective period) that can be made will soon occur is acquired.

  However, in the “display EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, an effect waiting period is occurring in the middle of the operation waiting effect operation prompting the player to operate (the above-mentioned overhead image or gauge A section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to the display etc. is acquired appears, and in this section, the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame) It has become.

That is, in "display EF & liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for operation waiting" executed (analyzed) from timing ts41, "Y3" every frame from timing ts42 separately from information corresponding to image data to be displayed at present The process identification information of is attached in order. Every time the process identification information of "Y3" is read out, the following "process Y3" is read out and executed.
Process Y3. A process in which an effect determination as to whether to generate an effect after operation corresponding to “block D for after operation” is performed based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such process identification information (here, “Y3”) is attached per unit time is “a performance reception period (effective period during which production reception can be performed by operation Function as ")". Moreover, in the "process Y3," when appearance determination is performed, "appear EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data D for operation waiting D)" on which the "process Y3" is read out It is made to operate (set) the availability information of "block D for post-operation" associated with the same "layer 6" as in the above.

  That is, in this case, when the “post-operation block D” is read, various processes including “post-operation liquid crystal rendering scheduler data D” associated with the “post-operation block D” are respectively executed. As a result, post-operation effects corresponding to the “post-operation block D” are generated. From this point onward, the newly read “after-operation block D (after-operation liquid crystal rendering scheduler data)” is in the process of being executed “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (for appearing EF & operation waiting The "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data D)" is replaced with the "layer 6" in an execution state.

  According to such a configuration, the appearance EF & the operation waiting block D (the appearance EF & the liquid crystal for the operation waiting are no longer necessary because the effect judgment is made only by reading the "block D for operation after operation". As it becomes possible to substantially invalidate the process identification information of “Y3” for reading out “process scheduler data D)” and further “process Y3” (to make the process of accepting the process not permitted) Thus, it becomes possible to preferably facilitate simplification and commonality of effect design, as it is not necessary to separately perform determination and processing for ending these. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the second process identification information (here, “Y3”) in “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” is read out. The effect is accepted in the processed "Process Y3", and the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data D for after operation" associated with the "block for after operation D" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analysis) The case is assumed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the section where the “ray portion” in “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” is erased by overwriting (substantially Corresponds to an invalidated section).

  That is, the process identification information of "Y3" can be added to the "liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" side similarly to the effect reception period generated from the timing ts31. However, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting (displayed EF & operation waiting block D) associated with the same layer as the “after operation block D (liquid crystal effect scheduler data D for operation after operation D)” It can be said that it is possible to make it possible to exhibit such an excellent effect by having it attached to the ") side.

However, in the periphery control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts42, as “process identification information for reading out the process related to the operation effect, Other than the process identification information of the above "Y3" included in the appearance EF & operation waiting block D) ",
-It is supposed that the process identification information of "Y2" contained in "the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" is prepared.

  That is, as described above, the "layer 6" is the same as "the post-operation block D (the post-operation liquid crystal presentation scheduler data)". When the process identification information of “Y3” is added to this, the “after operation block D (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for after operation)” is executed. It is useful in that it will be erased (nullified) by itself. However, “the appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearing EF & operation waiting block D)” is included in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)” 1 The processing is performed (analyzed) by operating the availability information in the on state based on the processing identification information of "." Therefore, when there is a case where the frame processing to which the processing identification information of “1” is attached is skipped when the processing load is high or the like, “the appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearing EF & operation Waiting block D) This itself is not executed, which may result in the absence of an effect reception period (effective period) based on the process identification information of “Y3”.

  Therefore, in the periphery control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as the process identification information for reading out the process related to the operation effect (the process in which the effect determination about whether to generate the effect after operation based on the operation detection information) is performed. The process identification information of "Y2" and the process identification information of "Y3" are prepared, and the process identification information of "Y2" is on the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" side The process identification information of "Y3" is attached to the side of "appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearing EF & operation waiting block D)". As described above, as the process identification information for reading the process relating to the operation effect, the predetermined wait time (wait process) until the availability information is set to the on state at the start of the fluctuation pattern and the timing for starting the effect comes. The wait time (wait process) is set by the availability information being turned on in the process executed based on the type 1 block and the type 1 block that is read out after the period By preparing both of the second block and the second block to be read out without passing through the period), the above-mentioned risk that the effect receiving period (the effective period) will not occur is reduced. Will be able to

  Here, in the “process Y3” executed based on the process identification information of “Y3”, when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the “after-operation block D” described above is operated to be in the on state The display effect (operation after operation) after the operation in the effect display device 1600 is performed. On the other hand, in "process Y2" executed based on the process identification information of "Y2", when the effect determination is made, "process related to lamp light emission", "process related to movable body operation", "related to sound output" Each process is started to be executed. Therefore, even if the process identification information of "Y3" is not read out, it is possible to realize the post-operation effect by lamp emission, movable body operation, and sound output by the process identification information of "Y2" It is done. The “process Y2” and the “process Y3” may be any ones that can generate effects after different operations.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403, although the same process identification information (here, “Y2”) is lined up from the timing ts42, it is read from the second process identification information (“Y2” here) It is assumed that the effect is accepted in the “process Y2” and that the effect after operation by the lamp emission, the movable body operation, and the sound output is executed. In this case, although the need for reading out the third process identification information (here, “Y2”) filled in in the same figure is no longer lost, “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background” Will be read out naturally during execution of each unit time. However, every time the data is read out in this manner, processing such as “finish processing Y2 since the effect after operation has been executed” is executed in the “processing Y2” corresponding to the processing identification information (here, “Y2”) Thus, the process related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
-The first special operation for which the effect reception based on the operation detection information is permitted is generated when a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state Receptionist production (demonstration reception period) ",
・ Regardless of the rendering state (rendering mode), even if the operation is not detected, the second special operation reception rendering (rendering acceptance period) that can generate the rendering after the operation
And the like can be executed as described above (see, for example, FIG. 178 and FIGS. 390 to 402).

  In the first special operation reception effect, it is possible to concentrate on the operation effect since the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence or in the non-output state. Will be expected. However, in exchange for this, it is feared that the rendering performance will be poor by the amount by which the specific type of rendering sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state where the acceptance of the effect is permitted by the operation-related display (precursor effect) before the operation performed upon the occurrence of the first special operation acceptance effect and the first special operation acceptance effect About the allowable operation related display (the above-mentioned bird's-eye view image, gauge display, etc.) performed when it is in (during the effective period), it is displayed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data). As a result, it becomes possible to realize various effects regarding display effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state where the acceptance of the effect is permitted by the operation related display before the permission (precursor effect) performed when the second special operation acceptance effect occurs and the second special operation acceptance effect The allowable operation related display (due to the bird's eye image or the gauge display described above) to be performed when (during the effective period) is also displayed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data). As a result, it becomes possible to realize various effects regarding display effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment.

More specifically, in the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 403, the rendering acceptance is permitted while the specific type of rendering sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode, And, even when the operation is not detected, it is possible to generate the special operation reception effect (the first special operation reception effect or the second special operation reception effect) that generates the effect after the operation, and when the timing ts51 comes, The process identification information "2" is read out to start the process relating to the special operation reception effect. However, the process identification information “2” does not read out “the process in which the effect determination as to whether the effect is to be generated after the operation is performed” but the following “process 2” is read and executed. .
Process 2. Availability of "Appearance EF block E" for performing a prophetic effect (such as an appearance effect display) indicating that "a production reception acceptance period (effective period) in which a production reception can be made by operation (the effective period) can occur soon" Process to operate (set) information on

  According to such a configuration, the operation-related pre-acceptance display (precursor effect) block dedicated for this (block E for appearance EF) separately from the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)” And although it is necessary to prepare liquid crystal rendering scheduler data (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for appearance EF) corresponding to the block, “liquid crystal rendering for SP reach background” is required for “display EF block E”. Execution can be started from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) defined by the scheduler data. That is, in this case, the “emergence EF block E” is started to be executed at any timing in the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background” or a plurality of timings, or the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler for the SP reach background” Since “execution EF block E” can be easily started from “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from “data”, facilitation and sharing of rendering design are preferably achieved. Will be able to

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, a plurality of modes different in the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation in which the big hit symbol appears) are separately prepared for the before-permission operation related display (predictive effect effect) and the during-operation operation related display. As it becomes possible to appropriately combine which combination to execute them, it is possible to make the variation as the effect colorful, and to be able to suppress the decrease in the game fun Become. Also, even when adopting in other variation patterns, although pre-permission operation related display (precursor effect) is a common aspect, effects such as executing in a permitted mode unique operation related display are realized. Things will also be possible.

  Here, when the “appearing EF block E” is executed (analyzed), the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for the appearing EF” corresponding to the “emergent EF block E” is read and executed (analyzed) Be done. When this "display EF for emergence EF data scheduler data E" is executed (analyzed), the effect (pre-permitted operation related display) by the predetermined effect display, from "the section where the effect reception is not permitted" from "the effect reception The image information (moving image or still image) to be executed in a form that crosses the "permitted interval" is acquired.

  However, for “appear EF block E” and “appearing EF liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E”, “perform processing determination to generate rendering after operation based on operation detection information” may be performed. Since the process identification information is not attached, the effect reception period does not occur based on the block and the scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, “3” is generated to generate the effect reception period at timing ts 52 in “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)”. The process identification information of is read out. The process identification information “3” does not correspond to “a process that can be determined to produce an effect after operation based on operation detection information”, and is data that associates “process 3” below. .
Process 3. "The operation waiting block E" for performing an operation waiting effect (the above-mentioned bird's-eye view image or gauge display, etc.) for prompting the player to perform an operation while the effect reception period is occurring Process to operate (set) to ON state

  According to such a configuration, separately from the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background)” and “appearing EF block E (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for emerging EF)”, Operation-periphery-related display (such as the bird's-eye view or gauge display described above) This dedicated block (operation waiting block E) and liquid crystal rendering scheduler data (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for operation waiting) corresponding to the block Although it is necessary to prepare, the “operation waiting block E” may be started from appropriate timing (here, timing ts 52) defined by “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background”. become able to. That is, in this case, the “operation waiting block E” is started to be executed at any timing in the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background” or a plurality of timings, or the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler for the SP reach background” Since “execution waiting block E” can be easily started from “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data” in the fluctuation pattern different from “data”, facilitation and sharing of rendering design are preferably achieved. Will be able to

  Here, also in the effect reception period occurring at timing ts52, the same processing identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is attached to each frame as in the effect reception period in which the effect reception is permitted at timings ts31, ts42. It may be configured as an effect section to be played. However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, this is realized by a method different from the effect reception period generated at the timings ts31 and ts42, and other effect reception periods are also configured by the method described below You may

  That is, for the effect reception period occurring at timing ts52, the effect reception is not permitted (off state) and the effect reception is permitted (on state) by the state operation of the operation state flag (off state, on state) And to create new When this method is adopted, effects are not based on the process identification information but on the basis of the operation detection information for each unit time (every one frame) in the "peripheral control unit steady process" shown in FIG. It is desirable to make a decision.

  For example, each time the “peripheral control unit steady process” is performed, the operation state flag is confirmed, and the operation detection information is operated on the condition that the operation state flag is in the on state (condition that it is in the effect reception period). Effect determination can be made on the basis of the after-operation effect. When the effect determination is made, the use availability information of the block corresponding to the effect after operation of the type according to the operation state flag being in the on state (here, “block for after operation E”) is operated in the on state ( Setting).

  That is, in this case, for the operation state flag, only the type of effect after the operation will be prepared, and it is determined which type the operation state flag in the on state is, and then the effect according to the operation The availability information of the corresponding block is operated (set) to the on state. The process of setting the operation state flag to the off state may be performed within the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the block corresponding to the effect after the operation to the on state, or the availability information is on. The process may be executed within a process called based on the process identification information attached to the block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) operated in the state.

  Regarding the processing procedure in the case where such a method is adopted, the processing identification information of the above "3" is read out at the timing ts52 and the above "Process 3" is executed. The block E (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for operation waiting) is read out and executed (analyzed).

The process of turning on the operation state flag may be performed within the above-mentioned "process 3", but in the example shown in FIG. 403, the above-mentioned "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler for operation waiting In the first frame (processing timing) when data E) is executed (analyzed), the processing identification information of “Z1” associated with the following “processing Z1” is read out.
Process Z1. Processing of turning on the operation state flag of the type corresponding to the “post-operation block E” among the operation state flags

  As a result, the operation state flag corresponding to “block for after operation E” is operated (set) to the on state at timing ts 52, and the determination based on the operation detection information in the “peripheral control unit steady process” described above By performing the process, the period in which the operation state flag is maintained in the on state can be functioned as the “effect reception period”. In addition, while the operation state flag is maintained in the on state, the allowed operation related display (described above) based on the execution (analysis) of the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” The bird's eye view image, gauge display, etc. will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the pre-permission operation related display (the appearing EF block E (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for the appearing EF) associated with the layer 7 and the permission associated with the layer 6 The middle operation related display (operation waiting block E (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for operation waiting) E) is performed such that the display periods thereof partially overlap each other.

  Here, the before-permission operation related display associated with the layer 7 is displayed in front of the allowed operation related display associated with the layer 6, and is displayed preferentially. It has become so. Therefore, the effect reception will be accepted from the time when at least a part of the allowable operation related display is difficult to be recognized by the allowable operation related display, and thereby any expectation degree as the allowable operation related display It is intended to provide such an effect that it is possible to receive an effect under the condition that it is difficult to visually recognize whether the aspect having the.

  In this respect, when an effect is received at timing ts53 which is a stage where such an effect receiving period has not ended yet, the same layer as “block for waiting for operation E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for waiting for operation)” A process of operating (setting) the availability information of the “post-operation block E” associated with 6 in the ON state is executed in the “peripheral control unit steady process” described above. As a result, each process (lamp, movable body, sound, etc.) including the “post-operation liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E” associated with the “post-operation block E” is executed. . At this time, in the layer 6, "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for after operation" associated with "block for after operation E" is associated with "block for waiting for operation E". Since the process is executed in place of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for the user, it is not necessary to perform a special process for terminating the "operation waiting block E" halfway. At this time, the process identification information of “Z3” described later included in the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” can also be erased (disabled) by itself. Become.

When the operation state flag is turned off, processing is performed to operate (set) the availability information of “block E after operation” in the “peripheral control unit steady processing” described above. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the first frame (when the above-described “after-operation block E (liquid-crystal presentation scheduler data E for after-operation) E” is executed (analyzed) is At the processing timing), the processing identification information of “Z2” is read out and the following “processing Z2” corresponding to this is executed to execute the processing based on “block for after operation E” after ending the effect reception period. I am trying to do it.
Process Z2. Processing for turning off the operation status flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E” among the operation status flags

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, in the state (displayed state) that the operation related display before permission (the appearing EF block E (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for appearing EF) is left in the screen. As described above, there may be a case where the effect is accepted. Therefore, in "process Z2", it is determined whether the appearance EF block E (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for appearance EF) is in the execution state, and when it is in the execution state, the process of ending this halfway is also performed It is desirable to However, after the "emergence EF block E (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for emergence EF)" is continued without being terminated halfway, the image display based on the "post-operation block E" is displayed for the emergence EF. The priority execution (displaying on the front side of the image display (layer) based on the block E for appearance EF) is performed in a range (for example, the entire screen) including at least all the range in which the image display based on Thus, the image display based on the appearing EF block E may be hidden.

  Further, in the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)”, when the process at timing ts 54 is executed (analyzed), the process corresponds to “process Z3” to end the effect reception period. The process identification information of “Z3” attached is read out. Here, “after operation block E (after operation) corresponding to the same layer 6 is the case where“ operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting) E ”is executed (analyzed) at timing ts 54. It means that the "operation waiting block E (the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data E for operation waiting)" is not overwritten by the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E)", that is, the timing ts54 comes. It means that it is in the situation where the production receptionist has not been made. However, the effect reception period occurring from the timing ts52 is the same as when the effect reception is performed even if the effect reception is not performed between the timing ts52 and the timing ts54. It functions as the above-mentioned "second special operation reception effect" for operating (setting) the availability information in the ON state ("automatic button function" described above).

Therefore, the following processing is executed in "processing Z3" executed based on the processing identification information of "Z3" read out at timing ts54 in "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for operation waiting)". It is supposed to be
Process Z3. Among the operation status flags, processing is performed to turn off the operation status flag of the type associated with the “post operation block E”, and the availability information of the “post operation block E” is turned on. Processing to operate (set) is performed

  According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period occurring from the timing ts 52, even if the effect is not received within that period, the same block as when the effect reception is made is read out, and the block Since the post-operation effect associated with is executed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the player has forgotten to perform the operation. Moreover, the effect is not executed after the operation reception period (timing ts51 to ts52) is finished, but the final frame (processing of timing ts52) of the process related to the effect reception period (timing ts51 to ts52) Since the processing for reading out the same block as when the reception was made is performed, it is possible to realize smooth progression of the rendering without causing a gap between when the operation is performed and when the operation is not performed. become able to.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, the display image (the bird's-eye view image or the gauge display) based on the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” is accepted for the effect by the operation by the player. A process to hide this based on the fact that the effect reception has been made, in either the case where it has been performed or the case where the effect reception has been made by enabling the automatic button function (here, “Operation Since the back block E ′ ′) is to be executed, it is possible to develop the effect in the same manner even if the player forgets to operate the game, thereby suppressing the decline in the game entertaining It will be expected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 403, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts 52, the above-mentioned “first operation is executed while the effect sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode at the time of the generation. It also functions as a special operation reception effect. Also in the "first special operation reception effect" shown in FIG. 403, at the time when the effect reception is made, the effect sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is not returned to the non-suppression mode, and the output in the suppression mode is continued. Then, within the period in which the post-operation effect is being executed, the effect sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is set to be returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode.

  Note that "effect sound of a specific type" means the sound of "BGM playback" (BGM playback for normal background or SP background), but here, especially, it corresponds to "SP reach background block" It corresponds to the sound (BGM reproduction sound for SP reach) which is output by execution of the “processing related to sound output” attached. As the suppression aspect and method, it is possible to employ | adopt suitably the aspect and method which were mentioned above.

  In the above configuration, when the operation reception effect (timing ts 52 to ts 54) is generated while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is suppressed (or even when the effect reception is not made, the effect reception is received In the case of generating an operation reception effect in which the same post production operation is performed as when the operation is performed), a pre-permission operation related display (appearing EF block E) and an allowed operation related display (operation waiting block) performed at the time of occurrence As for E), they are executed based on different blocks (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data). As a result, it becomes possible to realize various effects regarding display effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment.

  In addition, in such operation reception effects (first special operation reception effect, second special operation reception effect) at timings ts 52 to ts 54, images (operation before permission related display) displayed by blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) different from each other , Permitted operation related display) is displayed so that there is a period overlapping temporally. Therefore, it is possible to realize the effects (such as the above-mentioned visual difficulty etc.) entangled with the "pre-permission operation related display" and the "permissible operation related display", so that the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed. become.

  On the other hand, the operation reception effect that occurs when the "specific type of effect sound" is not suppressed, such as the operation reception effect that occurs at timing ts41 (or when the effect reception is not made, the post operation effect occurs In the operation reception effect not performed, the before operation related display and the during operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, unlike the operation reception effect at the timings ts 52 to ts 54 (the operation reception effect that suggests a hit of the big hit by the effect after operation), such operation reception effect occurs according to the result of the effect determination (prediction determination) As the non-permitted operation related display and the allowed operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data), the handling according to the determination result is facilitated. Can be more beneficial.

  However, even in the case where the non-permitted operation related display and the allowed operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) in this way, although it is on one layer, the pre-permitted operation related There is a time when both the display of the allowable operation related display and the display of the allowable operation related display are displayed overlapping each other in time (for example, one of the allowable operation related display is displayed. It is desirable to carry out those renditions (as it is considered as a mode in which the part is difficult to see).

  The process identification information read out based on the block of the operation related display before permission (the block for appearance EF (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data E for appearance EF)) for the block of operation related display for permission (operation waiting block E) The availability information may be turned on in the process according to the above.

  The operation reception effect for which the effect reception is permitted at timings ts 52 to ts 54 may be performed as at least one of the first special operation reception effect described above and the second special operation reception effect described above, for example, 178, FIG. 390 to FIG. 393, FIG. 395 to FIG. 398, FIG. 401, etc. are executed as any of the operation reception effects (operation reception effects under BGM suppression) described above with reference to It is also good. In this case, for the other operation reception effects among the operation reception effects shown in FIG. 403, for example, the operation reception effects described above with reference to FIG. 394, FIG. 400, FIG. It may be executed as any of the effects). In addition, each of the other examples of the operation reception effects described later may be appropriately adopted.

  For example, different blocks are used for the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at timing ts52 and the operation reception effect (appearing EF & operation waiting block D) generated at timing ts42, but those operations are used. In the reception effect, the same reception permission sound may be output when the effect reception is made (the first permission sound shown in FIGS. 390 to 402).

  In addition, in the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at the timing ts52, when the effect reception is made during the output of the reception allowable sound, the output state is terminated halfway, but the operation reception effect generated at the timing ts42 In the operation waiting block E), even if the effect is accepted during the output of the acceptance allowable sound, the output state is maintained (the first allowable sound shown in FIG. 390 to FIG. 402), etc. It is possible to adopt.

  By the way, as for scenario data relating to SP reach effects, blocks corresponding to image data that can be shared between big hit and lost time (SP reach background block) and blocks corresponding to different image data for big hit and lost time As described above, the (SP ending background block) is divided and executed sequentially. In this respect, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the timing ts 55 at which the “SP reach background block” is shifted to the “SP ending background block” is within a period in which the post-operation effect is executed. It is set to come by all means.

  That is, in the operation reception effect where the effect reception is permitted at the timing ts52, the effect reception (including the above-mentioned automatic button function) is performed at any timing within the effect reception period (the timing ts52 to ts54). Even in this case, the predetermined time from the timing ts 54 is set as a period in which the post-operation effect is necessarily executed (the time required to execute the post-operation effect). Then, during the period in which the post-operation effect is always executed, the display based on the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E corresponding to the “post-operation block E” (display effect after the operation in the effect display device 1600 (after operation The presentation is performed over the entire display area of the presentation display device 1600), and is given a higher priority than the display based on the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for the SP ending corresponding to the "SP ending background block". (Displayed in front of the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP end background block). Further, in this case, the display time of the image to be executed based on the post-operation block E is set as a time longer than the display time of the image to be executed based on the operation waiting block E, The minutes will function as a "period in which the effect is always executed after operation."

  Within the period when the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the “post-operation block E” is being executed, the “SP reach background block” is shifted to the “SP ending background block” By doing this, the display of the SP reach background block (block shared by the drop) and the display of the SP end background block (block used only in either of the drop) have a completely different atmosphere Even when the effect is designed to be realized, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment since the user does not feel discomfort.

  In addition, in the scenario data of “layer 4” and “layer 5”, a block that does not relate to any image but merely functions as time series data for calling processing at a certain timing (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) It corresponds to the That is, the block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) itself does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and does not participate in any image display. "Data calling block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler for data calling Data structure (empty time-series image information) that can be said to be "data" is adopted. Even if such a block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no image is displayed in the layers 4 and 5 associated with the block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data).

  There are two kinds of methods as such a data calling block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for data calling). First, in the scenario data corresponding to "layer 4", the timing ts21 for calling the processing at the start of symbol variation A wait time (wait processing period) is set which functions so as not to execute the data calling block B (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for data calling) until the arrival of Then, when the timing ts 21 arrives after such wait time (wait processing period), the “data call block B” is executed (analyzed), and as a result, “data call block B” corresponds to the “data call block B”. Liquid crystal rendering scheduler data B for data recall is executed (analyzed).

Here, the process identification information of “X2” is attached to each “unit time” to “data call block B” or “data call liquid crystal rendering scheduler data B” corresponding to the “data call block B”. Each time the process identification information of "X2" is read, the following "process X2" is executed.
Process X2. A process in which an effect determination as to whether to generate an effect after operation corresponding to “block B for after operation” is performed based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  In this "data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call)", a section to which the process identification information of "X2" is attached per unit time is "effect reception accepted that an operation can be accepted by an operation. It is made to function as “period (effective period)”, and in the above “process X2”, when effect determination is made, the availability information of “block B after operation” associated with “layer 6” is turned on The state is manipulated (set). As a result, “post-operation block B” is executed (analyzed), and “post-operation liquid crystal rendering scheduler data B” associated with the “post-operation block B” is executed for each unit time ( “Processing related to lamp emission”, “Processing related to movable body operation”, “Processing related to sound output”, etc. associated with the “block B for post-operation” as well as being analyzed) By starting execution, it is possible to generate post-operation effects corresponding to the “post-operation block C”.

  Incidentally, even in the frame following the start of execution of each process associated with the post-operation block B in this way, the above-mentioned “data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call)” is It is performed (analyzed). Therefore, when the effect is accepted in the middle of the section (effect receiving period) to which the process identification information (here, “X2”) is attached for each unit time, “block B for data calling is also performed in the next frame. Processing identification information (here, “X2”) is read out from “(liquid crystal rendering scheduler data B for data call)”, and the “processing X2” corresponding to the processing identification information is executed. However, the “process X2” also includes a process of determining whether each process associated with the “post-operation block B” has been started to be executed. Since it is determined that execution is started, the "process X2" is ended without performing any further processing based on the operation detection information, which is described in the above "process X1". As you did.

  On the other hand, when the effect judgment is not made in the “process X2” (it is judged that the effect is not to be executed after the operation is performed), the use of the “block B for after operation” associated with the “layer 6” The process X2 is ended with the availability information turned off. Then, until the section in which the same process identification information (here, “X2”) is acquired is completed for each unit time (one frame), “data calling block B (data call for each frame (one frame) The process identification information ("X2" in this case) is read out from the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data B) for ", and the" process X2 "corresponding to this is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, since the above section is ended by the sixth process identification information (here, “X2”), the sixth process identification information is read out according to this. When the effect determination is not made in the process X2, the effect after that is developed without performing the effect after the operation according to the “block B for after operation”.

  According to such a configuration, after executing the effect after operation (even after the effect determination is made in the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), The same process identification information (X2) for reading out the "process X2 that can generate an effect after operation" from (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call) will be acquired. However, since it becomes possible to function substantially as an effect reception period (effective period) simply by analyzing such information, it is possible to facilitate simplification and commonality of effect design Become.

  Here, the block corresponding to “layer 4” (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and is read from the process identification information of “X2” “process X2” Also does not read the "block for operation waiting". Therefore, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing ts21, the effect reception is permitted without the overhead image or the gauge display being performed, and such operation reception effect is described in the above-mentioned empty time-series image information Is realized by

  According to such a configuration, “data call block B (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data B for data call) can be shared even when another variation pattern is selected, By preparing scenario data with different set values of the wait time (wait processing period), it is possible to make it appear at another timing.

On the other hand, in scenario data corresponding to “layer 5”, data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) is executed without passing through a wait time (wait processing period), but the data A substantial weight function works in the calling block A (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A for data calling). That is, in the data calling block A (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A for data calling), neither image information nor process identification information is read out until the timing ts 11 comes, and “4” when the timing ts 11 comes. The process identification information of is read out. However, the process identification information “4” does not read “the process in which the effect determination as to whether the effect is to be generated after the operation is performed” but the “process 4” below is read and executed. It has become.
Process 4. For the player who is in a state where a prophetic effect (such as an appearance effect display) indicating that "a production reception acceptance period (a production reception acceptance can be made by an operation can be made by an operation (effective period)) is about to occur soon A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A” for performing operation waiting effects (such as the overhead image and gauge display described above) prompting the operation

  According to such a configuration, although it is necessary to prepare a data call block A (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A for data call) separately from the "emergence EF & operation waiting block A", the "emergence EF & operation About waiting block A, process identification information of "4" is attached also from a block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) different from "data calling block A (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A for data calling)". Since it becomes possible to call appropriately only by itself, facilitation and commonality of effect design can be suitably achieved.

  Here, when the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A” is executed (analyzed), the “appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” corresponding to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A” is read out . These processes are executed (analyzed) for each unit time, but in "emergence EF & liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A for operation waiting", first of all, the rendering acceptance is not permitted, and "the rendering by the operation is performed. A section is provided in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a prophetic effect (such as an appearance effect display) indicating that the effect reception period (effective period) where reception can be made will soon occur is provided.

  However, in “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A”, an effect waiting period is occurring in the middle of the condition, and an operation waiting effect (prompt image or the A section where image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to the gauge display etc. is acquired appears, and in this section, the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame) It has become.

That is, in “display EF & liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A for operation waiting” executed (analyzed) from timing ts 11, “Y 1 every frame from timing ts 12 separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present. "" Process identification information is attached in a line. Every time the process identification information of "Y1" is read, the following "process Y1" is read and executed.
Process Y1. A process in which an effect determination as to whether to generate an effect after operation corresponding to “block A after operation” is performed based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a section to which such processing identification information (here, “Y1”) is attached per unit time is “a production reception period (effective period during which production reception can be performed by operation Function as ")". Moreover, in the “process Y1,” when appearance determination is made, “appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for operation waiting) A based on which the“ processing Y1 ”is read out It is made to operate (set) the availability information of "block A after operation" associated with the same "layer 6" as in the above.

  That is, in this case, when the “post-operation block A” is read, various processes including “post-operation liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A” associated with the “post-operation block A” are respectively executed. As a result, post-operation effects corresponding to the “post-operation block A” are generated. From this point onward, the newly read “block for after operation A (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A for after operation) A” was in the process of being executed, and “block for appearing EF & waiting for operation A (emerging EF & waiting for operation The “layer 6” is put into an execution state in place of the “liquid crystal rendering scheduler data A)”.

  According to such a configuration, the appearance EF & the operation waiting block A (the appearance EF & the liquid crystal for the operation waiting are no longer necessary because the effect judgment is made only by reading the "block for operation A after operation". It becomes possible to substantially invalidate the process identification information of “Y1” for reading out “process scheduler data A)” and “process Y1” (to make the process of accepting the process unacceptable). Thus, it becomes possible to preferably facilitate simplification and commonality of effect design, as it is not necessary to separately perform determination and processing for ending these. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the second process identification information (here, “Y1”) in “appear EF & operation waiting block A (appear EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is read out. The effect is accepted in the “process Y1”, and the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” associated with the “post-operation block A” in the same “layer 6” is executed (analysis) The case is assumed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the section where the “ray portion” in “appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is erased by overwriting (substantially Corresponds to an invalidated section).

  In the “layer 4”, it is decided to set an effect section in which the process identification information is attached to each frame on the “data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call)” side. However, the effect section may be set in a block read out from the “data calling block” as in “layer 5”. Also, in "layer 4", as shown in "layer 5", this is realized by making the substantial weight function work in the data calling block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for data calling). It is also good.

  Further, in the “layer 5”, setting an effect section in which the process identification information is attached to each frame on the block side read out from the “data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call)”. did. However, the effect section may be set in the “data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call)” as in “layer 4”. Also in the “layer 5”, as shown in the “layer 4”, this is realized by setting a weight for causing the data calling block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for data calling) itself to stand by. It is also good.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403, when the process identification information of “1” or “4” is acquired, it suggests that “the effect reception period (effective period) in which the effect can be received by the operation (effective period)” will occur soon. To perform an indication effect (such as an appearance effect display) to be performed, and an operation waiting effect (such as the overhead image or the gauge display described above) for prompting the player to perform an operation while the effect reception period is occurring. The process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearing EF & operation waiting block" is performed. However, it is not always necessary to execute the prognostic effect (appearing effect display etc.), and it is in a state in which the effect reception period is occurring, and the operation waiting effect effect (the above-mentioned overhead image or gauge to urge the player to operate) A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “operation waiting block” for performing display etc.) may be executed. That is, in this case, as soon as the "operation waiting block" is read out, the process identification information associated with the "process that can be judged as effect" is acquired.

  Further, as described above, even in the effect reception period generated at the timings ts12, ts21, ts31 and ts42, as in the effect reception period generated at the timing ts51, the operation state flag may be set.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403, the process identification information of “Y2” and the process identification information of “Y3” are set to be read out at the same timing as each other, but are read out at different timings from each other. It may be set.

  Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the blocks and the corresponding liquid crystal rendering scheduler data are separately provided, but they may be configured as one data.

  In addition, with regard to liquid crystal rendering scheduler data (block) in which information corresponding to image data is acquired for each unit time (for each frame), all of the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data (block) at the first processing timing (frame). Information corresponding to moving image data over a period may be configured to be acquired. In this case, the information corresponding to the image data is acquired only at the first processing timing (frame), and thereafter, the information corresponding to the image data is analyzed although it is analyzed every unit time (every frame). It is not acquired, and only when the process identification information is attached, the process according to it is executed.

  For blocks (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) for which availability information is set to ON, execution (analysis) may be performed within the processing timing for which availability information is set to ON, or availability information may be ON. The processing may be performed (analyzed) at a processing timing after one of the processing timings set in.

  In addition, "appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" and "appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" Although different process identification information (Y1, Y3) is acquired, the same information may be acquired as "information corresponding to image data". Further, the length as a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) and the length as an effective period may be set to be the same. That is, in this case, the same bird's-eye view image and gauge display will be displayed over the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403, when a specific variation pattern is selected and background display effects (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) for specific reach are executed, a big hit (predetermined judgment result) The presentation section (SP reach background block) in which the display data is shared depending on whether or not is obtained and the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is not obtained or is not obtained It is made to be executed in a form divided into a presentation section (SP ending background block) in which different display data is used depending on the case. In such a configuration, when performing background display effect for a specific reach, display data is not used during the entire period depending on whether a predetermined determination result is obtained or not, but it is not Since the display data is shared until the section (timing ts 55) and the drop (decision result) is indicated using the different display data only in the remaining period, the processing load and memory capacity are expected to be reduced. Become.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the post-operation presentation (in the “layer 6” different from the “layer 3” where the background display effect for the specific reach is executed, so as to straddle (include) the timing ts 55) The post-operation block E) is executed. In particular, the post-operation effect (layer 6) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is given priority display (SP) over the background display effect (layer 3) for the specific reach. The “big hit (predetermined determination result) in layer 3” and the result obtained in layer 3 are obtained by displaying them on the front side of the image display based on the reach background block and the SP end background block). There is no change from the effect section in which the display data is shared in the non-display case to the effect section in which different display data is used when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained. (Or make it hard to see). As a result, "a presentation section in which display data is shared depending on whether a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained or not obtained" and "a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained And, even if there are cases where it is not possible to design and design the connection in a way with the effect section where different display data are used depending on the case where it is not obtained, it can be concealed (cheating) by the effect after operation This makes it possible to facilitate the effect design. In this sense, in the post-operation effect, it is desirable that the process of moving the movable body to the front of the display screen is also performed.

  In addition, with regard to post-operation effects (post-operation block E) executed so as to cross (including) timing ts 55, automatic operation is performed regardless of the effect mode even if operation detection is not performed within the effect reception period. And the effect section in which the display data is shared depending on whether the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained or not, and the big hit (predetermined It is possible to reliably conceal the connection with the effect section in which different display data are used depending on whether the determination result is obtained or not obtained.

  In order to obtain such an effect, the timing ts55 at which the switching of the presentation section occurs is after the timing ts54 (including the timing ts54) and the post-operation presentation (liquid crystal display) is not displayed. Period before the timing (when the finish time of the effect after operation is shifted by the operation timing, the effect after operation (liquid crystal display) is displayed when the effect is accepted at the earliest timing in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing ts52 It will be required to set within a period prior to the timing of non-display. In such a configuration, although processing related to display (block for SP reach background, block for SP end background) is executed in “layer 3”, a display section that does not appear as a liquid crystal display is provided. .

  However, “a presentation section in which display data is shared depending on whether a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained or not obtained” and “a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained About the composition which makes the background display effect (layer 3) non-displayed at the change timing with the effect section where different display data is used in the case where it is not obtained, it is made feasible when the big hit is won. If the jackpot is not won, it may not be executed. For example, even when the jackpot is not won, the effect (for losing) is executed after the operation, but the effect after the operation is not performed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, but a partial effect display, etc. It is possible to maintain the display state of the background display effect (layer 3) by performing the process as

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 403, as one of a plurality of blocks corresponding to a specific variation pattern, “block E for post operation read out based on the fact that presentation has been accepted within the period of timing ts52 to ts54. It is supposed to prepare ". With regard to the “post-operation block E”, the effect reception is automatically made even when the operation is not detected within the period of the timing ts 52 to ts 54 (automatically generating the same program as when the operation is detected) Since the generation is made by the execution, it is possible to provide an unconventional, dramatic effect.

  In this respect, although illustration is omitted, even if the first fluctuation pattern or the second fluctuation pattern different from the specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the “post operation block E” can be executed. It is also good.

  For example, in the first variation pattern, “SP reach background block” and “SP ending background block” of the rendering content according to the first variation pattern are sequentially executed, as shown in FIG. 403. Similar to the specific variation pattern, the process identification information of “2” and the process identification information of “3” are respectively read out based on “SP reach background block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data)”. That is, in the first variation pattern, although the effect contents of the SP reach background (“information on image data acquired from liquid crystal effect scheduler data”) are different, the same as the specific variation pattern, the pre-permission operation related display (precursor effect ) And the permitted operation related display (摸 image, gauge display, etc.) is performed, and the same “after operation” is also performed as the effect after operation when the effect reception is made in the operation reception effect generated in this way Block E "is to be executed.

  Moreover, in the first variation pattern, even if no operation is detected in the operation reception effect, the effect reception is automatically performed, and the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” The point that the switching of the background effect is not displayed by executing the effect after the operation so as to cross (including) the switching timing of “is similar to the specific variation pattern”.

  In addition, “a performance section in which display data is shared depending on whether a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained or not obtained” and “a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained About the composition which makes the background display effect (layer 3) non-displayed at the change timing with the effect section where different display data is used in the case where it is not obtained, the first change pattern is the same as the specific change pattern. The execution may be performed when the jackpot is won, and may not be performed when the jackpot is not won. According to such a configuration, although different background effects (SP reach effects) are executed for the specific fluctuation pattern and the first fluctuation pattern, different background effects are not displayed when the jackpot is won. The same rendition (post-operation rendition) will always appear in a form that allows the player to recognize that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, it is recognized that the jackpot is missed at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) different in content from the specific fluctuation pattern and the first fluctuation pattern appears. Will be able to That is, in this case, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the jackpot has been won by hiding the different “background effects” different in the effect contents depending on the fluctuation pattern and making one effect content appear On the other hand, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that it has been a big hit by making it possible to display "background effects" that differ in the content of the presentation depending on the fluctuation pattern when the game is dropped as a big hit. Be able to do something, and be able to sustain a sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, in the second variation pattern as well, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" of the rendering content according to the second variation pattern are sequentially executed. However, although “SP reach background block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data)” in the second variation pattern may have process identification information of “1”, the process identification information of “2” or “3” The process identification information is not included, and immediately before the transition to the “SP ending background block”, an operation reception effect capable of generating an effect after the operation across the transition timing is not generated. .

  In this respect, in the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” according to the second variation pattern, the process identification information of “5” (not shown) is acquired at a predetermined timing when the effect reception is not permitted "The process (process 5) of operating the availability information of the block E after operation to the on state is executed based on the fact that the process identification information of" 5 "is acquired. It is supposed to be.

  Then, in this way, the availability information of the “post-operation block E” is turned on, so that the “operation” is the same as the “specific variation pattern” or the “first variation pattern” in the second variation pattern The same post-operation effects based on the post-operation block E (post-operation liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) may span (including) the switching timing between the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" Will run on a separate layer.

  In such a configuration, when the second variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern is executed, the period during which the effect reception is permitted is basically a place where the effect design may be performed as the display related to the background effect. The "after-operation block E" is intentionally executed as a block different from the background image block at a predetermined timing within the effect section that is not generated, so the overhead image or the gauge display is not displayed, and the operation is performed. Although it is not in the situation where it has not been accepted, and even the presentation acceptance is not allowed, the presentation after the operation (block E for after the operation) when the presentation acceptance is made with other fluctuation pattern comes to appear suddenly , It will be expected to improve the game interest.

  According to such a configuration, even in the second variation pattern, “the effect section in which the display data is shared depending on whether the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained or not,” and “the big hit Even if there is a case where it is not possible to design and produce a connection in a presentation with “a section where different display data is used depending on whether (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not obtained, this may not be Will be able to hide (cheat), and make it possible to simplify the effect design.

  In addition, “a performance section in which display data is shared depending on whether a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained or not obtained” and “a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained About the composition which makes the background display effect (layer 3) non-displayed at the change timing with the effect section where different display data is used in the case where it is not obtained, a specific change pattern or the second change pattern As in the variation pattern 1, it may be made executable when the big hit is won, and may not be executed when the big hit is not won. According to such a configuration, although the background effect (SP reach effect) different from the specific fluctuation pattern or the first fluctuation pattern is executed, the different background effects are not displayed when the jackpot is won. The same rendition (post-operation rendition) will always appear in a form that allows the player to recognize that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, it is recognized that the jackpot is missed at the timing when the background effect (block for background of SP ending) different from the specific fluctuation pattern or the first fluctuation pattern appears Will be able to That is, in this case, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the jackpot has been won by hiding the different “background effects” different in the effect contents depending on the fluctuation pattern and making one effect content appear On the other hand, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that it has been a big hit by making it possible to display "background effects" that differ in the content of the presentation depending on the fluctuation pattern when the game is dropped as a big hit. Be able to do something, and be able to sustain a sense of expectation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example, the operation reception effect is performed based on various processing identification information attached to the SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach). The process identification information may not be attached to the SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach), and for example, the symbol block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for symbol) , And a call block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for calling) may be read out from another block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data).

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example, the lines in the process read based on the process identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc. In the effect determination to be performed, the effect determination based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is exemplified. However, the specific operation means is not limited to the operation button 410, and may be another operation means. In addition, a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, all or part of the above-described effect determination based on the process identification information such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", "Y3", etc. It is determined to which of the sword effect operation units 5000, etc.) the operation opportunity is given, and whether or not the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is given has been operated (production determination May be determined. According to such a configuration, it is determined which of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword effect operation unit 5000, etc.) the operation opportunity is to be given, and the operation means corresponding to the determination is determined. In order to realize the operation reception effect to which the operation opportunity is given only, even when the operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the processing identification information, the liquid crystal effect scheduler, the block, etc. are shared Will be able to Alternatively, operation opportunities may be given to both different operation means, and post-operation effects based on the process identification information may be executed based on the fact that one operation means operated earlier is accepted for effect presentation .

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example thereof, a plurality of pre-permission operation related displays in the appearance EF block E may be provided. For example, a normal appearance EF block E1 without movement (vibration, projection, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410 and a special appearance EF block E2 with movement (vibration, projection, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410 Can be provided, and execution (analysis) or the like can be exemplified according to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, the blocks can be saved by commonly using the appearing EF block E1 and the blocks following the appearing EF block E2 (both the operation waiting block E and the post operation block E or both). It will be.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example, processing identification information (“X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc.) attached to blocks or liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is used. By performing the process to be read out, it is possible to receive an operation for a specific operation means. However, in addition to this, regarding predetermined operation means different from the specific operation means, processing (for example, peripheral control unit steady processing) which has nothing to do with processing identification information attached to blocks or liquid crystal rendering scheduler data The operation may be accepted, and a change corresponding to the acceptance may be generated for the effect being executed. According to such a configuration, even when an error occurs in the progression of the effect by the block or the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, etc., the operation with respect to the predetermined operation means is properly accepted, so that the game entertaining can be realized. It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  In addition, the block itself is not made to appear by the player operation different from the processing of performing the effect determination based on each processing identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”. It may be possible to invalidate all of the rendering elements (display, sound, movable) associated with the target block. In such an arrangement, it is possible to save layers.

  In addition, the period of effect determination so that part of each process identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2” and “Y3” is converted to other process identification information by the player operation You may change the timing.

  The specific layer may be used from before the start of the target fluctuation, and may be used across multiple fluctuations.

  The block may be used not only during fluctuation but also during a hit game. In addition, it is possible to provide the block which straddles during the fluctuation game and during the hit game, and the block which straddles during the hit game and during the definite change, the processing identification information is also included in these blocks and the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data corresponding to the block. It may be attached.

  Further, the type of process identification information to be read out may be changed according to the game state, such as “Y3” is attached only to blocks (or liquid crystal effect scheduler data) executed during the definite change state.

  In addition, during error notification (error notification) or the like, it is desirable not to erase the block being executed or the process identification information for which an error image is displayed or an error sound is output. This makes it possible to restore the effect appropriately after the error is canceled.

  Further, among the inventions included in the example shown in FIG. 403 and other examples thereof, the effects described even if the technology such as the block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data) or the process identification information is not necessarily used are exhibited. What can be done may be realized by other methods.

[Determination based on operation detection information before the effective period occurs]
Generally, when the effect reception period (effective period) for which the effect reception is permitted is generated, the “overhead image” or the “gauge display (bar display)” described above is displayed according to the timing of the generation. In this regard, when playing for a long time or playing many times, it is possible to predict at which timing within the fluctuation pattern the “eyelid image” or the “gauge display” is displayed. In this case, some players can not wait to operate, and some players operate in anticipation of the timing that the “摸 image” or the “gauge display” will be displayed. At this time, if it is operated just before "the bird's-eye view image" or "gauge display" is displayed (immediately before the effect reception period occurs), "the bird's-eye view image" or "gauge display" is displayed It is misunderstood as if it was operated in the state (the state where the effect reception period is occurring), and as a result, the re-doing of the operation within the effect reception period (the effective period) is delayed and the effect is received The effect reception period (effective period) might end without being

  In this respect, in the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment (for example, the effect reception period generated at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 403), the effect reception period (the effective period from the predetermined timing in the mth frame after the start of fluctuation). As described above, even if the operation is not performed in the effect reception period, the effect is determined by the automatic button function to enable the generation of the effect after the operation when it is assumed that the) occurs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the effect can not be confirmed after the operation even if the reworking of the operation within the effect reception period (the effective period) is delayed in the above-mentioned situation become able to.

  However, in this case, even if it is possible to confirm the effects after the operation, it is not possible to remember the feeling that the effects after the operation are generated due to the operation by the player, so there is a concern that the amusement of the game may be lowered. Therefore, although it will be described later, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment allows the effect determination for generating the effect after the operation only within the effect reception period (effective period), but the detection of the operation state Even if it is done (immediately) in a period (immediately before) before the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, this is used as a target of the effect determination (determination material). According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period), the operation is performed within the effect reception period (effective period) After the operation, the effect will be executed considering that it is That is, in this case, even the player side feels that the effect is produced after the operation caused by the operation, so that the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, although this will also be described later, even if the operation state is detected within the period (immediately before) that the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, the operation state exceeds the specific time When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs while maintaining the above, it is not determined that the effect reception is to be made in the m-th frame. According to such a configuration, it is possible to fairly give the effect reception receiving condition to the player, and it is expected to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

  Also, although this will be described later, at least in a predetermined operation reception effect, when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs from a predetermined timing in the m th frame after the start of fluctuation, the m th frame starts In the display area of the effect display device 1600, "the overhead view image (or the gauge display suggesting the remaining time) over the operation means" is not displayed yet. That is, in this case, since the period in which the effect reception is permitted occurs from the time when the bird's-eye view image (or the gauge display) is not displayed yet, the player runs ahead, As a result, even if the operation is performed just before the bird's-eye view image (or gauge display) is displayed, the effect will be accepted, and it may not be possible to confirm the effect after the operation. It will be possible to suppress.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “effect reception period (effective period)” according to this embodiment will be described again. The “effective period” is a “period from the start of the process for generating the state in which the effect reception is permitted to the end of the process”. Here, the “process for generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted” is different in the details depending on the realization method of the “effect reception period (effective period)”, but for example, “the operation state flag (see FIG. 403) , "A process of setting a timer", "a process of calling a process for determining effect acceptance based on process identification information (see FIG. 403)", and the like. That is, "effect reception period (effective period)" corresponds to "effect section (period) from the time when processing for generating a state in which effect reception is permitted is executed to the lapse of a predetermined time period", This predetermined time is "time until the operation state flag is turned off" or "time until time-up of the timer", "the effect section where the same process identification information is attached in every frame is finished" It corresponds to "time until it is done". Then, within such a "effect reception period (effective period)", determination processing as to whether or not the effect reception is to be made is performed every predetermined time (for example, every one frame) based on the detection of the operation state. In the “determination process as to whether the effect reception is made” according to this embodiment, not only “detection of the operation state” performed within the “effect reception period (effective period)” but also It is characterized in that "detection of operation state" performed before "production acceptance period (effective period)" occurs is also targeted. As such a "effect reception period (effective period)", for example, it is generally created as a period of about 100 frames.

  FIGS. 404 to 409 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of processing performed before and after the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. In each example described below, a case is described where image display is performed using "block" and "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data" described with reference to FIG. 403, but the display method is not limited to this. There is no limitation on the implementation method as long as image control is performed in units of frames. In addition, although the process of generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted is also illustrated as the process of turning on the operation state flag, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process of setting a timer or Another method may be used, such as a process of calling the process for determining the effect reception determination based on the process identification information.

  FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when there is no operation detection before and after the effect reception period (effective period).

  Now, when a special operation reception effect (for example, the effect reception period generated at timing ts42 shown in FIG. 403, etc.) occurs in a specific change pattern, “effect” in the “m” th frame after the start of symbol change It is assumed that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state as a process of causing a state in which acceptance is permitted. Note that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state at the halfway “timing t1 (m)” in the “m” -th frame: “The operation state flag is operated (set to the on state) Processing: Even if this is itself executed based on the arrival of the “m” th frame, more strictly, the start timing of the “m” th frame in relation to other processing execution etc. It is impossible to execute all of the various types of processing including the above processing, and the processing is performed delayed with respect to the “frame start timing” while the various types of processing are performed in a predetermined order. Because it is always

  In this way, when the operation state flag is operated to the on state, a production section (production reception period) for which production reception is permitted is generated, and within the production reception period, based on the operation detection information every predetermined time. A “determination process as to whether to generate an effect after operation” is performed.

  The effect reception period according to this example is described as “special operation reception effect” shown in FIG. Therefore, as described above, the "peripheral control unit steady state operation is performed regardless of whether the effect reception period has occurred (the operation state flag is in the on state) as to" the determination processing as to whether the effect is generated after operation ". It is performed as "effect determination based on operation detection information" for every unit time (every 1 frame) within processing. And by continuing this even after the effect reception period, the "determination processing as to whether the effect is to be generated after operation" is performed based on the operation detection information at every predetermined time even within the effect reception period. (In the drawing, “timing t2 (m)”, “timing t2 (m + 1)”, “timing t2 (m + 2)”, “timing t2 (m + 3)” are respectively executed). That is, in this case, the “determination process as to whether the effect is to be generated after the operation” is executed even in a frame or the like before the “m” -th frame, but the operation state flag is in the OFF state Since it is as mentioned above that in a situation this is substantially nullified, it shall be omitted in the figure.

  Also, in this example, as the order of various processes performed triggered by the arrival of a new frame, “after the operation” is the order in which “the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag on” is performed. The order in which the “determination process as to whether to cause an effect is to be generated” is to be set later, whereby the effect is produced in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state. It is made to be able to receive (determination to generate an effect after operation). However, with regard to the order, the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state may not necessarily be performed first, and conversely, whether to generate the effect after the operation The order in which the “determination process” is executed may be set earlier. In this case, in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state, “determination processing as to whether the effect is generated after the operation” itself is not performed, which is an effect There will no longer be accepted (judgement of generating effect after operation).

  Conventionally, at timing t1 (m) in the "m" -th frame, "processing to generate a state in which effect reception is permitted (here," processing to operate the operation state flag on ") is executed. On the basis of the operation detection information acquired within the period after the processing is executed (here, the “period in which the operation state flag is in the on state”), “whether to generate the post-operation effect” The "determination process" was to be executed. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 404, at timing t2 (m), it is determined based on the operation detection information whether or not there is an operation within the period of timing t1 (m) to t2 (m). If it is determined that there has been an operation, the effect is executed after the operation, and if it is not determined that the operation has been performed (or the operation state has been detected, but the length of time maintained as the operation state is incorrect If it is determined that the effect is sufficient) the effect is not executed after the operation and it is operated whether or not the operation is performed within the period of the timing t2 (m) to t2 (m + 1) at the timing t2 (m + 1) in the next frame. The processing of determining again based on the detection information is performed for each frame.

  However, in this case, if a person who operates in anticipation of the timing that the effect reception period will occur can not be waited for to operate, the effect reception period is not received without effect reception As mentioned above, there is a concern that the (effective period) will end. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as described above, the "determination of effect for generating the effect after operation" is permitted only within the effect reception period (effective period), but the "operation "Detection of the state" Even if it is made within the period (immediately before) that the effect reception period (the effective period) occurs, it is used as the target of the operation detection judgment (determination material) I dare to use it.

  For example, in such an operation detection determination, in order to avoid an erroneous detection due to chattering or the like, it is usually used as a determination condition that "the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more". Is done. In this respect, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the operation detection information before the timing t1 (m) arrives is also used, and within the period from the timing t1 (m) to t2 (m) “Even if the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is not maintained in the operation state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more, the predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more before timing t1 (m) If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state for the period of time, it is determined that the operation has been made, and the effect is performed after the operation.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period), the operation is performed within the effect reception period (effective period) After the operation, the effect will be executed considering that it is That is, in this case, even the player side feels that the effect is produced after the operation caused by the operation, so that the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  It does not specifically limit about which one is used as a more concrete structure regarding such operation detection information. In this respect, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the operation state is maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more for each frame. For frames whose operation state has been maintained (continued) over time (for example, 3 ms), leave a history as "ON frame" and treat a frame without a history as "ON frame" as "OFF frame" I have to. The history may be left at the end of the frame or at the start of the next frame, or the history as "ON frame" may be left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). You may

  And although it mentions later, in the "determination processing about whether production after operation is generated" concerning this embodiment, three frames in which the history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" are left When operation detection information in a line-up form is obtained, the effect reception (determination to the effect that the operation has been made) is made, and the effect can be performed after the operation.

  Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether the frame is the “ON frame” or the “OFF frame” at the end of the frame and leaves the history, as shown in FIG. 404. In the “determination process as to whether or not to generate an effect after operation” performed at timing t2 (m) shown in, the “m” th frame including the timing t2 (m) is not used as a determination material. That is, in this case, the “m−3” th frame, the “m−2” th frame, and the “m−1” th frame are used as determination materials, and they are “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, “ON It is determined whether or not the history is left as "frame". On the other hand, when the history as "ON frame" is left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms), the "operation performed at timing t2 (m) shown in FIG. In the “determination process as to whether or not to generate a post effect”, the “m” th frame including the timing t2 (m) is also used as a determination material. That is, in this case, the "m-2" th frame, the "m-1" th frame, and the "m" th frame are used as determination materials, and they are "OFF frame", "ON frame", "ON frame" It will be determined whether or not the history is left.

  In this respect, the example shown in FIG. 404 shows a case where there is no operation detection before and after the effect reception period (effective period). Therefore, at the determination timing (in the figure, at timing t2 (m), t2 (m + 1), t2 (m + 2), t2 (m + 3)) in each frame after the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. It will be determined that the history as "OFF frame", "OFF frame" and "OFF frame" is left, and there will be no effect acceptance (determination that there has been an operation) and there will be an effect after operation Not run.

  By the way, with regard to the image displayed on the effect display device 1600, a delay of two frames (or one frame) occurs from the start of the processing related to the display in the peripheral control unit 1511 to the appearance of the image as an image. It has been known. This delay requires one frame for processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 (determining which one to use as an image according to various determinations, processing for creating a drawing list in response to the determination), Processing in the image control unit (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) that has received the processing result (information about an image such as a drawing list) on the side of the peripheral control unit 1511. This is because the drawing process on the) side also requires one frame.

  Therefore, conventionally, with regard to the processing relating to “effect during effective period (operation waiting block E)” by the peripheral control unit 1511, a frame two frames before the “m” th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs Starting from (the “m−2” -th frame), effects are made to appear on the effect display device 1600 during the effective period from the “m” -th frame.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “during effect period (block for operation waiting)” is still displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the m-th frame is started. One of the features is that there is no condition, and the period up to the “m−1” th frame immediately before the effect reception period (the effective period) occurs is "Period for EF block E") and the period from the "m" th frame where the effect reception period (effective period) occurs is The processing period for the operation waiting block E ′ ′) is set to “. In addition, as shown in FIG. 403, the processing period for the effect before the effective period (“Appearance EF block E” such as effect effect) is to be continued from the “m” th frame, and “effective” It may be made to overlap with a processing period for effect (“block for waiting for operation E such as overhead image or gauge display”) during the period.

  More specifically, in a predetermined period until the “m” -th frame arrives (or in a period after that), the drawing list is displayed based on the information corresponding to “effect period before effect (such as effect effect)”. It is prepared and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). On the other hand, the predetermined period after the arrival of the “m” th frame (the period during which the effect is performed during the effective period) is drawn based on the information corresponding to “effect during the effective period (such as overhead image or gauge display)” A list is created and sent to the image control unit (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 404, in the peripheral control unit 1511 up to the “m−1” th frame (or even after that) “effect before the effective period (block E for appearance EF)” The process relating to is performed, and the process relating to “during effect (operation waiting block E)” is executed after the “m” th frame, but in the effect display device 1600, the “m” th frame is "Effective pre-effective period effect (display based on block E for appearance EF)" is still in the process of execution, and "Effective period effect (display based on operation waiting block E)" is finally started in the "m + 2" th frame Will be That is, in this case, since "during effect, display based on operation waiting block E" is not yet displayed ("m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame) internally, the effect is accepted As a period in which the user's permission is allowed to occur, the player has been ahead, and as a result, the player has operated immediately before the "during effect (display based on the operation waiting block E)" is displayed. Even in such a case, the effect is accepted, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the effect can not be confirmed after the operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 404, the process relating to the “effective period before effect (display based on the block E for emergence EF)” and the process relating to “effect during the effective period (display based on the block E for emergence EF)” For convenience of explanation, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes each frame. However, in the case where these effects are displayed by moving image data, the peripheral control unit 1511 only needs to create a drawing list based on “information corresponding to the moving image” in the start frame of those processes. That is, in this case, in each of the subsequent frames, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) automatically performs processing for reading and displaying image data. In the unit 1511, this may not necessarily be performed for each frame.

  FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m + 1” th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the “determination process as to whether or not to generate effects after operation” according to this embodiment, three frames in which the history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are When the operation detection information in the side-by-side manner is obtained, the effect reception (determination to the effect that the operation has been made) is made so that the effect can be performed after the operation.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 405, it is assumed that the operation is started at a timing before the timing t2 (m + 1) in the “m + 1” th frame (a timing before the determination timing of effect acceptance). The "m + 1" th frame itself is also to leave a history as an "ON frame" at the end of the frame. However, at timing t2 (m + 1) in the frame, all three frames (“m−2” th frame, “m−1” th frame, “m” th frame) to be determined are Since this is the "OFF frame", there is no case where the effect reception (determination that there has been an operation) is made.

  Also at timing t2 (m + 2) in the "m + 2" th frame which is the next frame, three frames ("m-1" th frame, "m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame) to be determined are Since the history as "OFF frame", "OFF frame", and "ON frame" is left, respectively, there is no case where the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is made.

  Further, at timing t2 (m + 3) in the “m + 3” th frame which is the next frame, three frames (“m” th frame, “m + 1” th frame, “m + 2” th frame) to be determined are: The history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is left, respectively, and the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is made.

  According to such a configuration, since the "m + 1" th frame and the "m + 2" th frame are "ON frames", the operation state is longer than a predetermined time over two frames in the effect reception period (effective period) It can be determined that it is in the maintained state (eg, 3 ms). In addition, when the “m” th frame is “OFF frame”, it can be determined that the operation has been started within the effect reception period (effective period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation is properly performed within the period in which the effect reception is permitted, so in the example shown in FIG. 405, the effect reception period (the effective period is ) (In this case, the effect is accepted at timing t2 (m + 3)), and the effect after operation (here, “after-operation block E”) is executed (started) in accordance with this. In this example, the process of turning off the operation state flag is performed when the effect is received, but the operation state flag may be turned off at the end of the frame, etc. The point is, It is sufficient that the operation determination process is not performed (substantially) in the next frame by executing the process of turning off the operation state flag based on the effect reception being made.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when the effect is received at timing t2 (m + 3), “post-operation effect (operation) is performed from the frame (“ m + 3 ”th frame) for which the effect is received. It is decided to carry out the processing relating to the block E) for later use. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the post-operation effect (display according to the post-operation block E) is displayed from the “m + 5” -th frame (not shown) after two frames.

  FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m−2” th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 404.

  As described above, in the “determination process as to whether or not to generate effects after operation” according to this embodiment, three frames in which the history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are When the operation detection information in the side-by-side manner is obtained, the effect reception (determination to the effect that the operation has been made) is made so that the effect can be performed after the operation.

  Also, as described above, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the “determination of effect to generate effect after operation” is permitted only within the effect reception period (effective period), but “operation "Detection of the state" It is a target of the operation detection judgment even if it is made within a period (immediately before several frames) before the effect reception period (the effective period) occurs. It is intended to use as a material).

  In this respect, in the example illustrated in FIG. 406, it is assumed that the operation is started in the “m−2” th frame two frames before the “m” th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. ing. If it is conventional, the information acquired by operation at such a timing will not be used by the judgment concerning reception of an effect. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs at the timing t1 (m) in the “m” th frame, the timing t2 in the “m” th frame In (m), the operation detection information acquired in three frames before this (“m−3” th frame, “m−2” th frame, “m−1” th frame) is received to the effect reception It is supposed to be used in this judgment. And in this example, these frames ("m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, "m-1" th frame) are respectively "OFF frame", "ON frame", "ON frame" As a result, the history is left, and the effect reception (determination that there has been an operation) is made.

  According to such a configuration, the "m-3" th frame is the "OFF frame", and the "m-2" th frame and the "m-1" th frame are the "ON frame" It is possible to determine that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more (for example, 3 ms) over two frames immediately before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation is started in the "m-2" th frame two frames before the "m" th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 406, the effect is received within the effect receiving period (effective period) (here, timing t2 (m)), and the effect after operation according to this is performed (here, “block E for after operation”) ) Will be executed (started). When such a configuration is adopted, as shown in FIG. 406, the effect reception period (effective period) itself is ended in a very short time period in which even one frame is not continued, but the effect reception period (effective Even if the operation is started just before that in anticipation of the occurrence of the period), it is regarded that the operation was performed within the effect reception period (the effective period) and the post-operation effect is generated Will be able to That is, in this case, even the player side feels that the effect is produced after the operation caused by the operation, so that the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  However, if the effect receptionist in such an aspect is frequently given out, the meaning of the effect reception period (the effective period) itself may be lost, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, at timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame, the effect reception is received based on the operation detection information acquired before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period). When it is done, the post-operation effect is performed without the overhead image or the gauge display being displayed. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to give some doubts as to whether “post-operation effect” is generated due to the operation opportunity being given, the effect reception period (effective It can be expected to suppress starting the operation before the period) occurs.

  In addition, it is not specifically limited about the implementation method about "the effect | action is performed after operation, without a bird's-eye view image or a gauge display being displayed." In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the processing regarding “demonstration during the effective period (operation waiting block E)” is performed from the “m” -th frame without taking into consideration the delay for two frames Then, when the effect is received at timing t2 (m), the processing relating to “effect after operation (block E after operation)” is performed from the frame (“m” th frame) for which the effect is received. It is like that. Thus, as shown in FIG. 406, the process relating to “post-operation effect (block E after operation)” is performed without the process relating to “during effect (operation waiting block E)” being performed. Therefore, the post-operation effect is executed without the overhead image or the gauge display being displayed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 406, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” th frame is maintained across the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame. It was decided to explain what judgment is made under the assumption and the effect according to the judgment is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 407, the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” th frame is not maintained across the timing t 2 (m) in the “m” th frame, “m Even if the “m-2” th frame and the “m-1” th frame have left histories as “ON frames” even if the “-1” th frame is ended (each If the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same determination is made at the timing as described with reference to FIG. 406, and the same effect is performed according to the determination.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 406, the operation by the player is not detected at all after the occurrence of the effect reception period, and is performed only within the period before the occurrence of the effect reception period. However, the judgment conditions for receiving an effect at timing t2 (m) ("m-3" th frame, "m-2" .sup.th frame, "m-1" .sup.th frame are each "OFF frame" , As long as the history of "ON frame" and "ON frame" is satisfied, the effect is accepted even if the operation state is not maintained at the time of the timing t2 (m), and the operation is performed. Post production will be executed.

  About such composition, the same thing can be said, when operation is performed within the effect reception period (effective period). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 405, the operation state is not maintained at the time of timing t2 (m + 3), or is the timing before timing t2 (m + 3) in the “m + 3” th frame, or “m + 2” Even if the operation state is ended within the second frame, the determination conditions (“m” th frame, “m + 1” th frame, and “m + 2” th frame) relating to acceptance of effect at the timing t2 (m + 3) As long as the OFF frame, the ON frame, and the history of the ON frame are satisfied, the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), as shown in FIG. As shown, the effect is accepted, and the effect is executed after the operation.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it does not matter whether or not the operation state is maintained at the timing when the "determination according to effect reception" is performed, and the timing when the "determination according to effect reception" The operation to be operated when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more in a period earlier than that of the operation state (in this embodiment, the operation state is maintained for 2 minutes or more for each predetermined time or more) The effect is accepted on the assumption that the operation is properly performed on the means, and the effect is executed after the operation.

  Here, the operation detection information obtained before the effect reception period (effective period) occurs is determined in the “determination process according to effect reception” which is performed after the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. If it is made to simply use it as a judgment material, for example, even the precursor effect (appearance effect) is not executed, and the operation is performed from the situation where there is no sign that the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. By maintaining the state, there is a concern that a person will appear to be made to receive the effect. That is, if the operation in such a mode is accepted, the meaning of the effect reception period (the effective period) itself may be lost, and there is a concern that the game interest may be reduced.

  Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment detects not only "ON frame" but also "OFF frame" and "ON frame" respectively. To eliminate the above-mentioned concerns. In this embodiment, ON and OFF are determined on a frame-by-frame basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, “a rising or falling of a sensor signal is detected to determine a timing at which an operation is started. A technique may be adopted in which the effect is accepted on condition that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more from the timing. Even in such a case, it is determined how long before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period) the timing at which the sensor signal rises or falls occurs, or the time during which the operation state is maintained It is possible to solve the above-mentioned subject by judging how long it continues.

  FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started from the “m-3” -th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 408, in this example, the operation started in the “m-3” th frame three frames before the “m” th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs is the effect It is assumed that the "m + 2" th frame in the reception period (the effective period) is continuously performed. Also in this example, when the effect reception period occurs, first, "determination according to effect reception" is performed at timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame, and in this determination, since the effect reception period occurs The operation detection information acquired before (in this case, the operation detection information acquired in the “m−3” th frame, the “m−2” th frame, and the “m−1” th frame) is used as the judgment material It is supposed to be

  However, in this example, the “m−3” -th frame, “m−2” -th frame, and “m−1” -th frame respectively have the history as “ON frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” Since it is in the state where it is in, the effect reception (the determination that there is an operation) is not made as a result of the "determination concerning the effect reception" at the timing t2 (m). Not only that, but also in "determination related to effect reception" performed after the next frame such as timing t2 (m + 1), "ON frame", "ON frame", "ON" in the three frames to be the determination target Since only the history as a frame is left, as long as the operation state from the “m−3” th frame is maintained, the effect is produced as a result of “determination according to effect reception” performed in each frame There is no acceptance (determination that there has been an operation).

  That is, in this case, if the operation state maintained from the “m−3” th frame is temporarily ended and a frame in which the history as “OFF frame” is left is created, the operation is not performed again, and the effect reception is accepted. It is possible to prevent (a determination that there has been an operation) being made. As a result, even if the omen effect (appearing effect) is not executed, and the operation state is maintained even from the situation where there is no sign that the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, based on this, It can be suitably avoided that the effect is accepted.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 405 to 408, when the effect is accepted at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame, the effect is displayed after the operation without the overhead image or the gauge display being displayed. It will execute (see especially FIG. 406). However, in this case, it is not possible to feel the feeling that the effect has been generated after the operation due to the operation, and there is a concern about a decrease in the game interest, so the effect may be accepted at any timing within the effect reception period. However, the effect may be developed so that the bird's-eye view image or the gauge display is always displayed. In this case, the feature that "at the time when the m-th frame is started," during effect, the block waiting for operation (operation waiting block) "is not displayed yet in the display area of the effect display device 1600" It is not necessary to leave this, but it is more desirable to leave it.

  The method for realizing such a configuration is not particularly limited either, but, for example, the timing at which the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state in the frame is performed and the determination of receiving the effect It is possible to realize this by setting the timing at which the process is performed to be opposite to that in the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 409 shows the effect reception period (effective in the case where the timing at which the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state) is performed within the frame is performed after the determination process of receiving the effect. Period) is a flowchart showing an example thereof.

  As shown in FIG. 409, assuming that the “m” -th frame has arrived, first, at timing t12 (m) in the frame, a process is performed in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state. To be done. As a result, the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, but in the “m” -th frame, “determination processing according to effect reception” is performed after the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. There is nothing to do.

  That is, although illustration is omitted, in the “m” -th frame, the timing at which the “determination processing according to effect reception” is performed comes before the timing t12 (m). At this time, the "determination processing according to effect reception" itself is not performed, or the "determination processing according to effect reception" is performed, but in a state where the effect reception period (effective period) has not occurred. It is determined that the effect is not accepted as being present.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent presentation acceptance in a frame (here, the “m” -th frame) in which the presentation acceptance period (effective period) occurs. Therefore, in the frame (here, the “m” -th frame) in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, “during effective period (operation waiting block E) in peripheral control unit 1511 regardless of the status of the operation Processing is always performed, and a display image (representation during the effective period) corresponding to the processing can be made to appear on the effect display device 1600 at the “m + 2” th frame after two frames. become.

  That is, in this case, at least the “m−2” th frame, the “m−1” th frame, and the “m” th frame are “OFF frames” at the shortest after the effect reception period has occurred. , And the timing t11 (m + 1) in the “m + 1” th frame has arrived with the history as “ON frame” and “ON frame” remaining. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs a process related to “post-operation presentation (block for post-operation E)” based on the reception of the presentation. At this time, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) prepares a preparation buffer (dual buffering) based on the processing result regarding “demonstration during effective period” processed in the periphery control unit 1511 in the “m” th frame. The drawing process on the non-display state buffer side has already been performed (see “Processing in Image Control Means” in FIG. 409).

  Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 409, even when the effect reception is made at the shortest after the effect reception period occurs, in the effect display device 1600, “during effect during the effective period” in the “m + 2” th frame Is displayed, and the display related to “post effect after operation” is performed in the “m + 3” -th frame, so that the post operation effect can be started after the overhead image or the gauge display is displayed. become.

  However, the method for starting the effect after operation after displaying the overhead image or the gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. For example, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 404, also in the frame (here, the “m” th frame) in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, the effect reception can be made at timing t2 (m). Then, even when the effect is accepted at the timing t2 (m), at the timing t2 (m), the processing related to "during effect during the effective period (block E for operation waiting)" is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511. It may be performed.

  That is, in this case, one frame of the frame for performing processing relating to “effect after operation (block E for operation after operation)” in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the effect reception being made is one frame to the frame for which the effect reception is made Only to be delayed. Therefore, even when the effect is accepted at timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame, “during effect during the effective period (for operation waiting in the periphery control unit 1511 in the“ m ”th frame is received in the“ m ”th frame. The process relating to “block E)” is performed, and in the next frame “m + 1” th frame, the process relating to “effect after operation (block E after operation)” is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511 . Such "delay" is not limited to the frame (here, the "m" th frame) in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, and occurs even when the effect reception is made in any frame. . Even with such a method, even if the effect reception is made at the shortest after the effect reception period occurs, it is possible to start the effect after operation after displaying the bird's-eye view image or the gauge display. Become.

  As described above, according to the example shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 or another example thereof, in the “determination processing for effect reception” performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, rather than the m-th frame being started The “detection information from the operation detection means” acquired in the previous “m−1” th frame is also used as the determination material according to the effect reception. In particular, according to the example shown in FIG. 404 to FIG. 409 or another example thereof, “from the operation detecting means acquired in the“ m−1 ”th frame before the“ m th ”frame is started Both “detection information” and “detection information from the operation detection means” acquired in the “m−2” th frame are used as determination materials for receiving the effect. That is, in this case, even if the operation is performed immediately before (within an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the occurrence of the term of validity) in anticipation of the occurrence of the effect reception term (the term of validity) Since the effect is executed after the operation on the assumption that the operation has been performed within the reception period (the effective period), the player side also feels that the effect after the operation is generated due to the operation. I will remember.

  Moreover, even if the operation state is not maintained at the time when the “determination processing for effect reception” in the m th frame is performed, the “operation detection means acquired in the frame before the m th frame It is possible to receive an effect based on the "detection information from". That is, in this case, even in the case where the operation state is maintained only immediately before (within a very short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the occurrence of the expiration period) in anticipation of the occurrence of the effect reception period (the validity period). Since the effect is performed after the operation is regarded as having been performed within the effect reception period (the effective period), the effect on the operation is also caused by the operation on the player side. I will remember the feeling that occurred.

  However, as described above, instead of operating (setting) the frame to the “ON frame” at the end of the frame, the frame is set to the “ON frame” when a predetermined time (3 ms) in the frame has elapsed. It may be operated (set). In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detection means) acquired from the start of the m-th frame to the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period) is also a determination material according to the effect reception It will be used. That is, in this case, the operation (for example, maintenance of the operation state in 3 ms or more) is performed on the “m−1” th frame and the “m” th frame, and the operation is performed on the “m−2” th frame. The effect is accepted when it is determined that the operation is not being performed (for example, the operation state is less than 3 ms). According to such a configuration, since the time until the operation by the player is used as the determination material is shortened, it is possible to provide the post-operation presentation with high immediate responsiveness.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 404 to 408 or another example thereof, when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, the overhead image or the gauge display is not displayed yet in the display area. ing. Then, when the effect is accepted in the m-th frame, the button image and the gauge display are not displayed (created), and the effect is performed after the operation. That is, in this case, even in the case where the operation state is maintained only immediately before (within a very short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the occurrence of the expiration period) in anticipation of the occurrence of the effect reception period (the validity period). Although this is regarded as having been operated within the effect reception period (the effective period) and the post-operation effect is executed, “when the post-operation effect is generated in such a mode This makes it possible to impart an effect such as a button image or a gauge display not being displayed, and to prompt appropriate operation within the effect reception period (effective period). For example, when the button image or the gauge display is to be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, it is not possible to visually recognize which of the modes is displayed, which is suggested by the mode. There is a demerit such as the inability to grasp the degree of expectation.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 or another example thereof, when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a long time, the effect reception is not performed, It becomes possible to urge to operate in a proper manner for the effect reception period.

  However, on the other hand, when the effect reception period (the effective period) occurs while the operation state is not maintained for a long time but for a time shorter than the specific time, the effect is received, so the effect is received Even if the operation is performed just before the period (effective period) in anticipation of the occurrence of the period (effective period), this is regarded as the operation being performed within the effect reception period (effective period), and the post-operation effect Because the player is to be executed, the player also feels that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation.

  In addition, it is not only sufficient to maintain the operation state in a time shorter than a specific time, but it is also required that the operation state be maintained for a time longer than a predetermined time in order to receive the effect. As a result, false detection due to chattering or the like can be suitably avoided.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 409 or another example thereof, in the processing within the “m-th” frame in which the effect reception period starts, even if any operation detection information is obtained, the processing related to post-operation effects ( At least with regard to the display processing in the effect display device 1600 among the display processing in the effect display device 1600, the processing regarding lamp light emission, the processing regarding sound output, and the processing regarding movable object operation The processing when the processing for reading out in the peripheral control unit 1511 is not performed and the effect is not received (processing for reading out information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) is performed. I decided to carry it out. According to such a configuration, even if any operation information is obtained in the m-th frame in which the effect reception period starts, in the m-th frame, the process when the effect reception is not performed (effect At least a part (display processing in the effect display device 1600) of the display processing in the display device 1600, the processing related to lamp light emission, the processing related to sound output, and the processing related to the movable body operation is necessarily performed. That is, in this case, regarding the display on the effect display device 1600, the process according to the effect reception being made (the process for reading out the information corresponding to the image data of the effect after operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is delayed. Prior to that, the processing when the effect is not accepted (processing to read out the information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) is always performed. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the "post-operation effect" is an effect started due to the operation by the player.

  In addition, although it mentioned above as another example of the example shown in FIG. 409, the effect judgment can be made based on the operation detection information also in the "m-th" frame in which the effect reception period starts, and then the effect In the frame in which the determination is made, “the process of reading out the information corresponding to the image data of the effect after operation in the peripheral control unit 1511” is not executed, and the information corresponding to the image data of the effect after operation is The processing to be read out in the peripheral control unit 1511 may be executed. That is, in this case, among the processing related to the effect after operation (the display processing in the effect display device 1600, the processing related to lamp light emission, the processing related to sound output, and the processing related to movable body movement) In the frame where the frame is played, processing (processing for reading out information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) when the effect is not received is executed. However, in this case, for example, “processing related to lamp emission” or “sound output” in processing related to effects after operation (display processing in processing effect display device 1600, processing related to lamp light emission, processing related to sound output, processing related to movable body operation) With regard to the process, a process of reading "information on light emission mode after operation" or "information on sound output after operation" may be performed in the frame in which the effect determination is made. That is, in this case, the lamp and the sound are started to be output in the mode after the operation based on the read information in the frame in which the effect determination is made or in the next frame.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 403, in the case of adopting a method of displaying an effect image by a block, when an effect by operation is received, a “block for after operation” for performing effect after operation. In addition, “Annihilated EF block (Liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for annihilation EF)” for displaying an annihilation effect image until the operation promoting image such as a bird's-eye view image or gauge display is hidden until then is displayed It may be performed. According to such "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for disappearing EF)", for example, an image in which a bird's-eye view image or a gauge display fades out in response to receiving a rendering effect (image which is gradually hidden) Will be able to be displayed. In addition, such “disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearing EF)” may be executed when the effect reception period ends without performing effects after operation. The “disappearing EF block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for erasing EF)” is also added to a background block (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for background), a block for operation waiting (liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for operation waiting), etc. The processing may be configured to be executed by operating the availability information in the ON state in the processing read based on the processing identification information.

  In addition, about "the process which generates the state in which the effect reception is permitted (the process of operating the operation state flag to the on state (setting))" described in FIG. 404 to FIG. It may be executed based on (elapsed time) or the like, and may not necessarily be triggered by a frame.

  In addition, the "overhead image" and the "gauge display" may be displayed as effects before the effective period (display based on the appearing EF block E). However, with regard to the display mode when presentation prior to the effective period (display based on the block E for appearance EF) is being performed, it may be displayed semi-transparently or may be displayed squeezed by other effect display. It is required to display the "overhead image" or the "gauge display" in a mode different from that when the "during effect (display based on the operation waiting block E)" is being performed, for example, during the effective period. At this time, in the effect before the effective period (display based on the block E for appearance EF), one of the “over view image” and the “gauge display” may be displayed, and the effect may be developed without one being displayed. .

  In each of the effects described above, the "overlook image" may be any image for prompting the player to perform an operation, for example, an operation means that is necessarily an operation target, such as an arrow image moving up and down to point downward. It does not have to be displayed as an image in which the image of.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention as described below. Improvements and design changes are possible.

  For example, there may be a case where a display such as "during setting of an auto button" may be performed in each of the above-described presentation examples related to the automatic rendering function, but the display may not necessarily be performed. In particular, when not being pachinko machine 1 which is set to automatic production mode, when it is realized as pachinko machine 1 which is always in the state where automatic production function can be activated and processing itself such as "setting to production state" is not installed. It is desirable that the display such as "during setting of the auto button" is not performed. In the pachinko machine 1 in which the processing itself such as “setting to effect state” is not installed, the effective period during which the automatic effect function is exhibited and the automatic effect function according to the type of the operation reception effect for which the operation by the player is permitted. An effective period that can not be played may be generated.

  In addition, when the automatic effect function is adopted in each example of effect described above, the timing at which the operation acceptance is automatically generated (automatically accepted) within the operation valid period is set to any timing within the operation valid period. It may be In order to suitably give an operation opportunity to the player, the operation is performed when the operation is not detected until a predetermined timing that arrives after a half or more of the operation valid period has elapsed. Preferably, the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation effect is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, when the operation is not detected until the timing when the remaining time in the operation effective period becomes one frame, the operation acceptance is automatically generated (automatic acceptance), and the post operation production is performed based on the automatically generated operation acceptance. It is most desirable to be started. In addition, in each of the above-described presentation examples relating to the automatic rendering function, in the case where the bar display is not hidden and maintained even after the expiration period ends, the operation to be operated according to the timing when the expiration period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the aspect of the means (for example, vibration, turning off the LED, etc.). As a result, even when the bar display is not hidden but is continued to be displayed, it is expected that the player is prevented from making a false recognition such as "Was the validity period continuing?" Become so.

  In each of the effect examples described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 303 and the effect examples described with reference to FIG. 387, the bird's-eye view image (or bar display) is not hidden but is maintained after the operation. The time from when the operation is detected to when the overhead image (or bar display) is not displayed (the period from timing tf2 to tf4, the period from timing tg3 to tg5, There may be at least several frames (e.g., two frames) of time for the periods th3 to th4 and the like. Alternatively, there may be only one frame of time. Even if there is such a time, the period in which the bird's-eye view image (or bar display) is displayed and the period after the presentation after the operation starts overlap, and some players may recognize it. In some cases.

  In the rendering example according to the above-mentioned “improvement of rendering performance using the automatic rendering function (see FIG. 300)”, the automatic rendering function is not activated in a state where the hold display on the rendering display device 1600 is not displayed. The automatic reception effect and the automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated may be respectively generated. According to such a configuration, the reception effect can be generated while it is difficult to grasp whether the number of holdings is large or small, that is, it is difficult to activate the automatic performance function. Become. Furthermore, for example, when a non-automatic reception effect is generated in the non-display state of the hold display, the subsequent symbol variation stops more than when the non-automatic reception effect is generated in the state of the hold display. If the rate at which the automatic reception effect is generated is further increased while it is being played, the hold display is not displayed and it is difficult to grasp the possibility of the automatic effect function being activated. You will be able to add fun.

  The discrete component is an electronic component in which only a single functional device (a device having one electrical function (such as a resistive device)) is sealed. For example, two or three devices having a specific function are used. It is a concept including parts that are enclosed in one package.

  Also, in the explanation example of "help image for comprehension of presentation", a ruler is illustrated as "the reference image in which the length unit in the horizontal direction is shown", but an image other than this is used May be The point is that as long as the player operates the game, any image may be displayed as long as the display image appears without being influenced by the special effect. For example, it is not an image intended to promote understanding of the effect, but other functions. A display image intended to be played (for example, an image suggesting the degree of expectation, an image suggesting the current rendering state, an image suggesting the state relating to the rendering setting, etc.) is drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction It may be displayed as an image. Note that these images do not necessarily have to be depicted as one, and may be depicted as horizontally extending as a whole by arranging a plurality of images side by side.

  Moreover, in the explanation example of "preventing mischief for multiple operation means", mischief acts are very different from cheating acts such as magnet Goto, and it is not possible to deal with too severe an action on the hall side. It may also lead to profits. Therefore, the image appearing based on the detection of the operation by the player (including the image appearing in the process of causing the specific moving image to appear) is realized as having nothing to do with mischief prevention. It is also good. The point is that when the player's operation is performed in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure) on a plurality of operation means, "in the effect display device 1600, the game effect according to the big hit determination is executed Display (play back a specific moving image that can not appear in the current state (a moving image with contents that have nothing to do with prevention of mischief (for example, transition to a state in which a predetermined movie is made to flow)) In the state, "even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value applied to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed," Even if there is an operation on the button, the change of the brightness setting value for the brightness of the effect lamp can not be accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. As long as it performs control to generate me. In this case, the player can also generate the function restriction period in which the above-mentioned specific moving image is reproduced by his / her own intention by operating the plurality of operation means in a predetermined pattern (procedure) It is.

  Moreover, in the explanation example of "prevention of mischief for a plurality of operation means", in the state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, it may be controlled as the partial limited period.

  In addition, for the explanation example of "preventing noise due to adjustment confirmation sound at the time of opening a store", it is important to control to the normal state that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after power on. It is a gaming machine that is controlled to a normal state after a restriction state in which a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not allowed to be output, and the restriction state is terminated early when the game is started in the restriction state. And the length of time for which the limited state is maintained may be set appropriately (set to several seconds to several hours). Good. If the length of time to be maintained in the restricted state is set too short, the above-mentioned effects in the game period immediately after the store opening will not be achieved, but the noise when the hall side sets the volume immediately after turning on the power It is possible to suppress this.

  Moreover, in the explanation example of "control concerning the sound volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the effect importance", it is in advantageous conditions by the time of being in the time of the change of the first special symbol and in the time of the change of the second special symbol. Although the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the second special symbol on the side that is made playable, the change of the first special symbol on the side that can be played under adverse conditions is not The case where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is illustrated. However, it is also possible to adopt the technology to a gaming machine in which the second special symbol is not loaded, for example, preparing a specific symbol in which a lottery is performed under a condition that is more disadvantageous than the first special symbol. And during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side that can be played on advantageous conditions, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, but the side that is considered to be playable under adverse conditions The sound volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be configured to be output during the fluctuation of the specific symbol of.

  In addition, in the explanation example of "Period for which operation acceptance is permitted (effective period) itself's effectivity", acceptance permission sound accompanying the occurrence of special operation acceptance effect and the occurrence of first and second operation acceptance effect The effect sound may be different from the acceptance allowable sound. Further, in FIG. 388, although the acceptance acceptable sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11), for example, it is allocated to the channel from the timing trA as “one sound data” straddling the timing tr1 (tr11). It may be made to output.

  That is, although the embodiment shows the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal symbol indicator 1403 1st special symbol indicator 1404 1st special reserve number indicator 1405 2nd special symbol indicator 1406 2nd special reserve Number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Special winning opening

Claims (1)

Symbol variation means for performing symbol variation based on the result of determination;
When a predetermined mode appears in the symbol variation, a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to the player,
Movable ornaments that can be staged,
Rendering pattern execution means for executing a rendering pattern according to the result of the determination within a period in which the symbol variation is performed;
And a restoration execution means capable of performing a restoration operation on a movable decoration not in the normal state when a restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation has arrived.
The restoration operation is common regardless of the setting value of the gaming machine manager regarding the provision probability of the benefit,
A plurality of the movable decorative bodies are provided, and each is combined to form a single decoration,
While the movable decorative body is performing the restoration operation, the game can be progressed,
When the movable decorative body performs rendering operation, the possibility of giving a privilege is increased compared to the case where the movable decorative body does not perform rendering operation,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the movable effect is not only executed according to the symbol variation but also performed at a predetermined time not conforming to the symbol variation.